Professional Documents
Culture Documents
RD Sharma
RD Sharma
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 1.1
2. If a and b are two odd positive integers such that a > b, then prove that one of the two
𝑎+𝑏 𝑎−𝑏
numbers and is odd and the other is even.
2 2
Sol:
Let a = 2q + 3 and b = 2q + 1 be two positive odd integers such that a > b
𝑎+𝑏 2𝑞+3+2𝑞+1 4𝑞+4
Now, = = = 2𝑞 + 2 = 𝑎𝑛 𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑛 𝑛𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟
2 2 2
𝑎−𝑏 (2𝑞+3)−(2𝑞+1) 2𝑞+3−2𝑞−1 2
and = = = 2 = 1 = 𝑎𝑛 𝑜𝑑𝑑 𝑛𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟
2 2 2
𝑎+𝑏 𝑎−𝑏
Hence one of the two numbers 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑖𝑠 𝑜𝑑𝑑 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑜𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟 𝑖𝑠 𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑛 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑎𝑛𝑦
2 2
𝑡𝑤𝑜 𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑜𝑑𝑑 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
3. Show that the square of an odd positive integer is of the form 8q + 1, for some integer q.
Sol:
By Euclid’s division algorithm
a = bq + r, where 0 ≤ r ≤ b
Put b = 4
a = 4q + r, where 0 ≤ r ≤ 4
If r = 0, then a = 4q even
If r = 1, then a = 4q + 1 odd
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
If r = 2, then a = 4q + 2 even
If r = 3, then a = 4q + 3 odd
Now, (4𝑞 + 1)2 = (4𝑞)2 + 2(4𝑞)(1) + (1)2
= 16𝑞 2 + 8𝑞 + 1
= 8(2𝑞 2 + 𝑞) + 1
= 8m + 1 where m is some integer
Hence the square of an odd integer is of the form 8q + 1, for some integer q
4. Show that any positive odd integer is of the form 6q + 1 or, 6q + 3 or, 6q + 5, where q is
some integer.
Sol:
Let a be any odd positive integer we need to prove that a is of the form 6q + 1, or 6q +3, 6q
+ 5, where q is some integer
Since a is an integer consider b = 6 another integer applying Euclid’s division lemma we
get
a = 6q + r for some integer q ≥ 0, and r = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 since 0 ≤ r < 6.
Therefore, a = 6q or 6q + 1 or 6q + 2 or 6q + 3 or 6q + 4 or 6q + 5
However since a is odd so a cannot take the values 6q, 6q + 2 and 6q + 4
(since all these are divisible by 2)
Also, 6q + 1 = 2 × 3q + 1 = 2k 1 + 1, where k1 is a positive integer
6q + 3 = (6q + 2) + 1 = 2 (3q + 1) + 1 = 2k2 + 1, where k2 is an integer
6q + 5 = (6q + 4) + 1 = 2(3q + 2) + 1 = 2k3 + 1, where k3 is an integer
Clearly, 6q +1, 6q +3, 6q + 5 are of the form 2k + 1, where k is an integer
Therefore, 6q + 1, 6q + 3, 6q + 5 are odd numbers.
Therefore, any odd integer can be expressed is of the form
6q + 1, or 6q + 3, 6q + 5 where q is some integer
Concept insight: In order to solve such problems Euclid’s division lemma is applied to two
integers a and b the integer b must be taken in accordance with what is to be proved, for
example here the integer b was taken 6 because a must be of the form 6q + 1, 6q +3, 6q + 5
Basic definition of even (divisible by 2) and odd numbers (not divisible by 2) and the fact
that addiction and multiplication of integers is always an integer are applicable here.
5. Prove that the square of any positive integer is of the form 3m or, 3m + 1 but not of the
form 3m +2.
Sol:
By Euclid’s division algorithm
a = bq + r, where 0 ≤ r ≤ b
Put b = 3
a = 3q + r, where 0 ≤ r ≤ 3
If r = 0, then a = 3q
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
If r = 1, then a = 3q + 1
If r = 2, then a = 3q + 2
Now, (3𝑞)2 = 9𝑞 2
= 3 × 3𝑞 2
= 3𝑚, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑚 𝑖𝑠 𝑠𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
(3𝑞 + 1)2 = (3𝑞)2 + 2(3𝑞)(1) + (1)2
= 9𝑞 2 + 6𝑞 + 1
= 3(3𝑞 2 + 2𝑞) + 1
= 3𝑚 + 1, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑚 𝑖𝑠 𝑠𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
(3𝑞 + 2)2 = (3𝑞)2 + 2(3𝑞)(2) + (2)2
= 9𝑞 2 + 12𝑞 + 4
= 9𝑞 2 + 12𝑞 + 4
= 3(3𝑞 2 + 4𝑞 + 1) + 1
= 3𝑚 + 1, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑚 𝑖𝑠 𝑠𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
Hence the square of any positive integer is of the form 3m, or 3m +1
But not of the form 3m + 2
6. Prove that the square of any positive integer is of the form 4q or 4q + 1 for some integer q.
Sol:
By Euclid’s division Algorithm
a = bm + r, where 0 ≤ r ≤ b
Put b = 4
a = 4m + r, where 0 ≤ r ≤ 4
If r = 0, then a = 4m
If r = 1, then a = 4m + 1
If r = 2, then a = 4m + 2
If r = 3, then a = 4m + 3
Now, (4𝑚)2 = 16𝑚2
= 4 × 4m2
= 4q where q is some integer
(4𝑚 + 1)2 = (4𝑚)2 + 2(4𝑚)(1) + (1)2
= 16𝑚2 + 8𝑚 + 1
= 4(4𝑚2 + 2𝑚) + 1
= 4𝑞 + 1 where q is some integer
(4𝑚 + 2)2 = (4𝑚)2 + 2(4𝑚)(2)+(2)2
= 16𝑚2 + 24𝑚 + 9
= 16𝑚2 + 24𝑚 + 8 + 1
= 4(4𝑚2 + 6𝑚 + 2) + 1
= 4𝑞 + 1, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑞 𝑖𝑠 𝑠𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Hence, the square of any positive integer is of the form 4q or 4q +
1 for some integer m
7. Prove that the square of any positive integer is of the form 5q, 5q + 1, 5q + 4 for some
integer q.
Sol:
By Euclid’s division algorithm
a = bm + r, where 0 ≤ r ≤ b
Put b = 5
a = 5m + r, where 0 ≤ r ≤ 4
If r = 0, then a = 5m
If r = 1, then a = 5m + 1
If r = 2, then a = 5m + 2
If r = 3, then a = 5m + 3
If r = 4, then a = 5m + 4
Now, (5𝑚)2 = 25𝑚2
= 5(5𝑚2 )
= 5q where q is some integer
(5𝑚 + 1)2 = (5𝑚)2 + 2(5𝑚)(1) + (1)2
= 25𝑚2 + 10𝑚 + 1
= 5(5𝑚2 + 2𝑚) + 1
= 5𝑞 + 1 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑞 𝑖𝑠 𝑠𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
(5𝑚 + 1)2 = (5𝑚)2 + 2(5𝑚)(1)(1)2
= 25𝑚2 + 10𝑚 + 1
= 5(5𝑚2 + 2𝑚) + 1
= 5𝑞 + 1 where q is some integer
= (5𝑚 + 2)2 = (5𝑚)2 + 2(5𝑚)(2) + (2)2
= 25𝑚2 + 20𝑚 + 4
= 5(5𝑚2 + 4𝑚) + 4
= 5𝑞 + 4, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑞 𝑖𝑠 𝑠𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
= (5𝑚 + 3)2 = (5𝑚)2 + 2(5𝑚)(3) + (3)2
= 25𝑚2 + 30𝑚 + 9
= 25𝑚2 + 30𝑚 + 5 + 4
= 5(5𝑚2 + 6𝑚 + 1) + 4
= 5𝑞 + 1, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑞 𝑖𝑠 𝑠𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
= (5𝑚 + 4)2 = (5𝑚)2 + 2(5𝑚)(4) + (4)2
= 25𝑚2 + 40𝑚 + 16
= 25𝑚2 + 40𝑚 + 15 + 1
= 5(5𝑚2 ) + 2(5𝑚)(4) + (4)2
= 5𝑞 + 1, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑞 𝑖𝑠 𝑠𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Hence, the square of any positive integer is of the form 5q or 5q + 1, 5q + 4 for some
integer q.
8. Prove that if a positive integer is of the form 6q + 5, then it is of the form 3q + 2 for some
integer q, but not conversely.
Sol:
Let, n = 6q + 5, when q is a positive integer
We know that any positive integer is of the form 3k, or 3k + 1, or 3k + 2
∴ q = 3k or 3k + 1, or 3k + 2
If q = 3k, then
n = 6q + 5
= 6(3k) + 5
= 18k + 5
= 18k + 3 + 2
= 3(6k + 1) + 2
= 3m + 2, where m is some integer
If q = 3k + 1, then
n = 6q + 5
= 6(3k + 1) + 5
= 18k + 6 + 5
= 18k + 11
= 3(6k + 3) + 2
= 3m + 2, where m is some integer
If q = 3k + 2, then
n = 6q + 5
= 6(3k + 2) + 5
= 18k + 12 + 5
= 18k + 17
= 3(6k + 5) + 2
= 3m + 2, where m is some integer
Hence, if a positive integer is of the form 6q + 5, then it is of the form 3q + 2 for some
integer q.
Conversely
Let n = 3q + 2
We know that a positive integer can be of the form 6k + 1, 6k + 2, 6k + 3, 6k + 4 or 6k + 5
So, now if q = 6k + 1 then
n = 3(6k + 1) + 2
= 18k + 5
= 6(3k) + 5
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
= 6m + 5, where m is some integer
So, now if q = 6k + 2 then
n = 3(6k + 2) + 2
= 18k + 8
= 6 (3k + 1) + 2
= 6m + 2, where m is some integer
Now, this is not of the form 6m + 5
Hence, if n is of the form 3q + 2, then it necessarily won’t be of the form 6q + 5 always.
9. Prove that the square of any positive integer of the form 5q + 1 is of the same form.
Sol:
Let n = 5q + 1 where q is a positive integer
∴ 𝑛2 = (5𝑞 + 1)2
= 25q2 + 10q + 1
= 5(5q2 + 2q) + 1
= 5m + 1, where m is some integer
Hence, the square of any positive integer of the form 5q + 1 is of the same form.
10. Prove that the product of three consecutive positive integer is divisible by 6.
Sol:
Let, n be any positive integer. Since any positive integer is of the form 6q or 6q + 1 or 6q +
2 or, 6q + 3 or 6q + 4 or 6q + 5.
If n = 6q, then
n(n + 1)(n + 2) = (6q + 1)(6q + 2)(6q + 3)
= 6[(6q + 1)(3q + 1)(2q + 1)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6?
If n = 6q + 1, then
n(n + 1)(n + 2) = (6q + 2)(6q + 3)(6q + 4)
= 6[(6q + 1)(3q + 1)(2q + 1)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6
If n = 6q + 2, then
n(n + 1)(n + 2) = (6q + 2)(6q + 3)(6q + 4)
= 6[(3q + 1)(2q + 1)(6q + 4)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6.
If n = 6q + 3, then
n(n + 1)(n + 2) = (6q + 3)(6q + 4)(6q + 5)
= 6[(6q + 1)(3q + 2)(2q + 5)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6.
If n = 6q + 4, then
n(n + 1)(n + 2) = (6q + 4)(6q + 5)(6q + 6)
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
= 6[(6q + 4)(3q + 5)(2q + 1)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6.
If n = 6q + 5, then
n(n + 1)(n + 2) = (6q + 5)(6q + 6)(6q + 7)
= 6[(6q + 5)(q + 1)(6q + 7)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6.
Hero, the product of three consecutive positive integer is divisible by 6.
1. Define HOE of two positive integers and find the HCF of the following pairs of numbers:
(i) 32 and 54 (ii) 18 and 24 (iii) 70 and 30 (iv) 56 and 88
(v) 475 and 495 (vi) 75 and 243 (vii) 240 and 6552 (viii) 155 and 1385
(ix) 100 and 190 (x) 105 and 120
Sol:
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
(i) 5y = 32 × 1 + 22
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division of 32 and remainder 22.
32 = 22 × 1 + 10
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division of 22 and remainder 10.
22 = 10 × 2 + 2
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division of 10 and remainder 2.
10 = 2 × 5 [remainder 0]
Hence, HCF of 32 and 54 10 2
(ii) By applying division lemma
24 = 18 × 1 + 6
Since remainder = 6, apply division lemma on divisor of 18 and remainder 6.
18 = 6 × 3 + 0
∴ Hence, HCF of 18 and 24 = 6
(iii) By applying Euclid’s division lemma
70 = 30 × 2 + 10
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 30 and remainder 10.
30 = 10 × 3 + 0
∴ Hence HCF of 70 and 30 is = 10.
(iv) By applying Euclid’s division lemma
88 = 56 × 1 + 32
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 56 and remainder 32.
56 = 32 × 1 + 24
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 32 and remainder 24.
32 = 24 × 1 + 8
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 24 and remainder 8.
24 = 8 × 3 + 0
∴ HCF of 56 and 88 is = 8.
(v) By applying Euclid’s division lemma
495 = 475 × 1 +20
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 475 and remainder 20.
475 = 20 × 23 + 15
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 20 and remainder 15.
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
20 = 15 × 1 + 5
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 15 and remainder 5.
15 = 5 × 3 + 0
∴ HCF of 475 and 495 is = 5.
(vi) By applying Euclid’s division lemma
243 = 75 × 3 + 18
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 75 and remainder 18.
75 = 18 × 4 + 3
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 18 and remainder 3.
18 = 3 × 6 + 0
∴ HCF of 243 and 75 is = 3.
(vii) By applying Euclid’s division lemma
6552 = 240 × 27 + 72
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 240 and remainder 72.
210 = 72 × 3 + 24
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 72 and remainder 24.
72 = 24 × 3 + 0
∴ HCF of 6552 and 240 is = 24.
(viii) By applying Euclid’s division lemma
1385 = 155 × 8 + 145
Since remainder ≠ 0, applying division lemma on divisor 155 and remainder 145
155 = 145 × 1 + 10
Since remainder ≠ 0, applying division lemma on divisor 10 and remainder 5
10 = 5 × 2 + 0
∴ Hence HCF of 1385 and 155 = 5.
(ix) By applying Euclid’s division lemma
190 = 100 × 1 + 90
Since remainder ≠ 0, applying division lemma on divisor 100 and remainder 90.
90 = 10 × 9 + 0
∴ HCF of 100 and 190 = 10
(x) By applying Euclid’s division lemma
120 = 105 × 1 + 15
Since remainder ≠ 0, applying division lemma on divisor 105 and remainder 15.
105 = 15 × 7 + 0
∴ HCF of 105 and 120 = 15
3. Find the HCF of the following pairs of integers and express it as a linear combination of
them.
(i) 963 and 657 (ii) 592 and 252 (iii) 506 and 1155 (iv)1288 and 575
Sol:
(i) 963 and 6567
By applying Euclid’s division lemma 963 = 657 × 1 + 306 …(i)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 657 and remainder 306
657 = 306 × 2 + 45 ….. (ii)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 306 and remainder 4
306 = 45 × 6 + 36 …..(iii)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 45 and remainder 36
45 = 36 × 1 + 9 …… (iv)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 36 and remainder 9
36 = 9 × 4 + 0
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
∴ HCF = 9
Now 9 = 45 – 36 × 1 [from (iv)]
= 45 – [306 – 45 × 6] × 1 [from (iii)]
= 45 – 306 × 1 + 45 × 6
= 45 × 7 – 306 × 1
= 657 × 7 – 306 × 14 – 306 × 1 [from (ii)]
= 657 × 7 – 306 × 15
= 657 × 7 – [963 – 657 × 1] × 15 [from (i)]
= 657 × 22 – 963 × 15
(ii) 595 and 252
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
595 = 252 × 2 + 91 ….. (i)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 252 and remainder 91
252 = 91 × 2 + 70 …. (ii)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 91 and remainder 70
91 = 70 × 1 + 21 ….(iii)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 70 and remainder 20
70 = 21 × 3 + 7 …..(iv)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 21 and remainder 7
21 = 7 × 3 + 0
H.C.F = 7
Now, 7 = 70 – 21 × 3 [from (iv)]
= 70 – [90 – 70 × 1] × 3 [from (iii)]
= 70 – 91 × 3 + 70 × 3
= 70 × 4 – 91 × 3
= [252 – 91 × 2] × 4 – 91 × 3 [from (ii)]
= 252 × 4 – 91 × 8 – 91 × 3
= 252 × 4 – 91 × 11
= 252 × 4 – [595 – 252 × 2] × 11 [from (i)]
= 252 × 4 – 595 × 11 + 252 × 22
= 252 × 6 – 595 × 11
(iii) 506 and 1155
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
1155 = 506 × 2 + 143 …. (i)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 506 and remainder 143
506 = 143 × 3 + 77 ….(ii)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 143 and remainder 77
143 = 77 × 1 + 56 ….(iii)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 77 and remainder 66
77 = 66 × 1 + 11 …(iv)
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 36 and remainder 9
66 = 11 × 6 + 0
∴ HCF = 11
Now, 11 = 77 – 6 × 11 [from (iv)]
= 77 – [143 – 77 × 1] × 1 [from (iii)]
= 77 – 143 × 1 – 77 × 1
= 77 × 2 – 143 × 1
= [506 – 143 × 3] × 2 – 143 × 1 [from (ii)]
= 506 × 2 – 143 × 6 – 143 × 1
= 506 × 2 – 143 × 7
= 506 × 2 – [1155 – 506 × 27 × 7] [from (i)]
= 506 × 2 – 1155 × 7 + 506 × 14
= 506 × 16 – 115 × 7
(iv) 1288 and 575
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
1288 = 575 × 2 + 138 …(i)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 575 and remainder 138
575 = 138 × 1 + 23 …(ii)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 138 and remainder 23 …(iii)
∴ HCF = 23
Now, 23 = 575 – 138 × 4 [from (ii)]
= 575 – [1288 – 572 × 2] × 4 [from (i)]
= 575 – 1288 × 4 + 575 × 8
= 575 × 9 – 1288 × 4
4. Express the HCF of 468 and 222 as 468x + 222y where x, y are integers in two different
ways.
Sol:
Given integers are 468 and 222 where 468 > 222.
By applying Euclid’s division lemma, we get 468 = 222 × 2 + 24 …(i)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 222 and remainder 24
222 = 24 × 9 + 6 …(ii)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 24 and remainder 6
24 = 6 × 4 + 0 …(iii)
We observe that the remainder = 0, so the last divisor 6 is the HCF of the 468 and 222
From (ii) we have
6 = 222 – 24 × 9
⇒ 6 = 222 – [468 – 222 × 2] × 9 [Substituting 24 = 468 – 222 × 2 from (i)]
⇒ 6 = 222 – 468 × 9 – 222 × 18
⇒ 6 = 222 × 19 – 468 × 9
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
⇒ 6 = 222y + 468x, where x = −9 and y = 19
5. If the HCF of 408 and 1032 is expressible in the form 1032 m − 408 × 5, find m.
Sol:
General integers are 408 and 1032 where 408 < 1032
By applying Euclid’s division lemma, we get
1032 = 408 × 2 + 216
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 408 and remainder 216
408 = 216 × 1 + 192
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 216 and remainder 192
216 = 192 × 1 + 24
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 192 and remainder 24
192 = 24 × 8 + 32
We observe that 32m under in 0. So the last divisor 24 is the H.C.F of 408 and 1032
∴ 216 = 1032m – 408 × 5
⇒ 1032 m = 24 + 408 × 5
⇒ 1032m = 24 + 2040
⇒ 1032m = 2064
2064
⇒ m = 1032 = 2
6. If the HCF of 657 and 963 is expressible in the form 657 x + 963 x − 15, find x.
Sol:
657 and 963
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
963 = 657 × 1 + 306
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 657 and remainder 306
657 = 306 × 2 + 45
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 306 and remainder 45
306 = 45 × 6 + 36
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 45 and remainder 36
45 = 36 × 1 + 19
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 36 and remainder 19
36 = 19 × 4 + 0
∴ HCF = 657
Given HCF = 657 + 963 × (-15)
⇒ 9 = 657 × −1445
⇒ 9 + 14445 = 657 x
⇒ 657x = 1445y
1445𝑦
⇒x= 657
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
⇒ x = 22
8. Find the largest number which divides 615 and 963 leaving remainder 6 in each case.
Sol:
The required number when the divides 615 and 963
Leaves remainder 616 is means 615 – 6 = 609 and 963 – 957 are completely divisible by
the number
∴ the required number
= HCF of 609 and 957
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
957 = 609 × 1 + 348
609 = 348 × 1 + 261
348 = 261 × 1 + 87
261 = 87 × 370
HCF = 87
Hence the required number is ‘87’
9. Find the greatest number which divides 285 and 1249 leaving remainders 9 and 7
respectively.
Sol:
The require number when divides 285 and 1249, leaves remainder 9 and 7, this means 285
– 9 = 276 and 1249 – 7 = 1242 are completely divisible by the number
∴ The required number = HCF of 276 and 1242
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
1242 = 276 × 4 + 138
276 = 138 × 2 + 0
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
∴ HCF = 138
Hence remainder is = 0
Hence required number is 138
10. Find the largest number which exactly divides 280 and 1245 leaving remainders 4 and 3,
respectively.
Sol:
The required number when divides 280 and 1245 leaves the remainder 4 and 3, this means
280 4 – 216 and 1245 – 3 = 1245 – 3 = 1242 are completely divisible by the number
∴ The required number = HCF of 276 and 1242
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
1242 = 276 × 4 + 138
276 = 138 × 2 + 0
∴ HCF = 138
Hence the required numbers is 138
11. What is the largest number that divides 626, 3127 and 15628 and leaves remainders of 1, 2
and 3 respectively.
Sol:
The required number when divides 626, 3127 and 15628, leaves remainder 1, 2 and 3. This
means 626 – 1 = 625, 3127 – 2 = 3125 and
15628 – 3 = 15625 are completely divisible by the number
∴ The required number = HCF of 625, 3125 and 15625
First consider 625 and 3125
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
3125 = 625 × 5 + 0
HCF of 625 and 3125 = 625
Now consider 625 and 15625
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
15625 = 625 × 25 + 0
∴ HCF of 625, 3125 and 15625 = 625
Hence required number is 625
12. Find the greatest number that will divide 445, 572 and 699 leaving remainders 4, 5 and 6
respectively.
Sol:
The required number when divides 445, 572 and 699 leaves remainders 4, 5 and 6
This means 445 – 4 = 441, 572 – 5 = 561 and
699 – 6 = 693 are completely divisible by the number
∴ The required number = HCF of 441, 567 and 693
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
First consider 441 and 567
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
567 = 441 × 1 + 126
441 = 126 × 3 + 63
126 = 63 × 2 + 0
∴ HCF of 441 and 567 = 63
Now consider 63 and 693
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
693 = 63 × 11 + 0
∴ HCF of 441, 567 and 693 = 63
Hence required number is 63
13. Find the greatest number which divides 2011 and 2623 leaving remainders 9 and 5
respectively.
Sol:
The required number when divides 2011 and 2623
Leaves remainders 9 and the means
2011 – 9 = 2002 and 2623 – 5 = 2618 are completely divisible by the number
∴ The required number = HCF of 2002 and 2618
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
2618 = 2002 × 1 + 616
2002 = 616 × 3 + 154
616 = 754 × 4 + 0
∴ HCF of 2002 and 2618 = 154
Hence required number is 154
14. The length, breadth and height of a room are 8 m 25 cm, 6 m 75 cm and 4 m 50 cm,
respectively. Determine the longest rod which can measure the three dimensions of the
room exactly.
Sol:
Length of room = 8m 25cm = 825 cm
Breadth of room = 6m 75m = 675 cm
Height of room = 4m 50m = 450 cm
∴ The required longest rod
= HCF of 825, 675 and 450
First consider 675 and 450
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
675 = 450 × 1 + 225
450 = 225 × 2 + 0
∴ HCF of 675 and 450 = 825
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now consider 625 and 825
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
825 = 225 × 3 + 150
225 = 150 × 1 + 75
150 = 75 × 2 + 0
HCF of 825, 675 and 450 = 75
15. 105 goats, 140 donkeys and 175 cows have to be taken across a river. There is only one
boat which will have to make many trips in order to do so. The lazy boatman has his own
conditions for transporting them. He insists that he will take the same number of animals in
every trip and they have to be of the same kind. He will naturally like to take the largest
possible number each time. Can you tell how many animals went in each trip?
Sol:
Number of goats = 205
Number of donkey = 140
Number of cows = 175
∴ The largest number of animals in one trip = HCF of 105, 140 and 175
First consider 105 and 140
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
140 = 105 × 1 + 35
105 = 35 × 3 + 0
∴ HCF of 105 and 140 = 35
Now consider 35 and 175
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
175 = 35 × 5 + 0
HCF of 105, 140 and 175 = 35
16. 15 pastries and 12 biscuit packets have been donated for a school fete. These are to be
packed in several smaller identical boxes with the same number of pastries and biscuit
packets in each. How many biscuit packets and how many pastries will each box contain?
Sol:
Number of pastries = 15
Number of biscuit packets = 12
∴ The required no of boxes to contain equal number = HCF of 15 and 13
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
15 = 12 × 13
12 = 2 × 9 = 0
∴ No. of boxes required = 3
15 2
Hence each box will contain 3
= 5 pastries and 3 biscuit packets
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
17. A mason has to fit a bathroom with square marble tiles of the largest possible size. The size
of the bathroom is 10 ft. by 8 ft. What would be the size in inches of the tile required that
has to be cut and how many such tiles are required?
Sol:
Size of bathroom = 10ft by 8ft
= (10 × 12) inch by (8 × 12) inch
= 120 inch by 96 inch
The largest size of tile required = HCF of 120 and 96
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
120 = 96 × 1 + 24
96 = 24 × 4 + 0
∴ HCF = 24
∴ Largest size of tile required = 24 inches
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑎𝑡ℎ𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑚
∴ No. of tiles required = 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 2 𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑒
120 ×96
= 24×24
=5×4
= 20 tiles
18. Two brands of chocolates are available in packs of 24 and 15 respectively. If I need to buy
an equal number of chocolates of both kinds, what is the least number of boxes of each
kind I would need to buy?
Sol:
Number of chocolates of 1st brand in one pack = 24
Number of chocolates of 2nd b and in one pack = 15
∴ The least number of chocolates 1 need to purchase
= LCM of 24 and 15
= 2 × 24 × 2 × 2 × 3 × 5
= 120
120
∴ The number of packet of 1st brand = =5
24
120
And the number of packet of 2nd brand = =8
15
∴ Largest size of tile required = 24 inches
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑎𝑡ℎ 𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑚 120×96
∴ No of tiles required = = = 5 × 4 = 20𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑒𝑠
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 1 𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑒 24×24
No of chocolates of 1st brand in one pack = 24
No of chocolate of 2nd brand in one pack = 15
∴ The least number of chocolates I need to purchase
= LCM of 24 and 15
=2×2×2×3×5
= 120
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
120
∴ The number of packet of 1st brand = =5
24
120
All the number of packet of 2nd brand = =8
15
19. 144 cartons of Coke Cans and 90 cartons of Pepsi Cans are to be stacked in a Canteen. If
each stack is of the same height and is to contain cartons of the same drink, what would be
the greatest number of cartons each stack would have?
Sol:
Number of cartons of coke cans = 144
Number of cartons of pepsi cans = 90
∴ The greatest number of cartons in one stock = HCF of 144 and 90
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
144 = 90 × 1 + 54
90 = 54 × 1 + 36
54 = 36 × 1 + 18
36 = 18 × 2 + 0
∴ HCF = 18
Hence the greatest number cartons in one stock = 18
20. During a sale, colour pencils were being sold in packs of 24 each and crayons in packs of
32 each. If you want full packs of both and the same number of pencils and crayons, how
many of each would you need to buy?
Sol:
Number of color pencils in one pack = 24
No of crayons in pack = 32
∴ The least number of both colors to be purchased
= LCM of 24 and 32
=2×2×2×2×3
= 96
96
∴ Number of packs of pencils to be bought = 24 = 1
96
And number of packs of crayon to be bought = 32 = 3
21. A merchant has 120 liters of oil of one kind, 180 liters of another kind and 240 liters of
third kind. He wants to sell the oil by filling the three kinds of oil in tins of equal capacity.
What should be the greatest capacity of such a tin?
Sol:
Quantity of oil A = 120 liters
Quantity of oil B = 180 liters
Quantity of oil C = 240 liters
We want to fill oils A, B and C in tins of the same capacity
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
∴ The greatest capacity of the tin chat can hold oil. A, B and C = HCF of 120, 180 and 240
By fundamental theorem of arithmetic
120 = 23 × 3 × 5
180 = 22 × 32 × 5
240 = 24 × 3 × 5
HCF = 22 × 3 × 5 = 4 × 3 × 5 = 60 𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠
The greatest capacity of tin = 60 liters
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 2.1
1. Find the zeroes of each of the following quadratic polynomials and verify the relationship
between the zeroes and their co efficient:
(i) f(x) = 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 8 (v) q(x) = √3𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 + 7√3
(ii) g(s) = 4𝑠 2 − 4𝑥 + 1 (vi) f(x) = 𝑥 2 − (√3 + 1)𝑥 + √3
2
(iii) h(t) = 𝑡 − 15 (vii) g(x) = 𝑎(𝑥 2 + 1) − 𝑥(𝑎2 + 1)
(iv) p(x) = 𝑥 2 + 2√2𝑥 + 6 (viii) 6𝑥 2 − 3 − 7𝑥
Sol:
(i) f(x) = 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 8
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 8 = 𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 2𝑥 − 8
= 𝑥(𝑥 − 4) + 2(𝑥 − 4)
= (𝑥 + 2)(𝑥 − 4)
Zeroes of the polynomials are -2 and 4
− 𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥
Sum of the zeroes = 𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥
−(−2)
-2 + 4 = 1
2=2
𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡 𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚
Product of the zeroes = 𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥 2
−8
= 24 = 1
− 8 = −8
∴ Hence the relationship verified
(ii) 9(5) = 45 − 45 + 1 = 452 − 25 − 25 + 1 = 25(25 − 1) − 1(25 − 1)
= (25 − 1)(25 − 1)
1 1
Zeroes of the polynomials are 2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 2
− 𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑠
Sum of zeroes = 𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑠2
1 1 −(−4)
+2=
2 4
1=1
𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡 𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚
Product of the zeroes =
𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑠 𝑠2
1 1 1 1 1
×2=4⇒4=4
2
∴ Hence the relationship verified.
2
(iii) h(t) = 𝑡 2 − 15 = (𝑡 2 ) − (√15) = (𝑡 + √15)(𝑡 − √15)
zeroes of the polynomials are −√15 𝑎𝑛𝑑 √15
sum of zeroes = 0
−√15 + √15 = 0
0=0
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
−15
Product of zeroes = 1
−√15 × √15 = −15
−15 = -15
∴ Hence the relationship verified.
(iv) p(x) = 𝑥 2 + 2√2𝑥 − 6 = 𝑥 2 + 3√2𝑥 + √2 × 3√2
= 𝑥(𝑥 + 3√2) − √2(2 + 3√2) = (𝑥 − √2)(𝑥 + 3√2)
Zeroes of the polynomial are 3√2 and -3√2
−3√2
Sum of the zeroes = 1
√2 − 3√2 = −2√2
−2√2 = −2√2
6
𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠 ⇒ √2 × −3√2 = − 1
−6 = −6
𝐻𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑟𝑒𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑠ℎ𝑖𝑝 𝑣𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑓𝑖𝑒𝑑
(v) 2(x) = √3𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 + 7√3 = √3𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 + 3𝑥 + 7√3
= √3𝑥(𝑥 + √3) + 7(𝑥 + √3)
= (√3𝑥 + 7)(𝑥 + √3)
−7
Zeroes of the polynomials are −√3,
√3
−10
Sum of zeroes =
√3
7 −10 −10 −10
⇒ −√3 − = ⇒ =
√3 √3 √3 √3
7√3 √3𝑥−7
Product of zeroes = ⇒ =7
3 √30
⇒7=7
Hence, relationship verified.
(vi) f(x) = 𝑥 2 − (√3 + 1)𝑥 + √3 = 𝑥 2 − √3𝑥 − 𝑥 + √3
= x (x − √3) – 1 (x - √3)
= (x – 1) (x − √3)
Zeroes of the polynomials are 1 and √3
−{𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥} −[−√3−1]
Sum of zeroes = =
𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑟 2 1
1 + √3 = √3 + 1
𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡 𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚 √3
Product of zeroes = 𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥 2 = 1
1 × √3 = √3 = √3 = √3
∴ Hence, relationship verified
(vii) g(x) = 𝑎[(𝑥 2 + 1) − 𝑥(𝑎2 + 1)]2 = 𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑎 − 𝑎2 𝑥 − 𝑥
= 𝑎𝑥 2 − [(𝑎2 + 1) − 𝑥] + 0 = 𝑎𝑥 2 − 𝑎2 𝑥 − 𝑥 + 𝑎
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
= 𝑎𝑥(𝑥 − 𝑎) − 1(𝑥 − 𝑎) = (𝑥 − 𝑎)(𝑎𝑥 − 1)
1
Zeroes of the polynomials = 𝑎 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎
−[−𝑎2 −1]
Sum of the zeroes = 𝑎
1 𝑎2 +1 𝑎2 +1 𝑎2 +1
⇒𝑎+𝑎 = ⇒ =
𝑎 𝑎 𝑎
𝑎
Product of zeroes = 𝑎
1 𝑎 𝑎2 +1 𝑎2 +1
⇒𝑎×𝑎 = 𝑎 ⇒ =
𝑎 𝑎
𝑎
Product of zeroes = 𝑎 ⇒ 1 = 1
Hence relationship verified
(viii) 6𝑥 2 − 3 − 7𝑥 = 6𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 − 3 = (3𝑥 + 11)(2𝑥 − 3)
3 −1
Zeroes of polynomials are +2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 3
−1 3 7 −(−7) −(𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥)
Sum of zeroes = +2=6= =
3 6 𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥 2
−1 3 −1 −3 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡 𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚
Product of zeroes = ×2= = = 𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥 2
3 2 6
∴ Hence, relationship verified.
2. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = ax2 + bx + c, then evaluate:
(i) 𝛼− 𝛽 (v) 𝛼 4 + 𝛽4 𝛼2
(viii) 𝑎 [ + ] +
𝛽2
1 1 1 1 𝛽 𝛼
(ii) − (vi) + 𝛼 𝛽
𝛼 𝛽 𝑎𝛼+𝑏 𝛼𝛽+𝑏
𝑏 [𝑎 + 𝛼 ]
1 1 𝛽 𝛼
(iii) + 𝛽 − 2𝛼 𝛽 (vii) + 𝑎𝛽+𝑏
𝛼 𝑎𝛼+𝑏
(iv) 𝛼 2 𝛽 + 𝛼 𝛽2
Sol:
f(x) = 𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐
−𝑏
𝛼+𝛽 = 𝒂
𝑐
𝛼𝛽 = 𝑎
𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝛼 + 𝛽 𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑡𝑠 (𝑜𝑟)𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑔𝑖𝑣𝑒𝑛 𝑝𝑜𝑙𝑦𝑛𝑜𝑚𝑖𝑎𝑙𝑠
(i) 𝛼− 𝛽
The two zeroes of the polynomials are
−𝑏+√𝑏2 −4𝑎𝑐 −√𝑏2 −4𝑎𝑐 √𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐 +𝑏+√𝑏2 −4𝑎𝑐 2√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐 √𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐
− (𝑏 ) = −𝑏 + = =
2𝑎 2𝑎 2𝑎 2𝑎 2𝑎
1 1 𝛽−𝛼 −(𝛼− 𝛽)
(ii) −𝛽 = = … (𝑖)
𝛼 𝛼𝛽 𝛼𝛽
√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐 𝑐
From (i) we know that 𝛼 − 𝛽 = [𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 (𝑖)]𝛼𝛽 =
2𝑎 𝑎
√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐×𝑎 −√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐
Putting the values in the (a) = − ( )=
𝑎×𝑐 𝑐
1 1
(iii) + 𝛽 − 2𝛼 𝛽
𝛼
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝛼+ 𝛽
⇒[ ] − 2𝛼𝛽
𝛼𝛽
−𝑏 𝑎 𝑐 𝑐 𝑏 −𝑎𝑏−2𝑐 2 𝑏 2𝑐
⇒ × 𝑐 − 2 𝑎 = −2 𝑎 − 𝑐 = − [𝑐 + ]
𝑎 𝑎𝑐 𝑎
(iv) 𝛼 2 𝛽 + 𝛼 𝛽2
𝛼 𝛽(𝛼 + 𝛽)
𝑐 −𝑏
= 𝑎( 𝑎 )
−𝑏𝑐
= 𝑎2
(v) 𝛼 + 𝛽 4 = (𝛼 2 + 𝛽 2 )2 − 2𝛼 2 + 𝛽 2
4
3. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = 6x2 + x − 2, find the value of
𝛼 𝛽
+𝛼
𝛽
Sol:
f(x) = 6𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 2
Since 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeroes of the given polynomial
−1
∴ Sum of zeroes [𝛼 + 𝛽] = 6
−1
Product of zeroes (𝛼𝛽) = 3
𝛼 𝛽 𝛼2 +𝛽 2 (𝛼+ 𝛽)2 −2𝛼𝛽
=𝛽+𝛼 = =
𝛼𝛽 𝛼𝛽
1 2 −1 1 2 1+24
( ) −2×( ) −
6 3 6 3 36
= 1 = −1 = −1
−
3 3 3
2
36 −25
= 1 = 12
3
4. If a and are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = 𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 4, find the value of
1 1
+ 𝛽 − 𝛼𝛽
𝛼
Sol:
Since 𝛼 + 𝛽 are the zeroes of the polynomial: 𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 4
Sum of the roots (𝛼 + 𝛽) = 1
Product of the roots (𝛼𝛽) = −4
1 1 𝛼+𝛽
+ 𝛽 − 𝛼𝛽 = − 𝛼𝛽
𝛼 𝛼𝛽
1 −1 −1+16 15
= −4 + 4 = +4 = =
4 4 4
5. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial p(x) = 4x2 − 5x −1, find the value of
𝛼 2 𝛽 + 𝛼𝛽 2 .
Sol:
Since 𝛼 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛽 are the roots of the polynomial: 4𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 − 1
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5
∴ Sum of the roots 𝛼 + 𝛽 = 4
−1
Product of the roots 𝛼𝛽 = 4
2 2 5 −1 −5
Hence 𝛼 𝛽 + 𝛼𝛽 = 𝛼𝛽(𝛼 + 𝛽) = 4 ( 4 ) = 16
1
6. If a and 3 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 + x − 2, find the value of 𝛼 −
1
.
𝛽
Sol:
Since 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the roots of the polynomial x + x – 2
∴ Sum of roots 𝛼 + 𝛽 = 1
1
Product of roots 𝛼𝛽 2 ⇒ − 𝛽
𝛽−𝛼 (𝛼−𝛽)
= ∙
𝛼𝛽 𝛼𝛽
√(𝛼+𝛽)2 −4𝛼𝛽
= 𝛼𝛽
√1+8 3
= =2
+2
7. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 − 5x + 4, find the value of
1 1
− 𝛽 − 2𝛼𝛽
𝛼
Sol:
Since 𝛼 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛽 are the roots of the quadratic polynomial
f(x) = 𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 + 4
Sum of roots = 𝛼 + 𝛽 = 5
Product of roots = 𝛼𝛽 = 4
1 1 𝛽+𝛼 5 5 −27
+ 𝛽 − 2𝛼𝛽 = − 2𝛼𝛽 = 4 − 2 × 4 = 4 − 8 =
𝛼 𝛼𝛽 4
8. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(t) = t2 − 4t + 3, find the value of
𝛼 4𝛽3 + 𝛼 3𝛽4
Sol:
Since 𝛼 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛽 are the zeroes of the polynomial f(t) = 𝑡 2 − 4𝑡 + 3
Since α + β = 4
Product of zeroes 𝛼𝛽 = 3
𝐻𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝛼 4 𝛽 3 + 𝛼 3 𝛽 4 = 𝛼 3 𝛽 3 (𝛼 + 𝛽) = [3]3 [4] = 108
9. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial p(y) = 5y2 − 7y + 1, find the value of
1 1
𝛼
+𝛽
Sol:
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Since 𝛼 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛽 are the zeroes of the polynomials
p(y) = 542 = 5y2 – 7y + 1
1
Sum of the zeroes 𝛼 𝛽 = 6
1
Product of zeroes = 𝛼 𝛽 = 6
1 1 𝛼+𝛽 7×5
+𝛽 = = 5×1 = 7
𝛼 𝛼𝛽
10. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial p(s) = 3s2 − 6s + 4, find the value of
𝛼 𝛽 1 1
+ 𝛼 + 2 [𝛼 + 𝛽] + 3𝛼𝛽
𝛽
Sol:
Since 𝛼 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛽 are the zeroes of the polynomials
6
Sum of the zeroes 𝛼 + 𝛽 = 3
4
Product of the zeroes 𝛼𝛽 = 3
𝛼 𝛽 1 1
+ 𝛼 + 2 [𝛼 + 𝛽] + 3𝛼𝛽
𝛽
𝛼2 +𝛽 2 𝛼+𝛽
⇒ + 2[ ] + 3𝛼𝛽
𝛼𝛽 𝛼𝛽
(𝛼+𝛽)2 −2𝛼𝛽 𝛼+𝛽
⇒ + 2 [ 𝛼𝛽 ] + 3𝛼𝛽
𝛼𝛽
4 2×3 4
[2]2 −2× +2[ ]+3[ ]
3 4 3
= 4
3
8
4− 4 3
3
= 4 + 7 ⇒ 3 × 4 (1 + 7) ⇒ 8
3
11. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 − px + q, prove that
α2 𝛽2 𝑝4 4𝑝2
+ 𝛼2 = 𝑞 2 − +2
𝛽2 𝑞
Sol:
Since 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the roots of the polynomials
f(x) = 𝑥 2 − 𝑝𝑥 + 2
sum of zeroes = p = 𝛼 + 𝛽
Product of zeroes = q = 𝛼𝛽
α2 𝛽2
LHS = 𝛽2 + 𝛼2
2
𝛼2 +𝛽 2 (α2 + β2 ) −2(𝛼𝛽)2
= =
𝛼𝛽 2 (𝛼𝛽)2
2
[(𝛼+𝛽)2 −2𝛼𝛽] −2(𝛼𝛽)2
= (𝛼𝛽)2
2
[(𝑝)2 −2𝑞] −2𝑞 2
= 𝑞
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑝4 +4𝑞 2 −2𝑝2 .2𝑞−2𝑞 2
= 𝑞2
𝑝4 +2𝑞 2 −4𝑝2 𝑞 𝑝4 4𝑝2
= = 𝑞2 + 2 −
𝑞2 𝑞
𝑝4 4𝑝2 𝑝4 4𝑝2
= 𝑞2 − = 𝑞2 + 2 −
𝑞2 𝑞
𝑝4 4𝑝2
= 𝑞2 − +2
𝑞
12. If the squared difference of the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 + px + 45 is
equal to 144, find the value of p.
Sol:
Let the two zeroes of the polynomial be 𝛼 and 𝛽
f(x) = 𝑥 2 + 𝑝𝑥 + 45
sum of the zeroes = −𝑝
Product of zeroes = 45
⇒ (α − β)2 − 4αβ = 144
⇒ 𝑝2 − 4 × 45 = 144
⇒ 𝑝2 = 144 + 180
⇒ 𝑝2 = 324
𝑝 = ±1
13. If the sum of the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(t) = kt2 + 2t + 3k is equal to their
product, find the value of k.
Sol:
Let the two zeroes of the f(t) = 𝑘𝑡 2 + 2𝑡 + 3𝑘 𝑏𝑒 α and β
Sum of the zeroes (α + β)
Product of the zeroes αβ
−2 3𝑘
=
k k
−2𝑘 = 3𝑘 2
2𝑘 + 3𝑘 2 = 0
k(3k + 2) = 0
k=0
−2
k= 3
14. If one zero of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = 4x2 − 8kx − 9 is negative of the other, find
the value of k.
Sol:
Let the two zeroes of one polynomial
𝑓(𝑥) = 4𝑥 2 − 5𝑘 − 9 𝑏𝑒 α, −α
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
−9
α×α = 4
2 +9
tα = 4
+3
𝛼= 2
8𝑘
Sum of zeroes = =0
4
Hence 8k = 0
Or k = 0
15. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 − 1, find a quadratic
2𝛼 2𝛽
polynomial whose zeroes are 𝑎𝑛𝑑
𝛽 𝛼
Sol:
f(x) = 𝑥 2 − 1
sum of zeroes 𝛼 + 𝛽 = 0
Product of zeroes α𝛽 = -1
2α 2𝛽 2α2 +2𝛽2
Sum of zeroes = + =
𝛽 α α𝛽
2((α+𝛽)2 −2α𝛽)
= α𝛽
2[(0)2 −2× −1]
= −1
2(2)1
= −1
= −4
2α×2𝛽 4α𝛽
Product of zeroes = =
α𝛽 α𝛽
Hence the quadratic equation is 𝑥 2 − (𝑠𝑢𝑚 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠)𝑥 + 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠
= 𝑘(𝑥 2 + 4𝑥 + 14)
16. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 − 3x − 2, find a quadratic
1 1
polynomial whose zeroes are 2α+𝛽 + 2𝛽+α.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 − 2
Sum of zeroes [α + 𝛽] = 3
Product of zeroes [α𝛽] = -2
1 1
Sum of zeroes = 2α+𝛽 + 2𝛽+α
2𝛽+α+2α+𝐴
= (2α+𝛽)(2𝛽+α)
3α+3𝛽
= 2(α2 +𝛽2 )+5α𝛽
3 ×3
= 2[2 (α+𝛽)2 −2α𝛽 +5×(−2)]
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
9 9
= 2[9]−10 = 16
1 1 1
Product of zeroes = α+𝛽 × 2𝛽+α = 4α𝛽+α𝛽+2α2 +2𝛽2
1
= 5×−2+2[(α+𝛽)2 −2α𝛽]
1
= −10+2[9+4]
1
= 10+26
1
= 16
Quadratic equation = 𝑥 2 − [𝑠𝑢𝑚 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠]𝑥 + 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠
9𝑥 1
= 𝑥2 − +
16 16
2 9𝑥 1
= 𝑘 [𝑥 − 16 + 16]
17. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of a quadratic polynomial such that a + 13 = 24 and a − 𝛽 = 8, find
a quadratic polynomial having 𝛼 and 𝛽 as its zeros.
Sol:
𝛼 + 𝛽 = 24
𝛼𝛽=8
………….
2 𝛼 =32
𝛼 = 16
𝛽=8
𝛼 𝛽 = 16 × 8 = 128
Quadratic equation
⇒ 𝑥 2 − (𝑠𝑢𝑚 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠) + 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠
⇒ 𝑘[𝑥 2 − 24𝑥 + 128]
18. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 − p (x + 1) — c, show that (𝛼
+ 1)( 𝛽 +1) = 1− c.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 − 𝑝(𝑥 + 1)𝑐 = 𝑥 − 𝑝𝑥 = −𝑝 − 𝑐
Sum of zeroes = 𝛼 + 𝛽 = p
Product of zeroes = − p – c = 𝛼 𝛽
(𝛼 + 1+ 𝛽+ ) = 𝛼 𝛽+ 𝛼 + 𝛽 + 1 = −p –c + p + 1
= 1 – c = R.H.S
∴ Hence proved
19. If If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 – 2x + 3, find a polynomial
𝛼−1 𝛽−1
whose roots are (i) 𝛼 + 2, 𝛽 + 2 (ii) 𝛼+1 , 𝛽+1
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 + 3
Sum of zeroes = 2 = (𝛼 + 𝛽)
Product of zeroes = 3 = (𝛼 𝛽)
(𝑖) 𝑠𝑢𝑚 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠 = (α + 2) + (β + 2) = α + β + 4 = 2 + 4 = 6
𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠 = (α + 2)(β + 2)
= α β + 2α + 2β + 4 = 3 + 2(2) + 4 = 11
𝑄𝑢𝑎𝑑𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 = 𝑥 2 − 6𝑥 + 11 = 𝑘[𝑥 2 − 6𝑥 + 11]
α−1 β−1
(ii) sum of zeroes = α+1 + β+1
(α−1)(β+1)+(β−1)(α+1)
= (α+1)(β+1)
α β+α−β−1+α β+β+β−α−1
= 3+2+1
3−1+3−1 2
= =4=3
3+2+1
α−1 β−1 α 1−α−αβ+1
Product of zeroes = βα +1 × α+1 − α β+α+β+1
3−(α+β)+1 2 1
= =6=3
3+2+1
2 +1 𝑥 2 −2𝑥 1
Quadratic equation on 𝑥 2 − 3 × = 1[ + 3]
3 3
20. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeroes of the polynomial f(x) = 𝑥 2 + 𝑝𝑥 + 𝑞, form a polynomial whose
zeroes are (𝛼 + 𝛽)2 and (𝛼 − 𝛽)2.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 + 𝑝 + 𝑞
Sum of zeroes = p = 𝛼 + 𝛽
Product of zeroes = q = 𝛼 𝛽
Sum of the new polynomial = (α + β)2 + (α − β)2
= (−𝑝)2 + α2 + β2 − 2α β
= 𝑝2 + (α + β)2 − 2α β − 2α β
= 𝑝2 + 𝑝2 − 4𝑞
= 2𝑝2 − 4𝑞
Product of zeroes = (α + β)2 × (α − β)2 = [−𝑝]2 × (𝑝2 − 4𝑞) = (𝑝2 − 4𝑞)𝑝2
Quadratic equation = 𝑥 2 − [2𝑝2 − 4𝑞] + 𝑝2 [−4𝑞 + 𝑝]
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑘{𝑥 2 − 2(𝑝2 − 28)𝑥 + 𝑝2 (𝑞 2 − 4𝑞)}
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 2.2
1. Verify that the numbers given alongside of the cubic polynomials below are their zeros.
Also, verify the relationship between the zeros and coefficients in each case:
1
(𝑖) 𝑓(𝑥) = 2𝑥 3 + 𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 + 2; , 1, −2
2
(ii) 𝑔(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 − 4𝑥 2 + 5𝑥 − 2; 2, 1, 1
Sol:
(𝑖) 𝑓(𝑥) = 2𝑥 3 + 𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 + 2
1 1 3 1 2 1
𝑓 (2) = 2 (2) + (2) − 5 (2) + 2
2 1 5 −4
=8+4−2+2= +2=0
2
𝑓(1) = 2(1)3 + (1)2
− 5(1) + 2 = 2 + 1 − 5 + 2 = 0
𝑓(−2) = 𝑞(−2) + (−2)2 − 5(−2) + 2
3
= −16 + 4 + 10 + 2
= −16 + 16 = 0
−𝑏
= ∝ +𝛽 + 𝛾 = 𝑎
1 −1
+1−2=
2 2
1 −1
−1=
2 2
1 −1
=
2 2
𝑐
𝛼𝛽. 𝛽𝛾 + 𝑟𝛼 = 𝑎
1 1 −5
× 1 + 1 × −2 + −2 × 2 =
2 2
1 −5
−2−1=
2 2
−5 −5
=
2 2
(𝑖𝑖) 𝑔(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 − 4𝑥 2 + 5 × −2
𝑔(2) = (2)3 − 4(2)2 + 5(2) − 2 = 8 − 16 + 10 − 2 = 18 − 18 = 0
𝑔(1) = [1]3 − 4[1]2 + 5[1] − 2 = 1 − 4 + 5 − 2 = 6 − 6 = 0
−𝑏
𝛼+𝛽+𝛾= (2) + 1 + 1 = −(−4) = 4 = 4
𝑎
𝑐
𝛼 𝛽 + 𝛽 𝛾 + 𝛾𝛼 = 𝑎
2×1+1𝛼1+1×2=5
2+1+2=5
5=5
𝛼𝛽𝛾 = −(−2)
2×1×1=2
2=2
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2. Find a cubic polynomial with the sum, sum of the product of its zeroes taken two at a time,
and product of its zeros as 3, −1 and −3 respectively.
Sol:
Any cubic polynomial is of the form 𝑎𝑥 3 + 𝑏𝑥 2 + 𝑐𝑥 + 𝑑 = 𝑥 3 −
𝑠𝑢𝑚 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠 (𝑥 2 )[product of zeroes] + sum of the products of its zeroes × - product
of zeroes
= 𝑥 3 − 2𝑥 2 + (3 − 𝑥) + 3
= k [𝑥 3 − 3𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 3]
k is any non-zero real numbers
3. If the zeros of the polynomial f(x) = 2x3 − 15x2 + 37x − 30 are in A.P., find them.
Sol:
Let 𝛼 = a – d , 𝛽 = a and 𝛾 = a + d be the zeroes of polynomial.
𝑓(𝑥) = 2𝑥 3 − 15𝑥 2 + 37𝑥 − 30
−15 15
𝛼 + 𝛽 + 𝛾 = −( )=
2 2
−30
𝛼𝛽𝛾 = − ( ) = 15
2
15
a–d+a+a+d= and 𝑎(𝑎 − 𝑑)(𝑎 + 𝑎) = 15
2
15 5
3a = ,a=2
2
𝑎(𝑎2 − 𝑑 2 ) = 15
15×2 5 2 25−6
𝑎2 − 𝑎2 = ⇒ (2) − 𝑑2 = 6 ⇒⇒ = 𝑑2
5 4
1 1
𝑑2 = 4 ⇒ 𝑑 = 2
5 1 4
∴𝛼 =2−2 = 2= 2
5 5
𝛽=2=2
5 1
𝛾 =2+2=3
4. Find the condition that the zeros of the polynomial f(x) = x3 + 3px2 + 3qx + r may be in
A.P.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 + 3𝑝𝑥 2 + 3𝑞𝑥 + 𝑞
𝐿𝑒𝑡 𝑎 − 𝑑, 𝑎, 𝑎 + 𝑑 be the zeroes of the polynomial
−𝑏
𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑠𝑢𝑚 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠 = 𝑎
𝑏
𝑎+𝑎−𝑑+𝑎+𝑑 =𝑎
3𝑎 = −3𝑝
a = −𝑝
Since a is the zero of the polynomial f(x) therefore f(a) = 0 ⇒ [𝑎]2 + 3𝑝𝑎2 + 3𝑞𝑎 + 𝑟 = 0
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
∴ 𝑓(𝑎) = 0 ⇒ [𝑎]2 + 3𝑝𝑎2 + 3𝑞𝑎 + 𝑟 = 0
⇒ 𝑝3 + 3𝑝(−𝑝)2 + 3𝑞(−𝑝) + 𝑟 = 0
⇒ −𝑝3 + 3𝑝2 − 𝑝𝑞 + 𝑟 = 0
⇒ 2𝑝3 − 𝑝𝑞 + 𝑟 = 0
5. If the zeroes of the polynomial 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑎𝑥 3 + 3𝑏𝑥 2 + 3𝑐𝑥 + 𝑑 are in A.P., prove that
2𝑏 3 − 3𝑎𝑏𝑐 + 𝑎2 𝑑 = 0
Sol:
Let a – d, a, a + d be the zeroes of the polynomial f(x)
−3𝑏
The sum of zeroes ⇒ a – d + a + a + d = 𝑎
3𝑏 −3𝑏 −𝑏
⇒ +3a = − ⇒ 𝑎 = 𝑎×3 𝑎 =
𝑎 𝑎
f(a) = 0 ⇒ a(a)2 + 3b(a)2 + 3 c(a) + d = 0
−𝑏 3 3𝑏 2 3𝑏𝑐
=a(𝑎) + − +𝑑 =0
𝑎2 𝑎
2𝑏 3 3𝑏𝑐
⇒ − +𝑑 =0
𝑎2 𝑎
2𝑏 3 −3𝑎𝑏𝑐+𝑎2 𝑑
⇒ =0
𝑎2
⇒ 2𝑏 3 − 3𝑎𝑏𝑐 + 𝑎2 𝑑 = 0
6. If the zeroes of the polynomial 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 − 12𝑥 2 + 39𝑥 + 𝑘 are in A.P., find the value of
k.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 − 12𝑥 2 + 39𝑥 − 𝑘
Let 𝑎 − 𝑑, 𝑎, 𝑎 + 𝑑 be the zeroes of the polynomial f(x)
The sum of the zeroes = 12
3a = 12
a=4
𝑓(𝑎), −𝑎(𝑥)3 − 𝑙 2 (4)2 + 39(4) + 𝑘 = 0
64 – 192 + 156 + k = 0
= −28 = 𝑘
k = −28
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 2.3
1. Apply division algorithm to find the quotient q(x) and remainder r(x) on dividing f(x) by
g(x) in each of the following:
(i) 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 − 6𝑥 2 + 11𝑥 − 6, g(x) = 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 + 1
(ii) 𝑓(𝑥) = 10𝑥 4 + 17𝑥 3 − 62𝑥 2 + 30𝑥 − 105(𝑥) = 2𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 + 1
(iii) 𝑓(𝑥) = 4𝑥 3 + 8𝑥 2 + 8𝑥 + 7: 9(𝑥) = 2𝑥 2 − 𝑥 + 1
(iv) 𝑓(𝑥) = 15𝑥 3 − 20𝑥 2 + 13𝑥 − 12; 𝑔(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 + 2
Sol:
(i) 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 − 6𝑥 2 + 11𝑥 − 6
g(x) = 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 + 1
𝑥−7
𝑥 + 𝑥 + 1 𝑥 3 − 6𝑥 2 + 11𝑥 − 6
2
𝑥3 + 𝑥2 + 𝑥
−7𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 − 7
−7𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 − 7
17𝑥 − 1
(ii) 𝑓(𝑥) = 10𝑥 + 17𝑥 3 − 62𝑥 2 + 30𝑥 − 105(𝑥) = 2𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 + 1
4
5𝑥 2 − 9𝑥 − 2
2𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 + 1 10𝑥 4 + 17𝑥 3 − 62𝑥 2 + 30𝑥 − 3
10𝑥 4 + 35𝑥 3 + 5𝑥 2
−18𝑥 3 − 67𝑥 2 + 30𝑥
−18𝑥 3 ± 63𝑥 2 + 9𝑥
−4𝑥 2 + 39𝑥 − 3
±4𝑥 2 ± 14𝑥 ± 2
53𝑥 − 1
(iii) 𝑓(𝑥) = 4𝑥 + 8𝑥 + 8𝑥 + 7: 9(𝑥) = 2𝑥 2 − 𝑥 + 1
3 2
2x – 5
2𝑥 − 2 + 1 4𝑥 + 8𝑥 2 + 82 + 7
2 3
4𝑥 3 ∓ 2𝑥 2 ± 2𝑥
10𝑥 2 + 6𝑥 + 7
10𝑥 2 ± 5𝑥 ± 5
11x – 2
(iv) 𝑓(𝑥) = 15𝑥 − 20𝑥 + 13𝑥 − 12; 𝑔(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 + 2
3 2
15𝑥 + 10
𝑥 − 2𝑥 + 2 15𝑥 − 20𝑥 2 + 13𝑥 − 12
2 3
3𝑥 3 + 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 5
2𝑥 2 − 𝑥 + 3 6𝑥 5 − 𝑥 4 + 4𝑥 3 − 5𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 15
6𝑥 5 − 3𝑥 4 + 9𝑥 3
2𝑥 4 − 5𝑥 3 − 5𝑥 2
2𝑥 4 ∓ 𝑥 3 ± 3𝑥 2
−4𝑥 3 − 8𝑥 2 − 𝑥
∓4𝑥 3 ± 2𝑥 2 − 6𝑥
−10𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 − 15
∓10𝑥 ± 15𝑥 ∓ 15
0
3. Obtain all zeros of the polynomial f(x) = 2x4 + x3 − 14x2 − 19x − 6, if two of its zeros are
−2 and −1.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 2𝑥 4 + 𝑥 3 − 14𝑥 2 − 19𝑥 − 6
If the two zeroes of the polynomial are -2 and -1, then its factors are (x + 2) and (x + 1)
(𝑥 + 2)(𝑥 + 1) = 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 + 2𝑥 = 𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 + 2
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 − 3
𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 + 2 2𝑥 4 + 𝑥 3 − 14𝑥 2 − 19𝑥 − 6
2𝑥 4 + 6𝑥 3 + 4𝑥 2
−5𝑥 3 − 18𝑥 2 − 19𝑥
−5𝑥 3 ∓ 15𝑥 2 ∓ 10𝑥
−3𝑥 2 − 9𝑥 − 6
−3𝑥 2 − 9𝑥 − 6
∴ 2𝑥 4 + 𝑥 3 − 14𝑥 2 − 19𝑥 − 6
= (2𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 − 3)[𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 + 2] = [2𝑥 + 1][𝑥 − 3][𝑥 + 2][𝑥 + 1]
−1
∴ zero all x = , 3, −2, −1
2
4. Obtain all zeros of f(x) = x3 + 13x2 + 32x + 20, if one of its zeros is −2.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 + 13𝑥 2 + 32𝑥 + 20
𝑥 2 + 11𝑥 + 10
𝑥 + 2 𝑥 3 + 13𝑥 2 + 32𝑥 + 20
𝑥 3 ± 2𝑥 2
11𝑥 2 + 32𝑥 + 20
11𝑥 2 ± 22𝑥
10x + 20
10x + 20
0
2 2
(𝑥 + 11𝑥 + 10) = 𝑥 + 10𝑥 + 𝑥 + 20(𝑥 + 10) + 1(𝑥 + 10) = (𝑥 + 1)(𝑥 + 10)
∴ The zeroes of the polynomial are -1, -10, -2.
5. Obtain all zeros of the polynomial 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 4 − 3𝑥 2 = 𝑥 2 + 9𝑥 − 6 if two of its zeros are
−√3, 𝑎𝑛𝑑 √3.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = (𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 + 2) = (𝑥 + √3)& (𝑥 − √3) = 𝑥 2 − 3
𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 + 2
𝑥 2 − 3 𝑥 4 − 3𝑥 2 = 𝑥 2 + 9𝑥 − 6
𝑥 4 − 3𝑥 2
−3𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 2 + 9𝑥
−3𝑥 2 ± 9𝑥
2
2𝑥 − 6
2𝑥 2 − 6
(𝑥 2 − 3)(𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 + 2) = (𝑥 + √3)(𝑥 − √3)(𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 𝑥 + 2)
= (𝑥 + √3)(𝑥 − √3) (𝑥 − 2)(𝑥 − 2)
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
6. Find all zeros of the polynomial 𝑓(𝑥) = 2𝑥 4 − 2𝑥 3 − 7𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 + 6, if its two zeroes are
3 3
−√2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 √2
Sol:
3 3
If the zeroes of the polynomial are −√2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 √2
√3 3 𝑥 2 −3
Its factors are (𝑥 + ) (𝑥 − √2) =
2 2
3 3
x = −1, 2, √2 , −√2
3
= [2𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 4] (𝑥 2 − 2)
3
= (2𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 2𝑥 − 4) (𝑥 + √2)
3 3
= (𝑥 + 2)(𝑥 − 2) [𝑥 + √2] [𝑥 − √2]
3 3
𝑥 = −1, 2, √2 − √2
8. What must be subtracted from the polynomial 𝑥 4 + 2𝑥 3 − 13𝑥 2 − 12𝑥 + 21, so that the
resulting polynomial is exactly divisible by 𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 3?
Sol:
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑥 2 + 6𝑥 + 8
𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 3 𝑥 4 + 2𝑥 3 − 13𝑥 2 − 12𝑥 + 21
𝑥 4 − 4𝑥 3 + 3𝑥 2
6𝑥 3 − 16𝑥 2 − 12𝑥
6𝑥 3 − 24𝑥 2 − 18𝑥
8𝑥 2 − 30𝑥 + 21
8𝑥 2 − 32𝑥 + 21
2x – 2
We must subtract [2𝑥 − 2] + 10𝑚 the given polynomial so as to get the resulting
polynomial exactly divisible by 𝑥 2 − 𝑥 + 3
9. Find all the zeroes of the polynomial 𝑥 4 + 𝑥 3 − 34𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 120, if two of its zeroes are
2 and −2.
Sol:
⇒ 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 4 + 𝑥 3 − 34𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 120
⇒ x = −2 is a solution
x = −2 is a factor
x = −2 is a solution
x = +2 is a factor
here,
(𝑥 − 2)(𝑥 + 2)𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑓(𝑥)
𝑥 2 − 4 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟
𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 30
𝑥 2 − 4 𝑥 4 + 𝑥 3 − 34𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 120
−𝑥 4 − 4𝑥 2
𝑥 3 − 30𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 120
𝑥3 − 4𝑥
2
−30𝑥 + 120
2
−30x + 120
0
Hence, 𝑥 + 𝑥 − 34𝑥 − 4𝑥 + 120 = (𝑥 2 − 4)(𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 30)
4 3 2
10. Find all zeros of the polynomial 2x4 + 7x3 − 19x2 − 14x + 30, if two of its zeros are √2
and −√2.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 2𝑥 4 + 7𝑥 3 − 19𝑥 2 − 14𝑥 + 30
𝑥 = √2 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛
𝑥 − √2 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛
𝑥 − √2 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛
𝑥 + √2 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟
Here, (𝑥 + √2)(𝑥 − √2)𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑓(𝑥)
𝑥 2 − 2 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑓(𝑥)
2𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 − 15
𝑥 2 − 2 2𝑥 4 + 7𝑥 3 − 192 − 14𝑥 + 30
2𝑥 4 − 4𝑥 2
7𝑥 3 − 15𝑥 2 − 14𝑥
7𝑥 3 − −14𝑥
2
−15𝑥 + 30
2
−15𝑥 + 30
0
Hence, 2𝑥 + 7𝑥 − 19𝑥 − 14𝑥 + 30 = (𝑥 − 2)(2𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 − 15)
4 3 2 2
11. Find all the zeros of the polynomial 2x3 + x2 − 6x − 3, if two of its zeros are −√3 and √3.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 2𝑥 3 + 𝑥 2 − 6𝑥 − 3
x = −√3 is a solution
𝑥 + √3 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟
𝑥 = √3 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛
𝑥 − √3 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟
Here, (𝑥 + √3)(𝑥 − √3)𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑓(𝑥)
𝑥 2 − 3 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑓(𝑥)
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2x + 1
𝑥 − 3 2𝑥 3 + 𝑥 2 − 6𝑥 − 3
2
2𝑥 3 − 6𝑥
2
𝑥 −3
2
𝑥 −3
0
Hence, 2𝑥 + 𝑥 − 6𝑥 − 3 = (𝑥 2 − 3)(2𝑥 + 1)
3 2
12. Find all the zeros of the polynomial x3 + 3x2 − 2x − 6, if two of its zeros are −√2 and √2.
Sol:
Since −√2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 √2 are zeroes of polynomial 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 + 3𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 6
(𝑥 + √2)(𝑥 − √2) = 𝑥 2 − 2 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑓(𝑥)
Now we divide 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 + 3𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 6 by
𝑔(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 − 2 𝑡𝑜 𝑏 𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑑 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑜𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠 𝑜𝑓 𝑓(𝑥)
𝑥+3
𝑥 − 2 𝑥 3 + 3𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 6
2
𝑥3 − 2𝑥
2
3𝑥 −6
2
3𝑥 −6
0
By division algorithm, we have
⇒ 𝑥 3 + 3𝑥 2 − 2 − 6 = (𝑥 2 − 2)(𝑥 + 3)
⇒ 𝑥 3 + 3𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 6 = (𝑥 + √2)(𝑥 − √2)(𝑥 + 3)
Here the zeroes of the given polynomials are −√2, √2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 − 3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 3.1
1. Akhila went to a fair in her village. She wanted to enjoy rides on the Giant Wheel and play
Hoopla (a game in which you throw a rig on the items kept in the stall, and if the ring
covers any object completely you get it). The number of times she played Hoopla is half
the number of rides she had on the Giant Wheel. Each ride costs Rs 3, and a game of
Hoopla costs Rs 4. If she spent Rs 20 in the fair, represent this situation algebraically and
graphically.
Sol:
The pair of equations formed is:
1
y x
2
i.e., x 2 y 0 ……..(1)
3x 4 y 20 ………(2)
Let us represent these equations graphically. For this, we need at least two solutions for
each equation. We give these solutions in Table
x 0 2 x 0 2 4
x 20 3x
y 0 1 y 5 0 2
2 4
Recall from Class IX that there are infinitely many solutions of each linear equation. So
each of you choose any two values, which may not be the ones we have chosen. Can you
guess why we have chosen x O in the first equation and in the second equation? When
one of the variables is zero, the equation reduces to a linear equation is one variable, which
can be solved easily. For instance, putting x O in Equation (2), we get 4y = 20 i.e.,
20 20
y 5. Similarly, putting y O in Equation (2), we get 3x 20 i.e., x . But as is
3 3
not an integer, it will not be easy to plot exactly on the graph paper. So, we choose y = 2
which gives x = 4, an integral value.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Plot the points A O, O , B 2,1 and P O,5 , Q 412 , corresponding to the draw the lines
AB and PQ, representing the equations x 2 y O and 3x 4 y 20, as shown in figure
In fig., observe that the two lines representing the two equations are intersecting at the
point (4,2),
2. Aftab tells his daughter, “Seven years ago, I was seven times as old as you were then. Also,
three years from now, I shall be three times as old as you will be.” Is not this interesting?
Represent this situation algebraically and graphically.
Sol:
Let the present age of Aftab and his daughter be x and y respectively. Seven years ago.
Age of Ahab x 7
Age of his daughter y 7
According to the given condition.
x 7 7 y 7
x 7 7 y 49
x 7 y 42
Three years hence
Age of Aftab x 3
Age of his daughter y 3
According to the given condition,
x 3 3 y 3
x 3 3y 9
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 3y 6
Thus, the given condition can be algebraically represented as
x 7 y 42
x 3y 6
x 7 y 42 x 42 7 y
Three solution of this equation can be written in a table as follows:
x 7 0 7
y 5 6 7
x 3y 6 x 6 3y
Three solution of this equation can be written in a table as follows:
x 6 3 0
y 0 -1 -2
The graphical representation is as follows:
Concept insight In order to represent a given situation mathematically, first see what we
need to find out in the problem. Here. Aftab and his daughters present age needs to be
found so, so the ages will be represented by variables z and y. The problem talks about
their ages seven years ago and three years from now. Here, the words ’seven years ago’
means we have to subtract 7 from their present ages. and ‘three years from now’ or three
years hence means we have to add 3 to their present ages. Remember in order to represent
the algebraic equations graphically the solution set of equations must be taken as whole
numbers only for the accuracy. Graph of the two linear equations will be represented by a
straight line.
3. The path of a train A is given by the equation 3x + 4y − 12 = 0 and the path of another
train B is given by the equation 6x + 8y − 48 = 0. Represent this situation graphically.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
The paths of two trains are giver by the following pair of linear equations.
3x 4 y 12 0 ... 1
6 x 8 y 48 0 ... 2
In order to represent the above pair of linear equations graphically. We need two points on
the line representing each equation. That is, we find two solutions of each equation as given
below:
We have,
3x 4 y 12 0
Putting y 0, we get
3x 4 0 12 0
3x 12
12
x 4
3
Putting x 0, we get
3 0 4 y 12 0
4 y 12
12
y 3
4
Thus, two solution of equation 3x 4 y 12 0 are 0,3 and 4, 0
We have,
6 x 8 y 48 0
Putting x 0, we get
6 0 8 y 48 0
8 y 48
48
y
8
y6
Putting y 0, we get
6 x 8 0 48 0
6 x 48
48
x 8
6
Thus, two solution of equation 6 x 8 y 48 0 are 0, 6 and 8, 0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
4. Gloria is walking along the path joining (− 2, 3) and (2, − 2), while Suresh is walking
along the path joining (0, 5) and (4, 0). Represent this situation graphically.
Sol:
It is given that Gloria is walking along the path Joining 2,3 and 2, 2 , while
Suresh is walking along the path joining 0,5 and 4, 0 .
We observe that the lines are parallel and they do not intersect anywhere.
𝑎 𝑏 𝑐
5. On comparing the ratios 𝑎1 , 𝑏1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐1 and and without drawing them, find out whether the
2 2 2
lines representing the following pairs of linear equations intersect at a point, are parallel or
coincide:
(i) 5x− 4y + 8 = 0 (ii) 9x + 3y + 12 = 0 (iii) 6x − 3y + 10 = 0
7x + 6y − 9 = 0 18x + 6y + 24 = 0 2x – y + 9 = 0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
We have,
5x 4 y 8 0
7x 6 y 9 0
Here,
a1 5, b1 4, c1 8
a2 7, b2 6, c2 9
We have,
a1 5 b1 4 2 c 8 8
, and 1
a2 7 b2 6 3 c2 9 9
a1 b1
a2 b2
Two lines are intersecting with each other at a point.
We have,
9 x 3 y 12 0
18 6 y 24 0
Here,
a1 9, b1 3, c1 12
a2 18, b2 6, c2 24
Now,
a1 9 1
,
a2 18 2
b1 3 1
b2 6 2
c1 12 1
And
c2 24 2
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
Both the lines coincide.
We have,
6 x 3 y 10 0
2x y 9 0
Here,
a1 6, b1 3, c1 10
a2 2, b2 1, c2 9
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 6 3
,
a2 2 1
b1 3 3
,
b2 1 1
c1 10
And
c2 9
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
The lines are parallel
6. Given the linear equation 2x + 3y - 8 = 0, write another linear equation in two variables such
that the geometrical representation of the pair so formed is:
(i) intersecting lines (ii) parallel lines (iii) coincident lines.
Sol:
We have,
2x 3 y 8 0
Let another equation of line is:
4x 9 y 4 0
Here,
a1 2, b1 3, c1 8
a2 4, b2 9, c2 4
Now,
a1 2 1
,
a2 4 2
b1 3 1
,
b2 9 3
c1 8 2
And
c2 4 1
a1 b1
a2 b2
2 x 3 y 8 0 and 4 x 9 y 4 0 intersect each other at one point.
Hence, required equation of line is 4 x 9 y 4 0
We have,
2x 3 y 8 0
Let another equation of line is:
4x 6 y 4 0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Here,
a1 2, b1 3, c1 8
a2 4, b2 6, c2 4
Now,
a1 2 1
,
a2 4 2
b1 3 1
,
b2 6 2
c1 8 2
And
c2 4 1
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
Lines are parallel to each other.
Hence, required equation of line is 4 x 6 y 4 0.
7. The cost of 2kg of apples and 1 kg of grapes on a day was found to be Rs 160. After a
month, the cost of 4kg of apples and 2kg of grapes is Rs 300. Represent the situation
algebraically and geometrically.
Sol:
Let the cost of 1 kg of apples and 1 kg grapes be Rs x and Rs y.
The given conditions can be algebraically represented as:
2 x y 160
4 x 2 y 300
2 x y 160 y 160 2 x
Three solutions of this equation cab be written in a table as follows:
x 50 60 70
y 60 40 20
300 4 x
4 x 2 y 300 y
2
Three solutions of this equation cab be written in a table as follows:
x 70 80 75
y 10 -10 0
Concept insight: cost of apples and grapes needs to be found so the cost of 1 kg apples and
1kg grapes will be taken as the variables from the given condition of collective cost of
apples and grapes, a pair of linear equations in two variables will be obtained. Then In
order to represent the obtained equations graphically, take the values of variables as whole
numbers only. Since these values are Large so take the suitable scale.
Exercise 3.2
1. x y 3
2 x 5 y 12
Sol:
We have
x y 3
2 x 5 y 12
Now,
x y 3
When y 0, we have
x3
When x 0, we have
y 3
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x y 3
x 0 3
y 3 0
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 5 y 12
12 2 x
y
5
When x 1, we have
12 11
y 2
5
When x 4, we have
12 1 4
y 4
5
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x 5 y 12
x 1 -4
y 2 4
Graph of the equation x y 3 and 2 x 5 y 12 :
x 2y 5
2.
2 x 3 y 10
Sol:
We have
x 2y 5
2 x 3 y 10
Now,
x 2y 5
x 5 2y
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
When y 0, we have
x 5 2 0 5
When y 2, we have
x 5 2 2 1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x 2 y 5
x 5 1
y 0 -2
Now,
2 x 3 y 10
2 x 10 3 y
10 3 y
x
2
When y 0, we have
10
x 5
2
When y 0, we have
10
x 5
2
When y 2, we have
10 3 2
x 2
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x 3 y 10
x 5 2
y 0 2
Graph of the equation x 2 y 5 and 2 x 3 y 10 :
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Clearly, two lines intersect at (5,0).
Hence, x 5, y 0 is the solution of the given system of equations.
3x y 1 0
3.
2x 3y 8 0
Sol:
We have,
3x y 1 0
2x 3y 8 0
Now,
3x y 1 0
y 1 3x
When x 0, we have
y 1
When x 1, we have
y 1 3 1 2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 3x y 1 0
x -1 0
y 2 -1
Now,
2x 3y 8 0
2x 3y 8
3y 8
x
2
When y 0, we have
3 0 8
x 4
2
When y 2, we have
3 2 8
x 1
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x 3 y 8 0
x -4 -1
y 0 -2
Graph of the equation are:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2x y 3 0
4.
2x 3y 7 0
Sol:
We have
2x y 3 0
2x 3y 7 0
Now,
2x y 3 0
y 3 2x
When x 0, we have
y 3
When x 1, we have
y 1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x y 3 0
x 0 1
y 3 1
Now,
2x 3y 7 0
3y 2x 7
25 7
y 1
3
When x 5, we have
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
25 7
y 1
3
When x 2, we have
2 2 7
y 1
3
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x 3 y 7 0
x 2 5
y -1 1
Graph of the given equation are
x y 6
5.
x y 2
Sol:
We have.
x y 6
x y 2
Now,
x y 6
y 6 x
When x 2, we have
y4
When x 3, we have
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y 3
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x y 6
x 2 3
y 4 3
Now,
x y 2
y x2
When x 0, we have
y 2
When x 2, we have
y0
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x y 6
x 0 2
y -2 0
Graph of the given equation are
x 2y 6
6.
3x 6 y 0
Sol:
We have.
x 2y 6
3x 6 y 0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now,
x 2y 6
x 6 2y
When y 2, we have
x 6 2 2 2
When y 3, we have
x 6 2 3 0
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x 2 y 6
x 2 0
y -2 -3
Now,
3x 6 y 0
3x 6 y
x 2y
When y 0, we have
x0
When y 1, we have
x2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 3x 6 y 0
x 0 2
y 0 1
Graph of the given equation are
Clearly, two lines are parallel to each other. So, the two lines have no common point
Hence, the given system of equations has no solution.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y 4
7.
2x 3y 3
Sol:
We have.
x y 4
2x 3y 3
Now,
x y 4
x 4 y
When y 0, we have
x4
When y 2, we have
x2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x y 4
x 4 2
y 0 2
Now,
2x 3y 3
2x 3y 3
3y 3
x
2
When y 1, we have
x3
When y 1, we have
x0
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x 3 y 3
x 3 0
y 1 -1
2x 3y 4
8.
x y3 0
Sol:
We have.
2x 3y 4
x y3 0
Now,
2x 3y 4
2x 4 3y
4 3y
x
2
When y 0, we have
4 3 2
x 1
2
When y 2, we have
4 3 2
x 1
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x 3 y 4
x -1 2
y 2 0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now,
x y3 0
x y 3
When y 3, we have
x0
When y 4, we have
x 1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x y 3 0
x 0 1
y 3 4
Graph of the given equation are
2 x 3 y 13 0
9.
3x 2 y 12 0
Sol:
We have,
2 x 3 y 13 0
3x 2 y 12 0
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 x 3 y 13 0
2 x 3 y 13
3 y 13
x
2
When y 1, we have
3 1 13
x 5
2
When y 3, we have
3 3 13
x 2
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x 3 y 13 0
x -5 -2
y 1 3
Now,
3x 2 y 12 0
3x 2 y 12
2 y 12
x
3
When y 0, we have
2 0 12
x 14
3
When y 3, we have
2 3 12
x 2
3
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 3 y 2 y 12 0
x -4 -2
y 0 3
2x 3 y 5 0
10.
3x 2 y 12 0
Sol:
We have,
2x 3 y 5 0
3x 2 y 12 0
Now,
2x 3y 5 0
2 x 3 y 5
3 y 5
x
2
When y 1, we have
3 1 5
x 4
2
When y 1, we have
3 1 5
x 1
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x 3 y 5 0
x -4 -1
y 1 -1
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now,
3x 2 y 12 0
3x 2 y 12
2 y 12
x
3
When y 0, we have
2 0 12
x 4
3
When y 3, we have
2 3 12
x 6
3
Thus we have the following table giving points on the line 3x 2 y 12 0
x 4 6
y 0 3
Graph of the given equations are:
Show graphically that each one of the following systems of equations has infinitely many
solutions:
2x 3 y 6
11.
4 x 6 y 12
Sol:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
We have,
2x 3 y 6
4 x 6 y 12
Now,
2x 3y 6
2x 6 3y
6 3y
x
2
When y 0, we have
x3
When y 2, we have
6 3 2
x 0
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x 3 y 6
x 0 3
y 2 0
Now,
4 x 6 y 12
4 x 12 6 y
12 6 y
x
4
When y 0, we have
x3
When y 2, we have
12 6 2
x 0
3
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 4 x 6 y 12
x 0 3
y 2 0
Graph of the given equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 2y 5
12.
3x 6 y 15
Sol:
We have,
x 2y 5
3x 6 y 15
Now,
x 2y 5
x 2y 5
When y 1, we have
x 2 1 5 3
When y 0, we have
x 2 0 5 5
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x 2 y 5
x 3 5
y 1 0
Now,
3x 6 y 15
3x 15 6 y
15 6 y
x
3
When y 2, we have
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
15 6 2
x 1
3
When y 3, we have
15 6 3
x 1
3
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 3x 6 y 15
x 1 -1
y -2 -3
Graph of the given equations:
3x y 8
13.
6 x 2 y 16
Sol:
We have,
3x y 8
6 x 2 y 16
Now,
3x y 8
y 8 3x
When x 2, we have
y 8, 3 2 2
When x 3, we have
y 8, 3 3 1
Thus we have the following table giving points on the line 3x y 8
x 2 3
y 2 -1
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now,
6 x 2 y 16
2 y 16 6 x
16 6 x
y
2
When x 1, we have
16 6 1
y 5
2
When x 3, we have
16 6 3
y 1
2
Thus we have the following table giving points on the line 6 x 2 y 16
x 1 3
y 5 -1
Graph of the given equations:
x 2 y 11 0
14.
3x 6 y 33 0
Sol:
We have,
x 2 y 11 0
3x 6 y 33 0
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 2 y 11 0
x 2 y 11
When y 5, we have
x 2 5 11 1
When x 4, we have
x 2 4 11 3
Thus we have the following table giving points on the line x 2 y 11 0
x -1 -3
y 5 4
Now,
3x 6 y 33 0
3x 6 y 33
6 y 33
x 1
3
When y 6, we have
6 6 33
x 1
3
When y 5, we have
6 5 33
x 1
2
Thus we have the following table giving points on the line 3x 6 y 33 0
x 1 -1
y 6 5
Graph of the given equations:
Show graphically that each one of the following systems of equations is in-consistent (i.e.,
has no solution)
3x 5 y 20
15.
6 x 10 y 40
Sol:
We have,
3x 5 y 20
6 x 10 y 40
Now
3x 5 y 20
5 y 20
x
3
When y 1, we have
5 1 20
x 5
3
When y 4, we have
5 4 20
x 0
3
Thus we have the following table giving points on the line 3x 5 y 20
x 5 0
y -1 -4
Now
6 x 10 y 40
6 x 40 10 y
40 10 y
x
6
When y 4, we have
40 10 4
x 0
6
When y 1, we have
40 10 1
x 5
6
Thus we have the following table giving points on the line 6 x 10 y 40
x 0 -5
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y 4 1
Graph of the given equations:
x 2y 6
16.
3x 6 y 0
Sol:
We have
x 2y 6
3x 6 y 0
Now,
x 2y 6
x 6 2y
When y 0, we have
x 6 2 0 6
When y 2, we have
x 6 2 2 2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x 2 y 6
x 6 2
y 0 -2
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3x 6 y 0
3x 6 y
6y
x
3
x 2y
When y 0, we have
x 2 0 0
When y 1, we have
x 2 1 2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 3x 6 y 0
x 0 2
y 0 1
Graph of the given equations:
We find the lines represented by equations x 2 y 6 and 3x 6 y 0 are parallel. So, the
two lines have no common point.
Hence, the given system of equations is in-consistent.
2y x 9
17.
6 y 3x 21
Sol:
We have
2y x 9
6 y 3x 21
Now,
2y x 9
2y 9 x
x 2y 9
When y 3, we have
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 2 3 9 3
When y 4, we have
x 2 4 9 1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x x 9
x -3 -1
y 3 4
Now,
6 y 3 x 21
6 y 21 3 x
3x 6 y 21
3 2 y 7
x
3
x 2y 7
When y 2, we have
x 2 2 7 3
When y 3, we have
x 2 3 7 1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 6 y 3x 21.
x -3 -1
y 2 3
Graph of the given equations:
We find the lines represented by equations 2 y x 9 and 6 y 3x 21 are parallel. So, the
two lines have no common point.
Hence, the given system of equations is in-consistent.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3x 4 y 1 0
18. 8
2x y 5 0
3
Sol:
We have
3x 4 y 1 0
8
2x y 5 0
3
Now,
3x 4 y 1 0
3x 1 4 y
1 4 y
x
3
When y 2, we have
1 4 2
x 3
3
When y 1, we have
1 4 1
x 1
3
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 3x 4 y 1 0.
x -1 3
y -1 2
Now,
8
2x y 5 0
3
6 x 8 y 15
0
3
6 x 8 y 15 0
6 x 8 y 15
8 y 15
x
6
When y 0, we have
8 0 15
x 2.5
6
When y 3, we have
8 3 15
x 1.5
6
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
8
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x y 5 0.
3
x -2.5 1.5
y 0 3
Graph of the given equations:
8
We find the lines represented by equations 3x 4 y 1 0 and 2 x y 5 0 are
3
parallel. So, the two lines have no common point.
Hence, the given system of equations is in-consistent.
19. Determine graphically the vertices of the triangle, the equations of whose sides are given
below:
2y x 8
5 y x 14
(i) y 2x 1
yx
y0
(ii) 3x 3 y 10
Sol:
We have
2y x 8
5 y x 14
y 2x 1
Now,
2y x 8
2y 8 x
x 2y 8
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
When y 2, we have
x 2 2 8 4
When y 4, we have
x 2 4 8 0
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 y x 8.
x -4 0
y 2 4
Now,
5 y x 14
5 y 14 x
x 5 y 14
When y 2, we have
x 5 2 14 1
When y 3, we have
x 5 3 14 1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 5 y x 14.
x -4 1
y 2 3
We have
y 2x 1
y 1 2x
y 1
x
2
When y 3, we have
3 1
x 1
2
When y 1, we have
1 1
x 1
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line y 2 x 1.
x -1 1
y 1 3
Graph of the given equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
From the graph of the lines represented by the given equations, we observe that the lines
taken in pairs intersect each other at points A 4, 2 , B 1,3 and C 2,5
Hence, the vertices of the triangle are A 4, 2 , B 1,3 and C 2,5 .
The given system of equations is
yx
y0
3x 3 y 10
We have,
yx
When x 1, we have
y 1
When x 2, we have
y 2
Thus, we have the following table points on the line y x
x 1 -2
y 7/3 4/3
Graph of the given equation:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
From the graph of the lines represented by the given equations, we observe that the lines
10 5 5
taken in pairs intersect each other at points A 0, 0 , B , 0 and C ,
3 3 3
10 5 5
Hence, the required vertices of the triangle are A 0, 0 , B , 0 and C , .
0 3 3
21. Determine, by drawing graphs, whether the following system of linear equations has a
unique solution or not:
(i) 2x − 3y = 6, x + y = l (ii) 2y = 4x − 6, 2x = y + 3
Sol:
We have
2x 3y 6
x y 1
Now
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2x 3y 6
2x 6 3y
When y 0, we have
6 3y
x
2
When y 2, we have
6 3 2
x 0
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x 3 y 6
x 3 0
y 0 -2
Now,
x y 1
x 1 y
When y 1, we have
x 1 1 0
When y 0, we have
x 1 0 1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x y 1
x 0 1
y 1 0
Graph of the given equations:
We have,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 y 4x 6
2x y 3
Now,
2 y 4x 6
2 y 6 4x
4x 2 y 6
2y 6
x
4
x 1 4
y -1 5
Now,
2x y 3
y3
x
2
When y 1, we have
1 3
x 2
2
When y 3, we have
33
x 3
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x y 3
x 2 3
y 1 3
Graph of the given equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
22. Solve graphically each of the following systems of linear equations. Also find the
coordinates of the points where the lines meet axis of y.
2x 5 y 4 0
(i)
2x y 8 0
3x 2 y 12
(ii)
5x 2 y 4
2 x y 11 0
(iii)
x y 1 0
(iv) 𝑥 + 2𝑦 − 7 = 0
2𝑥 − 𝑦 − 4 = 0
3x y 5 0
(v)
2x y 5 0
2x y 5 0
(vi)
x y 3 0
Sol:
We have
2x 5 y 4 0
2x y 8 0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now,
2x 5 y 4 0
2x 5 y 4
5y 4
x
2
When y 2, we have
5 2 4
x 3
2
When y 4, we have
5 4 4
x 8
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x 5 y 4 0
x 3 8
y 2 4
Now,
2x y 8 0
2x 8 y
8 y
x
2
When y 4, we have
84
x 2
2
When y 2, we have
82
x 3
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x 5 y 4 0
x 3 8
y 2 4
Graph of the given equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 x y 11 0
y 11 2 x
When x 4, we have
y 11 2 4 3
When x 5, we have
y 11 2 5 1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x y 11 0
x 4 5
y 3 1
Now,
x y 1 0
x 1 y
y x 1
When x 2, we have
y 2 1 1
When x 3, we have
y 3 1 2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x y 1 0
x 2 3
y 1 2
Graph of the given equation
We have,
2 x y 11 0
x y 1 0
Now,
2 x y 11 0
y 11 2 x
When x 4, we have
y 11 2 4 3
When x 5, we have
y 11 2 5 1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x y 11 0
x 4 5
y 3 1
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y 1 0
x 1 y
y x 1
When x 2, we have
y 2 1 1
When x 3, we have
y 3 1 2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x y 1 0
x 2 3
y 1 2
Graph of the given equations:
x 5 3
y 1 2
2x y 4 0
Also,
y 2x 4
x 2 0
y 0 -4
From the graph of the three equations, we find that the three lines taken in pairs intersect
each other at points A 0, 0 , B 2, 4 and C 3,3 .
Hence, the vertices of the required triangle are 0, 0 , 2, 4 and 3,3 .
The system of the given equations is,
yx
3y x
x y 8
Now,
yx
x y
When y 0, we have
x0
When y 3, we have
x 3
Thus, we have the following table.
x 0 -3
y 0 -3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
We have
3y x
x 3y
When y 0, we have
x 3 0 0
When y 1, we have
y 3 1 3
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 -3
y 0 -1
We have
x y 8
x 8 y
When y 4, we have
x 84 4
When y 5, we have
x 85 3
Thus, we have the following table:
x 4 5
y 4 3
Graph of the given system of equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
From the graph of the three equations, we find that the three lines taken in pairs intersect
each other at points A 0, 0 , B 4, 4 and C 6, 2 .
Hence, the vertices of the required triangle are 0, 0 , 44 and 6, 2 .
24. Solve the following system of linear equations graphically and shade the region between
the two lines and x-axis:
2 x 3 y 12
(i)
x y 1
3x 2 y 4 0
(ii)
2x 3y 7 0
3x 2 y 11 0
(iii)
2 x 3 y 10 0
Sol:
The system of given equations is
2 x 3 y 12
x y 1
Now,
2 x 3 y 12
2 x 12 3 y
12 3 2
x 3
2
When y 2, we have
12 3 2
x 3
2
When y 4, we have
12 3 4
x 0
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 3
y 4 2
We have,
x y 1
x 1 y
When y 0, we have
x 1
When y 1, we have
x 11 2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Thus, we have the following table:
x 1 2
y 0 1
Graph of the given system of equations:
25. Draw the graphs of the following equations on the same graph paper:
2 x 3 y 12
x y 1
Sol:
The system of the given equations is
2 x 3 y 12
x y 1
Now,
2 x 3 y 12
2 x 12 3 y
12 3 y
x
2
When y 0, we have
12 3 0
x 6
2
When y 2, we have
12 3 2
x 3
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 6 3
y 0 2
We have
x y 1
x 1 y
When y 0, we have
x 1
When y 1, we have
x 1 1 0
Thus, we have the following table:
x 1 0
y 0 -1
Graph of the given system of equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Clearly, the two lines intersect at A 2, 4 . Hence x 2, y 4 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We also observe that the lines represented by the equations
4 x 3 y 4 0 and 4 x 3 y 20 0 meet x-axis at B 1, 0 and C 5, 0 respectively.
Thus, x 2, y 4 is the solution of the given system of equations.
Draw AD perpendicular from A on x-axis.
Clearly, we have
AD y coordinate of point A 2, 4
AD 4 and, BC 5 1 5 1 6
Area of the shaded region = Area of ABC
1
Area of the shaded region Base Height
2
1
BC AD
2
1
6 4
2
6 2
12 sq. units
Area of shaded region 12 sq. units
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
28. Solve the following system of linear equations graphically:
3x y 11 0
x y 1 0
Shade the region bounded by these lines and y -axis. Also, find the area of the region
bounded by these lines and y-axis.
Sol:
The given system of equation is
3x y 11 0
x y 1 0
Now,
3x y 11 0
y 11 3x
When x 0, we have
y 11 3 0 11
When x 3 we have
y 11 3 3 2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 3
y 11 2
We have
x y 1 0
x 1 y
y x 1
When x 0, we have
y 0 1 1
When x 3, we have
y 3 1 2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 3
y -1 2
Graph of the given system of equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Clearly, the two lines intersect at A 3, 2 . Hence x 3, y 2 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We so observe that the lines represented by the equations 3x y 11 0 and x y 1 0
meet y-axis at B 0,11 and C 0, 1 respectively.
Thus, x 3, y 2 is the solution of the given system of equations.
Draw AD perpendicular from A on y-axis.
Clearly, we have
AD x coordinate of point A 3, 2
AD 3 and, BC 11 1 11 1 12
Area of the shaded region = Area of ABC
1
Area of the shaded region Base Height
2
1
BC AD
2
1
12 3
2
63
18 sq. units
Area of the shaded region 18 sq. units
29. Solve graphically each of the following systems of linear equations. Also, find the
coordinates of the points where the lines meet the axis of x in each system:
2x y 2
(i)
4x y 8
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2x y 2
(ii)
4x y 8
x 2y 5
(iii)
2 x 3 y 4
2x 3 y 8
(iv)
x 2 y 3
Sol:
The given system of equation is
2x y 2
4x y 8
Now,
2x y 2
2x y 2
y2
x
2
When y 0, we have
02
x 1
2
When y 2, we have
22
x 2
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 1 2
y 0 2
We have,
4x y 8
4x y 8
y 8
x
4
When y 0, we have
08
x 2
4
When y 4 we have
4 8
x 1
4
Thus, we have the following table:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 2 1
y 0 -4
Graph of the given system of equations:
Clearly, the two lines intersect at A 2, 2 . Hence x 2, y 2 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We so observe that the lines represented by the equations 2 x y 6 and x 2 y 2 meet
x-axis at B 3, 0 and C 2, 0 respectively.
Clearly the two lines intersect at A 3, 4 . Hence x 3, y 4 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We so observe that the lines represented by the equations 2 x y 2 and 4 x y 8 meet
x-axis at B 1, 0 and C 2, 0 respectively
We have,
2 x 3 y 4
2x 3y 4
3y 4
x
2
When y 0, we have
3 0 4
x 2
2
When y 2, we have
3 2 4
x 1
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x -2 1
y 0 2
Graph of the given system of equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x -3 -1
y 0 1
Graph of the given system of equations:
Clearly, the two lines intersect at A 1, 2 . Hence x 1, y 2 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We also observe that the lines represented by the equations 2 x 3 y 8 and x 2 y 3
meet x-axis at B 4, 0 and C 3, 0 respectively.
We have,
2 x 3 y 18 0
2 x 18 3 y
18 3 y
x
2
When y 2, we have
18 3 2
x 6
2
When y 6, we have
18 3 6
x 0
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 6 0
y 2 6
We have
y20
y 2
Graph of the given system of equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
From the graph of the three equations, we find that the three lines taken in pairs intersect
each other at points A 3, 4 , B 0, 2 and C 6, 2 .
Hence, the vertices of the required triangle are 3, 4 , 0, 2 and 6, 2 .
From graph, we have
AD 4 2 2
BC 6 0 6
1
Area of ABC Base Height
2
1
BC AD
2
1
6 2
2
6 sq. units
Area of ABC 6 sq.units
Clearly, the two lines intersect at A 3, 4 . Hence, x 3, y 4 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We also observe that the lines represented by the equations
2 x 3 y 6 0 and 2 x 3 y 18 0 meet y-axis at B 0, 2 and C 0, 6 respectively.
Thus, x 3, y 4 is the solution of the given system of equations.
Draw AD perpendicular from A on y-axis.
Clearly, we have,
AD x coordinate of point A 3, 4
AD 3 and, BC 6 2 4
Area of the shaded region = Area of ABC
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
Area of the shaded region Base Height
2
1
BC AD
2
1
43
2
23
6 sq. units
Area of the region bounded by these two lines and y-axis is 6 sq. units.
Clearly, the two lines intersect at 4 5, 0 . Hence, x 5, y 0 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We also find that the two lines represented by the equations
4 x 5 y 20 0 and 3x 5 y 15 0 meet y-axis at B 0, 4 and C 0,3 respectively,
The vertices of the required triangle are 5, 0 , 0, 4 and 0,3 .
33. Draw the graphs of the equations 5x − y = 5 and 3x − y = 3. Determine the co-ordinates of
the vertices of the triangle formed by these lines and y-axis. Calculate the area of the
triangle so formed.
Sol:
5x y 5 y 5x 5
Three solutions of this equation can be written in a table as follows:
x 0 1 2
y -5 0 5
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3x y 3 y 3x 3
x 0 1 2
y -3 0 3
The graphical representation of the two lines will be as follows:
34. Form the pair of linear equations in the following problems, and find their solution
graphically:
(i) 10 students of class X took part in Mathematics quiz. If the number of girls is 4 more
than the number of boys, find the number of boys and girls who took part in the quiz.
(ii) 5 pencils and 7 pens together cost Rs 50, whereas 7 pencils and 5 pens together cost Rs
46. Find the cost of one pencil and a pen.
(iii)Champa went to a ‘sale’ to purchase some pants and skirts. When her friends asked her
how many of each she had bought, she answered, “The number of skirts is two less than
twice the number of pants purchased. Also, the number of skirts is four less than four
times the number of pants purchased.” Help her friends to find how many pants and
skirts Champa bought.
Sol:
(i) Let the number of girls and boys in the class be x and y respectively.
According to the given conditions, we have:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y 10
x y 4
x y 10 x 10 y
Three solutions of this equation can be written in a table as follows:
x 4 5 6
y 6 5 4
x y 4 x 4 y
Three solutions of this equation can be written in a table as follows:
x 5 4 3
y 1 0 -1
From the graph, it can be observed that the two lines intersect each other at the point 7, 3 .
So. x 7 and y 3.
Thus, the number of girls and boys in the class are 7 and 3 respectively.
(ii) Let the cost of one pencil and one pen be Rs x and Rs y respectively.
According to the given conditions, we have:
5 x 7 y 50
7 x 5 y 46
50 7 y
5 x 7 y 50 x
5
Three solutions of this equation can be written in a table as follows:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 3 10 -4
y 5 0 10
46 5 y
7 x 5 y 46 x
7
Three solutions of this equation can be written in a table as follows:
x 8 3 -2
y -2 5 12
From the graph. It can be observed that the two lines intersect each other at the point 3, 5 .
So. x 3 and y 5.
Therefore, the cost of one pencil and one pen are Rs 3 and Rs 5 respectively.
(iii) Let us denote the number of pants by x and the number of skirts by y. Then the
equations formed are:
y 2 x ? 2...... 1 and y 4 x ? 4...... 2
Let us draw the graphs of Equations (1) and (2) by finding two solutions for each of the
equations.
They are given in Table
x 2 0
y 2 x ?2 2 -2
x 0 1
y 2 x ?2 -4 0
Plot the point and draw the lines passing through them to represent the equation, as shown
in fig.
The t lines intersect at the point 1, 0 . So. x 1, y 0 is the required solution of the pair of
linear equations, i.e, the number of pants she purchased island she did not buy any skirt
Concept insight: Read the question carefully and examine what are the unknowns.
Represent the given conditions with the help of equations by taking the unknowns
quantities as variables. Also carefully state the variables as whole solution is based on it on
the graph paper, mark the points accurately and neatly using a sharp pencil. Also take at
least three points satisfying the two equations in order to obtain the correct straight line of
the equation. Since joining any two points gives a straight line and if one of the points is
computed incorrect will give a wrong line and taking third point will give a correct line.
The point where the two straight lines will intersect will give the values of the two
variables, i.e., the solution of the two linear equations. State the solution point.
Clearly, the two lines intersect at A 1, 1 Hence, x 1, y 1 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We also observe that the required shaded region is ABC
Clearly, the two lines intersect at A 2, 4 . Hence, x 2, y 4 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We also observe ABC is the required shaded region.
36. Represent the following pair of equations graphically and write the coordinates of points
where the lines intersects y-axis
x 3y 6
2 x 3 y 12
Sol:
The given system of equations is
x 3y 6
2 x 3 y 12
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 3y 6
3y 6 x
6 x
y
3
When x 0, we have
60
y 2
3
When x 3, we have
63
y 1
3
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 3
y 2 1
We have,
2 x 3 y 12
2 x 12 3x
3 y 2 x 12
2 x 12
y
3
When x 0, we have
2 0 12
y 4
3
When x 6, we have
2 6 12
y 0
3
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 6
y -4 0
Graph of the given system of equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
37. Given the linear equation 2x + 3y − 8 = 0, write another linear equation in two variables
such that the geometrical representation of the pair so formed is (i) intersecting lines (ii)
Parallel lines (iii) coincident lines
Sol:
(i) For the two lines a1 x b1 x c1 0 and a2 x b2 x c2 0, to be intersecting, we must have
a1 b1
a2 b2
So, the other linear equation can be 5 x 6 y 16 0
a1 2 b1 3 1 c1 8 1
As , ,
a2 5 b2 6 2 c2 16 2
(ii) For the two lines a1 x b1 x c1 0 and a2 x b2 x c2 0, to be parallel we must have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
So, the other linear equation can be 6 x 9 y 24 0,
a1 2 1 b1 3 1 c1 8 1
As , ,
a2 6 3 b2 9 3 c2 24 3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
(iii) For the two lines a1 x b1 x c1 0 and a2 x b2 x c2 0, to be coincident, we must
a1 b1 c1
have
a2 b2 c2
So, the other linear equation can be 6 x 9 y 24 0,
a1 2 1 b1 3 1 c1 8 1
As , ,
a2 8 4 b2 12 4 c2 32 4
Concept insight: In orders to answer such type of problems, just remember the conditions
for two lines to be intersecting parallel, and coincident
This problem will have multiple answers as their can be marry equations satisfying the
required conditions.
Exercise 3.3
Solve the following systems of equations:
1. 11x + 15y + 23 = 0
7x – 2y – 20 = 0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
11x 15 y 23 0 ... i
7 x 2 y 20 0 ... ii
From (ii), we get
2 y 7 x 20
7 x 20
y
2
7 x 20
Substituting y in (i) we get
2
7 x 20
11x 15 23 0
2
105 x 300
11x 23 0
2
22 x 105 x 300 46
0
2
127 x 254 0
127 x 254
254
x 2
127
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
7 x 20
Putting x 2 in y we get
2
7 2 20
y
2
14 20
2
6
2
3
Hence, the solution of the given system of equations is x 2, y 3.
2. 3x – 7y + 10 = 0
y – 2x – 3 = 0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
3x 7 y 10 0 ... i
y 2x 3 0 ... ii
From (ii), we get
y 2x 3
Substituting y 2 x 3 in (i) we get
3x 7 2 x 3 10 0
3x 14 x 21 10 0
11x 11
11
x 1
11
Putting x 1 in y 2 x 3, we get
y 2 1 3
2 3
1
y 1
Hence, the solution of the given system of equations is x 1, y 1.
x
4. y 0.8
2
Sol:
x
y 0.8
2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
7
And 10
y
x
2
7 2
x 2 y 1.6 and 10
2x y
x 2 y 1.6 and 7 10 x 5 y
Multiply first equation by 10
10 x 20 y 16 and 10 x 5 y 7
Subtracting the two equations
15 y 9
9 3
y
15 5
3 6 2
x 1.6 2 1.6
5 5 5
2 3
Solution is ,
5 5
5. 7(y + 3) – 2 (x + 3) = 14
4(y – 2) + 3 (x – 3) = 2
Sol:
The given system of equations id
7 y 3 2 x 3 14 ... i
4 y 2 3 x 3 2 ... ii
From (i), we get
7 x 21 2 x 4 14
7 y 14 4 21 2 x
2x 3
y
7
From (ii), we get
4 y 8 3x 9 2
4 y 3x 17 2 0
4 y 3x 19 0 ... iii
2x 3
Substituting y in (iii), we get
7
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2x 3
4 3x 19 0
7
8 x 12
3x 19 0
7
8 x 12 21x 133 0
29 x 145 0
29 x 145
145
x 5
29
2x 3
Putting x 5 in y , we get
7
25 7
y
7
10 3
7
7
7
1
y 1
Hence, the solution of the given system of equations is x 5, y 1.
𝑥 𝑦
6. +3=5
7
𝑥 𝑦
−9=6
2
Sol:
The given system of equation is
x y
5 ... i
7 3
x y
6 ... ii
2 9
From (i), we get
3x 7 y
5
21
3x 7 y 105
3x 105 7 y
105 7 y
x
3
From (ii), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
9x 2 y
6
18
9 x 2 y 108 ... iii
105 7 y
Substituting x in (iii), we get
3
105 7 y
9 2 y 108
3
948 63 y
2 y 108
3
945 63 y 6 y 108 3
945 69 y 324
945 324 69 y
69 y 621
621
y 9
69
1105 7 y
Putting y 9 in x , we get
3
105 7 9 105 63
x
3 3
42
x 14
3
Hence, the solution of thee given system of equations is x 14, y 9.
𝑥 𝑦
7. + 4 = 11
3
5𝑥 𝑦
−3=7
6
Sol:
The given system of equations is
x y
11 ... i
3 4
5x y
7 ... ii
6 3
From (i), we get
4x 3y
11
12
4 x 3 y 132 ... iii
From (ii), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5x 2 y
7
6
5 x 2 y 42 ... iv
Let us eliminate y from the given equations. The coefficients of y in the equations(iii) and
(iv) are 3 and 2 respectively. The L.C.M of 3 and 2 is 6. So, we make the coefficient of y
equal to 6 in the two equations.
Multiplying (iii) by 2 and (iv) by 3, we get
8 x 6 y 264 ... v
15 x 6 x 126 ... vi
Adding (v) and (vi), we get
8 x 15 x 264 126
23x 138
138
x 6
23
Substituting x 6 in (iii), we get
4 6 3 y 132
3 y 132 24
3 y 108
108
y 36
3
Hence, the solution of the given system of equations is x 6, y 36.
4u 3 y 8
8.
6u 4 y 5
Sol:
1
Taking u, then given equations become
x
4u 3 y 8 ... i
6u 4 y 5 ... ii
From (i), we get
4u 8 3 y
8 3y
u
4
8 3y
Substituting u in (ii), we get
4
From (ii), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
8 3y
6 4 y 5
4
3 8 3 y
4 y 5
2
24 9 y
4 y 5
2
24 9 y 8 y
5
2
24 17 y 10
17 y 10 24
17 y 34
34
y 2
17
8 3y
Putting y 2, in u , we get
4
8 3 2 8 6 2 1
u
4 4 4 2
1
Hence, x 2
u
So, the solution of the given system of equation is x 2, y 2.
y
9. x 4
2
x
2y 5
3
Sol:
The given system of equation is
y
x 4 ..(i)
2
x
2y 5 ..(ii)
3
From (i), we get
2x y
4
2
2x y 8
y 8 2x
From (ii), we get
x 6 y 15 ..(iii)
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Substituting y 8 2 x in (iii), we get
x 6 8 2 x 15
x 48 12 x 15
11x 15 48
11x 33
33
x 3
11
Putting x 3, in y 8 2 x, we get
y 8 23
86
2
y2
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x 3, y 2.
3
10. x 2y
2
3
2x y
2
Sol:
The given system of equation is
3
x 2y ..(i)
2
3
2x y ..(ii)
2
Let us eliminate y from the given equations. The Coefficients of y in the given equations
are 2 and 1 respectively. The L.C.M of 2 and 1 is 2. So, we make the coefficient of y equal
to 2 in the two equations.
2x 3y 0
11.
3x 8 y 0
Sol:
2x 3y 0 ... i
3x 8 y 0 ... ii
From equation (i), we obtain:
3y
x ... iii
2
Substituting this value in equation (ii), we obtain:
3y
3 8 y 0
2
3y
2 2y 0
2
3
y 2 2 0
2
y0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Substituting the value of y in equation (iii), we obtain:
x0
x 0, y 0
y7
3x 2 10
12. 11
x 11
2y 10
7
Sol:
The given systems of equation is
y7
3x 2 10 ... i
11
x 11
2y 10 ... ii
7
From (i), we get
33x y 7 22
10
11
33x y 15 10 11
33x 15 110 y
y 33x 95
From (ii) we get
14 y x 11
109
7
14 y x 11 10 7
14 y x 11 70
14 y x 70 11
14 y x 59 ... iii
Substituting y 33x 95 in (iii), we get
14 33x 95 x 59
462 x 1330 x 59
463x 59 1330
463x 1389
1389
x 3
463
Putting x 3, in y 33x 95, we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y 33 3 95
y 99 95
4
y4
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x 3, y 4.
3
2x 9
y
13.
7
3 x 2, y 0
y
Sol:
The given systems of equation is
3
2x 9 ... i
y
7
3x 2, y 0 ... ii
y
1
Taking u, the given equations becomes
y
2 x 3u 9 ... iii
3x 7u 2 ... iv
From (iii), we get
2 x 9 3u
9 3u
x
2
9 3u
Substituting x in (iv), we get
2
9 3u
3 7u 2
2
27 9u 14u
2
2
27 23u 2 2
23u 4 27
23
u 1
23
1 1
Hence, y 1
u 1
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
9 3u
Putting u 1 in x , we get
2
9 3 1 9 3 6
x 3
2 2 2
x3
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x 3, y 1.
1 1
3
7x 6 y
15.
1 1
5
2x 3y
Sol:
1 1
3 .... 1
7x 6 y
1 1
5 .... 2
2x 3y
1
Multiplying (2) by , we get
2
1 1 5
.... 3
4x 6 y 2
Solving (1) and (3), we get
1 1
3
7x 6 y
1 1 5
4x 6 y 2
(Adding the equations)
1 1 5
3
7x 4x 2
47 65
28x 2
11 11
28 x 2
11 2 1
x
28 11 14
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
When x , we get
14
1 1
3 (Using (1))
1 6y
7
14
1
2 3
6y
1
3 2 1
6y
1
y
6
1
Thus, the solution of given equation is x and y .
14 6
1 1
16. + 3𝑦 = 2
2𝑥
1 1 13
+ 2𝑦 =
3𝑥 6
Sol:
1 1
Let u and v, the given equations become
x y
u v
2
2 3
3u 2v
2
6
3u 2v 12 .... i
u v 13
And,
3 2 6
2u 3v 13
6 6
6
v 3
2
1 1 1 1
Hence, x and y
u 2 v 3
1 1
So, the solution of the given system o equation is x , y .
2 3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y
17. 2
xy
x y
6
xy
Sol:
The given system of equation is
x y
2
xy
x y
2
xy xy
1 1
2 ..... i
y x
x y
And, 6
xy
x y
6
xy xy
1 y
6 ... ii
y x
1 1
Taking v and u, the above equations become
y x
vu 2 ..... iii
v u 6 ...... iv
Adding equation (iii) and equation (iv), we get
v u v u 26
2v 8
8
v 4
2
Putting v 4 in equation (iii), we get
4u 2
u 2 4 2
1 1 1 1 1
Hence, x and y
u 2 2 v 4
1 1
So, the solution of the given system of equation is x ,y
2 4
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
15 2
18. + 𝑣 = 17
𝑢
Sol:
1 1
Let x and y, then, the given system of equations become
u v
15 x 2 y 17 ... i
36
x y ... ii
5
From (i), we get
2 y 17 15 x
17 15 x
y
2
17 15x
Substituting y in equation (ii), we get
2
17 15 x 36
x
2 5
2 x 17 15 x 36
2 5
13x 17 36
2 5
5 13x 17 36 2
65 x 85 72
65 x 72 85
65 x 13
13 1
65x
65 5
1
Putting x in equation (ii), we get
5
1 36
y
5 5
36 1
y
5 5
36 1 35
7
5 5
1 1 1
Hence, u 5 and v .
x y 7
1
So, the solution off the given system of equation is u 5, v .
7
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3 1
19. − 𝑦 = −9
𝑥
2 3
+𝑦 =5
𝑥
Sol:
1 1
Let u and v, Then, the given system of equations becomes
x y
3u v 9 ...... i
2u 3v 5 ...... ii
Multiplying equation (i) by 3 an equation (ii) by 1, we get
9u 3v 27 ......... iii
2u 3v 5 .......... iv
Adding equation (i) and equation (ii), we get
9u 2u 3v 3v 27 5
11u 22
22
u 2
11
Putting u 2 in equation (iv), we get
2 2 3v 5
4 3v 5
3v 5 4
9
v 3
3
1 1 1 1 1
Hence, x and y .
u 2 2 v 3
1 1
So, the solution of the given system of equation is x ,y .
2 3
2 5
20. +𝑦 =1
𝑥
60 40
+ = 19, 𝑥 ≠ 0, 𝑦 ≠ 0
𝑥 𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Taking u and v, the given becomes
x y
2u 5v 1 ...... i
60u 40u 19 ...... ii
Let us eliminate ‘u’ from equation (i) and (ii), multiplying equation (i) by 60 and equation
(ii) by 2, we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
21. + 6𝑦 = 12
5𝑥
1 3
− 7𝑦 = 8, 𝑥 ≠ 0, 𝑦 ≠ 0
3𝑥
Sol:
1 1
Taking u and v, the given equations become\
x y
u v
12
5 6
6u 5v
12
30
6u 5v 360 ..... i
u 3v
And, 8
3 7
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
7u 9v
8
21
7u 9v 168 ...... ii
Let us eliminate ‘v’ from equation (i) and (ii), Multiplying equation (i) by 9 and equation
(ii) by 5, we get
54u 45v 3240 ...... iii
35u 45v 840 ...... iv
Adding equation (i) adding equation (ii), we get
54u 35u 3240 840
89u 4080
4080
u
89
4080
Putting u in equation (i), we get
89
4080
6 5v 360
89
24480
5v 360
89
24480
5v 360
89
32040 24480
5v
89
7560
5v
89
7560
v
5 89
1512
v
89
1 89 1 89
Hence, x and y
u 4080 v 1512
89 89
So, the solution of the given system of equation is x ,y .
4080 1512
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 3 9
x y xy
22.
4 9 21
, where x 0, y 0
x y xy
Sol:
The system of given equation is
2 3 9
..... i
x y xy
4 9 21
, where x 0, y 0 ..... ii
x y xy
Multiplying equation (i) adding equation (ii) by xy , we get
2 y 3x 9 .... iii
4 y 9 x 21 .... iv
From (iii), we get
3x 9 2 y
9 2y
x
3
9 2y
Substituting x in equation (iv), we get
3
9 2y
4x 9 21
3
4 y 3 9 2 y 21
4 y 27 6 y 21
2 y 21 27
2 y 6
6
y 3
2
9 2y
Putting y 3 in x , we get
3
9 23
x
3
96
3
3
3
1
Hence, solution of the system of equation is x 1, y 3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
6 7
23. = 𝑥−𝑦 + 3
𝑥+𝑦
1 1
= 3(𝑥−𝑦), where x + y ≠ 0 and x – y ≠ 0
2(𝑥+𝑦)
Sol:
1 1
Let u and v. Then, the given system of equation becomes
x y x y
6u 7v 3
6u 7v 3 ....... i
u v
And,
2 3
3u 2v
3u 2v 0 ...... ii
Multiplying equation ii by 2, and equation (i) by 1, we get
6u 7v 3 ....... iii
6u 4v 0 ........ iv
Subtracting equation (iv) from equation (iii), we get
7 4v 3
3v 3
v 1
Putting v 1 in equation (ii), we get
3u 2 1 0
3u 2 0
3u 2
2
u
3
Now,
2
u
3
1 2
x2 3
3
x y .... v
2
And, v 1
1
1
x y
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y 1 ...... vi
Adding equation (v) and equation (vi), we get
3
2x 1
2
3 2
2x
2
5
2x
2
5
x
4
5
Putting x in equation (vi), we get
4
5
y 1
4
5
1 y
4
5 4
y
4
1
y
4
1
y
4
5 1
Hence, solution of the system of equation is x ,y .
4 4
xy 6
24.
x y 5
xy
6
yx
Sol:
The given system of equation is
xy 6
x y 5
5 xy 6 x y
5 xy 6 x 6 y .... i
xy
And, 6
yx
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
xy 6 y x
xy 6 y 6 x ..... ii
Adding equation (i) and equation (ii), we get
6 xy 6 y 6 y
6 xy 12 y
12 y
x 2
6y
Putting x 2 in equation (i), we get
5 2 y 6 2 6 y
10 y 12 6 y
10 y 6 y 12
4 y 12
12
y 3
4
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x 2, y 3.
22 15
25. + 𝑥−𝑦 = 5
𝑥+𝑦
55 45
+ 𝑥−𝑦 = 14
𝑥+𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Let u and v. Then, the given system of equation becomes
x y x y
22u 15v 5 ... i
55u 45v 14 ... ii
Multiplying equation (i) by 3, and equation (ii) by 1, we get
66u 45v 15 ..... iii
55u 45v 14 ...... iv
Subtracting equation (iv) from equation (iii), we get
66u 55u 15 4
11u 1
1
u
11
1
Putting u in equation (i), we get
11
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
22 15v 5
11
2 15v 5
15v 5 2
15v 3
3 1
v
15 5
1
Now, u
x y
1 1
x y 11
x y 11 .... v
1
And v
x y
1 1
x y 5
x y 5 ..... vi
Adding equation (v) and equation (vi), we get
2 x 11 5
2 x 16
16
x 8
2
Putting x 8 in equation (v), we get
8 y 11
y 11 8 3
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x 8, y 3.
5 2
26. − 𝑥−𝑦 = −1
𝑥+𝑦
15 7
+ 𝑥−𝑦 = 10
𝑥+𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Let u and v . Then, the given system off equations becomes
x y x y
5u 2v 1 ...... i
15u 7v 10 ..... ii
Multiplying equation (i) by 7, and equation (ii) by 2, we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
Putting u in equation (i), we get
5
1
5 2 v 1
5
1 2v 1
2v 1 1
2v 2
2
v 1
2
1
Now, u
x y
1 1
x y 5
x y 5 ...... v
1
and, v 1
x y
x y 1 ....... vi
Adding equation (v) and equation (vi), we get
2x 5 1
2x 6
6
x 3
2
Putting x 3 in equation (v), we get
3 y 5
y 53 2
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x 3, y 2.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3 2
27. + 𝑥−𝑦 = 2
𝑥+𝑦
9 4
− 𝑥−𝑦 = 1
𝑥+𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Let u and v. Then, the given system of equation becomes
x y x y
3u 2v 2 ... i
9u 4v 1 ... ii
Multiplying equation (i) by 3, and equation (ii) by 1, we get
6u 4v 4 ..... iii
9u 4v 1 ...... iv
Adding equation (iii) and equation (iv), we get
6u 9u 4 1
15u 5
5 1
u
15 3
1
Putting u in equation (i), we get
3
1
3 2v 2
3
1 2v 2
2v 2 1
1
v
2
1
u
Now, x y
1 1
x y 3
x y 3 ...... v
1
v
And, x y
1 1
x y 2
x y 2 ...... vi
Adding equation (v) and equation (vi), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2x 3 2
5
x
2
5
x
Putting 2 in equation (v), we get
5
y3
2
5
y 3
2
65 1
y
2 2
5 1
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x , y .
2 2
1 5 −3 5 3 61
28. + 3(3𝑥−2𝑦) = − 5(3𝑥−2𝑦) = 60
2(𝑥+2𝑦) 2 4(𝑥+2𝑦)
Sol:
1 1
Let u and v.
x 2y 3x 2 y
Then, the given system of equation becomes
u 5v 3
2 3 2
3u 10v 3
6 2
3 6
3u 10v
2
3u 10v 9 ..... i
5u 3v 61
4 5 60
And,
25u 12v 61
20 60
61
25u 12v ....... ii
3
Multiplying equation (i) by 12, and equation (ii) by 10, we get
36u 120v 108 ...... iii
610
250u 120v ...... iv
3
Adding equation (iii) and equation (iv), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
610
36u 250u 108
3
610 324
286u
3
286
286u
3
1
u
3
1
Putting u in equation (i), we get
3
1
3 10v 9
3
1 10v 9
10v 9 1
10
v 1
10
1
Now, u
x 2y
1 1
x y 3
x 2y 3 .......... v
1
And, v
3x 2 y
1
1
3x 2 y
3x 2 y 1 ....... vi
1
Putting x in equation (v), we get
2
1
2y 3
2
1
2y 3
2
6 1
2y
2
5
y
4
1 5
Hence, solution of the given system of equations is x , y .
2 4
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5 2 1
29. − 𝑦−1 = 2
𝑥+1
10 2 5
+ 𝑦−1 = 2 , 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑥 ≠ −1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑦 ≠ 1
𝑥+1
Sol:
1 1
Let u and v.
x 1 y 1
Then, the given system of equations becomes
1
5u 2v ........ i
2
5
10u 2 y ........ ii
2
Adding equation (i) equation (ii), we get
1 5
5u 10u
2 2
1 5
15u
2
6
15u 3
2
3 1
u
15 5
1
Putting u in equation (i), we get
5
1 1
5 2v
5 2
1
1 2v
2
1
2v 1
2
1 2
2v
2
1
2v
2
1 1
v
4 4
1
Now, u
x 1
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
x 1 5
x 1 5
x 5 1 4
1
And, v
y 1
1 1
y 1 4
y 1 4
y 4 1 5
Hence, solution of the give system of equation is x 4, y 5.
x y 5 xy
30.
3x 2 y 13xy
Sol:
The give system of equation is
x y 5 xy ...... i
3x 2 y 13xy ..... ii
Multiplying equation (i) by 2 and equation (ii) by , we get
2 x 2 y 10 xy .... iii
3x 2 y 13xy .... iv
Subtracting equation (iii) from equation (iv), we get
3x 2 x 13xy 10 xy
x 3xy
x
y
3x
1
y
3
1
Putting y in equation (i), we get
3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
x y 5 x
3
1 5x
x
3 3
1 5x
x
3 3
1 5 x 3x
3 3
1 2x
2x 1
1
x
2
1 1
Hence, solution of the given system of equations is x , y .
2 3
31. x y 2 xy
x y
6 x 0, y 0
xy
Sol:
The system of the given equation is
x y 2 xy ....... i
x y
And, 6
xy
x y 6 xy ....... ii
Adding equation (i) and equation (ii), we get
2 x 2 xy 6 xy
2 x 8 xy
2x
y
8x
1
y
4
1
Putting y in equation (i), we get
4
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
x 2x
4 4
1 x
x
4 2
x 1
x
2 4
2 x x 1
2 4
2 1
x
4 2
1 1
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x ,y ,
2 4
2 3u v 5uv
32.
2 u 3v 5uv
Sol:
The system of the given equation is
2 3u v 5uv
6u 2v 5uv .... i
And, 2 u 3v 5uv
2u 6v 5uv ....... ii
Multiplying equation (i) by 3 and equation (ii) by 1, we get
18u 6v 15uv ....... iii
2u 6v 5uv ....... iv
Adding equation (iii) and equation (iv), we get
18u 2u 15uv 5uv
20u 20uv
20u
v
20u
v 1
Putting v 1 in equation (i), we get
6u 2 1 5u 1
6u 2 5u
6u 5u 2
u2
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is u 2, v 1.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 3 17
33. + 3𝑥−2𝑦 =
3𝑥+2𝑦 5
5 1
+ 3𝑥−2𝑦 = 2
3𝑥+2𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Let u and v. Then, the given system of equation becomes
3x 2 y 3x 2 y
17
2u 3v ....... i
5
5u v 2 ....... ii
Multiplying equation (ii) by 3, we get
17
15u 2u 6
5
30 17
13u
5
13
13u
5
13 1
u
5 13 5
1
Putting u in equation (ii), we get
5
1
5 v 2
5
1 v 2
v 2 1
v 1
1
Now, u
3x 2 y
1 1
3x 2 y 5
3x 2 y 5 ..... iv
1
And, v
3x 2 y
1
1
3x 2 y
3x 2 y 1 ....... v
Adding equation (iv) and (v), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
6x 1 5
6x 6
x 1
Putting x 1 in equation (v), we get
3 1 2 y 5
2y 5 3
2y 2
2
y 1
2
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x 1, y 1.
4
34. + 3𝑦 = 14
𝑥
3
− 4𝑦 = 23
𝑥
Sol:
4
3 y 14
x
3
4 y 23
x
1
Let p
x
The given equations reduce to:
4 p 3 y 14
4 p 3 y 14 0 ..... 1
3 p 4 y 23
3 p 4 y 23 0 ..... 2
Using cross-multiplication method, we obtain
p y 1
69 56 42 92 16 9
p y 1
125 50 25
p 1 y 1
,
125 25 50 25
p 5, y 2
1
p 5
x
1
x
5
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
99 x 101y 499
35.
101x 99 y 501
Sol:
The given system of equation is
99 x 101y 499 ..... i
101x 99 y 501 .... ii
Adding equation (i) and equation (ii), we get
99 x 101x 101y 99 y 499 501
200 x 200 y 1000
200 x y 1000
1000
x y 5
200
x y 5 ..... iii
Subtracting equation (i) by equation (ii), we get
101x 99 x 99 y 101y 501 499
2x 2 y 2
2 x y 2
2
x y
2
x y 1 ....... iv
23x 29 y 98
36.
29 x 23 y 110
Sol:
The given system of equation is
23x 29 y 98 ..... i
29 x 23 y 110 ..... ii
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Adding equation (i) and equation (ii), we get
23x 29 x 29 y 23 y 98 110
52 x 52 y 208
52 x y 208
208
x y 4
52
x y4 ........ iii
Subtracting equation (i) by equation (ii), we get
29 x 23x 23 y 29 y 110 98
6 x 6 y 12
6 x y 12
12
x y 2
6
x y 2 ...... iv
Adding equation (iii) and equation (iv), we get
2x 2 4 6
6
x 3
2
Putting x 3 in equation (iv), we get
3 y 2
y 2 3 1
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x 3, y 1.
x yz 4
37. x 2 y 2z 9
2 x y 3z 1
Sol:
We have,
x yz 4 ...... i
x 2 y 2z 9 ...... ii
2 x y 3z 1 ..... iii
From equation (i), we get
z 4 x y
z x y 4
Subtracting the value of z in equation (ii), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 2 y 2 x y 4 9
x 2 y 2x 2 y 8 8
3x 4 y 9 8
3x 4 y 17 ..... iv
Subtracting the value of z in equation (iii), we get
2x y 3 x y 4 1
2 x y 3x 3 y 12 1
x 4 y 1 12
x 4 y 11 ...... v
Adding equations (iv) and (v), we get
3 x x 4 y 4 y 17 11
2x 6
6
x 3
2
Putting x 3 in equation (iv), we get
3 3 4 y 17
9 4 y 17
4 y 17 9
4 y 8
8
y 2
4
Putting x 3 and y 2 in z x y 4, we get
z 3 2 4
z 5 4
z 1
Hence, solution of the giving system of equation is x 3, y 2, z 1.
x yz 4
38. x yz 2
2 x y 3z 0
Sol:
We have,
x yz 4 ...... i
x y z 2 ...... ii
2 x y 3z 0 ...... iii
From equation (i), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
z 4 x y
z x y 4
Substituting z x y 4 in equation (ii), we get
x y x y 4 2
x yx y4 2
2y 4 2
2 y 2 4 2
2 y 2
2
y 1
2
Substituting the value of z in equation (iii), we get
2x y 3 x y 4 0
2 x y 3x 3 y 12 0
5 x 2 y 12 0
5 x 2 y 12 ....... iv
Putting y 1 in equation (iv), we get
5 x 2 1 12
5 x 2 12
5 x 12 2 10
10
x 2
5
Putting x 2 and y 1 in z x y 4, we get
z 2 1 4
2 1 4
3 4
1
Hence, solution of the giving system of equation is x 2, y 1, z 1.
44 30
39. + 𝑥−𝑦 = 4
𝑥+𝑦
55 40
+ 𝑥−𝑦 = 13
𝑥+𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Let u and v.
x y x y
Then, the system of the given equations becomes
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
2 3 13
x y
41.
1 1
5 4 2
x y
Sol:
Let us write the given pair of equation as
1 1
2 3 13 1
x y
1 1
5 4 2 2
x y
These equation are not in the form ax by c 0. However, if we substitute
1 1
p and q in equations (1) and (2), we get
x y
2 p 3q 13
5 p 4q 2
So, we have expressed the equations as a pair of linear equations. Now, you can use any
method to solve these equations, and get p 2, q 3
1 1
You know that p and q .
x y
Substitute the values of p and q to get
1 1 1 1
2, i.e., x and 3 i.e., y .
x 2 y 3
5 1
42. + 𝑦−2 = 2
𝑥−1
Sol:
x = 4, y = 5
Detailed answer not given in website
10 2
43. 4
x y x y
15 5
2
x y x y
Sol:
10 2
4
x y x y
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
15 5
2
x y x y
1 1
Let p and q
x y x y
The given equations reduce to:
10 p 2q 4
10 p 2q 4 0 ..... 1
15 p 5q 2
15 p 5q 2 0 ..... 2
Using cross-multiplication method, we obtain:
p q 1
4 20 60 20 50 30
p q 1
16 80 80
p 1 q 1
and
16 80 80 80
1
p and q 1
5
1 1 1
p and q 1
x y 5 x y
x y 5 ...... 3
x y 1 ...... 4
Adding equation (3) and (4), we obtain:
2x 6
x3
Substituting the value of x in equation (3), we obtain:
y2
x 3, y 2
1 1 3
44. + 3𝑥−𝑦 = 4
3𝑥+𝑦
1 1 1
− 2(3𝑥−𝑦) = − 8
2(3𝑥+𝑦)
Sol:
1 1
Let us put p and q. Then the given equations
x 1 y2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
5 2 ...... 1
x 1 y 2
1 1
6 3 1 ...... 2
x 1 y 2
Can be written as: 5 p q 2 ........ 3
6 p 3q 1 ...... 4
Equations (3) and (4) from a pair of linear equations in the general form. Now, you can use
1 1
any method to solve these equations. We get p and q .
3 3
1
Substituting for p, we have
x 1
1 1
,
x 1 3
i.e., x 1 3, i.e., x 4.
1
Similarly, substituting for q, we get
y2
1 1
y2 3
i.e., x 1 3, i.e., x 4
1
Similarly, substituting for q, we get
y2
1 1
y2 3
i.e., 3 y 2, i.e., y 5
Hence, x 4, y 5 is the required solution of the given pair of equations.
2 3
2
x y
45.
4 9
1
x y
Sol:
2 3
2
x y
4 9
1
x y
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
Let p and q
x y
The given equations reduce to:
2 p 3q 2 ..... 1
4 p 9q 1 ..... 2
Multiplying equation (1) by (3), we obtain:
6 p 9q 6 ..... 3
Adding equation (2) and (3), we obtain:
10 p 5
1
p
2
Putting the value of p in equation (1), we obtain:
1
2 3q 2
2
3q 1
1
q
3
1 1
p
x 2
x 2
x4
1 1
q
y 3
y 3
y9
x 4, y 9
7x 2 y
5
xy
46.
8x 7 y
15
xy
Sol:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
7x 2 y
5
xy
7 2
5 ... 1
y x
8x 7 y
15
xy
8 7
15 ..... 2
y x
1 1
Let p and q
x y
The given equations reduce to:
2 p 7q 5
2 p 7q 5 0 .... 3
7 p 8q 15
7 p 8q 15 0 .... 4
Using cross multiplication method, we obtain:
p q 1
105 40 35 30 16 49
p 1 q 1
,
65 65 65 65
p 1, q 1
1 1
p 1, q 1
x y
x 1, y 1
x y 1 ..... 4
Adding equations (3) and (4), we obtain:
2x 4
x2
Substituting the value of x in equation (3), we obtain:
y 1
Exercise 3.4
Solve each of the following systems of equations by the method of cross-multiplication:
x 2 y 1 0
1.
2 x 3 y 12 0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
x 2 y 1 0
2 x 3 y 12 0
Here,
a1 1, b1 2, c1 1
a2 2, b2 3 and c2 12
By cross-multiplication, we get
x y 1
2 12 1 3 1 12 1 2 1 3 2 2
x y 1
24 3 12 2 3 4
x y 1
21 14 7
Now,
x 1
21 7
21
x 3
7
And,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y 1
14 7
y 1
14 7
14
y 2
7
Hence, the solution of the given system of equations is x 3, y 2.
3x 2 y 25 0
2.
2 x y 10 0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
3x 2 y 25 0
2 x y 10 0
Here,
a1 3, b1 2, c1 25
a2 2, b2 1 and c2 10
By cross-multiplication, we have
x y 1
2 10 25 1 3 10 25 2 3 1 2 2
x y 1
20 25 30 50 3 4
x y 1
5 20 1
x 1
Now,
5 1
5
x 5
1
And,
y 1
20 1
y
1
20
y 20
Hence, x 5, y 20 is the solution of the given system of equations.
2 x y 35 0
3.
3x 4 y 65 0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
2 x y 35 0
3x 4 y 65 0
Here,
a1 2, b1 1, c1 35
a2 3, b2 4 and c2 65
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
1 65 35 4 2 65 35 3 2 4 1 3
x y 1
65 140 130 105 8 3
x y 1
75 25 5
x y 1
75 25 5
Now,
y 1
25 5
25
y 5
5
Hence, x 15, y 5 is the solution of the given system of equations.
2x y 6 0
4.
x y20
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
2x y 6 0
x y20
Here,
a1 2, b1 1, c1 6
a2 1, b2 1 and c2 2
By cross multiplication, we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y 1
1 2 6 1 2 2 6 1 2 1 1 1
x y 1
2 6 4 6 2 1
x y 1
4 2 1
x y
1
4 2
Now,
x
1
4
x 4 1 4
And,
y
1
2
y 1 2
y 2
y2
Hence, x 4, y 2 is the solution of the given system of the equations.
x y
5. 2
xy
x y
6
xy
Sol:
The given system of equations is
x y
2
xy
x y
2
xy xy
1 1
2
y x
1 1
2 ...... i
x y
And,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y
6
xy
x y
6
xy xy
1 1
6
y x
1 1
6 ...... ii
x y
1 1
Taking u and v , we get
x y
uv 2uv2 0 ..... iii
And, u v 6 u v 6 0 ..... iv
Here,
a1 1, b1 1, c1 2
a2 1, b2 1 and c2 6
By cross multiplication
u v 1
1 6 2 1 1 6 2 1 1 1 11
u v 1
6 2 6 2 1 1
u v 1
4 8 2
u 1
Now,
4 2
4
u 2
2
v 1
And,
8 2
8
v 4
2
v 4
v4
1 1 1 1
Now, x and y
u 2 v 4
1 1
Hence, x , y is the solution of the given system of equations.
2 4
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
ax by a b
6.
bx ay a b
Sol:
The given system of equations is
ax by a b .... i
bx ay a b .... ii
Here,
a1 a, b1 b, c1 b a
a2 b, b2 a and c2 a b
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
a b b b a a a b a b a b a a b b
x y 1
2 2 2
ab b ab a
2 2
a ab b ab a b
2
x y 1
2 2 2 2 2
b a 2
a b a b
Now,
x 1
2 2
b a
2 2
a b
b a
2 2
x 2 2
a b
b2 a 2
a 2
b 2
a 2
b2
a 2
b2
x 1
And,
y 1
2 2
a b
2 2
a b
y
a b2
2
a 2 b2
y 1
y 1
Hence, x 1, y 1 is the solution of the given system of the equations.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x ay b 0
7.
ax by c 0
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
x ay b 0
ax by c 0
Here,
a1 1, b1 a, c1 b
a2 a, b2 b and c2 c
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
a c b b 1 c b a 1 b a a
x y 1
ac b 2
c ab b a 2
Now,
x 1
ac b 2
b a 2
ac b 2
x
b a 2
x
b 2 ac
a2 b
b 2 ac
a2 b
And
y 1
c ab b a 2
ab c
y
a2 b
ab c
y
a2 b
ac b2 ab c
Hence, x 2 ,y 2 is the solution of the given system of the equations.
a b a b
ax by a 2
8.
bx ay b 2
Sol:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
The system of the given equations may be written as
ax by a 2 0
bx ay b 2 0
Here,
a1 a, b1 b, c1 a 2
a2 b, b2 a and c2 b 2
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
b b a a a b a b a a b b
2 2 2 2
x y 1
2 2
b a
3 3
ab a b a b
2 2
Now,
x 1
2 2
b a
3 3
a b
a b
3 3
x 2 2
a b
a b a 2 ab b 2
a b a b
a 2 ab b 2
ab
And,
y 1
2 2
ab a b a b
2 2
a 2b ab 2
y 2 2
a b
ab a 2b
2
y 2 2
a b
ab b a
a b a b
ab a b
a b a b
ab
ab
a 2 ab b2 ab
Hence, x ,y is the solution of the given system of the equations.
ab a b
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑥 𝑦
9. +𝑏 =2
𝑎
𝑎𝑥 − 𝑏𝑦 = 𝑎2 − 𝑏 2
Sol:
The system of the given equations may be written as
1 1
x y 2 0
a b
ax by b 2 a 2 0
Here,
1 1
a1 , b1 , c1 2
a b
a2 a, b2 b and c2 b 2 a 2
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
b 1 a 1
b 2 a 2 2 b b 2 a 2 2 a
1 1
b a a b
x y 1
2 2
b a 2
b a 2
b a
2b 2b
b b a b
x y 1
2 2 2
b a 2b
2 2
b a 2b2 2
b a 2
b a ab
x y 1
2 2
a b
2 2
b a 2
b a 2
b a ab
Now,
x 1
2
a b
2 2
b a 2
b ab
a b
2 2
ab
x 2
b b a 2
And,
y 1
2
b a
2 2
b a 2
a ab
b a
2 2
ab
y 2 2
a b a
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y
b 2
a2 b
b a22
y b
Hence, x a, y b is the solution of the given system of the equations.
𝑥 𝑦
10. +𝑏 =𝑎+𝑏
𝑎
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
1 1
x y a b 0
a b
1 1
2
x 2 y 2 0
a b
Here,
1 1
a1 , b2 , c1 a b
a b
1 1
a2 2 , b2 2 , and c2 2
a b
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 x a b 2 2 x a b
b b a a a b2 a 2 b
x y 1
2 a 1 2 1 b 1 1
2 2 2 2
b b b a a a ab a b
x y 1
a 1 1 b 1 1
2
2 2
2
b b a a ab a b
x y 1
a b a b a b
b2 a2 a 2b 2
a b 1 a b 1
x 2 a 2 and y 2 b2
b a b a a b
2 2
ab a 2b 2
Hence, x a 2 , y b 2 is the solution of the given system of the equtaions.
x y
11. a b
ax by a 2 b 2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
x y
a b
ax by a 2 b 2
1 1
Here a1 , b1 , c1 0
a b
a2 a, b2 b, c2 a 2 b 2
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
1
a 2 b2 b 0
b
1
a
a 2 b2 a 0 1
a
1
b a
b
x y 1
2 2
a b
2 2
a b b a
b a a b
a 2 b2 a 2 b2
x b 2 b 2 a
b a
b a
a b ab
a b
2 2
a b2
2
y a 2 b 2 b
b a
b a
a b ab
Solution is (a, b)
5 2
12. − 𝑥−𝑦 = −1
𝑥+𝑦
15 7
+ 𝑥−𝑦 = 10, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑥 ≠ 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑦 ≠ 0
𝑥+𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Let u and v. Then, the given system of equations becomes
x y x y
5u 2v 1
15u 7v 10
Here
a1 5, b1 2, c1 1
a2 15, b2 7 and c2 10
By cross multiplication, we get
u u 1
2 10 1 7 5 10 115 5 7 2 15
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
u v 1
20 7 50 15 35 30
u v 1
13 65 65
u v 1
13 65 65
Now,
u 1
13 65
13 1
u
65 5
And,
v 1
65 65
65
v 1
65
Now,
1
u
x y
1 1
...... i
x y 5
And,
1
v
x y
1
1
x y
x y 1 ...... ii
Adding equation (i) and (ii), we get
2x 5 1
2x 6
6
x 3
2
2 3
13. 13
x y
5 4
2, where x 0 and y 0
x y
Sol:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
The given system of equation is
2 3
13
x y
5 4
2, where x 0 and y 0
x y
1 1
Let u and v, Then, the given system of equations becomes
x y
2u 3v 13
5u 4v 2
Here,
a1 2, b1 3, c1 13
a2 5, b2 4 and c2 2
By cross multiplication, we have
u v 1
3 2 13 4 2 2 13 5 2 4 3 5
u v 1
6 52 4 65 8 15
u v 1
46 69 23
Now,
u 1
46 23
46
u 2
23
And
v 1
69 23
69
v 3
23
Now,
1 1
x
u 2
And,
1 1
y
v 3
1 1
Hence, x , y is the solution of the given system of equations.
2 3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
ab
ax by
14. 2
3x 5 y 4
Sol:
The given system of equation is
ab
ax by ...... i
2
3x 5 y 4 ...... ii
From (i), we get
2 ax by a b
2ax 2by a b 0 ..... iii
From (ii), we get
3x 5 y 4 0
Here,
a1 2a, b1 2b, c1 a b
a2 3, b2 5, c2 4
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
2b 4 a b 5 2a 4 a b 3 2a 5 2b 3
x y 1
8b 5 a b 8a 3 a b 10a 6b
x y 1
8b 5a 5b 8a 3a 3b 10a 6b
x y 1
5a 3b 5a 3b 10a 6b
Now,
x y 1
5a 3b 5a 3b 10a 6b
5a 3b 5a 3b 1
x
10a 6b 2 5a 3b 2
And,
y 1
5a 3b 10a 6b
5a 3b
y
2 5a 3b
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5a 3b
y
2 5a 3b
5a 3b
2 5a 3b
1
y
2
1 1
Hence, x , y is the solution of the given system of equations.
2 2
2ax 3by a 2b
15.
3ax 2by 2a b
Sol:
The given system of equations is
2ax 3by a 2b .... i
3ax 2by 2a b ... ii
Here,
a1 2a, b1 3b, c1 a 2b
a2 3a, b 2 2b, c2 2a b
By cross multiplication we have
x y 1
3b 2a b a 2b 2b 2a 2a b a 2b 3a 2a 2b 3b 3a
x y 1
3b 2a b 2b a 2b 2a 2a b 3a a 2b 4ab 9ab
x y 1
6ab 3b 2ab 4b
2 2
4a 2ab 3a 6ab 4ab 9ab
2 2
x y 1
2
4ab b 2
a 4ab 5ab
Now,
x 1
4ab b 2
5ab
4ab b2
x
5ab
b 4a b
5ab
4a b
5a
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y 1
And,
a 4ab 5ab
2
a 2 4ab
y
5ab
a a 4b
y
5ab
a 4b
y
5b
4b a
y
5b
4a b 4b a
Hence, x ,y is the solution of the given system of equation.
5a 5b
5ax 6by 28
16.
3ax 4by 18 0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
5ax 6by 28
5ax 6by 28 0 ..... i
and , 3ax 4by 18 0
3ax 4by 18 0 ..... ii
Here,
a1 5a, b1 6b, c1 28
a2 3a, b2 4b and c2 18
By cross multiplication we have
x y 1
6b 18 28 4b 5a 18 28 3a 5a 4b 6b 3a
x y 1
108b 112b 90a 84a 20ab 18ab
x y 1
4b 6a 2ab
Now,
x 1
4b 2ab
5b 2a
x
10ab
And,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y 1
6a 2ab
6a 3
y
2ab b
2 3
Hence, x , y is the solution of the given system of equations.
a b
a 2b x 2a b y 2
17.
a 2b x 2a b y 3
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
a 2b x 2a b y 2 0
a 2b x 2a b y 3 0
Here,
a1 a 2b, b1 2a b, c1 2
a2 a 2b, b2 2a b and c2 3
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
3 2a b 2 2a b 3 a 2b 2 a 2b a 2b 2a b 2a b a 2b
x y 1
2
6a 3b 4a 2b 3a 6b 2a 4b 2a ab 4ab 2b 2a 2 4ab ab 2b 2
2
x y 1
2
2a 5b a 10b 2a ab 4ab 2b 2a 2 4ab ab 2b 2
2
x y 1
2a 5b a 10b 10ab
x y 1
2a 5b a 10b 10ab
Now,
x 1
2a 5b 10ab
a 10b
y
10ab
And,
y 1
a 10b 10ab
a 10b
y
10ab
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5b 2a a 10b
Hence, x ,y is the solution of the given system of equations.
10ab 10ab
ab ab
18. xa b ya b
a b ab
x y 2a 2
Sol:
The given system of equation is
ab ab
xa b ya b ...…(i)
a b ab
x y 2a 2 …...(ii)
From equation (i), we get
ab ab
xa b ya b 0
a b ab
a b 2 ab a b 2 ab
x y 0
a b ab
a 2 b 2 2ab ab a 2 b 2 2ab ab
x y 0
a b ab
a 2 b 2 ab a 2 b 2 ab
x y 0 .....(iii)
a b ab
From equation (ii), we get
x y 2a 2 0
Here,
a 2 b 2 ab a 2 b 2 ab
a1 , b1 , c1 0
a b ab
a2 1, b2 1 and c2 2a 2
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
a 2 b 2 ab
2a 2 0 1 2 a2
a 2 b 2 ab
0 1
a 2 b 2 ab a b ab
2 2
ab a b a b a b
x y 1
2 2
2 a b ab 2 a b ab a b ab a 2 b 2 ab
2a
2 2 2 2
2a
a b a b a b ab
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y 1
a 2 b 2 ab
2a 2 2a 2
a 2 b 2 ab a b a 2 b 2 ab a b a 2 b 2 ab
ab a b a b a b
x y 1
3 3
2 a b ab
2 2
2 a b ab
2 2
a b a 3 b3
2a 2a
ab a b a b a b
x y 1
a b ab
2 2
2 a b ab
2 2
2a 3
2a 2 2 a
ab a b a b a b
Now,
x 1
2 a b ab 2a 3
2 2
2a
ab a b a b
x
2a 2 a 2 b2 ab a b a b
ab 2a 3
a b a 2 b2 ab
a
a b3 3
a
a3 b3 a b a 2 b2 ab
And,
y 1
a b ab
2 2
2a 3
2a 2
a b a b a b
y
2a 2 a 2 b 2 ab a b a b
a b 2a 3
a b a 2 b2 ab
a
a b
3 3
a 3 b3 a b a 2 b 2 ab
a
a 3 b3 a 2 b2
Hence, x ,y is the solution of the given system of equaatiions.
a a
The given system of equation id
ab ab
xa b ya b …(i)
a b ab
x y 2a 2 …(ii)
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
From equation (i), w get
ab ab
xa b ya b 0
a b ab
a b 2 ab a b 2 ab
x y 0
a b ab
a 2 b 2 2ab ab a 2 b 2 2ab ab
x y 0
a b ab
a 2 b 2 ab a 2 b 2 ab
x y 0 …..(iii)
a b ab
From equation (ii), we get
x y 2a 2 0 …..(iv)
Here,
a 2 b 2 ab a 2 b 2 ab
a1 , b1 , c1 0
a b ab
a2 1, b2 1 and c2 2a 2
By cross multiplication we get
x y 1
a 2 b2 ab 2 a b ab a b ab a 2 b2 ab
2 2 2 2
2a
2
ab
0 1 2a
a b
0 1
a b
a b
x y 1
2 2
a b ab 2 a b ab a b ab a 2 b 2 ab
2 2 2 2
2a 2 2 a
ab a b a b ab
x y 1
2 a b ab 2 a b ab a b ab a 2 b 2 ab
2 2
2a
2 2 2 2
2a
a b a b a b ab
x y 1
3 3
a b ab
2 2
2 a b ab
2 2
a b a 3 b3
2a 2 2 a
ab a b a b a b
x y 1
a b ab
2 2
2 a b ab
2 2
2a 3
2a 2 2 a
ab a b a b a b
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 1
2 a b ab 2a 3
22
2a a b a b
ab
x
2a 2 a 2 b2 ab a b a b
ab 2a 3
a b a 2 b2 ab
a
a b
3 3
a
a 2 b2 a b a 2 b2 ab
And,
y 1
a b ab
2 2
2a 3
2a 2
a b a b a b
y
2a 2 a 2 b2 ab a b a b
a b 2a 3
a b a 2 b2 ab
a
a b
3 3
a
a3 b3 a b a 2 b2 ab
a 2 b2 a 3 b3
Hence, x ,y is the solution of the given system of equation.
a a
bx cy a b
19. 1 1 1 1 2a
ax cy
a b a b ba ba ab
Sol:
The given system of equation is
bx cy a b ....(i )
1 1 1 1 2a
ax cy .....(ii )
a b a b ba ba ab
From equation (ii), we get
bx cy a b 0 .... iii
From equation (ii), we get
a b a b b a b a 2a
ax cy 0
a b a b b a b a a b
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
aba b b a b a 2a
ax cy 0
a b a b b a b a a b
2b 2a 2a
ax cy 0
a b a b b a b a a b
2ab 2ac 2a
x y 0
a b a b a b a b a b
2ab 2ac 2a
x y 0
a b a b a b a b a b
1 2abx 2acy
2a 0
a b a b a b
2abx 2acy
2a 0
a b a b
2abx 2acy 2a a b
0
a b
2abx 2acy 2a a b 0 ..... iv
From equation (i) and equation (ii), we get
a1 b, b1 c, c1 a b
a2 2ab, b2 2ac and c2 2a a b
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
2ac a b a b 2ac 2ab a b a b 2ab 2abc 2abc
x y 1
2a c 2abc 2a c 2abc 2a b 2ab 2a b 2ab 4abc
2 2 2 2 2 2
x y 1
2a c 2abc 2a c 2abc 2a b 2ab 2a b 2ab
2 2 2 2 2 2
4abc
x y 1
4a c 4ab
2 2
4abc
Now,
x 1
4a c 4abc
2
4a 2 c a
x
4abc b
And,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y 1
2
4ab 4abc
4ab 2 b
y
4abc c
a b
Hence, x , y is the solution of the given system of the equations.
b c
20. a b x a b y 2a 2 2b 2
a b x y 4ab
Sol:
The given system of equation is
a b x a b y 2a 2 2b 2 ……(i)
a b x y 4ab ……(ii)
From equation (i), we get
a b x a b y 2a 2 2b2 0
……(iii)
a b x a b y 2 a 2 b2 0
From equation (ii), we get
a b x a b y 4ab 0 ……(iv)
Here,
a1 a b, b1 a b, c1 2 a 2 b 2
a2 a b, b2 a b and c2 4ab
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
4ab a b 2 a b a b 4ab a b 2 a b a b a b a b a b a b
2 2 2 2
x y 1
2 a b 2ab a b 4ab a b 2 a b a b a b a b a b a b
2 2
x y 1
2 a b a b 2ab
2 2
2 a b 2ab a b a b a b a b a b
x y 1
2 a b a b 2ab
2 2
2 a b 2ab a 2 b 2 2ab a b 2b
x y 1
2 a b a b 2ab
2 2
2 a b a b 2b a b
2 2
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 1
2 a b a 2 b2 2ab 2b a b
2 a b a 2 b2 2ab
x
2b a b
a 2 b2 2ab
x
b
a b2 2ab
2
x
b
2ab a 2 b2
b
Now,
y 1
2 a b a b 2ab a b
2 2
2 a b a 2 b2
y
2b a b
a b a 2 b2
y
b a b
2ab a 2 b2 a b a 2 b2
Hence, x ,y is the solution of the given system of
b b a b
equations.
y 1
4 4
a d b c
22 2 2
a b
a d b c
2 2 2 2
y
a 4 b4
a 2 d 2 b2c 2
y
a 4 b4
a 2 x b2 y c 2
21.
b2 x a 2 y d 2
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
a2 x b2 y c2 0
b2 x a 2 y d 2 0
Here,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 a 2 , b1 b 2 , c1 c 2
a2 b 2 , b2 a 2 and c2 d 2
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4
b d a c2 2
a d b c a b
Now,
x 1
4 4
b d a c
2 2 2 2
a b
a c b d
2 2 2 2
x
a 4 b4
And,
y 1
4 4
a d b c
2 2 2 2
a b
a d b c
2 2 2 2
y
a 4 b4
a 2 d 2 b2c 2
y
a 4 b4
a 2c 2 b 2 d 2 a 2 d 2 b 2c 2
Hence, x ,y is the solution of the given system of the equations.
a 4 b4 a 4 b4
57 6
22. + 𝑥−𝑦 = 5
𝑥+𝑦
38 21
+ 𝑥−𝑦 = 9
𝑥+𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Let u and v. Then, the given system of equations become
x y x y
57u 6v 5 57u 6v 5 0
38u 21v 9 38u 21v 9 0
Here,
a1 57, b1 6, c1 5
a2 38, b2 21, and c2 9
By cross multiplication, we have
u v 1
54 105 513 190 1193 228
u v 1
51 323 969
u v 1
51 323 969
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now,
u 1
51 969
51
u
969
1
u
19
And,
v 1
323 969
323
v
969
1
v
3
Now,
1
u
x y
1 1
x y 19
x y 19 .... i
And,
1
v
x y
1 1
x y 3
x y 3 ... ii
23. 2(ax – by) + a + 4b = 0
2(bx + ay) + b – 4a = 0
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
2ax 2by a 4b 0
2bx 2ay b 4a 0
Here,
a1 2a, b1 2b, c1 a 4b
a2 2b, b2 2a, c2 b 4a
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
2
2b b 4a 2a a 4b 2b b 4a 2a a 4b 4a 4b 2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y 1
2
2b 8ab 2a 8ab 2ab 8a 2ab 8b
2 2 2 2
4a 4b2
x y 1
2
2a 2b
2 2
8a 8b
2 2
4a 4b2
Now,
x 1
2
2a 2b
2 2
4a 4b2
2a 2 2b2
x
4a 2 4b2
2 a 2 b2
4 a 2 b2
1
2
And,
y 1
2
8a 8b
2 2
4a 4b 2
8a 2 8b 2
y
4a 2 4b 2
8 a 2 b2
y
4 a 2 b2
8
y
4
y2
1
Hence, x , y 2 is the solution of the given system of the equations.
2
The given system of equations may be written as
2ax 2by a 4b 0
2bx 2ay b 4a 0
Here,
a1 2a, b1 2b, c1 a 4b
a2 2b, b2 2a, c2 b 4a
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
2
2b b 4a 2a a 4b 2a b 4a 2b a 4b 4a 4b 2
x 1
2
2b 8ab 2a 8ab 4a 4b2
2 2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y 1
2
2a 2b
2 2
8a 8b
2 2
4a 4b2
Now,
x 1
2
2a 2b
2 2
4a 4b 2
2a 2b 2
x 2
4a 4b 2
2 a 2 b 2
4a 2 4b 2
1
2
And,
y 1
2
8a 8b
2 2
4a 4b2
8a 2 8b 2
y
4a 2 4b 2
8 a 2 b 2
y
4 a 2 b2
8
y
4
y2
1
Hence, x , y 2 is the solution of the given system of the equations.
2
6 ax by 3a 2b
24.
6 bx ay 3b 2a
Sol:
The given system of equation is
6 ax by 3a 2b ..... i
6 bx ay 3b 2a ..... ii
From equation (i), we get
6ax 6by 3a 2b 0 ...... iii
From equation (ii), we get
6bx 6ay 3b 2a 0 ...... iv
Here,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 6a, b1 6b, c1 3a 2b
a2 6b, b2 6a and c2 3b 2a
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
6b 3b 2a 6a 3a 2b 6a 3b 2a 6b 3a 2b 36a 36b 2
2
x y 1
18b 12ab 18a 12ab 18ab 12a 18ab 12b 36 a 2 b2
2 2 2 2
x y 1
18a 18b 12a 12b 36 a 2 b2
22 2 2
x y 1
18 a b 12 a b 36 a 2 b2
2 2 2 2
Now,
x 1
18 a b 36 a 2 b 2
2 2
18 a 2 b2
x
36 a 2 b2
1
2
And,
y 1
12 a b 36 a 2 b 2
2 2
12 a 2 b 2
y
36 a 2 b 2
1
y
3
1 1
Hence, x , y is the solution of the given system of equations.
2 3
𝑎2 𝑏2
25. − =0
𝑥 𝑦
𝑎2 𝑏 𝑏2 𝑎
+ = 𝑎 + 𝑏, 𝑥, 𝑦 ≠ 0
𝑥 𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Taking u and v. Then, the given system of equations become
x y
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a 2u b 2 v 0
a 2bu b2 av a b 0
Here,
a1 a 2 , b1 b2 , c1 0
a2 a 2b, b2 b2 a, and c2 a b
By cross multiplication, we have
u v 1
2 2 3 2
b a b 0 b a a a b 0 a b a b a 2b 3
2 2
u v 1
2 2 2
b a b a a b a b a b
2
Now,
u 1
2 2
b a b a b a b
2
b2 a b
u 2 2
a b a b
1
u
a2
And,
v 1
2 2
a a b a b a b
2
a2 a b
v 2 2
a b a b
1
v
b2
Now,
1
x a2
u
And,
1
y b2
v
Hence, x a 2 , y b 2 is the solution of the given system of equations.
26. mx – my = m2 + n2
x + y = 2m
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
mx ny m 2 n 2 0
x y 2m 0
Here,
a1 m, b1 n, c1 m2 n 2
a2 1, b2 1, and c2 2m
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
2mn m n 2m m n m n
2 2 2 2 2
x y 1
2mn m n2 2
m n
2 2
mn
x y 1
m n m n m n
2 2 2
Now,
x 1
m n mn
2
x
m n 2
mn
x mn
And,
y 1
m n
2 2
mn
m n 2
2
y
mn
m n2
2
y
mn
y
m n m n
mn
y mn
Hence, x m n, y m n is the solution of the given system of equation.
𝑎𝑥 𝑏𝑦
27. − =𝑎+𝑏
𝑏 𝑎
𝑎𝑥 − 𝑏𝑦 = 2𝑎𝑏
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a b
x y a b 0
b a
ax by 2ab 0
Here,
a b
a1 , b1 , c1 a b
b a
x y 1
2b ab b
2 2
2a a ab a b
2 2
x y 1
2
b ab a ab a b
2
x y 1
b b a a a b b a
Now,
x 1
b b a b a
b b a
x b
ba
And,
y 1
a b a b a
a b a
y
ba
y a
y a
Hence, x b, y a is the solution of the given system of equations.
x y a 2 b2 0
b a
28.
a b
x y 2ab 0
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
x y a 2 b2 0
b a
a b
x y 2ab 0
Here,
a1 , b1 , c1 a 2 b 2
b a
a b
a2 1, b2 1, and c2 2ab
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
a a b a
2ab a 2 b 2 2ab a 2 b 2
b b a b
x y 1
2
2a a b
2 2 2
2b a b
2 2 2
b a2
ab
x y 1
b2 a 2 b 2 a 2 b2 a 2
ab
Now,
x 1
2
b a
2 2
b a2
ab
ab
x b2 a 2 2
b a2
x ab
And,
y 1
2
b a
2 2
b a2
ab
ab
y b 2 a 2 2
b a2
y b2 a 2 2
ab
b a2
y ab
y ab
Hence, x ab, y ab is the solution of the given system of equations.
Exercise 3.5
In each of the following systems of equations determine whether the system has a unique
solution, no solution or infinitely many solutions. In case there is a unique solution, find it:
(1 −4)
x 3y 3 0
1.
3x 9 y 2 0
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 3y 3 0
3x 9 y 2 0
The given system of equations is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 1, b1 3, c1 3
And a2 3, b2 9, c2 2
We have,
a1 1
a2 3
b1 3 1
b2 9 3
c1 3 3
And,
c2 2 2
a1 b1 c1
Clearly,
a2 b2 c2
So, the given system of equation has no solutions.
2x y 5 0
2.
4 x 2 y 10 0
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
2x y 5 0
4 x 2 y 10 0
The given system of equations is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 2, b1 1, c1 5
And a2 4, b2 2, c2 10
We have,
a1 2 1
a2 4 2
b1 1
b2 2
c1 5 1
And,
c2 10 2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
Clearly,
a2 b2 c2
So, the given system of equation has infinity many solutions.
3x 5 y 20
3.
6 x 10 y 40
Sol:
3x 5 y 20
6 x 10 y 40
Compare it with
a1 x by1 c1 0
a1 x by2 c2 0
We get
a1 3, b1 5 and c1 20
a 2 6, b2 10 and c 2 40
a1 3 b1 5 c 20
, and 1
a2 6 b2 10 c2 40
Simplifying it we get
a1 1 b1 1 c 1
, and 1
a2 2 b2 2 c2 2
Hence
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
So both lines are coincident and overlap with each other
So, it will have infinite or many solutions
x 2y 8 0
4.
5 x 10 y 10 0
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
x 2y 8 0
5 x 10 y 10 0
The given system if equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 1, b1 2, c1 8
And, a2 5, b2 10, c2 10
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
We have,
a1 1
a2 5
b1 2 1
b2 10 5
c1 8 4
And,
c2 10 5
a1 b2 c1
Clearly,
a2 b2 c2
So, the given system of equation has no solution.
kx 2 y 5 0
5.
3x y 1 0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
kx 2 y 5 0
3x y 1 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 k , b1 2, c1 5
And, a2 3, b2 1, c2 1
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1
a2 b2
k 2
3 1
k 6
So, the given system of equations will have a unique solution for all real values of k other
than 6.
6. 4x + ky + 8 = 0
2x + 2y + 2 = 0
Sol:
Here a1 4, a2 k , b1 2, b2 2
a1 b1
Now for the given pair to have a unique solution:
a2 b2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
4 k
i.e.,
2 2
i.e., k 4
Therefore, for all values of k, except 4, the given pair of equations will have a unique
solution.
4x 5 y k
7.
2 x 3 y 12
Sol:
The given system of equation is
4x 5 y k 0
2 x 3 y 12 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 4, b1 5, c1 k
And, a2 2, b2 3, c2 12
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1
a2 b2
4 5
2 3
k is any real number.
So, the given system of equations will have a unique solution for all real values of k.
x 2y 3
8.
5 x ky 7 0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
x 2y 3 0
5 x ky 7 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 1, b1 2, c1 3
And, a2 5, b2 k , c2 7
For a unique solution, we must have
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1
a2 b2
1 2
5 k
k 10
So, the given system of equations will have a unique solution for all real values of k other
than 10.
Find the value of k for which each of the following systems of equations have definitely many
solution: (9-19)
2x 3y 5 0
9.
6 x ky 15 0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
2x 3y 5 0
6 x ky 15 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 2, b1 3, c1 5
And, a2 6, b2 k , c2 15
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
2 3
6 k
2k 18
18
k 9
2
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k 9.
4x 5 y 3
10.
kx 15 y 9
Sol:
The given system of equation is
4x 5 y 3 0
kx 15 y 9 0
The system of equation is of the form
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 4, b1 5, c1 3
And, a2 k , b2 15, c2 9
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
4 5 3
k 15 9
Now,
4 5
k 15
4 1
k 3
k 12
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k 12.
kx 2 y 6 0
11.
4x 3y 9 0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
kx 2 y 6 0
4x 3y 9 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 k , b1 2, c1 6
And, a2 4, b2 3, c2 9
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
k 2 6
4 3 9
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
k 6
4 9
k 2
4 3
2 4
k
3
8
k
3
8
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k .
3
8x 5 y 9
12.
kx 10 y 18
Sol:
The given system of equation is
8x 5 y 9 0
kx 10 y 18 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 8, b1 5, c1 9
And, a2 k , b2 10, c2 18
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
8 5 9
k 10 18
Now,
8 5
k 10
8 10 5 k
8 10
k
5
k 8 2 16
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k 16.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2x 3y 7
13.
k 2 x 2k 1 y 3 2k 1
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
2x 3y 7 0
k 2 x 2k 1 y 3 2k 1 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 2, b1 3, c1 7
And, a2 k , b2 2k 1 , c2 3 2k 1
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
2 3 7
k 2 2k 1 3 2k 1
2 3 3 7
and
k 2 2k 1 2k 1 3 2k 1
2 2k 1 3 k 2 and 3 3 2k 1 7 2k 1
4k 2 3k 6 and 18k 9 14k 7
4k 3k 6 2 and 18k 14k 7 9
k 4 and 4k 16 k 4
k 4 and k 4
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k 4.
2x 3y 2
14.
k 2 x 2k 1 y 2 k 1
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
2x 3y 2 0
k 2 x 2k 1 y 2 k 1 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 2, b1 3, c1 2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
And, a2 k 2, b2 2k 1 , c2 2 k 1
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
2 3 2
k 2 2k 1 2 k 1
2 3 3 2
and
k 2 2k 1 2k 1 2 k 1
2 2k 1 3 k 2 and 3 k 1 2k 1
4k 2 3k 6 and 3k 3 2k 1
4k 3k 6 2 and 3k 2k 1 3
k 4 and k 4
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k 4.
x k 1 y 4
15.
k 1 x 9 y 5k 2
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
x k 1 y 4 0
k 1 x 9 y 5k 2 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 1, b1 k 1, c1 4
And, a2 k 1, b2 9, c2 5k 2
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
1 k 1 4
k 1 9 5k 2
1 k 1 k 1 4
and
k 1 9 9 5k 2
9 k 1 and k 1 5k 2 36
2
9 k 2 1 2k and 5k 2 2k 5k 2 36
k 2 2k 1 9 0 and 5k 2 7k 2 36 0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
k 2 2k 8 0 and 5k 2 7k 34 0
k 2 4k 2k 8 0 and 5k 2 17k 10k 34 0
k k 4 2 k 4 0 and 5k 17 2 5k 17 0
k 4 k 2 0 and 5k 17 k 2 0
17
k 4 or k 2 and k
or k 2
5
k 2 satisfies both the conditions
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k 2.
kx 3 y 2k 1
16.
2 k 1 x 9 y 7 k 1
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
kx 3 y 2k 1 0
2 k 1 x 9 y 7k 1 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 k , b1 3, c1 2k 1
And, a2 2 k 1 , b2 9, c2 7k 1
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
1 3 2k 1
2 k 1 9 7k 1
k 3 3 2k 1
and
2 k 1 9 9 7k 1
9k 3 2 k 1 and 3 7k 1 9 2k 1
9k 6 k 1 and 21k 3 18k 9
9k 6k 6 and 21k 18k 9 3
3k 6 and 3k 6
6 6
k and k
3 3
k 2 and k 2
k 2 satisfies both the conditions
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k 2.
2x k 2 y k
17.
6 x 2k 1 y 2k 5
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
2x k 2 y k 0
6 x 2k 1 y 2k 5 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 2, b1 k 2, c1 k
And, a2 6, b2 2k 1, c2 2k 5
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
2 k 2 k
6 2k 1 2 2k 5
2 k 2 k 2 k
and
6 2k 1 2k 1 2k 5
1 k 2
and k 2 2k 5 k 2k 1
3 2k 1
2k 1 3 k 2 and 2k 2 5k 4k 10 2k 2 k
2k 3k 6 and k 10 k
2k 3k 6 1 and k k 10
k 5 and 2k 10
5 10
k and k
1 2
k 5 and k 5
k 5 satisfies both the conditions
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k 5.
2x 3y 7
18.
k 1 x 2k 1 y 4k 1
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2x 3y 7 0
k 1 x 2k 1 y 4k 1 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 2, b1 3, c1 7
And, a2 k 1, b2 2k 1, c2 4k 1
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
2 3 7
k 1 2k 1 4k 1
2 3 3 7
and
k 1 2k 1 2k 1 4k 1
2 2k 1 3 k 1 and 3 4k 1 7 2k 1
4k 2 3k 3 and 12k 3 14k 7
4k 3k 3 2 and 12k 14k 7 3
k 5 and 2k 10
10
k 5 and k 5
2
k 5 satisfies both the conditions
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k 5.
2x 3y k
19.
k 1 x k 2 y 3k
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
2x 3y k 0
k 1 x k 2 y 3k 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 2, b1 3, c1 k
And, a2 k 1, b2 k 2, c2 3k
For a unique solution, we must have
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
2 3 k
k 1 k 1 3k
2 3 3 k
and
k 1 k 1 k 1 3k
2 k 2 3 k 1 and 3 3 k 2
2k 4 3k 3 and 9 k 2
4 3 3k 2k and 9 2 k
7 k and 7 k
k 7 and k 7
k 7 satisfies both the conditions
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k 7.
Find the value of k for which the following system of equations has no solution: (20 – 25)
kx 5 y 2
20.
6x 2 y 7
Sol:
Given
kx 5 y 2
6x 2 y 7
Condition for system of equations having no solution
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
k 5 2
6 2 7
2k 30
k 15
x 2y 0
21.
2 x ky 5 0
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
x 2y 0
2 x ky 5 0
The system of equation is of the form
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 1, b1 2, c1 0
And, a2 2, b2 k , c2 5
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
We have,
a1 1
a2 2
b1 2
b2 k
c1 0
And,
c2 5
a1 b1
Now,
a2 b2
1 2
2 k
k 4
Hence, the given system of equations has no solutions, when k 4.
3x 4 y 7 0
22.
kx 3 y 5 0
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
3x 4 y 7 0
kx 3 y 5 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 3, b1 4, c1 7
And, a2 k , b2 3, c2 5
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
We have,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
b1 4
b2 3
c1 7
and ,
c2 5
b1 c1
Clearly,
b2 c2
So, the given system will have no solution.
a b 3 4 9
If 1 1 k
a2 b2 k 3 4
a1 b1 c1
Clearly, for this value of k, we have
a2 b2 c2
9
Hence, the given system of equations has no solutions, when k .
4
2 x ky 3 0
23.
3x 2 y 1 0
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
2 x ky 3 0
3x 2 y 1 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 2, b1 k , c1 3
And, a2 3, b2 2, c2 1
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
We have,
a1 2
a2 3
c1 3
and ,
c2 1
a1 c1
Clearly,
a2 c2
So, the given system will have no solution. If
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 2 k 4
i.e., k
a2 b2 k 2 3
4
Hence, the given system of equations has no solutions, k .
3
2 x ky 11 0
24.
5x 7 y 5 0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
2 x ky 11 0
5x 7 y 5 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 2, b1 k , c1 11
And, a2 5, b2 7, c2 5
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
2 k 11
5 7 5
2 k k 11
and
5 7 7 5
Now,
2 k
5 7
2 7 5k
5k 14
14
k
5
14 k 11
Clearly, for we have
5 7 5
14
Hence, the given system of equation will have no solution, if k
5
kx 3 y 3
25.
12 x ky 6
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
kx 3 y 3
12 x ky 6
a1 b1 c1
For no solution
a2 b2 c2
k 2 3
12 k 6
k 3
12 k
k 2 36
k 6 i.e., k 6, 6
Also,
3 3
k 6
3 6
k
3
k 6
k 6 satisfies both the condition
Hence, k 6
26. For what value of 𝛼, the following system of equations will be inconsistent?
4 x 6 y 11 0
2 x ky 7 0
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
4 x 6 y 11 0
2 x ky 7 0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 4, b1 6, c1 11
And, a2 2, b2 k , c2 7
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1
a2 b2
4 6
2 k
4k 12
12
k 3
4
Clearly, for this value of k, we have
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
Hence, the given system of equation is inconsistent, when k 3.
3 3
3 3
3 3
33
6
6
And,
3
12
36
2
6
6 6
Hence, the given system of equation will have no solution, if 6.
31. For what value of k, the following system of equations will represent the coincident lines?
x 2y 7 0
2 x ky 14 0
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
x 2y 7 0
2 x ky 14 0
The given system of equations is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 1, b1 2, c1 7
And a2 2, b2 k , c2 14
The given equations will represent coincident lines if they have infinitely many solutions,
The condition for which is
a1 b1 c1 1 2 7
k4
a2 b2 c2 2 k 14
Hence, the given system of equations will represent coincident lines, if k 4.
32. Obtain the condition for the following system of linear equations to have a unique solution
ax by c
lx my n
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
ax by c 0
lx my n 0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
It is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 1, b1 2, c1 c
And a2 l , b2 m, c2 n
For unique solution, we must have
a1 b1
a2 b2
a b
l m
am bl
Hence, am bl is the required condition.
33. Determine the values of a and b so that the following system of linear equations have
infinitely many solutions:
2a 1 x 3 y 5 0
3x b 1 y 2 0
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
2a 1 x 3 y 5 0
3x b 1 y 2 0
It is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 2a, b1 3, c1 5
And a2 3, b2 b 1, c2 2
The given system of equations will have infinite number of solutions, if
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
2a 1 3 5
3 b 1 2
5 3 5
2 2a 1 and
2 b 1 2
2 2a 1 5 3 and 3 2 5 b 1
4a 2 15 and 6 5b 5
4a 15 2 and 6 5 5b
17 11
a and b
4 5
17 11
a and b
4 5
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
17 11
If a and b .
4 5
34. Find the values of a and b for which the following system of linear equations has infinite
number of solutions:
2x 3y 7
a b x a b 3 y 4a b
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
2x 3y 7 0
a b x a b 3 y 4a b 0
It is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 2, b1 3, c1 7
And a2 a b, b2 a b 3 , c2 4a b
The given system of equations will have infinite number of solutions, if
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
2 3 7
a b a b 3 4a b
2 3 3 7
and
a b a b 3 a b 3 4a b
2 a b 3 3 a b and 3 4a b 7 a b 3
6 3a 2a 3b 2b and 12a 7a 3b 7b 21
6 a b and 5a 4b 21
Now,
a b 6
a 6 b
Substituting the value of ‘a’ in 5a 4b 2, we get
5 b 6 4b 21
5b 30 4b 21
9b 21 30
9b 9
9
b 1
9
Putting b 1 in a b 6, we get
a 1 6 1 6 5
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
If a 5 and b 1.
35. Find the values of p and q for which the following system of linear equations has infinite
number of solutions:
2x 3y 9
p q x 2 p q y 3 p q 1
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
2x 3y 9 0
p q x 2 p q y 3 p q 1 0
It is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 2, b1 3, c1 9
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
And a2 p q, b2 2 p q, c2 3 p q 1
The given system of equations will have infinite number of solutions, if
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
2 2 9
p q 2 p q 3 p q 1
2 3 3
p q 2 p q p q 1
2 3 3 3
and
p q 2p q 2 p q p q 1
2 2 p q 3 p q and p q 1 2 p q
4 p 2q 3 p 3q and 2 p p q q 1
p 5q 0 and p 2q 1
p 5q p 2q 1 [On adding]
3q 1
1
q
3
1
Putting q in p 5q, we get
3
1
p 5 0
3
5
p
3
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
5 1
If p and q
3. 3
36. Find the values of a and b for which the following system of equations has infinitely many
solutions:
2x 3 y 7
a b x a b y 3a b 2
Sol:
2x 3y 7 0
a b x a b y 3a b 2 0
Here, a1 2, b1 3, c1 7
a2 a b , b2 a b , c2 3a b 2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 2 b1 3 c1 7 7
, ,
a2 a b b2 a b c2 3a b 2 3a b 2
For the equation to have infinitely many solutions, we have:
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
2 7
a b 3a b 2
6a 2b 4 7a 7b
a 9b 4 ......... 1
2 3
a b a b
2a 2b 3a 3b
a 5b 0 ........ 2
Subtracting (1) from (2), we obtain:
4b 4
b 1
Substituting the value of b in equation (2), we obtain
a 5 1 0
a5
Thus, the values of a and b are 5 and 1 respectively.
(i)
2a 1 x 3 y 5
3x b 2 y 3
Sol:
The given system of equations is
2a 1 x 3 y 5 0
3x b 2 y 3 0
It is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 2a 1, b1 3, c1 5
And, a2 3, b2 b 2, c2 3
The given system of equations will have infinite number of solutions, if
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
2a 1 3 5
3 b 2 3
2a 1 3 5
3 b2 3
2a 1 5 3 5
and
3 3 b2 3
3 2a 1
5 and 9 5 b 2
3
2a 1 5 and 9 5b b 2
2a 5 1 and 9 10 5b
6
a and 1 5b
2
1
a 3 and b
5
1
a 3 and b
5
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
1
If a 3 and b
5
(ii)
2 x 2a 5 y 5
2b 1 x 9 y 15
Sol:
The given system of equations is
2 x 2a 5 y 5 0
2b 1 x 9 y 15 0
It is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 x b1 2a 5 , c1 5
And, a2 2b 1 , b2 9, c2 15
The given system of equations will be have infinite number of solutions, if
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
2 2a 5 5
2b 1 9 15
2 2a 5 1
2b 1 9 3
2 1 2a 5 1
and
2b 1 3 9 3
3 2a 5
6 2b 1 and 1
9
6 1 2b and 2a 5 3
5 2b and 2a 2
5 2
b and a 1
2 2
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
5
If a 1 and b .
2
(iii)
a 1 x 3 y 2
6 x 1 2b y 6
Sol:
The given system of equations is
a 1 x 3 y 2 0
6 x 1 2b y 6 0
It is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 a 1, b1 3, c1 2
And, a2 6, b2 1 2b, c2 6
The given system of equations will be have infinite number of solutions, if
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
a 1 3 2
6 1 2b 6
a 1 3 1
6 1 2b 3
a 1 1 3 1
and
b 3 1 2b 3
3 a 1 6 and 3 3 1 2b
a 1 2 and 9 1 2b
a 2 1 and 2b 1 9
a 3 and 2b 8
8
a 3 and b 4
2
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
If a 3 and b 4.
(iv)
3x 4 y 12
a b x 2 a b y 5a 1
Sol:
The given system of equations is
3x 4 y 12 0
a b x 2 a b y 5a 1 0
It is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 3, b1 4, c1 12
And, a2 a b, b2 2 a b , c2 5a 1
The given system of equations will be have infinite number of solutions, if
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
3 4 12
a b 2 a b 5a 1
3 2 2 12
and
a b a b a b 5a 1
3 a b 2 a b and 2 5a 1 12 a b
3a 3b 2a 2b and 10a 2 12a 12b
3a 2a 2b 3b and 10a 12a 12b 2
a 5b and 2a 12b 2
Substituting a 5b in 2a 12b 2, we get
2 5b 12b 2
10b 12b 2
12b 10b 2
2b 2
b 1
Putting b 1 in a 5b, we get
a 5 1 5
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
If a 5 and b 1.
(v)
2x 3y 7
a 1 x a 1 y (3a 1)
Sol:
The given system of equations is
2x 3y 7 0
a 1 x a 1 y 3a 1 0
It is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 2, b1 3, c1 7
And, a2 a 1, b2 a 1, c2 3a 1
The given system of equations will be have infinite number of solutions, if
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
2 3 7
a b a 1 3a 1
2 3 7
a 1 a 1 3a 1
3 3 3 7
and
a 1 a 1 a 1 3a 1
2 a 1 3 a 1 and 3 3a 1 7 a 1
2a 2 3a 3 and 9a 3 7a 7
2a 3a 3 and 9a 3 7a 7
a 5 and 2a 10
10
a 5 and a 5
2
a5
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
If a 5.
(vi)
2x 3y 7
a 1 x a 2 y 3a
Sol:
The given system of equations is
2x 3y 7 0
a 1 x a 2 y 3a 0
It is of the form
a1 x b1 y c1 0
a2 x b2 y c2 0
Where, a1 2, b1 3, c1 7
And, a2 a 1, b2 a 1, c2 3a
The given system of equations will be have infinite number of solutions, if
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
2 3 7
a b a 1 3a
2 3 7
a 1 a 2 3a
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 3 3 7
and
a 1 a 2 a 2 3a
2 a 2 3 a 1 and 3 3a 7 a 2
2a 4a 3 and 9a 7a 14
2a 3a 3 and 9a 7a 14
a 7 and 2a 14
14
a 7 and a 7
2
a7
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
If a 7.
Exercise 3.6
1. 5 pens and 6 pencils together cost Rs 9 and 3 pens and 2 pencils cost Rs 5. Find the cost of
1 pen and 1 pencil.
Sol:
Let the cost of a pen be Rs x and that of a pencil be Rs y. Then,
5x 6 y 9 ....... i
and 3x 2 y 5 ...... ii
Multiplying equation (i) by 2 and equation (ii) by 6, we get
10 x 12 y 18 ...... iii
18 x 12 y 30 ...... iv
Subtracting equation (iii) by equation (iv), we get
18 x 10 x 12 y 12 y 30 18
8 x 12
12 3
x 1.5
8 2
Substituting x 1.5 in equation (i), we get
5 1.5 6 y 9
7.5 6 y 9
6 y 9 7.5
6 y 1.5
1.5 1
y 0.25
6 4
Hence, cost of one pen Rs 1.50 and cost of one pencil Rs 0.25
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2. 7 audio cassettes and 3 video cassettes cost Rs 1110, while 5 audio cassettes and 4 video
cassettes cost Rs 1350. Find the cost of an audio cassette and a video cassette.
Sol:
Let the cost of a audio cassette be Rs x and that of a video cassette be Rs y. Then,
7 x 3 y 1110 .... i
and 5 x 4 y 1350 .... ii
Multiplying equation (i) by 4 and equation (ii) by 3, we get
28 x 12 y 4440 ...... iii
15 x 12 y 4050 ...... iv
Subtracting equation (iv) from equation (iii), we get
28 x 15 x 12 y 12 y 4440 4050
13x 390
390
x 30
13
Substituting equation (iv) from equation (iii), we get
28x 15 x 12 y 12 y 4440 4050
13x 390
390
x 30
13
Substituting x 30 in equation (i), w get
7 30 3 y 1110
210 3 y 1110
3 y 1110 210
3 y 900
900
y 300
3
Hence, cost of one audio cassette Rs 30 and cost of one video cassette Rs 300
3. Reena has pens and pencils which together are 40 in number. If she has 5 more pencils and
5 less pens, then nuimber of pencils would become 4 times the number of pens. Find the
original number of pens and pencils.
Sol:
Let the number of pens be x and that of pencil be y. then,
x y 40 .......(i )
and y 5 4 x 5
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y 5 4 x 20
5 20 4 x y
4 x y 25 ...... ii
Adding equation (i) and equation (ii), we get
x 4 x 40 25
5 x 65
65
x 13
5
Putting x 13 in equation (i), we get
13 y 40
y 40 13 27
Hence, Reena has 13 pens 27 pencils.
4. 4 tables and 3 chairs, together, cost Rs 2,250 and 3 tables and 4 chairs cost Rs 1950. Find
the cost of 2 chairs and 1 table.
Sol:
Let the cost of a table be Rs x and that of a chairs be Rs y. Then,
4 x 3 y 2, 250 ..... i
and , 3x 4 y 1950 .....(ii)
Multiplying equation (i) by 4 and equation (ii) by 3, we get
16 x 12 y 9000 ......(iii )
9 x 12 y 5850 ....... iv
Subtracting equation (iv) by equation (iii), we get
16 x 9 x 9000 5850
7 x 3150
3150
x 450
7
Putting x 450 in equation (i), we get
4 450 3 y 2, 250
1800 3 y 2250
3 y 2250 1800
3 y 450
450
y 150
3
2 y 2 150 300
Cost of 2 chairs Rs 300 and cost of 1 table Rs 450
The cost of 2 chairs and 1 table 300 450 Rs 750
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5. 3 bags and 4 pens together cost Rs 257 whereas 4 bags and 3 pens together cost R 324.
Find the total cost of 1 bag and 10 pens.
Sol:
Let the cost of a bag be Rs x and that of a pen be Rs y . Then,
3x 4 y 257 ..... i
and , 4 x 3 y 324 ..... ii
Multiplying equation (i) by 3 and equation (ii) by 4, we get
9 x 12 y 770 .... iii
16 x 12 y 1296 ...... iv
Subtracting equation (iii) by equation (iv), we get
16 x 9 x 1296 771
7 x 525
525
x 75
7
Cost of a bag Rs 75
Putting x 75 in equation (i), we get
3 75 4 y 257
225 4 y 257
4 y 257 225
4 y 32
32
y 8
4
Cost of a pen Rs 8
Cost of 10 pens 8 10 Rs 80
Hence, the total cost of 1 bag and 10 pens 75 80 Rs 155.
6. 5 books and 7 pens together cost Rs 79 whereas 7 books and 5 pens together cost Rs 77.
Find the total cost of 1 book and 2 pens.
Sol:
Let the cost of a book be Rs x and that of a pen be Rs y. Then,
5 x 7 y 79 ..... i
and , 7 x 5 y 77 .... ii
Multiplying equation (i) by 5 and equation (ii) by 7, we get
25 35 y 395 ...... iii
49 x 35 y 539 ....... iv
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Subtracting equation (iii) by equation (iv), we get
49 x 25 x 539 395
24 x 144
144
x 6
24
Cost of a book Rs 6
Putting x 6 in equation (i), we get
5 6 7 y 79
30 7 y 79
7 y 79 30
7 y 49
79
y 7
7
Cost of a pen Rs 7
Cost of 2 pens 2 7 Rs 14
Hence, the total cost of 1 book and 2 pens 6 14 Rs 20
7. A and B each have a certain number of mangoes. A says to B, “if you give 30 of your
mangoes, I will have twice as many as left with you.” B replies, “if you give me 10, I will
have thrice as many as left with you.” How many mangoes does each have?
Sol:
Suppose A has x mangoes and B has y mangoes
According to the given conditions, we have
x 30 2 y 30
x 30 2 y 60
x 2 y 60 30
x 2 y 90 .... i
And, y 10 3 x 10
y 10 3x 30
10 30 3x y
3x y 40 .... ii
Multiplying equation (i) by 3 and equation (ii) by 1, we get
3x 6 y 270 ..... iii
3x y 40 ...... iv
Subtracting equation (iv) by equation (iii), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
6 y y 270 40
6 y y 310
5 y 310
310
y 62
5
Putting x 62 in equation (i), we get
x 2 62 90
x 124 90
x 90 124
x 34
Hence, A has 34 mangoes and B has 62 mangoes
8. On selling a T.V. at 5%gain and a fridge at 10% gain, a shopkeeper gains Rs 2000. But if
he sells the T.V. at 10% gain and the fridge at 5% loss. He gains Rs 1500 on the
transaction. Find the actual prices of T.V. and fridge.
Sol:
Let the price of a T.V. be Rs x and that of a fridge be Rs y. Then, we have
5 x 10 y
2000
100 100
5 x 10 y 200000
5 x 2 y 200000
x 2 y 400000 ... i
10 x 5 y
And, 1500
100 100
10 x 5 y 150000
5 2 x y 150000
2 x y 30000
Multiplying equation (ii) by 2, we get
4 x 2 y 6000 ..... iii
Adding equation (i) and equation (iii), we get
x 4 x 40000 60000
5 x 100000
x 20000
Putting x 20000 in equation (i), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
20000 2 y 40000
2 y 40000 20000
20000
y 10000
2
Hence, the actual price of T.V Rs 20, 000 and, the actual price of fridge Rs 10, 000
9. The coach of a cricket team buys 7 bats and 6 balls for Rs 3800. Later, he buys 3 bats and 5
balls for Rs 1750. Find the cost of each bat and each ball.
Sol:
Let the cost of bat and a ball be x and y respectively
According to the given information
7 x 6 y 3800 …….(1)
3x 5 y 1750 ……..(2)
From (1), we obtain
3800 7 x
y ……..(3)
6
Substituting this value in equation (2), we obtain
3800 7 x
3x 5 1750
6
9500 35 x
3x 1750
3 6
35x 9500
3x 1750
6 3
35x 5250 9500
3x
6 3
17 x 4250
6 3
17 x 8500
x 500 4
Substituting this in equation (3), we obtain
3800 7 500
y
6
300
50
6
Hence, the cost of a bat is Rs 500 and that of a ball is Rs 50.
Concept Insight: Cost of bats and balls needs to be found so the cost of a ball and bat will
be taken as the variables. Applying the conditions of total cost of bats and balls algebraic
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
equations will be obtained. The pair of equations can then be solved by suitable
substitution.
10. One says, “Give me a hundred, friend! I shall then become twice as rich as you.” The other
replies, “If you give me ten, I shall be six times as rich as you.” Tell me what is the amount
of their respective capital?
Sol:
Let the money with the first person and second person be Rs x and Rs y respectively.
According to the question
x 100 2 y 100
x 100 2 y 200
x 2 y 300 ……(1)
6 x 10 y 10
6 x 30 y 10
6 x y 70 …….(2)
Multiplying equation (2) by 2, we obtain
12 x 2 y 140 …….(3)
Subtracting equation (1) from equation (3), we obtain:
11x 140 300
11x 440
x 40
Putting the value of x in equation (1), we obtain
40 2 y 300
40 300 2 y
2 y 340
y 170
Thus, the two friends had Rs 40 and Rs 170 with them.
11. A lending library has a fixed charge for the first three days and an additional charge for
each day thereafter. Saritha paid Rs 27 for a book kept for seven days, while Susy paid Rs
21 for the book she kept for five days. Find the fixed charge and the charge for each extra
day.
Sol:
Let the fixed charge for first three days and each day charge thereafter be Rs x and Rs y
respectively.
According to the question,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 4 y 27 ... 1
x 2 y 21 ... 2
Subtracting equation (2) from equation (1), we obtain:
2y 6
y3
Subtracting the value of y in equation (1), we obtain
x 12 27
x 15
Hence, the fixed charge is Rs 15 and the charge per day is Rs 3.
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
Exercise 4.1
Exercise 4.2
1. In ∆ABC, D and E are points on the sides AB and AC respectively such that DE || BC
(i) If AD = 6 cm, DB = 9 cm and AE = 8 cm, find AC.
𝐴𝐷 3
(ii) If 𝐷𝐵 = 4 and AC = 15 cm, find AE
𝐴𝐷 2
(iii) If 𝐷𝐵 = 3 and AC = 18 cm, find AE
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
We have,
DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionally theorem,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
We have 𝐷𝐵 = 𝐸𝐶
6 8
⇒ 9 = 𝐸𝐶
2 8
⇒ 3 = 𝐸𝐶
8×3
⇒ EC = 2
⇒ EC = 12 cm
⇒ Now, AC = AE + EC = 8 + 12 = 20 cm
∴ AC = 20 cm
(ii)
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
We have,
𝐴𝐷 3
= 4 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐷𝐸 | |𝐵𝐶
𝐷𝐵
𝑇ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒, 𝑏𝑦 𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑖𝑐 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑎𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑚, 𝑤𝑒 ℎ𝑎𝑣𝑒
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
Adding 1 on both sides, we get
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
+ 1 = 𝐸𝐶 + 1
𝐷𝐵
3 𝐴𝐸+𝐸𝐶
+1=
4 𝐸𝐶
3+4 𝐴𝐶
⇒ = 𝐸𝐶 [∵ AE + EC = AC]
4
7 15
⇒ 4 = 𝐸𝐶
15×4
⇒ EC = 7
60
⇒ EC = 7
Now, AE + EC = AC
60
⇒ AE + = 15
7
60
⇒ AE = 15 − 7
105−60
= 7
45
= 7
= 6.43 cm
∴ AE = 6.43 cm
(iii)
We have,
𝐴𝐷 2
= 3 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐷𝐸 | | 𝐵𝐶
𝐷𝐵
𝑇ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒, 𝑏𝑦 𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑖𝑐 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑎𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑚, 𝑤𝑒 ℎ𝑎𝑣𝑒,
𝐴𝐷 𝐸𝐶
= 𝐴𝐸
𝐷𝐵
3 𝐸𝐶
⇒ 2 = 𝐴𝐸
Adding 1 on both sides, we get
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
3 𝐸𝐶
+ 1 = 𝐴𝐸 + 1
2
3+2 𝐸𝐶+𝐴𝐸
⇒ =
2 𝐴𝐸
5 𝐴𝐶
⇒ 2 = 𝐴𝐸 [∵ AE + EC = AC]
5 18
⇒ 2 = 𝐴𝐸 [∵ AC = 18]
18×2
⇒ 𝐴𝐸 = 5
36
⇒ 𝐴𝐸 = = 7.2 𝑐𝑚
5
(iv)
We have,
DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem, we have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
4 8
= 3𝑥−19
𝑥−4
⇒ 4(3x – 19) = 8(x – 4)
⇒ 12x – 76 = 8x – 32
⇒ 12x – 8x = −32 + 76
⇒ 4x = 44
44
⇒𝑥= = 11𝑐𝑚
4
∴ x = 11 cm
(v)
We have,
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
AD = 8cm, AB = 12 cm
∴ BD = AB – AD
= 12 – 8
⇒ BD = 4 cm
And, DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem, we have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐵𝐷 𝐶𝐸
8 12
⇒ 4 = 𝐶𝐸
12×4 12
⇒ CE = =
8 2
⇒ CE = 6cm
∴ CE = 6cm
(vi)
We have,
DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem, we have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
4 8
⇒ 4.5 = 𝐸𝐶
8×4.5
⇒ 𝐸𝐶 = 4
⇒ EC = 9cm
Now, AC = AE + EC
=8+9
= 17 cm
∴ AC = 17 cm
(vii)
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
We have,
AD = 2 cm, AB = 6 cm
∴ DB = AB – AD
=6–2
⇒ DB = 4 cm
And, DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem, we have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
Taking reciprocal on both sides, we get,
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
= 𝐴𝐸
𝐴𝐷
4 𝐸𝐶
= 𝐴𝐸
2
Adding 1 on both sides, we get
4 𝐸𝐶
+ 1 = 𝐴𝐸 + 1
2
4+2 𝐸𝐶+𝐴𝐸
⇒ =
2 𝐴𝐸
6 𝐴𝐶
⇒ 2 = 𝐴𝐸 [∵ EC + AE = AC]
6 9
⇒ 2 = 𝐴𝐸 [∵ AC = 9cm]
9×2
𝐴𝐸 = 6
⇒ 𝐴𝐸 = 3𝑐𝑚
(viii)
We have, DE || BC
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
(ix)
We have,
DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem,
We have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
𝑥 𝑥+2
⇒ 𝑥−2 = 𝑥−1
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 1) = (𝑥 + 2)(𝑥 − 2)
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 𝑥 = 𝑥 2 − (2)2 [∵ (a – b) (a + b) = 𝑎2 − 𝑏 2 ]
⇒ −𝑥 = −4
⇒ x = 4 cm
∴ x = 4 cm
(x)
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
We have,
DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem, we have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
8𝑥−7 4𝑥−3
⇒ 5𝑥−3 = 3𝑥−1
⇒ (8𝑥 − 7)(3𝑥 − 1) = (4𝑥 − 3)(5𝑥 − 3)
⇒ 24𝑥 2 − 8𝑥 − 21𝑥 + 7 = 20𝑥 2 − 12𝑥 − 15𝑥 + 9
⇒ 24𝑥 2 − 20𝑥 2 − 29𝑥 + 27𝑥 + 7 − 9 = 0
⇒ 4𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 2 = 0
⇒ 2[2𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 1] = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 1 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 + 1𝑥 − 1 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥(𝑥 − 1) + 1(𝑥 − 1) = 0
⇒ (2x + 1) (x – 1) = 0
⇒ 2x + 1 = 0 or x – 1 = 0
1
⇒ x = − 2 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 1
1
𝑥 = − 2 𝑖𝑠 𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑏𝑙𝑒
∴x=1
(xi)
We have, DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem,
We have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
4𝑥−3 8𝑥−7
⇒ 3𝑥−1 = 5𝑥−3
⇒ (4𝑥 − 3)(5𝑥 − 3) = (8𝑥 − 7)(3𝑥 − 1)
⇒ 4𝑥(5𝑥 − 3) − 3(5𝑥 − 3) = 8𝑥(3𝑥 − 1) − 7(3𝑥 − 1)
⇒ 20𝑥 2 − 12𝑥 − 15𝑥 + 9 = 24𝑥 2 − 8𝑥 − 21𝑥 + 7
⇒ 4𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 2 = 0
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
⇒ 2(2𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 1)= 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 1 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 + 1𝑥 − 1 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥(𝑥 − 1) + 1(𝑥 − 1) = 0
⇒ (2x + 1) (x – 1) = 0
⇒ 2x + 1 = 0 or x – 1 = 0
1
⇒ x = − 2 or x = 1
1
x = − 2 is not possible
∴x=1
(xii)
We have, DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem, we have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
2.5 3.75
⇒ 3.0 = 𝐸𝐶
3.75×3 375×3
⇒ 𝐸𝐶 = =
2.5 250
15×3
⇒ EC = 10
45
= 10 = 4.5 𝑐𝑚
Now, AC = AE + EC = 3.75 + 4.5 = 8.25
∴ AC = 8.25 cm
2. In a ∆ABC, D and E are points on the sides AB and AC respectively. For each of the
following cases show that DE || BC:
(i) AB = 2cm, AD = 8cm, AE = 12 cm and AC = l8cm.
(ii) AB = 5.6cm, AD = 1.4cm, AC= 7.2 cm and AE = 1.8 cm.
(iii) AB = 10.8 cm, BD = 4.5 cm, AC = 4.8 cm and AE = 2.8 cm.
(iv) AD = 5.7 cm, BD = 9.5 cm, AE = 3.3 cm and EC = 5.5 cm.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
We have,
AB = 5.6 cm, AD = 1.4 cm, AC = 7.2 cm and AE = 1.8 cm
∴ DB = AB – AD
= 5.6 – 1.4
⇒ DB = 4.2 cm
And, EC = AC – AE
= 7.2 – 1.8
⇒ EC = 5.4 cm
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
𝐴𝐷 1.4 1
Now, 𝐷𝐵 = 4.2 = 3 [∵ DB = 4.2 cm]
𝐴𝐸 1.8 1
And, 𝐸𝐶 = 5.4 = 3 [∵ EC = 5.4 cm]
Thus, DE divides sides AB and AC of ∆ABC in the same ratio.
Therefore, by the converse of basic proportionality theorem,
(iii)
We have,
We have,
AB = 10.8cm, BD = 4.5cm, AC = 4.8 cm and AE = 2.8cm
∴ AD = AB – DB = 10.8 – 4.5
⇒ AD = 6.3 cm
And, EC = AC – AE
= 4.8 – 2.8
⇒ EC = 2 cm
𝐴𝐷 6.3 7
Now, 𝐷𝐵 = 4.5 = 5 [∵ AD = 6.3 cm]
𝐴𝐸 2.8 28 75
And, 𝐸𝐶 = = 20 = [∵ EC = 2 cm]
2 5
Thus, DE divides sides AB and AC of ∆ABC in the same ratio. Therefore, by the converse
of basic proportionality theorem.
(iv)
We have,
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
DE || BC
We have, AD = 5.7 cm, BD = 9.5 cm, AE = 3.3 cm and EC = 5.5 cm
𝐴𝐷 5.7 57
Now 𝐵𝐷 = 9.5 = 95
𝐴𝐷 3
⇒ 𝐵𝐷 = 5
𝐴𝐸 3.3 33
And, 𝐸𝐶 = 5.5 = 55
𝐴𝐸 3
⇒ 𝐸𝐶 = 5
Thus DE divides sides AB and AC of ∆ABC in the same ratio.
Therefore, by the converse of basic proportionality theorem. We have DE || BC
3. In a ∆ABC, P and Q are points on sides AB and AC respectively, such that PQ || BC. If AP
= 2.4 cm, AQ = 2 cm, QC = 3 cm and BC = 6 cm, find AB and PQ.
Sol:
We have || BC
Therefore, by BPT
We have,
𝐴𝑃 𝐴𝑄
= 𝑄𝐶
𝑃𝐵
2.4 2
=3
𝑃𝐵
3×2.4 3×24 3×6 18
⇒ PB = = = =
2 2 5 5
⇒ PB = 3.6 cm
Now, AB = AP + PB
= 2.4 + 3.6 = 6cm
Now, In ∆APQ and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [common]
∠APQ = ∠ABC [∵ PQ || BC ⇒ Corresponding angles are equal]
⇒ ∆APQ ~ ∆ABC [By AA criteria]
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐶
⇒ 𝐴𝑃 = 𝑃𝑄 [corresponding sides of similar triangles are proportional]
6×2.4
⇒ PQ = 6
⇒ PQ = 2.4 cm
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
We have,
DE || BC
Now, In ∆ADE and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [common]
∠ADE = ∠ABC [∵ DE || BC ⇒ Corresponding angles are equal]
⇒ ∆ADE ~ ∆ABC [By AA criteria]
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐷
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 = 𝐷𝐸 [corresponding sides of similar triangles are proportional]
2.4×5
⇒ AB = 2
⇒ AB = 1.2 × 5 = 6.0 cm
⇒ AB = 6 cm
∴ BD = 6 cm
BD = AB – AD
= 6 – 2.4 = 3.6 cm
⇒ DB = 3.6 cm
Now,
𝐴𝐶 𝐴𝐸
= 𝐷𝐸 [∵ Corresponding sides of similar triangles are equal]
𝐵𝐶
𝐴𝐶 3.2
⇒ =
5 2
3.2×5
⇒ 𝐴𝐶 = = 1.6 × 5 = 8.0 𝑐𝑚
2
⇒ AC = 8 cm
∴ CE = AC – AE
= 8 – 3.2 = 4.8 cm
Hence, BD = 3.6 cm and CE = 4.8 cm
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
Sol:
We have,
DP = 3.9 cm, PE = 3cm, DQ = 3.6 cm and QF = 2.4 cm
𝐷𝑃 3.9 1.3 13
Now, 𝑃𝐸 = = = 10
3 1
𝐷𝑄 3.6 36 3
And, 𝑄𝐹 = 2.4 = 24 = 2
𝐷𝑃 𝐷𝑄
⇒ 𝑃𝐸 ≠ 𝑄𝐹
So, PQ is not parallel to EF
6. M and N are points on the sides PQ and PR respectively of a ∆PQR. For each of the
following cases, state whether MN || QR
(i) PM = 4cm, QM = 4.5 cm, PN = 4 cm and NR = 4.5 cm
Sol:
7. In three line segments OA, OB, and OC, points L, M, N respectively are so chosen that LM
|| AB and MN || BC but neither of L, M, N nor of A, B, C are collinear. Show that LN ||AC.
Sol:
We have,
LM || AB and MN || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem,
We have,
𝑄𝐿 𝑂𝑀
= 𝑀𝐵 …(i)
𝐴𝐿
𝑂𝑁 𝑂𝑀
𝑎𝑛𝑑, 𝑁𝐶 = 𝑀𝐵 …(ii)
𝐶𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 (𝑖)𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 (𝑖𝑖), 𝑤𝑒 𝑔𝑒𝑡,
𝑂𝑁 𝑂𝑁
=
𝐴𝐿 𝑁𝐶
Thus, LN divides sides OA and OC of ∆OAC in the same ratio. Therefore, by the converse
of basic proportionality theorem,
we have, LN || AC
8. If D and E are points on sides AB and AC respectively of a ∆ABC such that DE || BC and
BD = CE. Prove that ∆ABC is isosceles.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
We have, DE || BC
Therefore, by BPT, we have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
= 𝐸𝐶
𝐷𝐵
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
⇒ 𝐷𝐵 = 𝐷𝐵 [∵BD = CE]
⇒ AD = AE
Adding DB on both sides
⇒ AD + DB = AE + DB
⇒ AD + DB = AE + EC [∴ BD = CE]
⇒ AB = AC
⇒ ∆ ABC is isosceles
Exercise 4.3
We have,
∠BAD = ∠CAD
We know that, the internal bisector of an angle of a triangle divides the opposite side
internally in the ratio of the sides containing the angle.
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐵
∴ 𝐷𝐶 = 𝐴𝐶
2.5 5
⇒ 𝐷𝐶 = 4.2
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
2.5×4.2
⇒ 𝐷𝐶 = 5
25×42 5×42 210
= 5×100 = = 100 = 2.1 𝑐𝑚
100
∴ DC = 2.1 cm
(ii)
We have,
AD is the bisector of ∠A
We know that, the internal bisector of an angle of a triangle divides the opposite
side internally in the ratio of the sides containing the angle.
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐵
∴ =
𝐷𝐶 𝐴𝐶
2 5
⇒ 3 = 𝐴𝐶
5×3 15
⇒ AC = =
2 2
⇒ AC = 7.5 cm
(iii)
7
= 3 = 2.33 𝑐𝑚
∴ 𝐵𝐷 = 2.3 𝑐𝑚
(iv)
(v)
We have,
BC = 10 cm, DC = 6 cm and AC = 4.2 cm
∴ BD = BC – DC = 10 – 6 = 4 cm
⇒ BD = 4 cm
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
We have,
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
Sol:
In ∆ABC, AD is the bisector of ∠A.
We know that, the internal bisector of an angle of a triangle divides the opposite side
internally in the ratio of the sides containing the angle.
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐵 𝑥 10
∴ 𝐷𝐶 = 𝐴𝐶 ⇒ 12−𝑥 = 6
⇒ 6(12 + x) = 10x
⇒ 72 + 6x = 10x
⇒ 4x – 72
72
⇒x= = 18 𝑐𝑚
4
∴ CE = 18 cm
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
3. In Fig. 4.58, ∆ABC is a triangle such that 𝐴𝐶 = 𝐷𝐶 , ∠𝐵 = 70°, ∠𝐶 = 50°. 𝐹𝑖𝑛𝑑 ∠𝐵𝐴𝐷.
Sol:
We have, if a line through one vertex of a triangle divides the opposite side in the ratio of
the other two sides, then the line bisects the angle at the vertex.
∴ ∠1 = ∠2
In ∆ABC
∠A + ∠B + ∠C = 180°
⇒ ∠A + 70 ° + 50° = 180° [∵ ∠B = 70° and ∠C = 50°]
⇒ ∠A = 180° − 120° = 60°
⇒ ∠1 + ∠2 = 60°
⇒ ∠1 + ∠1 = 60° [∵ ∠1 = ∠2]
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
⇒ 2∠1 = 60°
⇒ ∠1 = 30°
∴ ∠BAD = 30°
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
4. In ∆ABC (Fig., 4.59), if ∠1 = ∠2, prove that 𝐴𝐶 = 𝐷𝐶 .
Sol:
𝐵𝐷 𝐵𝐴
⇒ 𝑫𝑪 = 𝑨𝑬 [Using basic proportionality theorem]
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐵
⇒ 𝐷𝐶 = 𝐴𝐶 [∵ BA – AB and AE – AC from (iii)]
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
Hence, 𝐴𝐶 = 𝐷𝐶
5. D, E and F are the points on sides BC, CA and AB respectively of ∆ABC such that AD
bisects ∠A, BE bisects ∠B and CF bisects ∠C. If AB = 5 cm, BC = 8 cm and CA = 4 cm,
determine AP, CE and BD.
Sol:
32
⇒ CE = 13 cm
Similarly,
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐷
=
𝐷𝐶 𝐴𝐶
𝐵𝐷 5
⇒ 8−𝐵𝐷 = 4 [∵ DC = BC – BD = 8 – BD]
⇒ 4BD = 40 – 5BD
⇒ 9BD = 40
40
⇒ BD = cm
9
5 32 40
Hence, AF = 3 𝑐𝑚, CE = 13 cm and BD = cm.
9
6. In fig., 4.60, check whether AD is the bisector of ∠A of ∆ABC in each of the following:
𝐵𝐷 𝐵𝐷
And, 𝐶𝐷 = 𝐵𝐶−𝐵𝐷 [∵ CD = BC – BD]
𝐵𝐷
= 24−6
6
= 18
1
=3
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
∴ 𝐴𝐶 = 𝐶𝐷
∴ 𝐴𝐷 𝑖𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑏𝑖𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑓 ∠𝐴 𝑜𝑓 ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶.
𝐴𝐵 6 3
=8=4
𝐴𝐶
𝐵𝐷 2.5
And, = [∵ CD = BC – BD]
𝐶𝐷 𝐵𝐶−𝐵𝐷
2.5
= 9−2.5
2.5
= 6.5
1
=3
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
∴ 𝐴𝐶 ≠ 𝐶𝐷
∴ AD is not the bisector of ∠A of ∆ABC.
Exercise 4.4
Sol:
Since diagonals of a trapezium divide each other proportionally.
𝐴𝑂 𝐵𝑂
∴ 𝑂𝐶 = 𝑂𝐷
4 𝑥+1
⇒ 4𝑥−2 = 2𝑥+4
⇒ 4(2𝑥 + 4) = (𝑥 + 1)(4𝑥 − 2)
⇒ 8x + 16 = x(4x – 2) +1(4x – 2)
⇒ 8x + 16 = 4x2 + 2x – 2
⇒ 4𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 − 8𝑥 − 2 − 16 = 0
⇒ 4𝑥 2 − 6𝑥 − 18 = 0
⇒ 2[2𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 − 9] = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 − 9 = 0
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
⇒ 2𝑥(𝑥 − 3) + 3(𝑥 − 3) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 3)(2𝑥 + 3) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 − 3 = 0 or 2𝑥 + 3 = 0
3
⇒ 𝑥 = 3 or 𝑥 = − 2
3
⇒ x = 3 or 𝑥 = − 2
3 3 1
𝑥 = − 2 is not possible, because OB = x + 1 = − 2 + 1 = − 2
Length cannot be negative
𝐴𝑂 𝐵𝑂
∴ 𝑂𝐶 = 𝑂𝐷
3𝑥−1 2𝑥+1
⇒ 5𝑥−3 = 6𝑥−5
⇒ (3x – 1) (6x – 5) = (2x + 1) (5x – 3)
⇒ 3x (6x – 5) – 1(6x – 5) = 2x (5x – 3) + 1 (5x – 3)
⇒ 18𝑥 2 − 15𝑥 − 6𝑥 + 5 = 10𝑥 2 − 6𝑥 + 5𝑥 − 3
⇒ 8𝑥 2 − 20𝑥 + 8 = 0
⇒ 4(2𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 + 2) = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 − 1𝑥 + 2 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥(𝑥 − 2) − 1(𝑥 − 2) = 0
⇒ (2𝑥 − 1)(𝑥 − 2) = 0
⇒ 2x – 1 = 0 or x – 2 = 0
1
⇒ 𝑥 = 2 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 2
1
𝑥 = 2 is not possible, because, OC = 5x – 3
1
= 5 (2) − 3
5−6 1
= = −2
2
Exercise 4.5
1. In fig. 4.136, ∆ACB ~ ∆APQ. If BC = 8 cm, PQ = 4 cm, BA = 6.5 cm and AP = 2.8 cm, find
CA and AQ.
Sol:
Given ∆ACB ~ ∆APQ
𝐴𝐶 𝐵𝐶 𝐴𝐵
Then, 𝐴𝑃 = 𝑃𝑄 = 𝐴𝑄 [corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐴𝐶 8 6.5
⇒ 2.8 = 4 = 𝐴𝑄
𝐴𝐶 8 8 6.5
⇒ 2.8 = 4 𝑎𝑛𝑑 4 − 𝐴𝑄
8 4
⇒ AC = 4 × 2.8 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐴𝑄 = 6.5 × 8
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
2. A vertical stick 10 cm long casts a shadow 8 cm long. At the same time a shadow 30 m
long. Determine the height of the tower.
Sol:
Length of stick = 10 cm
Length of shadow of stick = 8 cm
Length of shadow of tower = h cm
In ∆ABC and ∆PQR
∠B = ∠Q = 90°
And, ∠C = ∠R [Angular elevation of sun]
Then, ∆ABC ~ ∆PQR [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐶
∴ 𝑃𝑄 = 𝑄𝑅
10𝑐𝑚 ℎ 𝑐𝑚
⇒ = 3000
8 𝑐𝑚
10
⇒ℎ= × 3000 = 3750 𝑐𝑚 = 37.5 𝑚
8
Sol:
We have, ∆PAB and ∆PQR
∠P = ∠P [common]
∠PAB = ∠PQR [corresponding angles]
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
Sol:
We have, XY || BC
In ∆AXY and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [common]
∠AXY = ∠ABC [corresponding angles]
Then, ∆AXY ~ ∆ABC [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝑋 𝑋𝑌
∴ 𝐴𝐵 = 𝐵𝐶 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
1 𝑋𝑌
⇒4= 6
6
⇒ XY = 4 = 1.5𝑐𝑚
5. In a right angled triangle with sides a and b and hypotenuse c, the altitude drawn on the
hypotenuse is x. Prove that ab = cx.
Sol:
We have: ∠C = 90° and CD ⊥ AB
∠B = ∠B [common]
∠ACB = ∠CDB [Each 90°]
Then, ∆ACB ~ ∆CDB [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐶 𝐴𝐵
∴ 𝐶𝐷 = [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐶𝐵
𝑏 𝑐
⇒𝑥=𝑎
⇒ ab = cx
6. In Fig. 4.139, ∠ABC = 90° and BD ⊥ AC. If BD = 8 cm and AD = 4 cm, find CD.
Sol:
We have, ∠ABC = 90° and BD ⊥ AC
Now, ∠ABD + ∠DBC − 90° …(i) [∵ ∠ABC − 90°]
And, ∠C + ∠DBC − 90° …(ii) [By angle sum prop. in ∆BCD]
Compare equations (i) & (ii)
∠ABD = ∠C …(iii)
In ∆ABD and ∆BCD
∠ABD = ∠C [From (iii)]
∠ADB = ∠BDC [Each 90°]
Then, ∆ABD ~ ∆BCD [By AA similarity]
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐷
∴ 𝐶𝐷 = 𝐵𝐷 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
8 4
⇒ 𝐶𝐷 = 8
8×8
⇒ CD = = 16 𝑐𝑚
4
7. In Fig. 4.14, ∠ABC = 90° and BD ⊥ AC. If AB = 5.7 cm, BD = 3.8 cm and CD = 5.4 cm,
find BC.
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
Sol:
We have, ∠ABC = 90° and BD ⊥ AC
In ∆ABC and ∆BDC
∠ABC = ∠BDC [Each 90°]
∠C = ∠C [Common]
Then, ∆ABC ~ ∆BDC [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐶
∴ 𝐵𝐷 = 𝐷𝐶 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
5.7 𝐵𝐶
⇒ 3.8 = 5.4
5.7
⇒ BC = 3.8 × 8.1 𝑐𝑚
Sol:
1
We have, DE || BC, AB = 6 cm and AE = 4 𝐴𝐶
In ∆ADE and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [Common]
∠ADE = ∠ABC [Corresponding angles]
Then, ∆ADE ~ ∆ABC [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 = 𝐴𝐶 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
1
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐶 1
4
⇒ = [∵ AE = 4 𝐴𝐶 𝑔𝑖𝑣𝑒𝑛]
6 𝐴𝐶
𝐴𝐷 1
⇒ =4
6
6
⇒ AD = 4 = 1.5 cm
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
1 1 1
9. In fig., 4.142, PA, QB and RC are each perpendicular to AC. Prove that 𝑥 + 𝑧 + 𝑦
Sol:
We have, PA ⊥ AC, QB ⊥ AC and RC ⊥ AC
Let, AB = a and BC = b
In ∆CQB and ∆CPA
∠QCB = ∠PCA [Common]
∠QBC = ∠PAC [Each 90°]
Then, ∆CQB ~ ∆CPA [By AA similarity]
𝑄𝐵 𝐶𝐵
∴ 𝑃𝐴 = 𝐶𝐴 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝑦 𝑏
⇒ 𝑥 = 𝑎+𝑏 ….(i)
In ∆ AQB and ∆ARC
∠QAB = ∠RAC [common]
∠ABQ = ∠ ACR [Each 90°]
Then, ∆AQB ~ ∆ARC [By AA similarity]
𝑄𝐵 𝐴𝐵
∴ 𝑅𝐶 = [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐴𝐶
𝑦 𝑎
⇒ 𝑧 = 𝑎+𝑏 ….(ii)
Adding equations (i) & (ii)
𝑦 𝑦 𝑏 𝑎
+ 𝑧 = 𝑎+𝑏 + 𝑎+𝑏
𝑥
1 1 𝑏+𝑎
⇒ 𝑦 (𝑥 + 𝑧) = 𝑎+𝑏
1 1
⇒ y(𝑥 + 𝑧) = 1
1 1 1
⇒𝑥+𝑧 =𝑦
10. In below fig., ∠A = ∠CED, Prove that ∆CAB ~ ∆CED. Also, find the value of x.
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
Sol:
We have, ∠A = ∠CED
In ∆CAB and ∆CED
∠C = ∠C [Common]
∠A = ∠CED [Given]
Then, ∆CAB ~ ∆CED [By AA similarity]
𝐶𝐴 𝐴𝐵
∴ 𝐶𝐸 = 𝐸𝐷 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
15 9
⇒ 10 = 𝑥
10×9
⇒𝑥= = 6 𝑐𝑚
15
11. The perimeters of two similar triangles are 25 cm and 15 cm respectively. If one side of
first triangle is 9 cm, what is the corresponding side of the other triangle?
Sol:
Assume ABC and PQR to be 2 triangles
We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
Perimeter of ∆ ABC = 25 cm
Perimeter of ∆ PQR = 15 cm
AB = 9 cm
PQ = ?
Since, ∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
Then, ratio of perimeter of triangles = ratio of corresponding sides
25 𝐴𝐵
⇒ 12 = 𝑃𝑄
25 9
⇒ 15 = 𝑃𝑄
15×9
⇒ PQ = = 5.4 𝑐𝑚
25
12. In ∆ABC and ∆DEF, it is being given that: AB = 5 cm, BC = 4 cm and CA = 4.2 cm;
DE=10cm, EF = 8 cm and FD = 8.4 cm. If AL ⊥ BC and DM ⊥ EF, find AL: DM.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐶 𝐴𝐶 1
Since, 𝐷𝐸 = 𝐸𝐹 = 𝐷𝐸 = 2
Then, ∆ABC ~ ∆DEF [By SSS similarity]
Now, In ∆ABL ~ ∆DEM
∠B = ∠E [∆ ABC ~ ∆DEF]
∠ALB = ∠DME [Each 90°]
Then, ∆ABL ~ ∆DEM [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐿
∴ 𝐷𝐸 = 𝐷𝑀 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
5 𝐴𝐿
⇒ 10 = 𝐷𝑀
1 𝐴𝐿
⇒ 2 = 𝐷𝑀
13. D and E are the points on the sides AB and AC respectively of a ∆ABC such that: AD = 8
cm, DB = 12 cm, AE = 6 cm and CE = 9 cm. Prove that BC = 5/2 DE.
Sol:
We have,
𝐴𝐷 8 2
= 12 = 3
𝐷𝐵
𝐴𝐸 6 2
And, 𝐸𝐶 = 9 = 3
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
Since, 𝐷𝐵 = 𝐸𝐶
Then, by converse of basic proportionality theorem
DE || BC
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
14. D is the mid-point of side BC of a ∆ABC. AD is bisected at the point E and BE produced
cuts AC at the point X. Prove that BE : EX = 3 : 1
Sol:
𝐵𝐸 3
⇒ 𝐸𝑋 = 1
15. ABCD is a parallelogram and APQ is a straight line meeting BC at P and DC produced at
Q. Prove that the rectangle obtained by BP and DQ is equal to the AB and BC.
Sol:
16. In ∆ABC, AL and CM are the perpendiculars from the vertices A and C to BC and AB
respectively. If AL and CM intersect at O, prove that:
(i) ∆ OMA and ∆OLC
𝑂𝐴 𝑂𝑀
(ii) =
𝑂𝐶 𝑂𝐿
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
We have,
AL ⊥ BC and CM ⊥ AB
In ∆ OMA and ∆OLC
∠MOA = ∠LOC [Vertically opposite angles]
∠AMO = ∠CLO [Each 90°]
Then, ∆OMA ~ ∆OLC [By AA similarity]
𝑂𝐴 𝑂𝑀
∴ 𝑂𝐶 = [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝑂𝐿
Sol:
We have AB || CD || EF. If AB = 6 cm, CD = x cm, EF = 10 cm, BD = 4 cm and DE = y cm
In ∆ECD and ∆EAB
∠CED = ∠AEB [common]
∠ECD = ∠EAB [corresponding angles]
Then, ∆ECD ~ ∆EAB ….(i) [By AA similarity]
𝐸𝐶 𝐶𝐷
∴ 𝐸𝐴 = 𝐴𝐵 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐸𝐶 𝑥
⇒ 𝐸𝐴 = 6 ….(ii)
In ∆ACD and ∆AEF
∠CAD = ∠EAF [common]
∠ACD = ∠AEF [corresponding angles]
Then, ∆ACD ~ ∆AEF [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐶 𝐶𝐷
∴ 𝐴𝐸 = 𝐸𝐹
𝐴𝐶 𝑥
⇒ = …(iii)
𝐴𝐸 10
Add equations (iii) & (ii)
𝐸𝐶 𝐴𝐶 𝑥 𝑥
∴ 𝐸𝐴 + 𝐴𝐸 = 6 + 10
𝐴𝐸 5𝑥+3𝑥
⇒ 𝐴𝐸 = 30
8𝑥
⇒ 1 = 30
30
⇒𝑥= = 3.75 cm
8
𝐷𝐶 𝐸𝐷
From (i) 𝐴𝐵 = 𝐵𝐸
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
3.75 𝑦
⇒ = 𝑦+4
6
⇒ 6y = 3.75y + 15
⇒ 2.25y = 15
15
⇒ 𝑦 = 2.25 = 6.67 𝑐𝑚
AD = BC and P, Q, R and S are the mid-points of sides AB, AC, CD and BD respectively,
show that PQRS is a rhombus.
In ∆BAD, by mid-point theorem
1
PS || AD and PS = 2 AD …(i)
In ∆CAD, by mid-point theorem
1
QR || AD and QR = 2 𝐴𝐷 …(ii)
Compare (i) and (ii)
PS || QR and PS = QR
Since one pair of opposite sides is equal as well as parallel then
PQRS is a parallelogram ...(iii)
Now, In ∆ABC, by mid-point theorem
1
PQ || BC and PQ = 2 BC …(iv)
And, AD = BC …(v) [given]
Compare equations (i) (iv) and (v)
PS = PQ …(vi)
From (iii) and (vi)
Since, PQRS is a parallelogram with PS = PQ then PQRS is a rhombus
19. In Fig. below, if AB ⊥ BC, DC ⊥ BC and DE ⊥ AC, Prove that ∆ CED ~ ABC.
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
Sol:
Given: AB ⊥ BC, DC ⊥ BC and DE ⊥ AC
To prove: ∆CED ~ ∆ABC
Proof:
∠BAC + ∠BCA = 90° …(i) [By angle sum property]
And, ∠BCA + ∠ECD = 90° …(ii) [DC ⊥ BC given]
Compare equation (i) and (ii)
∠BAC = ∠ECD …(iii)
In ∆CED and ∆ABC
∠CED = ∠ABC [Each 90°]
∠ECD = ∠BAC [From (iii)]
Then, ∆CED ~ ∆ABC [By AA similarity]
20. In an isosceles ∆ABC, the base AB is produced both the ways to P and Q such that AP ×
BQ = AC2. Prove that ∆APC ~ ∆BCQ.
Sol:
21. A girl of height 90 cm is walking away from the base of a lamp-post at a speed of 1.2m/sec.
If the lamp is 3.6 m above the ground, find the length of her shadow after 4 seconds.
Sol:
We have,
Height of girl = 90 cm = 0.9 m
Height of lamp-post = 3.6 m
Speed of girl = 1.2 m/sec
∴ Distance moved by girl (CQ) = Speed × Time
= 1.2 × 4 = 4.8m
Let length of shadow (AC) = x cm
In ∆ABC and ∆APQ
∠ACB = ∠AQP [Each 90°]
∠BAC = ∠PAQ [Common]
Then, ∆AB ~ ∆APQ [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐶 𝐵𝐶
∴ 𝐴𝑄 = 𝑃𝑄 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝑥 0.9
⇒ = 3.6
𝑥+4.8
𝑥 1
⇒ 𝑥+4.8 = 4
⇒ 4x = x + 4.8
⇒ 4x – x = 4.8
⇒ 3x = 4.8
4.8
⇒x= = 1.6 𝑚
3
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
22. Diagonals AC and BD of a trapezium ABCD with AB || DC intersect each other at the
𝑂𝐴 𝑂𝐵
point O. Using similarity criterion for two triangles, show that 𝑂𝐶 = 𝑂𝐷.
Sol:
We have,
ABCD is a trapezium with AB || DC
In ∆AOB and ∆COD
∠AOB = ∠COD [Vertically opposite angles]
∠OAB = ∠OCD [Alternate interior angles]
Then, ∆AOB ~ ∆COD [By AA similarity]
𝑂𝐴 𝑂𝐵
∴ 𝑂𝐶 = 𝑂𝐷 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
23. If ∆ABC and ∆AMP are two right triangles, right angled at B and M respectively such that
∠MAP = ∠BAC. Prove that
(i) ∆ABC ~ ∆AMP
𝐶𝐴 𝐵𝐶
(ii) = 𝑀𝑃
𝑃𝐴
Sol:
We have,
∠B = ∠M = 90°
And, ∠BAC = ∠MAP
In ∆ABC and ∆AMP
∠B = ∠M [Each 90°]
∠BAC = ∠MAP [Given]
Then, ∆ABC ~ ∆AMP [By AA similarity]
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
𝐶𝐴 𝐵𝐶
∴ 𝑃𝐴 = 𝑀𝑃 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
24. A vertical stick of length 6 m casts a shadow 4 m long on the ground and at the same time a
tower casts a shadow 28 m long. Find the height of the tower.
Sol:
Let AB be a tower
CD be a stick, CD = 6m
Shadow of AB is BE = 28m
Shadow of CD is DF = 4m
At same time light rays from sun will fall on tower and stick at same angle.
So, ∠DCF = ∠BAE
And ∠DFC = ∠BEA
∠CDF = ∠ABE (tower and stick are vertical to ground)
Therefore ∆ ABE ~ ∆CDF (By AA similarity)
So,
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐸
= 𝐷𝐹
𝐶𝐷
𝐴𝐵 28
=
6 4
6
AB = 28 × 4 = 42𝑚
So, height of tower will be 42 metres.
25. In below Fig., ∆ABC is right angled at C and DE ⊥ AB. Prove that ∆ABC ~ ∆ADE and
Hence find the lengths of AE and DE.
Sol:
In ∆ACB, by Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = (5)2 + (12)2
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 25 + 144 = 169
⇒ AB = √169 = 13 𝑐𝑚
In ∆AED and ∆ACB
∠A = ∠A [Common]
∠AED = ∠ACB [Each 90°]
Then, ∆AED ~ ∆ACB [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐸 𝐷𝐸 𝐴𝐷
∴ 𝐴𝐶 = = 𝐴𝐵 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐶𝐵
𝐴𝐸 𝐷𝐸 3
⇒ = = 13
5 12
𝐴𝐸 3 𝐷𝐸 3
⇒ = 13 and 12 = 13
5
15 36
⇒ AE = 13 cm and DE = 13 cm
Exercise 4.6
And DE = 5.1 cm
Since, ∆ABC ~ ∆DEF
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
Then, 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐷𝐸𝐹) = 𝐷𝐸2 [By area of similar triangle theorem]
9 𝐴𝐵2
⇒ 64 = (5.1)2
3 𝐴𝐵
⇒ 8 = 5.1 [By taking square root]
3×5.1
⇒ AB = = 1.9125 𝑐𝑚
8
(iii)
We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆DEF
AC = 19 cm and DF = 8 cm
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆ 𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐶 2 (19)2 361
= 𝐷𝐹2 = =
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐷𝐸𝐹) 82 64
We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆DEF
AC = 19 cm and DF = 8 cm
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐶 2 (19)2 361
= 𝐷𝐹2 = =
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐷𝐸𝐹) 82 64
(iv)
We have, Area (∆ABC) = 36 𝑐𝑚2
Area (∆𝐷𝐸𝐹) = 64 𝑐𝑚2
DE = 6.2 cm
And, ∆ABC ~ ∆DEF
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎( ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝐷𝐸2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐷𝐸𝐹)
36 𝐴𝐵2
⇒ 64 = (6.2)2 [By taking square root]
6×6.2
⇒ AB = = 4.65 𝑐𝑚
8
(v)
We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆DEF
AB = 1.2 cm and DF = 1.4 cm
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆ 𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝐷𝐸2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆ 𝐷𝐸𝐹)
(1.2)2
= (1.4)2
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
1.44
= 1.96
36
= 49
2. In fig. below ∆ACB ~ ∆APQ. If BC = 10 cm, PQ = 5 cm, BA = 6.5 cm and AP = 2.8 cm,
find CA and AQ. Also, find the area (∆𝐴𝐶𝐵): 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝑃𝑄)
Sol:
We have,
∆ACB ~ ∆APQ
𝐴𝐶 𝐶𝐵 𝐴𝐵
Then, 𝐴𝑃 = 𝑃𝑄 = 𝐴𝑄 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐴𝐶 10 6.5
⇒ 2.8 = = 𝐴𝑄
5
𝐴𝐶 10 10 6.5
⇒ 2.8 = 𝑎𝑛𝑑 = 𝐴𝑄
5 5
10 5
⇒ AC = × 2.8 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐴𝑄 = 6.5 × 10
5
⇒ AC = 5.6 cm and AQ = 3.25 cm
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐶𝐵) 𝐵𝐶 2
= 𝑃𝑄2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝑃𝑄)
(10)2
= (5)2
100
= 25
4
=1
3. The areas of two similar triangles are 81 cm2 and 49 cm2 respectively. Find the ratio of
their corresponding heights. What is the ratio of their corresponding medians?
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
Area (∆ABC) = 81 cm2,
Area (∆PQR) = 49 cm2
And AD and PS are the altitudes
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝑃𝑄2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝑃𝑄𝑅)
81 𝐴𝐵2
⇒ 49 = 𝑃𝑄2
9 𝐴𝐵
⇒ = ….(i) [Taking square root]
7 𝑃𝑄
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐴𝐵𝐷 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆𝑃𝑄𝑆
∠B = ∠Q [∆ABC ~ ∆PQR]
∠ ADB = ∠PSQ [Each 90°]
Then, ∆ABD ~ ∆PQS [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐷
∴ 𝑃𝑄 = …(ii) [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝑃𝑆
Compare (1) and (2)
𝐴𝐷 9
=7
𝑃𝑆
9
∴ Ratio of altitudes = 7
Since, the ratio of the area of two similar triangles is equal to the ratio of the squares of the
squares of their corresponding altitudes and is also equal to the squares of their
corresponding medians.
Hence, ratio of altitudes = Ratio of medians = 9 : 7
4. The areas of two similar triangles are 169 cm2 and 121 cm2 respectively. If the longest side
of the larger triangle is 26 cm, find the longest side of the smaller triangle.
Sol:
We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
Area(∆ABC) = 169 cm2
Area(∆PQR) = 121 cm2
And AB = 26 cm
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
5. Two isosceles triangles have equal vertical angles and their areas are in the ratio 36 : 25.
Find the ratio of their corresponding heights.
Sol:
6. The areas of two similar triangles are 25 cm2 and 36 cm2 respectively. If the altitude of the
first triangle is 2.4 cm, find the corresponding altitude of the other.
Sol:
We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
Area (∆ABC) = 25 cm2
Area (∆PQR) = 36 cm2
AD = 2.4 cm
And AD and PS are the altitudes
To find: PS
Proof: Since, ∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
Then, by area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝑃𝑄2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝑃𝑄𝑅)
25 𝐴𝐵2
⇒ =
36 𝑃𝑄 2
5 𝐴𝐵
⇒ 6 = 𝑃𝑄 ….(i)
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐴𝐵𝐷 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆𝑃𝑄𝑆
∠B = ∠Q [∆ ABC ~ ∆PQR]
∠ADB ~ ∠PSQ [Each 90°]
Then, ∆ABD ~ ∆PQS [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐷
∴ 𝑃𝑆 = ….(ii) [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝑃𝑆
Compare (i) and (ii)
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
𝐴𝐷 5
=6
𝑃𝑆
2.4 5
⇒ =6
𝑃𝑆
2.4×6
⇒ 𝑃𝑆 = = 2.88 𝑐𝑚
5
7. The corresponding altitudes of two similar triangles are 6 cm and 9 cm respectively. Find
the ratio of their areas.
Sol:
We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
AD = 6 cm
And, PS = 9 cm
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝑃𝑄2 …(i)
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝑃𝑄𝑅)
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐴𝐵𝐷 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆𝑃𝑄𝑆
∠B = ∠Q [∆ABC ~ ∆PQR]
∠ADB = ∠PSQ [Each 90°]
Then, ∆ABD ~ ∆PQS [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐷
∴ 𝑃𝑄 = [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝑃𝑆
𝐴𝐵 6
⇒ 𝑃𝑄 = 9
𝐴𝐵 2
⇒ 𝑃𝑄 = 3 …(ii)
Compare equations (i) and (ii)
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 2 2 4
= (3) = 9
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝑃𝑄𝑅)
8. ABC is a triangle in which ∠A =90°, AN⊥ BC, BC = 12 cm and AC = 5cm. Find the ratio
of the areas of ∆ANC and ∆ABC.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
9. In Fig. 4.178, DE || BC
(i) If DE = 4 cm, BC = 6 cm and Area (∆ADE) = 16 cm2, find the area of ∆ABC.
(ii) If DE = 4cm, BC = 8 cm and Area (∆ADE) = 25 cm2, find the area of ∆ABC.
(iii)If DE : BC = 3 : 5. Calculate the ratio of the areas of ∆ADE and the trapezium BCED.
Sol:
We have, DE || BC, DE = 4 cm, BC = 6 cm and area (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) = 16𝑐𝑚2
In ∆ADE and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [Common]
∠ADE = ∠ABC [Corresponding angles]
Then, ∆ADE ~ ∆ABC [By AA similarity]
∴ By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) 𝐷𝐸 2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶)
= 𝐵𝐶 2
16 42
⇒ 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) = 62
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
16×36
⇒ 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) = = 36𝑐𝑚2
16
𝑤𝑒 ℎ𝑎𝑣𝑒, 𝐷𝐸 | |𝐵𝐶, 𝐷𝐸 = 4 𝑐𝑚, 𝐵𝐶 = 8 𝑐𝑚 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) = 25 𝑐𝑚2
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐴𝐷𝐸 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶
∠A = ∠A [Common]
∠ADE = ∠ABC [Corresponding angles]
Then, ∆𝐴𝐷𝐸~∆𝐴𝐵𝐶 [By AA similarity]
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) 𝐷𝐸 2
= 𝐵𝐶 2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆ 𝐴𝐵𝐶)
16 42
⇒ =
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶 ) 62
16×36
⇒ Area (∆ABC) = = 36 𝑐𝑚2
16
We have, DE || BC, DE = 4 cm, BC = 8 cm and area (∆ADE) = 25cm2
In ∆ADE and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [Common]
∠ADE = ∠ABC [Corresponding angles]
Then, ∆ADE ~ ∆ABC [By AA similarity]
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) 𝐷𝐸 2
⇒ 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) = 𝐵𝐶 2
25 42
=
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 82
25×64
⇒ 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) = = 100 𝑐𝑚2
16
𝐷𝐸 3
We have, DE || BC, and 𝐵𝐶 = 5 ….(i)
In ∆ADE and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [Common]
∠ADE = ∠B [Corresponding angles]
Then, ∆ADE ~ ∆ABC [By AA similarity]
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) 𝐷𝐸 2
⇒ 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) = 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) 32
⇒ 𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐷𝐸)+𝑎𝑟(𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑝.𝐷𝐸𝐶𝐵) = 52 [From (i)]
⇒ 25ar (∆ADE) = 9𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) + 9𝑎𝑟 (𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑝. 𝐷𝐸𝐶𝐵)
⇒ 25 ar (∆ADE – 9ar) (∆ADE) = 9ar (trap.DECB)
⇒ 16 ar(∆ADE) = 9 ar (trap. DECB)
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) 9
⇒ 𝑎𝑟 (𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑝.𝐷𝐸𝐶𝐵) = 16
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
10. In ∆ABC, D and E are the mid-points of AB and AC respectively. Find the ratio of the
areas of ∆ADE and ∆ABC
Sol:
11. In Fig., 4.179, ∆ABC and ∆DBC are on the same base BC. If AD and BC intersect at O,
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝑂
prove that 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐷𝐵𝐶) = 𝐷𝑂
Sol:
1
We know that area of a triangle = 2 × 𝐵𝑎𝑠𝑒 × ℎ𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡
Since ∆ABC and ∆DBC are one same base,
Therefore ratio between their areas will be as ratio of their heights.
Let us draw two perpendiculars AP and DM on line BC.
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
12. ABCD is a trapezium in which AB || CD. The diagonals AC and BD intersect at O. Prove
that: (i) ∆AOB and ∆COD (ii) If OA = 6 cm, OC = 8 cm,
Find:
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝑂𝐵)
(a) 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐶𝑂𝐷)
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝑂𝐷)
(b) 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐶𝑂𝐷)
Sol:
We have,
AB || DC
In ∆AOB and ∆COD
∠AOB = ∠COD [Vertically opposite angles]
∠OAB = ∠OCD [Alternate interior angles]
Then, ∆AOB ~ ∆COD [By AA similarity]
(a) By area of similar triangle theorem
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐴𝑂𝐵) 𝑂𝐴2 62 36 9
= = = =
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐶𝑂𝐷) 𝑂𝐶 2 82 64 16
(b) Draw DP ⊥ AC
1
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝑂𝐷) ×𝐴𝑂×𝐷𝑃
∴ 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐶𝑂𝐷) = 21
×𝐶𝑂×𝐷𝑃
2
𝐴𝑂
= 𝐶𝑂
6
=8
3
=4
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
13. In ABC, P divides the side AB such that AP : PB = 1 : 2. Q is a point in AC such that PQ ||
BC. Find the ratio of the areas of ∆APQ and trapezium BPQC.
Sol:
We have,
PQ || BC
𝐴𝑃 1
And 𝑃𝐵 = 2
In ∆APQ and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [Common]
∠APQ = ∠B [Corresponding angles]
Then, ∆APQ ~∆ABC [By AA similarity]
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) 𝐴𝑃 2
= 𝐴𝐵2
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶)
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) 12 𝐴𝑃 1
⇒ 𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝑃𝑄)+𝑎𝑟(𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑝.𝐵𝑃𝑄𝐶) = 32 [𝑃𝐵 = 2]
⇒ 9ar (𝐴𝑃𝑄) = 𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) + 𝑎𝑟(𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑝. 𝐵𝑃𝑄𝐶)
⇒ 9ar (𝐴𝑃𝑄) − 𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) + 𝑎𝑟(𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑝. 𝐵𝑃𝑄𝐶)
⇒ 8ar(APQ) = ar(trap. BPQC)
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) 1
⇒ 𝑎𝑟(𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑝.𝐵𝑃𝑄𝐶) = 8
14. The areas of two similar triangles are 100 cm2 and 49 cm2 respectively. If the altitude the
bigger triangle is 5 cm, find the corresponding altitude of the other.
Sol:
15. The areas of two similar triangles are 121 cm2 and 64 cm2 respectively. If the median of the
first triangle is 12.1 cm, find the corresponding median of the other.
Sol:
We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
Area (∆ABC) = 121 cm2,
Area (∆PQR) = 64 cm2
AD = 12.1 cm
And AD and PS are the medians
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝑃𝑄2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎(∆𝑃𝑄𝑅)
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
121 𝐴𝐵2
⇒ = 𝑃𝑄2
64
11 𝐴𝐵
⇒ = 𝑃𝑄 …(i)
8
Since, ∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐶
Then, 𝑃𝑄 = 𝑄𝑅 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐴𝐵 2𝐵𝐷
⇒ 𝑃𝑄 = [AD and PS are medians]
2𝑄𝑆
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
⇒ 𝑃𝑄 = …(ii)
𝑄𝑆
In ∆ABD and ∆PQS
∠B = ∠Q [∆ABC ~ ∆PQS]
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
= [From (ii)]
𝑃𝑄 𝑄𝑆
𝑇ℎ𝑒𝑛, ∆𝐴𝐵𝐷 ~ ∆𝑃𝑄𝑆 [By SAS similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐷
∴ 𝑃𝑄 = …(iii) [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝑃𝑆
𝐶𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑒 (𝑖) 𝑎𝑛𝑑 (𝑖𝑖𝑖)
11 𝐴𝐷
=
8 𝑃𝑆
11 12.1
⇒ =
8 𝑃𝑆
8 ×12.1
⇒ PS = 𝑃𝑆
8 ×12.1
⇒ PS = = 8.8 𝑐𝑚
𝑃𝑆
16. If ∆ABC ~ ∆DEF such that AB = 5 cm, area (∆ABC) = 20 cm2 and area (∆DEF) = 45 cm2,
determine DE.
Sol:
We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆DEF such that AB = 5 cm,
Area (∆ABC) = 20 cm2 and area(∆DEF) = 45 cm2
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎(∆ABC) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝐷𝐸2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎(∆DEF)
20 52
⇒ 45 = 𝐷𝐸2
4 52
⇒ 9 = 𝐷𝐸2
2 5
⇒ 3 = 𝐷𝐸 [Taking square root]
3×5
⇒ 𝐷𝐸 = = 7.5 𝑐𝑚
2
Sol:
We have,
PQ || BC
And ar(∆APQ) = ar(trap. PQCB)
⇒ ar(∆APQ) = ar(∆ABC) – ar(∆APQ)
⇒ 2ar(∆APQ) = ar(∆ABC) …(i)
In ∆APQ and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [common]
∠APQ = ∠B [corresponding angles]
Then, ∆APQ ~ ∆ABC [By AA similarity]
∴ By area of similar triangle theorem
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) 𝐴𝑃 2
= 𝐴𝐵2
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶)
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) 𝐴𝑃 2
⇒ 𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) = 𝐴𝐵2 [By using (i)]
1 𝐴𝑃 2
⇒ 2 = 𝐴𝐵2
1 𝐴𝑃
⇒ = 𝐴𝐵2
√2
1 𝐴𝑃
⇒ = 𝐴𝐵 [Taking square root]
√2
1 𝐴𝐵−𝐵𝑃
⇒ =
√2 𝐴𝐵
1 𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝑃
⇒ = 𝐴𝐵 − 𝐴𝐵
√2
1 𝐵𝑃
⇒ = 1 − 𝐴𝐵
√2
𝐵𝑃 1
= 𝐴𝐵 = 1 −
√2
𝐵𝑃 √2−1
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 =
√2
18. The areas of two similar triangles ABC and PQR are in the ratio 9:16. If BC = 4.5 cm, find
the length of QR.
Sol:
We have,
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐵𝐶 2
=
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝑃𝑄𝑅) 𝑄𝑅 2
9 (4.5)2
⇒ 16 = 𝑄𝑅 2
3 4.5
⇒ 4 = 𝑄𝑅 [Taking square root]
4×4.5
⇒ QR = = 6𝑐𝑚
3
We have,
AP = 1 cm, PB = 3 cm, AQ = 1.5 cm and QC = 4.5 m
In ∆APQ and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [Common]
𝐴𝑃 𝐴𝑄 1
= 𝐴𝐶 [Each equal to 4]
𝐴𝐵
𝑇ℎ𝑒𝑛, ∆𝐴𝑃𝑄 ~∆𝐴𝐵𝐶 [By SAS similarity]
𝐵𝑦 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑚
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) 12
= 42
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶)
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) 1
⇒ 𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) = 16 × 𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶)
20. If D is a point on the side AB of ∆ABC such that AD : DB = 3.2 and E is a Point on BC
such that DE || AC. Find the ratio of areas of ∆ABC and ∆BDE.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
We have,
𝐴𝐷 3
=
𝐷𝐵 2
𝐷𝐵 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐷 = 3
In ∆BDE and ∆BAC
∠B = ∠B [common]
∠ BDE = ∠A [corresponding angles]
Then, ∆BDE ~ ∆BAC [By AA similarity]
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝐵𝐷2
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐵𝐷𝐸)
52 𝐴𝐷 3
= 22 [𝐷𝐵 = 2]
25
= 4
21. If ∆ABC and ∆BDE are equilateral triangles, where D is the mid-point of BC, find the ratio
of areas of ∆ABC and ∆BDE.
Sol:
We have,
∆ABC and ∆BDE are equilateral triangles then both triangles are equiangular
∴ ∆ABC ~ ∆BDE [By AAA similarity]
By area of similar triangle theorem
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐵𝐶 2
= 𝐵𝐷2
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐵𝐷𝐸)
2(𝐵𝐷)2
= [D is the mid-point of BC]
𝐵𝐷 2
4𝐵𝐷 2
= 𝐵𝐷 2
4
=1
We have,
∆ABC is an equilateral triangle
Then, AB = BC = AC
Let, AB = BC = AC = 2x
Since, AD ⊥ BC then BD = DC = x
In ∆ADB, by Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐵 2 = (2𝑥)2 − (𝑥)2
⇒ 𝐴𝐷2 = 4𝑥 2 − 𝑥 2 = 3𝑥 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐷 = √3𝑥 𝑐𝑚
𝑆𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒, ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆𝐴𝐷𝐸 𝑏𝑜𝑡ℎ 𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑙 𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑦 𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟
∴ ∆ABC ~ ∆ADE [By AA similarity]
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) 𝐴𝐷 2
= 𝐴𝐵2
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶)
2
(√3𝑥)
= (2𝑥)2
3𝑥 2
= 4𝑥 2
3
=4
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
Exercise 4.7
1. If the sides of a triangle are 3 cm, 4 cm, and 6 cm long, determine whether the triangle is a
right-angled triangle.
Sol:
We have,
Sides of triangle
AB = 3 cm
BC = 4 cm
AC = 6 cm
∴ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 32 = 9
𝐵𝐶 2 = 42 = 16
𝐴𝐶 2 = 62 = 36
Since, 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2 ≠ 𝐴𝐶 2
Then, by converse of Pythagoras theorem, triangle is not a right triangle.
2. The sides of certain triangles are given below. Determine which of them right triangles are.
(i) a = 7 cm, b = 24 cm and c = 25 cm
(ii) a = 9 cm, b = l6 cm and c = 18 cm
(iii) a = 1.6 cm, b = 3.8 cm and c = 4 cm
(iv) a = 8 cm, b = 10 cm and c = 6 cm
Sol:
We have,
a = 7 cm, b = 24 cm and c = 25 cm
∴ 𝑎2 = 49, 𝑏 2 = 576 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐 2 = 625
Since, 𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 = 49 + 576
= 625
= 𝑐2
Then, by converse of Pythagoras theorem, given triangle is a right triangle.
We have,
a = 9 cm, b = 16 cm and c = 18 cm
∴ 𝑎2 = 81, 𝑏 2 = 256 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐 2 = 324
Since, 𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 = 81 + 256 = 337
≠ 𝑐2
Then, by converse of Pythagoras theorem, given triangle is not a right triangle.
We have,
a = 1.6 cm, b = 3.8 cm and C = 4 cm
∴ 𝑎2 = 64, 𝑏 2 = 100 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐 2 = 36
Since, 𝑎2 + 𝑐 2 = 64 + 36 = 100 = 𝑏 2
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
3. A man goes 15 metres due west and then 8 metres due north. How far is he from the
starting point?
Sol:
4. A ladder 17 m long reaches a window of a building 15 m above the ground. Find the
distance of the foot of the ladder from the building.
Sol:
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 = 8 𝑚
∴ 𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑓𝑜𝑜𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑙𝑎𝑑𝑑𝑒𝑟 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝑏𝑢𝑖𝑙𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 = 8 𝑚
5. Two poles of heights 6 m and 11 m stand on a plane ground. If the distance between their
feet is 12 m, find the distance between their tops.
Sol:
We have
AB = AC = 25 cm and BC = 14 cm
In ∆ABD and ∆ACD
∠ADB = ∠ADC [Each 90°]
AB = AC [Each 25 cm]
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
AD = AD [Common]
Then, ∆ABD ≅ ∆ACD [By RHS condition]
∴ BD = CD = 7 cm [By c.p.c.t]
In ∆ADB, by Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐷2 + 𝐵𝐷2 = 𝐴𝐵 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐷2 + 72 = 252
⇒ 𝐴𝐷2 = 625 − 49 = 576
⇒ 𝐴𝐷 = √576 = 24 𝑐𝑚
7. The foot of a ladder is 6 m away from a wall and its top reaches a window 8 m above the
ground. If the ladder is shifted in such a way that its foot is 8 m away from the wall, to
what height does its tip reach?
Sol:
8. Two poles of height 9 m and 14 m stand on a plane ground. If the distance between their
feet is 12 m, find the distance between their tops.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
We have,
AC = 14 m, DC = 12m and ED = BC = 9m
Construction: Draw EB ⊥ AC
∴ AB = AC – BC = 14 – 9 = 5m
And, EB = DC = 12 m
In ∆ABE, by Pythagoras theorem,
𝐴𝐸 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐸 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐸 2 = 52 + 122
⇒ 𝐴𝐸 2 = 25 + 144 = 169
⇒ 𝐴𝐸 = √169 = 13 𝑚
∴ 𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑏𝑒𝑡𝑤𝑒𝑒𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑖𝑟 𝑡𝑜𝑝𝑠 = 13 𝑚
9. Using Pythagoras theorem determine the length of AD in terms of b and c shown in Fig.
4.219
Sol:
We have,
In ∆BAC, by Pythagoras theorem
𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐴𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝑐 2 + 𝑏 2
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 = √𝑐 2 + 𝑏 2 …(i)
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐴𝐵𝐷 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆𝐶𝐵𝐴
∠B = ∠B [Common]
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
10. A triangle has sides 5 cm, 12 cm and 13 cm. Find the length to one decimal place, of the
perpendicular from the opposite vertex to the side whose length is 13 cm.
Sol:
11. ABCD is a square. F is the mid-point of AB. BE is one third of BC. If the area of ∆FBE =
108 cm2, find the length of AC.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
AD = AD [Common]
Then, ∆ADB ≅ ∆ADC [By RHS condition]
∴ BD = CD = 12 cm [By c.p.c.t]
Hence, BC = 12 + 12 = 24 cm
14. The lengths of the diagonals of a rhombus are 24 cm and 10 cm. Find each side of the
rhombus.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
We have,
ABCD is a rhombus with diagonals AC = 10 cm and BD = 24 cm
We know that diagonal of a rhombus bisect each other at 90°
∴ AO = OC = 5 cm and BO = OD = 12 cm
In ∆AOB, by Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝑂2 + 𝐵𝑂2
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 52 + 122
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 25 + 144 = 169
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 = √169 = 13 𝑐𝑚
15. Each side of a rhombus is 10 cm. If one of its diagonals is 16 cm find the length of the
other diagonal.
Sol:
We have,
ABCD is a rhombus with side 10 cm and diagonal BD = 16 cm
We know that diagonals of a rhombus bisect each other at 90°
∴ BO = OD = 8 cm
In ∆AOB, by pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝑂2 + 𝐵𝑂2 = 𝐴𝐵 2
⇒ 𝐴𝑂2 + 82 = 102
⇒ 𝐴𝑂2 = 100 − 64 = 36
⇒ 𝐴𝑂 = √36 = 6 𝑐𝑚 [By above property]
ℎ𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒, 𝐴𝐶 = 6 + 6 = 12 𝑐𝑚
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
We have,
In ∆ABC, AD is a median.
Draw AE ⊥ BC
In ∆AEB, by pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐸 2 + 𝐵𝐸 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐷2 − 𝐷𝐸 2 + (𝐵𝐷 − 𝐷𝐸)2 [By Pythagoras theorem]
2 2 2 2 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 = 𝐴𝐷 − 𝐷𝐸 + 𝐵𝐷 + 𝐷𝐸 − 2𝐵𝐷 × 𝐷𝐸
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐷2 + 𝐵𝐷2 − 2𝐵𝐷 × 𝐷𝐸
𝐵𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐷2 + − 𝐵𝐶 × 𝐷𝐸 ….(i) [BC = 2BD given]
4
Again, In ∆AEC, by pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐸 2 + 𝐸𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐷2 − 𝐷𝐸 2 + (𝐷𝐸 + 𝐶𝐷)2 [By Pythagoras theorem]
⇒𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐷2 + 𝐶𝐷 2 + 2𝐶𝐷 × 𝐷𝐸
𝐵𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐷2 + + 𝐵𝐶 × 𝐷𝐸 ….(ii) [BC = 2CD given]
4
𝐴𝑑𝑑 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 (𝑖) 𝑎𝑛𝑑 (𝑖𝑖)
𝐵𝐶 2
𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐴𝐶 2 = 2𝐴𝐷 2 + 2
⇒ 2𝐴𝐵 2 + 2𝐴𝐶 2 = 4𝐴𝐷2 + 𝐵𝐶 2 [Multiply by 2]
⇒4𝐴𝐷2 = 2𝐴𝐵 2 + 2𝐴𝐶 2 − 𝐵𝐶 2
2𝐴𝐵2 +2𝐴𝐶 2 −𝐵𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐷2 = 4
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
17. Calculate the height of an equilateral triangle each of whose sides measures 12 cm.
Sol:
We have,
∆ABC is an equilateral ∆ with side 12 cm.
Draw AE ⊥ BC
In ∆ABD and ∆ACD
∠ADB = ∠ADC [Each 90°]
AB = AC [Each 12 cm]
AD = AD [Common]
Then, ∆ABD ≅ ∆ACD [By RHS condition]
2 2 2
∴ 𝐴𝐷 + 𝐵𝐷 = 𝐴𝐵
⇒ 𝐴𝐷2 + 62 = 122
⇒ 𝐴𝐷2 = 144 − 36 = 108
⇒ AD = √108 = 10.39 cm
18. In right-angled triangle ABC in which ∠C = 90°, if D is the mid-point of BC, prove that
AB2 = 4 AD2 −3 AC2.
Sol:
We have,
∠C = 90° and D is the mid-point of BC
In ∆ACB, by Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + (2𝐶𝐷)2 [D is the mid-point of BC]
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + 4𝐶𝐷 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + 4(𝐴𝐷2 − 𝐴𝐶 2 ) [In ∆ACD, by Pythagoras theorem]
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + 4𝐴𝐷2 − 4𝐴𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 4𝐴𝐷2 − 3𝐴𝐶 2
𝑎2
(i) 𝑏 2 = 𝑝2 + 𝑎𝑥 + 4
2 2 𝑎2
(ii) 𝑐 = 𝑝 − 𝑎𝑥 + 4
2 2 2 𝑎2
(iii) 𝑏 + 𝑐 = 2𝑝 + 2
Sol:
We have, D as the mid-point of BC
(i) 𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐸 2 + 𝐸𝐶 2
𝑏 2 = 𝐴𝐸 2 + (𝐸𝐷 + 𝐷𝐶)2 [By pythagoras theorem]
2 2 2
𝑏 = 𝐴𝐷 + 𝐷𝐶 + 2𝐷𝐶 × 𝐸𝐷
𝑎 2 𝑎
𝑏 2 = 𝑝2 + (2 ) + 2 (2 ) × 𝑥 [BC = 2CD given]
𝑎2
⇒ 𝑏 2 = 𝑝2 + + 𝑎𝑥 …(i)
4
(ii) In ∆AEB, by pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐸 2 + 𝐵𝐸 2
⇒ 𝑐 2 = 𝐴𝐷 2 − 𝐸𝐷2 + (𝐵𝐷 − 𝐸𝐷)2 [By pythagoras theorem]
⇒ 𝑐 2 = 𝑝2 − 𝐸𝐷2 + 𝐵𝐷2 + 𝐸𝐷2 − 2𝐵𝐷 × 𝐸𝐷
𝑎 2 𝑎
⇒ 𝑐 2 = 𝑝2 + (2) − 2 (2) × 𝑥 …(ii)
(iii) Add equations (i) and (ii)
𝑎2
𝑏 2 + 𝑐 2 = 2𝑝2 + 2
20. In Fig., 4.221, ∠B < 90° and segment AD ⊥ BC, show that
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
(i) 𝑏 2 = ℎ2 + 𝑎2 + 𝑥 2 − 2𝑎𝑥
(ii) 𝑏 2 = 𝑎2 + 𝑐 2 − 2𝑎𝑥
Sol:
In ∆ADC, by pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐷2 + 𝐷𝐶 2
⇒ 𝑏 2 = ℎ2 + (𝑎 − 𝑥)2
⇒ 𝑏 2 = ℎ2 + 𝑎2 + 𝑥 2 − 2𝑎𝑥
⇒ 𝑏 2 = 𝑎2 + (ℎ2 + 𝑥 2 ) − 2𝑎𝑥
⇒ 𝑏 2 = 𝑎2 + 𝑐 2 − 2𝑎𝑥 by Pythagoras theorem
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 − 𝐴𝑄 2 + 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐴𝑄 2 + 2𝐴𝐵 × 𝐴𝑄
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + 𝐴𝐵 2 + 2𝐴𝐵 × 𝐴𝑄 …(iii)
𝐴𝑑𝑑 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 (𝑖𝑖)& (𝑖𝑖𝑖)
2𝐵𝐶 2 = 2𝐴𝐶 2 + 2𝐴𝐵 2 + 2𝐴𝑃 × 𝐴𝐶 + 2𝐴𝐵 × 𝐴𝑄
⇒ 2𝐵𝐶 2 = 2𝐴𝐶 2 + 2𝐴𝐵 2 + 2𝐴𝑃 × 𝐴𝐶 + 2𝐴𝐵 × 𝐴𝑄
⇒ 2𝐵𝐶 2 = 2𝐴𝐶[𝐴𝐶 + 𝐴𝑃] + 𝐴𝐵[𝐴𝐵 + 𝐴𝑄]
⇒ 2𝐵𝐶 2 = 2𝐴𝐶 × 𝑃𝐶 + 2𝐴𝐵 × 𝐵𝑄
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐶 × 𝑃𝐶 + 𝐴𝐵 × 𝐵𝑄 [Divide by 2]
To prove: 𝐵𝐶 2 = 4[𝐴𝐷2 − 𝐴𝐶 2 ]
We have, ∠C = 90° and D is the mid-point of BC.
LHS = 𝐵𝐶 2
= (2𝐶𝐷)2 [D is the mid-point of BC]
2
= 4CD
= 4[𝐴𝐷2 − 𝐴𝐶 2 ] [In ∆ACD, by pythagoras theorem]
= 𝑅𝐻𝑆
23. In a quadrilateral ABCD, ∠B = 90°, AD2 = AB2 + BC2 + CD2, prove that ∠ACD = 90°.
Sol:
25. ∆ABD is a right triangle right angled at A and AC ⊥ BD. Show that:
(i) 𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐶𝐵 × 𝐵𝐷
(ii) 𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐷𝐶 × 𝐵𝐶
(iii) 𝐴𝐷2 = 𝐵𝐷 × 𝐶𝐷
𝐴𝐵2 𝐵𝐷
(iv) = 𝐷𝐶
𝐴𝐶 2
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
26. A guy wire attached to a vertical pole of height 18 m is 24 m long and has a stake attached
to the other end. How far from the base of the pole should the stake be driven so that the
wire will be taut?
Sol:
27. An aeroplane leaves an airport and flies due north at a speed of 1000km/hr. At the same
time, another aeroplane leaves the same airport and flies due west at a speed of 1200 km/hr.
How far apart will be the two planes after 1 hours?
Sol:
1
Distance traveled by the plane flying towards north in 1 2 hrs
1
= 1000 × 1 2 = 1500 𝑘𝑚
1
Similarly, distance travelled by the plane flying towards west in 1 2 ℎ𝑟𝑠
1
= 1200 × 1 2 = 1800 𝑘𝑚
Let these distances are represented by OA and OB respectively.
Now applying Pythagoras theorem
1
Distance between these planes after 1 2 ℎ𝑟𝑠 AB = √𝑂𝐴2 + 𝑂𝐵 2
= √(1500)2 + (1800)2 = √2250000 + 3240000
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths
28. Determine whether the triangle having sides (a − 1) cm, 2√𝑎 cm and (a + 1) cm is a right-
angled triangle.
Sol:
Let ABC be the ∆ with
AB = (a – 1) cm BC = 2√𝑎 cm, CA = (a + 1) cm
Hence, 𝐴𝐵 2 = (𝑎 − 1)2 = 𝑎2 + 1 − 2𝑎
2
𝐵𝐶 2 = (2√𝑎) = 4𝑎
𝐶𝐴2 = (𝑎 + 1)2 = 𝑎2 + 1 + 2𝑎
Hence 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2
𝑆𝑜 ∆ 𝐴𝐵𝐶 𝑖𝑠 𝑟𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒𝑑 ∆ 𝑎𝑡 𝐵.
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 5.1
1. In each of the following one of the six trigonometric ratios is given. Find the values of the
other trigonometric ratios.
Sol:
2
(i) Sin A = 3
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
We know that Sin 𝜃 = ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
Let us Consider a right angled ∆le ABC.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
(iii)
tan𝜃 = 11.
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 11
We know that tan𝜃 = =
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 1
Consider a right angled ∆ ABC. le
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
1 11 √122
cosec𝜃 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 = =
√122 11
1 1/1
sec𝜃 = = = √122
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 √122
1 1 1
cot𝜃 = 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃 = 11 = 11
(iv)
11
Sin 𝜃 = 5
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 11
We know Sin 𝜃 = = 15
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
Consider right angled ∆le ACB.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1 2
cosec𝜃 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 = √3
=
√3
2
1
1 1
sec = = =2
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 2
1 1
cot = 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃 =
√3
(vii)
7
Cos𝜃 = 25.
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
We know that cos𝜃 = ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
Now consider a right angled ∆le ABC,
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 24
sin𝜃 = = 25
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 24
tan𝜃 = =
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 7
1
1 3 25
cosec𝜃 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 = = 24
5
1
1 4 25
sec𝜃 = = =
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 5 7
1
1 3 7
cot𝜃 = 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃 = = 24
4
(viii)
8
tan𝜃 = 15
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 8
We know that tan𝜃= = 15
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Now consider a right angled ∆le ABC.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
By applying Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑥 2 = 82 + 152
𝑥 2 = 225 + 64 = 289
𝑥 = √289 = 17
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 8
sin𝜃 = = 17
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 15
cos𝜃 = = 17
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 8
tan𝜃 = =
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 15
1 1 15
cot𝜃 = = 8 =
𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃 8
15
1
1 8 17
cosec𝜃 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 = 17
= 8
1
1 15 17
sec𝜃 = = = 15
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 17
(ix)
12
cot𝜃 = 5
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 12
cotα= =
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 5
Now consider a right angled ∆le ABC,
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 13
sec𝜃 = =
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 5
Now consider a right angled ∆le ABC,
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 1
tan𝜃 = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 = 3
1 √10
sec𝜃 = =
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 3
1
1 1
cot𝜃 = = = 3.
𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃 3
(xii)
12
Cos𝜃 = 5
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 12
cos𝜃 = = 15 .
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
9
4. If sin A = 41 , 𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑢𝑡𝑒 cos 𝐴 𝑎𝑛𝑑 tan 𝐴
Sol:
9
sin 𝐴 = 41
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 9
Sin A = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 = 41
Consider right angled triangle ABC,
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
412 = 122 + 92
𝑥 2 = 412 − 92
𝑥 = 40
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 40
cos 𝐴 = = 41
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 9
tan 𝐴 = 𝐻𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 = 40
6. In ∆PQR, right angled at Q, PQ = 4 cm and RQ = 3 cm. Find the values of sin P, sin R, sec
P and sec R.
Sol:
∆PQR, right angled at Q.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
7
7. If cot 𝜃 = 8 , 𝑒𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑒:
(1+sin 𝜃) (1−sin 𝜃)
(i) (1+cos 𝜃)(1−cos 𝜃)
(ii) Cot2𝜃
Sol:
7
Cot 𝜃 =
8
(1+sin 𝜃) (1−sin 𝜃)
(i) (1+cos 𝜃)(1−cos 𝜃)
1−sin2 𝜃
= 1−cos2 𝜃 [∵ (a + b) (a – b) = 𝑎2 − 𝑏 2 ] a = 1, b = sin 𝜃
We know that 𝑆𝑖𝑛2 𝜃 + cos2 𝜃 = 1
1 − sin2 𝜃 = cos2 𝜃 = cos2 𝜃
1 − cos2 𝜃 = sin2 𝜃
cos2 𝜃
= sin2 𝜃
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
= cot 2 𝜃
7 2
= (cot 𝜃)2 = [8]
49
= 64
(ii) cot 2 𝜃
7 2
⇒ (cot 𝜃)2 = [8]
49
= 64
1−tan2 𝐴
8. If 3 cot A = 4, check whether 1+tan2 𝐴 = cos 2 𝐴 − sin2 𝐴 or not.
Sol:
1−tan2 𝐴
3 cot A = 4, check = = cos 2 𝐴 − sin2 𝐴
1+tan2 𝐴
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 4
Cot A = =3
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Let x be the hypotenuse
By Applying Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑥 2 = 42 + 32
𝑥 2 = 25
𝑥=5
1 3
Tan A = cos2 𝐴 = 4
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 4
Cos A = =5
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
3
Sin A = 5
3 2 16−9
1−tan2 𝐴 1−( ) 7
4 16
LHS = = 3 2
= 16+9 =
1+tan2 𝐴 1+( ) 25
4 16
4 2 3 2 16−9
RHS cos 2 𝐴 − sin2 𝐴 = (5) − (5) = 25
7
= 251
𝑎 cos 𝜃+sin 𝜃
9. If tan 𝜃 = 𝑏 , find the value of cos 𝜃−sin 𝜃
Sol:
𝑎 cos 𝜃+sin 𝜃
Tan 𝜃 = 𝑏 find cos 𝜃−sin 𝜃 ….(i)
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Divide equation (i) with cos 𝜃, we get
cos 𝜃+sin 𝜃
cos 𝜃
⇒ cos 𝜃−sin 𝜃
cos 𝜃
sin 𝜃
1+
cos 𝜃
⇒ sin 𝜃
1−
cos 𝜃
1+tan 𝜃
⇒ 1−tan 𝜃
𝑎
1+
𝑏
= 𝑎
1−
𝑏
𝑏+𝑎
= 𝑏−𝑎
4 cos 𝜃−sin 𝜃
10. If 3 tan 𝜃 = 4, 𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑑 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑜𝑓 2 cos 𝜃+sin 𝜃
Sol:
4 cos 𝜃 −sin 𝜃
3 tan 𝜃 = 4 find …(i)
2 cos 𝜃+sin 𝜃
4
Tan 𝜃 = 3
Dividing equation (i) with cos 𝜃 we get
4 cos 𝜃−sin 𝜃
cos 𝜃 4−tan 𝜃 sin 𝜃
= 2 cos 𝜃+sin 𝜃 = 2+tan 𝜃 [∵ cos 𝜃 = tan 𝜃]
cos 𝜃
4−tan 𝜃 sin 𝜃
= 2+tan 𝜃 [∵ cos 𝜃 = tan 𝜃]
4
4−
1
= 4
2+
5
12−4
= 6+4
8
= 10
4
=5
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
4+2 2
= 2+4 = 6
1
=3
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1 13
Cosec 𝜃 = sin 𝜃 = 12/13 = 12
1 1 13
sec 𝜃 = cos 𝜃 = 5/13 = 5
1 1 5
Cot 𝜃 = tan 𝜃 = 12/5 = 12
12 35
14. If cos 𝜃 = 13, show that sin 𝜃 (1 – tan 𝜃) = 156
Sol:
12 35
Cos 𝜃 = S.T Sin 𝜃 (1 − tan 𝜃) = 156
3
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 12
Cos 𝜃 = = 13
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
1 1−cos2 𝜃 3
15. If cot 𝜃 = , show that =5
√3 2−sin2 𝜃
Sol:
1 1−cos2 𝜃 3
cot 𝜃 = =
√3 2−sin2 𝜃 5
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 1
Cot 𝜃 = =
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 √3
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2
𝑥 2 = (√3) + 1
𝑥2 = 3 + 1
𝑥2 = 3 + 1 ⇒ 𝑥 = 2
𝐵𝐶 1
Cos 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐶 = − 2
𝐴𝐵 √3
Sin 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐶 = 2
1 2
1−cos2 𝜃 1−( )
2
⇒ 2
2−sin2 𝜃 √3
2−( )
2
1 3
1−
4 4
⇒ 3 ⇒ 5
2−
4 4
3
=5
1 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝜃−sec2 𝜃 3
16. If tan 𝜃 = =4
√7 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝜃+sec2 𝜃
Sol:
1 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝜃−sec2 𝜃 3
Tan𝜃 = =4
√7 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝜃+sec2 𝜃
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Tan 𝜃 = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
8
8−
7
⇒ 8
8+
7
56−8
7
= 56+8
7
48
= 64
3
=4
𝐿. 𝐻. 𝑆 = 𝑅. 𝐻. 𝑆
12 sin2 𝜃−cos2 𝜃 1
17. If Sin 𝜃 = 13 find × 𝑡𝑎𝑛2 𝜃
2 sin 𝜃 cos 𝜃
Sol:
5 sin2 𝜃−cos2 𝜃 3
19. If cos 𝜃 = 13 , find the value of =5
2𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 cos 𝜃
Sol:
Not given
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
12 2 sin 𝜃 cos 𝜃
20. Tan 𝜃 = 13 Find cos2 𝜃−sin2 𝜃
Sol:
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Tan 𝜃 = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Let x be, the hypotenuse
By Pythagoras we get
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑥 2 = 144 + 169
𝑥 = √313
𝐴𝐵 12
Sin 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐶 =
√313
𝐵𝐶 13
Cos 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐶 =
√313
Substitute, Sin 𝜃, cos 𝜃 in equation we get
12 13
2 sin 𝜃 cos 𝜃 2× ×
√313 √313
⇒ 169 144
cos2 𝜃−sin2 𝜃 −
313 313
312
313 312
= 25 = 25
313
1
3 sin 𝜃−
tan 𝜃
21. If cos 𝜃 = 5, find the value of 2 tan 𝜃
Sol:
1
3 sin 𝜃−
tan 𝜃
Cos 𝜃 = 5 find value of
2 tan 𝜃
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
We know that cos 𝜃 =
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝐴𝐵 4
Sin 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐶 = 5
𝐴𝐵 4
Tan 𝜃 = =3
𝐵𝐶
Substitute sin 𝜃, tan 𝜃 in equation we get
1 4 3
sin 𝜃− −
tan 𝜃 5 4
= 4
2 tan 𝜃 2×
3
16−15 1
20 20
= 8 = 8
3 3
1 3 3
= 20 × 8 = 160
1
3 cos 𝜃−
tan 𝜃
22. If sin 𝜃 = 5 , 𝑒𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑒 2 cot 𝜃
Sol:
Not given
3 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝜃−cot2 𝜃 √7
24. If sin 𝜃 = 4, prove that √ =
sec2 𝜃−1 3
Sol:
Not given
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑥 2 = 289 − 64
𝑥 2 = 225 ⇒ 𝑥 = 15
𝐴𝐵 15
Sin A = 𝐵𝐶 = 17
𝐵𝐶 8
Cos A = 𝐴𝐶 = 17
𝐴𝐵 15
Tan A = 𝐵𝐶 = 8
15 2 225
3−4 sin2 𝐴 3−4×( ) 3−4× 867−900 −33 33
17 289
L.H.S = 4 cos2 𝐴−3 = 8 2
= 64 = 256−867 = −611 = 611
4×( ) −3 4× −3
17 289
15 2 225 −33
3−tan2 𝐴 3−( ) 3− −33 33
8 64 64
R.H.S = 1−3 tan2 𝐴 = 15 2
= 225 = −611 = −611 = 611
1−3×( ) 1−3× 64
8 64
∴ LHS = RHS
3 sec 𝜃−𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 1
26. If cot 𝜃 = 4, prove that √sec 𝜃+𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 =
√7
Sol:
3 sec 𝜃−𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 1
Cot 𝜃 = 4 P.T √ =
sec 𝜃+𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 √7
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Cot 𝜃 = 𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
20−15
12 5 1
= √ 20+15 = √35 =
√7
12
24
27. If tan 𝜃 = , find that sin 𝜃 + cos 𝜃
7
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
24
Tan 𝜃 = 𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑑 sin 𝜃 + cos 𝜃
7
𝑎
28. If sin 𝜃 = 𝑏, find sec 𝜃 + tan 𝜃 in terms of a and b.
Sol:
𝑎
Sin 𝜃 = 𝑏 find sec 𝜃 + tan 𝜃
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
We know sin 𝜃 = ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑏 𝑎
Sec 𝜃 + tan 𝜃 = √𝑏 2 −𝑎2
+ √𝑏2
−𝑎2
𝑏+𝑎 𝑏+𝑎 𝑏+𝑎 1 𝑏+𝑎
= √𝑏2 = = − = √𝑏−𝑎
−𝑎2 √(𝑏+𝑎)(𝑏−𝑎) √𝑏+𝑎 √𝑏−𝑎
20 1−sin 𝜃+cos 𝜃 3
31. If tan 𝜃 = 21, show that 1+sin 𝜃+cos 𝜃 = 7
Sol:
20 1−sin 𝜃+cos 𝜃 3
Tan 𝜃 = 21 S.T =7
1+sin 𝜃+cos 𝜃
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 20
Tan 𝜃 = 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 = 21
1 sin 𝐴
32. If Cosec A = 2 find 𝑇𝑎𝑛 𝐴 + 1+cos 𝐴
Sol:
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 2
Cosec A = 𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 = 1
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
1 sin 𝐴 1 2
+ 1+cos 𝐴 = 1 + √3
𝑇𝑎𝑛𝐴 1+
√3 2
1
2 1 2√3+3+1 2√3+4 2(2+√3)
= √3 + 2+√3
= √3 + 2+√3 = = = =2
2+√3 2+√3 2+√3
2
33. If ∠A and ∠B are acute angles such that cos A = cos B, then show that ∠A = ∠B.
Sol:
∠A and ∠B are acute angles.
Cos A = cos B S.T ∠A = ∠B
Let us consider right angled triangle ACB.
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
We have cos A = 𝐻𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝐴𝐶
= 𝐴𝐵
𝐵𝐶
Cos B = 𝐴𝐵
𝐶𝑜𝑠 𝐴 = cos 𝐵
𝐴𝐶 𝐵𝐶
= 𝐴𝐵
𝐴𝐵
AC = BC
∠A = ∠B
34. If ∠A and ∠P are acute angles such that tan A = tan P, then show that ∠A = ∠P.
Sol:
A and P are acute angle tan A = tan P
S. T. ∠A = ∠P
Let us consider right angled triangle ACP,
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
We know tan 𝜃 = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
𝑃𝐶
Tan A = 𝐴𝐶
𝐴𝐶
Tan A = 𝑃𝐶
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝐴𝐶
Tan A = 𝑃𝐶
Tan = tan P
𝐷𝐶 𝐴𝐶
= 𝑃𝐶
𝐴𝐶
(𝑃𝐶)2 = (𝐴𝐶)2
𝑃𝐶 = 𝐴𝐶 [∵ Angle opposite to equal sides are equal]
∠𝑃 = ∠𝐴
35. In a ∆ABC, right angled at A, if tan C = √3, find the value of sin B cos C + cos B sin C.
Sol:
In a ∆le ABC right angled at A tan C = √3
Find sin B cos C + cos B sin C
Tan c = √3
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Tan C = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Let x be the hypotenuse By applying Pythagoras we get
𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐵𝐴2 + 𝐴𝐶 2
2
𝑥 2 = (√3) + 12
𝑥2 = ∆ ⇒ 𝑥 = 2
𝐴𝐶 1
At ∠B, sin B = 𝐵𝐶 = 2
√3
Cos B = 2
√3
At ∠C, sin = 2
1
Cos c = 2
On substitution we get
1 1 √3 √3
⇒ × + ×
2 2 2 2
1 (√3) √3×√3+1 3+1 4
⇒4+ × (√3) = = =4=1
4 4 4
36. State whether the following are true or false. Justify your answer.
(i) The value of tan A is always less than 1.
12
(ii) Sec A = for some value of angle A.
5
(iii) Cos A is the abbreviation used for the cosecant of angle A.
4
(iv) Sin 𝜃 = 3 for some angle 𝜃.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
(a) Tan A ∠1
Value of tan A at 45° i.e., tan 45 = 1
As value of A increases to 90°
Tan A becomes infinite
So given statement is false.
12
(b) Sec A = for some value of angle of
5
M-I
Sec A = 2.4
Sec A > 1
So given statement is True
M-II
12
For sec A = 5
12
For sec A = we get adjacent side = 13
5
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 5.2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
4. 𝑆𝑖𝑛2 30° + sin2 45° + sin2 60° + sin2 90°
Sol:
𝑆𝑖𝑛2 30° + sin2 45° + sin2 60° + sin2 90° …(i)
𝐵𝑦 𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑔𝑜𝑛𝑜𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑐 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑠 𝑤𝑒 ℎ𝑎𝑣𝑒
1 1
Sin 30° = 2 sin 45° =
√2
√3
Sin 60° = sin 90° = 1
2
By substituting above values in (i), we get
2
1 2 1 2 √3
= [2] + [ ] + [ 2 ] + [1]2
√2
1 1 3 1+3 1+2
= + + +1⇒ +
4 2 4 4 2
3 2+3 5
⇒1+2= =2
2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
7. 2 sin2 30° − 3 cos2 45° + tan2 60°
Sol:
2 sin2 30° − 3 cos2 45° + tan2 60° …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
1 1
Sin 30° = 2 cos 45° tan 60° = √3
√2
By substituting above values in (i), we get
1 2 1 2 2
2 ∙ [2] − 3 [ ] + [√3]
√2
1 1
2. 4 − 3. 2 + 3
1 3 3
−2+3⇒2+2=2
2
1 1
8. sin2 30° cos2 45 ° + 4 tan2 30° + sin2 90° − 2 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 90° + cos2 0 °
2 24
Sol:
1 1
sin2 30° cos2 45 ° + 4 tan2 30° + 2 sin2 90° − 2 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 90° + 24 cos2 0 ° …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
1 1 1
Sin 30° = 2 cos 45° = tan 30° = sin 90° = 1 cos 90° = 0 cos 0° = 1
√2 √3
By substituting above values in (i), we get
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1
[2] ∙ [ ] + 4 [ ] + 2 [1]2 − 2[0]2 + 24 [1]2
√2 √3
1 1 1 1 1
∙ + 4 ∙ 3 + 2 − 0 + 24
4 2
1 4 1 1 48
+ 3 + 2 + 24 = 24 = 2
8
9. 4(sin4 60° + cos4 30°) − 3(tan2 60° − tan2 45°) + 5 cos2 45°
Sol:
4(sin4 60° + cos4 30°) − 3(tan2 60° − tan2 45°) + 5 cos2 45° …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
√3 √3 1
Sin 60° = cos 30° = tan 60° = √3 tan 45° = 1 cos 45 ° =
2 2 √2
By substituting above values in (i), we get
4 4
√3 √3 1 2
4 ([ 2 ] + [ 2 ] ) − 3([3]2 − [1]2 ) + 5 [ ]
√2
9 9 1
⇒ 4 [16 + 16] − 3[3 − 1] + 5 [2]
18 5
⇒ 4 ∙ 16 − 6 + 2
1 5
⇒4−6+2
9 5
=2+2−6
14
= −6=7−6=1
2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
10. (𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 45° sec 2 30°)(sin2 30° + 4 cot 2 45° − sec 2 60°)
Sol:
(𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 45° sec 2 30°)(sin2 30° + 4 cot 2 45° − sec 2 60°) …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
2 1
Cosec 45° = √2 sec 30° = sin 30° = 2 cot 45° = 1 sec 60° = 2
√3
By substituting above values in (i), we get
2 2 2 1 2
([√2] ∙ [ ] ) ([2] + 4[1]2 ∙ [2]2 )
√3
4 1 4 1 2
⇒ [2 ∙ 3] [4 + 4 − 4] ⇒ 3 ∙ 3 ∙ 4 = 3
11. 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 3 30° cos 60° tan3 45° sin2 90° sec 2 45° cot 30°
Sol:
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 3 30° cos 60° tan3 45° sin2 90° sec 2 45° cot 30° …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
1
Cosec 30° = 2, cos 60° = 2, tan 45° = 1 sin 90° = 1 sec 45° = √2 cot 30° = √3
By substituting above values in (i), we get
1 2
[2]3 ∙ ∙ (1)3 ∙ (1)2 (√2) ∙ √3
2
1
⇒ 8 ∙ 2 ∙ 1 ∙ 2 ∙ √3 ⇒ 8√3
3
12. cot 2 30° − 2 cos2 60° − 4 sec 2 45° − 4 sec 2 30°
Sol:
3
cot 2 30° − 2 cos2 60° − 4 sec 2 45° − 4 sec 2 30° …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
1 2
cot 30° = √3 cos 60° = 2 sec 45° = √2 sec 30° =
√3
By substituting above values in (i), we get
2 1 2 3 2 2 2
(√3) − 2 [2] − 4 (√2) − 4 [ ]
√3
1 3 4
3−2∙4−4∙2−4 ∙3
1 3 8 5
3 − 2 − 2 − 3 ⇒ −3
13. (cos 0° + sin 45° + sin 30°)(sin 90° − cos 45° + cos 60°)
Sol:
(cos 0° + sin 45° + sin 30°)(sin 90° − cos 45° + cos 60°) …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
1 1 1 1
Cos 0° = 1, sin 45° = , sin 30° = 2 , sin 90° = 1, cos 45° = cos 60° = 2
√2 √2
By substituting above values in (i), we get
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1 1 1
(1 + + 2) (1 − + 2)
√2 √2
3 1 3 1 3 2 1 9 1 7
[2 + ] [2 − ] ⇒ [2] − [ ] = 4 − 2 = 4
√2 √2 √2
4 1
15. + sin2 60° − cos2 45°
cot2 30°
Sol:
4 1
+ sin2 60° − cos2 45° …(i)
cot2 30°
By trigonometric ratios we have
√3 1
Cot 30° = √3 sin 60° = cos 45° =
2 √2
By substituting above values in (i), we get
4 1 1 2
2 + 2 −( )
(√3) √3 √2
( )
2
4 4 1 13
+3−2=
3 6
16. 4(sin4 30° + cos2 60°) − 3(cos 2 45° − sin2 90°) − sin2 60°
Sol:
4(sin4 30° + cos2 60°) − 3(cos 2 45° − sin2 90°) − sin2 60° …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
1 1 1 √3
Sin 30° = cos 60° = cos 45° = Sin 90° = 1 sin 60° =
2 2 √2 2
By substituting above values in (i), we get
2
1 4 1 2 1 2 √3
4 [(2) + (2) ] − 3 [[ ] − 1] − [2]
√2
1 1 1−[√2] 3
4 [16 + 4] − 3 [ 2 ]−4
(√2)
2
1 1−[√2] 3
+ 1 − 3[ [√2]
] −4
4
1 3 3
=4+1−4+2=2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
tan2 60°+4 cos2 45°+3 sec2 30°+5 cos2 90°
17. 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 30°+sec 60°−cot2 30°
Sol:
tan2 60°+4 cos2 45°+3 sec2 30°+5 cos2 90°
…(i)
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 30°+sec 60°−cot2 30°
By trigonometric ratios we have
1 2
Tan 60° = √3 cos 45° = sec 30° =
√2 √3
cos 90° = 0 cosec 30° = 2 sec 60° = 2 cot 30° = √3
By substituting above values in (i), we get
2 1 2 2 2
(√3) +4∙( ) +2+[ ] +5(0)2
√3 √3
2
2+2√2(+√3)
1 4
3+4∙ +3∙ 3+2+4
2 3
= = =9
4−3 1
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
20. 2sin 3x = √3 s = ?
Sol:
√3
Sin 3x = 2
Sin 3x = sin 60°
Equating angles we get,
3x = 60°
x = 20°
𝑥
21. 2 sin 2 = 1 x = ?
Sol:
𝑥 1
Sin 2 = 2
𝑥
Sin 2 = sin 30°
𝑥
= 30°
2
𝑥 = 60°
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
25. Cos 2x = cos 60° cos 30° + sin 60° sin 30°
Sol:
1 √3 √3 1 1 √3
Cos 2x = ∙ + ∙ [∵ cos 60° = sin 30° = 2 sin 60° = cos 30° = ]
2 2 2 2 2
√3
Cos 2x = 2 ∙ 4
√3
⇒ cos 2x = 2
Cos 2x = cos 30°
2x = 30°
x = 15°
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
∴ LHS = RHS
(iv) Cos 30𝜃 = 4 cos3𝜃 – 3 cos 𝜃
LHS = Cos 30° RHS 4 cos3 𝜃 – 3 cos 𝜃
Substitute 𝜃 = 30° 4cos3 30° - 3 cos 30°
3
√3 √3
Cos 3 (30°) = cos 90° 4∙ [ 2 ] − 3 ∙ 2
3√3 3√2
=0 ⇒ − =0
2 2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Cos (90°) = Cos 30° cos 60° − sin 30° sin 60°
1 √3 √3 1
= cos 90° = 2 ∙ − ∙
2 2 2
0=0
LHS = RHS
29. Sin (A – B) = Sin A Cos B – cos A sin B
Cos (A – B) = cos A Cos B – sin A sin B
Find sin 15° cos 15°
Sol:
Sin (A – B) = Sin A Cos B – cos A sin B …(i)
Cos (A – B) = cos A Cos B – sin A sin B …(ii)
Let A = 45° B = 30° we get on substituting in (i)
⇒ Sin(45° − 30°) = Sin 45° cos 30°
1 √3 1 1
Sin 15° = ∙ − ∙
√2 2 √2 2
√3−1
∴ Sin 15° = 2√2
(ii) A = 45° B = 30° in equation (ii) we get
Cos (45° − 30°) cos 45° cos 30° + sin 45° sin 30°
1 √3 1 1
Cos 15° - ∙ + ∙
√2 2 √2 2
√3+1
Cos 15° ⇒ 2√2
30. In right angled triangle ABC. ∠C = 90°, ∠B = 60°. AB = 15units. Find remaining angles
and sides.
Sol:
In a ∆le sum of all angles = 180°
∠A + ∠B + ∠C = 180°
⇒ 90° + 60° + ∠A = 180°
∠A = 180° − 150°
∴ ∠A = 30°
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
15
BC = 2
𝐴𝐶
Sin B = 15
𝐴𝐶
Sin 60° = 15
√3 𝐴𝑉 15√3
= = 𝐴𝐶 =
2 15 2
31. In ∆ABC is a right triangle such that ∠C = 90° ∠A = 45°, BC = 7 units find ∠B, AB and
AC
Sol:
Sum of angles in ∆le = 180°
∠A + ∠B + ∠C = 180°
45° + ∠B + 90° = 180°
∠B = 180° − 135°
∠B = 45°
𝐵𝐶
From figure cos B = 𝐴𝐵
7
Cos 45° = 𝐴𝐵
1 7
∙
√2 𝐴𝐵
AB = 7√2 units
𝐴𝐶
From figure sin B = 𝐴𝐵
𝐴𝐶
Sin 45° = 7√2
1 𝐴𝐶
= 7√2 ∴ 𝐴𝐶 = 7 𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡𝑠
√2
32. In rectangle ABCD AB = 20cm ∠BAC = 60° BC, calculate side BC and diagonals AC and
BD.
Sol:
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐶
Cos A = 𝐴𝐶 Sin A = 𝐴𝐶
20 𝐵𝐶
∴ cos 60° = 𝐴𝐶 Sin 60° = 𝐴𝐶
1 20 √3 𝐵𝐶
= 𝐴𝐶 ∴ AC = 40 cm =
𝑎 2 40
∴ AC = 40 cm ∴ BC = 20√3 cm
Consider ∆le ACD we know ∠CAD = 30°
𝐶𝐷 1 20
∴ Tan 30° = 𝐴𝐷 = = 𝐴𝐶 = 𝐴𝐷 = 20√3
√3
In rectangle diagonals are equal in magnitude
∴ BD = AC = 40 cm
1
34. If Tan (A – B) = and Tan (A + B) = √3 , 0° < 𝐴 + 𝐵 ≤ 90°, A ≥ B, Find A & B
√3
Sol:
Tan (A – B) = 𝑇𝑎𝑛 30° Tan (A + B) = Tan 60°
∴ A – B = 30° …(i) A + B = 60° …(ii)
Add (i) & (ii)
A – B = 30°
A + B = 60°
2A = 90° A = 40°
A – B = 30° 45° - B = 30°
B = 45° − 30° = 15°
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
35. If Sin (A – B) = 2 and Cos (A + B) = 2 , 0° < A + B ≤ 90°, A > B, Find A & B
Sol:
Sin (A – B) = sin 30° Cos (A + B) = cos 60°
A – B = 30° …(i)
A + B = 60° …(ii)
Add (i) & (ii) we get
2A = 90°, A = 45°.
A – B = 30°
45 – B = 30° B = 45 – 30°
B = 15°
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
38. If A and B are acute angles such that Tan A = 2 Tan B = 3 𝑎𝑛𝑑 Tan (A + B) =
tan 𝐴+𝑇𝑎𝑛 𝐵
A+B=?
1−tan 𝐴 𝑇𝑎𝑛 𝐵
Sol:
1 1
Tan A = 2 Tan B = 3
1 1 5
+
2 3 6
Tan (A + B) = 11 = 1 =1
1− ∙ 1−
23 6
Tan (A + B) = Tan 45°
∴ A – B = 45°
𝑆𝑖𝑛 20°
1.
cos 70°
Sol:
(i)
𝑆𝑖𝑛 (90°−70°) cos 70°
⇒ ⇒ cos 70° [∵ 𝑆𝑖𝑛 (90° − 𝜃) = cos 𝜃]
cos 70°
cos 70°
⇒ cos 70° = 1
(ii)
cos 19°
sin 71°
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
cos(90°−71°) sin 71°
⇒ ⇒ sin 71° [∵ cos(90° − 𝜃) = sin 𝜃]
sin 71°
=1
(iii)
sin 21° sin(cos 69°) cos 69°
⇒ = cos 69° [∵ sin(90° − 𝜃) = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃]
cos 69° cos 69°
=1
(iv)
𝑇𝑎𝑛 10° tan(90°−80°) cot 80°
⇒ = cot 80° [∵ tan(90 − 𝜃) = cot 𝜃]
𝐶𝑜𝑡 80° cot 80°
=1
(𝑣)
sec 11° sec(90°−79°) 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 79°
⇒ = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 79° [∵ sec(90 − 𝜃) ∙ 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 ]
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 79° 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 79°
=1
(ii)
Cos 48° - sin 42°
Sol:
Cos 48° = cos (90° − 42°) sin 42°
∴ sin 42° − sin42° = 0
(iii)
cot 40° 1 cos 35°
− 2 [ sin 55° ]
cos 35°
Sol:
Cot 40° − cot (90° - 50°) = tan 50°
Cos 35° = cos (90° - 55°) = sin 55°
tan 50° 1 sin 55°
⇒ tan 50° − 2 [sin 55°]
1
= 1 − 2 [1]
1
=2
(iv)
sin 27° cos 63° 2
[cos 63°] − [ sin 27° ]
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Sin 27° = sin (90° - 63°) = cos 63° [∵ sin (90° - 𝜃) = cos 𝜃]
⇒ sin 27° = cos 63°
sin 27° 2 cos 63° 2
[sin 27°] − [cos 63°] = 1 − 1 = 0
(v)
tan 35° cot 63°
+ cos 63° − 1
cot 55°
Sol:
Tan 35° = tan (90° - 55°) = cos 55°
Cot 78° = cot (90° - 12°) = tan 12°
cot 55° tan 12°
⇒ cot 55° + tan 12° − 1
= tan 1 – 1 = 1
(vi)
sec 70° sin 59°
+ cos 31°
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 20°
Sol:
Sec 70° = sec (90° - 20°) = cosec 20° [∵ sec (90 – 𝜃) = cosec 𝜃]
Sin 59° = sin (90° - 31°) = cos 31° [∵ sin (90 - 𝜃) = cos 𝜃]
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 20 cos 31°
⇒ 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 20 + cos 31° = 1 + 1 = 2
(vii)
Sec 50° Sin 40° + Cos 40° cosec 50°
Sol:
Sec 50° = sec (90° - 40°) = cosec 40°
Cos 40° = cos (90° - 50°) = sin 50°
∴ Sin 𝜃 cosec 𝜃 = 1
⇒ cosec 40° sin 40° + sin 50° cosec 50°
1+1=2
3. Express each one of the following in terms of trigonometric ratios of angles lying between
0° and 45°
(i) Sin 59° + cos 56°
Sol:
Sin 59° = sin (90° - 59°) = cos 31°
Cos 56° = cos (65° - 34°) = Sin 34°
⇒ cos 31° + sin 34°
(ii)
Tan 65° + cot 49°
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Tan 65° = tan (90° - 25°) = cot 25°
Cot 49° = cot (90° - 41°) = tan (41°)
⇒ cot 25° + tan 41°
(iii)
Sec 76° + cosec 52°
Sol:
Sec 76° = sec (90° - 14°) = cosec 14°
Cosec 52° = cosec (90° - 88°) = sec 38°
⇒ Cosec 14° + sec 38°
(iv)
Cos 78° + sec 78°
Sol:
Cos 78° = cos (90° - 12°) = sin 12°
Sec 78° = sec (90° - 12°) = cosec 12°
⇒ sin 12° + cosec 12°
(v)
Cosec 54° + sin 72°
Sol:
Cosec 54° = cosec (90° - 36°) = sec 36°
Sin 72° = sin (90° - 18°) = cos 18°
⇒ sec 36° + cos 18°
(vi)
Cot 85° + cos 75°
Sol:
Cot 85° = cot (90° - 5°) = tan 5°
Cos 75° = cos (90° - 15°) = sin 15°
= tan 5° + sin 15°
(vii)
Sin 67° + cos 75°
Sol:
Sin 67° = Sin (90° − 23°) = cos 23°
Cos 75° = cos (90° −15° ) = sin 15°
= cos 23° + sin 15°
4. Express Cos 75° + cot 75° in terms of angles between 0° and 30°.
Sol:
Cot 75° = cos (90° - 15°) = sin 15°
Cot 75° = cot (90° - 15°) = tan 15°
= sin 15° + tan 15°
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝐶+𝐴 𝐵
6. If A, B, C are interior angles of a triangle ABC, prove that (i) tan ( ) = cot 2
2
Sol:
𝑐+𝐴 𝐵
(i) Tan [ ] = cot 2
2
Sol:
Given A + B + C = 180°
C + A = 180° − B
180−𝐵 𝐵
⇒ Tan [ ] ⇒ 𝑇𝑎𝑛 [90° − 2 ]
2
𝐵
⇒ cot 2 [∵ tan(90° − θ) = cot 𝜃]
∴ LHS = RHS
𝐵+𝐶 𝐴
(ii) Sin [ ] = cos 2
2
Sol:
A + B + C = 180°
B + C = 180° - A
180°−𝐴 A
LHS = sin [ ] ⇒ sin [90° − 2 ]
2
𝐴
Cos 2 [∵ 𝑆𝑖𝑛 (90° − 𝜃) ∙ 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃]
∴ LHS =RHS
7. Prove that
(i)
Tan20° Tan 35° tan 45° tan 55° Tan 70° = 1
Sol:
Tan 20° = tan (90° - 70°) = cot 70°
Tan 35° = tan (90° - 70°) = cot 55°
Tan 45° = 1
⇒ cot 70° tan 70° x cot 55° tan 55° x tan 45° ∙ cot 𝜃 = tan 𝜃 = 1
⇒1×1×1=1 Hence proved.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
(ii)
Sin 48° sec 42° + cosec 42° = 2
Sol:
Sin 48° = sin (90° - 42°) = cos 42°
Cos (45°) = cos (90° - 42°) = sin 42°
Sec 𝜃 ∙ cos 𝜃 = 1 ∙ sin 𝜃 cosec 𝜃 = 1
⇒ cos 42° sec 42° + sin 42° cosec 42°
⇒1+1=2
∴ LHS = RHS
(iii)
sin 70° 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 20°
+ − 2 cos 70° 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 20° = 0
cos 20° sec 70°
Sol:
Sin (70°) = sin (90° - 20°) = cos 20°
Cosec 20° = cosec (90° - 70°) = sec 70°
Cos 70° = cos (90° - 20°) = sin 20°
cos 20° sec 70°
⇒ cos 20° + sec 70° − 2 sin 20 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 20°
1 + 1 – 2(1) = 0
∴ LHS = RHS Hence proved
(iv)
cos 80°
+ cos 59° 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 31° = 2
sin 10°
Sol:
Cos 80° = cos (90° - 10°) = sin 10°
Cos 59° = cos (90° - 31°) = sin 31°
sin 10°
⇒ sin 10° + sin 31° 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 31°
=1+1=2 [∵ Sin 𝜃 cosec 𝜃 = 1]
Hence proved
8. Prove the following:
(i) Sin 𝜃 sin (90 - 𝜃) – cos 𝜃 cos (90 - 𝜃) = 0
Sol:
Sin (90 – 𝜃) = cos 𝜃
Cos (90 – 𝜃) – cos 𝜃 sin 𝜃
=0
∴ LHS = RHS
Hence proved
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sec (90° - 𝜃) = cosec 𝜃 sin (90 - 𝜃) = cos 𝜃
Cot (90 - 𝜃) = tan 𝜃
sin 𝜃 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 𝒕𝒂𝒏 𝜃 sin 𝜃 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃
⇒ = [∵ sin 𝜃 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 = 1]
sec 𝜃.cos 𝜃.tan 𝜃 sec 𝜃 cos 𝜃
=1 [sec 𝜃 cos 𝜃 = 1]
tan(90°− 𝜃) cot 𝜃
= cot 𝜃 = 1
cot 𝜃
⇒1+1=2
∴ LHS = RHS
Hence proved
tan(90−𝐴) cot 𝐴
(iii) − cos 2 𝐴 = 0
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝐴
Sol:
Tan (90 – A) = cot A
cot 𝐴 .cot 𝐴
⇒ − cos2 𝐴
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝐴
cot2 𝐴
⇒ 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝐴 − cos2 𝐴
cos2 𝐴
= − cos 2 𝐴 ⇒ cos 2 𝐴 cos2 𝐴 = 0
sin2 𝐴
Hence proved
cos(90°−𝐴) sin(90°−𝐴)
(iv) − sin2 𝐴 = 0
tan(90°−𝐴)
Sol:
Cos (90° - A) = sin A Tan (90° - A) = cot A
Sin (95° A) = cos A
sin 𝐴 cos 𝐴
− sin2 𝐴 = 0
cot 𝐴
sin 𝐴.cos 𝐴.
sin 𝐴 − sin2 𝐴
cos 𝐴
sin 𝐴 − sin2 𝐴 = 0
2
LHS = RHS
Hence Proved
(v) Sin (50° + 𝜃) – cos (40° – 𝜃) + tan 1° tan 10° tan 20° tan 70° tan 80° tan 89° = 1
Sol:
Sin (50 + 𝜃) = cos (90 – (50 + 𝜃)) = cos (40 – 𝜃)
Tan 1 = tan (90° − 89°) ∙ cot 89°
Tan 10° = tan (90° - 80°) = cot 80°
Tan 20° = tan (90° - 70°) = cot 70°
⇒ cos (40° - 𝜃) – cos (40 - 𝜃) = cot 89° tan 89° . cot 80° . cot 70° tan 70°
Cot . tan 𝜃 = 1
=1∙1∙1=1
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
LHS = RHS
Hence proved
9. Evaluate:
2 1
(i) 3 (cos4 30° − sin4 45 °) − 3(sin2 60° − sec 2 45°) + 4 cot 2 30°
Sol:
√3 √3 1 1
Cos 30° = sin 60° = cot 30° = √3 sin 45° = sec 45° =
2 2 √2 √2
Substituting above values in (i)
4 4 2
2 √3 1 √3 1 2 1 2
[( 2 ) − ( ) ] − 3 [( 2 ) ∙ [ ] ] + 4 (√3)
3 √2 √2
2 9 1 3 1 1−3
[ − 4] − 3 [4 − 2]
3 16 4
2 9−4 3−2 3
[ 16 ] − 3 [ ]−4
3 4
2 5 3 3 5
⇒ 3 ∙ 16 − 4 + 4 ⇒ 24
2
2 4 2 3 1 2 1 2
(ii) 4 (sin 30 + cos 60°) − 3 3 [(√2) ∙ [ ] ] + 4 (√3)
√2
Sol:
1 1 √3 1
𝑆𝑖𝑛 30° = 2 cos 60 = 2 sin 60° = cos 45° = tan 60° = √3
2 √2
2
1 4 1 4 2 √3 1 2 1 2
⇒ 4 [[2] + [2] ] − 3 [( 2 ) − ( ) ] + 2 (√3)
√2
1 2 3 1 3
4 [2. 16] − 3 [4 − 2] + 2
1 2 1 3 11
=2−3 ∙4+2= 6
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Cot 55 tan 55∙ cot 50 tan 50 ∙ tan 45
1∙1∙1=1
(vi) Tan 7° tan 23° tan 60° tan 67° tan 83°
Sol:
Tan 7° tan 23° tan 60° tan (90° - 23) tan (90° - 7°)
⇒ tan 7° tan 23° tan 60° cot 23° tan 60°
1 ∙ 1 ∙ √3 = √3
2 sin 68 2 cot 15° 8 tan 45° tan 20° tan 40° tan 50° tan 70°
(vii) − 5 tan 75° −
cos 22 5
Sol:
Sin 68° = sin (90 - 22) = cos 22
Cot 15° = tan (90 - 75) = tan 75
cos 22 2 tan 75° 3 tan 45° tan20° tan 40° cot 40° cot 20°
2 ∙ cos 22 − 5 tan 75° − 5
2 3
=2−5−5=2−1=1
sin 18°
(ix) + √3 [tan 10° tan 30° tan 40° tan 50° tan 80°]
cos 72°
Sol:
Sin 18° = sin (90° - 72) = cos 72°
Tan 10° = cot 80° tan 50° = cot 40°
𝑠𝑖𝑛 18° 1
⇒ sin 18° + √3 [tan 80 cos 30 . tan 40 cot 40 . ]
√3
1
= 1 + √3 ∙ =2
√3
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
10. If Sin 𝜃 = cos (𝜃 – 45°), where 𝜃 – 45° are acute angles, find the degree measure of 𝜃.
Sol:
Sin 𝜃 = cos (𝜃 – 45°)
Cos 𝜃 = cos (90 – 𝜃)
Cos (𝜃 – 45°) = sin (90° - (𝜃 – 45°)) = sin (90 – 𝜃 + 45°)
Sin 𝜃 = sin (135 – 𝜃)
𝜃 = 135 – 𝜃
2𝜃 = 135
∴ 𝜃 = 135°/2
12. If 2𝜃 + 45° and 30° − 𝜃 are acute angles, find the degree measure of 𝜃 satisfying Sin
(20 + 45°) = cos (30 - 𝜃°)
Sol:
Here 20 + 45° and 30 – 𝜃° are acute angles:
We know that (90 – 𝜃) = cos 𝜃
Sin (2𝜃 + 45°) = sin (90 – (30 – 𝜃))
Sin (2𝜃 + 45°) = sin (90 – 30 + 𝜃)
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sin (20 + 45°) = sin (60 + 𝜃)
On equating sin of angle of we get
2𝜃 + 45 = 60 + 𝜃
2𝜃 – 𝜃 = 60 – 45
𝜃 = 15°
13. If 𝜃 is a positive acute angle such that sec 𝜃 = cosec 60°, find 2 cos2 𝜃 – 1
Sol:
We know that sec (90 – 𝜃) = cosec2 𝜃
Sec 𝜃 = sec (90 – 60°)
On equating we get
Sec 𝜃 = sec 30°
𝜃 = 30°
Find 2cos2 𝜃 – 1
√3
⇒ 2 × cos2 30° − 1 [cos 30 = ]
2
2
√3
⇒2×(2) −1
3
⇒2×4−1
3
⇒2−1
1
=2
14. If cos 2𝜃 = sin 4𝜃 where 2𝜃, 4𝜃 are acute angles, find the value of 𝜃.
Sol:
We know that sin (90 – 𝜃) = cos 𝜃
Sin 20 = cos 2𝜃
Sin 4𝜃 = sin (90 - 2𝜃)
4𝜃 = 90 – 20
6𝜃 = 90
90
𝜃=
6
𝜃 = 15°
15. If Sin 3𝜃 = cos (𝜃 – 6°) where 3 𝜃 and 𝜃 − 6° are acute angles, find the value of 𝜃.
Sol:
30, 𝜃 – 6 are acute angle
We know that sin (90 – 𝜃) = cos 𝜃
Sin 3𝜃 = sin (90 – (𝜃 - 6°))
Sin 3𝜃 = sin(90 – 𝜃 + 6°)
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sin 3𝜃 = sin (96° - 𝜃)
3𝜃 = 96° – 𝜃
4𝜃 = 96°
96°
𝜃= 4
𝜃 = 24°
16. If Sec 4A = cosec (A – 20°) where 4A is acute angle, find the value of A.
Sol:
Sec 4A = sec [90 − 𝐴 − 20] [∵ sec(90 − 𝜃) = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃]
Sec 4A = sec (90 – A + 20)
Sec 4A = sec (110 – A)
4A = 110 – A
5A = 110
110
A= ⇒ 𝐴 = 22
5
17. If Sec 2A = cosec (A – 42°) where 2A is acute angle. Find the value of A.
Sol:
We know that (sec (90 – 𝜃)) = cosec 𝜃
Sec 2A = sec (90 – (A – 42))
Sec 2A = sec (90 – A + 42)
Sec 2A = sec (132 – A)
Now equating both the angles we get
2A = 132 – A
132
3A = 3
A = 44
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 6.1
Sol:
We know sin 2 A cos2 A 1
sin 2 A 1 cos 2 A
sin 2 A cos ec 2 A
1
sin 2 A 2 1 L.H .S R.H .S
sin A
2. 1 cos A sin
2 2
A 1
Sol:
We know that cos ec 2 A a 2 A 1
cos ec 2 A 1 cot 2 A
cos ec 2 A sin 2 A 1
1
n 2 A 1
sin A
1 1 L.H .S R.H .S
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
We know that sec2 tan 2 1
sec2 1, tan
cos ec 2 cos 2 1
cos ec 2 cot 2
1
tan 2 cot 2 tan 2
tan 2
1
6. tan sec cos ec
tan
Sol:
1 sin 1
LHS tan
tan cos sin
cos
sin cos
cos sin
sin 2 cos2 1
sin cos sin cos
sec cos ec
Hence L.H.S = R.H.S
cos 1 sin
7.
1 sin cos
Sol:
cos cos 2 cos 2 sin 2
2 2 2
sin sin 2 2sin cos
2 2 2
cos 2 sin 2
2 2
LHS 1 cos 2 sin 2
2 2 2 2
cos 2 sin 2 2sin 2 cos 2
cos 2 sin 2 cos 2 sin 2
a 2 b2 a b a b a b 2 a 2 b2 2ab
cos sin
2 2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
cos sin
2 2.
cos sin
2 2
cos 2 sin 2 2sin cos
1 sin 2 2 2 2
R.H .S
cos
cos 2 sin 2
2 2
cos 2 sin 2
cos 2 sin 2
cos sin
2 2
cos sin
2 2
L.H .S R.H .S
cos 1 sin
8.
1 sin cos
Sol:
cos cos 2 cos2 sin 2
2 2 2
sin sin 2 2sin cos
2 2 2
1 cos2 sin 2
2 2
cos 2 sin
cos 2 2
LHS
1 sin cos 2 sin 2 2sin cot
2 2 2 2
cos sin cos sin
2 2 2 2
2
cos sin
2 2
cos sin
2 2
cos sin
2 2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
cos 2 sin 2 2sin cos
1 sin 2 2 2 2
RHS
cos
cos 2 sin 2
2 2
2
cos sin
2 2
cos sin cos sin
2 2 2 2
cos sin
2 2
cos sin
2 2
LHS = RHS
1
9. cos2 A 1
1 cot 2 A
Sol:
1 cot 2 A cos ec 2 A cos ec 2 A cot 2 A 1
cos ec 2 A 1 cot 2 A.
1
cot 2 A
cos ec 2 A
cos2 A sin 2 A 1 LHS RHS
1
10. sin 2 A 1
1 tan 2 A
Sol:
1 tan 2 A sec2 sec2 A tan 2 A 1
1
sin 2 A 1 tan 2 A sec2 A
sec2
sin 2 A cos 2 A 1
LHS RHS
1 cos
11. cos ec cot .
1 cos
Sol:
1 cos
L.H.S Rationalize numerator with 1 cos
1 cos
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 cos 1 cos
1 cos 1 cos
2
1 cos
1 cos 1 cos
1 cos 1 cos 1 cos
1 cos 2 sin 2 sin
cos ec cot
1 cos sin
12.
sin 1 cos
Sol:
1 cos2 sin 2
2 2
cos cos 2 cos2 8sin 2
2 2 2
sin sin 2 2sin cos
2 2 2
cos 2 sin 2 cos 2 sin 2
1 cos 2 2 2 2
LHS
sin
2sin cos
2 2
cos sin 2 cos 2 sin 2
2 2 2 2
2sin cos
2 2
2sin 2
2 tan .
2
2sin cos
2 2
2sin cos
RHS 2 2
2 2 2
cos sin cos sin 2
2 2 2 2
2sin cos
2 2 tan
2
2 cos 2
2
L.H .S R.H .S
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
sin
13. cos ec cot
1 cos
Sol:
sin
LHS
1 cos
Rationalizer both Nr and Or with 1 cos
sin 1 cos
1 cos 1 cos
sin 1 cos
a b a b a 2 b 2
1 cos 2
sin sin
1 cos 2 sin 2
sin 2
sin sin cos
2
sin sin 2
1 cos
cos ec cot
sin sin
LHS RHS
1 sin
sec tan
2
14.
1 sin
Sol:
1 sin
LHS
1 sin
Rationalize both Nr and Or with 1 sin multiply
1 sin 1 sin
1 sin 1 sin
1 sin
2
1 sin sin
2 2
1
cos cos cos
sec tan
2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 cot 2 1 cos2
cot 2 cos2
LHS RHS Hence proved
16.
1 cot tan cot
2
sec 2
Sol:
LHS
1 cot tan
2
cos ec 2 1 cot 2
sec 2
cos ec tan
2
1 cos2 sin
sec2 sin 2 1 cos
cos
cot
sin
LHS RHS Hence proved
1 tan 2 l sin 2
tan 2 sin 2
LHS RHS Hence proved
1
1 sin A
1 sin A
cos A cos A
2
cos A
2
1 1 sin A 1 sin A cos 2 A 1 sin 2 A
cos A
LHS RHS Hence proved
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
19. cos ecA sin A sec A cos A tan A cot A 1
Sol:
1 1 sin A cos A
LHS sin A cos A
sin A cos A cos A sin A
1 sin 2 A 1 cos2 A sin 2 A cos2 A
sin A cos A sin A cos A
1
cos ec A sin A
sec A 1 A
cos A sin A 1
2
cos
2 2
sin A cos A tan A sin A
cos A
cos A
cot A
sin A
1 sin 2 A cos 2 A
1 1 cos A sin A
2 2
sin 2 A cos 2 A 1
LHS RHS Hence proved
sin 2
sin 2 sin 2 tan 2
cos2
LHS RHS Hence proved
Sol:
LHS 1 tan 2 1 sin 2 a b a b a 2 b 2
sec2 cos 2 sec2 1 tan 2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
LHS RHS Hence proved
2cos2 1
23. (i) cos tan
sin cos
Sol:
cos sin
L.H .S
sin cos
cos2 sin 2 cos2
cos2 sin 2 cos
sin cos sin cos
cos 2 2 cos 2 1
2cos 2 1
sin cos
LHS RHS Hence proved
2sin 2 1
(ii) tan cot
sin cos
Sol:
sin cos
LHS
cos sin
sin 2 cos2
cos sin
sin 2 1 sin 2
cos 2 1sin 2
cos sin
2sin 2 1
sin cos
LHS RHS Hence proved
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
cos2
24. cos ec sin
sin
Sol:
LHS
15 sin cos ec sin
2 2
sin
cos sin 1
2 2
sin cos ec 1
sin
0
LHS RHS Hence proved
1 1
25. 2sec2 A
1 sin A 1 sin A
Sol:
1 sin A 1 sin A
LHS
1 sin A1 sin A
2
1 sin A 1 sin A 1 sin 2 A
1 sin A
2
2
2
2sec2 A 1 sin A cos A
cos A
LHS RHS Hence proved
1 sin cos A
26. 2sec
cos 1 sin
Sol:
1 sin cos2
2
LHS
cos 1 sin
1 sin 2 2sin cos 2
cos 1 sin
2 1 sin
2sec
cos 1 sin
LHS RHS Hence proved
1 sin 1 sin
2 2
1 sin 2
27.
2 cos 2 1 sin 2
Sol:
1 sin 2 2sin 1 sin 2 2sin
LHS
2cos
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 1 sin 2
1 sin 2
cos 2 1 sin 2
2 cos 2 1 sin 2
LHS RHS Hence proved
1 tan 2 1 tan
2
28. tan 2
1 cot 2 cot
Sol:
1 tan 2 sec2
LHS tan 2 1 sec2 1 cot 2 cos ec 2
1 cot 2 cos ec 2
1
sin 2 tan 2
cos 1
2
2
1 tan 1 tan
2
1 cot 1
1
tan
2
1 tan
tan tan 2
1 tan
LHS RHS Hence proved
1 sec sin 2
29.
sec 1 cos
Sol:
1
1
1 sec cos
LHS
sec 1
cos
cos 1
cos
cos
1 cos
sin 2 1 cos2
RHS
1 cos 1 cos
1 2 5b cos 1 cos
1 48
LHS RHS Hence proved
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
tan cot
30. 1 tan cot .
1 cot 1 tan
Sol:
tan cot
LHS
1
1 1 tan
tan
tan
2
cot
1 tan 1 tan
1 1
tan 2
1 tan tan
1 1 tan 3
1 tan tan
1 tan 1 tan tan 2
1
1 tan tan
a3 b3 a b a 2 ab b2
1 tan tan 2
tan
cot 1 tan
LHS RHS Hence proved
sec6 tan 6 3sec 2 sec 2 tan 2 1
tan 2 a b a3 b3 3ab a b
3
sec tan 6 3sec2 tan 2 1
sec6 tan 6 1 3tan sec2
Hence proved
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
cos ec 6 cot 6 3cos ec 2 cot 2 cos ec 2 cot 2 1
a b 3 a3 b3 3ab a b
cos ec6 1 3cos ec 2 cot 2 cot 6
Hence proved
33.
1 tan cot tan
2
cos ec 2
Sol:
sec2 tan 2 1
sec2 1 tan 2
sec2 cot 1 sin 6 cos
LHS
cos ec 2 cos2 sin
1 1 cos
sec cos , cos ec sin cot sin
sin
tan
cos
LHS RHS Hence proved
1 cos A 1
34.
sin A 1 cos A
2
Sol:
We know that sin 2 A cos 2 A 1
sin 2 A 1 cos2 A
sin 2 A 1 cos A1 cos A
LHS
1 cos A
1
1 cos A1 cos A 1 cos A
L.H .S R.H .S Hence proved
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 cos A sin A
36.
sin A 1 cos A
Sol:
1 cos A
LHS ... 1
sin A
Multiply both Nr and Dr with 1 cos A we get
1 cos A1 cos A 1 cos2 A
sin A 1 cos A sin A 1 cos A
sin 2 A 1 cos 2 A
sin A 1 cos A sin A 1 cos A
sin 2
cos 2 A sin 2 A
sin A 1 cos A
sin A
1 cos A
L.H .S R.H .S Hence proved
1 sin A
37. sin A tan A
1 sin A
Sol:
1 sin A
LHS .
1 sin A
Rationalize the Nr. By multiplying both Nr and Dr with 1 sin A.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 sin A 1 sin A
cos A cos A cos A
sec A tan A
L.H .S R.H .S Hence proved
1 cos A
38. cos ecA cot A
1 cos A
Sol:
Rationalizing both Nr and Or by multiplying both with 1 cos A we get
1 cos A1 cos A .
1 cos A1 cos A 1 cos2 A sin 2 A
1 cos A1 cos A
1 cos A
2
sin 2 A
1 cos A
sin A
cos ecA cot A.
L.H .S R.H .S Hence proved
1 sin A
sec A tan A
2
39.
1 sin A
Sol:
LHS sec A tan A
2
1 sin A 2 2
1 sin A
cos A cos A cos 2 A.
1 sin A
2
1 sin A
2
a 2 b 2 a b a b
1 sin A1 sin A
1 sin A
1 sin A
L.H .S R.H .S Hence proved
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 cos A
cot A cos ecA
2
40.
1 cos A
Sol:
1 cos A
LHS
1 cos A
Rationalizing Nr by multiplying and dividing with 1 cos A.
1 cos A1 cos A
1 cos A1 cos A
1 cos A
2
1 cos 2 A
1 cos A
2
2
a b a b a 2 b 2 1 cos 2 A sin 2 A
sin A
2
1 cos A
cos ecA cot A
2
sin A sin A
cot A cos ecA
2
1 1
41. 2cos ecA cot A
sec A 1 sec A 1
Sol:
sec A 1 sec A 1 2sec A
LHS
sec A 1 sec A 1 sec2 A 1
a b a b a 2 b 2 sec2 A 1 tan 2 A
2sec A 2 1cos 2 A 1 sin 2 A
sec A tan 2
A
tan 2 A cos A sin 2 A cos A cos 2 A
2cos ecA cot A
L.H .S R.H .S Hence proved
cos A sin A
42. sin A cos A
1 tan A 1 cot A
Sol:
cos A sin A
LHS
1 tan A 1
1
tan A
cos A sin A tan A
1 tan A 1 tan A
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
cos A sin A tan A
1 tan A
sin A
cos A sin A
cos A
sin A
1
cos A
cos 2 A sin 2 A cos A cos A sin A cos A sin A
cos A sin A cos A cos A sin A
cos A sin A.
L.H .S R.H .S Hence proved
2 sin 2 A
2 2
2sec2 A.
sin A cos A
LHS RHS Hence proved.
1
sin A sin A
2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
tan 2 A cot 2 A
45.
1 tan 2 A 1 cot A
Sol:
We know that
sec 2 A 1 tan 2 A
cos ec 2 A 1 cot 2 A.
tan 2 cot 2
LHS
sec 2 cos ec 2 A
sin 2 A cos 2 A cos 2 A sin 2 A
cos 2 A 1 sin 2 A 1
A 1 cos A 1
tan A sin cos A sec A cos A cot A sin A cos ec sin A
sin 2 A cos 2 A
1
LHS RHS Hence proved.
1 cos sin
47. (i)
1 cos sin
sin cos 1
(ii)
sin cos 1
cos sin 1
(iii) cos ec cot
cos sin 1
Sol:
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 cos sin
(i)
1 cos sin
Dividing the equation with cos we get or both Nr and Dr
1 cos sin 1 cos sin
cos cos cos cos
1 cos sin 1 cos sin
cos cos cos cos
sec 1 ta
sec 1 tan
sec tan sec2 tan 2
sec2 tan 2 1
sec2 tan 1
Or
sec tan 1
sec tan 1
1
1
sec tan 1
sec tan
sec tan 1 sec tan
Or
sec tan 1
sec tan 1
1
1
sec tan 1
sec tan
sec tan 1 sec tan
1 sec tan 1
1 sec tan sec tan
1
sec tan
sec tan
sec tan
1 sin
cos cos
1 cos
cos
sin cos 1
(ii)
sin cos 1
Divide Nr and Dr with cos , we get
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
sin cos 1
cos tan 1 sec
.
sin cos 1 tan 1 sec
cos
1
1
sec tan
tan sec 1
1 sec tan 1
1 sec tan sec tan
1
sec tan
cos sin 1
(iii) cos ec cot
cos sin 1
Divide both Nr and Dr with sin
cos sin 1
sin
cos sin 1
sin
cot 1 cos ec
cot 1 cos ec
cot cos ec cos ec 2 cot 2
cot cos ec 1
cot cos ec cos ec 2 cot 2
cot cos ec 1
cot cos ec 1 cos ec cot
cot cos ec 1
cot cos ec
1 1 1 1
48.
sec A tan A cos A cos A sec A tan A
Sol:
1
LHS : sec A tan A sec A tan A
sec A tan A
tan A
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
RHS
cos A sec A tan A
sec A sec A tan A
1
sec A tan A sec A tan A
tan A
LHS RHS
2
sin 2 A cos 2 A 2sin 2 A cos 2 A
1 2sin 2 A cos 2 14
1 tan 2 A
50. tan 2 A.
cot 2 A 1
Sol:
sin 2 A cos 2 A sin 2 A
1
cos 2 A cos 2 A
cos 2 cos 2 A sin 2 A
1
sin 2 sin 2 A
sin 2 A
cos 2 A
tan 2 A.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
cot 2
51. 1 cos ec
1 cos ec
Sol:
cos ec 2 1
1 cos ec 2 cot 2 1,cot 2 cos ec 2 1
1 cos ec
1
cos ec 1 cos ec 1
1 cos ec
1 cos ec 1 a b a b a 2 b 2 a cos ec , b 1.
cos ec
cos cos
52. 2 tan
cos ec 1 cos ec 1
Sol:
cos cos
1 1
1 1
sin sin
cos cos
1 sin 1 sin
sin sin
cos sin cos sin
1 sin 1 sin
1 sin sin cos sin cos
1 sin 1 sin
sin cos sin cos sin cos sin 2 cos 2
1 sin 2
sin cos
cos 2
2sin
cos
2 tan
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 cos sin 2
53. cot
sin 1 cos
Sol:
1 cos sin 2
sin 1 cos
1 sin 2 cos
sin 1 cos
cos 2 cos
sin 1 cos
cos 1 cos
sin 1 cos
cot .
tan 3 cot 3
54. sec cos ec 2sin cos
1 tan 2 1 cot 2
Sol:
tan 3 cos2
sec2 tan 2 1cos ec 2 cot 2 1
sec cos ec
2 2
cos ec 2 1 cot 2 .
1 1 2
tan cos 2 cot 3 sin 3 sec2 cos , cos ec 2 1 cot
2
sin 3 cos3
cos 2
sin 2
cos 3
sin
3
sin cos
3 3
cos sin
sin cos 4
4
sin cos
1 2sin 2 cos 2
sin cos
1 2sin 2 cos 2
sin cos sin cos
sec cos ec 2sin cos .
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
T3 T5 T5 T7
55. If Tn sin n cos n , provethat .
T1 T3
Sol:
LHS
sin cos sin cos
3 3 3 5
sin cos
sin 1 sin cos3 1 cos 2
3 2
sin cos
sin cos cos3 sin 2
3 3
sin cos
sin cos sin cos
2
sin cos
sin cos 2
3
T5 T9
sin 5 cos5 sin 7 cos7
T3 sin 3 cos3
sin 5 1 sin 2 cos5 sin 2
sin cos
3 3
sin 5 cos 2 cos5 sin 2
sin 3 cos3
sin 2 cos 2 sin 3 cos3
sin cos
3 3
sin cos 2
2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 tan 2 2sec 2
2 tan 2 sec 2
sin 2 1
2 2
cos cos
2
sin sin 2
2
cos
2
1 1 2 1 sin 2 cos 2
57.
sec2 cos2 cos ec 2 sin 2 sin cos 2
.
2 sin 2 cos 2
Sol:
1 1 2
sin cos 2 .
cos 2 cos ec sin
2 2
1
cos
2
1 1 2
sin cos .
2
1 cos 1 sin
4 4
cos 2 sin 2
cos 2 sin 2 2
sin cos
2
1 cos 1 sin
4 4
cos 2 sin 2 2
2 sin cos .
2
cos 2 sin 2
2 sin 2 cos 2 .
2 2
cos 1 cos sin sin 1 sin cos
2 2 2
cos 2 sin 2 2
2 sin cos
2
cos 2 sin 2
2 sin 2 cos 2 .
sin cos 2 1 cos 2 sin 2 1
sin 2
cos 2
sin cos 1 cos 1 sin
2 2 2 2
1 cos 1 sin
2 2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 sin 2 cos 2
.
2 sin 2 cos2
58.
1 sin cos 1 cos
Sol:
1 sin cos 1 sin cos
2
1 sin cos 1 sin cos
1 sin cos 2
1 sin cos 2
2
sin 2 sin 2 2sin
2 2sin 2sin cos 2cos
2
2sin 2 2sin
2 1 sin 2 cos sin 1
2
2sin sin 1
1 sin 2 2 cos
2
2sin sin 1
2 2 cos
2
2sin
2
2 1 cos
2 sin
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 cos
2
sin
1 cos
2
1 cos 2
1 cos 1 cos
1 cos 1 cos
1 cos
.
1 cos
sec 2 A tan 2 A 1 sec A tan A 1 sec A tan A
1 sin A 1 sin A
1 1
cos A cos A cos A cos A
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
60. (1 + cot 𝐴 − 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝐴)(1 + tan 𝐴 + sec 𝐴) = 2
Sol:
LHS 1 cot A cos ecA1 tan A sec A
cos A 1 sin A 1
1 1
sin A sin A cos A cos A
sin A cos A 1 cos A sin A 1
sin cos A
sin A cos A
2
1
sin A cos A
1 2sin A cos A 1
sin 2 A cos 2 A 1
sin A cos A
2.
61. cos ec sec cot tan cos ec sec sec cos ec 2
Sol:
LHS
cos ec sec cot tan
1 1 cos sin
sin cos sin cos
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
62. sec A cos ecA1 tan A cot A tan A sec A cot A cos ecA
Sol:
LHS sec A cos ecA1 tan A cot A
1 1 sin A cos A
1
cos A sin A cos A sin A
sin A cos A cos A sin A sin A cos A
2 2
sin A cos A sin A cos A
sin A cos A sin 2 A cos A sin A cos2 A
sin 2 A cos 2 A
sin 3
A cos3 A
2
sin A cos A 2
a b a 2 ab b a 3 b3
RHS tan A sec A cot A cos ecA
sin A 1 cos A 1
cos A cos A sin A cos A
sin A cos A
cos 2 A sin A
sin 3 A cos3 A
sin 2 A cos 2 A
L.H .S R.H .S Hence proved.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
cos A cos ecA sin A sec A
LHS
cos A sin A
1 1
cos A sin A
sin A cos A
cos A sin A
cos A sin A
sin A cos A
cos A sin A
cos 2 A sin 2 A
sin A cos A
cos A sin A
cos 2 A sin 2 A 1
sin A cos A cos A sin A
cos A sin A cos A sin A
sin A cos A cos A sin A
cos A sin A
sin A cos A
cos A sin A
sin A cos A sin A cos A
1 1
sin A cos A
cos ecA sec A
R.H .S
Hence proved.
sin A cot A
64. 1
sec A tan A 1 cos ecA cot A 1
Sol:
sin A cos A
LHS
1 sin A 1 cos A
1 1
cos A cos A sin A sin A
sin A cos A
1 sin A cos A 1 cos A sin A
cos A sin A
sin A cos A sin A cos A
1 sin A cos A 1 cos A sin A
1 1
sin A cos A sin A
1 sin A cos A 1 cos A
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2
sin A cos A
1 sin A cos A 2sin A cos A
2 2
2
sin A cos A
1 sin 2 A cos 2 A 2sin A cos A
sin A cos A
2
1 1 2sin A cos A
sin 2 A cos 2 A 1
2
sin A cos A
2sin A cos A
1
L.H .S R.H .S
tan A cos A
65. sin A cos A
1 tan 2 A
1 cot 2 A
2
Sol:
tan A cos A 1 tan 2 A sec2 A
2
sec A cos ec A 1 cot A cos ec A
2 2 2
2 2
sin A cot A
cos4 A sin A4
sec A cos ec A
sin A cos A
cos A sin A
1 1
cos A sin 4 A
4
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
66.
sec 4 A 1 sin 4 A 2 tan 4 A 1
Sol:
LHS sec4 A 1 sin 4 A 2 tan 4 A
sec A sec A sin A 2 tan 2 A
4 4 4
1
sec4 A 4
sin 4 2 tan 2 A
cos A
sec A tan 4 A 2 tan 2 A
4
tan A 2 tan A
2
sec2 A 4 2
sin 2 A cos A
sin 2 A cos 2 A 1
1 sin A
cos A cos A 1 cos A
1 cos 2 A cos A
1 sin A
cos A1 cos A 1
1 cos A1 cos A 1 sin A
cos A
1 cos A1 sin A
Solving
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 sin A
RHS sec2
1 sec A
1 1 sec A
cos 2 A 1 sec A
1 1 sec A
cos A
cos 2 A cos A 1
1 sin A
cos A cos A 1
By multiplying Nr and Dr with 1 sin A
1 sin A 1 sin A
cos A1 cos A 1 sin A
1 sin 2 A
2
cos A 1 cos A 1 sin A
cos 2 A
cos A 1 cos A 1 sin A
cos 2 A
1 cos A1 sin A
L.H .S R.H .S hence proved.
Sol:
1 cot A tan A sin A cos A
sin A cos A cot A sin A cot A cos A sin A tan A tan A cos A
cos A sin A
sin A cos A sin A cot A cos A sin A tan A cos A
sin A cos A
sin A cos cos A cot A cos A sin A tan A sin A
sin A cos A cos A cot A
Solving:
sec A cos ecA
cos ec A sec2 A
2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
cos A sin A
1 1
2
sin A cos 2 A
sin 2 A cos 2 A
cos A sin A
sin 3 A cos3 A
sin A cos A
sin A cos A
sin A cos A
cos A sin A
sin A tan A cos A cot A
L.H .S R.H .S
cot A tan B
70. cot A tan B
cot B tan A
Sol:
cot A tan B
LHS
cot B tan A
cos A sin B
sin A cos B
cos B cos ecA
sin B cos A
cos A cos B sin A sin B
sin A cos B
cos A cos B sin A sin B
cos A sin B
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
cos A cos B sin A sin B cos A sin B
sin A cos B cos A cos B sin A sin B
cos A sin B
sin A cos B
cot A tan B
RHS
Hence proved
tan A tan B
71. tan A tan B
cot A cot B
Sol:
tan A tan B
LHSS
cot A cot B
sin A sin B
cos A cos B
cos A cos B
sin A sin B
sin A cos B cos A sin B
cos A cos B
cos A sin B cos B sin A
sin A sin B
sin A cos B cos A sin B sin A sin B
cos A cos B cos A sin B cos B sin A
sin A sin B
cos A cos B
tan A tan B RHS
Hence proved
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a 2 sec2 b 2 tan 2 2ab sec tan a 2 tan 2 b 2 sec 2ab sec tan .
a 2 sec2 b 2 sec2 b 2 tan 2 a 2 tan 2
sec2 a 2 b 2 tan 2 b 2 a 2
sec a b tan a
2 2 2 2 2
b2
a b sec tan
2 2 2 2
sec2 tan 2 1
a 2 b2
𝑥 y 𝑥 𝑦 𝑥2 𝑦2
75. If 𝑎 cos θ + b sin 𝜃 = 1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎 sin 𝜃 − 𝑏 cos 𝜃 = 1, 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑒 𝑡ℎ𝑎𝑡 𝑎2 + 𝑏2 = 2
Sol:
2 2
x y x y
cos 1 1
2 2
a cos sin sin
b a b
x2 y 2 2 2 xy x2 y2
2
cos 2 sin
2
cos sin 2 sin 2 cos2
2
a b ab a b
2 xy
sin cos 1 1
ab
x2 y2 y2 x2
2
cos 2
2
cos 2
2
sin 2
2
sin 2 2
a b b a
x 2
y
2
x 2
y
2
cos 2 2 2 sin 2 2 2 2
a b a a
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x2 y 2
2 2 cos sin 2
2 2
a b
2 2
x
a 2
y
2
b
cos 2 sin 2 1
4
cos
a2 3
2
sin
3
sec cos b3
1
cos b3
cos
1 cos 2
b3
cos
sin 2
b3
cos
2
sin 3
b 1
cos 3
Now, a 2b 2 a 2 b 2
4
4
4 4
cos sin cos sin 3
3 3
3
2 2 2 2
sin cos sin cos 3
3 3 3
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
4 2 4 4
4 2
cos 3
sin 3
cos 3 3
sin 3
2
2
sin 3 cos 3
2 2
cos 3 sin 3 2
3
1
2
cos 2 sin 2 1
sin cos 3
1
L.H .S R.H .S
a cos3 3a cos sin 2 a sin 3 3a cos 2 sin 3
a cos 3a cos sin a sin 3a cos sin
3 2 3 2
3
1 2
a 3 cos3 3cos sin 2 sin 3 3cos 2 sin 3
2 2
a 3 cos3 3cos sin 2 sin 3 3cos 2 sin 3
1 2 2 2
2 2
a 1 2sin cos a 1 2sin cos
3 3
2
a 3 1 2sin cos 1 2sin cos
1 2
a 1 1 2a
3 3
R.H .S
Hence proved.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑥 2/3 𝑦 2/3
78. If x = a cos3 𝜃 , 𝑦 = 𝑏 sin3 𝜃 , 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑒 𝑡ℎ𝑎𝑡 (𝑎) + (𝑏 ) =1
Sol:
x a cos3 : y b sin 3
x y
cos3 : sin 3
a b
2 2
x 3 y 3
L.H .S
a b
2 2
cos3 sin
3 3 3
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a 2 sin 2 cos 2 b 2 sin 2 cos 2
a 2 b2 sin 2 cos 2 1
81. If cos 𝜃 + cot 𝜃 = m and cosec 𝜃 – cot 𝜃 = n, prove that m n = 1
Sol:
LHS mn
cos ec cot cos ec cot
cos ec 2 cot 2
1 a b a b a 2 b 2 cos ec 2 cot 2 1
R.H .S
sin 2 A cos A
1
1+sin 𝜃 1−sin 𝜃
(𝑖𝑖)√ + √1+sin 𝜃 = 2 sec 𝜃
1−sin 𝜃
1+cos 𝜃 1−cos 𝜃
(𝑖𝑖𝑖)√ + √1+cos 𝜃 = 2𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃
1−cos 𝜃
sec 𝜃−1 sin 𝜃 2
(𝑖𝑣) = (1+cos 𝜃)
sec 𝜃+1
Sol:
1 1
1 1
LHS cos cos
1 1
1 1
cos cos
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 cos 1 cos
cos cos
1 cos 1 cos
cos cos
1 cos 1 cos
1 cos 1 cos
1 cos 1 cos 1 cos 1 cos
1 cos 1 cos 1 cos 1 cos
1 cos 1 cos
2 2
1 cos 2 1 cos 2
1 cos 1 cos
sin sin
1 cos 1 cos
sin
2
sin
2cos ec
1 sin 1 sin
(2)
1 sin 1 sin
1 sin 1 sin 1 sin 1 sin
1 sin 1 sin 1 sin 1 sin
1 sin 1 sin
2 2
1 sin 2 1 sin 2
1 cos 1 cos
2 2
sin 2 sin 2
1 cos 1 cos
sin sin
2
2cos ec
sin
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
sec 1
(4)
sec 1
1
1
cos
1
1
cos
1 cos
1 cos
1 cos 1 cos
1 cos 1 cos
1 cos 2
1 cos
2
sin 3
1 cos
2
sin
2
1 cos
RHS
Hence proved.
cos sin
3
2 2
2 cos 2 2 cos 2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 2 sin cos 2
2 2
1 2 1 2
1
L.H .S R.H .S
Hence proved.
85. Given that 1 cos 1 cos 1 cos 1 cos 1 cos 1 cos
Show that one of the values of each member of this equality is sin 𝛼 sin 𝛽 sin 𝛾
Sol:
L.H.S
We know that 1 cos 1 cos 2 sin 2 2cos 2
2 2 2
2cos2 2cos2 .... 1
2cos2
2 2 2
Multiply (1) with sin sin sin and divide it with same we get
8cos2 cos2 cos2
2 2 2 sin sin sin
sin sin sin
2 cos 2 cos 2 cos 2 sin sin sin
2 2 2
sin sin sin
2 2 2
sin sin sin cot cot cot
2 2 2
RHS 1 cos 1 cos 1 cos
We know that 1 cos 1 cos2 sin 2 2sin 2
2 2 2
2sin 2 2 sin 2 2sin 2
2 2 2
Multiply and divide by sin sin sin we get
2sin 2 2sin 2 2sin 2 sin sin sin
2 2 2
sin sin sin
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2sin 2 2sin 2 2sin 2 sin sin sin
2 2 2
2sin cos 2sin cos 2sin cos
2 2 2 2 2 2
tan tan sin sin sin
tan
2 2 2
Hence sin sin sin is the member of equality.
2
4 3 x2 1
86. if sin cos x P.T sin cos 6 6
4
Sol:
sin cos x
Squaring on both sides
sin cos
2
x2
sin 2 cos 2 2sin cos x 2
x2 1
sin cos ...... 1
2
We know sin 2 cos 2 1
Cubing on both sides
sin cos 2 1
3 3
2
x2 y 2 z 2
87. if x a sec cos y b sec sin and z c tan , S.T 1
a 2 b2 c 2
Sol:
x 2 a 2 sec2 cos 2 ..... i
y 2 b 2 sec2 sin 2 .... ii
z 2 c 2 tan 2 .... iii
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 6.2
4
1. If cos , find all other trigonometric ratios of angle
5
Sol:
2
4
We have sin 1 cos 1
2
5
16
1
25
16
25
25
9 3
25 5
3
sin
5
sin 3 / 5 3 1 1 5
tan sec
cos 4 / 5 4 cos 4 4
5
1 1 5 1 1 4
cos ec cot .
sec 3 3 tan 3 3
5 4
1
2. If sin , find all other trigonometric ratios of angle
2
Sol:
2
1
We have cos 1 sin 1
2
2
11 1
2 2
1
cos
2
1
sin
tan 2 1
cos 1
2
1 1
cos ec 2
sin 1
2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
sec 2
cos 1
2
1 1
cot 1
tan 1
1 cos ec 2 sec2
3. If tan , Find the value of
2 cos ec 2 cot 2
Sol:
We know that sec 1 tan 2
2
1
1
2
1 3
1
2 2
1 1
cot 2
tan 1
2
cos ec 1 cot 2 1 2 3
Substituting it in (1) we get
2 2 3 3
3 3 3
22
3 2 5
2 2
3 3
3
10
3 1 cos
4. If tan , find thevalueof
4 1 cos
Sol:
2
3 9
sec 1 tan 1 1
2
4 16
16 9 5
16 4
1 1 4
sec cos
cos 5 5
4
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
4 1
1
We get 5 5 1.
4 9 9
1
5 5
12 1 sin
5. If tan , find the valueof
5 1 sin
Sol:
1 1 5
cot
tan 12 12
5
144 25
2
5 169 13
cos ec 1 cot 1
2
.
12 12
2
144 12
1 1 12
sin .
cos ec 13 13
12
12 13 12
1
We get 13 18 25 25
12 13 12 1
1
13 18
1 1 cos 2
6. If cot , find the value of
3 2 sin 2
Sol:
1 4
cos ec 1 cot 2 1
3 3
2
cos ec
3
1 1 3
sin
cos ec 2 2
3
3
1 sin sin 1
and cos 2 .
cot cos 1 3 2
cos
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 3
1
4 4 3.
3 5 5
2
4 4
2sin 2 A 3cot 2 A
7. If cos ec 2, find the value of
4 tan 2 A cos 2 A
Sol:
We know that cot A cos ec 2 A 1
2
2
1 2 1
1.
1 1
tan A 1
cot A 1
1 1 1
sin A A sin A
cos ec 2 2
2
1 1 1
cos A 1 sin A 1
2
.
2 2 2
On substituting we get
3
1
3 1 1
2
2 2 3
2 2
1
2
1
4 1 4 1
2
2
1 3 4
2.
1 2
4
2
cos ec 2 cot 2
8. If cot 3, find the value of
cos ec 2 cot 2
Sol:
3
2
cos ec 1 cot 2 1 1 3 2
1 1 cos
sin cot cos cot sin
cos ec 2 sin
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3
cos
2
1 2
sec
cos 3
On substituting we get
2 3
2 2
43 7
2
2
12 4 8
2
2
3 3
3
21
.
8
6sin 2 tan 2
9. If 3cos 1, find the value of
4cos
Sol:
1
cos sin 1 cos 2
3
1 8 2 2
1
9 9 3
sin 2 2
tan 2 2
cos 3 1
3
On substituting in (1) we get
2
2 2
2
6 2 2 3 16 24
3 6
5 3
1 4 4
4
3 5 3
40
10
4
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2
1
sin 1 cos 1
2
3
2
2 1
2
sin cos
2 2
3 3
2 1 1
3 3 3
13 2sin 3cos
11. If cos ec , find thevalueof
12 4sin 9cos
Sol:
1 1 12
sin
cos ec 13 13
12
2
12 144
cos 1 sin 1 1
2
13 169
25 5
169 13
12 5 24 15
2 3
13 13 13 9 3
12 5 48 15 3
4 9
13 13 13
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise – 7.1
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3. If the mean of the following data is 20.6. Find the value of p.
x: 10 15 p 25 35
f: 3 10 25 7 5
Sol:
x F fx
10 3 30
5 10 150
P 25 25P
25 7 175
35 5 175
N 90 fx 530 25P
Given
Mean 20 6
Px
20 6
N
530 25P
20 6
50
25P 20 6 50 530
500
P
25
P 20.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Mean 15
Px
5
N
109 445
15
P 127
10 P 445 15 P 405
15P 10 P 445 405
5 P 40
40
P
5
P 8
5. Find the value of p for the following distribution whose mean is 16.6
x: 8 12 15 p 20 25 30
f. 12 16 20 24 16 8 4
Sol:
x f fx
8 12 96
12 16 192
15 20 300
P 24 24P
20 16 220
25 8 200
30 4 420
N 100 fx 24 P 1228
Given
Mean 16 6
54 x
16 6
N
24 P 1228
16 6
100
24 P 1228 1660
24 P 1660 1228
432
P
24
P 18
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
6. Find the missing value of p for the following distribution whose mean is 12.58
x: 5 8 10 12 p 20 25
f. 2 5 8 22 7 4 2
Sol:
x f fx
5 2 10
8 5 40
10 8 80
12 22 264
P 7 70
20 24 480
25 2 50
N 50 fx 524P 7 P
Given
Mean 12 8
3
5 12 58
N
528 7 P
12 58
50
524 7 P 629
7 P 629 524
7 P 105
105
P
7
P 15
7. Find the missing frequency (p) for the following distribution whose mean is 7.68.
x: 3 5 7 9 11 13
f: 6 8 15 p 8 4
Sol:
x f fx
3 6 18
5 8 40
7 15 105
9 P 9P
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
11 8 18
13 4 52
N P 41 fx 9 P 303
Given
Mean 7 68
fx
68
N
7 P 303
7 68
P 41
9 P 303 P 7 68 314 88
9 P 7 68 P 314 88 303
1 32 P 11 88
11 88
P
1 32
P 9.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5P 2 5 0
5 P2 1 0
P 2 1 0 P 1 P 1 0
p2 1
p 1
If P 1 0
P 1 (Reject)
Or P 1 0
P 1
9. The following table gives the number of boys of a particular age in a class of 40 students.
Calculate the mean age of the students
Age (in years): 15 16 17 18 19 20
No. of students: 3 8 10 10 5 4
Sol:
x f fx
15 3 45
16 8 128
17 10 170
18 10 180
19 5 95
20 4 80
f N 40 fx 498
fx
Mean age
N
698
40
17 45 years
Mean age 17 45 years
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
10. Candidates of four schools appear in a mathematics test. The data were as follows:
Schools No. of Candidates Average Score
I 60 75
II 48 80
III NA 55
IV 40 50
If the average score of the candidates of all the four schools is 66, find the number of
candidates that appeared from school III.
Sol:
Let the number of candidates from school III = P
No of candidates Average scores
Schools Ni xi
I 60 75
II 48 80
III P 55
IV 40 50
Given
Average score or all schools 66.
N x N 2 x2 N 3 x3 N 4 x4
1 1 66
N1 N 2 N3 N 4
60 75 48 80 P 55 40 50
66
60 48 P 40
4500 3340 55P 2000
66
148 P
10340 55 P 66 P 9768
10340 9768 66 P 55 P
572
P
11
P 52.
11. Five coins were simultaneously tossed 1000 times and at each toss the number of heads
were observed. The number of tosses during which 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 heads were obtained
are shown in the table below. Find the mean number of heads per toss.
No. of heads per toss No. of tosses
0 38
1 144
2 342
3 287
4 164
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5 25
Total 1000
Sol:
No. of heads per toss No. of tosses
0 38
1 144
2 342
3 287
4 164
5 25
12. Find the missing frequencies in the following frequency distribution if it is known that the
mean of the distribution is 50.
X: 10 30 50 70 90
f: 17 f1 32 f2 19 Total 120.
Sol:
x f fx
10 17 170
30 f1 30 f1
50 32 1600
70 f2 70 f 2
90 19 1710
N 120 fx 30 f1 70 f 2 3480.
Given mean
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
fx
50
N
30 f1 70 f 2 3480
50
120
30 f1 70 f 2 3480 6000 …..(i)
Also,
f 120
17 f1 32 f 2 19 120
f1 f 2 52
f1 52 f 2
Substituting value of f1 in (i)
30 52 f 2 70 f 2 3480 6000 40 f 2 960
f 2 24
Hence f1 52 24 28 f1 28; f 2 24
13. The arithmetic mean of the following data is 14. Find the value of k
𝑥𝑖 : 5 10 15 20 25
𝑓𝑖 : 7 k 8 4 5.
Sol:
x f fx
10 17 170
30 f1 30 f1
50 32 1600
70 f2 70 f 2
90 19 1710
N 120 fx 30 f1 70 f 2 3480.
Given mean = 50
fx
50
N
30 f1 70 f 2 3480
50
120
30 f1 70 f 2 3480 6000 …..(i)
Also,
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
f 120
17 f1 32 f 2 19 120
f1 f 2 52
f1 52 f 2
Substituting value of f1 in (i)
30 52 f 2 70 f 2 3480 6000 40 f 2 960
f 2 24
Hence f1 52 24 28 f1 28; f 2 24
14. The arithmetic mean of the following data is 25, find the value of k.
𝑥𝑖 : 5 15 25 35 45
𝑓𝑖 : 3 k 3 6 2
Sol:
x f fx
5 3 15
15 K 15k
25 3 75
35 6 210
45 2 90
N k 14 fx 15k1 390.
Given mean 25
fx
25
N
1 k 390
25
k 14
15k 390 25k 350
25k 15k 40
10k 40
40
k
10
k 4.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
15. If the mean of the following data is 18.75. Find the value of p.
𝑥𝑖 : 10 15 p 25 30
𝑓𝑖 : 5 10 7 8 2
Sol:
x f fx
10 5 50
15 10 150
P 7 7P
25 8 200
30 2 60
N 32 fx 1P 460.
Given mean 18 75
fx
1 75
N
7 P 460
18 75
32
7 P 460 600
7 P 460 600
7 P 140
140
P
7
P 20
Exercise – 7.2
1. The number of telephone calls received at an exchange per interval for 250 successive one-
minute intervals are given in the following frequency table:
No. of calls(x): 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
No. of intervals (f): 15 24 29 46 54 43 39
Compute the mean number of calls per interval.
Sol:
Let be assumed mean A 3
No. of calls No. of
ui x; A xi 3 f1 4;
xi intervals fi
0 15 -3 -45
1 24 -2 -47
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 29 -1 -39
3 46 0 0
4 54 54
5 43 2 43(2) = 86
6 39 3 47
N 250 fi ui 135
fi 4;
Mean number of cells A
N
135
3
250
750 135
250
885
250
3 54
2. Five coins were simultaneously tossed 1000 times, and at each toss the number of heads
was observed. The number of tosses during which 0,1,2,3,4 and 5 heads were obtained are
shown in the table below. Find the mean number of heads per toss
No. of heads per toss (x): 0 1 2 3 4 5
No. of tosses (f): 38 144 342 287 164 25
Sol:
Let the assumed mean A 2.
No. of heads No. of ui A; x
fi 4;
per toss xi intervals fi A; 2
0 38 -2 -76
1 144 -1 +44
2 342 0 0
3 287 1 287
4 164 2 328
5 25 3 75
N 1000 fi ui 470
fi 4
Mean number of per toss A
N
470
2
1000
2 0 47
2 47
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3. The following table gives the number of branches and number of plants in the garden of a
school.
No. of branches (x): 2 3 4 5 6
No. of plants (f): 49 43 57 38 13
Calculate the average number of branches per plant.
Sol:
Let the assumed mean A 4.
No. of No. of plants ui xi A
fi ui
branches xi fi vi 4
2 49 -2 -98
3 43 -1 -43
4 57 0 0
5 28 + 10 = 38 1 28
6 13 2 85
N 200 fi ui 77
fi ui
Average number of branches per plant A
N
77
4
200
77
4
200
800 77
200
3 615
3 62 Approx .
4. The following table gives the number of children of 150 families in a village
No. of children (x): 0 1 2 3 4 5
No. of families (f): 10 21 55 42 15 7
Find the average number of children per family.
Sol:
Let the assumed mean A 2
No. of No of ui xi A
fi ui
children xi families fi xi 2
0 10 -2 -20
1 21 -1 -21
3 42 1 42
4 15 2 30
5 7 5 21
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
N 20 fi ui 52
fi ui
Average number of children for family A
N
52
2
150
300 52
150
352
150
2 35 approx
5. The marks obtained out of 50, by 102 students in a Physics test are given in the frequency
table below:
Marks(x): 15 20 22 24 25 30 33 38 45
Frequency (f): 5 8 11 20 23 18 13 3 1
Find the average number of marks.
Sol:
Let the assumed mean A 25
Frequency
Marks xi ui xi A xi 25 fi ui
fi
15 5 -10 -50
20 8 -5 -40
22 8 -3 -33
24 20 -1 -20
25 23 0 0
30 18 5 90
33 13 8 104
38 3 12 39
45 3 20 20
N 122 fi ui 110
fi ui
Average number of marks A
N
110
25
102
2550 110
102
2660
102
26 08 Approx
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
6. The number of students absent in a class were recorded every day for 120 days and the
information is given in the following frequency table:
No. of students absent (x): 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
No. of days(f): 1 4 10 50 34 15 4 2
Find the mean number of students absent per day.
Sol:
Let the assumed mean A 3
No. of students ui xi A
No. of days f i fi ui
absent xi xi 3
3 1 -3 -3
1 4 -2 -8
2 10 -1 -10
3 50 0 -10
4 34 1 24
5 15 2 30
6 4 3 12
7 2 4 8
N 120 fi ui 63
fi ui
Mean number of students absent per day A
N
63
3
120
360 63
120
423
120
2 525
3 53 Approx
7. In the first proof reading of a book containing 300 pages the following distribution of
misprints was obtained:
No. of misprints per page (x): 0 1 2 3 4 5
No. of pages (f): 154 95 36 9 5 1
Find the average number of misprints per page.
Sol:
Let the assumed mean A 2
No. of misprints ui xi A
No. of days fi fi ui
per page xi xi 3
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
0 154 -2 -308
1 95 -1 -95
2 36 0 0
3 9 1 9
4 5 2 1
5 1 3 3
N 300 fi ui 381
fi ui
Average number of mis prints per day A
N
381
2
300
381
2
300
600 381
300
219
300
0 73
8. The following distribution gives the number of accidents met by 160 workers in a factory
during a month.
No. of accidents (x): 0 1 2 3 4
No. of workers (f): 70 52 34 3 1
Find the average number of accidents per worker.
Sol:
Let the assumed mean A 2
No. of workers ui xi A
fi ui
No. of Accidents
fi xi 3
0 70 -2 -140
1 52 -1 -52
2 34 0 0
3 3 1 3
4 1 2 2
N 100 fi ui 100
Average no of accidents per day workers
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
f i ui
A
N
187
x
160
320 187
160
133
160
0 83
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
9. Find the mean from the following frequency distribution of marks at a test in statistics:
Marks(x): 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
No. of students (f): 15 50 80 76 72 45 39 9 8 6
Sol:
Let the assumed mean A 25.
No. of students ui xi A
Marks xi f1ui
fi xi 25
5 15 -20 -300
10 50 -15 -750
15 80 -10 -800
20 76 -5 -380
25 72 0 0
30 45 5 225
35 39 10 390
40 9 15 135
45 8 20 160
50 6 25 150
N 400 fi ui 1170
f i ui
Mean =
N
1170
25
400
10000 1170
490
22 075.
Exercise – 7.3
1. The following table gives the distribution of total household expenditure (in rupees) of
manual workers in a city.
Expenditure Frequency Expenditure Frequency
(in rupees) (x) (fi) (in rupees) (x1) (fi)
100 – 150 24 300 – 350 30
150 – 200 40 350 – 400 22
200 – 250 33 400 – 450 16
250 – 300 28 450 – 500 7
Find the average expenditure (in rupees) per household.
Sol:
Let the assumed mean A 275.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
From the table we may observe that
fi 20
fi xi 162
fi xi
Mean x
fi
162
8 1
20
So mean number of plants per house is 8 1
We have used for the direct method values xi and fi are very small
4. Thirty women were examined in a hospital by a doctor and the number of heart beats per
minute recorded and summarized as follows. Find the mean heart beats per minute for these
women, choosing a suitable method.
Number of heat 65 - 68 68 - 71 71 - 74 74 - 77 77 - 80 80 - 83 83 -86
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
beats per minute:
Number of women: 2 4 3 8 7 4 2
Sol:
We may find class marks of each interval xi by using the relation
Upper class lim it lower class lim it
xi
2
Class size of this data = 3
Now taking 75 5 as assumed mean (a) we
May calculate, di , ui , fi ui as following.
Number of Number of xi 755
xi di xi 75 5 ui fi ui
heart beats women xi h
per minute
65 68 2 66 5 -9 -3 -6
68 71 9 69 5 -6 -2 -8
71 74 3 72 5 -3 -1 -3
74 77 8 75 5 0 0 0
75 80 7 78 5 3 1 7
80 83 4 81 5 2 3 6 2 8
83 86 2 84 5 9 3 6
30 4
Now we may observe from table that fi 30; fi ui 4
f u 4
Mean x 9r i i h 75 5 3
fi 30
75 5 0 4 75 9
So mean hear beats per minute for those women are 75 9 beats per minute.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
fi xi
Mean A h
N
3
15 6
40
15 0 45
15 0 45
15 45
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
We have
A 20, N 40
fi ui
Mean A hx
N
7
20 8v
40
20 1 4
21 4
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
20 30 25 0 0 15 0
30 40 35 10 1 10 10
40 50 45 20 2 14 28
N 60 fi ui 8
We have A 25, h 10
fi ui
Mean A h
N
8
25 19
60
8
25
6
4
25
3
26 333
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Let the assumed A 20.
Class Mid-value xi 15 Frequency
di xi 15 ui fi ui
interval xi 6 fi
08 4 -16 5 -2 -10
8 16 12 -8 6 -1 -6
16 24 20 0 4 0 0
24 32 28 8 3 1 3
32 40 36 16 2 8 4
N 20 f i ui 9
We have
A 20, h 18
fi ui
Mean A h
N
9
20 8
20
20 3 6
16 4
12. Class interval: 10-30 30-50 50-70 70-90 90-110 110- 130
Frequency: 5 8 12 20 3 2
Sol:
Let the assume mean A 60
Class Mid-value xi 15 Frequency
di xi 15 ui fi ui
interval xi 6 fi
10 30 20 -40 -2 5 -10
30 50 40 -20 -1 8 -8
50 70 60 0 0 12 0
70 90 80 20 1 20 20
90 110 100 40 2 3 6
110 130 120 60 3 2 6
N 50 fi ui 14
We have
A 60, h 25
fi ui
Mean A h
N
14
60 20
50
60 5 6
65 6
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
13. Class interval: 25-35 35-45 45-55 55 - 65 65 – 75
Frequency: 6 10 8 12 4
Sol:
Let the assume mean A 50
Class Mid-value xi 15 Frequency
di xi 15 ui fi ui
interval xi 6 fi
25 35 30 -20 -2 6 -12
35 45 40 -10 -1 10 -10
45 55 50 0 0 8 0
55 65 60 10 0 12 12
65 75 70 20 0 4 8
N 40 f i ui 2
We have
A 50, h 10
fi ui
Mean A h
N
2
50 14
4b
50 0 5
49 5
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
79
42 5x
70
5 79
42
70
79
42
14
588 79
14
36 357
15. For the following distribution, calculate mean using all suitable methods:
Size of item: 1 -4 4-9 9- 16 16-27
Frequency: 6 12 26 20
Sol:
By direct method
Class Frequency
Mid-value fi ui
interval fi
1 4 25 6 15
49 65 12 18
9 16 12 5 26 325
16 27 21 5 20 430
N 64 f i i 848
u
f x
Mean i i A
N
848
64
13 25
By assuming mean method
Let the assumed mean A 65
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
432
65
64
13 25
16. The weekly observations on cost of living index in a certain city for the year 2004 - 2005
are given below. Compute the weekly cost of living index.
Cost of living Number of Cost of living Number of
Index Students Index Students
1400 – 1500 5 1700 – 1800 9
1500 – 1600 10 1800 – 1900 6
1600 – 1700 20 1900 – 2000 2
Sol:
Let the assume mean A 1650
17. The following table shows the marks scored by 140 students in an examination of a certain
paper:
Marks: 0- 10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50
Number of students: 20 24 40 36 20
Calculate the average marks by using all the three methods: direct method, assumed mean
deviation and shortcut method.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Direct method
Class Frequency
Mid-value fi ui
interval fi
0-10 5 20 100
10-20 15 20 350
20-30 25 40 1000
30-40 35 30 1260
40-50 45 20 900
N 140 8620
fi xi
Mean
N
3650
140
25 857
Assume mean method : Let the assumed mean 25
f u
Mean A i i
N
Class u; xi A fi ui
Mid-value f
interval
0-10 5 -20 20 -400
10-20 15 -10 24 -240
20-30 25=A 0 40 0
30-40 35 10 36 360
40-50 45 20 20 400
N 145 120
f u
Mean A i i
N
120
25
145
25 0 867
25 857
Step deviation method
Let the assumed mean A 25
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
N 140 fi ui 12
fi ui
Mean A h
N
120
25 10 25 0 857
140
25 857
18. The mean of the following frequency distribution is 62.8 and the sum of all the frequencies
is 50. Compute the missing frequencyf1 andf2.
Class: 0 - 20 20 - 40 40 - 60 60 - 80 80 - 100 100 – 120
Frequency: 5 f1 10 f2 7 8
Sol:
Class Frequency
Mid-value fi ui
interval fi
0-20 10 5 50
20-40 30 f1 20 30 f1
40-60 50 10=10 500
60-80 70 f2 70 f 2
80-100 90 7 630
100-120 110 8 880
N 50 f u
i i 30 f1 70 f 2 3060
Given
Sum of frequency 50
5 f1 50 f 2 7 8 50
f1 f 2 50 5 10 7 8
f1 f 2 20
3 f1 3 f 2 60 ...... 1 multiply it by '3'
And mean 62 8
f x
i i 628
N
30 f1 70 f 2 2060
62 8
50
30 f1 70 f 2 3140 2060
30 f1 70 f 2 1080
3 f1 7 f 2 108 ....... 2 Divide it by 10
Subtract equation (1) from equation (2)
3 f1 7 f 2 3 f1 3 f 2 108 60
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
4 f 2 48
f 2 12
Put value of f 2 in equation (1)
3 f1 3 12 60
3 f1 60 36 24
24
f1 8
3
f1 8 and f 2 12
19. The following distribution shows the daily pocket allowance given to the children of a
multistorey building. The average pocket allowance is Rs 18.00. Find out the missing
frequency.
Class interval: 11-13 13-15 15-17 17-19 19-21 21-23 23-25
Frequency: 7 6 9 13 - 5 4
Sol:
Given mean = 18, let missing frequency be v
Class Frequency
Mid-value fi ui
interval fi
11-13 12 7 84
13-15 14 6 88
15-17 16 9 144
17-19 18 13 234
19-21 20 x 20x
21-23 22 5 110
23-25 14 4 56
N 44 v 752+20x
fi xi
Mean
N
752 20 x
1
44 x
792 18 x 752 20 x
2 x 40
x 20
20. If the mean of the following distribution is 27, find the value of p.
Class: 0 - 10 10 - 20 20 - 30 30 - 40 40-50
Frequency: 8 p 12 13 10
Sol:
Class fi ui
Mid-value Frequency
interval
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
xi fi
0-10 5 8 40
10-20 15 P 152
20-30 25 12 300
30-40 35 13 455
40-50 45 16 450
N 43 P fi xi 1245 15P
Given
Mean 27
f x
i i 27
N
1245 15P
27
43 P
1245 15P 1245 161 27 P
27 P 15P 1245 1161
12 P 84
84
P 7
12
21. In a retail market, fruit vendors were selling mangoes kept in packing boxes. These boxes
contained varying number of mangoes. The following was the distribution of mangoes
according to the number of boxes.
Number of mangoes: 50 - 52 53 - 55 56 - 58 59 - 61 62 -64
Number of boxes: 15 110 135 115 25
Find the mean number of mangoes kept in a packing box. Which method of finding the
mean did you choose?
Sol:
Number of mangoes Number of boxes fi
50-52 15
53-55 110
56-58 135
59-61 115
62-64 25
We may observe that class internals are not continuous
1
There is a gap between two class intervals. So we have to add from lower class limit of
2
each interval and class mark (xi) may be obtained by using the relation
Upper class lim it lower class lim it
xi
2
Class size (h) of this data = 3
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now, taking 57 as assumed mean a we may calculate
di , ui , f i , ui as follows.
x; 57
Class interval fi xi di 4 57 ui fi ui
h
49 5 52 5 15 51 -6 -2 -30
52 5 56 5 110 54 -3 -1 -110
55 5 58 5 135 57 0 0 0
58 5 61 5 115 60 3 1 115
61 5 64 5 25 63 6 2 50
Total 400 -25
Now, we have
fi 400
fi ui 25
f u
Mean 4 i i h
f i
45
57 3
400
3
57
16
57 0 1875
57 1875
57 19
Clearly mean number of mangoes kept in packing box is 57 19
22. The table below shows the daily expenditure on food of 25 households in a locality
Daily expenditure (in Rs): 100 - 150 150 - 200 200 - 250 250 - 300 300 -350
Number of households: 4 5 12 2 2
Find the mean daily expenditure on food by a suitable method.
Sol:
We may calculate class mark xi for each interval by using the relation
Upper class lim it lower class lim it
x1
2
Class size 50
Now, taking 225 as assumed mean can we may calculated di , u i , fi , ui as follows
Daily expenditure xi 225
fi xi di xi 225 ui . fi ui
(in Rs) h
100-150 4 125 -100 -2 -8
150-200 5 175 -50 -1 -5
200-250 12 225 0 0 0
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
250-300 2 275 50 1 2
300-350 2 325 100 2 4
-7
Now we may observe that
fi 25
fi xi 7
f u
Mean x a i i h
f
7
225 50
25
225 14 211
So, mean daily expenditure on food is RS 211
23. To find out the concentration of SO2 in the air (in parts per million, i.e., ppm), the data was
collected for 30 localities in a certain city and is presented below:
Concentration of SO2 (in ppm) Frequency
0.00-0.04 4
0.04-0.08 9
0.08-0.12 9
0.12-0.16 2
0.16-0.20 4
0.20-0.24 2
Find the mean concentration of SO2 in the air.
Sol:
We may find a class marks for each interval by using the relation
Upper class lim it Lower class lim it
x
2
Class size of this data 0 04
Now, taking 0 14 assumed mean can we use may calculated d,u,fu as following
Class
Concentration SO2
Frequency interval ui xi 044 vi fi ui
(in ppm) xi
0 00 0 04 4 0 02 0 12 -3 -112
0 04 0 08 9 0 06 0 08 -2 -8
0 08 0 12 1 0 10 0 04 -1 -9
0 12 0 12 2 0 14 0 0 0
0 16 0 20 4 0 18 0 04 1 7
0 20 0 24 2 0 22 0 08 2 4
Total 30 -31
From the table we may observe that
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
fi 30
fi ui 31
f u
Mean x 9 i i h
f i
31
0 14 0 04
30
0 14 0 04133
0 099PPm
So, mean concentration of SO2 in the air is 0 099PPm
24. A class teacher has the following absentee record of 40 students of a class for the whole
term. Find the mean number of days a student was absent.
Number of days: 0-6 6 - 10 10 - 14 14 - 20 20 -28 28 - 38 38 - 40
Number of students: 11 10 7 4 4 3 1
Sol:
We may find class mark of each interval by using the relation
Upper class lim it Lower class lim it
xi
2
Now, taking 16 as assumed mean a we may
Calculate d and f i d i as follows
Number of Number of students
xi a xi fi fi di
days fi
06 11 3 -13 -143
6-10 10 8 -8 -280
10-14 7 12 -4 -28
14-20 7 16 0 0
20-28 8 24 8 32
28-36 3 33 17 51
30-40 1 39 23 23
Total 70 -145
Now we may observe that
fi 40
fi di 145
f d
Mean x a i i
f i
145
16 16 3 623
40
12 38
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
So, mean number of days is 12, 38 days for which student was absent
25. The following table gives the literacy rate (in percentage) of 35 cities. Find the mean
literacy rate.
Literacy rate (in %): 45 - 55 55 - 65 65 - 75 75 - 85 85 -95
Number of cities: 3 10 11 8 3
Sol:
We may find class marks by using the relation
Upper class lim it Lower class lim it
xi
2
Class size h for this data = 10
Now taking 70 as assumed mean a wrong
Calculate d i , ui and f i , ui as follows
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise – 7.4
1. Following are the lives in hours of 15 pieces of the components of aircraft engine. Find the
median:
715, 724, 725, 710, 729, 745, 694, 699, 696, 712, 734, 728, 716, 705, 719.
Sol:
Lives in hours of is pieces are
= 715, 724, 725, 710, 729, 745, 694, 699, 696, 712, 734, 728, 719, 705, 705, 719.
Arrange the above data in a sending order
694, 696, 699, 705, 710, 712, 715, 716, 719, 721, 725, 728, 729, 734, 745
N 15 odd
N 1
th
Median term
2
15 1
th
term
2
8th term
716
2. The following is the distribution of height of students of a certain class in a certain city:
Height (in cm): 160 - 162 163 - 165 166 - 168 169 - 171 172 -174
No. of students: 15 118 142 127 18
Find the median height.
Sol:
Class interval Class interval Class interval Cumulative
(inclusive) (inclusive) Frequency frequency
160-162 159.2 162 5 15 15
163-164 162 5 165 5 118 133 (F)
166-168 165 5 168 5 142(f) 275
169-171 168 5 168 5 127 402
172 174 171 5 174 5 18 420
N 420
We have
N 420
N 420
210
2 2
N
The cumulative frequency just greater than is 275 then 165 5 168 5 is the median
2
class such, that
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
l 165 5, f 142, F 133 and h 168 5 105 5 3
N
F
Mean l 2 h
f
10 2
165 5 10
142
17 4
165 7
142
65 5 1 63
168 13
3. Following is the distribution of I.Q. of loo students. Find the median I.Q.
I.Q.: 55-64 65-74 75-84 85-94 95-104 105-114 115-124 125-134 135-144
No of Students: 1 2 9 22 33 22 8 2 1
Sol:
Class interval Class interval Cumulative
Frequency
(inclusive) (exclusive) frequency
55-64 54 5 64 5 1 1
65-74 64 5 74 5 2 3
75-84 74 5 84 5 9 12
85-94 84 5 94 5 22 34(f)
95-104 94 5 104 5 33(f) 37
105-114 104 5 114 5 22 89
115-124 114 5 124 5 8 97
125-134 124 5 134 5 2 99
135-144 134 5 1343 1 100
N 100
We have
N 100
N 100
50
2 2
N
The cumulative frequency just greater than is 67 then the median class is
2
94 5 104 5 94 5 10
N
F
Mean l 2 h
f
50 34
94 5 10
33
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
16 10
94 5 94 5 4 88 99 35
33
4. Calculate the median from the following data:
Rent (in Rs.): 15-25 25-35 35-45 45-55 55-65 65-75 75-85 85-95
No. of Houses: 8 10 15 25 40 20 15 7
Sol:
Cumulative
Class interval Frequency
frequency
15-25 8 8
25-35 10 18
35-45 15 33(f)
45-55 25 58(f)
55-65 40(f) 28
65-75 20 38
75-85 15 183
85-95 9 140
N 110
We have N 140
N 140
3
2 2
The cumulative frequency just greater than is 98 then media class is 55-65 such that
l 55, f 40, f 58, h 65 55 10
N
f
Median l 2 h
f
70 78
55 40 10
1
12 10
55
40
55 3
58
Median = 58
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
10 15 0-10 15 15
20 35 10-20 20 35
30 60 20-30 25 60
40 84 30-40 24 84
50 96 40-50 12 96(f)
60 127 50-60 37(f) 127
70 198 60-70 71 198
80 250 70-8 52 250
N 250
We have N 250
N 250
12
2 2
N
The cumulative frequency just greater than is 127 then median class is 50-60 such that
2
l 50, f 31, F 96, h 60 50 10
N
F
Median L 2 h
f
125 96
50 10
31
29 10
50
31
155 290
31
445
31
59 35
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
7. Calculate the missing frequency from the following distribution, it being given that the
median of the distribution is 24.
Age in years: 0 - 10 10 - 20 20 - 30 30 - 40 40-50
No. of persons: 5 25 ? 18 7
Sol:
Class interval Frequency Cumulative frequency
0-10 5 5
10-20 25 30(F)
20-30 x(f) 30 + x
30-40 18 48 + x
40-50 7 55 + x
N 170
Given
Median = 24
Then median class 20 30
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
l 20, h 30 20, F 30
N
f
Median l 2 h
f
55 x
30
24 20 2 30
x
55 x
4 x 20 30 10
2
4 x 275 5v 300
4 x 5 x 25
x 25
x 25
Missing frequency 25
8. Find the missing frequencies and the median for the following distribution if the mean is
1.46.
No. of accidents: 0 1 2 3 4 5 Total
Frequency (No. of days): 46 ? ? 25 10 5 200
Sol:
No. of
No. of days (f) fx
accidents (x)
0 46 0
1 x x
2 y 2y
3 2s 75
4 10 40
5 5 25
N 200 fi xi x 2 y 140
Given, N 200
46 x y 25 10 5 5 2n
x y 200 46 25 10 0
x y 114 .... i
And mean 1 46
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
fx
1.46
N
x 2 y 140
1 46
200
x 2 y 140 292
x 2 y 292 40
x 2 y 152 ........ 2
Subtract equation (1) from equation (2)
x 2 y x y 152 114
y 38
Put the value of y in (1), we have x 114 38 76
No. of Cumulative
No. of days
accidents frequency
0 46 46
1 76 122
2 38 160
3 25 185
4 10 195
5 5 200
N 200
We have
N 200
N 200
100
2 2
N
The cumulative frequency just more than is 122 then the median is 1.
2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
20-30 30 42
30-40 x 42 x F
40-50 65(f) 1107 x
50-60 y 107 x y
60-70 25 132x x y
70-80 18 150 x y
N 200
Given median 46
Then, median as 40 50
l 40, h 50 40 10, f 65, F 42 x
N
F
median l 2 h
f
115 42 x
46 40 10
65
6 65
73 x
10
39 73 x
x 73 39
x 34
Given N 230
12 30 34 65 y 25 18 230
184 y 230
y 230 184 46
(ii)
Class interval Mid value Frequency fx
10-20 15 12 180
20-30 25 30 750
30-40 35 34 1190
40-50 45 65 2925
50-60 55 46 2530
60-70 65 25 1625
70-80 75 18 1650
N 270 fx 10550
fx
Mean
N
10550
250
4 87
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
10. The following table gives the frequency distribution of married women by age at marriage:
Age (in years) Frequency Age (in years) Frequency
15-19 53 40-44 9
20-24 140 45-49 5
25-29 98 50-54 3
30-34 32 55-59 3
35-39 12 60 and above 2
Calculate the median and interpret the results
Sol:
Class interval Class interval Cumulative
Frequency
(exclusive) (inclusive) frequency
15-19 14 5 19 5 53 53(F)
20-24 19 5 24 5 140(f) 193
25-29 24 5 29 5 98 291
30-34 29 5 34 5 32 393
35-39 34 5 39 5 12 335
40-44 39 5 44 5 9 344
45-49 44 5 49 5 5 349
50-54 49 5 54 5 3 352
54-59 554 5 59 5 3 355
60 and above 59 5 and above 2 357
N 357
N 357
N 35
178 5
2 2
N
The cumulative frequency just greater than is 193, then the median class is 19.5-24.5
2
such that
l 19 5, f 140. f 53, h 24 5 19 5 5
N
F
Median l 2 h
f
178 5 53
Median 19 5 5 23 98
140
Nearly half the a women were married between ages 15 and 25.
11. If the median of the following frequency distribution is 28.5 find the missing frequencies:
Class interval: 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 Total
Frequency: 5 f1 20 15 f2 5 60
Sol:
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Cumulative
Class interval Frequency
frequency
0-10 5 5
10-20 f1 5 f1 F
20-30 20 F 25 F1
30-40 15 40 f1
40-50 f2 40 f1 f 2
50-60 5 45 f1 f 2
N 60
Given
Median 28 5
Then, median class 20 30
l 20, f 20, F 5 fx, h 30 20 10
N
F
Median l 2 h
f
30 5 f1
28 5 201 10
20
30 5 f1
28 5 20 10
20
25 f1
85
2
f1 25 17
f1 8
Given sum of frequency = 60
5 f1 20 15 f 2 5 60
5 8 20 15 f 2 5 60
f2 7
f1 8; f 2 7
12. The median of the following data is 525. Find the missing frequency, if it is given that there
are 100 observations in the data:
Class interval Frequency Class interval Frequency
0-100 2 500-600 20
100-200 5 600-700 f2
200-300 f1 700-800 9
300-400 12 800-900 7
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
400-500 17 900-1000 4
Sol:
0-100 2 2
100-200 5 7
200-300 f1 7 f1
300-400 12 19 f1
400-500 17 36 f1 F
500-600 20(f) 56 f1
600-700 f2 56 f1 f 2
700-800 9 65 f1 f 2
800-900 7 75 f1 f 2
900-1000 4 76 f1 f 2
N 100
Given media 525
Then media class 500 600
l 500, f 20, f 36 f1 , h 600 500 100
N
F
Median l 2 h
f
50 36 f1
525 500 100
20
50 36 f1
525 500 100
20
25 14 f1 5
5 f1 45 f1 9
Given sum of frequencies 100
2 5 f1 12 17 20 f 2 9 7 4 100
2 5 9 12 17 20 f 2 9 17 4 100
86 f 2 100 f 2 15
f1 9; f 2 15
13. If the median of the following data is 32.5, find the missing frequencies.
Class interval: 0- 10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 Total
Frequency: f1 5 9 12 f2 3 2 40
Sol:
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
14. A survey regarding the height (in cm) of 51 girls of X of a school was conducted and the
following data was obtained:
(i) Marks No. of students (ii) Marks No. of students
Less than 10 0 More than 150 0
Less than 30 10 More than 140 12
Less than 50 25 More than 130 27
Less than 70 43 More than 120 60
Less than 90 65 More than 110 105
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Less than 110 87 More than 100 124
Less than 130 96 Morethan90 141
Less than 150 100 More than 80 150
Sol:
(i)
Marks No. of students Class internal Frequency Cumulative frequency
Less than 10 0 0-10 0 0
Less than 30 10 10-30 10 10
Less than 50 25 30-50 15 25
Less than 70 43 50-70 18 43(F)
Less than 90 65 70-090 22(f) 65
Less than 110 87 90-110 22 87
Less than 130 96 110-130 9 96
Less than 150 100 130-150 8 100
N 100
We have N 100
N 100
60
2 2
N
The commutative frequencies just greater than is 65 then median class is 70-90 such
2
that l 90, f 22, f 43, h 90 70 20
N
F
Median l 2 h
f
50 43
70 20
22
7 20
70
22
50 43
70 20
22
7 20
70
22
70 6 36
76 36
(ii)
Marks No. of students Class internal Frequency Cumulative frequency
Less than 80 150 80-90 9 9
Less than 90 141 90-100 17 26
Less than 100 124 100-110 19 45(F)
Less than 110 105 110-120 45(f) 90
Less than 120 60 120-130 33 123
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Less than 130 27 130-140 45 138
Less than 140 12 150-160 0 150
Less than 150 0 150-160 0 150
N 150
We have N 150
N 150
7
2 2
N
The commutative frequencies just greater than is 90 then median class is 110-120 such
2
that l 110, f 45, F 45, h 120 110 10
N
F
Median l 2 h
f
75 45
110 10
45
30 10
110
45
110 6 67
116 67.
15. A survey regarding the height (in cm) of 51 girls of class X of a school was conducted and
the following data was obtained:
Height in cm Number of Girls
Less than 140 4
Less than 145 11
Less than 150 29
Less than 155 40
Less than 160 46
Less than l65 51
Find the median height.
Sol:
To calculate the median height, we need to find the class intervals and their corresponding
frequencies
The given distribution being of thee less than type 140, 145, 150,…..,165 give the upper
limits of the corresponding class intervals. So, the classes should be below 140, 145,
150,….., 160, 165 observe that from the given distribution, we find that there are 4-girls
with height less than 140 is 4. Now there are 4 girls with heights less than 140. Therefore,
the number of girls with height in the interval 140, 145 is 11- 4=7, similarly. The
frequencies of 145 150 is 29-11=18, for 150-155 it is 40-29=11, and so on so our
frequencies distribution becomes.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
16. A life insurance agent found the following data for distribution of ages of 100 policy
holders. Calculate the median age, if policies are only given to persons having age 18 years
onwards but less than 60 years.
Age in years Number of policy holders
Below 20 2
Below 25 6
Below 30 24
Below 35 45
Below 40 78
Below 45 89
Below 50 92
Below 55 98
Below 60 100
Sol:
Here class width is not same. There is no need to adjust the frequencies according to class
intervals. Now given frequencies table is of less than type represented with upper class
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
limits. As policies were given only to persons having age 18 years onwards but less than 60
years we can definite class intervals with their respective cumulative frequencies as below
Age (in years) No of policy planers Cumulative frequency (cr)
18-20 2 2
20-25 6-2=4 5
25-30 24-6=18 24
30-35 45-24=21 45
35-40 78-45=33 78
40-45 89-78=11 89
45-50 92-89=3 92
50-55 98-92=6 92
55-60 100-98=2 100
Total (n)
Now from the table we may observe that n=100 cumulative frequencies (F) just greater
n 100
than i.e., 50 is 78 belonging to interval 35-40
2 2
So median class = 35-40
Lower limit (1) o median class = 35
Class size (h) = 5
Frequencies (f) of median class = 33
Cumulative frequency (f) off class preceding median class = 45
n
cf
Median h
2
f
50 15
35 x
33
2
35
33
35 76
So, median age is 35 76 years
17. The lengths of 40 leaves of a plant are measured correct to the nearest millimeter, and the
data obtained is represented in the following table:
Length (in mm): 118-126 127-135 136-144 145-153 154-162 163-171 172-180
No. of leaves: 3 5 9 12 5 4 2
Find the mean length of life.
Sol:
The given data is not having continuous class intervals is 1. So, we have to add and subtract
1
0 5 o upper class limits and lower class limits
2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now continuous class intervals with respective cumulative frequencies can be presented as
below
Length (in mm) Number of leaves f i Cumulative frequencies
117 5 126 5 3 3
126 5 135 5 5 8 35
13 5 5 144 5 9 17 8 9
14 5 53 5 12 29 17 12
153 5 162 5 5 37 29 5
162 5 171 5 4 34 4 38
171 5 180 5 2 38 2 40
From the table we may observe that cumulative frequencies just greater than
n 40
i.e., 20 is 29 belonging class interval 144 5 153 5
2 2
Median class 144 5 153 5
Lower limit (L) of median class 144 5
Class size h 9
Frequencies (f) of median class = 12
Cumulative frequencies (f) of class preceding median class = 17
n
cf
Median l h
2
f
20 27
144 5 h
112
9
144 5
4
146 75
So, median length is 146 75 mm
18. The following table gives the distribution of the life time of 400 neon lamps:
Lite time: (in hours) Number of lamps1500-2000 14
2000-2500 56
2500-3000 60
3000-3500 86
3500-4000 74
4000-4500 62
4500-5000 48
Find the median life.
Sol:
We can find cumulative frequencies with their respective class intervals as below
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
19. The distribution below gives the weight of 30 students in a class. Find the median weight of
students:
Weight (in kg): 40-45 45-50 50-55 55-60 60-65 65-70 70-75
No. of students: 2 3 8 6 6 3 2
Sol:
We may find cumulative frequencies with their respective class internals as below
Weight in (kg) 40-45 45-50 50-55 55-60 60-65 65-70 70-75
Number of
2 3 8 6 6 3 2
students (f)
cf 2 5 13 19 25 28 30
n 30
Cumulative frequencies just great class interval er than i.e., 15 is 19, belonging to
2 2
class interval 55-60
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Median class 55 60
Lower limit (1) of media class = 55
Frequency of median class = 6
Cumulative frequencies y(f) of median class = 13
Class 55 h 5
n cf
Median 1 h
2 f
15 13
55 5
6
10
55
6
56 666
So, median weight is 56 67kg
Exercise – 7.5
2. The shirt sizes worn by a group of 200 persons, who bought the shirt from a store, are as
follows:
Shirt size: 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
Number of persons: 15 25 39 41 36 17 15 12
Find the model shirt size worn by the group.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Shirt size 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
Frequency (f) 15 25 39 41 36 17 15 12
Model shirt size = 40 because it occurs maximum number of times
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
= 22.14
(iii)
Class interval 25-30 30-35 35-40 40-45 45-50 50-55
No. of 25 34 50 42 38 14
persons
Here the maximum frequency is 28 then the corresponding class 40 – 50 is the model class
L = 35, h = 40 – 35 = 5, f = 50, f1 = 34, f2 = 42
1 𝑓−𝑓
Mode = 𝐿 + 2𝑓−𝑓 −𝑓 ×ℎ
1 2
50−34
= 35 + 2(50)−34−42 × 5
16×5
= 35 +
24
= 35 + 3.33
= 38.33
4. Compare the modal ages of two groups of students appearing for an entrance test:
Age (in years): 16-18 18-20 20-22 22-24 24-26
Group A: 50 78 46 28 23
Group B: 54 89 40 25 17
Sol:
Age in years 16 – 18 18 – 20 20 – 22 22 – 24 24 – 26
Group A 50 78 46 28 23
Group B 54 89 40 25 17
For Group A
Here the maximum frequency is 78, then the corresponding class 18 – 20 is model class
L = 18, h = 20 – 18 = 2, f = 78, f1 = 50, f2 = 46
1 𝑓−𝑓
Mode = 𝐿 + 2𝑓−𝑓 −𝑓 ×ℎ
1 2
78−54
= 18 + 156−50−46 × 2
56
= 18 + 60 = 18 + 0.93
= 18.93 years
For group B
Here the maximum frequency is 89, then the corresponding class 18 – 20 is model class
L = 18, h = 18 +20 = 2, f = 89, f1 = 54, f2 = 40
1 𝑓−𝑓
Mode = 𝐿 + 2𝑓−𝑓 −𝑓 ×ℎ
1 2
78−54
= 18 + 156−54−40 × 5
70
= 18 + 84
= 18 + 0.83
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
= 18.83
Hence the mode of age for the group A is higher than group B
5. The marks in science of 80 students of class X are given below: Find the mode of the
marks obtained by the students in science.
Marks: 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80 80-90 90-100
Frequency: 3 5 16 12 13 20 5 4 1 1
Sol:
Marks 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80 80-90 90-100
Frequen 3 5 16 12 13 20 5 4 1 1
cy
Here the maximum frequency is 20, then the corresponding class 50 – 60 is model class
L = 50, h = 60 – 50 = 10, f = 20, f1 = 13, f2 = 5
1 𝑓−𝑓
Mode = 𝐿 + 2𝑓−𝑓 −𝑓 ×ℎ
1 2
20−13
= 50 + 40−13−5 × 10
7×10
= 50 + 22
= 50 +3.18
= 53.18
6. The following is the distribution of height of students of a certain class in a certain city:
Height (in cm): 160-162 163-165 166-168 169-171 172-174
No. of students: 15 118 142 127 18
Find the average height of maximum number of students.
Sol:
Height(exclusive) 160-162 163-165 166-168 169-171 172-174
Height(inclusive) 159.5-162.5 162.5-165.5 165.5-168.5 168.5-171-.5 171.5-174.5
No. of students 15 118 142 127 18
Here the maximum frequency is 142, then the corresponding class 165.5 – 168.5 is modal
class
L = 165.5, h = 168.5 – 165.5 = 3, f = 142, f1 = 118, f2 = 127
𝑓−𝑓1
Mode = 𝐿 + ×ℎ
2𝑓−𝑓1 −𝑓2
142−118
= 165.5 + 2×142−118−127 × 3
24×3
= 165.5 + 39
= 165.5 + 1.85
= 167.35𝑐𝑚
7. The following table shows the ages of the patients admitted in a hospital during a year:
Age (in years): 5-15 15-25 25-35 35-45 45-55 55-65
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
No. of students: 6 11 21 23 14 5
Find the mode and the mean of the data given above. Compare and interpret the two
measures of central tendency.
Sol:
We may observe compute class marks (xi) as per the relation
𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑙𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑡+𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑙𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑡
𝑥𝑖 = 2
𝑁𝑜𝑤 𝑡𝑎𝑘𝑖𝑛𝑔 30 𝑎𝑠 𝑎𝑠𝑠𝑢𝑚𝑒𝑑 𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛 (𝑎)𝑤𝑒 𝑚𝑎𝑦 𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑓1 𝑑1 𝑎𝑠 𝑓𝑜𝑙𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑠
Age (in yrs) No. of patients Class Mark xi 𝑑𝑖 = 𝑥𝑖 − 30 𝑓𝑖 𝑑𝑖
(fi)
5-15 6 10 -20 -120
15-25 11 20 -10 -110
25-35 21 30 0 0
35-45 23 40 10 230
45-55 14 50 20 280
55-65 5 60 60 150
Total 80 430
From the table we may observe that ∑ 𝑓𝑖 = 80
∑ 𝑓𝑖 𝑑𝑖 = 430
∑ 𝑓𝑖 𝑑𝑖
Mean = 𝑎 + ∑ 𝑓𝑖
30
= 30 + (80)
= 30 + 5.375
= 35.38
Clearly mean of this data is 35.38. It represents that on an average the age of patient
admitted to hospital was 35.58 years. As we may observe that maximum class frequency 23
belonging to class interval 35 – 45
So, modal class = 35 – 45
Lower limit (L) of modal class = 35
Frequency (f1) of modal class = 23
Class size (h) = 10
Frequency (f0) of class preceding the modal = 21
Frequency (f2) of class succeeding the modal = 14
0 𝑓−𝑓
Now mode = L + (2𝑓−𝑓 −𝑓 )ℎ
0 2
23−21
= 35 + [2(23)−21−14] × 6
20
= 35 + 11
= 35.81
= 36.8
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
8. The following data gives the information on the observed lifetimes (in hours) of 225
electrical components:
Lifetimes (in hours): 0-20 20-40 40-60 60-80 80-100 100-120
No. of components: 10 35 52 61 38 29
Determine the modal lifetimes of the components.
Sol:
From data as given above we may observe that maximum class frequency 61 belonging to
class interval 60 – 80.
So, modal class 60 – 80
L = 60, h = 20, f0 = 52, f1 = 61, f2 = 38
𝑓1 −𝑓0
Mode = 𝐿 + ( )ℎ
2𝑓−𝑓0 −𝑓2
61−52
= 60 + (2(61)−52−37) 20
9×20 90
= 60 + = 60 + 16 = 60 + 5.625
32
= 65.625
9. The following data gives the distribution of total monthly houshold expenditure of 200
families of a village. Find the modal monthly expenditure of the families. Also, find the
mean monthly expenditure:
Expenditure Frequency Expenditure Frequency
(in Rs.) (in Rs.)
1000-1500 24 3000-3500 30
1500-2000 40 3500-4000 22
2000-2500 33 4000-4500 16
2500-3000 28 4500-5000 7
Sol:
We may observe that the given data the maximum class frequency is 40 belonging to 1500
– 2000 interval. So modal class = 1500 – 2000
L.L (L) = 1500, f. of M.C (𝑓1 ) = 40
Frequency of class preceeding modal class 𝑓0 = 24
Frequency of class succeeding modal class 𝑓2 = 33
Class size (h) = 50
1 0 𝑓 −𝑓
Mode = L +(2𝑓−𝑓 )ℎ
−𝑓 0 2
40−24
= 1500 + [2(40)−24−33] × 500
16
= 1500 + [80−67 × 500]
8000
= 1500 + 23
= 1500 + 347.826
1847.826 = 1847.83
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
So modal class monthly expenditure was Rs. 1847.83
Now we may find class mark as
𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑙𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑡+𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑙𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑡
Class mark = 2
Class size (h) of given data = 500
Now taking 2750 as assumed mean(a) we may calculate d, 4 and f, 4 as follows.
Expenditure No. of 𝑥𝑖 𝑑𝑖 = 𝑥𝑖 − 4i 𝑓𝑖 4𝑖
In Rs. families 𝑓𝑖 2𝜋0
1000-1500 24 1250 -1500 -3 -72
1500-2000 40 1750 -1000 -2 -80
2000-2500 33 2250 -500 -1 -33
2500-3000 28 2750 0 0 0
3000-3500 30 3250 500 1 30
3500-4000 22 3750 1000 2 44
4000-4500 16 4250 1500 3 48
4500-5000 7 4750 2000 4 28
Total 200 -35
We may observe them the given data the maximum class frequency is 10 belonging to class
interval 30 – 35
So modal class 30 – 35
Class size (h) = 5
Lower limit (L) of modal class = 30
Frequency (𝑓1 ) of modal class 10
Frequency (𝑓0 ) of class preceeding modal class = 9
Frequency (𝑓0 ) of class succeeding modal class = 3
1 0 𝑓 −𝑓
Mode = L +(2𝑓−𝑓 )ℎ
−𝑓 0 2
10−9
= 30 + (30−9−3) 5
5
= 30 + 8
= 30.625
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Mode = 30.6
10. The following distribution gives the state-wise teacher-student ratio in higher secondary
schools of India. Find the mode and mean of this data. Interpret, the two measures:
Number of students Number of states / Number of students Number of states /
per teacher U.T. per teacher U.T.
15-20 3 35-40 3
20-25 8 40-45 0
25-30 9 45-50 0
30-35 10 50-55 2
Sol:
No. of No. of states 𝑥𝑖 𝑑𝑖 = 𝑥𝑖 − 4i 𝑓𝑖 4𝑖
Students / / U.T. 328
teacher (𝑓𝑖 )
15 – 20 3 17.5 -15 -3 -9
20 – 25 8 22.5 -10 -2 -16
25 – 30 9 27.5 -5 -1 -9
30 – 35 10 32.5 0 0 0
35 – 40 3 37.5 5 1 3
40 – 45 0 42.5 10 2 0
45 – 50 0 47.5 15 3 0
50 – 55 2 52.5 25 4 8
Total 35 -23
∑ 𝑓𝑖 4𝑖
Now mean (𝑥̅ ) = a + ( ∑ 𝑓𝑖
)ℎ
−23
= 32.5 + ( 35 × 5)
23
= 32.5 − 7
= 32.5 – 3.28
= 29.22
So mean of data is 29.2
It represents that on an average teacher.
Student ratio was 29.2
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
11. The given distribution shows the number of runs scored by some top batsmen of the world
in one-day international cricket matches.
Runs scored No. of batsman Runs scored No. of batsman
3000-4000 4 7000-8000 6
4000-5000 18 8000-9000 3
5000-6000 9 9000-10000 1
6000-7000 7 10000-11000 1
Find the mode of the data.
Sol:
From the given data we may observe that maximum class frequently is 18 belonging to
class interval 4000 – 5000
So modal class 4000 – 5000
Lower limit (1) of model class = 4000
Frequently f1 of class preceding modal class= 4
Frequently f 2 of class succeeding modal class = 9
Frequently of modal case fi 18
Class size = 1000
1 fn
Now mode 1 h
2 f0 f2
18 4
4000 1000
2 18 4 9
14000
4000 4608 695
23
So, mode of given data is 4608 7 Runs
12. A student noted the number of cars passing through a spot on a road for loo periods each of
3 minutes and summarized it in the table given below. Find the mode of the data:
Sol:
From the given data we may observe that maximum class internal frequency is 200
belonging to modal class 40 50
l 40, f1 20, f 0 12, f 2 11, h 10
f f0
Mode = 1 h
2 f f 0 f 2
20 12
40 10
40 12 11
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
180
40 40 4 7 44 7
17
13. The following frequency distribution gives the monthly consumption of electricity of 68
consumers of a locality. Find the median, mean and mode of the data and compare them.
Monthly consumption - 65-85 85-105 105-125 125-145 145-165 165-185 185-205
(in units)
No. of consumers: 4 5 13 20 14 8 4
Sol:
Class Mid value
Frequency f fx Cumulative frequency
interval x
65-75 75 4 300 4
85-105 95 5 475 9
105-125 115 13 1495 22
125-145 135 20 2700 42
145-165 155 17 2170 56
165-185 175 8 1400 64
185-205 195 4 78 68
Total N 68 fx 9320
fx 9320
Mean 137 08
N 68
We have N 68
N 68
34
2 2
N
Thee cumulative frequency just is 42 then the median mass 125 145 such that
2
l 125, f 20 F 22, h 20
N
f
34 22
Median l 2 h 125 20 137
f 20
Here the maximum frequently is 20, then the corresponding class 125-1145 is the modal
class l 125, h 20 f 20, f1 13, f 2 14
f f1 20 13
Mode l h 125 20
2 f f1 f 2 40 13 14
7 20
125 135 77
13
14. 100 surnames were randomly picked up from a local telephone directly and the frequency
distribution of the number of letters in the English alphabets in the surnames was obtained
as follows:
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Number of letters: l-4 4-7 7-10 10-13 13-16 16-19
Number surnames: 6 30 40 16 4 4
Determine the median number of letters in the surnames. Find the mean number of letters
in the surnames. Also, find the modal size of the surnames.
Sol:
Class Mid value
Frequency f fx Cumulative frequency
interval x
1-4 25 6 15 6
4-7 55 30 165 36
7-10 85 40 340 76
10-13 11 5 16 185 92
13-16 14 5 4 58 96
16-19 17 5 4 70 100
N 100 fx 832
fx 832
Mean 8 32
N 100
N 100 N 50
N
The cumulative frequency is 76, median class 7 10
2
l 7, h 3, f 40, f 36.
N
F
50 36
Median 1 2 h 7 3
f 40
14 3
7 8 05
40
Here the maximum frequency is 40, then the corresponding class 7-10 is thee modal class
l 7, h 10 7 3, f 40, f1 30, f 2 36
f f1 40 30
Mode 1 h 7 3
28 f1 f 2 2 40 30 6
10 3
7 7 88
34
15. Find the mean, median and mode of the following data:
Classes: 0-20 20-40 40-60 60-80 80-100 100-120 120-140
Frequency: 6 8 10 12 6 5 3
Sol:
Class Mid value
Frequency f fx Cumulative frequency
interval x
0-20 10 6 60 6
20-30 30 8 240 17
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
40-60 50 10 500 24
60-080 70 12 840 36
80-100 90 6 540 42
100-120 110 5 550 47
120-140 130 3 390 50
N 60 fx 3120
fx 320
Mean 62 4
N 50
We have N 60
1 50
Then, 25
2 2
N
c, is 36 then median class 60-80 such that
2
l 60, h 20, f 12, F 24
N
F
25 24
Median l 2 h 60 20 60 1 67
f 12
Modal class l 60, h 20, f 12, f 10, f 2 6
f f1 12 10
Mode l h 60 20
2 f f1 f 2 24 10 6
40
60 65
8
Mode 65
16. Find the mean, median and mode of the following data:
Classes: 0-50 50-100 100-150 150-200 200-250 250-300 300-350
Frequency: 2 3 5 6 5 3 1
Sol:
Class Mid value
Frequency f fx Cumulative frequency
interval x
0-50 25 2 50 2
50-100 75 3 225 5
100-150 125 5 625 10
150-200 175 6 1050 16
200-250 225 5 1127 21
250-300 275 3 825 24
300-350 325 1 325 25
N 25 fx 4225
fx 4225
Mean 169
25 25
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
N
We have N 25 then 12 5
2
N
c. f 15 16, median class 150 200 such that
2
l 150, h 4200 150 50, f 6, F 10
N
F
12 5 10
Median l 2 h 150 50
f 6
150 20 83 170 83
Here the maximum frequency is 6 then the corresponding class 150-200 is the modal class
l 150, h 200 150 50, f 6, f1 5, f 2 5
F t1 65
Mode t h 150 50
2 f f1 f 2 12 5 5
50
150 175.
2
17. The following table gives the daily income of 50 workers of a factory:
Daily income (in Rs) 100 - 120 120 - 140 140 - 160 160 -180 180 – 200
Number of workers: 12 14 8 6 10
Find the mean, mode and median of the above data.
Sol:
Class Mid value
Frequency f fx Cumulative frequency
interval x
100-200 110 12 1320 12
120-140 130 14 1820 26
140-160 150 8 1200 34
160-180 170 6 1000 40
180-200 190 10 1900 50
N 50 fx 7260
fx 7250
Mean
N 50
145 2
We have
N 50
N 50
Then 25
2 2
N
The cumulative frequency is is 26 corresponding class median class 120-140 such that
2
l 120, h 140 120 20, f 14, F 12
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
N
F
Median l 2 h
f
25 12
120 20
14
120 18 57
138 57
Here the maximum frequency is 14, then the corresponding class 120-140 is thee modal
class
l 120, h 140 120 20, f 14, f1 12, f 2 8
f f1
Mode 1 h
2 f f1 f 2
14 12
120 25
2 4 12 8
2 25
120
5
120 5
125
Mode 125
Exercise – 7.6
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now, we mark the upper class limits along x-axis and cumulative frequency along y-axis.
Thus we plot the point (1, 4), (2, 3) (3, 35), (4, 63), (5, 87), (6, 99), (7, 107), (8, 113), (9,
118), (10, 120).
Cumulative frequency
2. The marks scored by 750 students in an examination are given in the form of a frequency
distribution table:
Marks No. of students Marks No. of students
600 – 640 16 760 – 800 172
640 – 680 45 800 – 840 59
680 – 720 156 840 – 800 18
720 – 760 284
Prepare a cumulative frequency table by less than method and draw an ogive.
Sol:
We first prepare the cumulative frequency table by less than method as given below
Marks No. of students Marks less than Cumulative frequency
600 – 640 16 640 16
640 – 680 45 680 61
680 – 720 156 720 217
720 – 760 284 760 501
760 – 800 172 800 693
800 – 840 59 840 732
840 – 880 18 880 750
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now, we mark the upper class limits along x-axis and cumulative frequency along y-axis
on a suitable gear.
Thus, we plot the points (640, 16) (680, 61), (720, 217), (760, 501), (600, 673), (840, 732)
and (880, 750)
Cumulative frequency
Now, we mark the upper class limits along x-axis and cumulative frequency along y-axis.
Thus we plot the points (4, 5, 2), (9, 5, 8), (14, 5, 08), (19, 5, 23) and (24, 5, 26)
Cumulative frequency
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
4. The monthly profits (in Rs.) of 100 shops are distributed as follows:
Profits per shop: 0 - 50 50 - 100 100 - 150 150 - 200 200 - 250 250 – 300
No. of shops: 12 18 27 20 17 6
Draw the frequency polygon for it.
Sol:
We have,
Profit per shop Mid value No. of shops
Less than 0 0 0
0 – 50 25 12
50 – 100 75 18
100 – 150 125 27
150 – 200 175 20
200 – 250 225 17
250 – 300 275 6
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Above 300 300 0
Now, we mark the upper class limits along x-axis and cumulative frequency along y-axis.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Thus we plot the points (7, 26) (14, 57) (21, 92) (28, 134) (35, 216) (42, 287) (49, 341) (56,
360)
More than method: we prepare the cf table by more than method as given below:
Height Frequency Height more than Cumulative frequency
0–7 26 0 360
7 – 14 31 7 334
14 – 21 42 21 268
21 – 28 82 28 226
28 – 35 71 35 144
35 – 42 54 42 73
49 – 56 19 49 19
6. The annual profits earned by 30 shops of a shopping complex in a locality give rise to the
following distribution:
Profit (in lakhs in Rs) Number of shops (frequency)
More than or equal to 5 30
More than or equal to 10 28
More than or equal to 15 16
More than or equal to 20 14
More than or equal to 25 10
More than or equal to 30 7
More than or equal to 35 3
Draw both ogives for the above data and hence obtain the median.
Sol:
More than method
Profit (in lakhs in Rs) No. of shops (frequency)
≥5 30
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
≥ 10 28
≥ 15 16
≥ 20 14
≥ 25 10
≥ 30 7
≥ 35 3
Now, we mark the upper class limits along x-axis and cumulative frequency along y-axis.
Thus we plot the points. (10, 2) (15, 14) (20, 16) (25, 20) (30, 23) (35, 27) (40, 30)
We find that the two types of curves intersect of point P from point L it is drawn on x-axis.
The value of a profit corresponding to M is 17.5 lakh, Hence median is 17.5 Lakh
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Daily income (in Rs): 100 - 120 120 - 140 140 - 160 160 - 180 180 – 200
Number of workers: 12 14 8 6 10
Convert the above distribution to a less than type cumula five frequency distribution and
draw its ogive.
Sol:
We first prepare the cumulative frequency table by less than method as given below.
Daily income (in Rs.) Cumulative frequency
< 120 12
< 140 26
< 160 34
< 180 40
< 200 50
8. The following table gives production yield per hectare of wheat of 100 farms of a village:
Production yield 50 - 55 55 - 60 60 -65 65 - 70 70 - 75 75 - 80 in kg per
hectare:
Number of farms: 2 8 12 24 38 16
Draw ‘less than’ ogive and ‘more than’ ogive.
Sol:
Less than method:
Cumulative frequency table by less than method.
Production yield Number of farms Production yield Cumulative
(integer ) more than frequency
50 – 55 2 50 100
55 – 60 8 55 98
60 – 65 12 60 90
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
65 – 70 24 65 78
70 – 75 38 70 54
75 – 80 16 75 16
9. During the medical check-up of 35 students of a class, their weights were recorded as
follows:
Weight (in kg) No. of students
Less than 38 0
Less than 40 3
Less than 42 5
Less than 44 9
Less than 46 14
Less than 48 28
Less than 50 32
Less than 52 35
Draw a less than type ogive for the given data. Hence, obtain the median weight from the
graph and verify the result by using the formula
Sol:
Less than method
It is given that
On x- axis upper class limits. Y- axis cf.
We plot the points (38, 0) (40, 3) (42, 5) (44, 9) (46, 4) (48, 28) (50, 32) (52, 35)
More than method: Cf table
Weight (in kg) No. of students Weight more than Cumulative frequency
38 – 40 3 38 34
40 – 42 2 40 32
42 – 44 4 42 30
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
44 – 46 5 44 26
46 – 48 14 46 21
48 – 50 4 48 7
50 – 52 3 50 3
x- axis lower class limits on y-axis – cf
We plot the points (38, 35) (40, 32) (42, 30) (44, 26) (46, 21) (48, 7) (50, 3)
We find the two types of curves intersect at a point P. From point P. from P perpendicular
PM is draw on x-axis.
The verification,
We have
Weight (in kg) No. of students Cumulative frequency
36 – 38 0 0
38 – 40 3 3
40 – 42 2 5
42 – 44 4 9
44 – 46 5 28
46 – 48 14 32
48 – 50 4 32
50 – 0 3 35
Now, N = 35
𝑁 35
⇒ = = 17.5
2 2
𝑁
The cumulative frequency just greater than is 28 and the corresponding class is 46 – 48
2
Thus 46 – 48 is the median class such that
L = 46, f = 14, c1 = 14 and h = 2
𝑁
−𝑐1
2
∴ Median = L + ×ℎ
𝑓
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
17.5−14
= 46 + ×2
14
7
= 46 + 14
= 46.5
∴ Median = 46.5 kg
∴ Hence verify.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Exercise 8.1
2. In each of the following, determine whether the given values are solutions of the given
equation or not:
(i) 𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 + 2 = 0, 𝑥 = 2, 𝑥 = −1
a b
(ii) ax 2 3abx 2b2 0, x and x
b a
(iii) x2 2 x 4 0, x 2 and x 8 2
(iv) 2 x 2 x 9 x 2 4 x 3, x 2 and x 3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
1 13 5 4
(v) x x ,x
2 6 6 3
2
(vi) 𝑥 − 3√3𝑥 + 6 = 0, x = √3, x = −8√3
(vii) 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 + 1 = 0, x = 0, x = 1
Sol:
(i) 𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 + 2 = 0, 𝑥 = 2, 𝑥 = −1
Here LHS = 𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 + 2
and RHS = 0
Now, substitute x = 2 in LHS
We get (2)2 − 3(2) + 2 = 4 – 6 + 2
=6–6
=0
⟹ RHS
𝑆𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒, 𝐿𝐻𝑆 = 𝑅𝐻𝑆
x = 2 is a solution for the given equation.
Similarly,
Now substitute x = - 1 in LHS
We get (-1)2 -3(-1) +2
⟹ 1 + 3 + 2 = 6 ≠ RHS
Since LHS ≠ RHS
x = −1 is not a solution for the given equation
(ii) 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 + 1 = 0, x = 0, x = 1
𝐻𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝐿𝐻𝑆 = 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 + 1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑅𝐻𝑆 = 0
Now substitute x = 0 and x = 1 in LHS
⟹ 02 + 0 + 1 and (1)2 + (1) + 1
⟹1 and 1 + 1 + 1 = 3
≠ RHS ≠ RHS
∴ x = 0, x = 1 are not solutions of the given equation
(iii) 𝑥 2 − 3√3𝑥 + 6 = 0, x = √3, x = −8√3
Here LHS x2 3 3x 6 and RHS 0
Substitute x 3 and x 2 3 in LHS
3 3 6 and 2 3
2 2
3 3 3 3 2 3 6
3 9 6 and 18 18 6
0 and 36
RHS RHS
x 3 is a solution and x 2 3 is not a solution for the given equation
1 13 5 4
(iv) x x ,x
2 6 6 3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
1 13
Here LHS x and RHS
x 6
5 4
Substitute x and x in the LHS
6 3
5 1 4 1
and
6 5 3 4
6 9
5 6 4 3
and
6 5 3 4
85 36 16 9
and
30 18
61 85
and
30 18
RHS RHS
5 4
x and x are not solutions of the given equation
6 3
(v) 2 x x 9 x 4 x 3, x 2 and x 3
2 2
2 x2 x2 x 4 x 9 3 0
x2 5x 6 0
Here, LHS x 2 5 x 6 and RHS 0
Substitute x 2 and x 3 in LHS
2 5 2 6 and 3 5 3 6
2 2
4 10 6 and 9 15 6
10 10 and 15 15
0 and 0
= RHS = RHS
x 3 and x 2 are solutions of the given equation.
(vi) x2 2 x 4 0, x 2 and x 8 2
Here, LHS x2 2x 4 and RHS 0
Substitute x 2 and x 2 2 in LHS
2 4 and 2 2
2 2
2 2 2 2 2 4
2 2 4 and 8 4 4
4 4 and 8 4
0 and 8
RHS RHS
x 2 is a solution and x 2 2 is not a solution is the given equation.
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
a b
(vii) ax 2 3abx 2b2 0, x and x
b a
Here, LHS ax 3abx 2b and RHS 0
2 2
a b
Substitute x and x in LHS
b a
2 2
a a b b
a 3ab 2b 2 and a 2 3ab 2b 2
2
b a
a2
2 3a 2 2b2 and b2 3b2 2b2
b
a4
2 3a 2 2b2 and 3b2 3b2 0
b
RHS RHS
b a
x is a solution and x is not a solution for the given equation.
a b
3. In each of the following, find the value of k for which the given value is a solution of the
given equation:
2
(i) 7𝑥 2 + 𝑘𝑥 − 3 = 0, 𝑥 = 3
(ii) 𝑥 2 − 𝑥(𝑎 + 𝑏) + 𝑘 = 0, 𝑥 = 𝑎
(iii) 𝑘𝑥 2 + √2𝑥 − 4 = 0, 𝑥 = √2
(iv) 𝑥 2 + 3𝑎𝑥 + 𝑘 = 0, 𝑥 = −𝑎
Sol:
2
(i) Given that x is a root of the given equation
3
2
x satisfies the equation
3
2
2 2
i e 7 k 3 0
3 3
4 k
7 2 3 0
9 3
k 28
2 3
3 9
k 27 28
2
3 9
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
k 1 1
2 k
3 2 3 6
(ii) Given that x a is a root of the given equation
x2 x a b k 0
x a Satisfies the equation
i e a a a b k 0
2
a 2 a 2 ab k 0 ab k 0
k ab
(iii) Given that x 2 is a root at the given equation
kx2 2x 4 0
x 2 Satisfies the equation
2 2 4 0
2
i e k 2
2k 2 4 0
2k 2 0 2k 2
k 1
(iv) Given that x 0 is a root of the given equation x 2 3ax k 0
x a Satisfies the equation
i e a 3a a k 0
2
a 2 3a 2 k 0 2a 2 k 0
k 2a 2
2
4. If x = 3 and x = - 3 are the roots of the equation 𝑎𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 + 𝑏 = 0, find the values of a and
b.
Sol:
a = 3, b = − 6
9 18 3 9 9
0 00 LHS 0
Similarly, substitute x 3 in RHS.
4 3 14 3 16
2
4 9 42 16 36 42 16
52 42 10
RHS 10
Now, we can observe that
LHS RHS
x 3 is not a solution or root for the equation
x 2 4 x 3 x 2 9 4 x 2 14 x 16
Exercise 8.2
1. The product of two consecutive positive integers is 306. Form the quadratic equation to
find the integers, if x denotes the smaller integer.
Sol:
Given that the smallest integer of 2 consecutive integer is denoted by x
The two integer will be x and x 1
Product of two integers x x 1
Given that the product is 306
x x 1 306
x 2 x 306 x 2 x 306 0
The required quadratic equation is x 2 x 306 0
2. John and Jivanti together have 45 marbles. Both of them lost 5 marbles each, and the
product of the number of marbles they now have is 128. Form the quadratic equation to
find how many marbles they had to start with, if John had x marbles.
Sol:
Given that John and Jivani together have 45 marbles and John has x marbles
Jivani had 45 x marbles
No. of marbles John had after loosing 5 marbles x 5
No. of marbles Jivani had after loosing 5 marbles 45 x 5
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
45 5 x
40 x
Given that product of the no of marbles they now have 128
x 5 40 x 128
40 x x 2 40 5 5 x 128
45x x 2 200 128 x 2 45x 128 200 0
x 2 45x 328 0
The required quadratic equation is x2 45x 328 0
3. A cottage industry produces a certain number of toys in a day. The cost of production of
each toy (in rupees) was found to be 55 minus the number of articles produced in a day. On
a particular day, the total cost of production was Rs. 750. If x denotes the number of toys
produced that day, form the quadratic equation fo find x.
Sol:
Given that x denotes the no of toys product in a day
The cost of production of each by 55 no. of toys produced in a day
55 x
Total cost of production is nothing but product of no. of toys produced in a day and cost of
production of each toy
x 55 x
But total cost of production = Rs 750
x 55 x 750
55 x x 2 750
x 2 55x 750 0
The required quadratic from of the given data is x2 55x 750 0
4. The height of a right triangle is 7 cm less than its base. If the hypotenuse is 13 cm, form the
quadratic equation to find the base of the triangle.
Sol:
Given that in a right triangle is 7cm less than its base
Let base of the triangle be denoted by x
Height of the triangle x 7 cm
We have hypotenuse of the triangle 13cm
We know that, in a right triangle
base Height Hypotenuse
2 2 2
x x 2 13
2 2 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
x 2 x 2 14 x 49 169
2 x 2 14 x 49 169 0
2 x2 14 x 120 0
2 x 2 7 x 60 0
x2 7 x 60 0
The required quadratic equation is x 2 7 x 60 0
5. An express train takes 1 hour less than a passenger train to travel 132 km between Mysore
and Bangalore. If the average speed of the express train is 1 1 km/hr more than that of the
passenger train, form the quadratic equation to find the average speed of express train.
Sol:
Let the arrange speed of express train be denoted by x km/hr
Given that average speed of express train is 11 km /hr more than that of the passenger train
Average speed of passenger train x 11 km /hr
Total distance travelled by the train 132 km
We know that,
Distance travelled
Time taken to travel
Average speed
Distance travelled
Time taken by express train
Average speed of express train
132
hr
x
132
Time taken by express train hr
x 11
Given that time taken by express train is 1 hour less than that of passenger train.
Time taken by passenger train _ Time taken by express train 1 hour
132 132
1
x 11 x
1 1
132 1
x 11 x
x x 11
132 1
x x 11
132 x 2 11 x x 11
132 11 x 2 11x
x 2 11x 1452
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
x 2 11x 1452 0
The required quadratic is x 2 11x 1452 0
6. A train travels 360 km at a uniform speed. If the speed had been 5 km/hr more, it would
have taken 1 hour less for the same journey. Form the quadratic eqiation to find the speed
of the train.
Sol:
Let Speed of train be x km / hr
Distance travelled by train 360 km
We know that
Distance travelled 360
Time of total hr
Speed of the train x
If speed had been 5 km/hr more x 5 km / hr
Distance travelled 360
Time of travel hr
Speed of the train x 5
Give that,
Time of travel when speed is increased is 1 hour less than of the actual time of travel
360 360
1
x x5
1 1
360 1
x x5
x 5 x
360 1
x x 5
360 5 x x 5
x 2 5x 1800
x 2 5 x 1800 0
The required quadratic equation to find the speed of the train is x 2 5 x 1800 0
Exercise 8.3
1. x 4 x 2 0
Sol:
We have
x 4 x 2 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
either x 4 0 or x 2 0
x 4 or x 2
Thus, x 4 and x 2 are two roots of the equation x 4 x 2 0
2. 2 x 3 3x 7 0
Sol:
We have,
2 x 3 3x 7 0
2 x 3 0 or 3 x 7 0
2 x 3 or 3x 7
3 7
x or x
2 3
3 7
Thus, x and x are two roots of the equation 2 x 3 3 x 7 0
2 3
3. 4 x2 5x 0
Sol:
We have 4 x 2 5 x 0
x 4 x 5 0
either x 0 or 4 x 5 0
x 0 or 4 x 5
5
x 0 or x
4
5
Thus, x 0 and x are two roots of equation 4 x 2 5 x 0
4
4. 9 x 2 3x 2 0
Sol:
We have 9 x 2 3x 2 0
9 x 2 6 x 3x 2 0
3 x 3 x 2 1 3 x 2 0
3x 2 3x 1 0
either 3x 2 0 or 3x 1 0
3x 2 or 3x 1
2 1
x or x
3 3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2 1
Thus, x and x are two roots of the equation 9 x 2 3x 2 0
3 3
5. 6 x2 x 2 0
Sol:
We have 6 x 2 x 2 0
6 x 2 3x 4 x 2 0
3x 2 x 1 2 2 x 1 0
2 x 1 3x 2 0
either 2 x 1 0 or 3x 2 0
2 x 1 or 3x 2
1 2
x or x
2 3
1 2
Thus, x and x are two roots of the equation 6 x 2 x 2 0
2 3
6. 6 x 2 11x 3 0
Sol:
We have
6 x 2 11x 3 0
6 x2 9 x 2 x 3 0
3 x 2 x 3 1 2 x 3 0
2 x 3 3x 1 0
1
2 x 3 0 or x
3
3 1
Thus, x and x are the two roots of the given equation.
2 3
7. 5 x 3x 2 0
2
Sol:
We have,
5 x 2 3x 2 0
5 x 2 5 x 2 x 1 0
5 x x 1 2 x 1 0
x 1 5 x 2 0
x 1 0 or 5x 2 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2
x 1 or x
5
2
x 1 and x are the two roots of the given equation.
5
8. 48 x 13x 1 0
2
Sol:
We have
48 x 2 13x 1 0
48 x 2 16 x 3x 1 0
16 x 3x 1 1 3x 1 0
3x 116 x 1 0
3x 1 0 or 16 x 1 0
1 1
x or x
3 16
1 1
x and x are the two roots of the given equation.
16 3
9. 3x 2 11x 10
Sol:
We have
3x 2 11x 10
3x 2 11x 10 0
3x 2 6 x 5 x 10 0
3x x 2 5 x 2 0
x 2 3x 5 0
5 5
x 2 0 or x x 2 and x are the two roots at the quadratic equation
3 3
3x 2 11x 10
10. 25 x x 1 4
Sol:
We have
x 1 4
25 x x 25 x 10 4
25 x 2 25x 4 0 25 4 100 25 20 5 100 20 5
25 x 2 20 x 5 x 4 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
5 x 5 x 4 1 5 x 4 0
5 x 4 5 x 1 0
5x 4 0 or 5x 1 0
4 1
x or x
3 3
4 1
x and x are the two solutions of the quadratic equation 25 x x 1 4
3 5
1
11. 10 x 3
x
Sol:
We have
1
10 x 3
x
10 x 2 1
3
x
10 x 2 1 3x
10 x 2 3x 1 0 10 x 1 10 10 5 2 and 3 5 2
10 x 2 5 x 2 2 x 1 0
5 x 2 x 1 1 2 x 1 0
2 x 1 5 x 1 0
2 x 1 0 or 5x 1 0
1 1
x or x
2 5
1 1
x and x are the two roots of the given equation
2 5
2 5
12. 20
22 x
Sol:
We have,
2 5
20
22 x
2 5x 2 x2
0
x2
2 x2 5x 2 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2 2 4 4 4 1 5 4 1
2 x2 4 x x 8 0
2 x x 2 1 x 2 0
x 2 2 x 1 0
x 2 0 or 2 x 1 0
1
x 2 or x
2
1
x 2 and x are the two roots at the given quadratic equation
2
13. 4 3x 2 5 x 2 3 0
Sol:
We have,
4 3x 2 5 x 2 3 0
4 3 2 3 8 3 24 24 8 3 3 8 5 3 8
4 3x 2 8 x 3x 2 3 0
4x 3x 2 3
3x 2 0
4x 3
3x 2 0
4 x 3 0 or 3x 2
3 2
x or x
4 3
3 2
x and x are the two roots of the given quadratic equation
4 3
14. 2 x 2 3x 2 2 0
Sol:
We have,
2 x 2 3x 2 2 0
2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 1 3 4 1
2 x2 4 x x 2 2 0
2 x2 2 2 x 2 x x 2 2 0
2x x 2 2 1 x 2 2 0
x2 2 2 x 1 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
x 2 2 0 or 2x 0
1
x 2 2 or x
2
1
x and x 2 2 are the two roots of the given quadratic equation.
2
ax ax b 2b ax b 0
ax 2b ax b 0
ax 2b 0 or ax b 0
ax 2b or ax b
2b b
x or x
a a
b 2b
x and x are the two roots of the given quadratic equation
a a
16. x2
2 1 x 2 0
Sol:
We have,
x2
2 1 x 2 0
x2 2x 1 x 2 0
1 2 2 2 2 1
x2 2 x x 2 0
x x 2 1 x 2 0
x 2 x 1 0
x 2 0 or x 1 0
x 2 or x 1
x 1 and x 2 are the roots of the given quadratic equation
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
17. x2
3 1 x 3 0
Sol:
We have,
x2
3 1 x 3 0
x 2 3 x 1 x 3 0
3 1 3 3 3 1
3 1 3 1
x x 3 1 x 3 0
x 3 x 1 0
x 3 0 or x 1 0
x 3 or x 1
x 1 and x 3 are the two roots of the given quadratic equation
18. 4 x 2 4bx a 2 b 2 0
Sol:
We have,
4 x 2 4bx a 2 b 2 0
4 x a2 b2 4 x a b a b 2 a b 2 a b 2 b a 2 a b 4b 2b 2b 8 b a
4 x 2 2 b a 2 a b x a b a b 0
2 x2 2 x b a a b 2x b a 0
2x b a or 2 x a b 0
2x a b or 2x a b
x
a b
or 2 x a b x
a b
2 2
x
a b and x a b are the two roots of the given quadratic equation
2 2
19. ax 2 4a 2 3b x 12ab 0
Sol:
We have,
ax 2 4a 2 3b x 12ab 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
a 12ab 12a 2b 2 4a 2 3b
ax 2 4a 2 x 3bx 4a 3b 0
ax x 4a 3b x 4a 0
a 4a ax 3b 0
x 4a 0 or ax 3b 0
3b
x 4a or x
a
3b
x and x 4a are the two roots of the given equations
a
2
1
20. x 4
2
Sol:
We have,
2
1
x 4
2
2
1
x 40
2
2
1
x 2 0
2
2
1 1
x 2 x 2 0 a 2 b 2 a b a b
2 2
1 1
x 2 0 or x 2 0
2 x
1 1
x 2 or x 2
2 2
4 1 4 1
x or x
2 2
3 5
x or x
2 2
3 5
x and x are the two rots at the given equations
2 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
21. x2 4 2 x 6 0
Sol:
We have,
x2 4 2 x 6 0
1 6 6 6 3 2 x 2 and 4 2 3 2 2
x2 3 2 x 2 x 3 2 2 0
x x 3 2 2 x 3 2 0
x 3 2 x 2 0
x 3 2 0 or x 2 0
x 3 2 or x 2
x 3 2 and x 2 are the two roots of the given equation.
x 3 3x 7
22.
x 2 2x 3
Sol:
x 3 3x 7
We have,
x 2 2x 3
x 3 2 x 3 x 2 3x 7
2 x 2 3x 6 x 9 3x 2 x 14
2 x 2 3x 9 3x 2 x 14
x 2 3x x 14 9 0
x2 4 x 5 0
1x 5 5 4 5 1
x2 5x x 5 0
x x 5 1 x 5 0
x 5 x 1 0
x 5 0 or x 1 0
x 5 or x 1
x 5 and x 1 are the two roots of the given quadratic equation.
2 x 2 x 5 25
23.
x 4 x 3 3
Sol:
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2 x 2 x 5 25
We have,
x 4 x 3 3
2 x x 3 7 x 4 2 x 5 25
x 4 x 3 3
2 x 2 6 x 2 x 2 5 x 5 x 20 25
x 2 4 x 3x 12 3
4 x 19 x 20 25
2
2
x 7 x 12 3
3 4 x 2 19 x 20 25 x 2 7 x 12
12 x 2 57 x 60 25x 2 175x 300
25x 2 12 x 2 175x 57 x 300 60 0
13x 2 118 x 240 0
13x 2 78 x 40 x 240 0
13 240 3120 3180 78 40 and 118 78 40
13x x 6 40 x 6 0
x 6 13x 40 0
x 6 0 or 13x 40 0
40
x 6 or x
13
40
x 6 and x are the two roots of the given equation.
13
x 3 1 x 17
24.
x2 x 4
Sol:
We have,
x 3 1 x 17
x2 x 4
x x 3 x 2 1 x 17
x x 2 4
x 2 3x x x 2 2 2 x 17
x 2x
2
4
x 3x x x 2 2 2 x 17
2
x2 2 x 4
2 x 2 17
2
2
x 2x 4
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
4 2 x 2 2 17 x 2 2 x
8x 2 8 17 x 2 34 x
8x 2 8 17 x 2 34 x
17 8 x 2 34 x 8 0
9 x 2 34 x 8 0
9 8 72 72 36 2 and 34 36 2
9 x 2 36 x 2 x 8 0
9x x 4 2 x 4 0
x 4 9 x 2 0
x 4 0 or 9 x 2 0
8
x 4 or x
9
8
x 4 and x are the two roots of the given equations
9
𝑥−3 𝑥+3 48
25. − 𝑥−3 = , 𝑥 ≠ 3, 𝑥 ≠ −3
𝑥+3 7
Sol:
9
−4, 4
1 2 6
26. ,x 0
x 2 x 1 x
Sol:
1 2 6
We have, ,x 0
x 2 x 1 x
x 1 1 x 2 6
x 2 x 1 x
x 1 2x 4 6
x2 2 x x 2 x
3x 5 6
2
x 3x 2 x
x 3x 5 6 x 2 3x 2
3x 2 5 x 6 x 2 16 x 12
3x 2 18x 5x 18 0
3x 2 13x 18 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
3 18 36 9 x 4 and 13 9 4
3x 2 9 x 4 x 12 0
3 x x 3 4 x 3 0
x 3 3x 4 0
x 3 0 or 3x 4 0
4
x 3 or x
3
4
x 3 and x are the two roots of the given equation
3
x 1 x 1 5
27. , x 1 and x 1
x 1 x 1 6
Sol:
We have
x 1 x 1 5
, x 1 and x 1
x 1 x 1 6
x 1 x 1 x 1 x 1 5
x 1 x 1 6
x 1 x 1
2 2
5
x 1 2 2
6
4 x 1 5
2 x b a b 4ab and a b a b a 2 b2
2 2
x 1 6
6 4 x 5 x 2 1
24 x 5x 2 5
5 x 2 5 24 x 0
5 x 2 24 x 5 0 5 x 5 25 25 25 1 24 25 1
5 x 2 25 x x 5 0
5 x x 5 1 x 5 0
x 5 5 x 1 0
x 5 0 or 5x 1 0
1
x 5 or x
5
1
x 5 and x are the two roots of the given equation.
5
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
x 1 2x 1 5 1
28. , x ,1
2x 1 x 1 2 2
Sol:
We have
x 1 2x 1 5 1
, x ,1
2x 1 x 1 2 2
x 1 x 1 2 x 1 2 x 1 5
2 x 1 x 1 2
x 1 2 x 1
2 2
5
2x 2x x 1
2
2
x2 2 x 1 4 x2 4 x 1 5
a b a 2 b2 2ab, a b a 2 b2 2ab
2 2
2x x 1
2
2
5x 2 x 2 5
2
2 x2 x 1 2
2 5 x 2 2 x 2 5 2 x 2 x 1
10 x 2 4 x 4 10 x 2 5 x 5
4 x 5x 4 5 0
9x 9 0
9 x 9
x 1
x 1 is the only root for the given equation
29. 3x 2 14 x 5 0
Sol:
We have, 3x 2 14 x 5 0
3x 2 15x x 5 0
3 x x 5 1 x 5 0 3 5 15 15 15 1 and 4 5 1
x 5 3x 1 0
x 5 0 or 3x 1 0
1
x 5 or x
3
1
x 5 and x are the two roots of the given quadratic equation
3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
m 2 n
30. x 1 2x
n m
Sol:
We have given,
m 2 n
x 1 2x
n m
m x n2
2 2
1 2x
mn
m 2 x 2 2mnx n 2 mn 0
Now we solve the above quadratic equation using factorization method.
Therefore,
m2 x 2 mnx m mnx mnx m mnx n mn n mn 0
m2 x2 mnx m mnx mx n mn n mn n mn 0
mx mx n mn n mn mx n mn 0
mx n mn mx n mn 0
Now, one of the products must be equal to zero for the whole product to be zero. Hence we
equate both the product to zero. In order to find the value of x. Therefore,
mx n mn 0
mx n mn
n mn
x
m
Or
mx n mn 0
mx n mn
n mn
x
m
n mn n mn
Hence x or n .
m m
x a x b a b
31.
x b x a b a
Sol:
We have,
x a x b a b
x b x a b a
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
x a x a x b x b a 2 b2
x b x a ab
x a x b
2 2
a 2 b2
x 2 ax bx ab ab
x 2 2ax a 2 x 2 2bx b 2 a 2 b 2
x 2 a b x ab ab
2 x 2 2 x a b a 2 b 2 ab a 2 b 2 x 2 a b x ab
2abx 2 2abx a b ab a 2 b 2 a 2 b 2 x 2 a 2 b 2 a b x ab a 2 b 2
a 2 b 2 2ab x 2 a b a 2 b 2 2ab x 0
a b x 2 a b a b x 0
2 2
a b x a b 0
2
x x a b 0
x 0 or x a b 0 x a b
x 0 and x a b are the two roots of the equation
1 1 1 1
32.
x 1 x 2 x 2 x 3 x 3 x 4 6
Sol:
We have,
1 1 1 1
x 1 x 2 x 2 x 3 x 3 x 4 6
x 3 x 4 x 1 x 4 x 1 x 8 1
x 1 x 2 x 3 x 4 6
x 3 x 4 x 1 x 4 x 8 1
x 1 x 2 x 3 x 4 6
x 3 x 4 x 1 2 x 6 1
x 1 x 2 x 3 x 4 6
x 3 x 4 x 1 2 x 3 1
x 1 x 2 x 3 x 4 6
x 3 x 4 2 x 2 1
x 1 x 2 x 3 x 4 6
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
x 3 3x 6
1
x 1 x 2 x 3 x 4 6
x 3 x 2 3
1
x 1 x 2 x 3 x 4 6
3 1
x 1 x 4 6
x 1 x 4 3 6
x2 4 x x 4 18
x 2 5 x 14 0 14 7 8 and 5 7 8
x 2 7 x 8x 14 0
x x 7 8 x 7 0
x 7 x 8 0
x 7 0 or x 2 0
x 7 or x 2
x 7 and x 8 are the two roots of the given equation.
25
33. x 5 x 6
24
2
Sol:
We have,
25
x 5 x 6
24
2
25
x 2 5 x 6 x 30 0
24
2
30 24 25
2
x 11x
2
0
24
2
17280 25
x 2 11x 0
2
2
17255 25
x 2 11x 0
24
2
119 145
x2 11x 0 17255 145 119
24 24
264 119 145
x2 x 0 11 24 264
24 24 24
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
119 145 119 145
x2 x 0
24 24 24
119 145 119 145
x2 x x 0
24 24 24 24
119 145 119
x x x 0
24 24 24
119 145
x x 0
24 24
119 145
x 0 and x 0
24 25
119 145
x or x
24 24
23 1
x4 or x 6
24 24
23 1
x 4 and x 6 are the two roots of the given equation.
24 24
3 3
34. 7x 35
x 5
Sol:
3 3
We have, 7 x 35
x 5
7 x2 3 3
35
x 5
3
7 x 2 3 35 x
5
3
7 x 2 35 x 3 0
5
3
7 x 2 35x x 3 0
5
1
7 x2 35x 3x 3 5 0
5
3
7 x x 5 x 5 0
5
3
x 5 7 x 0
5
3
x 5 0 or 7 x 0
5
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
3 3
x 5 or 7 x x
5 35
3
x 5 and x are the two roots of the given equation.
35
a b 2c
35.
x a x b x c
Sol:
We have,
a b 2c
x a x b x c
a x b b x a 2c
x a x b xc
ax ab bx ab 2c
x ax bx ab x c
2
x c a b x 2ab 2c x 2 a b x ab
a b x 2 2abx a b c x 2abc 2cx 2 2c a b x 2abc
a b 8c x 2 2abx a b x c 8c a b x 0
a b 8c x 2 x 8ab ac bc 8ac 8bc 0
a b 8c x 2 x 2ab ac bc 0
x x a b 2c ac bc 2ab 0
x 0 or x a b 2c ac bc 8ab 0
x 0 or x
ac bc 8ab
a b 8c
8ab ac bc
x
a b 2c
2ab ac bc
x 0 and x are the two roots of the given equation.
a b 8c
a b 2c
x a x b x c
a x b b x a 2c
x a x b xc
ax ab bx ab 2c
x ax bx ab x c
2
x c a b x 2ab 2c x 2 a b x ab
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
a b x 2 2abx a b c x 2abc 2cx 2 2c a b x 2abc
36. x 2 2ab 2a b x
Sol:
We have
x 2 2ab 2a b x
x 2 2a b x 2ab 0 2ab 8a b 8a b 8a b
x 2 2ax bx 2ab 0
x x 8a b x 2a 0
x 8a x b 0
x 8a 0 or x b 0
x 8a or x b
x 8a and x b are the two roots of the given equation .
a b x 2 4ab x a b 0
2 2
37.
Sol:
We have,
a b x 2 4ab x a b 0
2 2
2
a b x2 a b a b x a b 0
2 2
2
a b a b
2 2
4ab
a b x2 a b x a b x a b 0
2 2 2 2
a b x x 1 a b x 1 0
2 2
x 1 a b x a b
2 2
0
x 1 0 or a b x a b 0
2 2
a b
2
a b
2
x 1 or x
a b a b
2
a b
2
38. a x 2 1 x a 2 1 0
Sol:
We have
a x 2 1 x a 2 1 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
ax 2 a 2 x x a 0 a a a2 a2 a 2 1 a 2 1 a 2 1
a x a 1 x a 0
x a ax 1 0
x a 0 or ax 1 0
1
x a or x
a
1
x a and x are the two roots of the given equation
a
39. x 2 x x a 1 0
Sol:
We have,
x 2 x x a 1 0
x 2 a 1 a x a a 1 0 a a 1 a 1 a 1 a a 1
x 2 a 1 x ax ax a 1 0
x x a 1 a x a 1 0
x a 1 x a 0
x a 1 0 or x a 0
x a 1 or x a
x a 1 and x a are the two roots of the given equation.
1
40. x2 a x 1 0
a
Sol:
We have,
1
x2 a x 1 0
a
1 1 1 1 1
x2 ax x a 0 1 a a a a x ax a x
a a
1
x x a x a 0
a
1
x a x 0
a
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
1
x a 0 or x 0
a
1
x a or x
a
1
x a and x are the two roots of the given equation.
a
41. abx 2 b 2 ac x bc 0
Sol:
We have,
abx 2 b 2 ac x bc 0
abx bc ab 2 c ab 2 c b 2 ac and b 2 ac b 2 ac
abx 2 b2 x acx bc 0
bx ax b c ax b 0
ax b bx c 0
ax b 0 or bx c 0
b c
x or x
a b
b c
x and x are the two roots of the given equation
a b
42. a 2b 2 x 2 b 2 x a 2 x 1 0
Sol:
We have, a 2b2 x 2 b2 x a 2 x 1 0
1 a 2b 2 a 2b 2 a 2b 2 a 2 b 2
a 2b 2 x 2 b 2 x a 2 x 1 0
b 2 a 2 x 1 1 a 2 x 1 0
a 2 x 1 b 2 x 1 0
a 2 x 1 0 or b2 x 1 0
1 1
x 2
and x 2 are the two root of te given equation
a b
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
x 1 x 3 1
43. 3 , x 2 and x 4
x2 x4 3
Sol:
We have,
x 1 x 3 1
3 , x 2 and x 4
x2 x4 3
x 1 x 4 x 3 x 2 10
x 2 x 4 3
x 2 x 4 x 4 x 2 3x 2 x 6 10
x2 2 x 4 x 8 3
2 x 2 10 x 10 10
2
x 6x 8 3
2 x 2 5x 5 3 5 x 2 6 x 8
3x 2 15x 15 5 x 2 30 x 40
2 x 2 30 x 15 x 40 15 0
2 x 2 15 x 25 0
2 x 2 10 x 5 x 25 0
2 x x 5 5 x 5 0
x 5 2 x 5 0
x 5 0 or 2 x 5 0
5
x 5 or x
2
5
x 5 and x are the two roots of the given equation
2
44. 3x 2 2 6 x 2 0
Sol:
We have 3x 2 2 6 x 2 0 Now we solve the above quadratic equation using factorization
method.
Therefore
3x 2 6 x 6 x 2 0
3x
3x 2 0
3x 2 2
3 2 3x 2 0
3x 2 0 or 3x 2 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
3x 2 or 3x 2
2 2
x or x
3 3
2 2
x or x
3 3
2 2
Hence x or x
3 3
1 1 6
45. , x 1, 5
x 1 x 5 7
Sol:
We have
1 1 6
, x 1, 5
x 1 x 5 7
x 5 x 1 6
x 1 x 5 7
x 5 x 1 6
x 5x x 5 7
2
6 6
2
x 4x 5 7
x2 4 x 5 7
x2 4 x 5 7 0
x 2 4 x 18 0
x 2 6 x 2 x 12 0
x x 6 2 x 6 0
x 6 0 or x 8 0
x 6 or x 8
x 6 and x 8 are the two roots of the given equation.
1 1
46. 3, x 0, 2
x x2
Sol:
We have,
1 1
3, x 0, 2
x x2
x2 x
3
x x 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2 3 x 2 2 x
3x 2 6 x 2 0
3 x 2 3 3 x 2 0
3x2 3 3 3 3 x 3 1 0
3x 2 3
3 1 x 3
3 1 x
3 1
3 1 0
a 2 b 2 a b a b
3 3 1 3 1 3x 3 1 0
3x 3 1 3x 3 1 0
3x 3 1 0 or 3x 3 1 0
1
47. x 3, x 0
x
Sol:
We have,
1
x 3, x 0
x
x2 1
3
x
x 2 1 3x
x 2 3x 1 0
3 3
x2 x 1 0
2 2
3 13 3 13
x 2 x 1 0
2 2
3 13 3 13
x 2 x x 1 0
2 2
3 13 3 13 4
x 2 x x 0
2 2 4
3 13 3 13 9 13
x 2 x x 0
2 2 4
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2
2
3 13 3 13 3 13 0
x
2
x x
2 2 22
3 13 3 13
x 2
3 13
3 13
0
x x
2 2 2 2
3 13 3 13 3 13
x x x 0
2 2 2
3 13 3 13
x x 0
2 2
3 13 3 13
x 0 or x 0
2 2
3 13 3 13
x or x
2 2
3 13 3 13
x and x are the two roots of the given equation.
2 2
1 1 11
48. , x 4,7
x 4 x 7 30
Sol:
We have,
1 1 11
, x 4,7
x 4 x 7 30
x 7 x 4 11
x 4 x 7 30
x7 x4 11
x 7 x 4 x 28 30
2
11 11
2
x 3x 28 30
1 30 1 x 2 3 x 28
30 x 2 3x 28
x 2 3x 28 30 0
x 2 3x 2 0 2 2 1 3 2 1
x2 2 x x 2 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
x x 8 1 x 8 0
x 8 x 1 0
x 8 0 or x 1 0
x 8 or x 1
Exercise 8.4
Find the roots of the following quadratic equations (if they exist) by the method of completing
the square.
1. x2 4 2 x 6 0
Sol:
We have,
x2 4 2 x 6 0
2 2
2 2
x2 2 x 2 2 2 2 6 0
2 2 6
2 2
x2 2
x 2 2 4 2 6
2
x 2 2 86
2
x 2 2 2
2
x2 2 2
x 2 2 2 or x 2 2 2
x 3 2 or x 2
x 2 and x 3 2 are the roots of the given equation.
2. 2 x2 7 x 3 0
Sol:
We have,
2 x2 7 x 3 0
7 3
2 x2 x 0
2 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
7 1 3
x2 2 x 0
2 2 2
2 2
7 7 7 3
x2 2 x 0
4 4 4 2
2
7 7 49 3
x 2 x 0
2
4 4 16 2
2
7 49 3
x 0
4 16 2
2
7 49 3
x
4 16 2
49 86
2
7
x
4 16
2
7 25
x
4 16
2
7 5
x
4 4
7 5
x
4 4
7 5 7 5
x or x
4 4 4 4
5 7 7 5
x or x
4 9 4 4
12 2
x or x
4 4
1
x 3 or x
2
1
x 3 and x are the roots of the given quadratic equation.
2
3. 3x 2 11x 10 0
Sol:
We have,
3x 2 11x 10 0
11 10
x2 x 0
3 3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
1 11 10
x2 2 x 0
2 3 3
2 2
11 11 11 10
x2 2 2 0
6 6 6 3
2 2
11 11 10
x
6 6 3
2
11 121 10
x
6 36 3
11 121 120
2
x
6 36
2
11 1
x
6 36
2 2
11 1
x
6 6
11 1
x
6 6
11 1 11 1
x or x
6 6 6 6
1 11 1 11
x or x
6 6 6 6
10 12
x or x 2
6 6
5
x or x 2
3
5
x or x 2 are the two roots of the given equation.
3
4. 2 x2 x 4 0
Sol:
We have,
2 x2 x 4 0
x 4
2 x2 0
2 2
1 1
x2 2 x 2 0
2 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2 2
1 1 1
x2 2x x 2 0
4 4 4
2 2
1 1
x 2
4 4
2
1 1
x 2
4 16
1 1 2 16
2
x
4 16
1 1 32
2
x
4 16
2
1 33
x
4 16
1 33
x
4 16
1 33 1 33
x or x
4 4 4 4
33 1 33 1
x or x
4 4 4 4
33 1 33 1
x or x
4 4
33 1 33 1
x or x are the two roots of the given eqution
4 4
5. 2 x2 x 4 0
Sol:
We have,
2 x2 x 4 0
x
x2 2 0
2
1 1
x2 2 x 2 0
2 2
2 2
1 1 1
x2 2 x 2
4 4 4
2
1 1
x 2
4 16
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
1 1 36
2
x
4 16
2
1 31
x
4 16
1 31
x
4 16
1 31 1 31
x or x
4 4 4 4
31 1 31 1
x or x
4 4
Since, 31 is not a real number
The roots are not real roots.
6. 4 x 2 4 3x 3 0
Sol:
We have,
4 x 2 4 3x 3 0
4 3 3
x x 0
4 4
1 3
x2 2 3 x 0
2 4
2
3 3 3 2 3
x 2
2
x 0
2 2 2 4
2
3 3 3
x 0
2 4 4
2
3
x 0
4
3 3
x 0 and x 0
2 2
3 3
x and x
2 2
3 3
x and x are the two roots of the given equation as it is a perfect square.
2 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
7. 2 x 2 3x 2 2 0
Sol:
We have,
2 x 2 3x 2 2 0
3x 2 2
x2 x 0
2 2
3
x2 x 8 0
2
1 3
x2 2 x2 0
2 2
2 2
3 3 3
x 2
2
x 20
2 2 2 2 2 2
2
3 9
x 2
2 2 8
2
3 9 16
x 8
2 2
2
3 25
x 8
2 2
8. 3x 2 10 x 7 3 0
Sol:
We have
3x 2 10 x 7 3 0
10 7 3
x2 x 0
3 3
1 10
x2 2 x7 0
2 3
2 2
5 5 5
x 2
2
x 7 0
3 3 3
2
5 25
x 3 7
3
2
5 25 21
x 3
3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2
5 4
x 3
3
5 4
x
3 3
5 2 5 2
x or x
3 3 3 3
3 7
x or x
3 3
7
x 3 or x
3
7
x 3 and x are the roots of the given equation.
3
9. x2
2 1 x 2 0
Sol:
We have,
x2
2 1 x 2 0
2
1
x2 2 1 x 2 0
2
2 2
2 1 2 1 2 1
x 2
2
x 2 0
2 2 2
2 2
2 1 2 1
x 2
2 2
2
2 1 3 2 2 4 2
x
2 4
2
2 1 3 2 2
x
2 4
2
2 1 2 1 2 2
x
2 4
2
2
2 2 1
2
2 1
x
2 22
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
x
2 1
2
2 12
2
2 2
2 2
2 1 2 1
x
2 2
2 1 2 1
x
2 2
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
x or x
2 2 2 2
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
x or x
2 2 2 2
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
x or x
2 2
2 1
x or x
2 2
x 2 or x 1
x 2 and x 1 are the roots of the given equation
10. x 2 4ax 4a 2 b2 0
Sol:
We have,
x 2 4ax 4a 2 b2 0
x 2 2 2a x 2a b 2 0
2
x 2a b 2
2
x 2a b
x 2a b or x 2a b
x 2a b or x 2a b
x 2a b and x 2a b are the two roots of the given quadratic equation.
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Exercise 8.5
25 24 1
The discriminant of the following quadratic equation is 1.
(ii) x 2 2 x 4 0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
here a 1, b 2 and c 4
The discriminant is D b2 4ac
2 4 1 4
2
4 16 12
The discriminant of the following quadratic equation is 12.
(iii) x 1 2 x 1 0
The given equation is x 1 2 x 1 0
By solving it, we get 2 x 2 3x 1 0
This equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
here a 2, b 3, c 1
The discriminant is D b2 4ac
3 4 2 1
2
9 8 1
The discriminant D, for the following quadratic equation is 1
(iv) x 2 2 x k 0, K R
The given equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
here a 1, b 2, c k [given k R ]
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
The discriminant is D b2 4ac
2 4 1 k
2
4 4k
The discriminant D, of the following quadratic equation is 4 4k , where K R
(v) 3x 2 2 2 x 2 3 0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
here a 3, b 2 2 x and c 2 3
The discriminant is D b2 4ac
2
2 2 4 3 2 3
8 24
32
The discriminant D, of the followig quadratic equation is 32.
(vi) x 2 x 1 0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
here a 1, b 1 and c 1
The discriminant is D b2 4ac
1 4 1 1
2
1 4 3
The discriminant D, of the following quadratic equation is 3.
(vii) 3x 2 2 x k 0
The given equation has 3x 2 2 x k 0
here a 3, b 2, c k
given that the quadratic equation has real roots.
i.e., D b2 4ac 0
4 4 3 k 0
4 12k 0
4 12k
4
4
12
1
k
3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
1
The ‘k’ value should not exceed to have the real roots for the given equation.
3
(viii) 4 x 2 3kx 1 0
The given equation has 4 x 2 3k x 1 0
here a 3, b 2, c k
given that quadratic equation has real roots
i.e., D b2 4ac 0
2 4 3 k 0
2
4 4 3 k 0
4 12k 0
4 12k
12
k k 3
4
2. In the following, determine whether the given quadratic equation have real roots and if so,
find the roots:
(i) 16 x 2 24 x 1 (ii) x 2 x 2 0 (iii) 3x 2 10 x 8 3 0 (iv) 3x 2 2 x 2 0
(v) 2 x 2 2 6 x 3 0 (vi) 3a 2 x 2 8abx 4b 2 0, a 0 (vii) 3x 2 2 bx b 0
(viii) x 2 2 x 1 0 (ix) 2 x 2 5 3 6 0 (x) 2 x2 7 x 5 2 0
(xi) 2 x2 2 2 x 1 0 (xii) 3x 2 bx 2 0
Sol:
(i) 16 x 2 24 x 1
The given equation is in the form of 16 x 2 24 x 1 0
Hence, the equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
Here, a 16, b 24, c 1, D b 2 4ac 24 4 16 1 576 64 640 0
2
b D 24 640 3 10
2a 2 16 4
3 10
The roots of the equation are
4
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
(ii) x 2 x 2 0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
a 1, b 1, c 2.
D b 2 4ac 1 4 1 2 1 8 7 0
2
(iii) 3x 2 10 x 8 3 0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
here a 3, b 10 and c 8 3
D b2 4ac 10 4 3 8 3 100 96 19670
2
2 4 3 2 4 24
2
20 0
Hence as Q 0,
The given equation has no reaal roots.
(v) 2 x 2 2 6 x 3 0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
here a 2, b 2 6, c 3
The discriminant Q b2 4ac
2
2 6 4 2 3 24 24
0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
As Q 0 , the given equation has real and equal roots, They are
b D
2 6 0 2 1 6
3
2a 2 2 42 2
b D
2 6 0 2 1 6
3
2a 2 2 42 2
3
The roots of the given equation is
2
(vi) 3a 2 x 2 8abx 4b 2 0, a 0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
here a 3a 2 , b 8ab, c 4b 2 [given a 0 ]
D b2 4ac 8ab 4 3a 2 4b 2 64a 2b 2 48a 2b 2 16a 2b 2 0
2
b D
8ab 16a 2b 2 2b
2a 2 3a 2 a
b D
8ab 16a 2b2 2b
2a 2 3a 2 a
2b 2b
The roots of the given equation are ,
a 3a
(vii) 3x 2 2 bx b 0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
here a 3, b 2 5, c 5
The discriminant Q b2 4ac
2
2 5 4 3 5 20 4 3 5
20 60 80 0
As Q 0 , the given equation has real roots, given by
b D
2 5 80
5
2a 23 3
b D
2 5 80
5
2a 23 3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
3
The roots of the given equation is
2
(viii) x 2 2 x 1 0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
Here a 1, b 2 and c 1
The discriminant D b2 4ac
2 4 1 1 0
2
(ix) 2 x 2 5 3 6 0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
here a 2, b 5 3, c 6
The discriminant D b2 4ac
2
5 3 4 2 6 75 48
27 0
As Q 0 , the given equation has real roots, given by
b D
5 3 27
3 5 3
3 2 1
3
2a 2 2 4 42 2
b D
5 3 27 3 5 3 8 2
3 2 3
2a 2 2 4 41
3
The roots of the given equation are , 2 3
2
(x) 2 x2 7 x 5 2 0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
here a 2, b 7, c 5 2
The discriminant Q b2 4ac
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
7 4 2 5 2 49 40
2
90
As 0 0 , the given equation has real roots, given by
b D 7 9 7 3 42
2
2a 2 2 2 2 2 2
b D 7 9 7 3 5 5
2a 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
5
The roots of the given equation are 2,
2
(xi) 2 x2 2 2 x 1 0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
here a 2, b 2 2, c 1
D b2 4ac
2 2 2 1
2
1
2 2 42 2
as D 0, the given equation has Real and equal roots
hence and
b
2 2
21 2
1
2a 2 2 42 2
1 3
The roots is obtained by multiplying and dividing by 2
2 2
1
The roots of the given equation is
2
(xii) 3x 2 bx 2 0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
here a 3, b 5, c 2
D b2 4ac 5 4 3 2 25 24 1 0
2
b D 5 1 5 1 4 2 2
2a 23 6 63 3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2
The roots of the given equation are 1 and
3
x 1 x 3 1
3. Solve for x : 3 ; x 2, 4
x2 x4 3
Sol: Given,
x 1 x 3 1
3
x2 x4 3
x 1 x 4 x 3 x 2 10 [Solving improper fraction]
x 2 x 4 3
x 2
5x 4 x2 5x 6
10
x 2 x 4 3
This can also be written as. .
3 2 x 2 10 x 10 10 x 2 x 4
6 x 2 30 x 30 10 x 2 60 x 80
By solving them, by taking all to one side, we get
10 x 2 60 x 80 6 x 2 30 x 30 0
4 x 2 30 x 50 0, here a 4, b 30, c 50
b b 2 4ac
Hence we get x by x
2a
30 30 4 4 50
2
x 5
2 4
30 30 4 4 50
2
5
x
2 4 2
5
The value of x are 5 and
2
1 1
4. Solve for x : 3, x 0, 2
x x7
1 1
Sol: Given 3
x x2
x2
3
x x 2
2
3
x x 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
This can be written as 2 3 x 2 2 x
The equation hence is 3x 2 6 x 2 0
This equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
Here a 3, b 6 and c 2
b b 2 4ac
x
2a
6 6 4 3 2
2
6 36 24 3 3
x
23 6 3
6 6 4 3 2
2
6 36 24 3 3
x
23 6 3
3 3
The value of x are
3
1
5. x 3, x 0
x
1
Sol: Given x 3, x 0
x
x2 1
Hence this equation can be written as 3
x
x 2 1 3x x 2 3x 1 0
The equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
Here a 1, b 3, c 1 .
b b2 4ac
The value of ' x ' can be solved by x
2a
b 3 4 1 1
2
3 9 4 3 5
x
2 1 2 2
b 3 4 1 1
2
3 9 4 3 5
x
2 1 2 2
3 5
The value of ' x ' are
2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Exercise 8.6
As D 0, The discriminant of equation is negative, then the expression has no real roots
(ii) 2 x 2 3x 5 0
The given quadratic equation is 2 x 2 3x 5 0
here a 2, b 6 and c 3
D b2 4ac 6 4 2 3 36 24 12 0
2
As D 0, the discriminant of equation is positive, the equation has real and distinct roots
3 2 2
(iii) x x 1 0
5 3
3 2 2
The given quadratic equation is x x 1 0 can also be written as 9 x 2 10 x 15 0
5 3
here a 9, b 10, c 15
D b2 4ac 10 4 5 9 100 540 440 0
2
(iv) 3x 2 4 3x 4 0
The given quadratic equation is 3x 2 4 3x 4 0
here a 3, b 4 3, c 4
The discriminant D b2 4ac
2
4 3 4 3 4 48 48 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
as D 0, the equation has real and equal roots
(v) 3x 2 2 6 x 2 0
The given quadratic equation is 3x 2 2 6 x 2 0
Here. The equation is in the form of ax 2 b c 0
Where a 3, b 2 6 and c 2
2
D b 2 4ac 2 6 4 3 2 24 24 0
as D 0, the given quadratic equation has real and equal roots
(vi) x 2a x 2b 4ab
The given equation x 2a x 2b 4ab can also be written as x 2 x 2a 2b and
c 0 4ab 4ab 0
(vii) 2 a 2 b 2 x 2 2 a b x 1 0
The given equation is 2 a 2 b 2 x 2 2 a b x 1 0
Here a 2 a 2 b 2 , b 2 a b and c 1
D b2 4ac
2abcd 9 9a 2b 2 16c 2 d 2
2
(viii) 2 a 2 b 2 x 2 2 a b x 1 0
The given equation is 2 a 2 b 2 x 2 2 a b x 1 0
It is in the farm of the equation ax 2 bx c 0
Here a 2 a 2 b 2 , b 2 a b and c 1
(ix) b c x 2 a b c x a 0
The given equation is b c x 2 a b c x a 0
Here a b c, b a b c and c a
a b c 4abc 0
2
as D 0 , the discriminant is positive and the nature of the roots are real and unequal
2. Find the values of k for which the roots are real and equal in each of the following
equation:
(i) kx 2 4 x 1 0 (ii) kx 2 2 5 x 4 0 (iii) 3x 2 5x 2k 0 (iv) 4 x 2 kx 9 0
(v) 2kx 2 40 x 25 0 (vi) 9 x2 24 x k 0 (vii) 4 x 2 3kx 1 0
(viii) x 2 2 5 2k x 3 7 10k 0
Sol:
(i) kx 2 4 x 1 0
Sol:
The given equation kx 2 4 x 1 0 is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0 where
a k , b 4, c 1
given that, the equation has real and equal roots
i.e., D b2 4ac 0
4 4 k 1 0
2
16 4k k 4
The value of k 4
(ii) kx 2 2 5 x 4 0
Sol:
The given equation kx 2 2 5 x 4 0 is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0 where
a k , b 2 3 and c 4
given that, the equation has real and equal roots
i.e., D b2 4ac 0
2
2 5 4 k 4 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
20 5 5
20 16k k k
16 4 4
5
The value of k
4
(iii) 3x 2 5x 2k 0
Sol:
The given equation is 3x 2 5x 2k 0
This equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
Here, a 3, b 5 and c 2k
given that, the equation has real and equal roots
i.e., D b2 4ac 0
5 4 3 2k 0
2
25 24k
25
k
24
25
The value of k
24
(iv) 4 x 2 kx 9 0
Sol:
The given equation is 4 x 2 kx 9 0
This equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
Here, a 4, b k and c 9
given that, the equation has real and equal roots
i.e., D b2 4ac 0
k2 4 49 0
k 2 16 9
k 16 9 4 3 12
The value of k 12
(v) 2kx 2 40 x 25 0
Sol:
The given equation is 2kx 2 40 x 25 0
This equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
Here, a 2k , b 40 and c 25
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
given that, the equation has real and equal roots
i.e., D b2 4ac 0
10 4 2k 25 0
2
1600 200k 0
1600
k 8 k 8
200
The value of k 8
(vi) 9 x2 24 x k 0
Sol:
The given equation is 9 x2 24 x k 0
This equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
Here, a 9, b 24, and c k
given that, the nature of the roots of this equation is real and equal
i.e., D b2 4ac 0
24 4 4 k 0
2
576 36k 0
576
k 16 k 16
36
The value of k 16
(vii) 4 x 2 3kx 1 0
Sol:
The given equation is 4 x 2 3kx 1 0
This equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
Here, a 4, b 3k , and c 1
given that, the nature of the roots of this equation is real and equal
i.e., D b2 4ac 0
3k 4 4 1 0
2
16 16 4
k2 k
9 9 3
4
k
3
4
The value of k is
3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
(viii) x 2 2 5 2k x 3 7 10k 0
Sol:
The given equation is x 2 2 5 2k x 3 7 10k 0
Here, a 1, b 2, 5 2k and c 3 7 10k
given that, the nature of the roots of this equation are real and equal
i.e., D b2 4ac 0
2 5 2k 4 1 3 7 10k 0
4 5 2k 12 7 10k 0
2
25 4k 2 20k 21 30k 0
4k 2 10k 4 0 2k 2 5k 2 0
1
k 2 k 2 1 k 2 k 2 or k
2
1
The value of k is 2 or
2
(ix) 3k 1 x 2 2 k 1 x k 0
Sol:
The given equation is 3k 1 x 2 2 k 1 x k 0
This equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
Here a 3k 1, b 2 k 1 and c k
Given that the nature of the roots of this equation are real and equal
i.e., D b2 4ac 0
2 k 1 4 3k 1 0
2
4 k 1 4k 3k 1 0
2
k 1 k 3k 1 0
2
k 2 1 2k 3k 2 k 0
2k 2 k 1 0
This equation can also be written as 2k 2 k 1 0
The value of k can obtain by
b b 2 4ac
k
2a
Where a 2, b 1, c 1 from equation 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
1 1 4 2 1
2
1 9 4
k 1
2 2 4 4
(x) kx2 kx 1 4 x 2 x
Sol:
The given equation is kx2 kx 1 4 x 2 x bringing all the ' x ' components to one side,
we get the equation as x 2 4 k x k 1 1 0
This equation is in the form of the general quadratic equation i.e., ax 2 bx c 0
Here a 4 k , b k 1 and c 1
Given that the nature of the roots of the given equation are real and equal
i.e., D b2 4ac 0
k 1 4 x 4 k 1 0
2
k 2 1 2k 16 4k 0
k 2 2k 10 0 ………….(2)
The equation (2) is as of the form ax 2 bx c here a 1, b 2, c 16 1 15
b b 2 4ac
The value of k is obtained by k
2a
2 2 4 1 15
2
k 5
2 1
2 2 4 1 15
2
k 3
2 1
The value of k are 5 and -3 respectively for the given quadratic equation.
(xi) k 1 x 2 20 k 3 x k 8 0
Sol:
The given equation is k 1 22 2 k 3 x k 8 0
Here a k 1, b 2 k 3 and c k 8
given that the nature of the roots of this equation are real and equal i.e.,
D b2 4ac 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2 K 3 4 k 1 k 8 0
2
4 k 3 4 k 1 k 8 0
2
k 3 k 1 k 8 0
2
k 2 9 6k k 2 9k 8 0
k 2 9 6k k 2 9k 8 0
1
3k 1 0 k
3
1
The value of ' k ' for the given equation is
3
(xii) x 2 2kx 7k 12 0
Sol:
The given equation is x 2 2kx 7k 12 0
Here a 1, b 2k and c 7k 12
given that the nature of the roots of this equation are real and equal i.e.,
D b2 4ac 0
2k 4 1 7 k 12 0
2
4k 2 28k 48 0
k 2 7k 12 0
b b 2 4ac
The value of k can be obtained by k
2a
7 49 48 7 1
a 1, b 7, c 12 k 4,3
2 2
The value of ' k ' for the equation is 4 and 3
(xiii) k 1 x 2 2 3k 1 x 8k 1 0
Sol:
The given equation is k 1 x 2 2 3k 1 x 8k 1 0
It is in the form of the equation ax 2 bx c 0
Here, a k 1, b 2 3k 1 and c 8k 1
given that the nature of the roots of the given equation are real and equal i.e.,
D b2 4ac 0
2 3k 1 4 k 1 x 8k 1 0
2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
4 3k 1 4 k 1 8k 1 0
2
3k 1 k 1 8k 1 0
2
9k 2 6k 1 8k 2 9k 1 0
9k 2 6k 1 8k 2 9k 1 0
k 2 3k 0
k k 3 0
k 0 or k 3
The values of ' k ' for the given quadratic equation are 0 and 3
(xiv) 5 x 2 4 x 2 k 4 x 2 2 x 1 0
Sol:
The given equation is 5 x 2 4 x 2 k 4 x 2 2 x 1 0
This can be written as x 2 5 4k x 4 2k 2 k 0
This equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0 ………(1)
Here a 5 4k , b 4 2k and c 2k
given that the nature of the roots of this equation are real and equal i.e.,
D b2 4ac 0
4 2k 4 5 4k 2 k 0
2
4 2k 4 5 4k 2 k 0
2
16 4k 2 16k 4 10 5k 8k 4k 2 0
16 4k 2 16k 40 20k 32k 16k 2 0
20k 2 4k 24 0
5k 2 k 6 0 ………..(2)
As equation (2) is of the form (1), k can be obtained
b b 2 4ac
By k where a 5, b 1, c 6
2a
b b2 4ac 1 1 4 5 6 6
k
2a 25 5
b b2 4ac 1 1 4 5 6
k 1
2a 25
6
The values of k for the given equation are and 1
5
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
(xv) 4 k x 2 2k 4 x 8k 1 0
Sol:
The given equation is 4 k x 2 2k 4 x 8k 1 0
This equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
Here a 4 k , b 2k 4 and c 8k 1
given that the nature of the roots of this equation are real and equal i.e.,
D b2 4ac 0
2k 4 4 4 k 8k 1 0
2
4k 2 16 16k 8k 2 4 31 4 k 16 0
(xvi) 2k 1 x 2 2 k 3 x k 5 0
Sol:
The given equation is 2k 1 x 2 2 k 3 x k 5 0
This equation is in the form of ax 2 bx c 0
Here a 2k , b 2 k 3 and c k 5
given that the nature of the roots for this equation are real and equal i.e.,
D b2 4ac 0
2 k 3 4 2k 1 k 5 0
2
k 3 2k 1 k 5 0
2
k 2 9 6k 2k 2 11k 5 0
k 2 5k 4 0
k 2 5k 4 0 ……….(2)
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
k 2 4k k 4 0
b b 2 4ac
The value of ' k ' an be obtained by k
2a
Where from 2 , a 1, b 5, c 4
5 25 4 1 4 5 25 16 5 41
k
2 1 2 2
5 25 4 1 4 5 25 16 5 41
k
2 1 2 2
5 41
The value of ‘k’ from the given equation are
2
(xxii) kx(x – 2) + 6 = 0
Sol:
The given equation is 𝑘𝑥 2 − 2𝑘𝑥 + 6 = 0
a = 6, b = −2k, c = 6
⟹ Given that the roots are real and equal
i.e., D = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 = 0 ⟹ 4𝑘 2 − 4𝑘 × 6 = 0
⟹ 𝑘 2 − 6𝑘 = 0
⟹ k(k – 6) = 0
⟹ k = 0 or 6
∴ The value of k for the given equation is 0 or 6
(xxiii) 𝑥 2 − 4𝑘𝑥 + 𝑘 = 0
Sol:
The given equation is 𝑥 2 − 4𝑘𝑥 + 𝑘 = 0
a = 1, b = −4k, c = k
⟹ Given that the roots are real and equal i.e., D = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 = 0
⟹ 16𝑘 2 − 4𝑘 = 0
⟹ 4𝑘 2 − 𝑘 = 0
⟹ 𝑘(4𝑘 + 1) = 0
1
k = 0, k = 4
1
∴ The value of k for the given equation is 0 or 4
3. In the following determine the set of values of k foe which the green quadratic equation has
real roots:
(i) 2 x 2 3x k 0 (ii) 2 x 2 kx 3 0 (iii) 2 x 2 5 x k 0 (iv) kx 2 6 x 1 0
(v) x 2 kx 9 0
Sol:
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
(i) 2 x 2 3x k 0
Sol:
The given equation is 2 x 2 3x k 0
given that the quadratic equation has real roots i.e., D b2 4ac 0
Given here a 2, b 3, c k
9 4 2 k 0
9 8k 0
9
9 8k k
8
4
The value of k does not exceed to have roots
8
(ii) 2 x 2 kx 3 0
Sol:
The given equation is 2 x 2 kx 3 0
given that the quadratic equation has real roots i.e., D b2 4ac 0
here a 2, b k , c 3
k2 4 23 0
k 2 24 0
k 2 24
k 24 k 2 6 or k 2 6
The value of k does not exceed 2 6 and 2 6 to have real roots
(iii) 2 x 2 5 x k 0
Sol:
The given equation is 2 x 2 5 x k 0
given that the equation has real roots i.e., D b2 4ac 0
25 4 2 k 0
25 8k 0
8k 25
25
The value of k should not exceed to have real roots.
8
(iv) kx 2 6 x 1 0
Sol:
The given equation is kx 2 6 x 1 0
Here a k , b 6, c 1
given that the equation has real roots
i.e., D b2 4ac 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
36 4 k 1 0
36 4k
36
k
7
k 9
The value of k should not exceed the value '9 ' to have real roots.
(v) x 2 kx 9 0
Sol:
The given equation is x 2 kx 9 0
Here a 1, b k , c 9
given that the equation has real roots
i.e., D b2 4ac 0
k 4 1 9 0
2
k 2 36 0
k 2 36
k 6 or k 6
The ‘k’ value exits between 6 and 6 to have the real roots for the given equation.
(vi) 2𝑥 2 + 𝑘𝑥 + 2 = 0
Sol:
The given equation is 2𝑥 2 + 𝑘𝑥 + 2 = 0
Here a = 2, b = k, c = 2
⟹ Given that the equation has real roots
i.e., D = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 ≥ 0
⟹ 𝑘2 − 4 × 2 × 2 ≥ 0
⟹ 𝑘 2 − 16 ≥ 0
⟹ 𝑘 ≥ 16
⟹ 𝑘 ≥ √16
⟹ 𝑘 ≥ 4 or 𝑘 ≤ −4
∴ The k value lies between -4 and 4 to have the real roots for the given equation.
(vii) 3𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 + 𝑘 = 0
Sol:
The given equation has 3𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 + 𝑘 = 0
Here a = 3, b = 2, c= k
⟹ Given that the quadratic equation has real roots i.e., D = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 ≥ 0
⟹4–4×3×k≥0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⟹ 4 – 12k ≥ 0
4
⟹ k ≤ 12
1
⟹k≤3
1
The ‘k’ value should not exceed 3 to have the real roots for the given equation
(viii) 4𝑥 2 − 3𝑘 + 1 = 0
Sol:
The given equation has 4𝑥 2 − 3𝑘 + 1 = 0
Here a = 4, b = -3k, c = 1
⟹ Given that that quadratic equation has real roots i.e., D = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 ≥ 0
= 9𝑘 2 − 16 ≥ 0
16
⟹ 9𝑘 2 ≥ 16 = 𝑘 2 ≥ 9
16 4 4
⟹ 𝑘 ≥ √ 9 ⟹ 𝑘 ≥ 3 𝑜𝑟𝑘 ≤ − 3
4 4
∴ The value of k should be in between − 3 𝑎𝑛𝑑 3 to have real roots for the given
equation.
(ix) 2𝑥 2 + 𝑘𝑥 − 4 = 0
Sol:
The given equation is 2𝑥 2 + 𝑘𝑥 − 4 = 0
Here a = 2, b = k, c = -4
⟹ Given that the quadratic equation has real roots i.e., D = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 ≥ 0
⟹ 𝑘 2 + 32 ≥ 0
⟹ k ≤ √32
⟹k∈R
∴ The k ∈ R for the equation to have the real roots
4k 2 16 4k 4 32k 4 8k 2 k
4k 2 8k 2 4k 31k 4 4
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
4 9k 2 27k
D 4 9k 2 27k
The given equation is a perfect square
D0
4 9k 2 27 k 0
9k 2 27k 0
3k 2 9k 0
k 2 3k 0
k k 3 0
k 0 or k 3
The value of k is '0 ' or '3' for the equation to be a perfect square
5. Find the least positive value of k for which the equation x 2 kx 4 0 has real roots
Sol:
The given equation is x 2 kx 4 0
given that the equation has real roots
i.e., D b2 4ac 0
k 2 4 1 4 0
k 2 16 0
k 4 or k 4
The least positive value of k 4, for the equation to have real roots
6. Find the value of k for which the gives quadratic equation has real and distinct roots
(i) kx 2 2 x 1 0 (ii) kx 2 6 x 1 0 (iii) x 2 kx 9 0
Sol:
(i) kx 2 2 x 1 0
The given equation is kx 2 2 x 1 0
Here a k , b 2, c 1
given that the equation has real and distinct roots
i.e., D b2 4ac 0
4 4 1 k 0
4 4k 0 4k 4
4
4
41
The value of k is 1 i.e., k 1 for which the quadratic equation has real and distinct roots
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
(ii) kx 2 6 x 1 0
The given equation is kx 2 6 x 1 0
Here a k , b 6, c 1
given that the equation has real and distinct roots
Hence D b2 4ac 0
36 4 1 k 0
36 4k 0
4k 36
36
k 1 k 9
41
k 9 for the equation to have real and distinct roots
(iii) x 2 kx 9 0
The given equation is x 2 kx 9 0
Here a 1, b k , c 9
given that the equation is having real and distinct roots
Hence D b2 4ac 0
k 2 4 1 9 0
k 2 36 0
k 2 36
k 6 or k 6
The value of " k " lies in between 6 and 6 to have the real roots for the given equation
c 2 a 2 2ac 4 ab b 2 ac cb 0
c a 2b 0
2
c a 2b 0
c a 2b
Hence, it is proved that c a 2b
4 ac bd 4 a 2 b2 c 2 d 2 0
2
ac bd a 2 b 2 c 2 d 2 0
2
a 2 c 2 b 2 d 2 2abcd a 2 c 2 a 2 d 2 b 2 c 2 b 2 d 2 0
a 2 c 22 d 2 2abcd a 2c 2 a 2 d 2 b 2c 2 b 2 d 2 0
2abcd a 2 d 2 b2c 2 0
abcd abcd a 2 d 2 b2c 2 0
ad bc ad bc ad bc 0
ad bc bc ad 0
Case i:
ab bc 0
ad bc
a c
b d
Case ii:
bc ad 0
bc ad
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
a c
b d
a c
Hence, it is proved that
b d
9. If the roots the equation ax2 2bx c 0 and bx 2 2 cax b 0 are simultaneously real,
then prove that b 2 ac
Sol:
Given equations are ax2 2bx c 0 and bx 2 2 cax b 0
Then two equations are of the form ax 2 bx c 0
given that the roots of these two equations are real. Hence D 0 i.e., b2 4ac 0
Let us assume that ax2 2bx c 0 be equations …….(1)
and bx 2 acx b 0 be equation
2
…….(2)
from equation (1) b 4ac 0 2
2
2 ac 4b 2 0 …….(4)
Given that the roots of (1) and (2) are simultaneously real hence equation (3) equation (4)
4b2 4ac 4ac 4b2
8ac 8b2
b2 ac
Hence, it is proved that b 2 ac
10. If p, q are real and p q, then show that the roots of the equation
p q x 2 5 p q x 2 p q 0 are real and unequal
Sol:
The given equation is p q x 2 5 p q 0
given p, q are real and p q
The discriminant D b24ac
5 p q 4 p q 2 p q
4
25 p q 8 p q
2 2
We know that the square of nay integer is always positive i.e., greater than zero
Hence D b2 4ac 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
As given that p, q are real and p q
25 p q 8 p q 0 i.e., D 0
2 2
4 a2 bc 4 c2 ab b2 ac 0
2
4a a 3 b3 c 3 3abc 0
4a 0 or a3 b3 c3 3abc 0
a 0 or a3 b3 c3 3abc
hence, it is proved
4 a b 8 a 2 b2
2
4 a 2 b 2 2ab 8a 2 8b 2
4 a b c 12 ab bc ca
2
4 a b c 3 ab bc ca
2
4 a 2 b 2 c 2 ab bc ca
2 a b b c c a
2 2 2
Here clearly 0 0, if 0 0 then
a b b c c a 0
2 2 2
a b 0, b c 0, c a 0
Hence a b c
Hence, it is proved.
14. If a, b, c are real numbers such that ac 0, then show that at least one of the equations
ax 2 bx c 0 and ax2 bx c 0 has real roots
Sol:
The given equations are ax 2 bx c 0 ………(1)
And ax bx c 0
2
………(2)
Given equations are of the form ax 2 bx c 0 also given that a, b, c are real numbers
and ac 0
The discriminant D b2 4ac
For equation (1) b2 4ac ………(3)
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
For equation (2) b 2 4 a c
b2 4ac ………(4)
As a, b, c are real and given that ac 0 hence b2 4ac 0 and b2 4ac 0
0 0
Exercise 8.7
1. Find the consecutive numbers whose squares have the sum 85.
Sol:
Let the two consecutive natural numbers be ‘x’ and ‘x + 1’
⇒ Given that the sum of their squares is 85.
Then by hypothesis, we get
𝑥 2 + (𝑥 + 1)2 = 85
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 + 1 = 85
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 + 1 − 85 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 + 84 = 0 ⇒ 2[𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 42 ] = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 − 6𝑥 − 42 = 0 [𝑏𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑚𝑒𝑡ℎ𝑜𝑑 𝑜𝑓 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑖𝑠𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛]
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 7) − 6(𝑥 + 7) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 6)(𝑥 + 7) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = 6 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 7
Case i: if x = 6 x + 1 = 6 + 1 = 7
Case ii: If x = 7 x + 1 = −7 + 1 = −6
∴ The consecutive numbers that the sum of this squares be 85 are 6,7 and −6, −7.
2. Divide 29 into two parts so that the sum of the squares of the parts is 425.
Sol:
Let the two parts be ‘x’ and 29 – x
⇒ Given that the sum of the squares of the parts is 425.
Then, by hypothesis, we have
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (29 − 𝑥)2 = 425
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 58𝑥 + 841 − 425 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 58𝑥 + 416 = 0
⇒ 2[𝑥 2 − 29𝑥 + 208] = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 29𝑥 + 208 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 13𝑥 − 16𝑥 + 208 = 0 [𝐵𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑚𝑒𝑡ℎ𝑜𝑑 𝑜𝑓 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑖𝑠𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛]
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 13) − 16(𝑥 − 13) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 13)(𝑥 − 16) = 0
⇒ x = 13 or x = 16
Case i: If x = 13; 29 – x = 29 – 13 = 16
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Case ii: x = 16; 29 – x = 29 – 16 = 13
∴ The two parts that the sum of the squares of the parts is 425 are 13, 16.
3. Two squares have sides x cm and (x + 4)cm. The sum of this areas is 656 cm2. Find the
sides of the squares.
Sol:
The given sides of two squares = x cm and (x + 4) cm
The sum of their areas = 656 cm2.
The area of the square = side × side.
∴ Area of the square = x (x + 4) cm2.
⇒ Given that sum of the areas is 656 cm2.
Hence by hypothesis, we have
⇒ x(x + 4) + x(x + 4) = 656
⇒ 2x (x + 4) = 656
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 4𝑥 = 328 [𝑑𝑖𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑏𝑜𝑡ℎ 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑠 𝑏𝑦 2]
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 4𝑐 − 328 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 20𝑥 − 16𝑥 − 328 = 0 [∵ 𝐵𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑚𝑒𝑡ℎ𝑜𝑑 𝑜𝑓 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑖𝑠𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛]
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 20) − 16(𝑥 + 20) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 20)(𝑥 − 16) = 0 ⇒ 𝑥 = −20 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 16
Case i: If x = 16; x + 4 = 20
∴ The sides of the squares are 16 cm and 20 cm.
Note: No negative value is considered as the sides will never be measured negatively.
4. The sum of two numbers is 48 and their product is 432. Find the numbers
Sol:
Given the sum of two numbers is 48
Let the two numbers be x and 48 – x also given their product is 432.
Hence x(48 – x) = 432
⇒ 48x – x2 = 432
⇒ 48x − x2 – 432 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 48𝑥 + 432 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 36𝑥 − 12𝑥 + 432 = 0 [By method of factorisation]
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 36) − 12(𝑥 − 36) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 36)(𝑥 − 12) = 0
⇒ x = 36 or x = 12
∴ The two numbers are 12, 36.
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
5. If an integer is added to its square, the sum is 90. Find the integer with the help of quadratic
equation.
Sol:
Let the integer be ‘x’
Given that if an integer is added to its square, the sum is 90.
⇒ 𝑥 + 𝑥 2 = 90
⇒ 𝑥 + 𝑥 2 − 90 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 − 9𝑥 − 90 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 10) − 9(𝑥 + 10) = 0
⇒ x = −10 or x = 9
∴ The value of an integer are -10 or 9.
6. Find the whole numbers which when decreased by 20 is equal to 69 times the reciprocal of
the members.
Sol:
1
Let the whole number be x as it is decreased by 20 ⇒ (x – 20) = 69. (2)
1
⇒ 𝑥. 20 = 69. (𝑥)
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 20) = 69
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 20𝑥 − 69 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 23 + 3𝑥 − 69 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 23) + 3(𝑥 − 623) = 0
⇒ (x – 23) (x + 3) = 0
⇒ x = 23; x = −3
As the whole numbers are always positive, x = −3 is not considered.
∴ The whole number x = 23.
8. The sum of the squares of the two consecutive odd positive integers as 394. Find them.
Sol:
Let the consecutive odd positive integers are 2x – 1 and 2x + 1
Given that the sum of the squares is 394.
⇒ (2𝑥 − 1)2 + (2𝑥 + 1)2 = 394
⇒ 4𝑥 2 + 1 − 4𝑥 + 4𝑥 2 + 1 + 4𝑥 = 394
⇒ 8𝑥 2 + 2 = 394
⇒ 4𝑥 2 = 392
⇒ 𝑥 2 = 36
⇒x=6
As x = 6, 2x – 1 = 2 × 6 – 1 = 11
2x + 1 = 2 × 6 + 1 = 13
∴ The two consecutive odd positive numbers are 11 and 13.
9. The sum of two numbers is 8 and 15 times the sum of their reciprocals is also 8. Find the
numbers.
Sol:
Let the numbers be x and 8 – x
Given that the sum of these numbers is 8
And 15 times the sum of their reciprocals as 8
1 1
⇒ 15 (𝑥 + 8−𝑥) = 8
(8−𝑥)+𝑥
⇒ 15 ( 𝑥(8−𝑥) ) = 8
⇒ 15 ((8 − 𝑥) + 𝑥) = 8(𝑥(8 − 𝑥))
⇒ 15 [8 − 𝑥 + 𝑥] = 8𝑥(8 − 𝑥)
⇒ 120 = 64x – 8x2
⇒ 8𝑥 2 − 64𝑥 + 120 = 0
⇒ 8[𝑥 2 − 8𝑥 + 15] = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 − 3𝑥 + 15 = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 5)(𝑥 − 3) = 0
⇒ x = 5 or x = 3
∴ The two numbers are 5 and 3.
6
10. The sum of a numbers and its positive square root is 25. Find the numbers.
Sol:
Let the number be x
By the hypothesis, we have
6
⇒ x + √𝑥 = 25
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ let us assume that x = y2, we get
6
⇒ 𝑦 2 + 𝑦 = 25
⇒ 25𝑦 2 + 25𝑦 − 6 = 0
−𝑏±√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐
The value of ‘y’ can be obtained by y = 2𝑎
Where a = 25, b = 25, c = −6
−25±√625−600
⇒y= 50
−25±35 1 −11
⇒y= ⇒ 𝑦 = 5 𝑜𝑟
50 10
1 2 1
𝑥 = 𝑦 2 = (5) = 25
1
∴ 𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑛𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟 𝑥 = 25.
11. The sum of a number and its square is 63/4. Find the numbers.
Sol:
Let the number be x.
63
Given that the sum of x and its square = 4
2 63
⇒x+𝑥 = 4
⇒ 4x + 4x – 63 = 0
2
⇒ 4x2 + 4x – 63 = 0
⇒ 4x2 + 4x – 63 = 0 ….(i)
The value of x can be found by the formula
−𝑏±√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐
𝑥= 2𝑎
⇒ ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑎 = 4, 𝑏 = 4 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐 = −63 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 (i)
−4±√16−4×4×−63
𝑥= 2×4
−4±√16+16×63
= 2×4
−4±√16+1008 7 −4−√16+1008 −9
𝑥= = 2;𝑥 = =
8 8 2
7 −9
∴ The values of x i. e. , the numbers is 2 , .
2
12. There are three consecutive integers such that the square of the first increased by the
product of the first increased by the product of the others the two gives 154. What are the
integers?
Sol:
Let the three consecutive numbers x, x+1 and x +8.
According to the hypothesis given
𝑥 2 + (𝑥 + 1)(𝑥 + 2) = 154.
⇒ 𝑥 2 + [𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 + 2] = 154
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 = 152
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 − 152 = 0 …(i)
−𝑏±√𝑏2 −4𝑎𝑐
𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑜𝑓 ′𝑥 ′ 𝑐𝑎𝑛 𝑏𝑒 𝑜𝑏𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 𝑏𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑢𝑙𝑎 𝑥 = 2𝑎
ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑎 = 2, 𝑏 = 3 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐 = 152 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 (𝑖)
−3+√9−4×2×−152
𝑥= 2×3
−3+√9+8×152 −19
𝑥= = 8,
6 2
𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑥
If x = 8, x + 1 = 9, x + 2 = 10
∴ The three consecutive integers are 8, 9, and 10
13. The product of two successive integral multiples of 5 is 300. Determine the multiples.
Sol:
Given that the product of two successive integral multiples of 5 is 300.
Let the integers be 5x, and 5(x + 1)
Then, by the integers be 5x and 5(x + 1)
Then, by the hypothesis, we have
5x ∙ 5(x + 1) = 300
⇒ 25x (x + 1) = 300
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 = 12
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 12 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 4𝑥 − 3𝑥 − 12 = 0
⇒ x(x + 4) −3(x + 4) = 0
⇒ (x + 4) (x – 3) = 0
⇒ x = −4 or x = 3
If x = −4, 5x = −20, 5(x + 1) = −15
x = 3, 5x = 15, 5(x + 1) = 20
∴ The two successive integral multiples are 15, 20 or −15, −20.
14. The sum of the squares of two numbers as 233 and one of the numbers as 3 less than twice
the other number find the numbers.
Sol:
Let the number be x
Then the other number = 2x – 3
According to the given hypothesis,
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (2𝑥 − 3)2 = 233
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 4𝑥 2 + 9 − 12𝑥 = 233
⇒ 5𝑥 2 − 12𝑥 − 224 = 0 …. (i)
−𝑏±√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐
The value of ‘x’ can be obtained by the formula 𝑥 = 2𝑎
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Here a = 5, b = 12 and c = -224 from (i)
−(−12)+√144+20×224
𝑥= =8
10
−(−12)−√144+20×224 −28
𝑥= =
10 5
𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑥 = 8
2x – 3 = 16 – 3 = 15
∴ The two numbers are 8 and 15.
15. Find the consecutive even integers whose squares have the sum 340.
Sol:
Let the consecutive even integers be 2x and 2x + 2.
Then according to the given hypothesis,
(2𝑥)2 + (2𝑥 + 2)2 = 340
⇒ 8𝑥 2 + 8𝑥 − 336 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 42 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 − 6𝑥 − 42 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 7) − 6(𝑥 + 7) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 7)(𝑥 − 6) = 0
⇒ x = − 7 or x = 6
Considering, the positive integers of x.
⇒ x = 6; 2x = 12 and 2x + 2 = 14.
∴ The two consecutive even integers are 12 and 14.
4
16. The difference of two numbers is 4. If the difference of their reciprocals is 21. Find the
numbers.
Sol:
Let the two numbers be x and x – 4
Given that the difference of two numbers is 4.
1 1 4
By the given hypothesis, we have 𝑥−4 − 𝑥 = 21
𝑥−𝑥+4 4
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥−4) = 21
⇒ 84 = 4x(x – 4)
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 − 21 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 + 3𝑥 − 21 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 7) + 3(𝑥 − 7) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 7)(𝑥 + 3) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = 7 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = −3 and
If x = −3, x – 4 = −3 −4 = −7
Hence, required numbers are 3, 7 and −3, −7
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
17. Let us find two natural numbers which differ by 3 and whose squares have the sum 117.
Sol:
Let the numbers be x and x – 3
By the given hypothesis,
𝑥 2 + (𝑥 − 3)2 = 117
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 2 + 9 − 6𝑥 − 117 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 6𝑥 − 108 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 − 54 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 9) + 6(𝑥 − 9) = 0
⇒ (x – 9) (x + 6) = 0
⇒ x = 9 or x = −6
Considering positive value of x
x = 9, x – 3 = 9 – 3 = 6
∴ The two numbers be 9 and 6.
18. The sum of the squares of three consecutive natural numbers as 149. Find the numbers
Sol:
Let the numbers be x, x + 1 and x + 2 according to the given hypothesis.
𝑥 2 + (𝑥 + 1)2 + (𝑥 + 2)2 = 149
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 2 + 1 + 2𝑥 + 𝑥 2 + 4 + 4𝑥 = 149
⇒ 3𝑥 2 + 6𝑥 + 5 − 149 = 0
⇒ 3𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 144 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 − 48 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 8) − 6(𝑥 + 8) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 8)(𝑥 − 6) = 0
⇒ x = −8 or x = 6
Considering the positive value of x
𝑥 = 6, 𝑥 + 1 = 7 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥 + 2 = 8
∴ The three consecutive numbers are 6, 7, 8.
1
19. Sum of two numbers is 16. The sum of their reciprocals is 3. Find the numbers.
Sol:
Given that the sum of two numbers is 16.
Let the two numbers be x and 16 – x
By the given hypothesis, we have
1 1 1
⇒ 𝑥 + 16−𝑥 = 3
16−𝑥+𝑥 1
⇒ 𝑥(16−𝑥) = 3
⇒ 48 = 16x – x2
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 16𝑥 + 48 = 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 12𝑥 − 4𝑥 + 48 = 0
⇒ x(x – 12) – 4(x – 12) = 0
⇒ (x – 12) (x – 4) = 0
⇒ x = 12 or x = 4
∴ The two numbers are 4 and 12.
17
21. The sum of a number and its reciprocal is . Find the number.
4
Sol:
Let the number be ‘x’
According to the given hypothesis
1 17
𝑥+𝑥 = 4
𝑥 2 +1 17
⇒ =
𝑥 4
⇒ 4(𝑥 2 + 1) = 17𝑥
⇒ 4𝑥 2 − 17𝑥 + 4 = 0
⇒ 4𝑥 2 − 16𝑥 − 𝑥 + 4 = 0
⇒ 4𝑥(𝑥 − 4) − 1(𝑥 − 4) = 0
1
⇒ 𝑥 = 4 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 4
∴ 𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑥 = 4
22. A two-digit number is such that the products of its digits is 8. When 18 is subtracted from
the number, the digits interchange their places. Find the number?
Sol:
Let the two digits be x and x – 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Given that the product of their digits is 8.
⇒ x(x – 2) = 8
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 8 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 2𝑥 − 8 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 4) + 2(𝑥 − 4) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 4)(𝑥 + 2) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = 4 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = −2
Considering the positive value x = 4, x – 2 = 2.
∴ The two digit number is 42.
23. A two digits number is such that the product of the digits is 12. When 36 is added to the
number, the digits inter change their places determine the number
Sol:
Let the tens digit be x
12
Then, the units digit
x
12
Number 10x
x
And, number obtained by interchanging the
12 120
Digits 10 x x.
x x
12 120
10 x 36 x
x x
12 120
9x 36 0
x
9 x 2 108 36 x 0
9 x 2 4 x 12 0
x 2 6 x 2 x 12 0
x x 6 2 x 6 0
x 2 x 6 0 x 2 or 6
x 8 or x 2
x 2 3x 504 0
x 2 24 x 21x 504 0
x x 24 21 x 24 0
x 24 x 21 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
x 24 or x 21
Case 1: If x 24, x 3 21
Case 1: If x 21, x 3 24
The two numbers are 21, 24 or 21, 24
26. Two number differ by 4 and their product is 192. Find the numbers?
Sol: Let the two numbers be x and x 4
Given that their product is 192
x x 4 192
x 2 4 x 192 0
x 2 16 x 12 x 192 0
x x 16 12 x 16 0
x 16 x 12 0
x 16 or x 12
Considering the positive value of x
x 16, x 4 16 4 12
The two numbers are 12,16
27. A two-digit number is 4 times the sum of its digits and twice the product of its digits. Find
the numbers
Sol:
Let the digits at tens and units place of the number be x and y respectively then, it is
given that 10x y
10 x y 4 (sum of digits) and 2xy
10 x y 4 x y and 10 x y 3xy
10 x y 4 x 4 y and 10 x y 3xy
6 x 3 y 0 and 10 x y 3xy 0
y 2 x and 10 x 2 x 2 xy 2 x
12 x 4 x 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
4 x 2 12 x 0
4 x x 3 0
4 x 0 or x 3
here we have y 2 x 2 3 6
x 3 and y 6
Hence 10 x y 10 3 6 36
The required two digit number is 36
28. The sum of the squares of two positive integers is 208. If the square of the large numbr is
18 times the smaller. Find the numbers
Sol:
Let the smaller number be x. Then square of a larger number 18x
Also, square of the smaller number x 2
It is given that the sum of the square of the integers is 208.
x 2 18 x 208
x 2 18 x 208 0
x 2 26 x 8x 208 0
x 26 x 8 0 x 8 or x 26
1
29. The sum of two numbers is 18. The sum of their reciprocals is . Find the numbers
4
Sol: Let The numbers be x and 18 x
according to the given hypothesis
1 1 1
x 18 x 4
18 x x 1
x 18 x 4
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
72 18x x2
x 2 18x 72 0
x 2 6 x 12 x 72 0
x x 6 12 x 12 0
x 6 or x 12
The two number are 6,12
1 1 3
30. The sum of two numbers a and b. is 15. and the sum of their reciprocals and is .
a b 10
Find the numbers a and b.
Sol:
Let us assume a number ' x '
1 1 3
Such that
x 15 x 10
15 x x 3
Hence
x 15 x 10
150 45 x 3x 2
3x 2 45x 150 0
x 2 15x 50 0
22 10 x 5 x 50 0
x x 10 5 x 10 0
x 10 x 5 0
x 5 or x 10
Case i: If x a, a 5 and
b 15 x, b 10.
Case ii: if x 15 a 15 10 5 x x a 10
b 15 10 5
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
a 5, b 10 or a 10 and b 5
1
31. The sum of two numbers is 9. The sum of their reciprocals is . Find the numbers.
2
Sol:
Given that the sum of two numbers is 9 Let the two numbers be x and 9 x
By the given hypothesis, we have
1 1 1
x 9 x 2
9 x x 1
x 9 x 2
18 9x x 2
x 2 9 x 18 0
x 2 6 x 3x 18 0
x x 6 3 x 6 0
x 6 x 3 0
x 6 or x 3
The two numbers are 3 and 6
32. Three consecutive positive integers are such that the sum of the square of the first and the
product of other two is 46. Find the integers.
Sol:
Let the three consecutive positive integers be x, x 1 and x 2
According to the hypothesis, we have
x 2 x 1 x 2 46
x 2 x 2 3x 2 46
2 x 2 3x 44 0
2 x 2 8 x 11x 44 0
2 x x 4 11 x 4 0
2 x 11 x 4 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
11
x 4 or x
2
Considering the positive value of x
x 4, x 1 4 and x 2 6
The three consecutive numbers are 4,5 and 6.
33. The difference of squares of two numbers is 88. If the larger number is 5 less than twice the
smaller number, then find the two numbers
Sol:
Let the smaller number be x. Then, larger number 2 x 5
It is given that the difference of the square of the number is 88.
2 x 5 x 2 88
2
4 x 2 25 20 x x 2 88
3x 2 20 x 63 0
3x 2 27 x 7 x 63 0
3x x 9 7 x 9 0
x 9 3x 7 0
7
x 9 or
3
As a digit can never be negative, x 9
The numbers 2 x 5
2 9 5 13
Hence, required numbers are 9 and 13
34. The difference of square of two numbers is 180 . the square of the smaller number is 8
times the large numbers find two numbers
Sol:
Let the number be x
By the given hypothesis, we have
x 2 8 x 180
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
x 2 8 x 180 0
x 2 10 x 18x 180 0
x x 10 18 x 10 0
x 10 x 18 0
x 10 or x 18
Case (i): x 18
8x 8 18 144
Larger number 144 12
Case (ii): x 10
Square of larger number 8x 80 here no perfect square exist, hence the numbers are
18,12
Exercise 8.8
2. A passenger train takes 3 hours less for a journey of 360 km, if its speed is increased by 10
km/hr from its usual speed. What is the usual speed?
Sol:
Let the usual speed be x km/hr.
Distance covered in the journey = 360 km
Now,
360 𝑘𝑚 360
Time taken by the train with the usual speed = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚 /ℎ𝑟 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥
Given that if speed is increased by 10 km/hr, the same train takes 3 hours less.
⇒ Speed of the train = (x + 10) km/hr and time taken by the train after increasing the speed
360 𝑘𝑚 360
= (𝑥+10)𝑘𝑚 /ℎ𝑟 = 𝑥+10 ℎ𝑟
3. A fast train takes one hour less than a slow train for a journey of 200 km. If the speed of the
slow train is 10 km/hr less than that of the fast train, find the speed of the two trains.
Sol:
Let the speed of the slow train be x km/hr.
Given that speed of the slow train is 10 km/hr less than that of fast train
⇒ Speed of the fast train = (x + 10) km/hr
Total distance covered in the journey = 200 km
200 𝑘𝑚 200
Time taken by fast train = (𝑥+10)𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = 𝑥+10 ℎ𝑟 and
200 𝑘𝑚 200
Time taken by slow train = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥
Given that faster train takes 1 hour less than that of slow train
800 800
i.e., − 𝑥+10 = 1
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 800 (𝑥 − 𝑥+10) = 1
𝑥+10−𝑥
⇒ 800 (𝑥((𝑥+10) ) = 1
⇒ 800 (10) = x (x + 10) = 1
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 8000 = x2 + 10x
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 − 2000 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (50 − 40)𝑥 + (50𝑥 − 40) = 0
⇒ ( 𝑥 2 + 50𝑥 − 40𝑥 + (50𝑥 − 40)) = 0
⇒ x (x + 50) −40(x + 50) = 0
⇒ (x + 50) (x – 40) = 0
⇒ x + 50 = 0 or x – 40 = 0
⇒ x = −50 or x = 40
Clearly x cannot be a negative volume since it is speed. So, x = 40
∴ Speed of slow train is 40 km/hr
Now,
Speed of fast train = (x + 10) km/hr = (40 + 10) km/hr = 50 km/hr
4. A passenger train takes one hour less for a journey of 150 km if its speed is increased by 5
km/hr from its usual speed. Find the usual speed of the train.
Sol:
Let the usual speed of the train be x km/hr
Distance covered in the journey = 150 km
150 𝑘𝑚 150
⇒ Time taken by the train with usual speed = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥
Given that, if the speed is increased by 5 km/hr from i to usual speed, the train takes one
hour less for the same journey.
⇒ Speed of the train = (x + 5) km/hr
150 𝑘𝑚 150
Now, time taken by the train after increasing the speed = (𝑥+5)𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = 𝑥+5 ℎ𝑟
150 150
We have, − 𝑥+5 = 1
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 150 (𝑥 − 𝑥+5) = 1
𝑥+5−𝑥
⇒ 150 (𝑥((𝑥+5) ) = 1
⇒ 150 (5) = x (x + 5)
⇒ 750 = x2 + 5x
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 5𝑥 − 750 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 30𝑥 − 25𝑥 + (30 × −25) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 30) − 25(𝑥 + 30) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 30)(𝑥 − 25) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −30 𝑜𝑟 (𝑥 − 25) = 0
⇒ 𝑆𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒, 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑑 𝑐𝑎𝑛𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑏𝑒 𝑛𝑒𝑔𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒𝑠, 𝑠𝑜 𝑥 = 25.
∴ usual speed of the train = 25 km/hr
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
5. The time taken by a person to cover 150 km was 2.5 hrs more than the time taken in the
return journey. If he returned at a speed of 10 km/hr more than the speed of going, what
was the speed per hour in each direction?
Sol:
Let the going speed of the person be x km/hr
Given that, the return speed is 10 km/hr more than the going speed
⇒ Return speed of the person = (x + 10) km/hr
Total distance covered = 150 km.
150 𝑘𝑚 150
Time taken for going = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥
150 𝑘𝑚 150
Time taken for returning = (𝑥+10)𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟
= (𝑥+10) ℎ𝑟
Given that, time taken for going is 2.5 hours more than the time for returning
150 150
i.e. ℎ𝑟 − 𝑥+10 ℎ𝑟 = 2.5 ℎ𝑟
𝑥
1 1 25
⇒ 150 (𝑥 − 𝑥+10) = 10
𝑥+10−𝑥 25
⇒ 150 (𝑥(𝑥+10)) = 10
𝑥(𝑥+10)
⇒ 6 (10) = 10
2
⇒ 60 × 10 = 𝑥 + 10𝑥
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 − 600 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (30 − 20)𝑥 + (30 × −20) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 = 30𝑥 − 20𝑥 + (30 × −20) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 30) − 20(𝑥 + 30) = 0
⇒ (x + 30) (x – 20) = 0
⇒ x + 30 = 0 or x – 20 = 0
⇒ x = −30 or x = 20
Since, speed cannot be negative. So x = 20
∴ speed of the person when going = 20 km/hr
Now, speed of the person when returning = (x + 10) km/hr
= (20 + 10) km/hr
= 30 km/hr
6. A plane left 40 minutes late due to bad weather and in order to reach its destination, 1600
km away in time, it had to increase its speed by 400 km/hr from its usual speed. Find the
usual speed of the plane.
Sol:
Let the usual speed of the plane be x km/hr
Total distance travelled = 1600 km
1600 𝑘𝑚 1600
⇒ Time taken by the plane with usual speed = = ℎ𝑟
𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 𝑥
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Given that, if speed is increased by 400 km/hr, the plane takes 40 minutes less than that of
the usual time. Speed of the plane after increasing = (x + 400) km/hr
1600 𝑘𝑚 1600
⇒ Time taken by the plane with increasing speed = 𝑘𝑚 = 𝑥+400 ℎ𝑟
(𝑥+400)
ℎ𝑟
Now,
1600 1600 40 40
ℎ𝑟 − 𝑥+400 ℎ𝑟 = 60 ℎ𝑟 [∵ 40 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠 = 60 ℎ𝑟 𝑎𝑠 1 ℎ𝑟 = 60 𝑚𝑖𝑛]
𝑥
1 1 40
⇒ 1600 [𝑥 − 𝑥+400] = 60
𝑥+400−𝑥 40
⇒ 1600 [𝑥(𝑥+400)] = 60
⇒ 40(400 × 60) = 𝑥(𝑥 + 400)
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 400𝑥 − 960000 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (1800 − 800)𝑥 + (1800 × (−800)) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 2 ) + 1800𝑥 − 800𝑥 + (1800 × −800) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 1800) − 800(𝑥 + 1800) = 0
⇒ (x + 1800) (x – 800) = 0
⇒ x = −1800 or x – 800 = 0
⇒ x = −1800 or x = 800
Since, speed cannot be negative. So, x = 800
∴ Usual speed of the plans is 800 km/hr.
7. An aeroplane takes 1 hour less for a journey of 1200 km if its speed is increased by 100
km/hr from its usual speed. Find its usual speed.
Sol:
Let the usual speed of the plane be x km/hr.
Distance covered in the journey = 1800 km
1200 𝑘𝑚 1200
⇒ Time taken by the plane with usual speed = 𝑘𝑚 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥 𝑥
ℎ𝑟
Now, speed is increased by 100 km/hr and the time taken is 1 hour less for the same
journey.
⇒ Speed of the plane after increased = (x + 100) km/hr and Time taken by plane with
1800 𝑘𝑚 1800
increased speed = (𝑥+100)𝑘𝑚 = 𝑥+100 ℎ𝑟
ℎ𝑟
Now, we have
1800 1800
− 𝑥+100 = 1
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 1800 (𝑥 − 𝑥+100) = 1
𝑥+100−𝑥
⇒ 1800 (𝑥(𝑥+100)) = 1
⇒ 1200(100) = x(x + 100)
⇒ 120000 = 𝑥 2 + 100𝑥
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 100𝑥 − 120000 = 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (400 − 300)𝑥 + (400 × −300) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 400𝑥 − 300𝑥 + (400 × −300) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 400) − 300(𝑥 + 400) = 0
⇒ (x + 400) (x – 300) = 0
⇒ x + 400 = 0 or x – 300 = 0
⇒ x = −400 or x = 300
Since, speed cannot be negative so, x = 300 ∴ usual speed of the plane = 300 km/hr
8. A passenger train takes 2 hours less for a journey of 300 km if its speed is increased by 5
km/hr from its usual speed. Find the usual speed of the train.
Sol:
Let the usual speed of the train be x km/hr
Distance covered in the journey = 300 km
300 𝑘𝑚 300
Time taken by the train with usual speed = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥
Now,
If the speed is increased by 5 km/hr, the train takes 2 hours less for the same journey.
⇒ speed of the train after increasing = (x + 5) km/hr
300 𝑘𝑚 300
And time taken by the train after increasing the speed = (𝑥+5)𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = 𝑥+5 ℎ𝑟
We have,
300 300
ℎ𝑟 − 𝑥+5 ℎ𝑟 = 2ℎ𝑟𝑠
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 300 (𝑥 − 𝑥+5) = 2
𝑥+5−𝑥
⇒ 300 (𝑥(𝑥+5)) = 2
⇒ 300(5) = 2(𝑥(𝑥 + 5))
⇒ 750 = 𝑥 2 + 5𝑥
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 5𝑥 − 750 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 30𝑥 − 25𝑥 + (30 × −25) = 0
⇒ (x + 30) (x – 25) = 0
⇒ x + 30 = 0 or x – 25 = 0
⇒ x = −30 or x = 25
Since, speed cannot be negative. So x = 25
∴ The usual speed of the train = 25 km/hr.
9. A train covers a distance of 90 km at a uniform speed. Had the speed been 15 km/hour
more, it would have taken 30 minutes less for the journey. Find the original speed of the
train.
Sol:
Let the original speed of the train be x km/hr
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Distance covered = 90 km.
90 𝑘𝑚 90
⇒ Time taken by the train with original speed = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥
Now, if the speed of the train is increased by 15 km/hr, the train takes 30 minutes less for
the same journey
⇒ Speed of the train after increasing = (x + 15) km/hr and the time taken by the train after
90 𝑘𝑚 90
increasing the speed = (𝑥+15) 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = 𝑥+15 ℎ𝑟
Now,
90 90
ℎ𝑟 − 𝑥+15 ℎ𝑟 = 30 𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 90 ℎ𝑟 (𝑥 − 𝑥+15 ℎ𝑟) = 30𝑚𝑖𝑛
1 1 30
⇒ 90 (𝑥 − 𝑥+15) = 60 ℎ𝑟 [∵ 1ℎ𝑟 = 30 𝑚𝑖𝑛]
𝑥+15−𝑥 1
⇒ 90 (𝑥(𝑥+15)) = 2
⇒ 90 × 15 × 2 = 𝑥(𝑥 + 15)
⇒ 2700 = 𝑥 2 + 15𝑥
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 15𝑥 − 2700 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (60 − 45)𝑥 + (60 × (−45)) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 60𝑥 − 45𝑥 + (60 × −45) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 60) − 45(𝑥 + 60) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 60)(𝑥 − 45) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 + 60 = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 − 45 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −60 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 45
𝑆𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒, 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑑 𝑐𝑎𝑛𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑏𝑒 𝑛𝑒𝑔𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒. 𝑆𝑜, 𝑥 = 45
∴ Original speed of the train = 45 km/hr
10. A train travels 360 km at a uniform speed. If the speed had been 5 km/hr more, it would
have taken 1 hour less for the same journey. Find the speed of the train.
Sol:
Let the speed of the train be x km/hr
Distance covered by the train = 360 km
360 𝑘𝑚 360
⇒ Time taken by the train with initial speed = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥
Now, if the speed is 5 km/hr more, the train takes 1 hour less for the same journey.
⇒ Speed of the train after increasing the speed = (x + 5) km/hr
360 𝑘𝑚 360
And time taken by the train with increased speed = (𝑥+5)𝑘𝑚 = 𝑥+5 ℎ𝑟
ℎ𝑟
Now,
360 360
ℎ𝑟 − 𝑥+5 ℎ𝑟 = 1ℎ𝑟
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 360 (𝑥 − 𝑥+5) = 1
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
𝑥+5−𝑥
⇒ 360 (𝑥(𝑥+5)) = 1
⇒ 360 × 5 = 1 × 𝑥(𝑥 + 5)
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 5𝑐 − 1800 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 45𝑥 − 40𝑥 + (𝑥 + 45) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 45) − 40(𝑥 + 45) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 45)(𝑥 − 40) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 + 45 = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 − 40 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −45 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 40
Since, speed is always a positive value i.e. x = 0 ⇒ x = 40
∴ The speed of the train = 40 km/hr
11. An express train takes 1 hour less than a passenger train to travel 132 km between Mysore
and Bangalore (without taking into consideration the time they stop at intermediate
stations). If the average speed of the express train is 11 kin/hr more than that of the
passenger train, find the average speeds of the two trains.
Sol:
Let the speed of the passenger train be x km/hr
Given that the average speed of the express train is 11 km/hr more than that of passenger
train.
⇒ Average speed of express train = (x + 11) km/hr
Now,
138 𝑘𝑚 13
Time taken by the passenger train = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥
132 𝑘𝑚 138
And time taken by the express train = (𝑥+11)𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = 𝑥+11 ℎ𝑟
Given that, express train takes 1 hour less than that of passenger train to reach the destiny.
132 132
⇒ ℎ𝑟 − 𝑥+11 ℎ𝑟 = 1ℎ𝑟
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 132 (𝑥 − 𝑥+11) = 11
𝑥+11−𝑥
⇒ 132 (𝑥(𝑥+11)) = 1
⇒ 132 × 11 = 𝑥(𝑥 + 11) × 1
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 11𝑥 − 1452 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (44𝑥 − 33𝑥) + (44 × −33) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 44𝑥 − 33𝑥 + (44 × −33) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 4) − 33(𝑥 + 44) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 44)(𝑥 − 33) = 0
⇒ x + 44 = 0 or x – 33 = 0
⇒ x = −44 or x = 33
Since, speed cannot be in negative values. So, x = 33
∴ Average speed of the slower train i.e. passenger train = 33 km/hr
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
And average speed of express train = (x + 11) km/hr = (33 + 11) km/hr = 44 km/hr.
12. An aeroplane left 50 minutes later than its scheduled time, and in order to reach the
destination, 1250 km away, in time, it had to increase its speed by 250 km/hr from its usual
speed. Find its usual speed.
Sol:
Let the usual speed of the plane be x km/hr
Distance covered by the plane = 1250 km
1250 𝑘𝑚
⇒ Time taken by the plane with usual speed = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = 1250 ℎ𝑟
To cover the delay of 50 minutes, the speed of the plane is increased by 250 km/hr
Now,
Speed of the plane after increasing = (x + 250) km/hr and
1250 𝑘𝑚 1250
Time taken by the plane with increased speed = (𝑥+250) 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = 𝑥+250 ℎ𝑟
From the data we have,
1250 1250
ℎ𝑟 − 𝑥+250 ℎ𝑟 = 50 𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝑥
1 1 50
⇒ 1250 ℎ𝑟 (𝑥 − 𝑥+250) = 60 ℎ𝑟 [∵ 1ℎ𝑟 = 50 𝑚𝑖𝑛]
𝑥+250−𝑥 1
⇒ 250 (𝑥(𝑥+250)) = 6
⇒ 250 × 250 × 6 = 𝑥(𝑥 + 250) × 1
⇒ 375000 = 𝑥 2 + 250𝑥
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 250𝑥 − 375000 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (750 − 500)𝑥 + (750 × −500) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 750𝑥 − 500𝑥 + (750 × −500) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 750)(𝑥 − 500) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 750) = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 500 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −750 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 500
Since, speed cannot be a negative value. So, x = 500
∴ the usual speed of the plane = 500 km/hr.
Exercise 8.9
1. Ashu is x years old while his mother Mrs Veena is x years old. Five years hence Mrs Veena
will be three times old as Ashu. Find their present ages.
Sol:
Given that, Ashu is x years old while his mother Mrs. Veena is x2 years old.
⇒ Ashu’s present age = x years and Mrs. Veena’s present age = x2 years
And also given that, after 5 years Mrs. Veena will be three times old as
Ashu.
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ Ashu’s age after 5 years = (x + 5)years
And Mrs. Veena’s age after 5 years = (x2 + 5)years
But given that,
⇒ (𝑥 2 + 5) = 3(𝑥 + 5)
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 5 = 3𝑥 + 15
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 − 10 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 + 2𝑥 − 10 = 0
⇒ x(x – 5) +2(x – 5) = 0 ⇒ (x – 5) (x + 2) = 0
⇒ x – 5 = 0 or x + 2 = 0
⇒ x = 5 or x = −2
Since, age cannot be in negative values. So, x = 5 years.
∴ Present age of Ashu is x = 5 years and
Present age of Mrs. Veena is 𝑥 2 ⇒ 52 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠 ⇒ 25𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠.
2. The sum of the ages of a man and his son is 45 years. Five years ago, the product of their
ages was four times the man’s age at the time. Find their present ages.
Sol:
Let the present age of the son be x years
Given that,
sum of present ages of man and his son is 45 years.
⇒ Man’s present age = (45 – x)years
And also given that,
five years ago, the product of their ages was four times the man’s age at the time.
⇒ Man’s age before 5 years = (45 – x – 5) years = (40 – x) years
And son’s age before 5 years = (x – 5) years
But, given that (40 – x) (x – 5) = 4(40 – x)
⇒x–5=4
⇒ x = 9 years
⇒ Son’s present age ⇒ x = 9 years
Now, Man’s present age ⇒ (45 – x) years = (45 – 9) years = 36 years
∴ The present ages of man and son are 36 years and 9 years respectively.
3. The product of Shikha’s age five years ago and her age 8 years later is 30, her age at both
times being given in years. Find her present age.
Sol:
Let the present age of shika be x years.
Given that,
The product of her age five years ago and her age 8 years later is 30
Now,
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Shika’s age five years ago = (x – 5) years
And Shika’s age 8 years later = (x + 8) years
Given that.
(𝑥 − 5)(𝑥 + 8) = 30
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 8𝑥 − 5𝑥 − 40 = 30
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 − 70 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 − 7𝑥 − 70 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 10) − 7(𝑥 + 10) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 10)(𝑥 − 7) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 + 10 = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 − 7 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −10 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 7
Since, age cannot be in negative values, So x = 7 years
∴ The present age of shika is 7 years.
4. The product of Ramu’s age (in years) five years ago and his age (in years) nine years later
is 15. Determine Ramu’s present age.
Sol:
Let the present age of Ramu be a x years
Given that,
The product of his age five years ago and his age y nine years later is 15.
Now, Ramu’s age five years ago = (x – 5) years
And Ramu’s age nine years later = (x + 9) years
Given that,
(𝑥 − 5)(𝑥 + 9) = 15
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 9𝑥 − 5𝑥 − 45 = 15
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 4𝑥 − 60 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 − 6𝑥 − 60 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 10) − 6(𝑥 + 10) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 10)(𝑥 − 6) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 + 10 = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 − 6 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −10 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 6
Since, age cannot be in negative values, So x = 6 years
∴ The present age of shika is 6 years.
5. Is the following situation possible? If so, determine their present ages. The sum of the ages
of two friends is 20 years. Four years ago, the product of their ages in years was 48.
Sol:
Let the present age of friend 1 be a x years
Given that,
Sum of the ages of two friends = 20 years
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ Present age of friend 2 = (20 – x) years
And also given that, four years ago, the product of their age was 48.
⇒ Age of friend 1 before 4 years = (x – 4) years
And age of friend 2 before 4 years = (20 – x – 4) years = (16 – x) years
Given that,
(𝑥 − 4)(16 − 𝑥) = 48
⇒ 16𝑥 − 𝑥 2 − 64 + 4𝑥 = 48
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 20𝑥 + 112 = 0
Let D be the discriminant of this quadratic equation.
Then, D = (−20)2 − 4 × 112 × 1 = 400 − 448 = −48 ∠0
We know that, to have real roots for a quadratic equation that discriminant D must be
greater than or equal to 0 i.e. D ≥ 0
But D ∠ 0 in the above. So, above equation does not have real roots
Hence, the given situation is not possible.
6. A girl is twice as old as her sister. Four years hence, the product of their ages (in years) will
be 160. Find their present ages.
Sol:
Let the age of girls sister be a x years
Given that,
Girl is twice as old as her sister
⇒ Girls age = 2 × 𝑥 years = 2x years
Given that, after 4 years, the product of their ages will be 160.
⇒ Girls age after 4 years = (2x + 4) years
And sisters age after 4 years = (x + 4) years
Given that,
(2𝑥 + 4)(𝑥 + 4) = 160
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 8𝑥 + 4𝑥 + 16 = 160
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 12𝑥 − 144 = 0
⇒ 2(𝑥 2 + 6𝑥 − 72) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 6𝑥 − 72 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 12𝑥 − 6𝑥 − 72 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 12) − 6(𝑥 + 12) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 12)(𝑥 − 6) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 + 12 = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 − 6 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −12 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 6
Since, age cannot be in a negative value.
So, x = 6.
∴ Age of girls sister is x = 6 years.
And age of girl is 2x = 2 × 6 years = 12 years
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Hence, the present ages of girl and her sister are 12 years and 6 years respectively.
7. The sum of the reciprocals of Rehman’s ages (in years) 3 years ago and 5 years from now
1
is 3. Find his present age.
Sol:
Let the present age of Rehman be x years.
Now,
Rehman’s age 3 years ago = (x – 3) years
And Rehman’s age 5 years later = (x + 5) years
Given that,
1
The sum of reciprocals of Rehman’s ages 3 years ago and 5 years later is 3
1 1 1
⇒ 𝑥−3 + 𝑥+5 = 3
𝑥+5 + 𝑥−3 1
⇒ (𝑥−3)(𝑥+5) = 3
⇒ (2𝑥 + 2) × 3 = 1(𝑥 − 3)(𝑥 + 5)
⇒ 6x + 6 = 𝑥 2 + 5𝑥 − 3𝑥 − 15
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 − 6𝑥 − 15 − 6 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 − 21 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 + 3𝑥 − 21 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 7)2 − 3(𝑥 − 7) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 7)(𝑥 + 3) = 0 ⇒ 𝑥 − 7 = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 + 3 = 0
⇒ x = 7 or x = −3
Since, age cannot be in negative values. So, x = 7 years Hence, the present age of Rehman
is 7 years.
Exercise 8.10
1. The hypotenuse of a right triangle is 25 cm. The difference between the lengths of the other
two sides of the triangle is 5 cm. Find the lengths of these sides.
Sol:
Let the length of the shortest side be x cm
Given that the length of the largest side is 5cm more than that of smaller side
⇒ longest side = (x + 5)cm
And also, given that
Hypotenuse = 25cm
So, let us consider a right angled triangle ABC right angled at B
We have, hypotenuse (AC) = 25 cm
BC = x cm and AB = (x + 5)cm
Since, ABC is a right angled triangle
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
We have, (𝐵𝐶)2 + (𝐴𝐵)2 = (𝐴𝐶)2
⇒ 𝑥 2 𝑐𝑚2 + (𝑥 + 5)2 𝑐𝑚2 = (25)2 𝑐𝑚2
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 + 25 = 625
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 − 600 = 0
⇒ 2(𝑥 2 + 5𝑥 − 300) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 5𝑥 − 300 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 20𝑥 − 15𝑥 + (20𝑥 − 15) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 20) − 15(𝑥 + 20) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 20)(𝑥 − 15) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 20) = 0 𝑜𝑟 (𝑥 − 15) = 20
2. The hypotenuse of a right triangle is 3.Ji cm. If the smaller leg is tripled and the longer leg
doubled, new hypotenuse will be 9Iš cm. How long are the legs of the triangle?
Sol:
Using Pythagoras theorem,
(𝐴𝐵)2 + (𝐵𝐶)2 = (𝐴𝐶)2
2
⇒ (2𝑦)2 𝑐𝑚2 + (3𝑥)2 𝑐𝑚2 = (9√5) 𝑐𝑚2
⇒ 4𝑦 2 + 9𝑥 2 = 81 × 5
⇒ 4𝑦 2 + 9𝑥 2 = 405
⇒ 4(90 − 𝑥 2 ) + 9𝑥 2 = 405 [∵ 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 90]
⇒ 4 × 90 − 4𝑥 2 + 9𝑥 2 = 405
⇒ 5𝑥 2 = 405 − 360
⇒ 5𝑥 2 = 405 − 360
⇒ 5𝑥 2 = 45
⇒ 𝑥2 = 9
⇒ 𝑥 = √32 ⇒ 𝑥 = ±3
𝑆𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒, 𝑥 𝑐𝑎𝑛𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑏𝑒 𝑎 𝑛𝑒𝑔𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒. 𝑆𝑜 𝑥 = 3𝑐𝑚
We have,
𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 90
⇒ 𝑦 2 = 90 − (3)2
⇒ 𝑦 2 = 90 − 9
⇒ 𝑦 2 = 81 ⇒ 𝑦 = √81 ⇒ 𝑦 = ± 9
Since, y cannot be a negative value. So, y = 9cm
∴ hence, the length of the smaller side is 3 cm and the length of the longer side is 9cm.
3. A pole has to be erected at a point on the boundary of a circular park of diameter 13 metres
in such a way that the difference of its distances from two diametrically opposite fixed
gates A and B on the boundary is 7 metres. Is it the possible to do so? If yes, at what
distances from the two gates should the pole be erected?
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Yes, it is possible to do so as in the given condition
This can be proved as below,
P
Xm
A O B
13m
Let P be the required location of the pole such that its distance from gate B is x meter i.e.
BP = x meters and also AP – BP = 7m
⇒ AP = BP + 7m = (x + 7)m
Since, AB is a diameter and P is a point on the boundary of the semi-circle, ∆APB is right
angled triangle, right angled at P.
Using Pythagoras theorem,
(𝐴𝐵)2 = (𝐴𝑃)2 + (𝐵𝑃)2
⇒ (13)2 𝑚2 = (𝑥 + 7)2 𝑚2 + (𝑥)2 𝑚2
⇒ 169 = 𝑥 2 + 14𝑥 + 49 + 𝑥 2
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 14𝑥 + 49 − 169 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 14𝑥 − 120 = 0
⇒ 2(𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 − 60) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 − 60 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 12𝑥 − 5𝑥 − (12 × −5) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 12) − 5(𝑥 + 12) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 12)(𝑥 − 5) = 0
⇒ x + 12 = 0 or x – 5 = 0
⇒ x = −12 or x = 5
Since, x cannot be a negative value, So x = 5
⇒ BP = 5m
Now, AP = (BP + 7)m = (5 + 7)m = 12 m
∴ The pole has to be erected at a distance 5 mtrs from the gate B and 12 m from the gate A.
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
4. The diagonal of a rectangular field is 60 metres more than the shorter side. If the longer
side is 30 metres more than the shorter side, find the sides of the field.
Sol:
120 m, 90 m
Exercise 8.11
1. The perimeter of a rectangular field is 82 m and its area is 400 m2. Find the breadth of
the rectangle.
Sol:
Let the breadth of the rectangle be x meters
Given that,
Perimeter = 82 m and Area = 400m2
We know that
Perimeter of a rectangle = 2(length + breadth)
⇒ 82 = 2 (length + x)
⇒ 41 = length + x
⇒ length = (41 - x)m
A B
Xm
D (41-x)m C
We have
Area of rectangle = length × breadth
⇒ 400 m2 = (41 – x) 𝑚 × 𝑥𝑚
⇒ 400 = 41x – x2
⇒ 400 x2 – 41x + 400 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 25𝑥 − 16𝑥 + (−25 × −16) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 25) − 16(𝑥 − 25) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 25)(𝑥 − 16) = 0
⇒ (x – 25) (x – 16) = 0
⇒ x – 25 = 0 or x – 16 = 0
⇒ x = 25 or x = 16
Hence, breadth of the rectangle is 25m or 16m
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2. The length of a hail is 5 m more than its breadth. If the area of the floor of the hail is 84 m2,
what are the length and breadth of the hail?
Sol:
Let the breadth of the rectangle (hall) be x meter.
Given that,
Length of the hall is 5m more than its breadth i.e. length = (x + 5)m
Hall xm
(x +5)m
And also given that,
Area of the hall = 84m2
Since, hall is in the shape of a rectangle,
Area of the rectangular hall = length × breadth
⇒ 84𝑚2 = 𝑥𝑚 × (𝑥 + 5)𝑚
⇒ 84 = x(x + 5)
⇒ 84 = 𝑥 2 + 5𝑥
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 5𝑥 − 84 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 12𝑥 − 7𝑥 − 84 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 12) − 7(𝑥 + 12) = 0
⇒ (x – 7) (x + 12) = 0
⇒ x = 7m or x = −12m
Since, x cannot be negative. So, breadth of the hall = 7m
Hence, length of the hall = (x + 5)m = (7 + 5)m = 12m.
3. Two squares have sides x cm and (x + 4) cm. The sum of their areas is 656 cm2. Find the
sides of the squares.
Sol:
Let S1 and S2 be two squares.
Let x cm be the side of square S1 and (x + 4)cm be the side of square S2.
We know that,
Area of a square = (Side)2
⇒ Area of square S1 = (𝑥)2 = 𝑥 2 𝑐𝑚2
⇒ Area of square S2 = (𝑥 + 4)2 𝑐𝑚2
Given that,
Area of square S1 + Area of square S2 = 656 cm2
⇒ 𝑥 2 𝑐𝑚2 + (𝑥 + 4)𝑐𝑚2 = 656 𝑐𝑚2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 2 + 8𝑥 + 16 = 656
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 8𝑥 + 16 − 656 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 8𝑥 − 640 = 0
⇒ 2(𝑥 2 + 4𝑥 − 320) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 4𝑥 − 320 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 20𝑥 − 16𝑥 + (20𝑥 − 16) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 + 20 = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 − 16 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −20 𝑐𝑚 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 16 𝑐𝑚
Since, x cannot be negative. So, x = 16cm
∴ Side of square S1 ⇒ x = 16cm and
Side of square S2 ⇒ (x + 4) = (16 + 4)cm = 20 cm
4. The area of a right angled triangle is 165 m2. Determine its base and altitude if the latter
exceeds the former by 7m.
Sol:
Let the altitude of the right angled triangle be denoted by x meter
Given that altitude exceeds the base of the triangle by 7m.
⇒ Base = (x – 7)m
Xm
Area = 165m2
C (x-7)m B
We know that,
1
Area of a triangle = 2 × 𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒 × ℎ𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡
1
⇒ 165m2 = 2 × (𝑥 − 7)𝑚 × 𝑥 𝑚 [∵ 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 = 165𝑚2 𝑔𝑖𝑣𝑒𝑛]
⇒ 2 × 165 = 𝑥(𝑥 − 7)
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 = 330
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 − 330 = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 22) + 15(𝑥 − 22) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 22)(𝑥 + 15) = 0
⇒ x = 22 or x = − 15
Since, x cannot be negative. So, x = 22 m
∴ Altitude of the triangle ⇒ x = 22m
And base of the triangle ⇒ (x – 7)m = (22 – 7)m = 15m
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
5. Is it possible to design a rectangular mango grove whose length is twice its breadth and the
area is 800 m2? If so, find its length and breadth.
Sol:
Let the breadth of the rectangular mango grove be x meter.
Given that length is twice that of breadth ⇒ length = 2 × x m = 2x m
Given that area of the grove is 800m2.
Area = 800m2 Xm
2x m
But we know that
Area of a rectangle = length × breadth
⇒ 800m2 = 2x m × x m
⇒ 2x2 = 800
⇒ x2 = 400
⇒ x = √400 = √(20)2 = ±20
⇒ x = 20 or x = −20
Since, x cannot be a negative value.
So, x = 20 m
∴ Breadth of the mango grove = 20m and length of the mango grove
= 2x m = 2 × 20 m = 40m
Yes. It is possible to design a rectangular mango grove whose length is twice its breadth
and the area is 800m2.
6. Is it possible to design a rectangular park of perimeter 80 m and area 400 m2? If so, find its
length and breadth.
Sol:
To prove the given condition, let us assume that the length of the rectangular park be
denoted by x m.
A
Perimeter = 8cm
(40-x)m
Area = 400 m2
D Xm C
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Given that
Perimeter = 80m and Area = 400m2
We know that,
Perimeter of a rectangle = 2(length + breadth)
⇒ 80m = 2 (x + breadth)
80
⇒ breadth = ( 2 − 𝑥) 𝑚
⇒ breadth = (40 – x)m
And also,
Area of a rectangle = length × breadth
⇒ 400m2 = x m × (40 − 𝑥)𝑚
⇒ 400 = x(40 – x)
⇒ 400 = 40x – x2
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 40𝑥 + 400 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 2 × 20 × 𝑥 + (20)2 = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 20)2 = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 20 = 0) ⇒ 𝑥 = 20
∴ length of the rectangular park ⇒ x = 20 m and breadth of the rectangular park ⇒
(40 – x)m = (40 – 20)m = 20m
Yes. It is possible to design a rectangular park of perimeter 80m and area 400m2.
7. Sum of the areas of two squares is 640 m2. If the difference of their perimeters is 64 m, find
the sides of the two squares.
Sol:
Let the two squares be denoted as S1 and S2 and let side of squares S1 be denoted as x meter
and that of square S2 be y m.
Given that,
Difference of their perimeter is 64m.
We know that
Perimeter of a square = 4 × side
⇒ Perimeter of square S1 = 4 × 𝑥 𝑚 = 4𝑥 𝑚
⇒ Perimeter of square 𝑆2 = 4 × 𝑦 𝑚 = 4𝑦 𝑚
Now, difference of perimeter = perimeter of square 𝑆1 − Perimeter of square 𝑆2
⇒ 64 m = (4x – 4y)m
⇒ 64 = 4(x – y)
⇒ x – y = 16
⇒ x = y + 16
And also,
Given that sum of areas of two squares = 640 m2.
We know that,
Area of a square = (Side)2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ Area of square 𝑆1 = 𝑥 2 𝑚2
⇒ Area of square 𝑆2 = 𝑦 2 𝑚2
Now,
Sum of areas of two squares = Area of square 𝑆1+Area of square 𝑆2
⇒ 640𝑚2 = 𝑥 2 𝑚2 + 𝑦 2 𝑚2
⇒ 640 = (𝑦 + 16)2 + 𝑦 2 [∵ 𝑥 = 𝑦 + 16]
⇒ 𝑦 2 + 32𝑦 + 256 + 𝑦 2 = 640
⇒ 2𝑦 2 + 32𝑦 + 256 − 640 = 0
⇒ 2𝑦 2 + 32𝑦 − 384 = 0
⇒ 2(𝑦 2 + 16𝑦 − 192) = 0
⇒ 𝑦 2 + 16𝑦 − 192 = 0
⇒ 𝑦 2 + 24𝑦 − 8𝑦 + (24 × −8) = 0
⇒ 𝑦(𝑦 + 24) − 8(𝑦 + 24) = 0
⇒ (y + 24) (y – 8) = 0
⇒ y + 24 = 0 or y – 8 = 0
⇒ y = − 24 or y = 8
Since, y cannot be a negative value. So, y = 8m
∴ Side of the square 𝑆2 is y = 8m
And side of the square 𝑆1 is x = (y + 16)m = (8 + 16)m = 24 m
Hence, sides of the two squares is 24m and 8m.
Exercise 8.12
1. A takes 10 days less than the time taken by B to finish a piece of work. If both A and B
together can finish the work in 12 days, find the time taken by B to finish the work.
Sol:
Let B takes x days to complete the piece of work.
1
⇒ B’s one days work = 𝑥
Now, A takes 10 days less than that of B to finish the same piece of work i.e. (x – 10)days
1
⇒ A’s one days work = 𝑥−10
Given that, both A and B together can finish the same work in 12 days.
1
⇒ (A and B)’s one days work = 12
Now,
1 1 1
(A’s one days work) + (B’s one days work) = 𝑥 + 𝑥−10 and (𝐴 + 𝐵)’s one days work = 12
1 1 1
⇒ 𝑥 + 𝑥−10 = 12
𝑥−10+𝑥 1
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥−10) = 12
⇒ (2𝑥 − 10) × 12 = 𝑥(𝑥 − 10)
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 24x – 120 = x2 – 10x
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 10𝑥 − 24𝑥 + 120 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 34𝑥 + 120 = 0
= 𝑥 2 − 30𝑥 − 4𝑥 + (−30 × −4) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 30) − 4(𝑥 − 30) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 30)(𝑥 − 4) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 30) = 0 𝑜𝑟 (𝑥 − 4) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = 30 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 4
We can observe that, the value of x cannot be less than 10.
∴ The time taken by B to finish the work is 30 days.
2. If two pipes function simultaneously, a reservoir will be filled in 12 hours. One pipe fills
the reservoir 10 hours faster than the other. How many hours will the second pipe take to
fill the reservoir?
Sol:
Let x be no. of students planned for a picnic
Given that budget for food was Rs 480
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑢𝑑𝑔𝑒𝑡 480
⇒ Share of each student = 𝑁𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠 = Rs 𝑥
Given that 8 students foiled to go
⇒ No. of students will be (x – 8)
Now,
Share of each student will be equal to
𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑢𝑑𝑔𝑒𝑡 480
= 𝑁𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠 = 𝑅𝑠. 𝑥−8
Given that if 8 students failed to go, then cost of food for each member increased by Rs. 10.
3. Two water taps together can fill a tank in 9 hours. The tap of larger diameter takes 10 hours
less than the smaller one to fill the tank separately. Find the time in which each tap can
separately fill the tank.
Sol:
Let the time taken by the top of smaller diameter to fill the tank be x hours
1
⇒ Portion of tank filled by smaller pipe in one hour = 𝑥
Now, larger diameter pipe takes 10 hours less than that of smaller diameter pipe
i.e. (x – 10) hours
1
⇒ Portion of tank filled by larger diameter pipe in one hour = 𝑥−10
Given that,
3 75
Two tops together can fill the tank in 9 8 hours ⇒ hours
8
Now,
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
1 8
Portion of tank filled by both the tops together in one hour = 75/8 = 75
We have,
Portion of tank filled by smaller pipe in 1 hr + Portion of tank filled by larger pipe in 1 hr.
1 1 8 1 1
= 𝑥 + 𝑥−10 ⇒ 75 = 𝑥 + 𝑥−10
4. Two pipes running together can fill a tank in 11 minutes. If one pipe takes 5 minutes more
than the other to fill the tank separately, find the time in which each pipe would fill the tank
separately.
Sol:
Let us take the time taken by the faster pipe to fill the tank as x minutes.
1
⇒ Portion of tank filled by faster pipe in one minute = 𝑥
Now, time taken by the slower pipe to fill the same tank is 5 minutes more than that of
faster pipe i.e. (x + 5) minutes.
1
⇒ Portion of tank filled by slower pipe in one minute = 𝑥+5
Given that,
1 100
The two pipes together can fill the tank in 11 9 minutes ⇒ minutes
9
⇒ portion of tank filled by faster pipe in 1min + Portions of tank filled by slower pipe in
9 1 1
1min i.e. 100 = 𝑥 + 𝑥+5
9 𝑥+5+𝑥
⇒ =
100 𝑥(𝑥+5)
Exercise 8.13
1. A piece of cloth costs Rs. 35. If the piece were 4 m longer and each metre costs Rs. one
less, the cost would remain unchanged. How long is the piece?
Sol:
Let initial length of the cloth be x m, and cost per each meter of cloth be Rs y
⇒ Total cost of piece of cloth will be length of cloth x cost per each meter
⇒ xy
35
But given that xy = Rs. 35 ⇒ y = Rs. 𝑥
And also,
Given that if the piece were 4m longer and each meter costs Rs. 1 less the cost would
remain unchanged.
⇒ Length of the cloth will be (x + 4)m and cost per each meter of cloth will be Rs (y..)
⇒ Total cost of piece of cloth will be Rs. (x + 4) (y – 1)
But,
Rs (x + 4) (y – 1) = Rs 35
⇒ xy + 4y – x – 4 = 35
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
35 35
⇒ 35 + 4( 2 ) − 𝑥 − 4 = 35 [∵ 𝑥𝑦 = 35 &𝑦 = ]
2
140−𝑥 2 −4𝑥
⇒ 𝑥
=0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 4𝑥 − 140 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 14𝑥 − 10𝑥 + (14𝑥 − 10) = 0 [∵ 140 = 14𝑥 − 10 = 4𝑥 = 14𝑥 − 10𝑥]
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 14) − 10(𝑥 + 14) = 0
⇒(𝑥 + 14)(𝑥 − 10) = 0
⇒(𝑥 + 14) = 0 𝑜𝑟 (𝑥 − 10) = 0
⇒𝑥 = −14 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 10
Since length of the cloth cannot be in negative integers, the required length of cloth is 10m.
2. Some students planned a picnic. The budget for food was Rs. 480. But eight of these failed
to go and thus the cost of food for each member increased by Rs. 10. How many students
attended the picnic?
Sol:
Let x be no. of students planned for a picnic
Given that budget for food was Rs 480
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑢𝑑𝑔𝑒𝑡 480
⇒ Share of each student = 𝑁𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠 = Rs 𝑥
Given that 8 students foiled to go
⇒ No. of students will be (x – 8)
Now,
Share of each student will be equal to
𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑢𝑑𝑔𝑒𝑡 480
= 𝑁𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠 = 𝑅𝑠. 𝑥−8
Given that if 8 students failed to go, then cost of food for each member increased by Rs. 10.
3. A dealer sells an article for Rs. 24 and gains as much percent as the cost price of the article.
Find the cost price of the article.
Sol:
Let the cost price of the article be Rs x
Given that gain percentage of the article is as much as cost price i.e. x
⇒ Selling price = cost price + gain
= Rs x + cost price × gain percentage
𝑥
= Rs x + Rs x × 100
𝑥2
= Rs (𝑥 + 100)
Given that selling price = Rs 24
𝑥2
⇒ Rs 24 = Rs (𝑥 + 100)
𝑥2
⇒ 24 = 𝑥 + 100
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
𝑥2
⇒ 100 + 𝑥 − 24 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 100𝑥 − 2400 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 120𝑥 − 20𝑥 + (120 × −80) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 (𝑥 + 180) − 80(𝑥 + 180) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 180)(𝑥 − 20) = 0
⇒ x + 120 = 0 or x – 20 = 0
⇒ x = -120 or x = 20
Since, cost price of the article cannot be negative, the required cost price of the article is
Rs 20
480 480
⇒ 𝑅𝑠 𝑥−8 − 𝑅𝑠 = 𝑅𝑠 10
𝑥
480 480
⇒ 𝑥−8 − = 10
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 480 (𝑥−8 − 𝑥) = 10
𝑥−(𝑥−8)
⇒ 48 ( 𝑥(𝑥−8) ) = 1
𝑥−𝑥+8
⇒ 48 ( 𝑥 2 −8𝑥 ) = 1
⇒ 48 (8) = 𝑥 2 − 8𝑥
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 8𝑥 − 384 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 24𝑥 + 16𝑥 + (−24 × 16) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 24) + 16(𝑥 − 24) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 24)(𝑥 + 16) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 24) = 0 or (𝑥 + 16) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 − 24 or 𝑥 = −16
Since the value of number of students cannot be negative, the required number of students
attended the picnic is 24.
4. Out of a group of swans, 7/2 times the square root of the total number are playing on the
share of a pond. The two remaining ones are swinging in water. Find the total number of
swans.
Sol:
Let total number of swans be x
Given that 7/2 times the square root of the total number of swans are playing on the share
7
of a pond i.e. 2 √𝑥 and the two remaining ones are swinging in water
7
⇒ Total number of swans x = 2 √𝑥 + 2
7
⇒ 𝑥 = 2 √𝑥 + 2 [𝐿𝑒𝑡 √𝑥 = 𝑦 ⇒ 𝑥 = 𝑦 2 ]
7
⇒ 𝑦2 = 2 𝑦 + 2
7
⇒ 𝑦2 − 2 𝑦 − 2 = 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 2𝑦 2 − 7𝑦 − 4 = 0
⇒ 2𝑦 2 − 8𝑦 + 𝑦 − 4 = 0
⇒ 2𝑦(𝑦 − 4) + 1(𝑦 − 4) = 0
⇒ (𝑦 − 4)(2𝑦 + 1) = 0
⇒ (𝑦 − 4) = 0 𝑜𝑟 (2𝑦 + 1) = 0
−1
⇒ y = 4 or y = 2
−1 2 1
⇒ 𝑦 2 = 42 = 16 𝑜𝑟 𝑦 2 = ( 2 ) = 4
Since, the value of number of swans cannot be a fraction, the required number of swans
x = 16
5. If the list price of a toy is reduced by Rs. 2, a person can buy 2 toys more for Rs. 360. Find
the original price of the toy.
Sol:
Let initial list price of the toy be Rs x
Given that total cost of toys = Rs 360
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡 𝑅𝑠 360 360
⇒ Initially number of toys a person can buy = 𝑙𝑖𝑠𝑡 𝑝𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑒𝑎𝑐ℎ 𝑡𝑜𝑦 = ⇒
𝑅𝑠 𝑥 𝑥
Now, if the list price is reduced by Rs 2 i.e. Rs. (x – 2)
Number of toys a person can buy is 2 more for Rs 360
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡 𝑅𝑠 360 360
⇒ Number of toys a person can buy when price is reduced = = 𝑅𝑠 𝑥−2 = 𝑥−2
𝑙𝑖𝑠𝑡 𝑝𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑒
Now,
360 360
− =2
𝑥−2 𝑥
1 1
⇒ 360 (𝑥−2 − 𝑥) = 2
𝑥−(𝑥−2)
⇒ 360 ( 𝑥(𝑥−2) ) = 2
𝑥−𝑥+2
⇒ 360 ( 𝑥 2 −2𝑥 ) = 2
2
⇒ 360 (𝑥 2 −2𝑥) = 2
⇒ 360 = x2 – 2x
6. Rs. 9000 were divided equally among a certain number of persons. Had there been 20 more
persons, each would have got Rs. 160 less. Find the original number of persons.
Sol:
Let the original number of persons be x,
Total amount to be divided equally is Rs. 9000
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑎𝑚𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑡 900
⇒ Share of each person will be equal to = 𝑁𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑠𝑜𝑛𝑠 = 𝑅𝑠 𝑥
Given that if there had been 20 more persons
⇒ Final number of persons will be x + 20, then each would have got Rs 160 less
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Now,
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑎𝑚𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑡 9000
Final share of each person will be equal to = 𝑁𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑠𝑜𝑛𝑠 = 𝑅𝑠 𝑥+20
We have,
9000 9000
Rs − 𝑅𝑠 𝑥+20 = 𝑅𝑠 160
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 9000 (𝑥 − 𝑥+20) = 160
7+80−𝑥
⇒ 9000 (𝑥(𝑥+20)) = 160
20
⇒ 9000 (𝑥 2 +20𝑥) = 160
⇒ 1125 = x2 + 20x
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 20𝑥 − 1125 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 45𝑥 − 25𝑥 + (45 × −25) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 45) − 25(𝑥 + 45) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 45)(𝑥 − 25) = 0
⇒ x + 45 = 0 or x – 25 = 0
⇒ x = − 45 or x = 25
Since, share of each person cannot be negative value, the required share of each person is
Rs 25.
7. Some students planned a picnic. The budget for food was Rs. 500. But, 5 of them failed to
go and thus the cost of food for each member increased by Rs. 5. How many students
attended the picnic?
Sol:
Let the number of students planned for the picnic be x
Given budget for food = Rs. 500
𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑢𝑑𝑔𝑒𝑡 500
⇒ Initially share of food for each student = 𝑛𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠 = 𝑅𝑠 𝑥
Given that 5 students failed to go for the picnic
⇒ No. of students attended the picnic will be (x – 5)
𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑢𝑑𝑔𝑒𝑡 500
Now, share of food for each student will be equal to = 𝑛𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠 𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑑 = 𝑅𝑠 𝑥−5
Given that, share of food for each student is increased
500 500
⇒ Rs 𝑥−5 − 𝑅𝑠 = 𝑅𝑠 5
𝑥
500 500
⇒ 𝑥−5 − =5
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 500(𝑥−5 − 𝑥) = 5
𝑠−(𝑥−5)
⇒ 500 ( 𝑥(𝑥−5) ) = 5
𝑥−𝑥+5
⇒ 500 ( 𝑥 2 −5𝑥 ) = 5
5
⇒ 500 (𝑥 2 −5𝑥) = 5
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 500 = x2 – 5x
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 − 500 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 25𝑥 + 20𝑥 − 500 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 25) + 20(𝑥 − 25) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 25)(𝑥 + 20) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 25) = 0 𝑜𝑟 (𝑥 + 20) = 0
⇒ x = 25 or x = −20
Since, the value of x cannot be negative,
⇒ x = 25
Here, x is the no. of students planned,
Given that 5 students failed to go
⇒ No. of students attended the picnic = x – 5 = 25 – 5 = 20
∴ No. of students attended the picnic = 20
8. A pole has to be erected at a point on the boundary of a circular park of diameter 13 metres
in such a way that the difference of its distances from two diametrically opposite fixed
gates A and B on the boundary is 7 metres. Is it the possible to do so? If yes, at what
distances from the two gates should the pole be erected?
Sol:
Let P be the required location of the pole such that its distance from gets B is x meters i.e.
BP = x meters and also AP – BP = 7m ⇒ AP = (x + 7)m
P
Xm
A O B
13m
9. In a class test, the sum of the marks obtained by P in Mathematics and science is 28. Had
he got 3 marks more in Mathematics and 4 marks less in Science. The product of his marks,
would have been 180. Find his marks in the two subjects.
Sol:
Let number of marks obtained by P in mathematics and science be x and y respectively.
Given that sum of these two is 28
⇒ x +y = 28 ⇒ x = 28 – y
Given that if x becomes (x + 3) i.e. marks in mathematics is increased by 3 and y
becomes (y – 4) i.e. marks in science is decreased by 4, The product of these two
becomes by 4,
⇒ (𝑥 + 3)(𝑦 − 4) = 180
⇒ (28 − 𝑦 + 3)(𝑦 − 4) = 180 [∵ 𝑥 = 28 − 𝑦]
⇒ (31 − 𝑦)(𝑦 − 4) = 180
⇒ 31y – 31 × 4 – y2 + 4y = 180
⇒ 35y – y2 – 124 = 180
⇒ 𝑦 2 − 35𝑦 + 180 + 124 = 0
⇒ 𝑦 2 − 35𝑦 + 304 = 0
⇒ 𝑦 2 − 19𝑦 − 16𝑦 + (−19 × −16) = 0
⇒ 𝑦(𝑦 − 19) − 16(𝑦 − 19) = 0
⇒ (𝑦 − 19)(𝑦 − 16) = 0
⇒ y – 19 = 0 or y – 16 = 0
⇒ y = 19 or y = 16
We have,
x + y = 28
if y = 19 ⇒ x = 28 – y = 28 – 19 = 9 and
if y = 16 ⇒ x = 28 – y = 28 – 16 = 12
∴ Marks in mathematics = 9 and Marks in Science = 19 or
Marks in mathematics = 12 and Marks in Science = 16
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
10. In a class test, the sum of Shefali’s marks in Mathematics and English is 30. Had she got 2
marks more in Mathematics and 3 marks less in English, the product of her marks would
have been 210. Find her marks in two subjects.
Sol:
Let marks of shefali in Mathematics and English be x and y respectively.
Given that sum of these two is 30 ⇒ x + y = 30 ⇒ x = 30 – y
Given that if x becomes (x + 2) i.e. marks in mathematics is increased by 2
and y becomes (y – 3) i.e. marks in English is decreased by 3,
the product at these two becomes 210
i.e. (x + 2) (y – 3) = 210
⇒ (30 – y + 2) (y – 3) = 210 [∵ x = 30 – y]
⇒ (32 – y) (y – 3) = 210
⇒ (32 – y) (y – 3) = 210
⇒ 32y – 32 × 3 – y × 3y = 210
⇒ 35y – 96 – y2 = 210
⇒ 𝑦 2 − 35𝑦 + 210 + 96 = 0
⇒ 𝑦 2 − 35 + 306 = 0
⇒ 𝑦 2 − 17𝑦 − 18𝑦 + (−17 × −18) = 0 [∵ 306 = 17 × 18 = −17 × −18]
⇒ 𝑦(𝑦 − 17) − 18(𝑦 − 17) = 0
⇒ (𝑦 − 17)(𝑦 − 18) = 0
⇒ y – 17 = 0 or y – 18 = 0
⇒ y = 17 or y = 18
We have,
x + y = 30
if y = 17 ⇒ x = 30 – y = 30 – 17 = 13 and
if y = 18 ⇒ x = 30 – y = 30 – 18 = 18
∴ Marks in Mathematics = 13 and marks in English = 17 or
Marks in Mathematics = 12 and marks in English = 18.
11. A cottage industry produces a certain number of pottery articles in a day. It was observed
on a particular day that the cost of production of each article (in rupees) was 3 more than
twice the number of articles produced on that day. If the total cost of production on that day
was Rs. 90, find the number of articles produced and the cost of each article.
Sol:
Let the number of articles produced on a particular day be x.
Total cost of production on that particular day = Rs 90
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 90
Given ⇒ Cost of production of each article = = 𝑅𝑠
𝑛𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑎𝑟𝑡𝑖𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑠 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑒𝑑 𝑥
But given that, the cost of production of each article was 3 more than twice the no. of
articles produced on that day i.e. Rs (2x +3)
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
90
⇒ Rs (2x + 3) = Rs 𝑥
90
⇒ 2x + 3 = 𝑥
⇒ x(2x + 3) = 90 ⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 − 90 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 15𝑥 − 12𝑥 − 90 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(2𝑥 + 15) − 6(2𝑥 + 15) = 0
⇒ (2x + 15) (x – 16) = 0
⇒ 2x + 15 = 0 or x – 6 = 0
−15
⇒x= 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 6
2
Since, number of articles x cannot be a negative value, the required value of number of
articles produced on a particular day x = 6.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Exercise – 9.1
1. Write the first terms of each of the following sequences whose nth term are
(i) 𝑎𝑛 = 3𝑛 + 2
𝑛−2
(ii) 𝑎𝑛 = 3
𝑛
(iii) 𝑎𝑛 = 3
3𝑛−2
(iv) 𝑎𝑛 = 5
(v) 𝑎𝑛 = (−1)𝑛 2𝑛
𝑛(𝑛−2)
(vi) 𝑎𝑛 = 2
(vii) 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛2 − 𝑛 + 1
(viii) 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛2 − 𝑛 + 1
2𝑛−3
(ix) 𝑎𝑛 = 6
Sol:
We have to write first five terms of given sequences
(i) 𝑎𝑛 = 3𝑛 + 2
Given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 3𝑛 + 2
To write first five terms of given sequence put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, we get
𝑎1 = (3 × 1) + 2 = 3 + 2 = 5
𝑎2 = (3 × 2) + 2 = 6 + 2 = 8
𝑎3 = (3 × 3) + 2 = 9 + 2 = 11
𝑎4 = (3 × 4) + 2 = 12 + 2 = 14
𝑎5 = (3 × 5) + 2 = 15 + 2 = 17
∴ The required first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 3𝑛 + 2 are 5, 8, 11, 14, 17.
𝑛−2
(ii) 𝑎𝑛 = 3
𝑛−2
Given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 3
𝑛−2
To write first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 3
put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 then we get
1−2 −1 2−2
𝑎1 = = ; 𝑎2 = =0
3 3 3
3−2 1 4−2 2
𝑎3 = = 3 ; 𝑎4 = =3
3 3
5−2
𝑎5 = =1
3
𝑛−2 −1 1 2
∴ The required first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = are , 0, , , 1.
3 𝟑 3 3
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
(iii) 𝑎𝑛 = 3𝑛
Given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 3𝑛
To write first five terms of given sequence, put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 in given sequence.
Then,
𝑎1 = 31 = 3; 𝑎2 = 32 = 9; 𝑎3 = 27; 𝑎4 = 34 = 81; 𝑎5 = 35 = 243.
3𝑛−2
(iv) 𝑎𝑛 = 5
3𝑛−2
Given sequence, 𝑎𝑛 = 5
3𝑛−2
To write first five terms, put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 in given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 5
Then, we ger
3×1−2 3−2 1
𝑎1 = = =5
5 5
3×2−2 6−2 4
𝑎2 = = =5
5 5
3×3−2 9−2 7
𝑎3 = = =5
5 5
3×4−2 12−2 10
𝑎4 = = =
5 5 5
3×5−2 15−2 13
𝑎5 = = =
5 5 5
1 4 7 10 13
∴ The required first five terms are 5 , 5 , 5 , ,
5 5
(v) 𝑎𝑛 = (−1)𝑛 2𝑛
Given sequence is an = (−1)n 2n
To get first five terms of given sequence an, put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
𝑎1 = (−1)1 . 21 = (−1). 2 = −2
𝑎2 = (−1)2 . 22 = (−1). 4 = 4
𝑎3 = (−1)3 . 23 = (−1). 8 = −8
𝑎4 = (−1)4 . 24 = (−1). 16 = 16
𝑎5 = (−1)5 . 25 = (−1). 32 = −32
∴ The first five terms are -2, 4, -8, 16, -32.
𝑛(𝑛−2)
(vi) 𝑎𝑛 =
2
𝑛(𝑛−2)
The given sequence is, 𝑎𝑛 = 2
𝑛(𝑛−2)
To write first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 2
Put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Then, we get
1(1−2) 1−1 −1
𝑎1 = = =
2 2 2
2(2−2) 2.0
𝑎2 = 2
= 2
=0
3(3−2) 3.1 3
𝑎3 = = =2
2 2
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
4(4−2) 4.2
𝑎4 = = =4
2 2
5(5−2) 5.3 15
𝑎5 = = =
2 2 2
−1 3 15
∴ The required first five terms are , 0, 2 , 4, 2 .
2
(vii) 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛 2 − 𝑛 + 1
The given sequence is, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛2 − 𝑛 + 1
To write first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛1 we get put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Then we
get 𝑎1 = 12 − 1 + 1 = 1
𝑎2 = 22 − 2 + 1 = 3
𝑎3 = 32 − 3 + 1 = 7
𝑎4 = 42 − 4 + 1 = 13
𝑎5 = 52 − 5 + 1 = 21
∴The required first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛2 − 𝑛 + 1 are 1, 3, 7, 13, 21
(viii) 𝑎𝑛 = 2𝑛2 − 3𝑛 + 1
The given sequence is 𝑎𝑛 = 2𝑛2 − 3𝑛 + 1
To write first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛 , we put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Then we get
𝑎1 = 2.12 − 3.1 + 1 = 2 − 3 + 1 = 0
𝑎2 = 2.22 − 3.2 + 1 = 8 − 6 + 1 = 3
𝑎3 = 2.32 − 3.3 + 1 = 18 − 9 + 1 = 10
𝑎4 = 2.42 − 3.4 + 1 = 32 − 12 + 1 = 21
𝑎5 = 2.52 − 3.5 + 1 = 50 − 15 + 1 = 36
∴ The required first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛 − 2𝑛2 − 3𝑛 + 1 are 0, 3, 10,
21, 36
2𝑛−3
(ix) 𝑎𝑛 = 6
2𝑛−3
Given sequence is, 𝑎𝑛 = 6
To write first five terms of given sequence we put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Then, we get,
2.1−3 2−3 −1
𝑎1 = = =
6 6 6
2.2−3 4−3 1
𝑎2 = = =6
6 6
2.4−3 8−3 5
𝑎3 = = =6
6 6
2.4−3 8−3 5
𝑎4 = = =6
6 6
2.5−3 10−3 7
𝑎5 = = =6
6 6
2𝑛 −3 −1 1 1 5 7
∴ The required first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = are , 6 , 2 , 6 , 6.
6 6
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
2. Find the indicated terms in each of the following sequences whose nth terms are:
(i) 𝑎𝑛 = 5𝑛 − 4; 𝑎12 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎15
3𝑛−2
(ii) 𝑎𝑛 = 4𝑛+5; 𝑎7 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎8
(iii) 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛(𝑛 − 1)(𝑛 − 2); 𝑎5 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎8
(iv) 𝑎𝑛 = (𝑛 − 1)(2 − 𝑛)(3 + 𝑛); 𝑎11 𝑎21 𝑎3
(v) 𝑎𝑛 = (−1)𝑛 𝑛; 𝑎3 , 𝑎5 , 𝑎8
Sol:
We have to find the required term of a sequence when nth term of that sequence is given.
(i) 𝑎𝑛 = 5𝑛 − 4; 𝑎12 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎15
Given nth term of a sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 5𝑛 − 4
To find 12th term, 15th terms of that sequence, we put n = 12, 15 in its nth term.
Then, we get
𝑎12 = 5.12 − 4 = 60 − 4 = 56
𝑎15 = 5.15 − 4 = 15 − 4 = 71
∴ The required terms 𝑎12 = 56, 𝑎15 = 71
3𝑛−2
(ii) 𝑎𝑛 = 4𝑛+5; 𝑎7 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎8
3𝑛−2
Given nth term is (an) = 4𝑛+5
To find 7th, 8th terms of given sequence, we put n = 7, 8.
(3.7)−2 19
𝑎7 = (4.7)+5 = 33
(3.8)−2 22
𝑎8 = (4.8)+5 = 37
19 22
∴ The required terms 𝑎7 = 33 and 𝑎8 = 37.
(iii) 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛(𝑛 − 1)(𝑛 − 2); 𝑎5 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎8
Given nth term is 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛(𝑛 − 1)(𝑛 − 2)
To find 5th, 8th terms of given sequence, put n= 5, 8 in an then, we get
𝑎5 = 5(5 − 1). (5 − 2) = 5.4.3 = 60
𝑎8 = 8. (8 − 1). (8 − 2) = 8.7.6 = 336
∴ The required terms are 𝑎5 = 60 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎8 = 336
(iv) 𝑎𝑛 = (𝑛 − 1)(2 − 𝑛)(3 + 𝑛); 𝑎11 𝑎21 𝑎3
The given nth term is 𝑎𝑛 = (𝑛 + 1)(2 − 𝑛)(3 + 𝑛)
To find 𝑎1 , 𝑎2 , 𝑎3 of given sequence put n = 1, 2, 3 is an
𝑎1 = (1 − 1)(2 − 1)(3 + 1) = 0. 1. 4 = 0
𝑎2 = (2 − 1)(2 − 2)(3 + 2) = 1. 0. 5 = 0
𝑎3 = (3 − 1)(2 − 3)(3 + 3) = 2. −1. 6 = −12
∴ The required terms 𝑎1 = 0, 𝑎2 = 0, 𝑎3 = −12
(v) 𝑎𝑛 = (−1)𝑛 𝑛; 𝑎3 , 𝑎5 , 𝑎8
The given nth term is, 𝑎𝑛 = (−1)𝑛 . 𝑛
To find 𝑎3 . 𝑎5 , 𝑎8 of given sequence put n = 3, 5, 8, in an.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
𝑎3 = (−1)3 . 3 = −1. 3 = −3
𝑎5 = (−1)5 . 5 = −1. 5 = −5
𝑎8 = (−1)8 = 1.8 = 8
∴ The required terms 𝑎3 = −3, 𝑎5 = −5, 𝑎8 = 8
3. Find the next five terms of each of the following sequences given by:
(i) 𝑎1 = 1, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎𝑛−1 + 2, 𝑛 ≥ 2
(ii) 𝑎1 = 𝑎2 = 2, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎𝑛−1 − 3, 𝑛 > 2
𝑎𝑛 −1
(iii) 𝑎1 = −1, 𝑎𝑛 = ,𝑛 ≥ 2
𝑛
(iv) 𝑎1 = 4, 𝑎𝑛 = 4 𝑎𝑛−1 + 3, 𝑛 > 1
Sol:
We have to find next five terms of following sequences.
(i) 𝑎1 = 1, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎𝑛−1 + 2, 𝑛 ≥ 2
Given, first term (a1) = 1,
nth term 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎𝑛−1 + 2, 𝑛 ≥ 2
To find 2nd, 3rd, 4th , 5th , 6th terms, we use given condition n ≥ 2 for nth term 𝑎𝑛 =
𝑎𝑛−1 + 2
𝑎2 = 𝑎2−1 + 2 = 𝑎1 + 2 = 1 + 2 = 3 (∴ 𝑎1 = 1)
𝑎3 = 𝑎3−1 + 2 = 𝑎2 + 2 = 3 + 2 = 5
𝑎4 = 𝑎4−1 + 2 = 𝑎3 + 2 = 5 + 2 = 7
𝑎5 = 𝑎5−1 + 2 = 𝑎4 + 2 = 7 + 2 = 9
𝑎6 = 𝑎6−1 + 2 = 𝑎5 + 2 = 𝑎 + 2 = 11
∴ The next five terms are,
𝑎2 = 3, 𝑎3 = 5, 𝑎4 = 7, 𝑎5 = 𝑎, 𝑎6 = 11
(ii) 𝑎1 = 𝑎2 = 2, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎𝑛−1 − 3, 𝑛 > 2
Given,
First term (𝑎1 ) = 2
Second term (𝑎2 ) = 2
nth term (𝑎𝑛 ) = 𝑎𝑛−1 − 3
To find next five terms i.e., 𝑎3 , 𝑎4 , 𝑎5 , 𝑎6 , 𝑎7 we put n = 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 is 𝑎𝑛
𝑎3 = 𝑎3−1 − 3 = 2 − 3 = −1
𝑎4 = 𝑎4−1 − 3 = 𝑎3 − 3 = −1 − 3 = −4
𝑎5 = 𝑎5−1 − 3 = 𝑎4 − 3 = −4 − 3 = −7
𝑎6 = 𝑎6−1 − 3 = 𝑎5 − 3 = −7 − 3 = −10
𝑎7 = 𝑎7−1 − 3 = 𝑎6 − 3 = −10 − 3 = −13
∴ The next five terms are, 𝑎3 = −1, 𝑎4 = −4, 𝑎5 = −7, 𝑎6 = −10, 𝑎7 = −13
𝑎𝑛 −1
(iii) 𝑎1 = −1, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛
,𝑛 ≥ 2
Given, first term (𝑎1 ) = −1
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
𝑎𝑛 −1
nth term (𝑎𝑛 ) = ,𝑛 ≥ 2
𝑛
To find next five terms i.e., 𝑎2 , 𝑎3 , 𝑎4 , 𝑎5 , 𝑎6 we put n = 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 is an
𝑎2−1 𝑎1 −1
𝑎2 = = =
2 2 2
𝑎3−1 𝑎2 −1/2 −1
𝑎3 = = = =
3 3 3 6
𝑎4−1 𝑎3 −1/6 −1
𝑎4 = = = =
4 4 4 24
𝑎5−1 𝑎4 −1/24 −1
𝑎5 = = = = 120
5 5 5
∴ The next five terms are,
−1 −1 −1 −1 −1
𝑎2 = , 𝑎3 = , 𝑎4 = , 𝑎5 = 120 , 𝑎6 = 720
2 6 24
(iv) 𝑎1 = 4, 𝑎𝑛 = 4 𝑎𝑛−1 + 3, 𝑛 > 1
Given,
First term (a1) = 4
nth term (𝑎𝑛 ) = 4 𝑎𝑛−1 + 3, n > 1
To find next five terms i.e., 𝑎2 , 𝑎3 , 𝑎4 , 𝑎5 , 𝑎6 we put n= 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 is 𝑎𝑛
Then, we get
𝑎2 = 4𝑎2−1 + 3 = 4. 𝑎1 + 3 = 4.4 + 3 = 19 (∴ 𝑎1 = 4)
𝑎3 = 4𝑎3−1 + 3 = 4. 𝑎2 + 3 = 4(19) + 3 = 79
𝑎4 = 4 𝑎4−1 + 3 = 4. 𝑎3 + 3 = 4(79) + 3 = 319
𝑎5 = 4 𝑎5−1 + 3 = 4. 𝑎4 + 3 = 4(319) + 3 = 1279
𝑎6 = 4. 𝑎6−1 + 3 = 4. 𝑎5 + 3 = 4(1279) + 3 = 5119
∴ The required next five terms are,
𝑎2 = 19, 𝑎3 = 79, 𝑎4 = 319, 𝑎5 = 1279, 𝑎6 = 5119
Exercise – 9.2
1. For the following arithmetic progressions write the first term a and the common difference
d:
(i) 5, 1,3, 7,..............
1 3 5 7
(ii) , , , ,.............
5 5 5 5
(iii) 0.3, 0.55, 0.80, 1.05,.........
(iv) 1.1, 3.1, 5.1, 7.1,.....
Sol:
We know that if a is the first term and d is the common difference, the arithmetic
progression is a, a d , a 2d a 3d ,..............
(i) 5, 1,3, 7,..............
Given arithmetic series is
5, 1,3,7.............
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
2. Write the arithmetic progressions write first term a and common difference d are as
follows:
(i) a 4, d 3
1
(ii) a 1, d
2
(iii) a 1.5, d 0.5
Sol:
We know that, if first term a a and common difference d , then the arithmetic series
is, a, a d , a 2d , a 3d ,........
(i) a 4, d 3
Given first term a 4
Common difference d 3
Then arithmetic progression is,
a, a d , a 2d , a 3d ,........
4, 4 3, a 2 3 , 4 3 3 ,.........
4,1, 2, 5, 8,.......
1
(ii) a 1, d
2
Given,
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
First term a 1
1
Common difference d
2
Then arithmetic progression is,
a, a d , a 2d , a 3d ,..........
1 1 1
1, 1 , 1 2 , 1 3 ,.........
2 2 2
1 1
1, ,0, ,..........
2 2
(iii) a 1.5, d 0.5
Given
First term a 1.5
Common difference d 0.5
Then arithmetic progression is
a, a d , a 2d , a 3d ,.......
1.5, 1.5 0.5, 1.5 2 0.5 , 1.5 3 0.5
1.5, 2, 2.5, 3,.............
Then required progression is
1.5, 2, 2.5, 3,.........
3. In which of the following situations, the sequence of numbers formed will form an A.P.?
(i) The cost of digging a well for the first metre is Rs 150 and rises by Rs 20 for each
succeeding metre.
1
(ii) The amount of air present in the cylinder when a vacuum pump removes each time 4 of
their remaining in the cylinder.
Sol:
(i) Given,
Cost of digging a well for the first meter c1 Rs.150.
Cost rises by Rs.20 for each succeeding meter
Then,
Cost of digging for the second meter c2 Rs.150 Rs 20
Rs 170
Cost of digging for the third meter c3 Rs.170 Rs 20
Rs 210
Thus, costs of digging a well for different lengths are
150,170,190, 210,......
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
4. Show that the sequence defined by an = 5n − 7 is an A.P., find its common difference.
Sol:
Given sequence is
an 5n 7
nth term of given sequence an 5n 7
5n 2 5n 7
5
d 5
3 n 2 12 2n.1 5
3n2 6n 2
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
6. The general term of a sequence is given by an = −4n + 15. Is the sequence an A.P.? If so,
find its 15th term and the common difference.
Sol:
Given sequence is,
an 4n 15.
nth term is an 4n 15
n 1 term is an 1 4 n 1 15
th
4n 4 15
4n 11
Common difference d an 1 an
4n 11 4n 15
4n 11 4n 15
d 4
Common difference d an 1 an
4n 11 4n 15
4n 11 4n 15
d 4.
Common difference (d) does not depend on ' n ' value
given sequence is in A.P
15th term a15 4 15 15
60 15
45
a15 45
7. Find the common difference and write the next four terms of each of the following
arithmetic progressions:
(i) 1, 2, 5, 8,.......
(ii) 0, 3, 6, 9,...........
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
1 3
(iii) 1, , ,........
4 2
5 2
(iv) 1, , ,........
6 3
Sol:
(i) 1, 2, 5, 8,.......
Given arithmetic progression is,
a1 1, a2 2, a3 5, a4 8.........
Common difference d a2 a1
2 1
d 3
To find next four terms
a5 a4 d 8 3 11
a6 a5 d 11 3 14
a7 a6 d 14 3 17
a8 a7 d 17 3 20
d 3, a5 11, a6 16, a7 17, a8 20
(ii) 0, 3, 6, 9,...........
Given arithmetic progression is.
0, 3, 6, a4 9...........
Common difference d a2 a1
3 0
d 3
To find next four terms
a5 a4 d 9 3 12
a6 a5 d 12 3 15
a7 a6 d 15 3 18
a8 a7 d 18 3 21
d 3, a5 12, a6 15, a7 17, a8 21
1 3
(iii) 1, , ,........
4 2
Given arithmetic progression is,
1 3
1, , ,........
4 2
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
1 3
a1 1, a2 , a3 ,.........
4 2
Common difference d a2 a1
1
1
4
1 4
4
5
d
4
8. Prove that no matter what the real numbers a and b are, the sequence with nth term a + nb
is always an A.P. What is the common difference?
Sol:
Given sequence an an 6n
nth term an a nb
n 1 term an 1 a n 1 b.
th
Common difference d an 1 an
3 4 n 1 3 4n
4.
d 4 does not depend on n value so, the given series is in A. p and the sequence is
a1 3 4 1 3 4 7
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
a2 a1 d 7 4 11; a3 a2 d 11 4 15
7,11,15,19,.........
(ii) an 5 2n
Given, nth term an 5 2n
n 1 term an 1 5 2 n 1
th
7 2n
Common difference d 7 2n 5 20
2.
d 2 does not depend on n value given sequence is in A. p and the sequence is B1
a1 5 2.1 7
a2 7 2 9, a3 9 2 11, a4 11 2 13
7,9,11,13,............
(iii) an 6 n
Given, nth term an 6 n
n 1 term an 1 6 n 1
th
5n
Common difference d an 1 an
5 n 6 n
1
d 1does not depend on n value given sequence is in A. p the sequence is
a1 6 1 5, a2 5 1 4, a3 4 1 3, a4 3 1 2
5, 4,3, 2,1,.............
(iv) an 9 5n
Given, nth term an 9 5n
n 1 term an 1 9 5 n 1
th
4 5n
Common difference d an 1 an
4 5n 4 5n
5
d 1does not depend on n value given sequence is in A. p
The sequence is,
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
a1 9 1.1 4
a2 9 5.2 1
a3 9 5.3 6
4, 1, 6, 11,.........
10. Find out which of the following sequences are arithmetic progressions. For those which are
arithmetic progressions, find out the common differences.
Sol:
(i) 3,6,12, 24,.............
General arithmetic progression is a, a d , a 2d , a 3d ,.........
Common difference d Second term – first term
d d a d (or)
Third term – second term
a 2d a d d
To check given sequence is in A. p or not we use this condition.
Second term – First term = Third term – Second term
a1 3, a2 6, a3 12, a4 24
Second term – First term = 6 3 3
Third term – Second term 12 6 6
This two are not equal so given sequence is not in A. p
(ii) 0, 4, 8, 12,............
In the given sequence
a1 0, a2 4, a3 8, a4 12
Check the condition
Second term – first term = third term – second term
a2 a1 a8 a2
4 0 8 4
4 8 4
4 4
Condition is satisfied given sequence is in A. p with common difference
d a2 a1 4
1 1 1 1
(iii) , , , ,...........
2 4 6 8
In the given sequence
1 1 1 1
a1 , a2 , a3 , a4 .
2 4 6 8
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Exercise – 9.3
1. Find:
(i) 10th term of the AP 1,4 , 7, 10….
(ii) 18th term of the AP 2,3 2,5 2,............
(iii) nth term of the AP 13,8,3, 2,...........
(iv) 10th term of the AP 40, 15,10,35,.........
(v) 8th term of the AP 11, 104, 91, 78………
(vi) 11th term of the AP 10.0, 10.5, 11.0, 11.2…….
3 5 7 9
(vii) 9th term of the AP , , ,..............
4 4 4 4
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
(i) Given A. p is
1, 4, 7,10,..........
First term a 1
Common difference (d) = second term first term
4 1
3.
nth term in an A. p a n 1 d
10th term in an 1 10 1 3
1 9.3
1 27
28
(ii) Given A. p is
2,3 2,5 2,............
First term a 2
Common difference Second term – First term
3 2 2
d 2 2
nth term in an A. p a n 1 d
18th term of A. p 2 18 1 2 2
2 17.2 2
2 1 34
35 2
18th term of A. p is 35 2
(iii) Given A. p is
13,8,3, 2,...........
First term a 13
Common difference d Second term first term
8 13
5
nth term of an A. p an a n 1 d
13 n 1 5
13 5n 5
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
an 18 5n
(iv) Given A. p is
40, 15,10,35,.........
First term a 40
Common difference d Second term – first term
15 40
40 15
25
nth term of an A. p an a n 1 d
10th term of A. p a10 40 10 1 25
40 9.25
40 225
185
(v) Given sequence is
117,104,91, 78,............
First learn can 117
Common difference d Second term – first term
104 117
13
nth term an a n 1 d
8th term a8 a 8 1 d
117 7 13
117 91
26
(vi) Given A. p is
10.0,10.5,11.0,11.5,..........
First term a 10.0
Common difference (d) Second term – first term
10.5 10.0
0.5
nth term an a n 1 d
11th term a11 10.0 11 1 0.5
10.0 10 0.5
10.0 5
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
15.0
(vii) Given A. p is
3 5 7 9
, , ,..............
4 4 4 4
3
First term a
4
Common difference d Second term – first term
5 3
4 4
2
4
n term an a n 1 d
th
9th term a9 a 9 1 d
3 2
8.
4 4
3 16
4 4
19
4
250
n 50
5
50th term is 248.
(ii) Given A. p is 84,80, 76,.........
First term a 84
Common difference d a2 a
80 84
4
nth term an a n 1 d
Given nth term is 0
0 84 n 1 4
84 4 n 1
21
84
n 1 21
4
n 21 1 22
22nd term is 0.
(iii) Given A. p 4,9,14,.......
First term a 4
Common difference d a 2 a
94
5
nth term an a n 1 d
Given nth term is 254
4 n 1 5 254
n 1 5 250
250
n 1 50
5
n 51
51st term is 254.
(iv) Given A. p
21, 42, 63,84,..........
a 21, d a2 a
42 21
21
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
nth term an a n 1 d
Given nth term 420
21 n 1 21 420
n 1 21 399
399
n 1 19
21
n 20
20th term is 420.
(v) Given A. p is 121,117,113,..........
First term a 121
Common difference d 117 121
4
nth term a a n 1 d
Given nth term is negative i.e., an 0
121 n 1 4 0
121 4 4n 0
125 4n 0
4n 125
125
n
4
n 31.25
The integer which comes after 31.25 is 32.
32nd term is first negative term
68 7 3n 3
31 3 3n
64 3n
64
n
3
Since, the value of n is a fraction.
Thus, 68 is not the team of the given A. p
(ii) Here, A. p is 3,8,13,..........
an 302, a 3
Common difference d 8 3 5 using the above mentioned formula, we get
302 3 n 1 5
302 3 5n 5
299 5n 5
5n 304
305
n
5
Since, the value of ' n ' is a fraction. Thus, 302 is not the term of the given A. p
(iii) Here, A. p is 11,8,5, 2,...........
an 150, a 1 and d 8 11 3
Thus, using the above mentioned formula, we get
150 11 x 1 3
150 11 34 3
161 3 34
34 164
164
n
3
Since, the value of n is a fraction. Thus, 150 is not the term of the given A. p
From given A. p
a 7, d 10 7 3, an a n 1 d .
Let, an 43 (last term)
7 n 1 3 43
12
26
n 1 12
3
n 13
13 terms are there in given A. p
5 2 1 10
(ii) 1, , , ,........, .
6 3 2 3
From given A. p
5
a 1, d 1, an a n 1 d
6
1
6
10
Let, an (last term)
3
1 10
1 n 1
6 3
1 10
n 1
6 3
13 62
n 1 26
3
n 27
27 terms are there in given A. p
(iii) 7,13,19,...........05
From the given A. p
a 7, d 13 7 6, an a n 1 d
Let, an 205 (last term)
7 n 1 6 205
n 1 .6 198
n 1 33
n 34
34 terms are there in given A. p
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
1
(iv) 18,15 ,13,.......... 47
2
From the given A. p.,
1 31
a 18, d 15 18 18 15 5 18 2 5
2 2
an a n 1 .d
Let an 47 (last term)
18 n 1 , 2.5 47
12.5 n 1 65
65 65 10
n 1 26
25 25
n 27
27 terms are there in given A. p
5. The first term of an AP is 5, the common difference is 3 and the last term is 80, find the
number of terms.
Sol:
Given
First term a 5
Common difference d 3
Last term 1 80
To calculate no of terms in given A. p
an a n 1 d
Let an 80,
80 5 n 1 3
75 n 1 3
75
n 1 25
3
n 26
There are 26 terms.
6. The 6th and 17 terms of an A.P. are 19 and 41 respectively, find the 40th term.
Sol:
Given, a6 19, a17 41
a6 a 6 1 d
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
19 a 5d ……….(1)
a17 a 17 1 d
41 a 16d ………..(2)
Subtract (1) from (2)
a 16d 41
a 5d 19
0 11d 22
22
d 2
11
Substitute d 2 in (1)
19 a 5 2
9a
40th term a40 a 40 1 d
9 39 2
9 78
87
a40 87
7. If 9th term of an A.P. is zero, prove that its 29th term is double the 19th term.
Sol:
Given
9th term of an A. p a9 0, an a n 1 d
a a 1 d 0
a 8d 0
a 8d
We have to prove
24th term is double the 19th term a29 2 a19
a 29 1 d 2 a 1a 1 .d
a 28 d 2 a 18a
Put a 8d
8d 28d 2 8d 18d
20d 2 10d
20d 20d
Hence proved
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
8. If 10 times the 10th term of an A.P. is equal to 15 times the 15th term, show that 25th term
of the A.P. is zero.
Sol:
Given,
10 times of 10th term is equal to 15 times of 15th term.
10 a10 15.a15
10 a 10 1 d 15 a 15 1 .d an a n 1 d
10 a 9d 15 a 14 d
15
a 9d a 14d
10
3 42d
a a 9d
2 2
12
1 24
a d
2 2
a 24 d
a 24 d
We have to prove 25th term of A. p is 0
a25 0
a 25 1 d 0
a 24d 0
Put a 24d
24 d 24d 0
00
Hence proved.
9. The 10th and 18th terms of an A.P. are 41 and 73 respectively. Find 26th term.
Sol:
Given,
a10 41, a18 73, an a n 1 d
a10 a 10 1 d
41 a 9d ………..(1)
a18 a 18 1 d
73 a 17d ………..(2)
Subtract (1) from (2)
(2) (1)
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
a 17d 73
a 9d 41
0 8d 32
32
d 4
8
Substitute d 4 in (1)
a 9 4 41
a 41 36
a5
26th term a26 a 26 1 d
5 25.4
5 100
105
26th term a26 105.
10. In a certain A.P. the 24th term is twice the 10th term. Prove that the 72nd term is twice the
34th term.
Sol:
Given
24th term is twice the 10th term
a24 2 a10
Let, first term of a square a
Common difference d
nth term an a n 1 d
a 24 1 d a 10 1 .d 2
a 23d 2 a 9d
23 18 d a
a 5d
We have to prove
72nd term is twice the 34th term
a12 2a34
a 12 1 d 2 a 34 1 d
a 71d 2a 66d
Substitute a 5d
5d 71d 2 5d 66d
76d 10d 66d
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
76d 76d
Hence proved.
11. If (m + 1)th term of an A.P. is twice the (n + 1)th term, prove that (3m + 1)th term is twice
the (m+n+l)th term.
Sol:
Given
m 1 term is twice the m 1 term.
th th
First term a
Common difference d
nth term an a n 1 .d
am1 2 an 1
a m 1 1 d 2 a n 1 1 d
a md 2 a nd
a m 2n d
We have to prove
3m 1 term is twice the m n 1 term
th th
a3m1 2 am n 1
a 3m 1 1 d a m n 1 1 d
a 3m d 2a 2 m n d
Substitute a m 2n d
m 2n d 3m d 2 m 2n d 2 m n d
4m 2n 4m 4n 2n
4m 2n 4m 2n
Hence proved.
12. If the n term of the A.P. 9, 7, 5, ... is same as the th term of the A.P. 15, 12, 9, ... find n.
Sol:
Given,
First sequence is 9, 7,5,.............
a 9, d 9 2, an a n 1 d
an 9 n 1 . 2
Second sequence is 15,12,9,................
a 15, d 12 15 3, an a n 1 d
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
an 15 n 1 3
Given an. an are equal
9 2 n 1 15 3 n 1
3 n 1 2 n 1 15 9
n 1 6
n7
7th term of two sequence are equal
13. Find the 12th term from the end of the following arithmetic progressions:
(i) 3 51 7, 9, ... 201 (ii) 3, 8, 13, ... , 253 (iii) 1, 4, 7, 10, ..., 88
Sol:
(i) 3,5,7,9,............2d
First term a 3
Common difference d 5 3 2
12th term from the end is can be considered as (1) last term = first term and common
differnce d 1 d nth term from the end = last term n 1 d
12th term from end 201 12 1 2
201 22
179
(ii) 3,8,13,............253
First term a 3
Common difference d 8 3 5
Last term 1 253
nth term of a sequence on a n 1 d
To find nth term from the end, we put last term 1 as ' a ' and common difference as
d
nth term from the end = last term n 1 d
12th term from the end = 253 12 1 5
253 55
198
12th term from the end 198
(iii) 1, 4, 7,10,...............88
First term a 1
Common differnce d 4 1 3
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
14. The 4th term of an A.P. is three times the first and the 7 term exceeds twice the third term
by 1. Find the first term and the common difference.
Sol:
Given,
4th term of an A. p is three times the times the first term
a4 3. a
nth term of a sequence an a n 1 d
a 4 1 d 3a
a 3d 3a
3d 2a
3
a d. ………….(1)
2
Seventh term exceeds twice the third term by 1.
a7 1 2.a3
a 7 1 d 1 2 1 d
a 6d 1 2a 4d
a 2d 1 ………….(2)
By equating (1), (2)
3
d 2d 1
2
3
d 2d 1
2
3d 4d
1
2
d 2
d 2
3
Put d 2 in a d
2
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
3
.x
2
3
First term a 3, common difference d 2.
15. Find the second term and nth term of an A.P. whose 6th term is 12 and the 8th term is 22.
Sol:
Given
a6 12, a8 22
nth term of an A. p an a n 1 d
a6 a n 1 d a 6 1 d a 5d 12 ………….(1)
Subtracting (1) from (2)
a 7d 22
a 5d 12
(2) (1)
0 2d 10
d 5
a 5d 12
a 55 12
Put d 5 in
a 12 25
a 13
Second term a2 a 2 1 d
ad
13 5
a1 8
nth term an a n 1 d
13 n 1 5
an 18 5n
nth term an a n 1 d
13 n 1 5
an 18 5n
a2 8, an 18 5n
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
17. An A.P. consists of 60 terms. If the first and the last terms be 7 and 125 respectively, find
32nd term.
Sol:
Given
No. of terms n 60
First term a 7
Last term a10 125
a60 a 60 1 d a n a n 1 d
125 7 59 d
118 59d
118
d 2
59
52nd term a32 a 32 1 d
7 31.2
7 62
69
18. The sum of 4 and 8th terms of an A.P. is 24 and the sum of the 6th and 10th terms is 34.
Find the first term and the common difference of the A.P.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Given
a4 a8 24
a6 a10 34
a 4 1 d a 18 1 d 24
2a 10d 24
a 5d 12 ………….(1)
a6 a10 34
a 6 1 d a 10 1 d 34
2a 14d 34
a 7d 17 ………….(2)
Subtract (1) from (2)
a 7d 17
a 5d 12
2d 5
5
d
2
5
Put d in a 5d 12
2
5
a 12 5
2
24 25 1
a
2 2
1 b
a , d
2 2
19. The first term of an A.P. is 5 and its 100th term is — 292. Find the 50th term of this A.P.
Sol:
Given,
a30 a20 a 30 1 d a 20 1 d an a n 1 d
a 29d a 19d
10d
(i) 9, 14, 19, 24,.......
Common difference (d) = second tern – first term
14 9
14 9
d 5
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
22. Find n if the given value of x is the n term of the given A.P.
21 31 41 141
(i) 1, , , ,........, x
11 11 11 11
1 1
(ii) 5 ,11,16 , 22,...........: x 550
2 2
(iii) 1, 3, 5, 7,......: x 151
(iv) 25,50,75,100.........: c 1000
Sol:
(i) 25,50,75,100.........: c 1000
First term a 25
Common difference d 50 25 25
nth term an a n 1 d
Given, an 1000
1000 25 n 1 25
975 n 1 25
975
n 1 39
25
n 40
(ii) Given sequence 1, 3, 5, 7,......: x 151
First term a 1
Common difference d 3 1 3 1 2
nth term an a n 1 d
Given an 151,
151 1 n 1 2
150 1 n 1 2
150
n 1 75
2
n 74
(iii) Given sequence is
1 1
5 ,11,16 , 22,...........: x 550
2 2
1 1
First term (a) 5
2 2
22 11
2
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
11
2
nth term an a n 1 d
11 11
550 n 1
2 2
11
550 1 n 1
2
2
n 550
11
n 100
(iv) Given sequence is
21 31 41 141
1, , , ,........, x
11 11 11 11
First term a 1
21
Common difference d 1
11
21 11
11
10
11
n term an a n 1 d
th
171 10
1 n 1 .
11 11
171 10
1 n 1
11 11
171 11 10
n 1
11 11
160 10
n 1 .
11 11
160 11
n 1
11 10
n 17
23. If an A.P. consists of n terms with first term a and nth term 1 show that the sum of the mth
term from the beginning and the mth term from the end is (a + l).
Sol:
First term of a sequence is a
Last term 1
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
24. Find the arithmetic progression whose third term is 16 and seventh term exceeds its fifth
term by 12.
Sol:
Given, a3 16
a 3 1 d 16
a 2d 16. ……..(1)
And a7 12 a5
a 7 1 d 12 a 5 1 d a n a n 1 d
a 6d 12 a 4d
2d 12
12
d 6
2
Put d 6 in (1)
a 2 6 16
a 12 6
a 284
Then the sequence is a, a d , a 2d , a 3d ,.......
28, 4,10,16, 22,......
25. The 7th term of an A.P. is 32 and its 13th term is 62. Find the A.P.
Sol:
Given,
a 32
a 7 1 d 32
a 6d 32 …….(1)
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
And a13 62
a 13 1 d 62
a 12d 62 ……..(2)
Subtract (1) from (2)
a 12d 62
a 6d 32
(2) – (1)
0 6d 32
30
d 5
6
Put d 5 in a 6d 32
a 6 5 32
a2
Then the sequence is a, a d , a 2d , a 3d ,..........
2,7,12,17,......
26. Which term of the A.P. 3, 10, 17, ... will be 84 more than its 13th term?
Sol:
Given A. p is 3,10,17,.......
First term a 3, Common difference d 10 3
7
Let, nth term of A. p will be 84 more than 13th term
an 84 a13
a n 1 d a 13 1 d 84
n 1 7 12.7 84
n 1 7 168
168
n 1 24
7
n 25
Hence 25th term of given A. p is 84 more than 13th term
27. Two arithmetic progressions have the same common difference. The difference between
their 100th terms is 100, what is the difference between their l000th terms?
Sol:
Let the two A. p is be a1 , a2 , a3 ,.......... and b1 , b2 , b3 ,...........
an a1 n 1 d and bn b1 n 1 d
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Since common difference of two equations is same given difference between 100th terms is
100
a100 b100 100
a1 9 9 d b1 99d 100
a1 b1 100 …………..(1)
Difference between. 1000th terms is
a1000 b1000 a1 1000 1 d b1 1000 1 d
a1 9 9 9d b1 9 9 9d
a1 b1
100 (from (1))
Hence difference between 1000th terms of two A. p is 100.
28. For what value of n, the nth terms of the arithmetic progressions 63, 65, 67, . . . and 3, 10,
17, . . . are equal?
Sol:
Given two A. p is are
63, 65, 67.......... and 3,10,...........
First term of sequence 1 is a1 63
Common difference d1 65 63
2.
nth term an a1 n 1 d
63 n 1 d
First term of sequence 2 is b1 3.
Common difference d 2 10 3
7
nth term bn b1 n 1 d 2
3 n 1 7
Let nth terms of two sequence is equal
63 n 1 2 3 n 1 7
60 5 n 1
60
n 1 12
5
n 13
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
105 n 1 7 994
n 1 7 889
889
n 1 127
7
n 128
there are 128 numbers between 105, 994 which are divisible by 7
31. Which term of the arithmetic progression 8, 14, 20, 26, . . . will be 72 more than its 41st
term?
Sol:
Given sequence
8,14, 20, 26,.........
Let nth term is 72 more than its 41st term
an a41 72
For the given sequence
a 8, d 14 8 6
a n 1 d 8 a 1 6 72
8 n 1 6 8 90 6 72
n 1 6 312
312
n 1 52
6
n 53
53rd term is 72 more than 41st term
32. Find the term of the arithmetic progression 9, 12, 15, 18,. . . which is 39 more than its 36th
term.
Sol:
Given A. p is 9,12,15,........
For this a 9, d 12 9 3
Let nth term is 39 more than its 36th term
an 39 a36
a n 1 3 39 9 36 1 3 an a n 1 d
n 1 3 39 35 3
n 1 3 144
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
144
n 1 48
3
n 49
49th term is 39 more than its 36th term
33. Find the 8th term from the end of the A.P. 7,1õ13, . . ., 184
Sol:
Given A. p is 7,10,13,.........184
a 7, d 10 7 3, l 184
nth term from the end l n 1 d
8th term from the end 184 8 1 3
184 21
163
8th term from the end 163
34. Find the 10th term from the end of the A.P. 8, 10, 12,. . ., 126.
Sol:
Given A. p is 8,10,12,........126
a 8, d 10 8 2, l 126
nth term from the end l n 1 d
10th term from the end 126 10 1 2
126 18
108
10th term from the end 108
35. The sum of 4th and 8th terms of an A.P. is 24 and the sum of 6th and 10th terms is 44. Find
the A.P.
Sol:
Given, a4 a8 24
a 4 1 d a 8 1 d 24 a n a n 1 d
2a 10d 24
a 5d 12 ………(1)
And a6 a10 44
a 6 1 a 10 1 d 44 a n a n 1 d
2a 14d 44
a 7d 22 ………(2)
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
36. Which term of the A.P. 3, 15, 27, 39, . . . will be 120 more than its 21st term?
Sol:
Given A. p is
3,15, 27,39,........
Let nth term is 120 more than 21st term
Then an 120 a21
For the given sequence
a 3, d 15 3 12
a n 1 d 120 d 21 1 d
n 112 120 20 2
n 112 360
360
n 1 30
12
n 31
31st term is 120 more than 21st term
37. The 17th term of an A.P. is 5 more than twice its 8th term. If the 11th term of the A.P. is 43,
find the nth term.
Sol:
Given
17th term of an A. p is 5 more than twice its 8th term
a17 5 2a8
a 17 1 d 5 2 a 8 1 d
a 16d 5 2a 14d
a 5 2d …………(1)
th
And 11 term of the A. p is 43
a11 43
a 11 1 d 43
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
a11 43
a 11 1 d 43
a 10d 43 …………(2)
a 10d 43
a 2d 5
(2) – (1)
a 12d 48
48
d 4
12
Put d 4 in (1)
a 5 2 4
a3
nth term of given sequence is an a 1 n 1 d
3 n 1 4
3 4n 4
4n 1
nth term of given sequence an 4n 1
Exercise – 9.4
1. The sum of three terms of an A.P. is 21 and the product of the first and the third terms
exceeds the second term by 6, find three terms.
Sol:
Given,
Sum of three terms of on A.P is 21.
Product of first and the third term exceeds the second term by 6.
Let, the three numbers be a-d, a, a+d, with common difference d: then,
(a – d) + a + (a + d) = 21
3a = 21
21
a= =7
3
and (a – d) (a + d) = a + 6
𝑎2 − 𝑑 2 = 𝑎 + 6
Put a = 7 ⟹ 72 − 𝑑 2 = 7 + 6
49 – 13 = d2
d = ±6
∴ The three terms are a – d, a, a + d, i.e., 1, 7, 13.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
2. Three numbers are in A.P. If the sum of these numbers be 27 and the product 648, find the
numbers.
Sol:
Let, the three numbers are a – d, a, a + d.
Given,
(a – d) + a + (a + d) = 27
3a = 27
27
a= =9
3
and, (𝑎 − 𝑑)(𝑎)(𝑎 + 𝑑) = 648
(𝑎2 − 𝑑 2 )(𝑎) = 648
Put a = 9, then
(92 − 𝑑2 ) 9 = 648
648
81 – d2 = = 72
9
2
𝑑 = 81 − 72
𝑑2 = 9
d=3
∴ The three terms are a – d, a, a + d i.e. 6, 9, 12.
3. Find the four numbers in A.P., whose sum is 50 and in which the greatest number is 4 times
the least.
Sol:
Let, the four numbers be a – 3d, a – d, a + d, a + 3d, with common difference 2d.
Given, sum is 50.
(a – 3d) + (a – d) + (a + d) + (a + 3d) = 50
4a = 50
a = 12.5
greater number is 4 time the least
(a + 3d) = 4(a – 3d)
a + 3d = 4a – 12d
15d = 3a
Put a = 12.5
3
d = 15 × 12.5
d = 2.5
∴ The four numbers are a – 3d, a – d, a + 3d i.e., 12.5 – 3(2.5), 12.5 – 2.5, 12.5 + 2.5, 12.5
+ 3(2.5)
⟹ 5, 10, 15, 20
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
4. The angles of a quadrilateral are in A.P. whose common difference is 10°. Find the angles.
Sol:
A quadrilateral has four angles. Given, four angles are in A.P with common difference 10.
Let, the four angles be, a – 3d, a – d, a + d, a + 3d with common difference = 2d.
2d = 10
10
d= =5
2
In a quadrilateral, sum of all angles = 360°
(a – 3d) + (a – d) + (a + d) + (a + 3d) = 360
4a = 360
a = 360/4 = 90°
∴ The angles are a – 3d, a – d, a + d, a + 3d with a = 90, d = 5
i.e. 90 – 3(5), 90 – 5, 90 + 3(5)
⟹ 75°, 85°, 95°, 105°.
5. The sum of three numbers in A.P. is 12 and the sum of their cubes is 288. Find the
numbers.
Sol:
2, 4, 6, or 6, 4, 2.
Exercise – 9.5
a = 5, d = 2 – 5 = −3
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 {2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑}
𝑛
= 2 {2.5 + (𝑛 − 1) − 3}
𝑛
= 2 {10 − 3(𝑛 − 1)}
𝑛
= 2 {13 − 3𝑛}
𝑛
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (13 − 3𝑛)
4. If the sum of a certain number of terms starting from first term of an A.P. is 25, 22, 19, ... is
116. Find the last term.
Sol:
Given AP is 25, 22, 19, ……
First term (a) = 25, d = 22 – 25 = −3.
𝑛
Given, 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
𝑛
116 = 2 (2 × 25 + (𝑛 − 1) − 3)
232 = n(50 − 3(𝑛 − 1))
232 = n(53 – 3n)
232 = 53n – 3n2
3𝑛2 − 53𝑛 + 232 = 0
(3n – 29) (n – 8) = 0
∴n=8
⟹ a8 = 25 + (8 – 1) −3
∴ n = 8, a8 = 4
= 25 – 21 = 4
5. (i) How many terms of the sequence 18, 16, 14, ... should be taken so that their
(ii) How many terms are there in the A.P. whose first and fifth terms are −14 and 2
respectively and the sum of the terms is 40?
(iii) How many terms of the A.P. 9, 17, 25, . . . must be taken so that their sum is 636?
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
(iv) How many terms of the A.P. 63, 60, 57, . . . must be taken so that their sum is 693?
Sol:
(i) Given sequence, 18, 16, 14, …
a = 18, d = 16 – 18 = −2.
Let, sum of n terms in the sequence is zero
Sn = 0
𝑛
(2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑) = 0
2
𝑛
(2.18 + (𝑛 − 1) − 2) = 0
2
𝑛(18 − (𝑛 − 1)) = 0
𝑛(19 − 𝑛) = 0
n = 0 or n = 19
(ii) ∵ 𝑛 = 0 is not possible. Therefore, sum of 19 numbers in the sequence is zero.
Given, a = -14, a 5 = 2
a + (5 – 1)d = 2
−14 + 4d = 2
4𝑑 = 16 ⟹ 𝑑 = 4
Sequence is −14, −10, -6, −2, 2, ……
Given 𝑆𝑛 = 40
𝑛
40 = 2 {2(−14) + (𝑛 − 1)4}
80 = 𝑛(−28 + 4𝑛 − 4)
80 = 𝑛(−32 + 4𝑛)
4(20) = 4n(−8 + n)
𝑛2 − 8𝑛 − 20 = 0
(𝑛 − 10)(𝑛 + 2) = 0
𝑛 = 10 𝑜𝑟 𝑛 = −2
∴ Sum of 10 numbers is 40 (Since -2 is not a natural number)
(iii) Given AP 9, 17, 25, …….
a = 9, d = 17 – 9 = 8, and 𝑆𝑛 = 636
𝑛
636 = 2 (2.9 + (𝑛 − 1)8)
1272 = 𝑛(18 − 8 + 8𝑛)
1272 = n(10 + 8n)
2 × 636 = 2n(5 + 4n)
636 = 5n + 4n2
4n2 + 5n – 636 = 0
(4n + 53) (n – 12) = 0
−53
∴ n = 12 (Since n is not a natural number)
4
Therefore, value of n is 12.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
6. The first and the last terms of an A.P. are 17 and 350 respectively. If the common
difference is 9, how many terms are there and what is their sum?
Sol:
Given, a = 17, l = 350, d = 9
l = 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑
350 = 17 + (n – 1)9
333 = (n – 1)9
333
n–1= = 37
9
n = 38
∴ 38 terms are there
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 {𝑎 + 𝑙}
38
= {17 + 350}
2
= 19.367
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 6973
7. The third term of an A.P. is 7 and the seventh term exceeds three times the third term by 2.
Find the first term, the common difference and the sum of first 20 terms.
Sol:
Given, 𝑎3 = 7 and 3𝑎3 + 2 = 𝑎7
𝑎7 = 3.7 + 2
𝑎7 = 21 + 2 = 23
∴ 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑
𝑎3 = 𝑎(3 − 1)𝑑 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎7 = 𝑎 + (7 − 1)𝑑
7 = 𝑎 + 2𝑑 … . . (𝑖) 23 = 𝑎 + 6𝑑 … . (𝑖𝑖)
𝑆𝑢𝑏𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑡 (𝑖)𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 (𝑖𝑖)
(𝑖𝑖) − (𝑖) ⟹ a + 6d = 23
a + 2d = 7 _
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
4d = 16
d=4
Put d = 4 in (i) ⟹ 7 = a + 2.4
a = 7 – 8 = −1
Given to find sum of first 20 terms.
20
𝑆20 = {−2 + (10 − 1)4}
2
= 10(−2 + 76)
∴ 𝑆20 = 740
8. The first term of an A.P. is 2 and the last term is 50. The sum of all these terms is 442. Find
the common difference.
Sol:
Given a = 2, l = 50, 𝑆𝑛 = 442
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 (𝑎 + 1)
𝑛
442 = 2 (2 + 50)
𝑛
442 = 2 . 52
442
∴n= = 17
26
Given, 𝑎𝑛 = 1 = 50
50 = 2 + (17 – 1) d
48 = 16 × 𝑑
48
d = 16 = 3
∴d=3
9. If 12th term of an A.P. is—13 and the sum of the first four terms is 24, what is the sum of
first 10 terms?
Sol:
Given, 𝑎12 = −13, 𝑎 + 𝑎2 + 𝑎3 + 𝑎4 = 24
4
𝑆4 = 2 (2𝑎 + 3𝑑) = 24
24
2a + 3d = = 12 … . (𝑖)
2
⟹ a + (12 − 1)𝑑 = −13
a + 11d = −13 … … (𝑖𝑖)
Subtract (i) from (ii) × 2
2 × (ii) – (i) ⟹ 2a + 22d = −28
2a + 3d = 12
198d = −38
−38
d= = −2
19
put d = −2 𝑖𝑛 (𝑖𝑖)
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
a + 11 (−2) = −13
a = −13 + 22
a=9
Given to find sum of first 10 terms.
10
𝑆10 = {2(𝑎) + (10 − 1) − 2}
2
= 5(18 – 18)
=0
∴ 𝑆10 = 0
10. Find the sum of first 22 terms of an A.P. in which d = 22 and a = 149.
Sol:
Given, d = 22, 𝑎22 = 149
𝑎 + (22 − 1) 𝑑 = 149
𝑎 = −313
22
Given, to find 𝑆22 = [2𝑎 + (22 − 1)𝑑]
2
= 11[2(−313) + 21.22]
= 11[−626 + 462]
= 11 – 164
= −1804
∴ 𝑆22 = −1804
11. Find the sum of all natural numbers between 1 and 100, which are divisible by 3.
Sol:
The numbers between 1 and 100 which are divisible by 3 are 3, 6, 9, ….99.
In this sequence, a = 3, d = 3, 𝑎𝑛 = 99
99 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑
99 = 3 + (n – 1)3
99 = 3[1 + n – 1]
99
n= = 33
3
∴ There are 33 numbers in the given sequence
33 𝑛
𝑆33 = (2.3 + (33 − 1)3) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑))
2 2
33
= (6 + 96)
2
33
= × 102
2
= 1683
∴ Sum of all natural numbers between 1 and 100, which are divisible by 3 is 1683.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
13. Find the sum of all odd numbers between (i) 0 and 50 (ii) 100 and 200.
Sol:
(i) Odd numbers between 0 and 50 are 1, 3, 5, ….., 49
In this a = 1, d = 2, l = 49 = 𝑎𝑛
49 = 1 + (n – 1)2 (∴ an = a + (n – 1)d)
48 = (n – 1)2
48
n–1= = 24
2
n = 25.
∴ There are 25 terms
25 𝑛
𝑆25 = (1 + 49) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (𝑎 + 1))
2
25
= × 50 = 625
2
∴ Sum of all odd numbers between 0 and 50 is 625.
(ii) Odd numbers between 100 and 200 are 101, 103, …. 199
In this a = 101, d = 2, l = an = 199
199 = 101 + (n – 1)2
98
n–1= = 49
2
n = 50
∴ There are 50 terms.
50 𝑛
𝑆50 = (101 + 199) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (𝑎 + 1))
2
50
= × 300
2
= 7500
∴ Sum of all odd numbers between 100 and 200 is 7500.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
14. Show that the sum of all odd integers between 1 and 1000 which are divisible by 3 is
83667.
Sol:
Odd integers between 1 and 1000 which are divisible by 3 are 3, 6, 9, 15 …… 999.
In this a = 3, d = 5, l = 𝑎𝑛 = 999
999 = 3 + (n – 1)5 (∴ 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
999 = 3[1 + (n – 1)2]
999 334
∴ 2n – 1 = = 333 ⟹ 𝑛 = = 167
3 2
∴ There are 333 numbers 167.
333
𝑆167 = [3 + 999]
2
333
= × 100 = 83667
2
∴ 𝑆167 = 83667
∴ Sum of all odd integers between 1 and 4000 which are divisible by 3 is 83667.
15. Find the sum of all integers between 84 and 719, which are multiples of 5.
Sol:
The numbers between 84 and 719, which are multiples of 5 are 85, 90, 95,…..715.
In this, a = 85, d = 5, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑙 = 715
715 = 85 + (n – 1)5 (∴ 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
630 = (n – 1)5
𝑛 − 1 = 126
n = 127
127 𝑛
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = (85 + 115) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (𝑎 + 1))
2
127
= × 800 = 50800
2
∴ Sum of all integers between 84 and 719, which are multiples of 5 is 50800.
16. Find the sum of all integers between 50 and 500, which are divisible by 7.
Sol:
Numbers between 50 and 500, which are divisible by 7 are 56, 63, ….., 497.
In this a = 56, d = 7, l = 𝑎𝑛 = 497
497 = 56 + (n – 1)7
441 = (n – 1)7
441
n–1= = 63
7
n = 64
∴ There are 64 terms.
64
𝑆64 = (56 + 497)
2
= 32 × 553 = 17696
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
∴ Sum of all integers between 50 and 500, which are divisible by 7 is 17696.
17. Find the sum of all even integers between 101 and 999.
Sol:
Even integers between 101 and 999 are 102, 104, …..998
a = 102, d = 2, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑙 = 998
998 = 102 + (n – 1)× 2 (∴ 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
896 = (n – 1)(2)
n – 1 = 448
n = 449.
∴ 449 terms are there
449
𝑆449 = [102 + 998]
2
449
= × 1100 = 246950
2
∴ Sum of all even integers between 101 and 999 is 24690
18. Find the sum of all integers between 100 and 550, which are divisible by 9.
Sol:
Integers between 100 and 550 which are divisible by 9 are 108, 117, …., 549.
In this a = 108, d = 9, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑙 = 549
549 = 108 + (n – 1)× 9 (∴ 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 + 1)𝑑)
441 = (n – 1) × 9
449
n–1= = 49
9
n = 50.
50 𝑛
∴ 𝑆50 = {108 + 549} (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (10 + 1))
2
= 25 × 657
= 16425
∴ Sum of all integers between 100 and 550, which are divisible by 9 is 16425.
19. In an A.P., if the first term is 22, the common difference is — 4 and the sum to n terms is
64, find n.
Sol:
Given, a = 22, d = −4, 𝑆𝑛 = 64
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
𝑛
64 = 2 × (2.22 + (𝑛 − 1) − 4)
64 = n(24 – 2n)
64 = 2n (12 – n)
64
12n – n2 = = 32
2
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
𝑛2 − 12𝑛 + 32 = 0
(𝑛 − 4)(𝑛 − 8) = 0
∴ n = 4 or 8
20. In an A.P., if the 5th and 12th terms are 30 and 65 respectively, what is the sum of first 20
terms?
Sol:
Given, 𝑎5 = 30, 𝑎12 = 65
⟹ 30 = a + (5 – 1)d
30 = a + 4d …..(i)
⟹ 65 = a + (12 – 1)d
65 = a + 11d …..(ii)
(ii) – (i) ⟹ a + 11d = 65
a + 4d = 30
0 + 7d = 35
35
d= =5
7
put d = 5 in …(i) ⟹ 80 = a + 4 (5)
a = 30 – 20 = 10
20 𝑛
𝑆20 = (2(10) + (20 − 1)5) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (20 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑))
2
= 10[20 + 95]
= 10 × 115
= 1150
∴ Sum of first 20 terms 𝑆20 = 1150
Given, 𝑎2 = 2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎4 = 8
a + d = 2 ….(i) a + 3d = 8 …..(ii)
(ii) – (i) ⟹ a + 3d = 8
a + d=2
2d = 6
d=3
Put d = 3 in ….(i) ⟹ a + d = 2
a+3=2
a = −1
51 𝑛
𝑆51 = (2 × −1 + (51 − 1 × 3)) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (20 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑))
2
51
= (−2 + 50 × 3)
2
51
= × 148
2
= 3774
= 44550
∴ Sum of all 3 – digit natural numbers which are multiples of 11 is 44550.
24. Find the sum of the first 15 terms of each of the following sequences having nth term as
(i) 𝑎𝑛 = 3 + 4𝑛
(ii) 𝑏𝑛 = 5 + 2𝑛
(iii) Yn = 9 – 5n
Sol:
(i) Given 𝑎𝑛 = 3 + 4𝑛
Put n = 1, a1 = 3 + 4(1) = 7
Put n = 15, 𝑎15 = 3 + 4(15) = 63 = 8
15 𝑛
Sum of 15 terms, 𝑆15 = (7 + 63) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (𝑎 + 𝑙))
2
15
= × 70
2
∴𝑆15 = 525
(ii) Given 𝑏𝑛 = 5 + 2𝑛
Put n = 1, 𝑏1 = 5 + 2(1) = 7
Put n = 15, b15 = 5 + 2(15) = 35 = l
15 𝑛
Sum of 15 terms , 𝑆15 = (7 + 35) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = (𝑎 + 𝑙))
2 2
15
= × 42
2
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
= 315
∴ 𝑆15 = 315
(iii) Given, Yn = 9 – 5n
Put n = 1, 𝑦1 = 9 − 5.1 = −4
Put n = 15, 𝑦15 9 − 5.15 = 9 − 75 = −66 = (𝑙)
15 𝑛
∴ 𝑆15 = (−4 − 66) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (𝑎 + 𝑙))
2
15
= × −70
2
= −465
∴ 𝑆15 = −465
25. Find the sum of first 20 terms of the sequence whose nth term is a = An + B.
Sol:
Given, nth term 𝑎𝑛 = 𝐴𝑛 + 𝐵
Put n = 1, 𝑎1 = 𝐴 + 𝐵
Put n = 20, 𝑎20 = 20 𝐴 + 𝐵 = (𝑙)
20 𝑛
∴ 𝑆20 = (𝐴 + 𝐵 + 20𝐴 + 𝐵) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = (𝑎 + 𝑙))
2 2
= 10 (21A + 2B)
= 210A + 20B
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 210𝐴 + 2𝐵
26. Find the sum of the first 25 terms of an A.P. whose nth term is given by an = 2 − 3n.
Sol:
Given, nth term 𝑎𝑛 = 2 − 3𝑛
Put n = 1, 𝑎1 = 2 − 3.1 = −1
Put n = 25, 𝑎15 = 𝑙 = 2 − 3.15 = −43
25 25
∴ 25 = (−1 − 43) = (−44) = −925
2 2
∴ 𝑆25 = −925
27. Find the sum of the first 25 terms of an A.P. whose nth term is given by an = 7 − 3n.
Sol:
Given, 𝑎𝑛 = 7 − 3𝑛
Put n = 1, 𝑎1 = 7 − 3.1 = 4
Put n = 25, 𝑎25 = 𝑙 = 7 − 3.25 = −68
25 𝑛
∴ 𝑆25 = (4 − 68) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (𝑎 + 𝑙))
2
25
= × −64
2
= −800
∴ 𝑆25 = −800
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
28. Find the sum of first 51 terms of an A.P. whose second and third terms are 14 and 18
respectively.
Sol:
Given, 𝑎2 = 14 ⟹ 𝑎 + 𝑑 = 14 … . . (𝑖)
𝑎3 = 18 ⟹ 𝑎 + 2𝑑 = 18 … . . (𝑖𝑖)
(ii) – (i) ⟹ a + 2d = 18
a + d = 14
0+d=4
Put d = 4 is (i) a + 4 = 4
a = 10
51 𝑛
∴ 𝑆50 = {2.10 + (51 − 1) × 4} (𝑆𝑛 = 2 {2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑})
2
51
= {20 + 200}
2
51
= × 220
2
= 5610
∴ 𝑆51 = 5610
29. If the sum of 7 terms of an A.P. is 49 and that of 17 terms is 289, find the sum of n terms.
Sol:
Given, 𝑆7 = 49
7 𝑛
(2𝑎 + (7 − 1)𝑑) = 49 (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = {2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑})
2 2
7
(2𝑎 + 6𝑑) = 49
2
7
× 2(𝑎 + 3𝑑) = 49
2
49
𝑎 + 3𝑑 = = 7 … . (𝑖) and
7
𝑆17 = 289
17
(2𝑎 + (17 − 1)𝑑) = 289
2
17
× 2(𝑎 + 8𝑑) = 289
2
289
𝑎 + 8𝑑 = = 17 …..(ii)
17
𝑆𝑢𝑏𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑡 (𝑖)𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 (𝑖𝑖)
a + 8d = 17
a + 3d = 7
5d = 10
d= 2
put d = 2, in (i) ⟹ a + 3 × 2 = 7
a=1
𝑛 𝑛
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 {2.1 + (𝑛 − 1). 2} (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑))
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
= 𝑛{1 + 𝑛 − 1}
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 𝑛2 .
30. The first term of an A.P. is 5, the last term is 45 and the sum is 400. Find the number of
terms and the common difference.
Sol:
Given, a = 5, l = 45, Sum of terms = 400
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 400
𝑛
{5 + 45} = 400
2
𝑛
= 50 = 400
2
2
𝑛 = 40 × 5
∴ 𝑛 = 16
16th term is 45
𝑎16 = 45 ⟹ 5 + (16 − 1) × 𝑑 = 45 = 15 × 𝑑 = 40
408 8
d= =3
15
8
∴ n = 16, d = 3
3𝑛2 13
31. In an A.P., the sum of first n terms is + n. Find its 25th term.
2 2
Sol:
3𝑛2 13
Given, sum of n terms 𝑆𝑛 = + 𝑛
2 2
3(𝑛−1)2 13
Let, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑆𝑛 − 𝑆𝑛−1 (∴ Replace n by (n – 1) is 𝑆𝑛 to get 𝑆𝑛−1 = + (𝑛 − 1))
2 2
3𝑛2 13 3(𝑛−1)2 13
𝑎𝑛 = + 𝑛− − (𝑛 − 1)
2 2 2 2
3 2 13
= {𝑛 − (𝑛 − 1)2 } + {𝑛 − (𝑛 − 1)}
2 2
3 13
= {𝑛2 − 𝑛2 + 2𝑛 − 1} + {1}
2 2
10
= 3𝑛 + = 3𝑛 + 5
2
Put n = 25, 𝑎25 = 3(25) + 5 = 75 + 5 = 80
∴ 25th term 𝑎25 = 80
32. Let there be an A.P. with first term ‘a’, common difference ‘d’. If a denotes its nth term and
Sn the sum of first n terms, find.
(i) n and Sn and if a = 5, d = 3 and a = 50
(ii) n and a, if an = 4, d = 2 and Sn = −14
(iii) d, if a = 3, n = 8 and Sn = 192
(iv) a, if an = 28, Sn = 144 and n = 9
(v) n and d, if a = 8, a = 62 and Sn = 210
(vi) n and an, if a = 2, d = 8 and Sn = 90
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
(i) Given a = 5, d = 3, 𝑎𝑛 = 50
𝑎𝑛 = 50
𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑 = 50
5 + (n – 1)3 = 50
(n – 1)3 = 45
45
n–1= = 15
3
n = 16
𝑛
Some of n terms 𝑆𝑛 = 2 [𝑎 + 𝑙]
16
= [5 + 50]
2
= 8 × 55
= 440
(ii) Given, 𝑎𝑛 = 4, 𝑑 = 2, 𝑆𝑛 = −14
𝑛
a + (n – 1).2 = 4 and 2 [2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1). 2] = −14
a + 2n = 6 𝑛[2𝑎 + 2𝑛 − 2] = −14
(or)
𝑛
[𝑎 + 𝑎𝑛 ] = −14
2
𝑛
[𝑎 + 4] = −14
2
𝑛[6 − 2𝑛 + 4] = −28
𝑛[10 – 2𝑛] = −28
2
2𝑛 − 10𝑛 − 28 = 0
2(𝑛2 − 5𝑛 − 14) = 0
(n + 2) (n – 7) = 0
N = −2, n = 7
∵ n = −2 is not a natural number. So, n = 7.
(iii) Given, a = 3, n = 8, Sn = 192.
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 [2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑]
192 × 2 = 8[6 + (8 − 1)𝑑]
192×2
= 6 + 7𝑑
8
48 = 6 + 7𝑑
7d = 42
d=6
(iv) Given, 𝑎𝑛 = 28, 𝑆𝑛 = 144, 𝑛 = 9
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 [𝑎 + 𝑙]
9
144 = 2 [𝑎 + 28]
2
144 = 9 = 𝑎 + 28
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
a + 28 = 32
a=4
(v) Given, a = 8, 62 and Sn = 210
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 [𝑎 + 𝑙]
𝑛
210 = 2 [8 + 62]
210 × 2 = n[70]
210×2
n= =6
70
a + (n – 1) d = 62
8 + (6 – 1) d = 62
5d = 54
d = 10.8
(vi) Given
a = 2, d = 8 and Sn = 90
𝑛 𝑛
90 = 2 [4 + (𝑛 − 1)8] (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 [2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑])
180 = n [4 + 8n – 8]
8𝑛2 − 4𝑛 − 180 = 0
4(2𝑛2 − 𝑛 − 45) = 0
2𝑛2 − 𝑛 − 45 = 0
(2n + 1) (n – 5) = 0
1
∵ n = − 2 is not a natural no. n = 5
𝑎𝑛 = 2 + 4(8) (∴ 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
𝑎𝑛 = 32
33. A man saved Rs 16500 in ten years. In each year after the first he saved Rs 100 more than
he did in the preceding year. How much did he save in the first year?
Sol:
Let ‘a’ be the money he saved in first year
⟹ First year he saved the money = Rs a
He saved Rs 100 more than, he did in preceding year.
⟹ Second year he saved the money = Rs (a + 100)
⟹ Third year he saved the money = Rs. (a + 2 (100))
So, the sequence is a, a + 100, a + 2(100), ……, This is in AP with common difference (d)
= 100.
⟹ Sum of money he saved in 10 years 𝑆10 = 16,500 𝑟𝑢𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑠
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
10
𝑆10 = (2𝑎 + (10 − 1). 100)
2
16,500 = 5 (2a + 9 × 100)
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
16500
2a + 900 = = 3300
5
2a = 2400
2400
a= = 1200
2
∴ He saved the money in first year (a) = Rs. 1200
34. A man saved Rs 32 during the first year, Rs 36 in the second year and in this way he
increases his savings by Rs 4 every year. Find in what time his saving will be Rs 200.
Sol:
Given
Saving in 1st yr (𝑎1 ) = Rs 32
Saving in 2nd yr (𝑎2 ) = Rs 36
Increase in salary every year (d) = Rs 4
Let in n years his saving will be Rs 200
⟹ 𝑆𝑛 = 200
𝑛
⟹ 2 [2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑] = 200
𝑛
⟹ 2 [64 + 4𝑛 − 4] = 200
𝑛
⟹ 2 [4𝑛 + 60] = 200
⟹ 2𝑛2 + 30𝑛 = 200
⟹ 𝑛2 + 15 − 100 = 0 [Divide by 2]
2
⟹ 𝑛 + 20𝑛 − 5𝑛 − 100 = 0
⟹ n(n + 20) – 5(n + 20) = 0
⟹ (n + 20)(n – 5) = 0
If n + 20 = 0 or n – 5 = 0
n = −20 or n = 5 (Rejected as n cannot be negative)
∴ In 5 years his saving will be Rs 200
35. A man arranges to pay off a debt of Rs 3600 by 40 annual installments which form an
arithmetic series. When 30 of the installments are paid, he dies leaving one-third of the debt
unpaid, find the value of the first installment.
Sol:
Given
A man arranges to pay off a debt of Rs 3600 by 40 annual installments which form an A.P
i.e., sum of all 40 installments = Rs 3600
S40 = 3600
Let, the money he paid in first installment is a, and every year he paid with common
difference = d
Then,
𝑛
S40 = 3600 (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 [2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑])
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
40
[2𝑎 + (40 − 1)𝑑] = 3600
𝑥
3600
2𝑎 + 39𝑑 = = 180 … … (𝑖)
20
𝑏𝑢𝑡,
He died by leaving one third of the debt unpaid that means he paid remaining money in 30
installments.
3600
∴ The money he paid in 30 installments = 3600 − = 3600 − 1200
3
∴ 𝑆30 = 2400
𝑆30 = 2400
30 𝑛
= [2𝑎 + (30 − 1)𝑑] = 2400 (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑))
2
2400
2a + 2ad = = 160 … . (𝑖𝑖)
15
(i) – (ii) ⟹ 2a + 39d = 180
2a + 29d = 160
0 + 10 d = 20
20
d = 10 = 2
put d = 2 in (ii) 2a + 29 (2) = 160
2a = 102
102
a= = 51
2
∴ The value of his first installment = 51.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Exercise – 9.1
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise – 10.1
Point of contact
P
Tangent
90°
Secant
As there are infinite number of points on the circle a circle has many (infinite) tangents.
3. O is the center of a circle of radius 8cm. The tangent at a point A on the circle cuts a line
through O at B such that AB = 15 cm. Find OB
Sol:
Consider a circle with center O and radius OA = 8cm = r, AB = 15 cm.
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
O B
4. If the tangent at point P to the circle with center O cuts a line through O at Q such that PQ
= 24cm and OQ = 25 cm. Find the radius of circle
Sol:
Given,
PQ = 24 cm
OQ = 25 cm
OP = radius = ?
P
O 25 cm Q
P is point of contact, At point of contact, tangent and radius are perpendicular to each other
∴ ∆POQ is right angled triangle ∠OPQ = 90°
By Pythagoras theorem,
𝑃𝑄 2 + 𝑂𝑃2 = 𝑂𝑄 2
⇒ 242 + 𝑂𝑃2 = 252
⇒ 𝑂𝑃 = √252 − 242 = √625 − 576
= √49 = 7𝑐𝑚
∴ 𝑂𝑃 = 𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑠 = 7𝑐𝑚
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise – 10.2
8 cm
O 17 cm P
T is point of contact. We know that at point of contact tangent and radius are perpendicular.
∴ OTP is right angled triangle ∠OTP = 90°, from Pythagoras theorem 𝑂𝑇 2 + 𝑃𝑇 2 = 𝑂𝑃2
82 + 𝑃𝑇 2 = 172
PT √172 − 82 = √289 − 64
= √225 = 15𝑐𝑚
∴ PT = length of tangent = 15 cm.
2. Find the length of a tangent drawn to a circle with radius 5cm, from a point 13 cm from the
center of the circle.
Sol:
Consider a circle with center O.
OP = radius = 5 cm.
A tangent is drawn at point P, such that line through O intersects it at Q, OB = 13cm.
Length of tangent PQ = ?
P
Q O
⇒ PQ = √144 = 12𝑐𝑚
Length of tangent = 12 cm
3. A point P is 26 cm away from O of circle and the length PT of the tangent drawn from P to
the circle is 10 cm. Find the radius of the circle.
Sol:
Given OP = 26 cm
PT = length of tangent = 10cm
radius = OT = ?
10 T
P
26
O
At point of contact, radius and tangent are perpendicular ∠OTP = 90°, ∆OTP is right
angled triangle.
By Pythagoras theorem, 𝑂𝑃2 = 𝑂𝑇 2 + 𝑃𝑇 2
262 = 𝑂𝑇 2 + 102
𝑘
𝑂𝑇 𝑘 = (√676 − 100)
𝑂𝑇 = √576
= 24 cm
OT = length of tangent = 24 cm
4. If from any point on the common chord of two intersecting circles, tangents be drawn to
circles, prove that they are equal.
Sol:
Let the two circles intersect at points X and Y.
XY is the common chord.
Suppose ‘A’ is a point on the common chord and AM and AN be the tangents drawn A to
the circle
We need to show that AM = AN.
5. If the quadrilateral sides touch the circle prove that sum of pair of opposite sides is equal to
the sum of other pair.
Sol:
Consider a quadrilateral ABCD touching circle with center O at points E, F, G and H as in
figure.
We know that
The tangents drawn from same external points to the circle are equal in length.
1. Consider tangents from point A [AM ⊥ AE]
AH = AE …. (i)
2. From point B [EB & BF]
BF = EB …. (ii)
3. From point C [CF & GC]
FC = CG …. (iii)
4. From point D [DG & DH]
DH = DG …. (iv)
Adding (i), (ii), (iii), & (iv)
(AH + BF + FC + DH) = [(AC + CB) + (CG + DG)]
⇒ (AH + DH) + (BF + FC) = (AE + EB) + (CG + DG)
⇒ AD + BC = AB + DC [from fig.]
Sum of one pair of opposite sides is equal to other.
6. If AB, AC, PQ are tangents in Fig. and AB = 5cm find the perimeter of ∆APQ.
Sol:
Perimeter of ∆APQ, (P) = AP + AQ + PQ
= AP + AQ + (PX + QX)
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
We know that
The two tangents drawn from external point to the circle are equal in length from point A,
AB = AC = 5 cm
From point P, PX = PB
From point Q, QX = QC
Perimeter (P) = AP + AQ + (PB + QC)
= (AP + PB) + (AQ + QC)
= AB + AC = 5 + 5
= 10 cms.
7. Prove that the intercept of a tangent between two parallel tangents to a circle subtends a
right angle at center.
Sol:
Consider circle with center ‘O’ and has two parallel tangents through A & B at ends of
diameter.
Let tangents through M intersects the tangents parallel at P and Q required to prove is that
∠POQ = 90°.
From fig. it is clear that ABQP is a quadrilateral
∠A + ∠B = 90° + 90° = 180° [At point of contact tangent & radius are perpendicular]
∠A + ∠B + ∠P + ∠Q = 360° [Angle sum property]
∠P + ∠Q = 360°−180° = 180° …..(i)
1
At P & Q ∠APO = ∠OPQ = 2 ∠𝑃
1
∠BQO = ∠PQO = 2 ∠𝑄 in (i)
2∠OPQ + 2 ∠PQO = 180°
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
∠OPQ + ∠PQO = 90° …. (ii)
In ∆OPQ, ∠OPQ + ∠PQO + ∠POQ = 180° [Angle sum property]
90° + ∠POQ = 180° [from (ii)]
∠POQ = 180° − 90° = 90°
∴ ∠POQ = 90°
8. In Fig below, PQ is tangent at point R of the circle with center O. If ∠TRQ = 30°. Find
∠PRS.
Sol:
Given ∠TRQ = 30°.
At point R, OR ⊥ RQ.
∠ORQ = 90°
⇒ ∠TRQ + ∠ORT = 90°
⇒ ∠ORT = 90° − 30° = 60°
ST is diameter, ∠SRT = 90° [∵ Angle in semicircle = 90°]
∠ORT + ∠ SRO = 90°
∠SRO + ∠PRS = 90°
∠PRS = 90° − 30° = 60°
9. If PA and PB are tangents from an outside point P. such that PA = 10 cm and ∠APB = 60°.
Find the length of chord AB.
Sol:
AP = 10 cm ∠APB = 60°
Represented in the figure
We know that
A line drawn from center to point from where external tangents are drawn divides or
1
bisects the angle made by tangents at that point ∠APO = ∠OPB = 2 × 60° = 30°
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
The chord AB will be bisected perpendicularly
∴ AB = 2AM
In ∆AMP,
𝑜𝑝𝑝.𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 𝐴𝑀
sin 30° = ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 = 𝐴𝑃
AM = AP sin 30°
𝐴𝑃 10
= = = 5𝑐𝑚
2 2
AP = 2 AM = 10 cm ---- Method (i)
In ∆AMP, ∠AMP = 90°, ∠APM = 30°
∠AMP + ∠APM + ∠MAP = 180°
90° + 30° + ∠MAP = 180°
∠MAP = 180°
In ∆PAB, ∠MAP = ∠BAP = 60°, ∠APB = 60°
We also get, ∠PBA = 60°
∴∆PAB is equilateral triangle
AB = AP = 10 cm. -----Method (ii)
10. From an external point P, tangents PA and PB are drawn to the circle with centre O. If CD
is the tangent to the circle at point E and PA = 14 cm. Find the perimeter of ABCD.
Sol:
PA = 14 cm
Perimeter of ∆PCD = PC + PD + CD = PC + PD + CE + ED
We know that
The two tangents drawn from external point to the circle are equal in length.
From point P, PA = PB = 14cm
From point C, CE = CA
From point D, DB = ED
Perimeter = PC + PD + CA +DB
= (PC + CA) + (PD + DB)
= PA + PB = 14 + 14 = 28 cm.
11. In the fig. ABC is right triangle right angled at B such that BC = 6cm and AB = 8cm. Find
the radius of its in circle.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
BC = 6cm AB = 8cm
As ABC is right angled triangle
By Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2 = 62 + 82 = 100
𝐴𝐶 = 10 𝑐𝑚
Consider BQOP ∠B = 90°,
∠BPO = ∠OQB = 90° [At point of contact, radius is perpendicular to tangent]
All the angles = 90° & adjacent sides are equal
∴ BQOP is square BP = BQ = r
We know that
The tangents drawn from any external point are equal in length.
AP = AR = AB – PB = 8 – r
QC = RC = BC – BQ = 6 – r
AC = AR + RC ⇒ 10 = 8 – r + 6 – r
⇒ 10 = 14 – 2r
⇒ 2r = 4
⇒ Radius = 2cm
12. From a point P, two tangents PA and PB are drawn to a circle with center O. If OP =
diameter of the circle shows that ∆APB is equilateral.
Sol:
OP = 2r
Tangents drawn from external point to the circle are equal in length
PA = PB
13. Two tangent segments PA and PB are drawn to a circle with center O such that ∠APB =
120°. Prove that OP = 2AP
Sol:
A+P
OP bisects ∠APB
1 1
∠APO = ∠OPB = ∠𝐴𝑃𝐵 = × 120° = 60°
2 2
At point A
OA ⊥ AP, ∠OAP = 90°
𝐴𝑃
In ∆PDA, cos 60° =
𝐷𝑃
1 𝐴𝑃
= 𝐷𝑃 ⇒ 𝐷𝑃 = 2𝐴𝑃
2
14. If ∆ABC is isosceles with AB = AC and C (0, 2) is the in circle of the ∆ABC touching BC
at L, prove that L, bisects BC.
Sol:
Given ∆ABC is isosceles AB = AC
We know that
The tangents from external point to circle are equal in length
From point A, AP = AQ
But AB = AC ⇒ AP + PB = AQ + QC
⇒ PB = PC …. (i)
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
From B, PB = BL; ….(ii) from C, CL = CQ …..(iii)
From (i), (ii) & (iii)
BL = CL
∴ L bisects BC.
15. In fig. a circle touches all the four sides of quadrilateral ABCD with AB = 6cm, BC = 7cm,
CD = 4cm. Find AD.
Sol:
We know that the tangents drawn from any external point to circle are equal in length.
From A ⟶ AS = AP ….(i)
From B ⟶ QB = BP …. (ii)
From C ⟶ QC = RC …..(iii)
From D ⟶ DS = DR …. (iv)
Adding (i), (ii), (iii) & (iv)
(AS + QB + QC + DS) = (AB + BP + RC + OR)
(AS + DS) + (QB + QC) = (AP + BP) + (RC + DR)
AD + BC = AB + CD
⇒ AD + 7 = 6 + 4 AD = 3cm
⇒ AD = 10 – 7 = 3cm
16. Prove that the perpendicular at the point of contact to a circle passes through the centre of
the circle.
Sol:
We know that
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
The at point of contact, the tangent is perpendicular to the radius. Radius is line from center
to point on circle. Therefore, perpendicular to tangent will pass through center of circle.
17. In fig.. O is the center of the circle and BCD is tangent to it at C. Prove that ∠BAC +
∠ACD = 90°
Sol:
Given
O is center of circle
BCD is tangent.
18. Two circles touch externally at a point P. from a point T on the tangent at P, tangents TQ
and TR are drawn to the circles with points of contact Q and E respectively. Prove that TQ
= TR.
Sol:
19. In the fig. a circle is inscribed in a quadrilateral ABCD in which ∠B = 90° if AD = 23cm,
AB = 29cm and DS = 5cm, find the radius of the circle.
Sol:
Given AD = 23 cm
AB = 29 cm
∠B = 90°
DS = 5cm
20. In fig. there are two concentric circles with Centre O of radii 5cm and 3cm. From an
external point P, tangents PA and PB are drawn to these circles if AP = 12cm, find the
tangent length of BP.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Given
OA = 5 cm
OB = 3 cm
AP = 12 cm
BP = ?
We know that
At the point of contact, radius is perpendicular to tangent.
For circle 1, ∆OAP is right triangle
By Pythagoras theorem, 𝑂𝑃2 = 𝑂𝐴2 + 𝐴𝑃2
⇒ 𝑂𝑃2 = 52 + 122 = 25 + 144
= 169
⇒ OP = √169 = 13 𝑐𝑚
For circle 2, ∆OBP is right triangle by Pythagoras theorem,
𝑂𝑃2 = 𝑂𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝑃2
132 = 32 + 𝐵𝑃2
𝐵𝑃2 = 169 − 9 = 160
𝐵𝑃 = √160 = 4√10 𝑐𝑚
21. In fig. AB is chord of length 16cm of a circle of radius 10cm. The tangents at A and B
intersect at a point P. Find the length of PA.
Sol:
Given length of chord AB = 16cm.
Radius OB = OA = 10 cm.
Let line through Centre to point from where tangents are drawn be intersecting chord AB at
M. we know that the line joining Centre to point from where tangents are drawn be
intersecting chord AB at M. we know that
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
The line joining Centre to point from where tangents are drawn bisects the chord joining
the points on the circle where tangents intersects the circle.
1 1
AM = MB = 2 (𝐴𝐵) = 2 × 16 = 8𝑐𝑚
Consider ∆OAM from fig. ∠AMO = 90°
By Pythagoras theorem, 𝑂𝐴2 = 𝐴𝑀2 + 𝑂𝑀2
102 = 82 + 𝑂𝑀2
𝑂𝑀 = √100 − 64 = √36 = 6𝑐𝑚
In ∆AMP, ∠AMP = 90° by Pythagoras theorem 𝐴𝑃2 = 𝐴𝑀2 + 𝑃𝑀2
𝐴𝑃2 = 82 + (𝑂𝑃 − 𝑂𝑀)2
𝑃𝐴2 = 64 + (𝑂𝑃 − 6)2
(𝑂𝑃 − 6)2 = −64 + 𝑃𝐴2 ….(i)
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐴𝑃𝑂, ∠𝑃𝐴𝑂 = 90° [At point of contact, radius is perpendicular to tangent]
𝑂𝑃2 = 𝑂𝐴2 + 𝑃𝐴2 [Pythagoras theorem]
2 2 2
𝑃𝐴 = 𝑂𝑃 − 10
= 𝑂𝑃2 − 100 ….. (ii)
22. In figure PA and PB are tangents from an external point P to the circle with centre O. LN
touches the circle at M. Prove that PL + LM = PN + MN
Sol:
Given
O is Centre of circle
PA and PB are tangents
We know that
The tangents drawn from external point to the circle are equal in length.
From point P, PA = PB
⇒ PL + AL = PN + NB …. (i)
From point L & N, AL = LM and MN = NB } …. Substitute in (i)
PL + Lm = PN + MN
⇒ Hence proved.
23. In the fig. PO ⊥ QO. The tangents to the circle at P and Q intersect at a point T. Prove that
PQ and OT are right bisectors of each other.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Given
PO ⊥ OQ
Consider quadrilateral OQTP.
∠POQ = 90°
∠OPT = ∠OQT = 90° [At point of contact, tangent and radius are perpendicular]
∴ ∠PTO = 90°
OP = OQ = radius
In this quadrilateral, all the angles are equal and pair of adjacent sides are equal.
∴ OQTP is a square.
24. In the fig two tangents AB and AC are drawn to a circle O such that ∠BAC = 120°. Prove
that OA = 2AB.
Sol:
Given
BC is tangent to circle
OE bisects AP, AE = EP
Consider ∆AOP
26. The lengths of three consecutive sides of a quadrilateral circumscribing a circle are 4cm,
5cm and 7cm respectively. Determine the length of fourth side.
Sol:
Two circles namely (i) & (ii) as shown with common tangents as PQ and RS.
We know that
The tangents from external point to the circle are equal in length.
From A to circle (i) AP = AR … (i)
From A to circle (ii), AQ = AS …. (ii)
(i) + (ii) ⇒ AP + AQ = AR + RS
⇒ PQ = RS
28. Equal circles with centers O and O’ touch each other at X. OO’ produced to meet a circle
with Centre O’ at A. AC is tangent to the circle whose Centre is a O’D is perpendicular to
AC. Find the value of DO’/CO
Sol:
29. In figure OQ : PQ = 3 : 4 and perimeter of ∆PDQ = 60cm. determine PQ, QR and OP.
Sol:
Given OQ: PQ = 3 : 4
Let OQ = 3x PQ = 4x
OP = y
Exercise – 12.1
1. A tower stands vertically on the ground. From a point on the ground, 20 m away from the
foot of the tower, the angle of elevation of the top of the tower is 600. What is the height of
the tower?
Sol:
Given
Distance between point of observation and foot of tower 20m BC
Angle of elevation of top of tower 60 0
Height of tower H ? AB
2. The angle of elevation of a ladder leaning against a wall is 600 and the foot of the ladder is
9.5 m away from the wall. Find the length of the ladder.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
3. A ladder is placed along a wall of a house such that its upper end is touching the top of the
wall. The foot of the ladder is 2 m away from the wall and the ladder is making an angle of
600 with the level of the ground. Determine the height of the wall.
Sol:
Opposite side
tan
Adjacent side
height of wall H 2 3m.
AB
tan 60
BC
AB
3 AB 2 3m.
2
4. An electric pole is 10 m high. A steel wire tied to top of the pole is affixed at a point on the
ground to keep the pole up right. If the wire makes an angle of 45° with the horizontal
through the foot of the pole, find the length of the wire.
Sol:
Height of the electric pole H 10m AB angle made by steel wire with ground
(horizontal) 45
Let length of rope wire l AC
If we represent above data is
Form of figure thin it forms a right triangle ABC
Opposite side
Here sin
Hypotenuse
AB
sin 45
AC
1 10m
2 l
l 10 2m
length of wire l 10 2m
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
5. A kite is flying at a height of 75 meters from the ground level, attached to a string inclined
at 600 to the horizontal. Find the length of the string to the nearest meter.
Sol:
Given
Height o kite from ground 75m AB
Inclination of string with ground
60
Length of string l ? AC
If we represent the above data is form of figure as shown then its form a right angled
triangle ABC here
Opposite side
sin
hypotenuse
AB
sin 60
AC
3 75
2 l
75 2 3 50
l
3 3
l 50 3m
Length of string l 50 3m.
6. The length of a string between a kite and a point on the ground is 90 meters. If the string
makes an angle O with the ground level such that tan O = 15/8, how high is the kite?
Assume that there is no slack in the string.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
15
8H 15H
2 2
90 2
152
H 2 82 152 902 152
H 2 64 225 90 15
2
90 15
2
H 2
289
90 15
2
H 2
17
90 15
H 79 41
17
height of kite from ground H 79 41m.
elevation of the top and the bottom of the flag-staff are respectively 600 and 45°. Find the
height of the flag-staff and that of the tower.
Sol:
Given
Vertical tower is surmounted by flag staff distance between tower and observer
70m BC . Angle of elevation of top of tower 45
Angle of elevation of top of flag staff 60
Height of flagstaff h AD
Height of tower H AB
If we represent the above data in the figure then it forms right angled triangles ABC and
CBD
When is angle in right angle triangle we know that
Opposite side
tan
Adjacent side
AB
tan
BC
H
tan 45
70
H 70 1
70m.
DB
tan
BC
AD AB h H
tan 60
70 70
h 70 70 3
h 70 3 1
70 1 32 1 70 0 732
51 24m. h 51 24m
Height of tower 70m height of flagstaff 51 24m
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
8. A vertically straight tree, 15 m high, is broken by the wind in such a way that its top just
touches the ground and makes an angle of 60° with the ground. At what height from the
ground did the tree break?
Sol:
Initial height of tree H 15m
AB
Let us assume that it is broken at pointe.
Then given that angle made by broken part with ground 60
Height from ground to broken pointe h BC
AB AC BC
H AC h AC H h m
If we represent the above data in the figure as shown then it forms right angled triangle
ABC from fig
Opposite side
sin
Hypotenuse
BC
sin 60
CA
3 h
2 H h
3 15 h 2h
15 3 h 3 2h
2 3 h 15 3
15 3 2 3
h
2 3 2 3
Rationalizing denominator rationalizing factor of a b is a b
h
15 3 2 3
22 3
2
15 2 3 3
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
h 15 2 3 3
height of broken point from ground 15 2 3 3 m
9. A vertical tower stands on a horizontal plane and is surmounted by a vertical flag-staff of
height 5 meters. At a point on the plane, the angles of elevation of the bottom and the top of
the flag-staff are respectively 300 and 600. Find the height of the tower.
Sol:
3 H 15 / BC
(1) and (2)
1 H / BC
3
H 5
3 3H H 5
H
5
2H 5 H 2 5m.
2
Height of tower H 2 5m.
10. A person observed the angle of elevation of the top of a tower as 30°. He walked 50 m
towards the foot of the tower along level ground and found the angle of elevation of the top
of the tower as 600. Find the height of the tower.
Sol:
Given,
Angle of elevation of top of tour, from first point of elevation A 30
Let the walked 50m from first point A to B then AB 50m
Angle of elevation from second point B Gb 60
Now let is represent the given data in form of then it forms triangle ACD with triangle
BCD in it c 90
Let height of tower, be
Hm CD
BC xm.
Opposite side
If in a right angle triangle is the angle then tan
Adjacent side
CD
tan
AC
H
tan 30
AB BC
1 H
3 50 x
50 x H 3 …………..(1)
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
CD
tan
BC
H
tan 60
x
H
3
x
11
x …………..(2)
3
(2) in (1)
H
50 H 3
3
H
H 3 50
3
3 1
H 50
3
50 3
H 25 3
2
Height of tower H 25 3m
11. The shadow of a tower, when the angle of elevation of the sun is 45°, is found to be 10 m.
longer than when it was 600. Find the height of the tower.
Sol:
Let the length of shadow of tower when angle of elevation is 60 be x m BC then
according to problem
Length of the shadow with angle of elevation 45 is 10 x m BD.
If we represent the, above data in form of figure then it forms a triangle ABD is which
triangle ABC is included with B 90
Let height of tower be Hm AB
If in right angle triangle one of the angle is then
Opposite side
tan
Adjacent side
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
AB
tan
BC
H
tan 60
x
H
x ……………(1)
3
AB
tan
BD
H
tan 45
x 10
x 10 H
x H 10 ……………(2)
Substitute x H 10 in (1)
H
H 10
3
3H 10 3 H
3 1 H 10 3
10 3
H
3 1
10 3 3 1
H
3 1
3 1
10 3 3 1
2
5 3 3
23 66m
Rationalize denominator rationalizing factor of a b is a b
Height of tower
23 66m
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
12. A parachutist is descending vertically and makes angles of elevation of 45° and 60° at two
observing points 100 m apart from each other on the left side of himself. Find the
maximum height from which he falls and the distance of the point where he falls on the
ground from the just observation point.
Sol:
Let is the parachutist at highest point A. Let C and D be points which are 100m a part on
ground where from then CD 100m
Angle of elevation from point C 45
Angle of elevation from point B 60
Let B be the point just vertically down the parachute
Let us draw figure according to above data then it forms the figure as shown in which
ABC is triangle and ABD included in it with
ABD triangle included
Maximum height of parachute
From ground AB Hm
Distance of point where parachute falls to just nearest observation point xm
If in right angle triangle one of the included angle . Then
Opposite side
tan
Adjacent side
AB
tan
CB
H
tan 45
100 x
100 x H ……….(1)
AB
tan
DB
H
tan 60
x
H 3x ……….(2)
From (1) and (2)
3x 100 x
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
3 1 x 100
100 3 1
x
3 1 3 1
100 3 1
2
x 50
3 1 m.
x 50 1 732 1
x 50 2 732
x 136.6m in (2)
H 3 136 6 1 732 136 6 236 6m
Maximum height of parachute from ground
H 236 6m
Distance between point where parachute falls on ground and just observation is
x 136 6m
13. On the same side of a tower, two objects are located. When observed from the top of the
tower, their angles of depression are 45° and 60°. If the height of the tower is 150 m, find
the distance between the objects.
Sol:
Opposite side
tan
Adjacent side
AB
tan
BB
150
tan 60
y
150
y
3 ……….(1)
AB
tan
AB
150
tan 45
x y
x y 150 ……….(2)
150
(1) and (2) x 150
3
50 3
x 150
3
x 150 50 3 150 50 1732
150 86 6 63 4m
Distance between objects AB 63 4m
14. The angle of elevation of a tower from a point on the same level as the foot of the tower is
30°. On advancing 150 meters towards the foot of the tower, the angle of elevation of the
tower becomes 60°. Show that the height of the tower is 129.9 meters (Use √3 = 1.732).
Sol:
Opposite side
If in right angled triangle, one of included angle is then tan
Adjacent side
CD
tan
AD
H
tan 30
150 x
150 x H 3 ……….(1)
CD
tan
BD
H
tan 60
x
H
H x 3x ……….(2)
3
(2) in (1)
H 1
150 H 3 H 3 150
3 3
3 1 150 3
H 150 H 75 3 75 1 732
3 2
129 9m
height of tower 129 9m
15. The angle of elevation of the top of a tower as observed from a point in a horizontal plane
through the foot of the tower is 32°. When the observer moves towards the tower a distance
of 100 m, he finds the angle of elevation of the top to be 63°. Find the height of the tower
and the distance of the first position from the tower. [Take tan 32° = 0.6248 and tan 63° =
1.9626]
Sol:
91.65m, 146.7m
16. The angle of elevation of the top of a tower from a point A on the ground is 30°. Moving a
distance of 20metres towards the foot of the tower to a point B the angle of elevation
increases to 60°. Find the height of the tower & the distance of the tower from the point A.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
17. From the top of a building 15 m high the angle of elevation of the top of a tower is found to
be 30°. From the bottom of the same building, the angle of elevation of the top of the tower
is found to be 60°. Find the height of the tower and the distance between the tower and
building.
Sol:
Let AB be the building and CD be the tower height of the building is 15m h AB.
Angle of elevation of top of tower from top of building 30
Angle of elevation of top of tower from bottom of building 60
Distance between tower and building BD x
Let height of tower above building be ' a ' m
If we represent the above data is from of figure then it forms figure as shown with
D 90 also draw AX || BD, AXC 90
Here ABDX is a rectangle
BD DX ' x ' m AB XD h 15m
Opposite side
In right triangle if one of the included angle is then tan
Adjacent side
CX
tan
AX
a
tan 30
x
xa 3 …………..(1)
CD
tan
BD
a 15
tan 60
x
x 3 a 15 …………..(2)
(1) and (2)
x
a 3
x 3 a 15
a 15 a 3 3
a 15 3a
2a 15
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
15
a 7 5m
2
xa 3
7 5 1 732
12 99m
Height of tower above ground h a
15 7 5 22 5m
Distance between tower and building 12 99m
18. On a horizontal plane there is a vertical tower with a flag pole on the top of the tower. At a
point 9 meters away from the foot of the tower the angle of elevation of the top and bottom
of the flag pole are 60° and 30° respectively. Find the height of the tower and the flag pole
mounted on it.
Sol:
AB
tan
AD
x
tan 30
9
9
x 3 3 5 196m
3
6 3 6 1 732
10 392m
Height of tower x 5 196m
Height of pole y 10 392m
19. A tree breaks due to storm and the broken part bends so that the top of the tree touches the
ground making an angle of 30° with the ground. The distance between the foot of the tree
to the point where the top touches the ground is 8 m. Find the height of the tree.
Sol:
CA
tan 30
AB
1 CA
3 8
8
CA
3
16 8 24 8 3
Height of tree CB CA
3 3 3 3
8 3m
20. From a point P on the ground the angle of elevation of a 10 m tall building is 30°. A flag is
hoisted at the top of the building and the angle of elevation of the top of the flag-staff from
P is 45°. Find the length of the flag-staff and the distance of the building from the point
P.(Take √3= 1.732).
Sol:
Let AB be the tower and 80 be the flagstaff Angle of elevation of top of building from
P 30
AB height of tower 10m
Angle of elevation of top of flagstaff from P 45
Let height of flagstaff BD ' a ' m
The above information is represented in form of figure as shown with A 90
In a right angled triangle if one of the included
Angle is
Opposite side
tan
Adjacent side
AB
tan
AP
10
tan 30
AP
AP 10 3
10 1 732
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
17 32
AD
tan
AP
10 a
tan 45
AP
10 a AP
a 17 32 10
7 32m
Height of flagstaff ' ' 7 32m
Distance between P and foot of tower 17 32m.
21. A 1 .6 m tall girl stands at a distance of 3.2 m from a lamp-post and casts a shadow of 4.8
m on the ground. Find the height of the lamp-post by using (i) trigonometric ratios (ii)
property of similar triangles.
Sol:
Let AC be the lamp past of height ' h '
We assume that ED 1 6m, BE 4 8m and EC 3 2m
We have to find the height of the lamp post
Now we have to find height of lamp post using similar triangles
Again in ABC ,
h
tan
4 8 3 2
1 h
3 8
8
h
3
8
Hence the height of lamp post is .
3
22. A 1.5 m tall boy is standing at some distance from a 30 m tall building. The angle of
elevation from his eyes to the top of the building increases from 30° to 60° as he walks
towards the building. Find the distance he walked towards the building.
Sol:
𝟏𝟗√𝟑
23. The shadow of a tower standing on a level ground is found to be 40 m longer when Sun’s
altitude is 30° than when it was 60°. Find the height of the tower
Sol:
𝟐𝟎√𝟑
24. From a point on the ground the angles of elevation of the bottom and top of a transmission
tower fixed at the top of 20 m high building are 45° and 60° respectively. Find the height of
the transmission tower.
Sol:
25. The angles of depression of the top and bottom of 8 m tall building from the top of a
multistoried building are 30° and 45° respectively. Find the height of the multistoried
building and the distance between the two buildings.
Sol:
26. A statue I .6 m tall stands on the top of pedestal. From a point on the ground, the angle of
elevation of the top of the statue is 60° and from the same point the angle of elevation of
the top of the pedestal is 45°. Find the height of the pedestal.
Sol:
1 6 3 1
h
3 1
3 1
0.5 3 1
Height of pedestal 0 6 3 1 m.
27. A T.V. Tower stands vertically on a bank of a river. From a point on the other bank directly
opposite the tower, the angle of elevation of the top of the tower is 60°. From a point 20 m
away this point on the same bank, the angle of elevation of the top of the tower is 30°. Find
the height of the tower and the width of the river.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
Let AB be the T.V tower of height ' h ' m on a bank of river and ' D ' be the point on the
opposite of the river. An angle of elevation at top of tower is 60 and form the point 20m
away them angle of elevation of tower at the same point is 30
Let AB h and BC x
Here we have to find height and width of river the corresponding figure is here
In CAB,
AB
tan 60
BC
h
3
x
3x h
h
x
3
Again in DBA,
AB
tan 30
BC
1 h
3 20 x
3h 20 x
h h
3h 20 x
3 3
h
3h 20
3
2h
20
3
h 10 3
h 10 3
x
3 3
x 10
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
28. From the top of a 7 m high building, the angle of elevation of the top of a cable tower is
60° and the angle of depression of its foot is 45°. Determine the height of the tower.
Sol:
Given
Height of building 7m AB
Height of cable tower ' H ' m CD
Angle of elevation of top of tower, from top of building 60
Angle of depression of bottom of tower, from top of building 45
The above data is represented in form of figure as shown
Let CX ' x ' m
CD DX XC 7m ' x ' m
x 7m.
In ADX
Oppositeside XD
tan 45
Adjacent side AX
7
1
AX
AX 7m
In AXD
XC
tan 60
AX
x
3
H
x7 3
But CD x 7
7 37 7
3 1 m.
29. As observed from the top of a 75 m tall lighthouse, the angles of depression of two ships
are 30° and 45°. If one ship is exactly behind the other on the same side of the lighthouse,
find the distance between the two ships.
Sol:
Given
Height of light house 75m ' h ' m AB
Angle of depression of ship 1 30
Angle of depression of ship 2 45
The above data is represented in form of figure as shown.
Let distance between ships be ' x ' m CD
In right triangle if one of included angle is then
Opposite side
tan
Adjacent side
AB
tan
DB
75
tan 30
x BC
x BC 75 3 …………(1)
AB
tan
CB
75
tan 45
BC
BC 75 …………(2)
(2) in (1) x 75 75 3
x 75 3 1
Distance between ships
' x'm
75
3 1 m.
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
30. The angle of elevation of the top of the building from the foot of the tower is 30° and the
angle of the top of the tower from the foot of the building is 60°. If the tower is 50 m high,
find the height of the building.
Sol:
31. From a point on a bridge across a river the angles of depression of the banks on opposite
side of the river are 30° and 45° respectively. If bridge is at the height of 30 m from the
banks, find the width of the river.
Sol:
30 3 1
Distance between banks 30
3 1 m
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
32. Two poles of equal heights are standing opposite to each other on either side of the road
which is 80 m wide. From a point between them on the road the angles of elevation of the
top of the poles are 60° and 30° respectively. Find the height of the poles and the distances
of the point from the poles.
Sol:
𝟐𝟎√𝟑m
33. A man sitting at a height of 20 m on a tall tree on a small island in the middle of a river
observes two poles directly opposite to each other on the two banks of the river and in line
with the foot of tree. If the angles of depression of the feet of the poles from a point at
which the man is sitting on the tree on either side of the river are 60° and 30° respectively.
Find the width of the river.
Sol:
20
tan 30
BB2
BB2 20 3
20 1 3 20
B1 B2 B2 B BB2 20 3 20
3 3 3
80
Width of river m.
3
80 3
m.
3
34. A vertical tower stands on a horizontal plane and is surmounted by a flag-staff of height 7
m. From a point on the plane, the angle of elevation of the bottom of the flag-staff is 30°
and that of the top of the flag-staff is 45°. Find the height of the tower.
Sol:
Given
Height of flagstaff 7m BC
Let height of tower ' h ' m AB
Angle of elevation of bottom of flagstaff 30
Angle of elevation of top of flagstaff 45
Points of desecration be ' p '
The above data is represented in form of figure as shown
In right angle triangle if one of the induced angle is then
Opposite side
tan
Adjacent side
AB
tan
AP
h
tan 30
AP
AP h 3 …….(1)
AC
tan
AP
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
h7
tan 45
AP
AP h 7 …….(2)
From (1) and (2)
h 3 h7
h 3h 7
3 1
h
3 1 7 h
7
3 1
3 1
7 3 1 3 5
2
3 1
Height of tower 3 5
2 1 m.
35. The length of the shadow of a tower standing on level plane is found to be 2x metres longer
when the sun’s altitude is 30° than when it was 45°. Prove that the height of tower is x (√3
+ 1) metres.
Sol:
Let
Length of shadow be ' a ' m BC when sun attitude be 45
Length of shadow will be 2 x a m 80 when sun attitude is 30
Let height of tower be ' h ' m AB the above information is represented in form of figure as
shown
In right triangle one of the included angle is then
Opposite side
tan
Adjacent side
In ABC
AB
tan
BC
h
tan 45
a
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
ha ……….(1)
In ADB
AB
tan
2 x a BC
h
tan 30
2x a
2x a h 3 ……….(2)
(1) in (2) 2 x h h 3
h
3 1 2x
2x 3 1
h
3 1 3 1
2x 3 1
2
x 3 1
Height of tower x
3 1 m
36. A tree breaks due to the storm and the broken part bends so that the top of the tree touches
the ground making an angle of 30° with the ground. The distance from the foot of the tree
to the point where the top touches the ground is 10 meters. Find the height of the tree.
Sol:
AB 3 h 215 3
sin 60 h 107 5 3m
BC 2 215 2
Height of balloon from ground 107 5 3m.
38. Two men on either side of the cliff 80 m high observes the angles of elevation of the top of
the cliff to be 300 and 600 respectively. Find the distance between the two men.
Sol:
39. Find the angle of elevation of the sun (sun’s altitude) when the length of the shadow of a
vertical pole is equal to its height.
Sol:
Let
Height of pole ' h ' m sun’s altitude from ground length of shadow be ' l '
Given that l h.
Angle of elevation of sun’s altitude be the above data is represented in form of figure as
shown
In right triangle if one of the included angle is 0 then.
Opposite side
tan
Adjacent side
AB h
tan tan
BC l
l
tan h 1
l
tan 1 45
1
40. A fire in a building B is reported on telephone to two fire stations P and 20 km apart from
each other on a straight road. P observes that the fire is at an angle of 60° to the road and Q
observes that it is at an angle of 45° to the road. Which station should send its team and
how much will this team have to travel?
Sol:
10 3 1 10 0 732 7 32km
AB
Ap
3
Station 1 should send its team and they have to travel 7 32km
41. A man on the deck of a ship is 10 m above the water level. He observes that the angle of
elevation of the top of a cliff is 45° and the angle of depression of the base is 300. Calculate
the distance of the cliff from the ship and the height of the cliff.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
42. A man standing on the deck of a ship, which is 8 m above water level. He observes the
angle of elevation of the top of a hill as 60° and the angle of depression of the base of the
hill as 30°. Calculate the distance of the hill from the ship and the height of the hill.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
43. There are two temples, one on each bank of a river, just opposite to each other. One temple
is 50 m high. From the top of this temple, the angles of depression of the top and the foot of
the other temple are 30° and 60° respectively. Find the width of the river and the height of
the other temple.
Sol:
AX 3
50
3
50
AX m.
3
50 100
CD XB AB AX 50 m
3 3
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
50
Width of river m
2
100
Height of temple 2 m
3
44. The angle of elevation of an aeroplane from a point on the ground is 45°. After a flight of
15 seconds, the elevation changes to 30°. If the aeroplane is flying at a height of 3000
meters, find the speed of the aeroplane.
Sol:
PQ XQ XP 3000 3 1 m
PQ 3000 3 1
Speed
time
15
200
3 1
2000 0 732
146 4 m / sec
Speed of aeroplane 146.4 m / sec
45. An aeroplane flying horizontally 1 km above the ground is observed at an elevation of 60°.
After 10 seconds, its elevation is observed to be 30°. Find the speed of the aeroplane in
km/hr.
Sol:
XQ 3km
1 2 2 3
PQ XQ PX 3 km. km.
3 3 2
PQ 2 3 / 3km 2 3 2
Speed 60 6
time 10 3
hr
60 60
240 3 km / hr
Speed of aeroplane 240 3 km / hr
46. From the top of a 50 m high tower, the angles of depression of the top and bottom of a pole
are observed to be 45° and 60° respectively. Find the height of the pole.
Sol:
50
AX m BD
3
CD AB AX 50
50 50
3 1
3 3
50
3
3 3
Height of building (pole)
50
3
3 3 m.
50
Distance between pole and tower m.
3
47. The horizontal distance between two trees of different heights is 60 m. The angle of
depression of the top of the first tree when seen from the top of the second tree is 45°. If the
height of the second tree is 80 m, find the height of the first tree.
Sol:
80 60
20m
Height of second tree 80m
Height of first tree 20m
48. A tree standing on a horizontal plane is leaning towards east. At two points situated at
distances a and b exactly due west on it, the angles of elevation of the top are respectively
(𝑏−𝑎) tan 𝛼 tan 𝛽
𝛼 and 𝛽 Prove that the height of the op from the ground is tan 𝛼−tan 𝛽
Sol:
tan tan
b a AX
tan tan
AX
b a tan tan
tan tan
49. The angle of elevation of the top of a vertical tower PQ from a point X on the ground is
60°. At a point Y, 40 m vertically above X, the angle of elevation of the top is 45°.
Calculate the height of the tower.
Sol:
50. The angle of elevation of a stationery cloud from a point 2500 m above a lake is 15° and
the angle of depression of its reflection in the lake is 45°. What is the height of the cloud
above the lake level? (Use tan 15° = 0.268)
Sol:
h
0 268
AY
h
AY ………(1)
0 268
AB AP PQ
tan 45
AY AY
AY x h x
h 2x
AY h 2 x ………..(2)
h
From (1) and (2) h 2 x 3 131h h 2 2500
0 268
5000
h 1830 8312
0 731
Height of cloud above lake h x
1830 8312 2500
4300 8312 m
51. If the angle of elevation of a cloud from a point h meters above a lake is a and the angle of
depression of its reflection in the lake be b, prove that the distance of the cloud from the
2 ℎ sec 𝛼
point of observation is tan 𝛽−tan 𝛼
Sol:
In AQX
AQ
tan
AX
x
tan ………..(1)
AX
In AXQ
AQ
tan
AX
h xh
tan ………..(2)
AX
2h 2h
(2) and (1) tan tan AX
AX tan tan
In AXQ
AX
cos QX AX sec
XQ
2h sec
XQ
tan tan
Distance of cloud from point of observation
2h sec / tan tan
52. From an aeroplane vertically above a straight horizontal road, the angles of depression of
two consecutive mile stones on opposite sides of the aeroplane are observed to be 𝛼 and 𝛽
tan 𝛼 tan 𝛽
Show that the height in miles of aeroplane above the road is given by tan 𝛼+tan 𝛽
Sol:
Let PQ be height of aeroplane from ground x and y be two mile stones on opposite sides
of the aeroplane xy 1 mile
Angle of depression of x from p
Angle of depression of y from p
The above data is represented in form of figure as shown
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
Opposite side
In right triangle, if one of included angle is then tan
Adjacent side
In P Q
PQ
tan
XQ
PQ
XQ
tan
In PQY
PQ
tan
QY
PQ
QY
QY
PQ PQ 1 1
XQ QY XY PQ
tan tan tan tan
tan tan
1 PQ
tan tan
tan tan
PQ
tan tan
tan tan
Height of aeroplane miles
tan tan
53. PQ is a post of given height a, and AB is a tower at some distance. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the
angles of elevation of B, the top of the tower, at P and Q respectively. Find the height of
the tower and its distance from the post.
Sol:
Opposite side
In right triangle if one of the included angle is , then tan
Adjacent side
Draw QX AB, PQ AK
In BQX
BX
tan
QX
AB AX
tan
QX
AB a
tan ………..(1)
QX
In BPA
AB
tan
AP
AB
tan ………..(2)
QX
(1) divided by (2)
tan AB a a
1
tan AB AB
a tan tan tan
1
AB tan tan
a tan AB a
AB Q
tan tan tan tan tan
Height of power a tan tan tan
Distance between past and tower a tan tan
54. A ladder rests against a wall at an angle 𝛼 to the horizontal. Its foot is pulled away from the
wall through a distance a, so that it slides a distance b down the wall making an angle 𝛽
𝑎 cos 𝛼−cos 𝛽
with the horizontal. Show that 𝑏 = sin 𝛽−sin 𝛼
Sol:
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
55. A tower subtends an angle 𝛼 at a point A in the plane of its base and the angle if depression
of the foot of the tower at a point b metres just above A is 𝛽. Prove that the height of the
tower is b tan 𝛼 cot 𝛽
Sol:
Angle of depression of foot of tower from B the above data is represented in ffrom of
figure as shown draw BX PQ from figure QX ' b ' m
In PBX
PQ
tan ……..(1)
BX AD
In QBX
QX
tan ……..(2)
BX
tan PQ
(1) and (2)
tan QX
tan
PQ QX b tan cot
tan
Height of tour b tan cot
56. An observer, 1.5 m tall, is 28.5 m away from a tower 30 m high. Determine the angle of
elevation of the top of the tower from his eye.
Sol:
Height of observer AB 1 5m
Height of tower PQ 30m
Height of tower above the observe eye 30 1 5
QX 28 5m.
Distance between tower and observe XB 28 5m.
be angle of elevation of tower top from eye
The above data is represented in form of figure as shown from figure
Opposite side
tan
Adjacent side
QX 28 5
tan 1 tan 1 1 45
BX 28 5
Angle of elevation 45
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
57. A carpenter makes stools for electricians with a square top of side 0.5 m and at a height of
1.5 m above the ground. Also, each leg is inclined at an angle of 60° to the ground. Find
the length of each leg and also the lengths of two steps to be put at equal distances.
Sol:
58. A boy is standing on the ground and flying a kite with 100 m of string at an elevation of
30°. Another boy is standing on the roof of a 10 m high building and is flying his kite at an
elevation of 45°. Both the boys are on opposite sides of both the kites. Find the length of
the string that the second boy must have so that the two kites meet.
Sol:
For boy
Length of string AB 100m.
Angle Made by string with ground 30
For boy 2
Height of building CD 10m.
Angle made by string with building top 45 length of kite thread of boy 2 if both the
kites meet must be ' DB
The above information is represented in form of figure as shown
Drawn BX AC , YD BC
In ABX
BC
tan 30
AX
BX 1 BX
sin 30 BX 20m.
AB 2 100
BY BX XY 50 10m 50m.
BY
In BYD sin 45
BD
1 40
BD 40 2m.
2 BD
Length of thread or string of boy 2 40 2m.
59. The angle of elevation of the top of a hill at the foot of a tower is 60° and the angle of
elevation of the top of the tower from the foot of the hill is 30°. If the tower is 50 m high,
what is the height of the hill?
Sol:
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths
60. Two boats approach a light house in mid-sea from opposite directions. The angles of
elevation of the top of the light house from two boats are 30° and 45° respectively. If the
distance between two boats is 100 m, find the height of the light house.
Sol:
B1 B2 100 3 1
h
3 1 3 1 3 1
3 1 50
100
3 1
2
Height of light house 50 3 1
61. From the top of a building AB, 60 m high, the angles of depression of the top and bottom
of a vertical lamp post CD are observed to be 30° and 60° respectively. Find
(i) The horizontal distance between AB and CD.
(ii) The height of the lamp post.
(iii) The difference between the heights of the building and the lamp post.
Sol:
62. From the top of a light house, the angles of depression of two ships on the opposite sides of
it are observed to be a and 3. If the height of the light house be h meters and the line joining
the ships passes through the foot of the light house, show that the distance
ℎ(tan 𝛼+tan 𝛽)
metres
tan 𝛼 tan 𝛽
Sol:
63. A straight highway leads to the foot of a tower of height 50 m. From the top of the tower,
the angles of depression of two cars standing on the highway are 30° and 60° respectively.
What is the distance between the two cars and how far is each car from the tower?
Sol:
64. The angles of elevation of the top of a rock from the top and foot of a loo m high tower are
respectively 30° and 45°. Find the height of the rock.
Sol:
100 3 1
CX
2 1 3 1
CX 50 3 1
Height of hill 100 50
3 1 150 3 3 mts.
65. As observed from the top of a 150 m tall light house, the angles of depression of two ships
approaching it are 30° and 45°. If one ship is directly behind the other, find the distance
between the two ships
Sol:
66. A flag-staff stands on the top of a 5 m high tower. From a point on the ground, the angle of
elevation of the top of the flag-staff is 60° and from the same point, the angle of elevation
of the top of the tower is 45°. Find the height of the flag-staff.
Sol:
AC
In ADC, tan ,
AD
AB BC h 5
tan 60
AD 5
h5
3
5
h5 5 3 h 5
3 1 5 0 732 3 65 meters height of flagstaff 3 65 meters
67. The angles of elevation of the top of a tower from two points at a distance of 4 m and 9 m
from the base of the tower and in the same straight line with it are complementary. Prove
that the height of the tower is 6m.
Sol:
68. The angles of depression of two ships from the top of a light house and on the same side of
it are found to be 45° and 30° respectively. If the ships are 200 m apart, find the height of
the light house.
Sol:
3 1 200
h
200
3 1
3 1
2
3 1 100
3 1 meters
Exercise – 13.1
1. The probability that it will rain tomorrow is 0.85. What is the probability that it will not
rain tomorrow?
Sol:
Let E be the event of happening of rain
P(E) is given as 0.85
𝐸̅ ⟶ 𝑛𝑜𝑡 ℎ𝑎𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛
P(𝐸̅ ) = 1 – P(E) = 1 – 0.85 = 0.15
∴ P(not happening of rain) = 0.15
6. What is the probability that a leap year has 53 Sundays and 53 Mondays?
Sol:
A leap year has 366 days
366 days = 52 weeks + 2 days
That 2 days may be (Sun, Mon) (Mon, Tue) (Tue, Wed) (Wed, Thu) (Thu, Fri) (Fri, Sat)
(Sat, Sun)
Let E ⟶ event of getting 53 Sundays & 53 Mondays.
No. of favourable outcomes = 1 {(Sun, Mon)}
Since 52 weeks has 52 Sundays & 52 Mondays & the extra 2 days must be Sunday &
Monday.
Total no. of possible outcomes = 7
No.of favorable outcomes 1
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 7
7. A and B throw a pair of dice. If A throws 9, find B’s chance of throwing a higher number.
Sol:
When a pair of dice are thrown, then total no. of possible outcomes = 6 × 6 = 36, which are
{ (1, 1) (1, 2) (1, 3) (1, 4) (1, 5) (1, 6)
(2, 1) (2, 2) (2, 3) (2, 4) (2, 5) (2, 6)
(3, 1) (3, 2) (3, 3) (3, 4) (3, 5) (3, 6)
(4, 1) (4, 2) (4, 3) (4, 4) (4, 5) (4, 6)
(5, 1) (5, 2) (5, 3) (5, 4) (5, 5) (5, 6)
(6, 1) (6, 2) (6, 3) (6, 4) (6, 5) (6, 6) }
E ⟶ event of throwing a no. higher than 9.
No. of favourable outcomes = 6 {(4, 6) (5, 5) (6, 4) (5, 6) (6, 5) (6, 6)}
No.of favorable outcomes
We know that P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
6 1
i.e., P(E) = 36 = 6
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
8. Two unbiased dice are thrown. Find the probability that the total of the numbers on the dice
is greater than 10.
Sol:
When a pair of dice are thrown, then total no. of possible outcomes = 6 × 6 = 36
let E ⟶ event of getting sum on dice greater than 10
then no of favourable outcomes = 3 {(5, 6) (6, 5) (6, 6)}
No.of favorable outcomes
we know that, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
3 1
i.e., P(E) = 36 = 12
9. A card is drawn at random from a pack of 52 cards. Find the probability that card drawn is
(i) a black king (ix) other than an ace
(ii) either a black card or a king (x) a ten
(iii) black and a king (xi) a spade
(iv) a jack, queen or a king (xii) a black card
(v) neither a heart nor a king (xiii) the seven of clubs
(vi) spade or an ace (xiv) jack
(vii) neither an ace nor a king (xv) the ace of spades
(viii) Neither a red card nor a queen. (xvi) a queen
Sol:
Total no. of outcomes = 52 {52 cards}
(i) E⟶ event of getting a black king
No of favourable outcomes = 2{king of spades & king of clubs}
No.of favorable outcomes 2 1
We know that, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 52 = 26
(ii) E⟶ event of getting either a black card or a king.
No. of favourable outcomes = 26 + 2 {13 spades, 13 clubs, king of hearts &
diamonds}
26+2 28 7
P(E) = = 52 = 13
52
(iii) E⟶ event of getting black & a king.
No. of favourable outcomes = 2 {king of spades & clubs}
2 1
P(E) = =
52 26
(iv) E⟶ event of getting a jack, queen or a king
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 + 4 + 4 = 12 {4 jacks, 4 queens & 4 kings}
12 3
P(E) = 52 = 13
(v) E⟶ event of getting neither a heart nor a king.
No. of favourable outcomes = 52 – 13 – 3 = 36 {since we have 13 hearts, 3 kings
each of spades, clubs & diamonds}
36 9
P(E) = 52 = 13
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
10. In a lottery of 50 tickets numbered 1 to 50, one ticket is drawn. Find the probability that the
drawn ticket bears a prime number.
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 50 {1, 2, 3, …. , 50}
E⟶ event of getting a prime no.
No. of favourable outcomes = 15
{2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 23, 29, 31, 37, 41, 43, 47}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
15 3
i.e. P(E) = 50 = 10
11. An urn contains 10 red and 8 white balls. One ball is drawn at random. Find the probability
that the ball drawn is white.
Sol:
Total no of possible outcomes = 18 {10 red balls, 8 white balls}
E ⟶ event of drawing white ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 8 {8 white balls}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
8 4
= 18 = 9
12. A bag contains 3 red balls, 5 black balls and 4 white balls. A ball is drawn at random from
the bag. What is the probability that the ball drawn is:
(i) White (iii) Black
(ii) Red (iv) Not red
Sol:
Total number of possible outcomes = 12 {3 red balls, 5 black balls & 4 white balls}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting white ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {4 white balls}
4 1
Probability, P(E) = 12 = 3
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting red ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 5 {3 red balls}
3 1
P (E) = 12 = 4
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
13. What is the probability that a number selected from the numbers 1, 2, 3, ..., 15 is a multiple
of 4?
Sol:
Total no. possible outcomes = 15 {1, 2, 3, …. , 15}
E ⟶ event of getting a multiple of 4
No. of favourable outcomes = 3 {4, 8, 12}
No.of favorable outcomes 3 1
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 15 = 5
14. A bag contains 6 red, 8 black and 4 white balls. A ball is drawn at random. What is the
probability that ball drawn is not black?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 18 {6 red, 8 black, 4 white}
Let E ⟶ event of drawing black ball.
No. of favourable outcomes = 8 {8 black balls}
No.of favorable outcomes 8 4
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 18 = 9
𝐸̅ ⟶ event of not drawing black ball
𝑃(𝐸̅ ) = 1 − 𝑃(𝐸)
4 5
=1− =
9 9
15. A bag contains 5 white and 7 red balls. One ball is drawn at random. What is the
probability that ball drawn is white?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 12 {5 white, 7 red}
E ⟶ event of drawing white ball.
No. of favorable outcomes = 5 {white balls are 5}
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
5
P(E) = 12
16. Tickets numbered from 1 to 20 are mixed up and a ticket is drawn at random. What is the
probability that the ticket drawn has a number which is a multiple of 3 or 7?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 20 {1, 2, 3, …. , 20}
E ⟶ event of drawing ticket with no multiple of 3 or 7
No. of favourable outcomes = 8 which are {3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 7, 14}
No.of favorable outcomes 8 2
Probability, P(E) = = =
Total no.of possible outcomes 20 5
17. In a lottery there are 10 prizes and 25 blanks. What is the probability of getting a prize?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 35 {10 prizes, 25 blanks}
E ⟶ event of getting prize
No. of favourable outcomes = 10 {10 prizes}
No.of favorable outcomes 10 2
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 35 = 7
18. If the probability of winning a game is 0.3, what is the probability of losing it?
Sol:
E ⟶ event of winning a game
P(E) is given as 0.3
(𝐸̅ ) ⟶ event of loosing the game
we know that P(E) + P(𝐸̅ ) = 1
𝑃(𝐸̅ ) = 1 − 𝑃(𝐸)
= 1 – 0.3 = 0.7
19. A bag contains 5 black, 7 red and 3 white balls. A ball is drawn from the bag at random.
Find the probability that the ball drawn is:
(i) Red (ii) black or white (iii) not black
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 15
{5 black, 7 red & 3 white balls}
(i) E ⟶ event of drawing red ball
No. of favorable outcomes = 7 {7 red balls}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
7
P(E) = 15
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
20. A bag contains 4 red, 5 black and 6 white balls. A ball is drawn from the bag at random.
Find the probability that the ball drawn is:
(i) White (iii) Not black
(ii) Red (iv) Red or white
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 15 {4 red, 5 black, 6 white balls}
(i) E ⟶ event of drawing white ball.
No. of favourable outcomes = 6 {6 white}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
6 2
P(E) = 15 = 5
(ii) E ⟶ event of drawing red ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {4 red balls}
4
P(E) = 15
(iii) E ⟶ event of drawing black ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 5 {5 black balls}
5 1
P(E) = 15 = 3
𝐸̅ ⟶ event of not drawing black ball
1 2
𝑃(𝐸̅ ) = 1 − 3 = 3
(iv) E ⟶ event of drawing red or white ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 10 {4 red & 6 white}
10 2
P(E) = 15 = 3
21. A black die and a white die are thrown at the same time. Write all the possible outcomes.
What is the probability?
(i) that the sum of the two numbers that turn up is 8?
(ii) of obtaining a total of 6?
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
22. One card is drawn from a well shuffled deck of 52 cards. Find the probability of getting:
(i) a king of red suit (iv) a queen of black suit
(ii) a face card (v) a jack of hearts
(iii) a red face card (vi) a spade
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 52 (52 cards)
(i) E ⟶ event of getting a king of red suit
No. of favourable outcomes = 2 {king heart & king of diamond}
No.of favorable outcomes 2 1
P(E), = = =
Total no.of possible outcomes 52 26
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting face card
No. of favourable outcomes = 12 {4 kings, 4 queens & 4 jacks}
12 3
P(E) = 52 = 13
(iii) E ⟶ event of getting red face card
No. favourable outcomes = 6 { kings, queens, jacks of hearts & diamonds}
6 3
P(E) = 26 = 26
(iv) E ⟶ event of getting a queen of black suit
No. favourable outcomes = 6 { kings, queens, jacks of hearts & diamonds}
6 3
P(E) = =
26 26
(v) E ⟶ event of getting red face card
No. favourable outcomes = 6 { queen of spades & clubs}
1
P(E) = 52
(vi) E ⟶ event of getting a spade
No. favourable outcomes = 13 {13 spades}
13 1
P(E) = 52 = 4
23. Five cards—ten, jack, queen, king, and an ace of diamonds are shuffled face downwards.
One card is picked at random.
(i) What is the probability that the card is a queen?
(ii) If a king is drawn first and put aside, what is the probability that the second card
picked up is the ace?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 5 {5 cards}
(i) E ⟶ event of drawing queen
No. favourable outcomes = 1 {1 queen card}
No.of favorable outcomes 1
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 5
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
(ii) When king is drawn and put aside, total no. of remaining cards = 4
Total no. of possible outcomes = 4
E ⟶ event of drawing ace card
No. favourable outcomes = 1 {1 ace card}
1
P(E) = 4
24. A bag contains 3 red balls and 5 black balls. A ball is drawn at random from the bag. What
is the probability that the ball drawn is:
(i) Red
(ii) Black
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 8 {3 red, 5 black}
(i) Let E ⟶ event of drawing red ball.
No. favourable outcomes = 1 {1 ace card}
No.of favorable outcomes 3
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 8
(ii) Let E ⟶ event of drawing black ball.
No. favourable outcomes = 5 {5 black balls}
5
P(E) = 8
25. A bag contains cards which are numbered from 2 to 90. A card is drawn at random from
the bag. Find the probability that it bears.
(i) a two digit number
(ii) a number which is a perfect square
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 89 {2, 3, 4, …., 90}
(i) Let E ⟶ event of getting a 2 digit no.
No. favourable outcomes = 81 {10, 11, 12, 13, ….., 80}
No.of favorable outcomes 81
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 89
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting a no. which is perfect square
No. favourable outcomes = 8 {4, 9, 16, 25, 36, 49, 64, 81}
8
P(E) = 89
26. A game of chance consists of spinning an arrow which is equally likely to come to rest
pointing to one of the number, 1, 2, 3, ..., 12 as shown in Fig. below. What is the
probability that it will point to:
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
27. Two customers are visiting a particular shop in the same week (Monday to Saturday). Each
is equally likely to visit the shop on any one day as on another. What is the probability that
both will visit the shop on:
(i) the same day? (ii) different days? (iii) consecutive days?
Sol:
Total no. of days to visit the shop = 6 {Mon to Sat}
Total no. possible outcomes = 6 × 6 = 36
i.e. two customers can visit the shop in 36 ways
(i) E⟶ event of visiting shop on the same day.
No. of favourable outcomes = 6 which are (M, M) (T, T) (Th, Th) (F, F) (S, S)
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
6 1
P(E) = 36 = 6
(ii) E⟶ event of visiting shop on the same day.
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
28. In a class, there are 18 girls and 16 boys. The class teacher wants to choose one pupil for
class monitor. What she does, she writes the name of each pupil on a card and puts them
into a basket and mixes thoroughly. A child is asked to pick one card from the basket. What
is the probability that the name written on the card is:
(i) the name of a girl
(ii) the name of a boy
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 34 (18 girls, 16 boys)
(i) E ⟶ event of getting girl name
No. of favorable outcomes = 18 (18 girls)
No.of favorable outcomes 18 9
Probability, P(E) = = =
Total no.of possible outcomes 34 17
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting boy name
No. of favorable outcomes = 16 (16 boys)
16 8
P(E) = 34 = 17
29. Why is tossing a coin considered to be a fair way of deciding which team should choose
ends in a game of cricket?
Sol:
No. of possible outcomes while tossing a coin = 2 {1 head & 1 tail}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability = Total no.of possible outcomes
1
P(getting head) = 2
1
P(getting tail) = 2
Since probability of two events are equal, these are called equally like events.
Hence, tossing a coin is considered to be a fair way of deciding which team should choose
ends in a game of cricket.
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
30. What is the probability that a number selected at random from the number 1,2,2,3,3,3, 4, 4,
4, 4 will be their average?
Sol:
Given no’s are 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 4
Total no. of possible outcomes = 10
𝑠𝑢𝑚 𝑜𝑓 𝑛𝑜′𝑠 1+2+2+3+3+3+4+4+4+4 30
Average of the no’s = = = 10 = 3
𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑛𝑜′𝑠 10
E ⟶ event of getting 3
No. of favourable outcomes = 3 {3, 3, 3}
No.of favorable outcomes
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
3
P(E) =
10
31. The faces of a red cube and a yellow cube are numbered from 1 to 6. Both cubes are rolled.
What is the probability that the top face of each cube will have the same number?
Sol:
Total no. of outcomes when both cubes are rolled = 6 × 6 = 36 which are
{ (1, 1) (1, 2) (1, 3) (1, 4) (1, 5) (1, 6)
(2, 1) (2, 2) (2, 3) (2, 4) (2, 5) (2, 6)
(3, 1) (3, 2) (3, 3) (3, 4) (3, 5) (3, 6)
(4, 1) (4, 2) (4, 3) (4, 4) (4, 5) (4, 6)
(5, 1) (5, 2) (5, 3) (5, 4) (5, 5) (5, 6)
(6, 1) (6, 2) (6, 3) (6, 4) (6, 5) (6, 6) }
E ⟶ event of getting same no. on each cube
No. of favourable outcomes = 6 which are
{ (1, 1) (2, 2) (3, 3) (4, 4) (5, 5) (6, 6)}
No.of favorable outcomes 6 1
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 36 = 6
32. The probability of selecting a green marble at random from a jar that contains only green,
1
white and yellow marbles is 4. The probability of selecting a white marble at random from
1
the same jar is 3 . If this jar contains 10 yellow marbles. What is the total number of
marbles in the jar?
Sol:
Let the no. of green marbles = x
The no. of white marbles = y
No. of yellow marbles = 10
Total no. of possible outcomes = x + y + 10 (total no. of marbles)
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
1 𝑥
Probability (green marble) = 4 = 𝑥+𝑦+10
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
⇒ x + y + 10 = 4x
⇒ 3x – y – 10 = 0 …..(i)
1 𝑦
Probability (white marble) = 3 = 𝑥+𝑦+10
⇒ x + y 10 = 3y
⇒ x – 2y + 10 = 0 ….(ii)
⇒ 3x – 6y + 30 = 0 ….(iii)
Multiplying by 3,
Sub (i) from (iii), we get
−6y + y + 30 + 10 = 0
⇒ −5y + 40 = 0
⇒ 5y = 40
⇒y=8
Subs. Y in (i), 3x – 8 – 10 = 0
3x – 18 = 0
18
x= =6
3
Total no. of marbles in jar = x + y + 10 = 6 + 8 + 10 = 24
33. There are 30 cards, of same size, in a bag on which numbers 1 to 30 are written. One card
is taken out of the bag at random. Find the probability that the number on the selected card
is not divisible by 3.
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 30 {1, 2, 3, … 30}
E ⟶ event of getting no. divisible by 3.
No. of favourable outcomes = 10 {3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
10 1
P(E) = 30 = 3
𝐸̅ ⟶ event of getting no. not divisible by 3.
P(𝐸̅ ) = 1 – P(E)
1 2
=1-3=3
34. A bag contains 5 red, 8 white and 7 black balls. A ball is drawn at random from the bag.
Find the probability that the drawn ball is
(i) red or white
(ii) not black
(iii) neither white nor black.
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 20 {5 red, 8 white & 7 black}
(i) E ⟶ event of drawing red or white ball
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
35. Find the probability that a number selected from the number 1 to 25 is not a prime number
when each of the given numbers is equally likely to be selected.
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 25 {1, 2, 3, … 25}
E ⟶ event of getting a prime no.
No. of favourable outcomes = 9 {2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 23}
No.of favorable outcomes 9
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 25
(𝐸̅ ) ⟶ 𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑔𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑎 𝑝𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑒 𝑛𝑜.
9 16
𝑃(𝐸̅ ) = 1 − 𝑃(𝐸) = 1 − = 25 25
36. A bag contains 8 red, 6 white and 4 black balls. A ball is drawn at random from the bag.
Find the probability that the drawn ball is
(i) Red or white
(ii) Not black
(iii) Neither white nor black
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 8 + 6 + 4 = 18 {8 red, 6 white, 4 black}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting red or white ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {4 black balls}
4 2
P(E) = 18 = 9
(𝐸̅ ) ⟶ 𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑔𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑏𝑙𝑎𝑐𝑘 𝑏𝑎𝑙𝑙
2 7
P(𝐸̅ ) = 1 − 𝑃(𝐸) = 1 − 9 = 9
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
37. Find the probability that a number selected at random from the numbers 1, 2, 3, ..., 35 is a
(i) Prime number (ii) Multiple of 7 (iii) Multiple of 3 or 5
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 35 {1, 2, 3, …. 35}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting a prime no.
No. of favourable outcomes = 11 {2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 23, 29, 31}
No.of favorable outcomes 11
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 35
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting no. which is multiple of 7
No. of favourable outcomes = 5 {7, 14, 21, 28, 35}
5 1
P(E) = 35 = 7
(iii) E ⟶ event of getting no which is multiple of 3 or 5
No. of favourable outcomes = 16 {3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, 5, 10, 20,
25, 35}
16
P(E) = 35
38. From a pack of 52 playing cards Jacks, queens, kings and aces of red colour are removed.
From the remaining, a card is drawn at random. Find the probability that the card drawn is
(i) A black queen
(ii) A red card
(iii) A black jack
(iv) a picture card (Jacks, queens and kings are picture cards)
Sol:
Total no. of cards = 52
All jacks, queens & kings, aces of red colour are removed.
Total no. of possible outcomes = 52 – 2 – 2 – 2 – 2 = 44 {remaining cards}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting a black queen
No. of favourable outcomes = 2 {queen of spade & club}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
2 1
P(E) = 44 = 22
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting a red card
No. of favourable outcomes = 26 – 8 = 18 {total red cards – jacks, queens, kings,
aces of red colour}
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
18 9
P(E) = 44 = 22
(iii) E ⟶ event of getting a black jack
No. of favourable outcomes = 2 {jack of club & spade}
2 1
P(E) = 44 = 22
(iv) E ⟶ event of getting a picture card
No. of favourable outcomes = 6 {2 jacks, 2 kings & 2 queens of black colour}
6 3
P(E) = 44 = 22
39. A bag contains lemon flavoured candies only. Malini takes out one candy without looking
into the bag. What is the probability that she takes out
(i) an orange flavoured candy?
(ii) a lemon flavoured candy?
Sol:
(i) The bag contains lemon flavoured candies only. So, the event that malini will take
out an orange flavoured candy is an impossible event. Since, probability of
impossible event is O, P(an orange flavoured candy) = 0
(ii) The bag contains lemon flavoured candies only. So, the event that malini will take
out a lemon flavoured candy is sure event. Since probability of sure event is 1, P(a
lemon flavoured candy) = 1
40. It is given that m a group of 3 students, the probability of 2 students not having the same
birthday is 0.992. What is the probability that the 2 students have the same birthday?
Sol:
Let E ⟶ event of 2 students having same birthday P(E) is given as 0.992
Let (𝐸̅ ) ⟶ event of 2 students not having same birthday.
We know that, P(E) + P(𝐸̅ ) = 1
P(𝐸̅ ) = 1 − 𝑃(𝐸)
= 1 – 0.992
= 0.008
41. A bag contains 3 red balls and 5 black balls. A ball is drawn at random from the bag. What
is the probability that the ball drawn is
(i) red? (ii) not red?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 8 {3 red, 5 black}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting red ball.
No. of favourable outcomes = 3 {3 red}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
3
P(E) = 8
(ii) 𝐸̅ ⟶ event of getting no red ball.
𝑃(𝐸) + 𝑃(𝐸̅ ) = 1
P(𝐸̅ ) = 1 − 𝑃(𝐸)
3 5
=1−8=8
42. (i) A lot of 20 bulbs contain 4 defective ones. One bulb is drawn at random from the lot.
What is the probability that this bulb is defective?
(ii) Suppose the bulb drawn in
(a) is not defective and nõt replaced. Now bulb is drawn at random from the rest. What
is the probability that this bulb is not defective?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 20 {20 bulbs}
(i) E ⟶ be event of getting defective bulb.
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {4 defective bulbs}
No.of favorable outcomes 4 1
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 20 = 5
(ii) Bulb drawn in is not detective & is not replaced remaining bulbs = 15 good + 4 bad
bulbs = 19
Total no. of possible outcomes = 19
E ⟶ be event of getting defective
No. of favorable outcomes = 15 (15 good bulbs)
15
P(E) = 9
43. A box contains 90 discs which are numbered from 1 to 90. If one discs is drawn at random
from the box, find the probability that it bears
(i) a two digit number
(ii) a perfect square number
(iii) (iii) a number divisible by 5.
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 90 {1, 2, 3, … 90}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting 2 digit no.
No. of favourable outcomes = 81 {10, 11, 12, …. 90}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
81
P(E) = 90
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting a perfect square.
No. of favourable outcomes = 9 {1, 4, 9, 16, 25, 26, 49, 64, 81}
9 1
P(E) = 10
90
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
44. A lot consists of 144 ball pens of which 20 are defective and others good. Nun will buy a
pen if it is good, but will not buy if it is defective. The shopkeeper draws one pen at
random and gives it to her. What is the probability that
(i) She will buy it? (ii) She will not buy it?
Sol:
No. of good pens = 144 – 20 = 24
No. of detective pens = 20
Total no. of possible outcomes = 144 {total no pens}
(i) E ⟶ event of buying pen which is good.
No. of favourable outcomes = 124 {124 good pens}
No.of favorable outcomes
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
124 31
P(E) = 144 = 36
(ii) 𝐸̅ ⟶ event of not buying a pen which is bad P(E) + P(𝐸̅ ) = 1
𝑃(𝐸) + 𝑃(𝐸̅ ) = 1
P(𝐸̅ ) = 1 - P(E)
31 5
= 1 − 36 = 36
45. 12 defective pens are accidently mixed with 132 good ones. It is not possible to just look at
pen and tell whether or not it is defective. one pen is taken out at random from this lot.
Determine the probability that the pen taken out is good one.
Sol:
No. of good pens = 132
No. of defective pens = 12
Total no. of possible outcomes = 12 + 12 {total no of pens}
E ⟶ event of getting a good pen.
No. of favourable outcomes = 132 {132 good pens}
No.of favorable outcomes
P (E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
132 66 33 11
∴ P(E) = 144 = 72 = 36 = 2
46. Five cards — the ten, jack, queen, king and ace of diamonds, are well-shuffled with their
face downwards. One card is then picked up at random.
(i) What is the probability that the card is the queen?
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
(ii) If the queen is drawn and put a side, what is the probability that the second card
picked up is
a. an ace?
b. a queen?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 5 {5 cards}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting a good pen.
No. of favourable outcomes = 132 {132 good pens}
No.of favorable outcomes
P (E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
1
∴ P(E) = 5
(ii) If queen is drawn & put aside,
Total no. of remaining cards = 4
(a) E ⟶ event of getting a queen.
No. of favourable outcomes = 1 {1 ace card}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 4 {4 remaining cards}
1
P(E) = 4
(b) E ⟶ event of getting a good pen.
No. of favourable outcomes = 0 {there is no queen}
0
P(E) = 4 = 0
∵ E is known as impossible event.
47. Harpreet tosses two different coins simultaneously (say, one is of Re 1 and other of Rs 2).
What is the probability that he gets at least one head?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 4 which are{HT, HH, TT, TH}
E ⟶ event of getting at least one head
No. of favourable outcomes = 3 {HT, HH, TH}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
3
P(E) = 4
48. Two dice, one blue and one grey, are thrown at the same time. Complete the following
table:
Event: ‘Sum 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
on two dice’
Probability
From the above table a student argues that there are 1 1 possible outcomes 2,3,4,5,6,7, 8, 9,
10, 11 and 12. Therefore, each of them has a probability j-j . Do you agree with this
argument?
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes when 2 dice are thrown = 6 × 6 = 36 which are
{ (1, 1) (1, 2) (1, 3) (1, 4) (1, 5) (1, 6)
(2, 1) (2, 2) (2, 3) (2, 4) (2, 5) (2, 6)
(3, 1) (3, 2) (3, 3) (3, 4) (3, 5) (3, 6)
(4, 1) (4, 2) (4, 3) (4, 4) (4, 5) (4, 6)
(5, 1) (5, 2) (5, 3) (5, 4) (5, 5) (5, 6)
(6, 1) (6, 2) (6, 3) (6, 4) (6, 5) (6, 6) }
E ⟶ event of getting sum on 2 dice as 2
No. of favourable outcomes = 1{(1, 1)}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
1
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 3
No. of favourable outcomes = 2 {(1, 2) (2, 1)}
2
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 4
No. of favourable outcomes = 3 {(3, 1) (2, 2) (1, 3)}
3
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 5
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {(1, 4) (2, 3) (3, 2) (4, 1)}
4
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 6
No. of favourable outcomes = 5 {(1, 5) (2, 4) (3, 3) (4, 2) (5, 1)}
6
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 7
No. of favourable outcomes = 6 {(1, 6) (2, 5) (3, 4) (4, 3) (5, 2) (6, 1)}
6
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 8
No. of favourable outcomes = 5 {(2, 6) (3, 5) (4, 4) (5, 3) (6, 2)}
5
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 9
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {(3, 6) (4, 5) (5, 4) (6, 3)}
4
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 10
No. of favourable outcomes = 3 {(4, 6) (5, 5) (6, 4)}
3
P(E) = 36
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
49. Cards marked with numbers 13, 14, 15, ...., 60 are placed in a box and mixed thoroughly.
One card is drawn at random from the box. Find the probability that number on the card
drawn is
(i) divisible by 5
(ii) a number is a perfect square
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 48 {13, 14, 15, …., 60}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting no divisible by 5
No. of favourable outcomes = 10{15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 55, 60}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
10 5
P(E) = 48 = 24
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting a perfect square.
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {16, 25, 36, 49}
4 1
P(E) = 48 = 12
50. A bag contains 6 red balls and some blue balls. If the probability of drawing a blue ball the
bag is twice that of a red ball, find the number of blue balls in the bag.
Sol:
No of red balls = 6
Let no. of blue balls = x
Total no. of possible outcomes = 6 + x(total no. of balls)
No.of favorable outcomes
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
P(blue ball) = 2 P(red ball)
𝑥 2(6)
⇒ 𝑥+6 = 𝑥+6
⇒ x = 2(6)
x = 12
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
∴ No of blue balls = 12
51. A bag contains tickets numbered 11, 12, 13,..., 30. A ticket is taken out from the bag at
random. Find the probability that the number on the drawn ticket
(i) is a multiple of 7
(ii) is greater than 15 and a multiple of 5.
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 20 {11, 12, 13, ….., 30}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting no. which is multiple of 7
No. of favorable outcomes = 3 {14, 21, 28}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
3
P(E) = 20
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting no. greater than 15 & multiple of 5
No. of favorable outcomes = 3 {14, 21, 28}
3
P(E) = 20
52. The king, queen and jack of clubs are removed from a deck of 52 playing cards and the
remaining cards are shuffled. A card is drawn from the remaining cards. Find the
probability of getting a card of
(i) heart
(ii) queen
(iii) clubs.
Sol:
Total no. of remaining cards = 52 – 3 = 49
(i) E⟶ event of getting hearts
No. of favorable outcomes = 3 {4 – 1}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
13
P(E) = 49
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting queen
No. of favorable outcomes = 3 (4 – 1) {Since queen of clubs is removed}
3
P(E) = 49
(iii) E ⟶ event of getting clubs
No. of favorable outcomes = 10 (13 – 3) {Since 3 club cards are removed}
10
P(E) = 49
53. Two dice are thrown simultaneously. What is the probability that:
(i) 5 will not come up on either of them?
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
(iv) Equal
(v) 1, ∵ P(E) + P(𝐸̅ ) = 1
(vi) 1
56. A box contains loo red cards, 200 yellow cards and 50 blue cards. If a card is drawn at
random from the box, then find the probability that it will be
(i) a blue card
(ii) not a yellow card
(iii) neither yellow nor a blue card.
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 100 + 200 + 50 = 350 {100 red, 200 yellow & 50 blue}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting blue card.
No. of favourable outcomes = 50 {50 blue cards}
50 1
P(E) = 350 = 7
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
57. A number is selected at random from first 50 natural numbers. Find the probability that it is
a multiple of 3 and 4.
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 50 {1, 2, 3 …. 50}
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {12, 24, 36, 48}
No.of favorable outcomes
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
4 2
P(E) = 50 = 25
Exercise – 13.2
1. In the accompanying diagram a fair spinner is placed at the center O of the circle.
Diameter AOB and radius OC divide the circle into three regions labelled X, Y and Z. If
∠BOC = 45°. What is the probability that the spinner will land in the region X? (See fig)
Sol:
Given ∠BOC = 45°
∠AOC = 180 – 45 = 135°
Area of circle = 𝜋r2
𝜃
Area of region × = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
135 3
= 360 × 𝜋𝑟 2 = 8 𝜋𝑟 2
Probability that the spinner will land in the region
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
3
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑥 𝜋𝑟 2 3
X = 𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒 = 8𝜋𝑟 2 = 8
2. A target shown in Fig. below consists of three concentric circles of radii, 3, 7 and 9 cm
respectively. A dart is thrown and lands on the target. What is the probability that the dart
will land on the shaded region?
Sol:
1st circle ⟶ with radius 3
2nd circle ⟶ with radius 7
3rd circle ⟶ with radius 9
Area of 1st circle = (3)2 = 9𝜋
Area of 2nd circle= (7)2 = 49𝜋
Area of 3rd circle = (9)2 = 81𝜋
Area of shaded region = Area of 2nd circle – area of 1st circle
= 49𝜋 – 9𝜋
= 40𝜋
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑠ℎ𝑎𝑑𝑒𝑑 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛 40𝜋 40
Probability that will land on the shaded region = = 81𝜋 = 81
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 3𝑟𝑑 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒
3. In below Fig., points A, B, C and D are the centers of four circles that each have a radius of
length one unit. If a point is selected at random from the interior of square ABCD. What is
the probability that the point will be chosen from the shaded region?
Sol:
Radius of circle = 1cm
Length of side of square = 1 + 1 = 2cm
Area of square = 2 × 2 = 4cm2
Area of shaded region = area of square – 4 × area of quadrant
1
= 4 – 4 (4) 𝜋(1)2
= (4 − 𝜋) cm2
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑠ℎ𝑎𝑑𝑒𝑑 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛
Probability that the point will be chosen from the shaded region = 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝐴𝐵𝐶𝐷
4−𝜋 𝜋
= = 1−4
4
Since geometrical probability,
𝑀𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑖𝑓𝑖𝑒𝑑 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛
P(E) = 𝑀𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑤ℎ𝑜𝑙𝑒 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛
4. In the Fig. below, JKLM is a square with sides of length 6 units. Points A and B are the
mid- points of sides KL and LM respectively. If a point is selected at random from the
interior of the square. What is the probability that the point will be chosen from the interior
of ∆JAB?
Sol:
Length of side of square JKLM = 6 cm
Area of square JKLM = 62 = 36 cm2
Since A & B are the mid points of KL & LM
KA = AL = LB = LM = 3 cm
Area of ∆ AJB = area of square – area of ∆ AKJ – area of ∆ ALB – area of ∆ BMJ
1 1
= 36 − 2 × 6 × 3 − 2 × 6 × 3
= 36 − 9 − 4.5 − 9
= 13.5 𝑠𝑞. 𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡𝑠
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 ∆𝐴𝐽𝐵
Probability that the point will be chosen from the interior of ∆AJB = 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑟𝑒
5. In the Fig. below, 13, a square dart board is shown. The length of a side of the larger square
is 1.5 times the length of a side of the smaller square. If a dart is thrown and lands on the
larger square. What is the probability that it will land in the interior of the smaller square?
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Let length of side of smaller square = a
Then length of side of bigger square = 1.5a
Area of smaller square = 𝑎2
Area of bigger square = (1.5)2a2 = 2.25a2.
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑚𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑟 𝑠𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑟𝑒
Probability that dart will land in the interior of the smaller square = 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑖𝑔𝑔𝑒𝑟 𝑠𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑟𝑒
𝑎2 1
= 2.25𝑎2 = 2.25
∵ Geometrical probability,
𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑖𝑓𝑖𝑒𝑑 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑡
𝑃(𝐸) = 𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑤ℎ𝑜𝑙𝑒 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛
6. Suppose you drop a tie at random on the rectangular region shown in Fig. below. What is
the probability that it will land inside the circle with diameter 1 m?
Sol:
Area of circle with radius 0.5 m
A circle = (0.5)2 = 0.25 𝜋m2
Area of rectangle = 3 × 2 = 6𝑚2
𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒𝑑 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑖𝑓𝑖𝑒𝑑 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑡
Probability (geometric) = 𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑤ℎ𝑜𝑙𝑒 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛
Probability that tie will land inside the circle with diameter 1m
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒
= 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒
0.25𝜋𝑚2
= 6 𝑚2
1 𝜋
=4×6
𝜋
= 24
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 14.1
2. Let ABCD be a square of side 2a. Find the coordinates of the vertices of this square when
(i) A coincides with the origin and AB and AB and coordinate axes are parallel to the
sides AB and AD respectively.
(ii) The center of the square is at the origin and coordinate axes are parallel to the sides
AB and AD respectively.
Sol:
(i) Coordinate of the vertices of the square of side 2a are:
A 0, 0 , B 2a, 0 , C 2a, 2a and D 0, 2a
(ii) Coordinate of the vertices of the square of side 2a are:
A a, a , B a, a , C a, a and a, a
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3. The base PQ of two equilateral triangles PQR and PQR’ with side 2a lies along y-axis such
that the mid-point of PQ is at the origin. Find the coordinates of the vertices R and R’ of
the triangles.
Sol:
We have two equilateral triangle PQR and PQR with side 2a.
O is the mid-point of PQ.
In QOR, QOR 90
Hence, by Pythagoras theorem
OR 2 OQ 2 QR 2
OR 2 2a a
2 2
OR 2 3a 2
OR 3 a
Coordinates of vertex R is
3a,0 and coordinate of vertex R’ is 3a,0
Exercise 14.2
PQ x2 x1 y2 y1
2 2
PQ 1 6 5 7
2 2
PQ 1 6 5 7
2 2
PQ 5 12
2 2
PQ 25 144
PQ 169
PQ 13
(ii) we have P a b, b c and Q a b, c b here,
x1 a b, y1 b c and x2 a b, y2 c b
PQ x2 x1 y2 y1
2 2
PQ a b a b c b b c
2 2
PQ a b a b c b b c
2 2
PQ 2b 2b
2 2
PQ 4b2 4b2
PQ 8b2
PQ 4 2b2
PQ 2 2b
(iii) we have P a sin , b cos and Q a cos , b sin here
x1 a sin , y1 b cos and
x2 a cos , y2 b sin
PQ x2 x1 y2 y1
2 2
PQ a 2
b2 1 2cos sin
PQ x2 x1 y2 y1
2 2
PQ 0 a b 0
2 2
PQ a b
2 2
PQ a 2 b2
2. Find the value of a when the distance between the points (3, a) and (4, 1) is √10.
Sol:
We have P 3, a and Q 4,1
Here,
x1 3, y1 a
x2 4, y2 1
PQ 10
PQ x2 x1 y2 y1
2 2
10 4 3 1 a
2 2
10 1 1 a
2 2
10 1 1 a 2 2a a b a 2 b2 2ab
2
10 2 a 2 2a
Squaring both sides
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 2
10 2 a 2 2a
10 2 a 2 2a
a 2 2a 2 10 0
a 2 2a 8 0
Splitting the middle team.
a 2 4a 2a 8 0
a a 4 2 a 4 0
a 4 a 2 0
a 4, a 2
3. If the points (2, 1) and (1, -2) are equidistant from the point (x, y) from (-3, 0) as well as
from (3, 0) are 4.
Sol:
We have P 2,1 and Q 1, 2 and R X , Y
Also, PR QR
PR x 2 y 1
2 2
PR x2 2 2 xx 2 y 2 1 2 y 1
2 2
PR x 2 4 4 x y 2 1 2 y
PR x 2 5 4 x y 2 2 y
QR x 1 y 2
2 2
PR x 2 1 2 x y 2 4 4 y
PR x 2 5 2 x y 2 4 y
PR QR
x2 5 4x y 2 2 y x2 5 2x y 2 4 y
x2 5 4 x y 2 2 y x2 5 2 x y 2 4 y
x2 5 4 x y 2 2 y x2 5 2 x y 2 4 y
4 x 2 x 2 y 4 y 0
2 x 6 y 0
2 x 3 y 0
0
x 3y
2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 3y 0
Hence proved.
4. Find the values of x, y if the distances of the point (x, y) from (−3, 0) as well as from (3,0)
are 4.
Sol:
We have P x, y , Q 3, 0 and R 3, 0
PQ x 3 y 0
2 2
4 x2 9 6 x y 2
Squaring both sides
2
4 x2 9 6 x y 2
2
16 x 2 9 6 x y 2
x 2 y 2 16 9 6 x
x2 y 2 7 6x ………….(1)
PR x 3 y 0
2 2
4 x2 9 6 x y 2
Squaring both sides
2
4 x2 9 6 x y 2
2
16 x 2 9 6 x y 2
x 2 y 2 16 9 6 x
x2 y 2 7 6 x …………..(2)
Equating (1) and (2)
7 6x 7 6x
7 7 6x 6x
0 12x
x 12
Equating (1) and (2)
7 6x 7 6x
7 7 6x 6x
0 12x
x 12
Substituting the value of x 0 in (2)
x2 y 2 7 6 x
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
0 y2 7 6 0
y2 7
y 7
5. The length of a line segment is of 10 units and the coordinates of one end-point are (2,−3).
If the abscissa of the other end is 10, find the ordinate of the other end.
Sol:
Let two ordinate of the other end R be Y
Coordinates of other end R are 10, y i.e., R 10, y
Distance PR 10 [given]
PR x2 x1 y2 y1
2 2
10 10 2 y 3
2 2
10 82 y 2 9 6 y
10 64 y 2 9 6 y
10 73 y 2 6 y
Squaring both sides
2
10 73 y 2 6 y
2
100 73 y 2 6 y
y 2 6 y 73 100 0
y 2 6 y 27 0
Splitting the middle term
y 2 9 y 3 y 27 0
y 2 9 y 3 y 27 0
y y 9 3 y 9 0
y 9 y 3 0
y 9, y 3
6. Show that the points (−2, − 4), (4, 0) and (2, 3) are the vertices points of are the vertices
points of a rectangle.
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Let A 4, 1 , B 2, 4 , C 4, 0 and D 2,3 be the given points
Now,
AB 2 4 4 1
2 2
AB 2 3
2 2
AB 4 9
AB 13
CD 4 2 0 3
2 2
CD 2 3
2 2
CD 4 9
CD 13
BC 4 2 0 4
2 2
BC 6 4
2 2
BC 36 16
BC 52
AD 4 2 1 3
2 2
AD 6 4
2 2
AD 36 16
AD 52
AB CD and AD BC ABCD is a parallelogram
Now,
AC 4 4 0 1
2 2
AC 8 1
2 2
AC 64 1
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
AC 65
BD 2 2 3 4
2 2
BD 4 7
2 2
BD 16 49
BD 65
Since the diagonals of parallelogram ABCD are equal i.e., AC BD
Hence, ABCD is a rectangle
7. Show that the points A(1, −2), B(3, 6), C(5, 10) and D(3, 2) are the vertices of a
parallelogram
Sol:
Let A 1, 2 , B 3, 6 , C 5,10 , D 3, 2 be the given points
AB 3 1 6 2
2 2
AB 2 8
2 2
AB 4 64
AB 68
CD 5 3 10 2
2 2
CD 2 8
2 2
CD 4 64
CD 68
AD 3 1 2 2
2 2
AD 2 4
2 2
AD 4 16
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
AD 20
BC 5 3 10 6
2 2
BC 2 4
2 2
BC 4 16
BC 20
AB CD and AD BC
Since opposite sides of a parallelogram are equal
Hence, ABCD is a parallelogram
8. Prove that the points A (1, 7), B (4, 2), C (−1, −1) and D (−4, 4) are the vertices of a
square.
Sol:
Let A 1, 7 , B 4, 2 , C 1, 1 and D 4, 4 be the given point. One way of showing that
ABCD is a square is to use the property that all its sides should be equal and both its
diagonals should also be equal
Now,
AB 1 4 7 2 9 25 34
2 2
BC 4 1 2 1 25 9 34
2 2
CD 1 4 1 4 9 25 34
2 2
DA 1 4 7 4 25 9 34
2 2
AC 1 1 7 1 4 64 68
2 2
BD 4 4 2 4 64 4 68
2 2
Since, AB BC CD DA and AC BD, all the four sides of the quadrilateral ABCD
are equal and its diagonals AC and BD are also equal. Therefore, ABCD is a square
9. Prove that the points (3, 0) (6, 4) and (-1, 3) are vertices of a right angled isosceles triangle.
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Let A 3, 0 , B 6, 4 and C 1,3 be the given points
AB 6 3 4 0
2 2
AB 3 4
2 2
AB 9 16
AB 25
BC 1 6 3 4
2 2
BC 7 1
2 2
BC 49 1
BC 50
AC 1 3 3 0
2 2
AC 4 3
2 2
A 16 9
AC 25
2
AB 2 25
AB 2 25
AC 2 25
2
BC 2 50
BC 2 50
Since AB 2 AC 2 BC 2 and AB AC
ABC is a right angled isosceles triangle
10. Prove that (2, —2), (—2, 1) and (5, 2) are the vertices of a right angled triangle. Find the
area of the triangle and the length of the hypotenuse.
Sol:
Let A 2, 2 , B 2,1 and C 5, 2 be the given points
AB 2 2 1 2
2 2
AB 4 3
2 2
AB 16 9
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
AB 25
BC 5 2 2 1
3 2
B 7 1
2 2
BC 49 1
BC 50
AC 5 2 2 2
2 2
AC 3 4
2 2
AC 9 16
AC 25
2
AB 2 25
AB 2 25
2
BC 2 50
BC 2 50
Since, AB 2 AC 2 BC 2
ABC is a right angled triangle.
Length of the hypotenuse BC 50 5 2
1
Area of ABC AB AC
2
1
25 25
2
25
square units.
2
11. Prove that the points (2 a, 4 a), (2 a, 6 a) arid (2a + √3𝑎, 5a) are the vertices of an
equilateral triangle.
Sol:
Let A 2a, 4a , B 2a, 6a and C 2a 3a,5a be the given points
AB 2a 2a 6a 4a
2 2
AB 0 2a
2 2
AB 4a 2
AB 2a
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2a 3a 2a 5a 6a
2
BC
2
BC 3a a
2 2
BC 3a 2 a 2
BC 4a 2
BC 2a
2a 3a 2a 5a 4a
2
AC
2
AC 3a a
2 2
AC 3a 2 a 2
AC 4a 2
AC 2a
Since, AB BC AC
ABC is an equilateral triangle
12. Prove that the points (2, 3), (-4, -6) and (1, 3/2) do not form a triangle.
Sol:
Let A 2,3 , B 4, 6 and C 1,3 / 2 be the given points
AB 4 2 6 3
2 2
AB 6 9
2 2
AB 36 81
AB 117
2
3
BC 1 4 6
2
2
2
15
BC 5
2
2
225
BC 25
4
325
BC
4
BC 8125
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2
3
AC 2 1 3
2
2
2
3
AC 1
2
2
9
AC 1
4
13
AC
4
AC 3.25
We know that for a triangle sum of two sides is greater than the third side
Here AC BC is not greater than AB.
ABC is not triangle
13. An equilateral triangle has two vertices are (2, -1), (3, 4), (-2, 3) and (-3, -2), find the
coordinates of the third vertex.
Sol:
Let A 3, 4 , B 2,3 and C x, y be the three vertices of the equilateral triangle then,
AB 2 BC 2 CA2
AB 2 3 3 4 5 1 25 1 26
2 2 2 2
BC x 2 y 3 x 2 4 4 x y 2 9 6 y x 2 y 2 6 x 8 y 25
2 2
CA x 3 y 4 x 2 9 6 x y 2 16 8 y x 2 y 2 6 x 8 y 25
2 2
Now, AB 2 BC 2
x 2 y 2 4 x 6 y 13 26
x 2 y 2 4 x 6 y 13 0 …….(i)
AB 2 CA2
26 x 2 y 2 6 x 8 y 25
x2 y 2 6x 8 y 1 0 …….(ii)
Subtracting (ii) from (i) we get,
10 x 2 y 12 0
5x y 6 …….(iii)
5x 6 y
6 y
x
5
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
6 y
Subtracting x in (i) we get
5
6 y 6 y
2
y 4 6 y 13 0
2
5 5
6 y
2
24 4 y
y2 6 y 13 0
25 5
36 y 2 12 y 24 4 y
y2 6 y 13 0
25 5
36 y 2 12 y 25 y 2 120 20 y 150 13 25
0
25
26 y 2 32 y 6 325 0
26 y 2 32 y 319 0
D b2 4ac
D 32 4 26 319 1024 33176 34200
2
b D 32 34200
y
2a 2 26
32 185 217 32 185 153
y or y
52 52 52 52
217
Substituting y in (iii)
52
217
5x 6
52
217 95
5x 6
52 52
19
x
52
153
Again substituting y in (iii)
52
153
5x 6
52
153 465
5x 6
52 52
93
x
52
93 153
Therefore, the coordinates of the third vertex are ,
19 217
or ,
52 52 52 52
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
14. Show that the quadrilateral whose vertices are (2, -1) (3, 4), (-2, 3) and (-3, -2) is a
rhombus.
Sol:
Let A 2, 1 , B 3, 4 , C 2,3 and D 3, 2
AB 3 2 4 1 1 5 1 25 26
2 2 2 2
BC 2 3 3 4 5 1 25 1 26
2 2 2 2
CD 3 2 2 3 1 5 1 25 26
2 2 2 2
AD 3 2 2 1 5 1 25 1 26
2 2 2 2
Since AB BC CD AD
ABCD is a rhombus
15. Two vertices of an isosceles triangle are (2, 0) and (2, 5). Find the third vertex if the length
of the equal sides is 3.
Sol:
Two vertices of an isosceles triangle are A 2, 0 and B 2,5 . Let C x, y be the third
vertex
AB 2 2 5 0 0 5 25 5
2 2 2 2
BC x 2 y 5 x 2 4 4 x y 2 25 10 y x 2 4 x y 2 10 y 29
2 2
AC x 2 y 0 x2 4 4 x y 2
2 2
x 2 4 4 x 6.25 9
x 2 4 x 1.25 0
D 4 4 1 1.25
2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
D 16 5
D 11
4 11 4 3.31 7.31
x 3.65
2 1 2 2
4 11 4 11 4 3.31
Or x 0.35
2 2 2
The third vertex is 3.65, 2.5 or 0.35, 2.5
16. Which point on x-axis is equidistant from (5, 9) and (-4, 6)?
Sol:
Let A 5,9 and B 4, 6 be the given points.
Let C x, 0 be the point on x axis
Now,
AC x 5 0 9
2 2
AC x 2 25 10 x 9
2
AC x 2 10 x 25 81
AC x 2 10 x 106
BC x 4 0 6
2 2
BC x 2 16 8d 6
2
BC x 2 8 x 16 36
BC x 2 8 x 5 x
Since AC BC
Or, AC 2 BC 2
x 2 10 x 106 x 2 8 x 52
10 x 106 8x 52
10 x 8x 52 106
18x 54
54
x
18
x3
Hence the points on x-axis is 3, 0 .
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
17. Prove that the points (— 2, 5), (0, 1) and (2, — 3) are collinear.
Sol:
Let A 2,5 , B 0,1 and C 2, 3 be the given points
AB 0 2 1 5
2 2
AB 4 4
2
AB 4 16
AB 20
AB 2 5
BC 2 0 3 1
2 2
BC 2 4
2 2
BC 4 16
BC 20
BX 2 5
AC 2 2 3 5
2 2
AC 4 8
2 2
AC 16 64
AC 80
AC 4 5
Since AB BC AC
Hence A 2,5 , B 0,1 , and C 2, 3 are collinear
18. The coordinates of the point P are (—3, 2). Find the coordinates of the point Q which lies
on the line joining P and origin such that OP = OQ.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
19. Which point on y-axis is equidistant from (2, 3) and (—4, 1)?
Sol:
A 2,3 and B 4,1 are the given points.
Let C 0, y be the points are y axis
AC 0 2 y 3
2 2
AC 4 y 2 9 6 y
AC y 2 6 y 13
BC 0 4 y 1
2 2
BC 16 y 2 1 2 y
BC y 2 2 y 17
Since AC BC
AC 2 BC 2
y 2 6 y 13 y 2 2 y 17
6 y 2 y 17 13
4 y 4
y 1
The point on y axis is 0, 1
20. The three vertices of a parallelogram are (3, 4), (3, 8) and (9, 8). Find the fourth vertex.
Sol:
Let A 3, 4 , B 3,8 and C 9,8 be the given points
Let the forth vertex be D x, y
AB 3 3 8 4
2 2
AB 0 4
2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
AB 16
AB 4
BC 9 3 8 8
2 2
BC 6 0
2
BC 36
BC B
CD x 9 y 8
2 2
CD x 2 92 18x y 2 82 16 y
CD x 2 81 18 x y 2 64 16 y
CD x 2 18 x y 2 16 y 145
AD x 3 y 4
2 2
AD x 2 9 6 x y 2 16 8 y
AD x 2 6 x y 2 8 y 25
Since ABCD is a parallelogram and opposite sides of a parallelogram are equal
AB CD and AD BC
AB CD
AB 2 CD 2
x 2 18 x y 2 16 y 145 16
x 2 18 x y 2 16 y 145 16 0
x 2 18 x y 2 16 y 129 0 ………..(1)
BC AD
BC 2 AD2
x 2 6 x y 2 8 y 25 36
x 2 6 x y 2 8 y 25 36 0
x 2 6 x y 2 8 y 11 0 ………..(2)
x 9, y 4
The fourth vertex is D 9, 4
21. Find the circumcenter of the triangle whose vertices are (—2, —3), (— 1, 0), (7, — 6).
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Circumcenter of a triangle is the point of intersection of all the three perpendicular
bisectors of the sides of triangle. So, the vertices of the triangle lie on the circumference of
the circle.
Let the coordinates of the circumcenter of the triangle be x, y
x, y will the equidistant from the vertices of the triangle.
x2 x1 y2 y1
2 2
Using distance formula , it is obtained:
D1 x 2 y 3
2 2
D1 x 2 y 2 4 x 6 y 13
D2 x 2 1 2 x y 2
D3 x 2 49 14 x y 2 36 12 y
D3 x 2 y 2 14 x 12 y 85
As x, y is equidistant from all the three vertices
So, D1 D2 D3
D1 D2
x 2 y 2 4 x 6 y 13 x 2 1 2 x y 2
x 2 y 2 4 x 6 y 13 x 2 1 2 x y 2
4 x 6 y 2 x 1 13
2 x 6 y 12
x 3 y 6 ……….(1)
D2 D3
x 2 1 2 x y 2 x 2 y 2 14 x 12 y 85
x 2 1 2 x y 2 x 2 y 2 14 x 12 y 85
2 x 14 x 12 y 85 1
16 x 12 y 84
4 x 3 y 21 ……….(2)
Adding equations (1) and (2):
x 3 y 4 x 3 y 6 21
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5x 15
15
x
3
x3
When x 3, we get
4 3 21
y [Using (2)]
3
12 21
y
3
9
y
3
y 3
3, 3 are the coordinates of the circumcenter of the triangle
22. Find the angle subtended at the origin by the line segment whose end points are (0, 100)
and (10, 0).
Sol:
Let the point P 0,100 and Q 10, 0 be the given points.
The angle subtended by the line segment PQ at the origin O is 90.
23. Find the centre of the circle passing through (5, — 8), (2, — 9) and (2, 1).
Sol:
Let the center of the circle be O x, y
Since radii of the circle is constant
Hence, distance of O from A 5, 8 , B 2, 9 and C 2,1 will be constant and equal
OA2 OB 2 OC 2
x 5 y B x 2 y 9
2 2 2 2
x 2 25 10 x y 2 64 16 y x 2 4 4 x y 2 81 18 y
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
6 x 2 y 4 0
3x y 2 0
y 2 3x ………….(i)
Also, OB2 OC 2
x 2 y 9 y 1
2 2 2
y 2 81 18 y y 2 1 2 y
80 20 y 0
y 4
Substituting y in (i)
4 2 3x
3x 6
x2
Hence center of circle 2, 4
24. Find the value of k, if the point P (0, 2) is equidistant from (3, k) and (k, 5).
Sol:
Let the point P 0, 2 is equidistant from A 3, k and k ,5
PA PB
PA2 PB 2
3 0 k 2 k 0 5 2
2 2 2 2
9 k 2 4 4k k 2 9.
9 k 2 4 4k k 2 9 0
4 4k 0
4k 4
k 1
25. If two opposite vertices of a square are (5, 4) and (1, —6), find the coordinates of its
remaining two vertices.
Sol:
Let ABCD be a square and let A 5, 4 and C 1, 6 be the given points.
Let x, y be the coordinates of B.
AB BC
AB 2 BC 2
x 5 y 4 x 1 y 6
2 2 2 2
x 2 25 10 x y 2 16 8 y x 2 1 2 x y 2 36 12 y
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 2 10 x y 2 8 y x 2 2 x y 2 12 y 1 36 25 16
8 x 20 y 4
8 x 20 y 4
20 y 4
x
8
4 5 y 1
x
8
5 y 1
x
2
1 5y
x ………..(1)
2
In right triangle ABC
AB 2 BC 2 AC 2
x 5 y 4 x 1 y 6 5 1 4 6
2 2 2 2 2 2
x 2 25 10 x y 2 16 8 y x 2 1 2 x y 2 36 12 y 16 100
2 x 2 2 y 2 12 x 4 y 116 78
2 x 2 2 y 2 12 4 y 38
x 2 y 2 6 x 2 y 19
x 2 y 2 6 x 2 y 19 0 ………..(2)
Substituting the value of x form (1) in (2), we get
1 5y 1 5y
2
y 6 2 y 19 0
2
2 2
1 5 y
2
y 2 3 1 5 y 2 y 19 0
4
1 25 y 2 10 y
y 2 3 15 y 2 y 19 0
4
1 25 y 2 10 y 4 y 2 12 60 y 8 y 76
0
4
29 y 2 58 y 87 0
y2 2 y 3 0
y2 3y y 3 0
y y 3 1 y 3 0
y 3 y 1 0
y 3, y 1
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Substituting y 3 and y 1 in equation (1), we get
1 5 3
x
2
1 15
x
2
x 8
1 5 1
x
2
1 5
x
2
4
x
2
x 2
Hence, the required vertices of the square are 2,1 and 8, 3 .
26. Show that the points (—3, 2), (—5, —5), (2, —3) and (4, 4) are the vertices of a rhombus.
Find the area of this rhombus.
Sol:
A 3, 2 , B 5, 5 , C 2, 3 and D 4, 4 be the given points.
AB 5 3 5 2
2 2
AB 2 7
2 2
AB 4 49
AB 53
BC 2 5 5 2
2 2
BC 7 2
2 2
BC 49 4
BC 53
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
CD 4 2 4 3
2 2
CD 2 7
2 2
CD 4 49
CD 53
AD 4 3 4 2
2 2
AD 7 2
2 2
AD 49 4
AD 53
AC 2 3 3 2
2 2
AC 5 5
2 2
AC 25 25
AC 50
BD 4 5 4 5
2 2
BD 9 9
2 2
BD 81 81
BD 162
Since AB BC CD AD and diagonals AC BD
ABCD is a rhombus
1
Area of rhombus ABCD AC BD
2
1
50 162
2
1
90
2
45 sq. units
27. Find the coordinates of the circumcenter of the triangle whose vertices are (3, 0), (—1, —
6) and (4,—1). Also, find its circumradius.
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Let A 3, 0 , B 1, 6 and C 4, 1 be the given points.
Let O x, y be the circumcenter of the triangle
OA OB OC
OA2 OB 2
x 3 y 0 x 1 y 6
2 2 2 2
x 2 9 6 x y 2 x 2 1 2 x y 2 36 12 y
x 2 6 x y 2 x 2 2 x y 2 12 y 1 36 9
8 x 12 y 28
2 x 3 y 7
2 x 3 y 7 ………(1)
Again
OB2 OC 2
x 1 y 6 x 4 y 1
2 2 2 2
x 2 1 2 x y 2 36 12 y x 2 16 8 x y 2 1 2 y
x 2 2 x y 2 12 y x 2 8 x y 2 2 y 16 1 1 36
10 x 10 y 20
x y 2 ………(2)
Solving (1) and (2), we get
x 1, y 3
Hence circumcenter of the triangle is 1, 3
Circum radius 1 1 3 6
2 2
2 3
2 2
49
13 units
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
28. Find a point on the x-axis which is equidistant from the points (7, 6) and (—3, 4).
Sol:
Let A 7, 6 and B 3, 4 be the given points.
Let P x.0 be the point on x axis such that PA PB
PA PB
PA2 PB 2
x 7 0 6 x 3 0 4
2 2 2 2
x 2 49 14 x 36 x 2 9 6 x 16
x 2 14 x 2 6 x 9 16 36 49
20 x 60
x3
The point on x axis is 3, 0 .
29. (i) Show that the points A(5, 6), B (1, 5), C(2, 1)and D(6, 2) are the vertices of a square.
(ii) Prove that the points A (2, 3), B (—2, 2), C (—1, —2), and D (3, —1) are the vertices
of a square ABCD.
Sol:
A 5, 6 , B 1,5 , C 2,1 and D 6, 2 are the given points
AB 5 1 6 5
2 2
AB 4 1
2 2
AB 16 1
AB 17
BC 1 2 5 1
2 2
BC 1 4
2 2
BC 1 16
BC 17
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
CD 6 2 2 1
2 2
CD 4 1
2 2
CD 16 1
CD 17
AD 6 5 2 6
2 2
AD 1 4
2 2
AD 1 16
AD 17
AC 5 2 6 1
2 2
AC 3 5
2 2
AC 9 25
AC 34
BD 6 1 2 5
2 2
BD 5 3
2 2
BD 25 9
BD 34
Since AB BC CD AD and diagonals AC BD
ABCD is a square
30. Find the point on x-axis which is equidistant from the points (—2, 5) and (2,—3).
Sol:
Let A 2,5 and 2, 3 be the given points.
Let x, 0 be the point on x axis
Such that PA PB
PA PB
PA2 PB 2
x 2 0 5 x 2 0 3
2 2 2 2
x 2 4 4 x 25 x 2 4 4 x 9
x 2 4 x x 2 4 x 4 9 4 25
8x 16
x 2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
31. Find the value of x such that PQ = QR where the coordinates of P, Q and R are (6,—1), (1,
3) and (x, 8) respectively.
Sol:
P 6, 1 , Q 1,3 and R x,8 are the given points.
PQ QR
PQ 2 QR 2
6 1 1 3 x 1 8 3
2 2 2 2
5 4 x 2 1 2 x 5
2 2 2
25 16 x 2 1 2 x 25
41 x 2 2 x 26
x 2 2 x 26 41 0
x 2 2 x 15 0
x 2 5x 3x 15 0
x x 5 3 x 5 0
x 3 x 5 0
x 3 or x 5
32. Prove that the points (0, 0), (5, 5) and (—5, 5) are the vertices of a right isosceles triangle.
Sol:
Let A 0, 0 , B 5,5 and C 5,5 be the given points
AB 5 0 5 0
2 2
AB 25 25
AB 50
BC 5 5 5 5
2 2
BC 10 0
2
BC 100
AC 0 5 0 5
2 2
AC 25 25
AC 50
AB 2 50
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
BC 2 100
AC 2 50
AB 2 AC 2 BC 2
Since, AB AC and AB 2 AC 2 BC 2
ABC is a right isosceles triangle
33. If the point P(x, y ) is equidistant from the points A(5, 1) and B (1, 5), prove that x = y.
Sol:
Since P x, y is equidistant from A 5,1 and B 1,5
AP BP
Hence, AP 2 BP 2
x 5 y 1 x 1 y 5
2 2 2 2
x 2 25 10 x y 2 1 2 y x 2 1 2 x y 2 25 10 y
10 x 2 x 10 y 2 y
8 x 8 y
x y
Hence, proved.
34. If Q (0, 1) is equidistant from P (5, —3) and R (x, 6), find the values of x. Also, find the
distances QR and PR
Sol:
Given Q 0,1 is equidistant from P 5, 3 and R x, 6 so PQ QR
5 0 3 1 0 x 1 6
2 2 2 2
5 4 x 5
2 2 2 2
25 16 x 2 25
41 x 2 25
16 x 2
x 4
So, point R is 4, 6 or 4, 6
When point R is 4, 6
PR 5 4 3 6 12 9 1 81 82
2 2
QR 0 4 1 6 4 5 16 25 41
2 2 2 2
0 4 1 6 4 5
2
QR
2
2 2
16 25 41
35. Find the values of y for which the distance between the points P (2, —3) and Q (10, y) is
10 units
Sol:
Given that distance between 2, 3 and 10, y is 10
2 10 3 y 10
2 2
Therefore using distance formula
8 3 y 10
2 2
64 y 3 100
2
y 3
2
36
y 3 6
y 3 6 or y 3 6
Therefore y 3 or 9
36. Find the centre of the circle passing through (6, —6), (3, —7) and (3, 3)
Sol:
x 2 36 12 x y 2 36 12 y x 2 9 6 x y 2 49 14 y
x 2 36 12 x y 2 36 12 y x 2 9 6 x y 2 49 14 y 0
6 x 2 y 36 36 9 49
6 x 2 y 14 …………(1)
OB OC
2 2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 3 y 7 x 3 y 3
2 2 2 2
x 2 9 6 x y 2 49 14 y x 2 9 6 x y 2 9 6 y
x 2 6 x y 2 14 y x 2 6 x y 2 6 y 9 9 9 49
20 y 40
y 2
Substituting y 2 in (1)
6 x 2 2 14
6 x 4 14
6 x 14 4
6 x 18
x3
The centre of the circle is 3, 2
37. Two opposite vertices of a square are (—1, 2) and (3, 2). Find the coordinates of other two
vertices.
Sol:
Let ABCD be a square and let A 1, 2 and 3, 2 be the opposite vertices and let B x, y
be the unknown vertex.
AB BC
AB 2 BC 2
x 1 y 2 x 3 y 2
2 2 2 2
x2 1 2 x y 2 4 4 y x2 9 6 x y 2 4 4 y
x2 2 x y 2 4 y x2 6 x y 2 4 y 9 4 1 4
8x 8
x 1 ………(1)
x 1 y 2 x 3 y 2 3 1 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
x 2 1 2 x y 2 4 4 y x 2 9 6 x y 2 4 4 y 16
2 x 2 2 y 2 4 x 8 y 16 1 4 9 4
2 x 2 2 y 2 4 x 8 y 2 ………(2)
Substituting x 1 from (1) and (2)
2 1 2 y 2 4 1 8 y 2
2
2 2 y 2 4 8 y 2
2 y2 8 y 2 2 0
2 y2 8 y 0
2 y y 4 0
y 0, or y 4
Hence the required vertices of the square are 1, 0 and 1, 4
38. Name the quadrilateral formed, if any, by the following points, and give reasons for your
answers:
(i) A (—1, — 2), B (1, 0), C (—1, 2), D (—3, 0)
(ii) A (—3, 5), B (3, 1), C (0, 3), D (—1, — 4)
(iii) A (4, 5), B (7, 6), C (4, 3), D (1, 2)
Sol:
(i) Let, A 1, 2 , B 1, 0 , C 1, 2, , D 3, 0
1 1 0 2 2 2
2
BC
2
2 2
44 8 2 2
1 3 2 0 2 2
2
CD
2
2 2
44 8 2 2
1 3 2 0 2 2
2
AD
2
2 2
4 4 8 2 2
1 1 2 2 02 4 16 4
2
Diagonal AC
2 2
1 3 0 0 4
2
Diagonal BD
2
2
02 16 4
Here, all sides of this quadrilateral are of same length and also diagonals are of same
length. So, given points are vertices of a square
(ii) Let, A 3,5 , B 3,1 , C 0,3 , D 1, 4
AB 3 3 5 1 6 4 36 16 52 2 13
2 2 2 2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
BC 3 0 1 3 3 2 9 4 13
2 2 2 2
3 1 5 4 2 9
2 2
AD
2 2
4 81 85
Here, all sides of this quadrilateral are of different length . So, we can say that it is only a
general quadrilateral not specific like square, rectangle etc.
(iii) Let, A 4,5 , B 7, 6 , C 4,3 , D 1, 4
AB 4 7 5 6 3 1 9 1 10
2 2 2 2
BC 7 4 6 3 3 3 9 9 18
2 2 2 2
AD 4 1 5 2 3 3 9 9 18
2 2 2 2
Diagonal AC 4 4 5 3 0 2 04 2
2 2 2 2
Diagonal BD 7 1 6 2 6 4 36 16 52 13 2
2 2 2 2
Here, opposite sides of this quadrilateral are of same length but diagonals are different
length . So, given points are vertices of a parallelogram.
39. Find the equation of the perpendicular bisector of the line segment joining points (7,1) and
(3, 5).
Sol:
Bisector passes through midpoint
7 3 1 5
Midpoint of 7,1 and 3,5 , 5,3
2 2
Perpendicular bisector has slope that is negative reciprocal of line segment joining points
7,1 and 3,5
5 1 4
Slope of line segment 1
3 7 4
Perpendicular bisector has slope = 1 and passes through point 4, 4
Use point slope form
y 3 1 x 5
y x2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
40. Prove that the points (3, 0), (4, 5), (—1, 4) and (—2, —1), taken in order, form a rhombus.
Also, find its area.
Sol:
Length of AB 4 3 5 0 1 25 26
2 2
Length of BC 1 4 4 5 25 1 26
2 2
Length of CD 2 1 1 4 1 25 26
2 2
Length of DA 3 2 0 1 25 1 26
2 2
36 36 6 2
Here all sides of the quadrilateral ABCD are off same lengths but the diagonals are of
different lengths
So, ABCD is a rhombus.
1
Therefore area of rhombus ABCD 4 2 6 2
2
24 square units
41. In the seating arrangement of desks in a classroom three students Rohini, Sandhya and Bina
are seated at A (3, 1), B (6, 4) and C (8, 6). Do you think they are seated in a line?
Sol:
Let A 3,1 , B 6, 4 and C 8, 6 be thee given points
AB 6 3 4 1
2 2
AB 3 3
2 2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
AB 9 9
AB 18
AB 3 2
BC 8 6 6 4
2 2
BC 2 2
2 2
BC 4 4
BC 8
BC 2 2
AC 8 3 6 1
2 2
AC 5 5
2 2
AC 25 25
AC 50
AC 5 2
Since, AB BC AC
Points A, B, C are collinear
Hence, Rohini, Sandhya and Bina are seated in a line
42. Find a point on y-axis which is equidistant from the points (5, — 2) and (— 3, 2).
Sol:
Let A 5, 2 and B 3, 2 be the given points,
Let P 0, y be the point on y axis
PA PB
PA2 PB 2
0 5 y 2 0 3 y 2
2 2 2 2
25 y 2 4 4 y 9 y 2 4 4 y
y 2 4 y y 2 4 y 9 4 4 25
8 y 16
y 2
43. Find a relation between x and y such that the point (x, y) is equidistant from the points (3,
6) and (—3, 4).
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 3 y 6 x 3 y 4
2 2 2
2
Therefore
x 3 y 6 x 3 y 4
2 2 2 2
x 3 y 6 x 3 y 4
2 2 2 2
x 2 9 6 x y 2 36 12 y x 2 9 6 x y 2 16 8 y
36 16 6 x 6 x 12 y 8 y
20 12 x 4 y
3x y 5
44. If a point A (0, 2) is equidistant from the points B (3, p) and C (p, 5), then find the value of
p.
Sol:
A 0, 2 , B 3, P and C p,5 are given points
It is given that AB AC
AB2 AC 2
3 0 p 2 p 0 5 2
2 2 2 2
9 p2 4 4 p p2 9
44p 0
p 1
Exercise 14.3
1. Find the coordinates of the point which divides the line segment joining (— 1, 3) and (4, —
7) internally in the ratio 3 : 4.
Sol:
Let P x, y be the required point.
mx2 nx1
x
mn
my ny1
y 2
mn
Here, x1 1
y1 3
x2 4
y2 7
m : n 3: 4
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3 4 4 1
x 3
3 4
12 4
x
7
8
x
7
3 7 4 3
y
3 4
21 12
y
7
9
y
7
8 9
The coordinates of P are ,
7 7
2. Find the points of trisection of the line segment joining the points:
(i) (5, —6) and (— 7, 5),
(ii) (3, —2) and (—3, —4)
(iii) (2, —2) and (—7, 4).
Sol:
(i) Let P and Q be the point of trisection of AB i.e., AP PQ QB
5, 6 7,5
Therefore, P divides AB internally in the ratio of 1:2, thereby applying section formula, the
coordinates of P will be
1 7 2 5 1 5 2 6 7
, i.e., 1,
1 2 1 2 3
Now, Q also divides AB internally in the ratio of 2:1 there its coordinates are
2 7 1 5 2 5 1 6 4
, i.e., 3,
2 1 2 1 3
(ii)
Let P, Q be the point of tri section of AB i.e.,
AP PQ QB
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3, 2 3, 4
2 3 1 3 2 4 1 2 10
, i.e., 1,
2 1 2 1 3
Let P and Q be the points of trisection of AB i.e., AP PQ OQ
Now, Q also divides AB internally in the ration 2 : 1. So, the coordinates of Q are
2 7 1 2 2 4 1 2
, , i.e., 4, 2
2 1 2 1
3. Find the coordinates of the point where the diagonals of the parallelogram formed by
joining the points (—2, —1), (1, 0), (4, 3) and (1, 2) meet.
Sol:
4. Prove that the points (3, —2), (4, 0), (6, —3) and (5, —5) are the vertices of a
parallelogram.
Sol:
Let A 2, 1 , B 1, 0 , C 4,3 and D x, y be the vertices of a parallelogram ABCD taken
in order.
6. The points (3, —4) and (—6, 2) are the extremities of a diagonal of a parallelogram. If the
third vertex is (—1, —3). Find the coordinates of the fourth vertex.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
7. Find the ratio in which the point (2, y) divides the line segment joining the points A (— 2,
2) and B ( 3, 7). Also, find the value of y.
Sol:
Let the point P 2, y divide the line segment joining the points A 2, 2 and B 3, 7 in the
ratio K :1
Then, the coordinates of P are
3k 2 1 7k 2 1
,
k 1 k1
3k 2 7 k 2
,
k 1 k 1
But the coordinates of P are given as 2, y
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3k 2
2
k 1
3k 2 2k 2
3k 2k 2 2
k 4
7k 2
y
k 1
Putting the value of k, we get
7 4 2
y
4 1
30
y
5
6 y
i.e., y 6
Hence the ratio is 4 :1 and y 6.
8. If A (—1, 3), B (1, —1) and C (5, 1) are the vertices of a triangle ABC, find the length of
the median through A.
Sol:
Let A 1,3 , B 1, 1 and C 5,1 be the vertices of triangle ABC and let AD be the median
through A.
1 5 1 1
Coordinates of D are , 3, 0
2 2
Length of median AD 3 1 0 3
2 2
4 3
2 2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
16 9
25
5 units.
9. If the coordinates of the mid-points of the sides of a triangle are (1, 1), (2, —3) and (3, 4),
find the vertices of the triangle.
Sol:
10. If a vertex of a triangle be (1, 1) and the middle points of the sides through it be (—2, 3)
and (5, 2), find the other vertices.
Sol:
11. (i) In what ratio is the line segment joining the points (—2, —3) and (3, 7) divided by the y-
axis? Also, find the coordinates of the point of division.
(ii) In what ratio is the line segment joining (—3, —1) and (—8, —9) divided at the point
21
(− 5, − 5 )?
Sol:
12. If the mid-point of the line joining (3, 4) and (k, 7) is (x, y) and 2 x + 2 y + 1 = 0. find the
value of k.
Sol:
2
3 k 2 11 1 0
2 2
3 k 11 1 0
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3 k 12 0
k 15 0
k 15
13. Determine the ratio in which the straight line x — y — 2 = 0 divides the line segment
joining (3, —1) and (8, 9).
Sol:
Suppose the line x y 2 0 divides the line segment joining A 3, 1 and B 8,9 in the
ratio K :1 at point P. Then the coordinates of P are
8k 3 9k 1
,
k 1 k 1
But P lies on x y 2 0
8k 3 9k 1
2 0
k 1 k 1
8k 3 9k 1
2
k 1 k 1
8k 3 9k 1
2
k 1
k 4 2k 2
k 2k 2 4
2
3k 2 k
3
So, the required ratio is 2 : 3
14. Find the ratio in which the line segment joining (—2, —3) and (5, 6) is divided by
(i) x-axis
(ii) y-axis.
Also, find the coordinates of the point of division in each case.
Sol:
(i) Suppose x axis divides AB in the ratio K :1 at point P
Then, the coordinates of the point of division of division are
5k 2 6k 3
P ,
k 1 k 1
Since, P lies on x-axis, and y-coordinates of every point on x-axis is zero.
6k 3
0
k 1
6k 3 0
6k 3
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3 1
k k
6 2
Hence, the required ratio is 1: 2
1
Putting k in the coordinates of P
2
1
We find that its coordinates are , 0 .
3
15. Prove that the points (4, 5), (7, 6), (6, 3), (3, 2) are the vertices of a parallelogram. Is it a
rectangle.
Sol:
73 62
Coordinates of the mid-point of BD are , 5, 4
2 2
Thus, AC and BD have the same mid-point.
Hence, ABCD is a parallelogram
Now, we shall see whether ABCD is a rectangle.
We have,
AC 6 4 3 5
2 2
AC 4 4
AC 8
And, BD 7 3 6 2
2 2
BD 16 16
BD 32
Since, AC BD
So, ABCD is not a rectangle
16. Prove that (4, 3), (6, 4), (5, 6) and (3, 5) are the angular points of a square.
Sol:
AB 4 1
AB 5
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
And, BC 6 5 4 6
2 2
BC 1 4
BC 5
AB BC
So, ABCD is a parallelogram whose adjacent sides are equal
ABCD is a rhombus
We have,
AC 5 4 6 3
2 2
AC 10
BD 6 3 4 5
2 2
BD 10
AC BD
Hence, ABCD is a square
17. Prove that the points (—4, —1), (—2, —4), (4, 0) and (2, 3) are the vertices of a rectangle.
Sol:
BD 2 2 4 3 65
2 2
Length of AD 1 3 3 0 5 units
2 2
Length of BF 2 1 2 1 10 units
2 2
19. Three vertices of a parallelogram are (a + b, a — b), (2a + b, 2a — b), (a — b, a + b). Find
the fourth vertex.
Sol:
a b a b a b a b 2a b x 2a b y
, ,
2 2 2 2
2 a b x 2a b y
a, a ,
2 2
2a b x 2a b y
a and a
2 2
2a b x 2a 2a b y 2a
x b y b
Hence, the fourth vertex is b, b .
20. If two vertices of a parallelogram are (3, 2), (—1, 0) and the diagonals cut at (2, —5), find
the other vertices of the parallelogram.
Sol:
Let A x1 , y1 , B x2 , y2 and C x3 , y3 be the vertices of ABC
22. The line segment joining the points P (3, 3) and Q (6, — 6) is bisected at the points A and
B such that A is nearer to P. If A also lies on the line given by 2x + y + k = 0, find the value
of k.
Sol:
We are given PQ is the line segment, A and B are the points of trisection of PQ.
We know that PA : QA 1: 2
So, the coordinates of A are
6 1 3 2 6 1 3 2
,
2 1 2 1
12
,0
3
4, 0
Since, A lies on the line
2x y k 0
2 4 0 k 0
8 k 0
8 k 8
23. If the points (—2 , —1), (1, 0), (x, 3) and (1, y) form a parallelogram, find the values of x
and y.
Sol:
Let A 2, 1 , B 1, 0 , C x,3 and D 1, y be the given points.
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
We know that diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other
Coordinates of the mid-point of AC Coordinates of the mid-point of BD
x 2 3 1 1 1 y 0
, ,
2 2 2 2
x2 y
,1 1,
2 2
x2 y
1 and 1
2 2
x2 2 y 2
x4 y2
24. The points A (2, 0), B (9, 1), C (11, 6) and D (4, 4) are the vertices of a quadrilateral
ABCD. Determine whether ABCD is a rhombus or not.
Sol:
25. If three consecutive vertices of a parallelogram are (1, —2), (3, 6) and (5, 10), find its
fourth vertex.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
26. If the points A (a, —11), B (5, b), C (2, 15) and D (1, 1) are the vertices of a parallelogram
ABCD, find the values of a and b.
Sol:
27. If the coordinates of the mid-points of the sides of a triangle be (3, —2), (—3, 1) and (4, —
3), then find the coordinates of its vertices.
Sol:
2 x1 x2 x3 8 and 2 y1 y2 y3 8
x1 x2 x3 4 and y1 y2 y3 4 …….(iv)
From (i) and (iv)
x1 6 4 and y1 4 4
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x1 2 y1 0
So, the coordinates of A are 2, 0
From (ii) and (iv)
x2 6 4 and y2 2 4
x2 10 y2 6
So, the coordinates of B are 10, 6
From (iii) and (iv)
x3 8 4 and y3 6 4
x3 4 y3 2
So, the coordinates of C are 4, 2
Hence, the vertices of ABC are A 2, 0 , B 10, 6 and C 4, 2 .
28. Find the lengths of the medians of a ΔABC having vertices at A (0,—1), B (2, 1) and C (0,
3).
Sol:
29. Find the lengths of the medians of a ΔABC having vertices at A (5, 1), B (1, 5), and C
(−3,-1).
Sol:
30. Find the coordinates of the points which divide the line segment joining the points (−4, 0)
and (0, 6) in four equal parts.
Sol:
1 0 3 4 1 6 3 0
,
1 3 1 3
3
3,
2
We know that Q is midpoint of AB
Coordinates of Q are
3 0 1 4 3 6 1 0
,
3 1 3 1
9
1,
2
31. Show. that the mid-point of the line segment joining the points (5, 7) and (3, 9) is also the
mid-point of the line segment joining the points (8, 6) and (0, 10).
Sol:
Let A 5, 7 , B 3,9 , C 8, 6 and D 0,,10 be the given points
53 79
Coordinates of the mid-point of AB are , 4,8
2 2
8 0 6 10
Coordinates of the mid-point of CD are , 4,8
2 2
Hence, the midpoints of AB = midpoint of CD.
32. Find the distance of the point (1, 2) from the mid-point of the line segment joining the
points (6, 8) and (2, 4).
Sol:
Let P 1, 2 , A 6,8 and B 2, 4 be thee given points.
Coordinates of midpoint of the line segment joining A 6,8 and B 2, 4 are
6 2 8 4
Q , Q 4, 6
2 2
PQ 9 16
PQ 25
PQ 5
Hence, the distant 5 units
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝐴𝑃 3
33. If A and B are (1, 4) and (5, 2) respectively, find the coordinates of P when 𝐵𝑃 = 4
Sol:
34. Show that the points A (1, 0), B ( 5, 3), C ( 2, 7) and D (—2, 4) are the vertices of a
parallelogram.
Sol:
35. Determine the ratio in which the point P (m, 6) divides the join of A(—4, 3) and B(2, 8).
Also, find the value of m.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2k 4
m
k 1
3
Substituting k , we get
2
3
2 4
2 m
3
1
2
1
m
5
2
2
m
5
2
m
5
36. Determine the ratio in which the point (—6, a) divides the join of A(—3, 1) and B(—8, 9).
Also find the value of a.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Let P 6, a divides the join of A 3,1 and B 8,9 in the ratio k :1
Then, the coordinates of P are
8k 3 9k 1
,
k 1 k 1
8k 3
But, 6
k 1
8k 3 6k 6
8k 6k 6 3
2k 3
3
k
2
Hence, P divides AB in the ratio 3: 2
Again
9k 1
a
k 1
3
Substituting k
2
We get,
3
9 1
2 a
3
1
2
29
2 a
5
2
29
a
5
29
a
5
37. The line segment joining the points (3, —4 ) and (1, 2) is trisected at the points P and Q . If
5
the coordinates of P and Q are (p, —2) and ( 3, q) respectively. Find the values of p and q.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5
We have P p, 2 and Q , q are the points of trisection of the line segment joining
3
A 3, 4 and B 1, 2
We know AP : PB 1: 2
Coordinates of P are
11 2 3 1 2 2 4
,
1 2 1 2
7
, 2
3
7
Hence, P
3
Again we know that AQ : QB 2 :1
Coordinates of Q are
2 1 1 3 2 2 1 4
,
2 1 2 1
5
,0
3
Hence, q 0
38. The line joining the points (2, 1) and (5,—8) is trisected at the points P and Q. If point P
lies on the line 2x — y + k = 0. Find the value of k.
Sol:
Since, P is the point of trisection of the line segment joining the point A 2,1 and B 5, 8
We have AP : PB 1: 2
Coordinates of the point P are
1 5 2 2 1 8 2 1
,
1 2 1 2
3, 2
But, P lies on the line
2x y k 0
2 3 2 k 0
62k 0
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
8 k 0
k 8
39. If A and B are two points having coordinates (—2, —2) and (2, —4) respectively, find the
coordinates of P such that AP = AB.
Sol:
40. Find the coordinates of the points which divide the line segment joining A (—2, 2) and B
(2, 8) into four equal parts.
Sol:
From the figure we have points X, Y, Z are dividing the line segment in a ratio 1: 3,1:1,3:1
respectively.
1 2 3 2 1 8 3 2
Coordinates of X ,
1 3 1 3
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
7
1,
2
2 2 2 8
Coordinates of Y ,
2 2
0,5
3 2 1 2 3 8 1 2
Coordinates of Z ,
3 1 3 1
13
1,
2
41. A (4, 2), B (6, 5) and C (1, 4) are the vertices of ΔABC.
(i) The median from A meets BC in D. Find the coordinates of the point D.
(ii) Find the coordinates of point P on AD such that AP : PD = 2 : 1.
(iii) Find the coordinates of the points Q and R on medians BE and CF respectively such
that BQ : QE = 2 : l and CR : RF 2 : 1.
(iv) What do you observe?
Sol:
(i) Median AD of the triangle will divide the side BC in two equals parts. So D is the
midpoint of side BC.
6 1 5 4 7 9
Coordinates of D , ,
2 2 2 2
(ii) Point P divides the side AD in a ratio 2:1
7 9
2 6 1 4 2 2 1 2
Coordinates of P ,
2 1 2 1
11 11
,
3 3
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
(iii) Median BE of the triangle will divide the side AC in two equal parts. So E is the
midpoint of side AC.
4 1 2 4 5
Coordinates of E , ,3
2 2 2
Point Q divides the side BE in a ratio 2:1
5
2 2 1 6 2 3 1 5 11 11
Coordinates of Q , ,
2 1 2 1 3 3
Median CF of the triangle will divide the side AB in two equal parts. So F is the midpoint
of side AB.
4 6 2 1 7
Coordinates of F , 5,
2 2 2
Point R divides the side CF in a ratio 2:1.
7
2 5 11 2 2 1 4 11 11
Coordinates of R , ,
2 1 2 1 3 3
(iv) Now we may observe that coordinates of point P, Q, R are same. So, all these are
representing same point on the plane i.e. centroid of the triangle.
42. ABCD is a rectangle formed by joining the points A (—1, —1), B (—1, 4), C (5, 4) and D
(5, −1). P, Q, R and S are the mid-points of sides AB, BC, CD and DA respectively. Is the
quadrilateral PQRS a square? a rectangle? or a rhombus? Justify your answer.
Sol:
2
3 25 61
Length of PQ 1 2 4 9
2
2 4 4
2
3 25 61
Length of QR 2 5
2
4 9
2 4 4
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2
3 25 61
Length of RS 5 2 1 9
2
2 4 4
2
3 25 61
Length of SP 2 1 1 9
2
2 4 4
2
1 5 6
2 3 3
Length of PR
2 2
2 2 4 1 5
2 2
Length of QS
Here all sides of given quadrilateral is of same measure but the diagonals are of different
lengths. So, PQRS is a rhombus.
43. Show that A(—3, 2), B(—5,—5), C(2,—3) and D(4,4)are the vertices of a rhombus.
Sol:
AB 4 49
AB 53
Now, BC 5 2 5 3
2 2
BC 49 4
BC 53
AB BC
So, ABCD is a parallelogram whose adjacent sides are equal.
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Hence, ABCD is a rhombus.
44. Find the ratio in which the y-axis divides the line segment joining the points (5, —6) and
(—1, —4). Also, find the coordinates of the point of division.
Sol:
Let P 5, 6 and Q 1, 4 be the given points.
Let y-axis divide PQ in the ratio k :1
Then, the coordinates of the point of division are
k 5 4k 6
R ,
k 1 k 1
Since, R lies on y-axis and x-coordinates of every point on y-axis is zero
k 5
0
k 1
k 5 0
k 5
Hence, the required ratio is 5 :1
Putting k 5 in the coordinates of R, we get
5 5 4 5 6
,
5 1 5 1
13
0,
3
13
Hence, the coordinates of the point of division are 0, .
3
45. If the points A (6, 1), B (8, 2), C (9, 4) and D (k, p) are the vertices of a parallelogram
taken in order, then find the values of k and p.
Sol:
6 9 1 4 8 k 2 p
, ,
2 2 2 2
15 5 8 k 2 p
, ,
2 2 2 2
8 k 15 2 p 5
and
2 2 2 2
8 k 15 2 p 5
k 7 p3
46. In what ratio does the point (—4, 6) divide the line segment joining the points A (--6, 10)
and B (3, -8)?
Sol:
Let 4, 6
Divide AB internally in the ratio k :1 using thee section formula, we get
3k 6 8k 10
4, 6 , ……..(2)
k 1 k 1
3k 6
So, 4
k 1
i.e., 4k 4 3k 6
i.e., 7k 2
i.e., k :1 2 : 7
You c check for the y-coordinate also. So, the point 4, 6 divides the line segment j
joining the points A 6,10 and B 3, 8 in the ratio 2: 7
47. Find the coordinates of a point A, where AB is a diameter of the circle whose centre is (2,
—3) and B is (1, 4).
Sol:
Let coordinates of point A be x, y
Mid-point of diameter AB is center of circle 2, 3
x 1 y 4
2, 3 ,
2 2
x 1 y4
2 and 3
2 2
x 1 4 and y 4 6
x 3 and y 10
Therefore coordinates of A are 3,10
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
48. A point P divides the line segment joining the points A (3, — 5) and B (— 4, 8) such that
𝐴𝑃 𝑘
= 1. If P lies on the line x + y = 0, then find the value of y.
𝑃𝐵
Sol:
Given points are A 3, 5 and B 4,8
P divides AB in the ratio k :1,
Using the section formula, we have:
Coordinate of point P are 4k 3 / k 18k 5 / k 1
Now it is given, that P lies on the line x y 0
Therefore
4k 3 / k 1 8k 5 / k 1 0
4k 3 8k 5 0
4k 2 0
k 2/ 4
k 1/ 2
1
Thus, the value of k is .
2
Exercise 14.4
2. Two vertices of a triangle are (1, 2), (3, 5) and its centroid is at the origin. Find the
coordinates of the third vertex.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3. Prove analytically that the line segment joining the middle points of two sides of a triangle
is equal to half of the third side.
Sol:
x x1 x x y1 y
2 2
Length of DE
2 2 2 2
2 2
x y
1 1
2 2
x12 y12
4 4
4
1 2
x1 y12
1 2
x1 y12
2
1
BC
2
4. Prove that the lines joining the middle points of the opposite sides of a quadrilateral and the
join of the middle points of its diagonals meet in a point and bisect one another.
Sol:
Let OBCD be the quadrilateral P, Q, R, S be the midpoint off OB, CD, OD and BC.
Let the coordinates of O, B, C, D are 0, 0 , x, 0 , x, y and 0, y
x
Coordinates of P are , 0
2
x
Coordinates of Q are , y
2
y
Coordinates of R are 0,
2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y
Coordinates of S are x,
2
Coordinates of midpoint of PQ are
x x
2 2 0 y x y
, ,
2 2 2 2
y y
Coordinates of midpoint of RS are
0 x 2 2 x, y
,
2 2 2 2
Since, the coordinates of the mid-point of PQ coordinates of mid-point of RS
PQ and RS bisect each other
5. If G be the centroid of a triangle ABC and P be any other point in the plane, prove that PA2
+ PB2 + PC2 = GA2 + GB2 + GC2 + 3GP2.
Sol:
Let A 0, 0 , B a, 0 , and C c, d are the o-ordinates of triangle ABC
c 0 a d
Hence, G ,
3 3
a c d
i.e., G ,
3 3
let P x, y
To prove:
PA2 PB 2 PC 2 GA2 GB2 GC 2 3GP2
Or, PA2 PB 2 PC 2 GA2 GB 2 GC 2 GP 2 GP 2 GP 2
Or, PA2 GP 2 PB 2 GP 2 PC 2 GP 2 GA2 GB 2 GC 2
Proof:
PA2 x 2 y 2
ac
2 2
d
GP x
2
y
3 3
PB 2 x a y 2
2
PC 2 x c y d
2 2
L.H.S
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
ac
2
a c y 2 d 2 2 yd x a 2 y 2
x2 y 2 x2 2 x
3 3 9 3
ac
2
ac 2 d
2
2 yd
x2 x c y d
2 2
2 x y
3 3 9 3
ac
2
ac 2 d
2
2 yd
x2 2 x y
3 3 9 3
x 2 y x 2 x 2 a 2 2ax y 2 x 2 c 2 2 xc y 2 d 2 2 yd 3
2 a c 2 ac 2 d
2
2 yd
x 2x y
3 3 9 3
a c
2
d2
3x 2 3y 2 a 2 c 2 d 2 2ax 2 xc 2 yd 3x 2 2x a c 3y2 2 yd
3 3
a c 2ac 2 2
d2
a 2 c 2 d 2 2ax 2xc 2yd 2ax 2cx 2 yd
3 3
3a 3c 3d a c 2ac d
2 2 2 2 2 2
2a 2c 2d 2ac
2 2 2
L.H .S
3 3
Solving R.H.S
GA2 GB 2 GC 2
ac d a 2 c 2 2ac d 2
2 2
GA
2
3 3 9 9
ac d c 2a d
2 2 2 2
GC
2
a
3 3 3 3
a 2 4c 2 4ca 4d 2
9 9
ac d c 2a d
2 2 2 2
GB 2 a
3 3 3 3
c 2 4a 2 4ac d 2
9 9
a 2 c 2 2ac d 2 a 2 4c 2 4ac 4d 2 c 2 4a 2 4ac d 2
GA GB GC
2 2 2
9 9 9 9 9 9
a c 2ac d a 4c 4ac 4d c 4a 4ac d
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
9
6a 6c 6d 6ac 2a 2c 2 2d 2 2ac
2 2 2 2
9 3
L.H .S R.H .S
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
b2 c 2 a 2 a 2 b2 2ab c 2
2a 2 2b2 2c 2 2ab
Solving R.H.S
a b 2
c ab c ab
2 2 2
c
2 2
3 b c
a
3 3 3 3 2 3
a 2b 2 2c 2 a b 2 c 2 b 2a 2 c 2
3
3 3 3 3 3 3
a 2 4b 2 4ab 4c 2 a 2 b 2 2ab c 2 b 2 4a 2 4ab c 2
3
9 9 9 9 9 9
a 2 4b 2 4ab 4c 2 a 2 b 2 2ab c 2 b 2 4a 2 4ab c 2
3
9
6a 2 6b 2 6c 2 6ab
3
9
2a 2 2b 2 2c 2 2ab
3 3
9
2a 2 2b2 2c 2 2ab
L.H.S = R.H.S proved
7. If (—2, 3), (4, —3) and (4, 5) are the mid-points of the sides of a triangle, find the
coordinates of its centroid.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 x1 x2 x3 12 and 2 y1 y2 y3 10
x1 x2 x3 6 and y1 y2 y3 5 …………(iv)
From (i) and (iv), we get
x1 4 6 and y1 6 5
x1 10 y1 1
So, the coordinates of A are 10, 1
8. In below Fig. a right triangle BOA is given. C is the mid-point of the hypotenuse AB.
Show that it is equidistant from the vertices O, A and B.
Sol:
Now, CO a 0 b 0 a 2 b2
2 2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
CA 2a a 0 b a 2 b2
2 2
CB a 0 b 2b a 2 b2
2 2
Since, CO CA CB.
C is equidistant from O, A and B.
9. Find the third vertex of a triangle, if two of its vertices are at (-3, 1) and (0, -2) and the
centroid is at the origin
Sol:
Let the coordinates of the third vertex be x, y , Then
Coordinates of centroid of triangle are
x 3 0 y 1 2 x 3 y 1
, ,
3 3 2 3
We have centroid is at origin 0, 0
x 3 y 1
0 and 0
3 3
x 3 0 y 1 0
x3 y 1
Hence, the coordinates of the third vertex are 3,1 .
10. A (3, 2) and B (−2, 1) are two vertices of a triangle ABC whose centroid G has the
5 1
coordinates (11 , 3). Find the coordinates of the third vertex C of the triangle.
Sol:
Let the third vertex be C x, y
Two vertices A 3, 2 and B 2,1
Coordinates of centroid of triangle are
x 3 2 y 2 1
,
3 3
5 1
But the centroid of the triangle are ,
3 3
x 3 2 5 y 2 1 1
and
3 3 3 3
x 1 5 y 3 1
3 3 3 3
x 1 5 y 3 1
x4 y 4
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 14.5
B x2 , y2 at22 , 2at2
x3 , y3 at32 , 2at3 be the given points.
The area of ABC
1
at12 2at2 2at3 at22 2at3 2at1 at32 2at1 2at2
2
1
2a 2t12t2 2a 2t12t3 2a 2t22t3 2a 2t22t1 2a 2t32t1 2a 2t32t2
2
1
2 a 2t12 t2 t3 a 2t22 t3 t1 a 2 t32 t1 t2
2
a 2 t12 t2 t3 t22 t3 t1 t32 t1 t2
(iii) Let A x1 , y1 a, c a
B x2 , y2 a, c
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2
a 2
2. Find the area of the quadrilaterals, the coordinates of whose vertices are
(i) (—3, 2), (5, 4), (7, — 6) and (—5, — 4)
(ii) (1, 2), (6, 2), (5, 3) and (3, 4)
(iii) (—4, — 2), (—3, — 5), (3, — 2), (2, 3)
Sol:
BC 3 7
2 2
BC 58
We know that area of
1
Base Altitude
2
1
20 58 AD
2
40
AD
58
40
Length of the altitude AD
58
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5. Show that the following sets of points are collinear.
(a) (2, 5), (4, 6) and (8, 8) (b) (1, —1), (2, 1) and (4, 5)
Sol:
(a) Let A 2,5 , B 4, 6 and C 8,8 be the given points
Area of ABC
1
2 6 8 4 8 5 8 5 6
2
1
2 2 4 3 8 1
2
1
4 12 8
2
1
0
2
0
Since, area of ABC 0
2,5 , 4, 6 and 8,8 are collinear.
(b) Let A 1, 1 , B 2,1 and C 4,5 be the given points
Area of ABC
1
11 5 2 5 1 4 1 1
2
1
4 12 8
2
1
0
2
0
Since, area of ABC 0
The points 1, 1 , 2,1 and 4,5 are collinear
1 1
6. Prove that the points (a, 0), (0, b) and (1, 1) are collinear if, 𝑎 + 𝑏 = 1.
Sol:
Let A a, 0 , B 0, b and C 1,1 be the given points
Area of ABC
x1 y2 y3 x2 y3 y1 x3 y1 y2
1
2
a b 1 0 1 0 1 0 b
1
2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
ab a 0 b
2
1
ab a b
2
ab a b
1
2
1 1 1
ab ab a b 1
2
ab
1
ab
a b ab
1
0
2
0
1 1
Hence, A a, 0 , B 0, b and 1,1 are collinear if 1.
a b
7. The point A divides the join of P (—5, 1) and Q (3, 5) in the ratio k : 1. Find the two values
of k for which the area of ΔABC where B is (1, 5) and C (7, —2) is equal to 2 units.
Sol:
8. The area of a triangle is 5. Two of its vertices are (2, 1) and (3, -2). Third vertex lies on y =
x + 3. Find the third vertex.
Sol:
9. If a ≠ b ≠ c, prove that the points (a, a2 ), (b, b2 ), (c, c 2 ) can never be collinear.
Sol:
Let A a, a 2 B b, b 2 and c, c 2 be the given points.
Area of ABC
a b2 c 2 b c 2 a 2 c a 2 b 2
1
2
ab2 ac 2 bc 2 ba 2 ca 2 cb2
1
2
1
0
2
0 if a b c
i.e., the points are collinear if a b c
Hence, the points can never be collinear if a b c.
𝛥𝐷𝐵𝐶
10. Four points A(6, 3), B (-3, 5), C(4, -2) and D(x, 3x) are given in such a way that 𝛥𝐴𝐵𝐶 =
1
, find x.
2
Sol:
Area of DBC
1
2
x 5 2 3 2 3x 4 3x 5
1
2
7 6 9 x 12 x 20
1
28 x 14
2
Area of ABC 6 5 2 3 2 3 4 3 5
1
2
1
42 15 8
2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
49
2
Given
DBC 1
ABC 2
1
28 x 14 1
2
1 2
49
2
28x 14 1
49 2
2 28 x 14 49
56 x 28 49
56 x 77
77
x
56
11
x
8
11. For what value of a point (a, 1), (1, -1) and (11, 4) are collinear?
Sol:
Let A a,1 , B 1, 1 and C 11, 4 be the given points
Area of ABC
a 1 4 1 4 1 111 1
1
2
1
5 3 22
2
1
5a 25
2
For the points to be collinear
Area of ABC 0
1
5a 25 0
2
5a 25 0
5a 25
a5
12. Prove that the points (a, b), (𝑎1 , 𝑏1 ) and (𝑎 − 𝑎1 , 𝑏 − 𝑏1 ) are collinear if 𝑎𝑏1 = 𝑎1 𝑏
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Area of ABC
1
a b1 b b1 a1 b b1 b a a1 b b1
2
1
a b1 b b1 a1 b 1 ab ab1 a1b a1b1
2
1
ab1 ab ab1 a1b1 ab ab1 a1b a1b1
2
1
ab1 a1b
2
1
0 0 if ab1 a1b
2
Hence, the points are collinear if ab1 a1b.
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 15.1
4. The circumference of a circle exceeds diameter by 16.8 cm. Find the circumference of
circle.
Sol:
Let radius of circle = r cms
Diameter(d) = 2 × 𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑠 = 2𝑟
Circumference (c) = 2𝜋r
Given circumference exceeds diameter by 16.8cm
C = d + 16.8
⇒ 2𝜋r = 2r + 16.8
⇒ 2r(𝜋 – 1)= 16.8
22
⇒ 2r × ( 7 − 1) = 16.8
15
⇒ 2r × = 16.8
7
16.8×7
⇒r= = 5.6 × 0.7
30
⇒ r = 3.92 cms
22
Circumference = 2𝜋r = 2 × × 3.92
7
2464
= = 24.64 𝑐𝑚𝑠
100
5. A horse is tied to a pole with 28m long string. Find the area where the horse can graze.
Sol:
Length of string 1 = 28m
Area it can graze is area of circle with radius equal to length of string
Area = 𝜋l2
22
= × 28 × 28
7
= 88 × 28
= 2464 cm2
∴ area grazed by horse = 2464cm2.
6. A steel wire when bent is the form of square encloses an area of 12 cm2. If the same wire is
bent in form of circle. Find the area of circle.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Let side of square = s and length of wire be l. As wire is bent into square
l = perimeter of square = 4s.
Area of square = 121cm2 = s2.
S = √121 = 11𝑐𝑚
∴ length of wire l = 4(11) = 44cm
As wire is bent into circle (let radius be r)
Length of wire = circumference
44 = 2𝜋r
22 44×7
× 2 × 𝑟 = 44 ⇒ 𝑟 = 2×22 = 7𝑐𝑚
7
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒 = 𝜋𝑟 2
22
= ×7×7
7
= 22 × 7
= 154𝑐𝑚2
7. A horse is placed for grazing inside a rectangular field 40m by 36m and is tethered to one
corner by a rope 14m long. Over how much area can it graze.
Sol:
The fig shows rectangular field ABCD at corner A, a horse is tied with rope length = 14m.
The area it can graze is represented A as shaded region= area of quadrant with (radius =
length) of string
1
Area = 4 × (𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒) = 𝜋𝑟 2
1 22
=4× × 14 × 14
7
= (22 × 7)
= 154 m2.
Area it can graze = 154m2.
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
8. A sheet of paper is in the form of rectangle ABCD in which AB = 40cm and AD = 28 cm.
A semicircular portion with BC as diameter is cut off. Find the area of remaining paper.
Sol:
9. The circumference of two circles are in ratio 2:3. Find the ratio of their areas
Sol:
Let radius of two circles be 𝑟1 and 𝑟2 then their circumferences will be 2𝜋𝑟1 : 2𝜋𝑟2
= 𝑟1 : 𝑟2
But circumference ratio is given as 2 : 3
𝑟1 : 𝑟2 = 2: 3
Ratio of areas = 𝜋𝑟22 : 𝜋𝑟22
𝑟 2
= (𝑟1 )
2
2 2
= (3)
4
=9
= 4: 9
∴ 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 𝑜𝑓 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎𝑠 = 4 ∶ 9
10. The side of a square is 10 cm. find the area of circumscribed and inscribed circles.
Sol:
Circumscribed circle
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
Radius = 2 (𝑑𝑖𝑎𝑔𝑜𝑛𝑎𝑙 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑟𝑒)
1
= 2 × √2 side
1
= 2 × √2 × 10
= 5√2 cm
Area = 𝜋r2
22
= × 25 × 2
7
1100
= 𝑐𝑚2
7
Inscribed circle
1
Radius = 2 (sides)
1
= 2 × 10
= 5 cm
Area = 𝜋r2
22
= ×5×5
7
550
= 𝑐𝑚2
7
11. The sum of the radii of two circles is 140 cm and the difference of their circumferences in
88 cm. Find the diameters of the circles.
Sol:
12. The area of circle, inscribed in equilateral triangle is 154 cms2. Find the perimeter of
triangle.
Sol:
√3 𝑥2
⇒ 𝑥 − 7 = √49 +
2 4
2 2
√3 𝑥2
⇒ (2 𝑥 − 7) = (√ 4 + 49)
3 𝑥2
⇒ 4 𝑥 2 − 7√3𝑥 + 49 = + 49
4
𝑥
⇒ 2 = 7√3 ⇒ 𝑥 = 14 √3 𝑐𝑚
Perimeter = 3x = 3 × 14√3
= 42√3 cms
13. A field is in the form of circle. A fence is to be erected around the field. The cost of fencing
would to Rs. 2640 at rate of Rs.12 per metre. Then the field is to be thoroughs ploughed at
cost of Rs. 0.50 per m2. What is amount required to plough the field?
Sol:
Given
Total cost of fencing the circular field = Rs. 2640
Cost per metre fencing = Rs 12
Total cost of fencing = circumference × cost per fencing
⇒ 2640 = circumference × 12
2640
⇒ circumference = = 220𝑚
12
Let radius of field be r m
Circumference = 2 𝜋r m
2𝜋r = 220
22
2× × 𝑟 = 220
7
70
r= = 35𝑚
2
Area of field = 𝜋r2
22
= × 35 × 35
7
= 3850 m2.
Cost of ploughing per m2 land = Rs. 0.50
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
Cost of ploughing 3850 m2 land = 2 × 3850
= Rs. 1925.
14. If a square is inscribed in a circle, find the ratio of areas of the circle and the square.
Sol:
15. A park is in the form of rectangle 120m × 100m. At the centre of park there is a circular
lawn. The area of park excluding lawn is 8700m2. Find the radius of circular lawn.
Sol:
16. The radii of two circles are 8 cm and 6 cm respectively. Find the radius of the circle having
its are equal to the sum of the areas of two circles.
Sol:
Radius of circles are 8cm and 6 cm
Area of circle with radius 8 cm = 𝜋(8)2 = 64𝜋𝑐𝑚2
Area of circle with radius 6cm = 𝜋(6)2 = 36𝜋 𝑐𝑚2
Areas sum = 64𝜋 + 36𝜋 = 100𝜋 cm2
Radius of circle be x cm
Area = 𝜋x2
𝜋x2 = 100𝜋
𝑥 2 = 100 ⇒ 𝑥 = √100 = 10𝑐𝑚
17. The radii of two circles are 19cm and 9 cm respectively. Find the radius and area of the
circle which has circumferences is equal to sum of circumference of two circles.
Sol:
Radius of 1st circle = 19cm
Radius of 2nd circle = 9 cm
Circumference of 1st circle = 2(19) = 38𝜋 cm
Circumference of 2nd circle = 2𝜋 (9) = 18𝜋 cm
Let radius of required circle = R cm
Circumference of required circle = 2𝜋R = 𝑐1 + 𝑐2
2𝜋R = 38𝜋 + 18𝜋
2𝜋R = 56𝜋
R = 28 cms
Area of required circle = 𝜋r2
22
= × 28 × 28
7
= 2464 𝑐𝑚2
18. A car travels 1 km distance in which each wheel makes 450 complete revolutions. Find the
radius of wheel.
Sol:
Let radius of wheel = ‘r’ m
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
19. The area enclosed between the concentric circles is 770cm2. If the radius of inner circle.
Sol:
Radius of outer circle = 21𝑐𝑚
Exercise 15.2
1. Find in terms of x the length of the arc that subtends an angle of 30°, at the centre of circle
of radius 4 cm.
Sol:
𝜃
Length of arc = 360° × 2𝜋𝑟
Radius = r = 4 cm
𝜃 = angle subtended at centre = 30°
30°
Arc length = 360° × 2 × (7)
2𝜋
= cm
3
5𝜋
2. Find the angle subtended at the centre of circle of radius 5cm by an arc of length ( 3 ) 𝑐𝑚
Sol:
Radius (r) = 5 cm
4. An arc of length 15 cm subtends an angle of 45° at the centre of a circle. Find in terms of 𝜋,
radius of the circle.
Sol:
𝑎𝜋
Length of arc = 𝑐𝑚
4
Radius r = ‘a’ cm
𝜃 = angle subtended at centre
𝜃
arc length = 360° × 2𝜋𝑟
𝜃
= 360° × 2𝜋𝑎
𝜃 𝑎𝜋
∴ 360° × 2𝜋𝑎 = 4
9𝜋×360°
⇒𝜃= = 45°
4×2𝜋𝑎
6. A sector of circle of radius 4cm contains an angle of 30°. Find the area of sector
Sol:
Radius = 4 cm = r
8. The area of sector of circle of radius 2cm is 𝜋cm2. Find the angle contained by the sector.
Sol:
9. The area of sector of circle of radius 5cm is 5𝜋 cm2. Find the angle contained by the sector.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Area of sector = 5𝜋 cm2.
Radius (r) = 5cm
𝜃
Let 𝜃 = angle subtended at centre area of sector = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
𝜃 5𝜋𝜃
= 360 × 𝜋 × 5 × 5 = 72°
5𝜋𝜃
= = 5𝜋
72°
⇒ 𝜃 = 72°
10. AB is a chord of circle with centre O and radius 4cm. AB is length of 4cm. Find the area of
sector of the circle formed by chord AB
Sol:
AB is chord AB = 4cm
OA = OB = 4cm
OAB is equilateral triangle ∠AOB = 60°
Area of sector (formed by chord [shaded region]) = (area of sector)
𝜃 60 8𝜋
= 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2 = 360 × 𝜋 × 4 × 4 = 𝑐𝑚2
3
11. In a circle of radius 35 cm, an arc subtends an angle of 72° at the centre. Find the length of
arc and area of sector
Sol:
Radius (r) = 35 cm
𝜃 = angle subtended at centre = 72°
𝜃
Length of arc = 360° × 2𝜋𝑟
72 22
= 360 × 2 × × 35
7
= 2 × 22 = 44𝑐𝑚𝑠
𝜃
Area of sector = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
72 22
= 360 × × 35 × 35
7
= (35 × 22) = 770 𝑐𝑚2
12. The perimeter of a sector of circle of radius 5.7m is 27.2 m. Find the area of sector.
Sol:
13. The perimeter of certain sector of circle of radius 5.6 m is 27.2 m. Find the area of sector.
Sol:
14. A sector is cut-off from a circle of radius 21 cm the angle of sector is 120°. Find the length
of its arc and its area.
Sol:
15. The minute hand of a clock is √21 𝑐𝑚 long. Find area described by the minute hand on the
face of clock between 7 am and 7:05 am
Sol:
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
16. The minute hand of clock is10cm long. Find the area of the face of the clock described by
the minute hand between 8am and 8:25 am
Sol:
17. A sector of 56° cut out from a circle contains area of 4.4 cm2. Find the radius of the circle
Sol:
Angle subtended by sector at centre 𝜃 = 56°
Let radius be ‘x’ cm
𝜃
Area of sector = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
56 22
= 360 × × 𝑟2
7
22
= 45 𝑟 2
44
But area of sector = 4.4cm2 = 10 𝑐𝑚2
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
22 44
𝑟 2 = 10
45
45×44
⇒ 𝑟 2 = 22×10 = 9
⇒ 𝑟 = √9
= 3 𝑐𝑚
∴ radius (r) = 3cm
18. In circle of radius 6cm, chord of length 10 cm makes an angle of 110° at the centre of circle
find
(i) Circumference of the circle
(ii) Area of the circle
(iii) Length of arc
(iv) The area of sector
Sol:
(i) Radius of circle (r) = 6 cm
Angle subtended at the centre = 110°
Circumference of the circle = 2𝜋r
22
=2× ×6
7
264
= 𝑐𝑚
7
22
(ii) Area of circle = 𝜋r2 = ×6×6
7
792
= 𝑐𝑚2
7
𝜃
(iii) Length of arc = 360° × 2𝜋𝑟
110 22
= 360 × 2 × ×6
7
232
= 𝑐𝑚
21
𝜃
(iv) Area of sector = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
110 22
= 360 × ×6×6
7
232
= 𝑐𝑚2
7
19. Below fig shows a sector of a circle, centre O. containing an angle 𝜃°. Prove that
𝜋𝜃
(i) Perimeter of shaded region is 𝑟 (tan 𝜃 + sec 𝜃 + 180 − 1)
𝑟2 𝜋𝜃
(ii) Area of shaded region is (tan 𝜃 − 180)
2
Sol:
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
20. The diagram shows a sector of circle of radius ‘r’ can containing an angle 𝜃. The area of
sector is A cm2 and perimeter of sector is 50 cm. Prove that
360 25
(i) 𝜃= ( 𝑟 − 1)
𝜋
(ii) A = 25r – r2
Sol:
Exercise 15.3
1. AB is a chord of a circle with centre O and radius 4cm. AB is length 4cm and divides circle
into two segments. Find the area of minor segment
Sol:
2. A chord of circle of radius 14cm makes a right angle at the centre. Find the areas of minor
and major segments of the circle.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3. A chord 10 cm long is drawn in a circle whose radius is 5√2 cm. Find the area of both
segments
Sol:
Given radius = r = 5√2 cm = OA = OB
Length of chord AB = 10cm
4. A chord AB of circle, of radius 14cm makes an angle of 60° at the centre. Find the area of
minor segment of circle.
Sol:
5. AB is the diameter of a circle, centre O. C is a point on the circumference such that ∠COB
= 𝜃. The area of the minor segment cutoff by AC is equal to twice the area of sector BOC.
𝜃 𝜃 1 𝜃
Prove that sin 2 . cos 2 = 𝜋 (2 − 120°)
Sol:
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
6. A chord of a circle subtends an angle 𝜃 at the centre of circle. The area of the minor
𝜃 𝜃
segment cut off by the chord is one eighth of the area of circle. Prove that 8 sin 2 . cos 2 +
𝜋𝜃
𝜋= 45
Sol:
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 15.4
1. A plot is in the form of rectangle ABCD having semi-circle on BC. If AB = 60m and BC =
28m, find the area of plot.
Sol:
2. A playground has the shape of rectangle, with two semicircles on its smaller sides as
diameters, added to its outside. If the sides of rectangle are 36m and 24.5m. find the area of
playground.
Sol:
3. The outer circumference of a circular race track is 528m. The track is everywhere 14m
wide. Calculate the cost of leveling the track at rate of 50 paise per square metre.
Sol:
4. A rectangular piece is 20m long and 15m wide from its four corners, quadrants of 3.5m
radius have been cut. Find the area of remaining part.
Sol:
5. Four equal circles, each of radius 5 cm touch each other as shown in fig. Find the area
included between them.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
6. Four cows are tethered at four corners of a square plot of side 50m, so that’ they just cant
reach one another. What area will be left ungrazed.
Sol:
7. A road which is 7m wide surrounds a circular park whose circumference is 352m. Find the
area of road.
Sol:
6
8. Four equal circles each of radius a, touch each other. Show that area between them is 7 𝑎2
Sol:
9. A square water tank has its side equal to 40m, there are 4 semicircular flower beds grassy
plots all around it. Find the cost of turfing the plot at Rs 1.25/sq.m
Sol:
Exercise 16.1
1. How many balls each of radius 1cm can be made from a solid sphere of lead of radius
8cm?
Sol:
Given that a solid sphere f radius r1 8cm
With this sphere we have to make spherical balls of radius r2 1cm
Since we don’t know no of balls let us assume that no of balls formed be ‘n’
We know that
4
Volume of sphere r 2
3
Volume of solid sphere should be equal to sum of volumes of n spherical balls
4 4
n 1 r 3
3
3 3
4
8
3
n 3
4
1
3
3
n 83
n 512
hence 512 no of balls can be made of radius 1cm from a solid sphere of radius
8cm
2. How many spherical bullets each of 5cm in diameter can be cast from a rectangular block
of metal 11dm 1m 5dm ?
Sol:
Given that a metallic block which is rectangular of diameter 11dm 1m 5dm
Given that diameter of each bullet is 5cm
4
Volume of sphere r 2
3
Dimensions of rectangular block = 11dm 1m 5dm
Since we know that 1 dm 101 m
11101 1 5 101 55 102 m3 ………(1)
Diameter of each bullet 5cm
d 5
Radius of bullet r 2 5cm
2 2
2
25 10 m
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
4
3
So volume 25 102
3
Volume of rectangular block should be equal sum of volumes of n spherical bullets
Let no of bullets be ‘n’
Equating (1) and (2)
4
3
55 102 n 25 102
3
2
55 10
n
4 22
3
2
25 10
3 7
n 8400
No of bullets found were 8400
3. A spherical ball of radius 3cm is melted and recast into three spherical balls. The radii of
the two of balls are 1 9cm and 2cm . Determine the diameter of the third ball?
Sol:
Given that a spherical ball of radius 3cm
4
We know that Volume of a sphere r 2
3
4
So its volume v 3
2
3
Given that ball is melted and recast into three spherical balls
4
Radii of first ball v1 1 5
3
3
4
Radii of second ball v2 2
3
3
Radii of third ball ___________?
4
Volume of third ball r 3 v3
3
Volume of spherical ball is equal to volume of 3 small spherical balls
4 4 4 4
r 2 1 5 2 3
3 3 3
3 3 3 3
r 2 1 5 2 3
3 3 3
r 3 33 1 53 23
1
r 15 6
3
r 2 5cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
Diameter d 2r 2 2 5 5cm
Diameter of third ball 5cm.
4. 2 2 Cubic dm of grass is to be drawn into a cylinder wire 0 25cm in diameter. Find the
length of wire?
Sol:
Given that 2 2dm3 of grass is to be drawn into a cylindrical wire 0.25cm in diameter
Given diameter of cylindrical wire 0.25cm
d 0 25
Radius of wire r 0 125cm
2 2
0 125 102 m.
We have to find length of wire?
Let length of wire be ‘h’ 1cm 102 m
Volume of Cylinder r 2 h
Volume of brass of 2 2dm3 is equal to volume of cylindrical wire
22
7
0 125 102 h 2 2 103
2 2 103 7
h
2
22 0 125 102
h 448m
Length of cylindrical wire 448m
5. What length of a solid cylinder 2cm in diameter must be taken to recast into a hollow
cylinder of length 16cm, external diameter 20cm and thickness 2 5mm ?
Sol:
Given that diameter of solid cylinder 2cm
Given that solid cylinder is recast to hollow cylinder
Length of hollow cylinder 16cm
External diameter = 20cm
Thickness 2 5mm 0 25cm
Volume of solid cylinder r 2h
Radius of cylinder 1cm
So volume of solid cylinder 1 h
2
……(i)
Let length of solid cylinder be h
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
22 2 22
1 h 16 4 94
7 7
h 79 04cm
Length of solid cylinder 79cm
6. A cylindrical vessel having diameter equal to its height is full of water which is poured into
two identical cylindrical vessels with diameter 42cm and height 21cm which are filled
completely. Find the diameter of cylindrical vessel?
Sol:
Given that diameter is equal to height of a cylinder
So h 2r
Volume of cylinder r 2 h
So volume r 2 2r
2 r 3
Volume of each vessel r 2 h
Diameter 42cm
Height 21cm
Diameter d 2r
2r 42
r 21
Radius 21cm
Volume of vessel 21 21
2
……….(2)
Since volumes are equal
Equating (1) and (2)
2 r 3 21 21 2
2
( 2 identical vessels)
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
21 21 2
2
r 3
2
r 3 21
3
r 21 d 42cm
Radius of cylindrical vessel 21cm
Diameter of cylindrical vessel 42cm.
7. 50 circular plates each of diameter 14cm and thickness 0 5cm are placed one above other
to form a right circular cylinder. Find its total surface area?
Sol:
Given that 50 circular plates each with diameter 14cm
Radius of circular plates r 7cm
Thickness of plates 0 5
Since these plates are placed one above other so total thickness of plates 0 5 50
25cm.
Total surface area of a cylinder 2 rh 2 r 2
2 rh 2 r 2
2 r h r
22
2 7 25 7
7
T .S. A 1408cm2
Total surface area of circular plates is 1408cm2
8. 25 circular plates each of radius 10 5cm and thickness 1 6cm are placed one above the
other to form a solid circular cylinder. Find the curved surface area and volume of cylinder
so formed?
Sol:
Given that 25 circular plates each with radius (r) = 10.5cm
Thickness 1 6cm
Since plates are placed one above other so its height becomes 1 6 25 40cm
Volume of cylinder r 2 h
10 5 40
2
13860cm3
Curved surface area of a cylinder 2 rh
2 10 5 40
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
22
2 10 5 40
7
2640cm2
Volume of cylinder 13860cm3
Curved surface area of a cylinder 2640cm2
9. A path 2m wide surrounds a circular pond of diameter 4cm. how many cubic meters of
gravel are required to grave the path to a depth of 20cm
Sol:
Diameter of circular pond 40m
Radius of pond(r) 20m.
Thickness 2m
Depth 20cm 0 2m
Since it is viewed as a hollow cylinder
Thickness t R r
2 Rr
2 R 20
R 22m
Volume of hollow cylinder R 2 r 2 h
222 202 h
22 2
202 0 2
84 0.2
10. A 16m deep well with diameter 3 5m is dug up and the earth from it is spread evenly to
form a platform 27 5m by 7m. Find height of platform?
Sol:
Let as assume well is a solid right circular cylinder
3 5
Radius of cylinder r 1 75m
2
Height (or) depth of well 16m.
Volume of right circular cylinder r 2h
22
1 75 16
2
……..(1)
7
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
7
x 0 8m
Height of platform (h) 80cm.
11. A well of diameter 2m is dug14m deep. The earth taken out of it is spread evenly all around
it to form an embankment of height 40cm. Find width of the embankment?
Sol:
Let us assume well as a solid circular cylinder
2
Radius of circular cylinder 1m
2
Height (or) depth of well 14m
Volume of solid circular cylindeer r 2h
1 14
2
…..(1)
Given that height of embankment (h) = 40cm
Let width of embankment be ‘x’ m
Volume of embankment r 2 h
2
1 x2 1 0 4 …..(2)
Since well is spread evenly to form embankment so their volumes will be same so equating
(1) and (2)
2
1 14 1 x 1 0 4
2 2
x 5m
Width of embankment of x 5m
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
12. Find the volume of the largest right circular cone that can be cut out of a cube where edge
is 9cm_____?
Sol:
Given that side of cube =9cm
Given that largest cone is curved from cube
Diameter of base of cone = side of cube
2x 9
9
r cm
2
Height of cone = side of cube
Height of cone (h) = 9cm
1
Volume of l arg est cone r 2 h
3
2
1 9
t 9
3 2
93
12
190 92cm3
Volume of largest cone v 190 92cm3
13. A cylindrical bucket, 32 cm high and 18cm of radius of the base, is filled with sand. This
bucket is emptied on the ground and a conical heap of sand is formed. If the height of the
conical heap is 24 cm, find the radius and slant height of the heap.
Sol:
36cm, 43.27 cm
14. Rain water, which falls on a flat rectangular surface of length 6cm and breath 4m is
transferred into a cylindrical vessel of internal radius 10cm. What will be the height of
water in the cylindrical vessel if a rainfall of 1cm has fallen____?
Sol:
Given length of rectangular surface 6cm
Breath of rectangular surface 4cm
Height (h) 1cm
Volume of a flat rec tan gular surface lbh
6000 400 1
Volume 240000cm3 _________(1)
Given radius of cylindrical vessel 20cm
Let height off cylindrical vessel be h1
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
7
h1 190 9cm
height of water in cylindrical vessel 190 9cms
15. A conical flask is full of water. The flask has base radius r and height h. the water is proved
into a cylindrical flask off base radius one. Find the height of water in the cylindrical flask?
Sol:
Given base radius of conical flask be r
Height of conical flask is h
1
Volume of cone r 2 h
3
1
So its volume r 2 h ________(1)
3
Given base radius of cylindrical flask is ms.
Let height of flask be h1
Volume of cylinder r 2 h1
22
So its volume mr h1
2
_________(2)
7
Since water in conical flask is poured in cylindrical flask their volumes are same
(1) = (2)
1
r 2 h mr h1
2
3
h
h1
3m2
h
Height of water in cylindrical flask
3m2
16. A rectangular tank 15m long and 11m broad is required to receive entire liquid contents
from a full cylindrical tank of internal diameter 21m and length 5m. Find least height of
tank that will serve purpose______?
Sol:
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
17. A hemisphere tool of internal radius 9cm is full of liquid. This liquid is to be filled into
cylindrical shaped small bottles each of diameter 3cm and height 4cm. how many bottles
are necessary to empty the bowl.
Sol:
Given that internal radius of hemisphere bowl 90m
4
Volume of hemisphere r 3
3
2
9
3
______(1)
3
Given diameter of cylindrical bottle 3cm
3
Radius cm
2
Height 4cm
Volume of cylindrical r 2h
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
2
3
4 ______(2)
2
Volume of hemisphere bowl is equal to volume sum of n cylindrical bottles
(1) = (2)
2
2 3
9 4 n
3
3 2
2
9
3
n 3 2
3
4
2
n 54
No of bottles necessary to empty the bottle 54.
18. The diameters of the internal and external surfaces of a hollow spherical shell are 6 cm and
10 cm respectively. If it is melted and recast and recast into a solid cylinder of diameter 14
cm, find the height of the cylinder.
Sol:
Internal diameter of hollow spherical shell 6cm
6
Internal radius of hollow spherical shell 3 cm
3
External diameter of hollow spherical shell 10cm
10
External radius of hollow spherical shell 5 cm
2
Diameter of cylinder 14 cm
14
Radius of cylinder 7cm
2
Let height of cylinder xcm
According to the question
Volume of cylinder = Volume of spherical shell
4
7 x 53 33
2
3
4
49 x 125 27
3
4
49 x 98
3
4 98 8
x cm
3 49 3
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
8
Height off cylinder cm
3
19. A hollow sphere of internal and external diameter 4cm and 8cm is melted into a cone of
base diameter 8cm. Calculate height of cone?
Sol:
Given internal diameter of hollow sphere (r) 4cm
External diameter R 8cm
4
Volume of hollow sphere R 2 r 2
3
4
B 2 42
3
____(1)
3 3
4
48
3 h
1
16
3
h 12cm
Height of cone 12cm
20. A cylindrical tube of radius 12cm contains water to a depth of 20cm. A spherical ball is
dropped into the tube and the level of the water is raised by 6 75cm. Find the radius of the
ball___?
Sol:
Given that radius of a cylindrical tube (r) 12cm
Level of water raised in tube h 6 75cm
Volume of cylinder r 2 h
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
12 6 75cm3
2
22
12 6 25cm3
2
………(1)
7
Let ‘r’ be radius of a spherical ball
4
Volume of sphere r 3 ………(2)
3
To find radius of spherical balls
3
12 6 75
2
r
3
4
3
r 3 729
r 3 93
r 9cm
Radius of spherical ball r 9cm
21. 500 persons have to dip in a rectangular tank which is 80m long and 50m broad. What is
the rise in the level of water in the tank, if the average displacement of water by a person is
0 04m3 ____?
Sol:
Given that length of a rectangular tank (r) = 80m
Breath of a rectangular tank (b) 50m
Total displacement of water in rectangular tank
By 500 persons 500 0 04m3
20m3 ______(1)
Let depth of rectangular tank be h
Volume of rectangular tan k lbh
80 50 hm3 ______(2)
Equating (1) and (2)
20 80 50 h
20 4000h
20
h
4000
h 0 005m
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
h 0 5cm
Rise in level of water in tank h 0 05cm.
22. A cylindrical jar of radius 6cm contains oil. Iron sphere each of radius 1 5cm are immersed
in the oil. How many spheres are necessary to raise level of the oil by two centimetress?
Sol:
Given that radius of a cylindrical jar r 6cm
Depth/height of cylindrical jar h 2cm
Let no of balls be ‘n’
Volume of a cylinder r 2 h
22
V1 6 2cm3
2
………(1)
7
Radius of sphere 1 5cm
4
So volume of sphere r 3
3
4 22
V2 1 5 cm3
3
………(2)
3 7
Volume of cylindrical jar is equal to sum of volume of n spheres
Equating (1) and (2)
22 4 22
6 2 n 1 5
2 3
7 3 4
22
6 2
2
v1
n n 7
4 22
v2 1 5
3
3 7
n 16
No of spherical balls n 16
23. A hollow sphere of internal and external radii 2cm and 4cm is melted into a cone of basse
radius 4cm. find the height and slant height of the cone______?
Sol:
Given that internal radii of hollow sphere (r) = 2cm
External radii of hollow sphere R 4cm
4
Volume of hollow sphere R 2 r 2
3
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
4
v1 42 22
3
…………(1)
4
16 4
3 h
1
16
3
h 14cm
Substituting ‘h’ value in (2)
l 2 16 h2
l 2 16 142
l 2 16 196
l 14 56cm
Slant height of cone 14 56cm
24. The internal and external diameters of a hollow hemisphere vessel are 21cm and 25 2cm.
The cost of painting 1cm2 of the surface is 10paise. Find total cost to paint the vessel all
over______?
Sol:
21
Given that internal diameter of hollow hemisphere r cm 10 5cm
2
25 2
External diameter R 12 6cm
2
Total surface area of hollow hemisphere
2 R 2 2 r 2 R 2 r 2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
2 12 6 2 10 5 12 62 10 52
2 2
997 51 692 72 152 39
1843 38cm2
Given that cost of painting 1cm2 of surface 10 ps
Total cost for painting 1843 38cm2
1843 38 10 ps
184 338 Rs.
Total cot to paint vessel all over 184 338 Rs.
25. A cylindrical tube of radius 12cm contains water to a depth of 20cm. A spherical ball of
radius 9cm is dropped into the tube and thus level of water is raised by hcm. What is the
value of h_____?
Sol:
Given that radius of cylindrical tube r1 12cm
Let height of cylindrical tube (h)
Volume of a cylinder r12 h
v1 12 h
2
……(1)
Given spherical ball radius r2 9cm
4
Volume of sphere r23
3
4
v2 93 ……(2)
3
Equating (1) and (2)
v1 v2
4
12 h 93
2
3
4
93
h 3
12
2
h 6 75cm
Level of water raised in tube (h) 6 75cm
26. The difference between outer and inner curved surface areas of a hollow right circular
cylinder 14cm long is 88cm2 . If the volume of metal used in making cylinder is 176cm3 .
find the outer and inner diameters of the cylinder____?
Sol:
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
R 2
r2 14 176
R2 r 2 4
R r R r 4
Rr 4 ……(2)
R r 1
Rr 4
2R 5
5
2R 5 R 2 5cm
2
Substituting ‘R’ value in (1)
R r 1
25 r 1
2 5 1 r
r 1 5cm
Internal radii of hollow cylinder 1 5cm
External radii of hollow cylinder 2 5cm
27. Prove that the surface area of a sphere is equal to the curved surface area of the
circumference cylinder__?
Sol:
Let radius of a sphere be r
Curved surface area of sphere 4 r 2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
S1 4 r 2
Let radius of cylinder be ' r ' cm
Height of cylinder be '2r ' cm
Curved surface area of cylinder 2 rh
S2 2 r 2r 4 r 2
S1 and S 2 are equal. Hence proved
So curved surface area of sphere = surface area of cylinder
28. The diameter of a metallic sphere is equal to 9cm. it is melted and drawn into a long wire
of diameter 2mm having uniform cross-section. Find the length of the wire?
Sol:
Given diameter of a sphere (d) 9cm
9
Radius (r) 4 5cm
2
4
Volume of a sphere r 3
3
4
V1 4 53 381 70cm3 ……(1)
3
Since metallic sphere is melted and made into a cylindrical wire
Volume of a cylinder r 2 h
2mm
Given radius of cylindrical wire r
2
1mm 0 1cm
V2 0 1 h
2
……(2)
Equating (1) and (2)
V1 V2
381 703 0 1 h
2
h 12150cm
Length of wire (h) 12150cm
29. An iron spherical ball has been melted and recast into smaller balls of equal size. If the
1
radius of each of the smaller balls is 4 of the radius of the original ball, how many such
balls are made? Compare the surface area, of all the smaller balls combined together with
that of the original ball.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
1
Given that radius of each of smaller ball Radius of original ball.
4
Let radius of smaller ball be r.
Radius of bigger ball be 4r
4
Volume of big spherical ball r 3 r 4r
3
4
V1 4r
3
……(1)
3
4
Volume of each small ball r 3
3
4
V2 r 3 ……(2)
3
Let no of balls be ' n '
V
n 1
V2
4
4r
3
n 3
4
r
3
3
n 43 64
No of small balls 64
Curved surface area of sphere 4 r 2
Surface area of big ball S1 4 4r
2
…….(3)
Surface area of each small ball S1 4 r 2
Total surface area of 64 small balls
S2 64 4 r 2 …….(4)
By combining (3) and (4)
S
2 4
3
S2 4s
Total surface area of small balls is equal to 4 times surface area of big ball.
30. A tent of height 77dm is in the form a right circular cylinder of diameter 36m and height
44dm surmounted by a right circular cone. Find the cost of canvas at Rs.3.50 per m2 ?
Sol:
Given that height of a tent = 77dm
Height of cone 44dm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
31. Metal spheres each of radius 2cm are packed into a rectangular box of internal dimension
16cm 8cm 8cm when 16 spheres are packed the box is filled with preservative liquid.
Find volume of this liquid?
Sol:
Given radius of metal spheres 2cm
4
Volume of sphere v r 3
3
4
So volume of each metallic sphere 2 cm3
3
3
4
Total volume of 16 spheres v1 16 2 cm3
3
…(1)
3
Volume of rectangular box lbh
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
V2 16 8 8cm3 …(2)
Subtracting (2) – (1) we get volume of liquid
V2 V1 Volume off liquid
4
16 8 8 2 16
3
3
1024 536 16 488cm3
Hence volume of liquid 488cm3
32. The largest sphere is to be curved out of a right circular of radius 7cm and height 14cm.
find volume of sphere?
Sol:
Given radius of cylinder r 7cm
Height of cylinder h 14cm
Largest sphere is curved out from cylinder
Thus diameter of sphere = diameter of cylinder
Diameter of sphere d 2 7 14cm
4
Volume of a sphere r 3
3
4
7
3
3
1372
3
1436 75cm3
Volume of sphere 1436 75cm3
33. A copper sphere of radius 3cm is melted and recast into a right circular cone of height 3cm.
find radius of base of cone?
Sol:
Given radius of sphere 3cm
4
Volume of a sphere r 3
3
4
33 cm3 …..(1)
3
Given sphere is melted and recast into a right circular cone
Given height of circular cone 3cm.
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
1
Volume of right circular cone r 2 h
3
r
2
3cm2 …..(1)
3
Equating 1 and 2 we get
4 1
33 r 3
2
3 3
4
33
r
2 3
r 36cm
2
r 6cm
Radius of base of cone r 6cm
34. A vessel in the shape of cuboid contains some water. If these identical spheres are
immersed in the water, the level of water is increased by 2cm. if the area of base of cuboid
is 160cm2 and its height 12cm, determine radius of any of spheres?
Sol:
Given that area of cuboid 160cm2
Level of water increased in vessel 2cm
Volume of a vessel 160 2cm3 ……(1)
4
Volume of each sphere r 3cm3
3
4
Total volume of 3 spheres 3 r 3cm3 ……(2)
3
Equating (1) and (2) ( Volumes are equal V1 V2 )
4
160 2 3 r 3
3
160 2
r3
4
3
3
320
r3
4
r 2 94cm
Radius of sphere 2 94cm
35. A copper rod of diameter 1cm and length 8cm is drawn into a wire of length 18m of
uniform thickness. Find thickness of wire?
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
Sol:
Given diameter of copper rod d1 1cm
1
Radius r1 0 5cm
2
Length of copper rod h1 8cm
V1 0 5 8cm3
2
……(1)
V2 r22 h2
Length of wire h2 18m 1800cm
V2 r22 1800 cm3 ..…..(2)
Equating (1) and (2)
V1 V2
0 5 8 r22 1800
2
0 5 8 2
2
r2
1800
r2 0 033cm
Radius thickness of wire 0 033cm.
36. The diameters of internal and external surfaces of hollow spherical shell are 10cm and 6cm
2
respectively. If it is melted and recast into a solid cylinder of length of 2 3 cm, find the
diameter of the cylinder.
Sol:
Given diameter of internal surfaces of a hollow spherical shell 10cm
10
Radius r 5cm.
2
6
External radii R 3cm
2
4
Volume of a spherica shell hollow R 2 r 2
3
4
V1 52 32 cm3
3
………(1)
8
Given length of solid cylinder h
3
Let radius of solid cylinder be ' r '
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
Volume of a cylinder r 2 h
8
V2 r 2 cm3 ………(2)
3
V1 V2
Equating (1) and (2)
4 8
25 9 r 2
3 3
4
16
3 r2
8
3
r 49cm
2
r 7cm
d 2r 14cm
Diameter of cylinder 14cm
37. A right angled triangle whose sides are 3 cm, 4 cm and 5 cm is revolved about the sides
containing the right angle in two days. Find the difference in volumes of the two cones so
formed. Also, find their curved surfaces.
Sol:
(i) Given that radius of cone r1 4cm
Height of cone h1 3cm
Slant height of cone l1 5cm
1
Volume of cone V1 r12 h1
3
1
4 3 16 cm3
2
3
(ii) Given radius of second cone r2 3cm
Height of cone h2 4cm
Slant height of cone l2 5cm
1
Volume of cone V2 r22 h2
3
1
3 4 12 cm3
2
3
Difference in volumes of two cones V V1 V2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
V 16 12
V 4 cm3
Curved surface area of first cone S1 r1l1
S1 4 5 20 cm 2
Curved surface area of first cone S1 r1l1
S1 4 5 20 cm 2
Curved surface area of second cone S2 r2l2
S1 3 5 15 cm 2
S1 20 cm2 S2 15 cm2
38. How many coins 1 75cm in diameter and 2mm thick must be melted to form a cuboid
11cm 10cm 75cm ___?
Sol:
Given that dimensions of a cuboid 11cm 10cm 75cm
So its volume V1 11cm 10cm 7cm
1110 7cm3 …….(1)
Given diameter (d) 1 75cm
d 1 75
Radius r 0 875cm
2 2
Thickness h 2mm 0 2cm
Volume of a cylinder r 2 h
V2 0 875 0 2 cm3
2
…….(2)
V1 V2 n
Since volume of a cuboid is equal to sum of n volume of ‘n’ coins
V
n 1
V2
n no of coins
1110 7
n
0 875 0 2
2
n 1600
No of coins n 1600,
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
39. A well with inner radius 4m is dug 14m deep earth taken out of it has been spread evenly
all around a width of 3m it to form an embankment. Find the height of the embankment?
Sol:
Given that inner radius of a well a 4m
Depth of a well h 14m
Volume of a cylinder r 2 h
V1 4 14cm3
2
……….(1)
Given well is spread evenly to form an embankment
Width of an embankment 3m
Outer radii of a well (R) 4 3 7m.
Volume of a hollow cylinder R 2 r 2 hm3
V2 7 2 42 hm3 ………..(2)
Equating (1) and (2)
V1 V2
4 14 49 16 h
2
4 14
2
h
33
h 6 78m
40. Water in a canal 1.5m wide and 6m deep is flowering with a speed of 10km / hr. how much
area will it irrigate in 30 minutes if 8cm of standing water is desired?
Sol:
Given that water is flowering with a speed 10km / hr
30
In 30 minutes length of flowering standing water 10 km
60
5km 5000m.
Volume of flowering water in 30 minutes
V 5000 width depth m3
Given width of canal 1 5m
Depth of canal 6m
V 5000 1 5 6m3
V 45000m3
45000
Irrigating area in 30 minutes if 8cm of standing water is desired
0 08
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
45000
562500m2
0 08
Irrigated area in 30min utes 562500m2
41. A farmer runs a pipe of internal diameter 20 cm from the canal into a cylindrical tank in his
field which is 10 m in diameter and 2 m deep. If water flows through the pipe at the rate of
3 km/h, in how much time will the tank be filled?
Sol:
9
𝑚
8
42. A well of diameter 3 m is dug 14 m deep. The earth taken out of it has been spread evenly
all around it to a width of 4 m to form an embankment. Find the height of the embankment.
Sol:
Given diameter of well = 3m
3
Radius of well m 4
2
Depth of well b 14m
With of embankment 4m
3 11
Radius of outer surface of embankment 4 m
2 2
Let height of embankment hm
Volume of embankment V1 r22 r12 h
( it is viewed as a hollow cylinder)
2
11 2 3
V1 h m3 …..(1)
2 2
Volume of earth dugout V2 r12 h
2
3
V2 14 m3 …..(2)
2
Given that volumes (1) and (2) are equal
So V1 V2
11 2 3 2 3
2
h 14
2 2 2
121 9 9
h 14
4 4 4
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
9
h m
8
9
Height of embankment h m.
8
43. The surface area of a solid metallic sphere is 616 cm2. It is melted and recast into a cone of
22
height 28 cm. Find the diameter of the base of the cone so formed (Use it = )
7
Sol:
Given height of cone h 28cm
Given surface area of Sphere 616cm2
We know surface area of sphere 4 r 2
4 r 2 616
616 7
r2
4 22
r 49
2
r 7cm
Radius of sphere r 7cm
Let r1 be radius of cone
Given volume of cone Volume of sphere
1
Volume of cone r 2 h
3
1
V1 r1 28cm3
2
………..(1)
3
4
Volume of sphere V2 r 3
3
4
V2 7 cm3
3
………..(1)
3
(1) = (2) V1 V2
1 4
r1 28 7
2 3
3 3
r1 49
2
r1 7cm
Radius of cone r1 7cm
Diameter of base of cone d1 2 7 14cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
44. The difference between the outer and inner curved surface areas of a hollow right circular
cylinder 14cm long is 88cm2 . If the volume of metal used in making cylinder is 176cm3
find outer and inner diameters of the cylinder?
Sol:
Given height of a hollow cylinder 14cm
Let internal and external radii of hollow
Cylinder be ‘r’ an ‘R’
Given that difference between inner and outer curved surface 88cm2
Curved surface area of hollow cylinder 2 R r h
88 2 R 0 h
88 2 R r 14
R r 1 ……..(1)
Volume of hollow cylinder R 2 r 2 h cm3
R 2
r2 14 176
R2 r 2 4
R r R r 4
R4 4 ……..(2)
By using (1) and (2) equations and solving we get
R r 1 ..(1)
R r 4 ..(2)
2R 5
5
R 2 5cm
2
Substituting ‘R’ value in (1)
R r 1
25 r 1
2 5 1 r
r 1 5cm
External radii of hollow cylinder R 2 5cm
Internal radii of hollow cylinder r 1 5cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
1
45. The volume of a hemisphere is 2425 cm3 . Find its curved surface area?
2
Sol:
1
Given that volume of a hemisphere 2424 cm3
2
2
Volume of a hemisphere r 3
3
2 1
r 3 2425
3 2
2 4841
r3
3 2
4851 3
r3
2 2
4851 3
r3
4
3
r
r 10 50cm
Radius of hemisphere 10 5cm
Curved surface area of hemisphere 2 r 2
2 10 5
2
692 72
693xm2
curved surface area off hemisphere 693cm2
46. A cylindrical bucket 32cm high and with radius of base 18cm is filled with sand. This
bucket is emptied out on the ground and a conical heap of sand is formed. If the height of
the conical heap of sand is formed. If the height of the conical heap is 24cm. find the radius
and slant height of the heap?
Sol:
Given that height of cylindrical bucket h 32cm
Radius r 18cm
Volume of cylinder r 2 h
22
18 32cm3
2
………(1)
7
Given height of conical heap 24cm
Let radius of conical heap be r1
Slant height of conical heap be l1
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
7 7
18
2
32
r12
8
r1 1296
2
r1 36cm
Radius of conical heap is 36cm
Substituting r1 in (2)
r12 l12 24
2
Exercise 16.2
47. A tent is in the form of a right circular cylinder surmounted by a cone. The diameter of
cylinder is 24 m. The height of the cylindrical portion is 11 m while the vertex of the cone
is 16 m above the ground. Find the area of canvas required for the tent.
Sol:
Given diameter of cylinder 24m
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
24
Radius r 12m
2
Given height of cylindrical part h1 11m
Height of cone part h2 5m
Vertex of cone above ground 11 5 16m
Curved surface area of cone S1 rl
22
12 l
7
Let l be slant height of cone
l r 2 h22
l 122 52 13m
l 13m
22
Curved surface area of cone 5 12 13m2 ……….(1)
7
Curved surface area of cylinder S2 2 rh
S2 2 12 11 m2 ………..(2)
To find area of canvas required for tent
S S1 S 2 1 2
22
S 12 13 2 12 11
7
S 490 829 38
S 1320m2
Total canvas required for tent S 1320m2
48. A rocket is in the form of a circular cylinder closed at the lower end with a cone of the
same radius attached to the top. The cylinder is of radius 2 5m and height 21m and the
cone has a slant height 8m. Calculate total surface area and volume of the rocket?
Sol:
Given radius of cylinder a 2 5m
Height of cylinder h 21m
Slant height of cylinder l 8m
Curved surface area of cone S1 rl
S1 2 5 8 cm2 ………(1)
Curbed surface area of a cone 2 rh r 2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
S 2 2 2 5 21 2 5 cm 2
2
……….(2)
Total curved surface area = (1) + (2)
S S1 S2
S 2 5 8 2 2 5 21 2 5
2
S 62 831 329 86 19 63
S 412 3m2
Total curved surface area 412 3m2
1
Volume of a cone r 2 h
3
1
V1 2 5 h cm3
2
………...(3)
3
Let ‘h’ be height of cone
l 2 r 2 h2
l 2 r 2 h2
h l2 r2
h 82 252
h 23 685m
Subtracting ‘h’ value in (3)
1
Volume of a cone V1 2 5 23 685 cm2
2
………(4)
3
Volume of a cylinder V2 r 2 h
2 5 21m3
2
………..(5)
Total volume = (4) + (5)
V V1 V2
1
V 2 5 23 685 2 5 1
2 2
3
V 461 84m2
Total volume V 461 84m 2
49. A tent of height 77 dm is in the form of a right circular cylinder of diameter 36 m and
height 44 dm surmounted by a right circular cone. Find the cost of the canvas at Rs. 350
22
per m2 (Use it = ).
7
Sol:
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
50. A toy is in the form of a cone surmounted on a hemisphere. The diameter of the base and
the height of cone are 6cm and 4cm. determine surface area of toy?
Sol:
Given height of cone h 4cm
Diameter of cone d 6cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
6
Radius (r) 3cm
2
51. A solid is in the form of a right circular cylinder, with a hemisphere at one end and a cone
at the other end. The radius of the common base is 3.5 cm and the heights of the cylindrical
and conical portions are 10 cm. and 6 cm, respectively. Find the total surface area of the
22
solid. (Use n = )
7
Sol:
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
l 3 5 62
2
l 48 25cm
Curved surface area of cone S1 rl
3 5 48 25
76 408cm2
Curved surface area of cylinder S2 2 rh
2 3 5 10
220cm2
Curved surface area of hemisphere S S1 S2 S3
76 408 220 77
373 408cm2
Total surface area of solid S 373 408cm2
Cost of canvas per m 2 Rs 3 50
Cost of canvas for 1532 46m2 1532 46 3 50
5363 61Rs
Cost of canvas required for tent Rs 5363 61 pr
52. A toy is in the shape of a right circular cylinder with a hemisphere on one end and a cone
on the other. The radius and height of the cylindrical part are 5 cm and 13 cm respectively.
The radii of the hemispherical and conical parts are the same as that of the cylindrical part.
Find the surface area of the toy if the total height of the toy is 30 cm.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
S1 2 2 13
S1 408 2cm2
Curved surface area of cone S 2 rl
Let l be slant height of cone
l r 2 h2
h 30 13 5 12cn
l 122 52 13cm
l 13cm
Curved surface area of cone S2 513
204 1cm2
Curved surface area of hemisphere S3 2 r 2
2 5
2
2 25 50 157cm 2
S3 157cm2
Total curved surface area S S1 S2 S3
S 408 2 204 1 157
S 769 3cm2
Surface area of toy S 769.3cm 2
53. A cylindrical tube of radius 5cm and length 9 8cm is full of water. A solid in form of a
right circular cone mounted on a hemisphere is immersed in tube. If radius of hemisphere is
immersed in tube if the radius of hemisphere is 3 5cm and height of the cone outside
hemisphere is 5cm. find volume of water left in the tube?
Sol:
Given radius of cylindrical tube r 5cm.
Height of cylindrical tube h 9 8cm
Volume of cylinder r 2 h
V1 5 9 8 770cm3
2
2
3 5 89 79cm3
3
3
1
Volume of cone r 2 h
3
3 5 5 64 14cm3
2
3
Volume of cone + volume of hemisphere V2 39 79 64 14 154cm3
54. A circular tent has cylindrical shape surmounted by a conical roof. The radius of cylindrical
base is 20m. The height of cylindrical and conical portions are 4 2m and 2 1m. Find the
volume of the tent?
Sol:
Given radius of cylindrical base 20m
Height of cylindrical part h 4 2m.
Volume of cylindrical r 2 h1
V1 20 4 2 5280m3
2
1
Volume of cone r 2 h2
3
Height of conical part h2 2 1m
V2 20 2 1 880m3
2
3
Volume of tent v V1 V2
V 5280 880
V 6160m3
Volume of tent v V1 V2
V 5280 880
V 6160m3
Volume of tent v 6160m3
55. A petrol tank is a cylinder of base diameter 21cm and length 18cm fitted with conical ends
each of axis 9cm. determine capacity of the tank?
Sol:
Given base diameter of cylinder 21cm
21
Radius r 11 5cm
2
Height of cylindrical part h 18cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
1
Volume of cone r 2 h2 ( 2 conical end)
3
1
V2 11 5 9 2
2
3
1
V2 1190 25 2492 25cm3
3
Volume of tank = volume of cylinder + volume of cone
V V1 V2
V 7474 77 2492 85
V 9966 36cm3
Volume of water left in tube = Volume of cylinder – Volume of hemisphere and cone
V V1 V2
770 154
616cm3
Volume of water left in tube 616cm3
56. A conical hole is drilled in a circular cylinder of height 12cm and base radius 5cm. The
height and base radius of the cone are also the same. Find the whole surface and volume of
the remaining cylinder?
Sol:
l 13cm
Height and base radius of cone and cylinder are same
Total surface area of remaining part s 2 rh r 2 rl
2 5 12 5 5 13
2
3
V 200 cm 3
57. A tent is in form of a cylinder of diameter 20m and height 2 5m surmounted by a cone of
equal base and height 7 5m. Find capacity of tent and cost of canvas at Rs 100per square
meter?
Sol:
20
Given radius of cylinder r 10m
2
Height of a cylinder h1 2 5m
Height of cone h2 7 5m
Let ‘l’ be slant height of cone
l r 2 h22
l 102 7 52
l 12 5m
Volume of cylinder V1 r 2 h
V1 10 2 5
2
……..(1)
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
1
Volume of cone V2 r 2 h2
3
1
10 7 5 m3
2
……..(2)
3
Total capacity of tent = (1) + (2)
V V1 V2
1
V 10 2 5 10 7 5
2 2
3
V 250 250
V 500 cm3
Total capacity of tent 500 cm2
58. A boiler is in the form of a cylinder 2m long with hemispherical ends each of 2m diameter.
Find the volume of the boiler?
Sol:
2
V 2 1 1 2
2 2
3
220 3
V m
21
220 3
Volumes of boiler m
21
59. A vessel is a hollow cylinder fitted with a hemispherical bottom of the same base. The
14
depth of cylinder is m and internal surface area of the solid?
3
Sol:
3 5
Given radius of hemisphere r 1 75m
2
14
Height of cylinder h m
3
Volume of cylinder r h2
2 14
1 75 cm3 ……..(1)
3
2
Volume of hemisphere r 3
3
2
1 75 cm3
3
……..(2)
3
Volume of vessel = (1) + (2)
V V1 V2
2
V r 2h r 3
3
2 14 2
V 1 75 1 75
2
3 3
V 56m3
Volumes of vessel v 56m3
Internal surface area of solid s 2 rh 2 r 2
S = Surface area of cylinder + surface are of hemisphere
14
S = 2 1 75 2 1 75
2
3
S 70 51m2
Internal surface area of solid s 70 51m 2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
60. A solid is composed of a cylinder with hemispherical ends. If the whole length of the solid
is 104cm and radius of each of hemispherical ends is 7cm. find the cost of polishing its
surface at the rate of Rs 10 per dm2 ?
Sol:
Given radius of hemispherical ends 7cm
Height of body h 2r 104cm.
Curved surface area of cylinder 2 rh
2 7 h ………(1)
h 2 x 104
h 104 2 r
h 90cm
Substitute ‘h’ value in (1)
Curved surface area of cylinder 2 7 90
3948 40cm2 ………(2)
Curved surface area of 2 hemisphere 2 2 r 2
2 2 72
615 75cm3 ………(3)
Total curved surface area = (2) + (3)
3958 40 615 75 4574 15cm2 45 74dm2
Cost of polishing for 1dm2 Rs10
Cost of polishing for 45 74dm2 45 74 10
Rs 457 4
61. A cylindrical vessel of diameter 14cm and height 42cm is fixed symmetrically inside a
similar vessel of diameter 16cm and height 42cm. The total space between two vessels is
filled with cork dust for heat insulation purpose. How many cubic cms of cork dust will be
required?
Sol:
Given height of cylindrical vessel h 42cm
14
Inner radius of a vessel r1 cm 7cm
2
16
Outer radius of a vessel r2 8cm
2
Volume of a cylinder r2 r12 h
2
82 7 2 42
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
64 49 42
15 42
630
1980cm3
Volume of a vessel 1980cm2
62. A cylindrical road solar made of iron is 1m long its internal diameter is 54cm and thickness
of the iron sheet used in making roller is 9cm. Find the mass of roller if 1cm3 of iron has
7 8gm mas?
Sol:
63. A vessel in from of a hollow hemisphere mounted by a hollow cylinder. The diameter of
hemisphere is 14cm and total height of vessel is 13cm. find the inner surface area of
vessel?
Sol:
Given radius of hemisphere and cylinder (r)
14
7cm
2
Given total height of vessel 13cm
h r 13cm
Inner surface area of vessel 2 r h r
2 7 13
182
572cm2
Inner surface area of vessel 572cm2
64. A toy is in the form of a cone of radius 3 5cm mounted on a hemisphere of same radius.
The total height of toy is 15 5cm. Find the total surface area of toy?
Sol:
S2 76 96cm2 ……(2)
Total surface of toy = (1) + (2)
S S1 S2
S 181 94 76 96
S 208 90
S 209cm2
Total surface area of toy 209cm2
65. The difference between outside and inside surface areas of cylindrical metallic pipe 14cm
long is 44m2 . If pipe is made of 99cm3 of metal. Find outer and inner radii of pipe?
Sol:
Let inner radius of pipe be r1
Radius of outer cylinder be r2
Length of cylinder h 14cm.
Surface area of hollow cylinder 2 h r2 r1
Given surface area of cylinder 44m2
66. A radius circular cylinder bring having diameter 12cm and height 15cm is full ice-cream.
The ice-cream is to be filled in cones of height 12cm and diameter 6cm having a
hemisphere shape on top find the number of such cones which can be filled with ice-
cream?
Sol:
12
Given radius of cylinder r1 6cm
2
6
Given radius of hemisphere r2 3cm.
2
Given height of cylinder h 15cm..
Height of cones l 12cm.
Volume of cylinder r12 h
6 15 cm3
2
……(1)
Volume of each cone = volume of cone + volume of hemisphere
1 2
r22l r23
3 3
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
1 2
3 12 3 cm3
2 3
……..(2)
3 3
Let number of cones be ‘n’
n(Volume of each cone) = volume of cylinder
1 2 3
n 3 12 3 6 15
2 2
3 3
6 15
2
n
1 2
3 12 3
2 3
3 3
540
n 10
5
2 h r2 r1 44
2 14 r2 r1 44
28 r2 r1 44
44
r2 r1
28
1
r2 r1 ………..(1)
2
Given volume of a hollow cylinder 99cm3
Volume of a hollow cylinder h r22 r12
h r22 r12 99
14 r22 r12 99
14 r1 r2 r2 r1 99
14 r1 r2 1 99
14 r1 r2 99
9
r1 r2 ………..(2)
2
Equating (1) and (2) equations we get
9
r1 r2
2
1
r1 r2
2
2r2 5
5
r2 cm.
2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
67. A solid iron pole having cylindrical portion 110cm high and of base diameter 12cm is
surmounted by a cone 9cm high. Find the mass of the pole given that the mass of 1cm3 of
iron is 8 gm ?
Sol:
12
Given radius of cylindrical part r 6cm
2
Height of cylinder h 110cm
Length of cone l 9cm
Volume of cylinder r 2 h
V1 0 110cm3
2
………(1)
1
Volume of cone r 2l
3
1
V2 6 9 108 cm3
2
………(2)
3
Volume of pole = (1) + (2)
V V1 V2
V 6 110 108
2
V 12785 14cm3
Given mass of 1cm3 of iron 8gm
Mass of 12785 14cm3 of iron 12785 14 8
10228112
102 2kg
Mass of pole for 12785 14cm3 of iron is 102 2kg
68. A solid toy is in the form of a hemisphere surmounted by a right circular cone. Height of
the cone is 2 cm and the diameter of the base is 4 cm. If a right circular cylinder
circumscribes the toy, find how much more space it will cover.
Sol:
4
Given radius of cone, cylinder and hemisphere r 2cm
2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
3
4 2cm3 ……….(2)
3
2
Volume of hemisphere r 3
3
2
2
3
3
2
8 cm3 ………..(3)
3
1 2
So remaining volume of cylinder when toy is inserted to it r 2 h r 2l r 3
3 3
= (1) – ((2) + (3))
2
2 4 8 8
2
3 3
2
16 4 8 16 8 8 cm3
3
So remaining volume of cylinder when toy is inserted to it 8 cm3
69. A solid consisting of a right circular cone of height 120cm and radius 60cm is placed
upright in right circular cylinder full of water such that it touches bottoms. Find the volume
of water left in the cylinder. If radius of cylinder is 60cm and its height is 180cm ?
Sol:
Given radius of circular cone a 60cm
Height of circular cone b 120cm.
1
Volume of a cone r 2l
3
1
60 120 cm3
2
…………(1)
3
2
Volume of hemisphere r 3
3
Given radius of hemisphere 60cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
2
60 cm3
2
………….(2)
3
Given radius of cylinder 60cm
Height of cylinder h 180cm.
Volume of cylinder r 2 h
60 180cm3
2
……………(3)
Volume of water left in cylinder = (3) – ((1) + (2))
1 2
60 120 60 60 180
3 3 2
3 3
113 1cm3 1131m3
Volume of water left in cylinder 1131m3
70. A cylindrical vessel with internal diameter 10cm and height 10 5cm is full of water. A
solid cone of base diameter 7cm and height 6cm is completely immersed in water. Find
value of water (i) displaced out of the cylinder (ii) left in the cylinder?
Sol:
10
Given internal radius r1 5cm
2
Height of cylindrical vessel h 10 5cm
7
Outer radius of cylindrical vessel l2 3 5cm
2
Length of cone l 6cm.
(i) Volume of water displaced = volume of cone
1
Volume of cone r22l
3
1
3 52 6 76 9cm3
3
77cm3
Volume of water displaced 77cm3
Volume of cylinder r12 h 5 10 5
2
824 6
825cm2
(ii) Volume of water left in cylinder = volume of
Cylinder – volume of cone
825 77 748cm3
Volume of water left in cylinder 748cm3
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
71. A hemispherical depression is cut from one face of a cubical wooden block of edge 21cm
such that the diameter of hemisphere is equal to the edge of cube determine the volume and
total surface area of the remaining block?
Sol:
Given edge of wooden block a 21cm
Given diameter of hemisphere = edge of cube
21
Radius 10 5cm
2
Volume of remaining block = volume of box – volume of hemisphere
2
a3 r 3
3
2
2 10 5
3 3
3
6835 5cm3
Surface area of box 6a 2 ……..(1)
Curved surface area of hemisphere 2 r 2
..……(2)
Area of base of hemisphere r 2
……..(3)
So remaining surface area of box = (1) – (2) + (3)
6a 2 r 2 2 r 2
6 21 10 5 2 10 5
2 2
2992 5cm2
Remaining surface area of box 2992 5cm2
Volume of remaining block 6835 5cm3
72. A tag is in the form of a hemisphere surmounted by a right circular cone of same base
radius as that of the hemisphere. If the radius of the base of cone is 21cm and its volume is
2
of volume of hemisphere calculate height of cone and surface area of toy?
3
Sol:
Radius r 21cm
2
Given that volume of cone Volume of hemisphere
3
1
Volume of cone r 2 h
3
2
Volume of hemisphere r 3
3
1 22
So r 2 h r 3
3 33
1 22 3
21 h 21
2
3 33
4 21 3
h
4 21
4
h 21 28cm
3
S 2 2 21 cm 2
2
…………..(2)
S rl 2 r 2
S 5082cm2
73. A solid is in the shape of a cone surmounted on hemisphere the radius of each of them is
being 3 5cm and total height of solid is 9 5cm . Find volume of the solid?
Sol:
3 3
V 76 96 89 79 166 75cm3
Volume of solid v 166 75cm3
Exercise 16.3
1. A bucket has top and bottom diameters of 40 cm and 20 cm respectively. Find the volume of
the bucket if its depth is 12 cm. Also, find the cost of tin sheet used for making the bucket at
the rate of Rs 1.20 per dm2 . (Use 𝜋 = 3.14)
Sol:
Given diameter to top of bucket = 40cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
40
Radius r1 20cm
2
Depth of a bucket h 12cm
1
Volume of a bucket r12 r22 r1r2 h
3
3
202 102 20 10
12
1
8800cm3 .
Let ‘l’ be slant height of bucket
l r1 r2 h2
2
l 20 10 122
2
l 2 61 15 620cm
Total surface area of bucket r1 r2 l r22
20 10 15 620 10
2
1320 61 2200 2
cm
7
1320 61 2200 2
dm 17 87dm2
7 100
Given that cost of tin sheet used for making bucket per dm2 Rs1.20
So total cost for 17 87dm2 1 20 17 87
21 40 Rs.
Cost of tin sheet for 17 87dm2 Rs 2140 ps
2. A frustum of a right circular cone has a diameter of base 20cm, of top 12cm and height
3cm. find the area of its whole surface and volume?
Sol:
Given base diameter of cone d1 20cm
20
Radius r1 10cm
2
Top diameter of cone d 2 12cm
12
Radius r2 6cm
2
Height of cone h 3cm
Volume of frustum right circular cone
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
1
r12 r22 r1r2 h
3
102 62 10 6 3
1
3
616cm3
Let ‘l’ be slant height of cone
l r1 r2 h2
2
l 10 6 32
2
l 16 9 25cm 5cm
Slant height of cone l 5cm
Total surface area of cone r1 r2 l r12 r22
10 6 5 10 6
2 2
80 100 36
216 678 85cm 2
Total surface area of cone 678 85cm2
3. The slant height of the frustum of a cone is 4cm and perimeters of it circular ends are 18cm
and 6cm. find curved surface of the frustum?
Sol:
Given slant height of cone r 4cm
Let radii of top and bottom circles be r1 and r2
Given perimeters of its ends as 18cm and 6cm
2 r1 18cm
r1 9cm ……(1)
2 r2 6cm
r2 3cm ……(2)
Curved surface area of frustum cone r1 r2 l
r1 r2 l
r1 r2 l
9 3 4
12 4 48cm 2
Curved surface area of frustum cone 48cm2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
4. The perimeters of the ends of a frustum of a right circular cone are 44 cm and 33 cm. If the
height of the frustum be 16 cm, find its volume, the slant surface and the total surface.
Sol:
Given perimeters of ends of frustum right circular cone are 44cm an 33cm
Height of frustum cone 16cm
Perimeter 2 r
2 r1 44
r1 7cm
2 r2 33
21
r2 5 25cm
4
Let slant height of frustum right circular cone be l
l r1 r2 h2
2
l 7 5 25 162 cm
2
l 16 1cm
Slant height of frustum cone 16 1cm
Curved surface area of frustum cone r1 r2 l
7 5 25 16 1
C.S.A of cone 619 65cm2
1
Volume of a cone r12 r22 r1r2 h
3
1
72 5 25 7 5 25 16
3
2
1898 56cm3
Volume of a cone 1898 56 cm3
Total surface area of frustum cone r1 r2 l r12 r22
7 5 25 16 1 7 2 5 252
860 27cm2
Total surface area of frustum cone 860 27cm2
5. If the radii of circular ends of a conical bucket which is 45cm high be 28cm and 7cm. find
the capacity of the bucket?
Sol:
Given height of conical bucket 45cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
6. The height of a cone is 20cm. A small cone is cut off from the top by a plane parallel to the
1
base. If its volumes be of the volume of the original cone, determine at what height
25
above base the section is made
Sol:
4 400
VO
3
25
VO 64
3
VO 4
Height at which section is made 20 4 16cm.
7. If the radii of circular ends of a bucket 24cm high are 5cm and 15cm. find surface area of
bucket?
Sol:
Given height of a bucket R 24cm
Radius of circular ends of bucket 5cm and 15cm
r1 5cm ; r2 15cm
Let ' l ' be slant height of bucket
l r1 r2 h2
2
l 15 5 242
2
20 26 15
2
520 225
745 cm2
Curved surface area of bucket 745 cm2
8. The radii of circular bases of a frustum of a right circular cone are 12cm and 3cm and
height is 12cm. find the total surface area volume of frustum?
Sol:
Let slant height of frustum cone be ‘l’
Given height of frustum cone 12cm
Radii of a frustum cone are 12cm and 23cm
r1 12cm r2 3cm
l r1 r2 h2
2
l 12 3 122
2
l 81 144 15cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
l 15cm
Total surface area of cone r1 r2 l r12 r22
12 315 12 3
2 2
9. A tent consists of a frustum of a cone copped by a cone. If radii of ends of frustum be 13m
and 7m the height of frustum be 8m and slant height of thee conical cap bee 12m. find
canvas required for tent?
Sol:
Given height of frustum h 8m
Radii of frustum cone are 13m and 7m
r1 13m r2 7cm
Let ‘l’ be slant height of frustum cone
l r1 r2 h2
2
l 13 7 82 36 64
2
l 10m
Curved surface area of friction S1 r1 r2 l
13 7 10
200 m2
C.S.A of frustum S1 200 m 2
Given slant height of conical cap = 12m
Base radius of upper cap cone 7m
Curved surface area of upper cap cone S 2 rl
7 12 264m2
Total canvas required for tent S S1 S2
S 200 264 892 57m2
Total canvas 892 57m2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
10. A reservoir in form of frustum of a right circular contains 44 107 liters off water which
fills it completely. The radii of bottom and top of reservoir are 50m and 100m. find depth
of water and lateral surface area of reservoir?
Sol:
Let depth of frustum cone be h
1
Volume of first cone V r12 r22 r1r2 h
3
r1 50m r2 100m
1 22
V 502 1002 50 100 h
3 7
1 22
V 2500 1000 5000 h …(1)
3 7
Volumes of reservoir 44 107 liters ….(2)
Equating (1) and (2)
1
2500 h 44 102
3
h 24
Let ‘l’ be slant height of cone
l r1 r2 h2
2
l 55 461m
Lateral surface area of reservoir
S r1 r2 l
50 100 55 461
1500 55 461 26145 225m2
Lateral surface area of reservoir 26145 225m2
1
Volume of frustum cone r12 r22 r1r2 h
3
1
302 182 30 18 9
3
5292 cm3
Volume 5292 cm3
Total surface area of frustum cone =
r1 r2 l r12 r22
30 18 15 30 18
2 2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
48 15 30 18
2 2
720 900 324
1944 cm2
Total surface area 1944 cm2
11. A metallic right circular cone 20cm high and whose vertical angle is 90 is cut into two
parts at the middle point of its axis by a plane parallel to base. If frustum so obtained bee
1
drawn into a wire of diameter cm. find length of the wire?
16
Sol:
12. A bucket is in the form of a frustum of a cone with a capacity of 12308.8 cm3 of water.
The radii of the top and bottom circular ends are 20 cm and 12 cm respectively. Find the
height of the bucket and the area of the metal sheet used in its making. (Use 𝜋 = 3.14).
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
Sol:
Given radii of top circular ends r1 20cm
Radii of bottom circular end of bucket r2 12cm
Let height of bucket be ‘h’
1
Volume of frustum cone r12 r22 r1r2 h
3
1
202 122 20 12 h
3
784
hcm3 ……….(1)
3
Given capacity/volume of bucket 123308 8cm3 ……….(2)
Equating (1) and (2)
784
h 12308 8
3
12308 8 3
h
784
h 15cm
Height of bucket h 15cm
Let ‘l’ be slant height of bucket
l 2 r1 r2 h 2
2
l r1 r2 h2
2
l 20 2 152 64 225
2
l 17cm
Length of bucket/ slant height of
Bucket l 17cm
Curved surface area of bucket r1 r2 l r22
20 12 17 12
2
32 17 12
2
13. A bucket made of aluminum sheet is of height 20cm and its upper and lower ends are of
radius 25cm an 10cm, find cost of making bucket if the aluminum sheet costs Rs 70 per
100cm2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
Sol:
Given height of bucket h 20cm
Upper radius of bucket r1 25cm
Lower radius of bucket r2 10cm
Let ‘l’ be slant height of bucket
l r1 r2 h2
2
l 25m
Slant height of bucket (l) 25cm
Curved surface area of bucket r1 r2 l r22
25 10 25 10
2
35 25 100 975
C.S.A 3061 5cm2
Curved surface area 3061 5cm2
Cost of making bucket per 100cm2 Rs70
3061 5
Cost of making bucket per 3061 5cm2 70
100
Rs 2143 05
Total cost for 3061 5cm2 Rs 2143 05 per
14. Radii of circular ends of a solid frustum off a cone re 33cm and 27cm and its slant height
are 10cm. find its total surface area?
Sol:
Given slant height of frustum cone 10cm
Radii of circular ends of frustum cone are 33 and 27cm
r1 33cm ; r2 27cm.
Total surface area of a solid frustum of cone
r1 r2 l r12 r22
33 27 10 33 27
2 2
60 10 33 27
2 2
7599 42cm2
Total surface area of frustum cone 7599 42cm2
15. A bucket made up of a metal sheet is in form of a frustum of cone of height 16cm with
diameters of its lower and upper ends as 16cm and 40cm. find thee volume of bucket. Also
find cost of bucket if the cost of metal sheet used is Rs 20 per 100 cm2
Sol:
Given height off frustum cone 16cm
Diameter of lower end of bucket d1 16cm
16
Lower and radius r1 8cm
2
40
Upper and radius r2 20cm
2
Let ‘l’ be slant height of frustum of cone
l r1 r2 h2
2
l 20 8 162
2
l 144 256
l 20cm
Slant height of frustum cone l 20cm.
1
Volume of frustum cone r12 r22 r1r2 h
3
1
82 202 8 20 16
3
1
9984
3
Volume 10449 92cm3
Curved surface area of frustum cone
r1 r2 l r22
20 8 20 8
2
16. A solid is in the shape of a frustum of a cone. The diameter of two circular ends are 60cm
and 36cm and height is 9cm. find area of its whole surface and volume?
Sol:
Given height of a frustum cone = 9cm
60
Lower end radius r1 cm 30cm
2
36
Upper end radius r2 cm 18cm
2
Let slant height of frustum cone be l
l r1 r2 h2
2
l 8 30 92
2
l 144 81
l 15cm
1
Volume of frustum cone r12 r22 r1r2 h
3
1
302 182 30 18 9
3
5292 cm3
Volume 5292 cm3
Total surface area of frustum cone =
r1 r2 l r12 r22
30 18 15 30 18
2 2
48 15 30 18
2 2
720 900 324
1944 cm2
Total surface area 1944 cm2
17. A milk container is made of metal sheet in the shape of frustum of a cone whose volume is
3
10459 cm3 . The radii of its lower and upper circular ends are 8cm and 20cm. find the
7
cost of metal sheet used in making container at rate of Rs 1 4 per cm 2 ?
Sol:
Given lower end radius of bucket r1 8cm
Upper end radius of bucket
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths
3
Volume of milk container 10459 cm3
4
73216 3
V2 cm ……….(2)
7
Equating (1) and (2)
V1 V2
1
82 202 8 20 h
3
73216
7
10459 42
h
653 45
h 16cm
Height of frustum cone h 16cm
Let slant height of frustum cone be ‘l’
l r1 r2 h2
2
l 20cm
Slant height of frustum cone l 20cm
Total surface area of frustum cone
r1 r2 l r22 r12
20 8 20 20 8
2 2
560 400 64
960 64 1024 3216 99cm2
Total surface area 3216 99cm2